\i 


LIBRARY 

CMiMWU 


XDOCAT 101  IIBBr 


/h  6.    Tfctfevma* 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER; 


A  PKACTICAL  METHOD 


OF  LEARNING 


THE  SPANISH  LANGUAGE 


ON  OLLENDOEFFS  SYSTEM. 


FRANCISCO   J.  VINGUT. 


CONTAINING  : 

PS.1CTICAL    EXERCISES— CONVERSATIONAL    EXERCISES— A    SYNOPSIS    OF    THE    SPANKO 

GRAMMAR— DIALOGUES— PROVERBS— IDIOMS— MERCANTILE 

VOCABULARY— CORRESPONDENCE,   ETC.,  ETC. 


NEW   EDITION,    CORRECTED    AND    ENLARGED    BY 

LUIS  F.  MANTILLA, 

KlOr.  OP  THE  SPANISH  LANGUAGE  AND   LITERATURE  IN  THE  UNIVERSITY  Off 
NEW  YORK. 


NEW  YOKK : 

GEORGE   E.    LOCKVOOD, 
No.   812  Broadway. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1871,  by 

GEORGE  R.  LOCKWOOD, 

in  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress  at  Washington. 

SPANISH   BOOKS 

PUBLISHED  BY 

GEORGE  R.  LOCKWOOD. 

■WITH  PRICES  IN  CURRENCY. 

II»H 

VINGUT.     The  Spanish  Teacheb.    12mo $2  25 

Key  to  do 1  00 

Spanish  Readeb  and  Tbanslatob.     12mo 1  50 

DEL  MAR.    A  Guide  to  Spanish  Convebsation.     12hio 1  25 

ROBERTSON.     Complete  Spanish  Coubse.     12mo 1  75 

SALES'  JOSSE'S  Spanish  Gbammab.     12mo 2  00 

GRAMATICA  de  la  Academia  espanola.     12iiio 1  25 

CARTILLA  o  Silababio.     (Spanish  Primer.)    18mo 25 

CUENTOS  Familiabes.     (Familiar  Stories.     18mo 75 

For  Spaniards  Learning  English  and  French,  or 
French  Learning  Spanish. 

VINGUT.     El  Maesteo  de  Ingles.     12mo 2  25 

Clave  del  Maestbo  de  Ingles 1  00 

El  Pbeceptob  Ingles  elemental.     12mo 1  50 

Clave  del  Pbeceptob  elemental 75 

£l  Maestbo  de  Feances.     12mo 9  25 

Clave  del  Maestbo  de  Feances 1  00 

Le  Maitbe  d'Espagnol.     12mo 2  25 

COBBIGE   DU   MAITRE   D'ESPAGNOL 1    00 

DEL  MAR.     La  Guia^paba  la  Conversacion  en  Ingles     12mo  1  25 

VINGUT.     Lectob  y  Teaductob  Ingles.      12mo 1  50 

LECTURAS  INGLESAS  Escogidas,  con  Vocabulario 2  00 


A  Catalogue,  with  prices  of  Spanish  books  imported  from  Paris, 
Madrid,  Barcelona,  etc.,  will  be  sent  on  application. 


Us 

INTRODUCTION. 


ill 


My  system  of  acquiring  a  living  language  is  founded  on 
the  principle,  that  each  question  contains  in  itself  nearly 
the  answer  which  should  be  made  to  it.  The  slight  differ- 
ence between  the  question  and  the  answer  is  always  ex- 
plained before  the  question ;  so  that  the  learner  does  not 
find  it  in  the  least  difficult,  either  to  answer  it,  or  to  make 
similar  questions  for  himself.  Again,  the  question  being 
the  same  as  the  answer,  as  soon  as  pronounced  by  the 
teacher,  it  strikes  the  ear  of  the  pupil,  and  is  therefore 
easily  reproduced  by  his  vocal  organs.  This  principle  is 
so  evident,  that  it  is  impossible  to  open  the  book  without 
being  struck  by  it. 

Neither  the  professor  nor  his  pupils  lose  an  instant  of 
their  time.  When  the  professor  reads  the  lesson,  the  pupil 
answers  ;  when  he  examines  the  lesson  written  by  the  pupil, 
he  speaks  again,  and  the  pupil  answers ;  also  when  he  ex- 
amines the  exercise  which  the  pupil  has  translated,  he 
speaks  and  the  pupil  answers  :  thus  both  are,  as  it  were, 
continually  kept  in  exercise. 

The  phrases  are  so  arranged  that,  from  the  beginning  to 
the  end,  the  pupil's  curiosity  is  excited  by  the  want  of  a 
word  or  an  expression :  this  word  or  expression  is  always 
given  in  the  following  lesson,  but  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
create  a  desire  for  others  that  would  render  the  phrase  more 
complete.  Hence,  the  pupil's  attention  is  continually  kept 
alive,  till  at  last  he  has  acquired  a  thorough  knowledge  of 
the  language  he  is  studying. — (Extract  from  Ollendorff.) 

193 


PREFACE. 


The  plan  pursued  in  the  present  work  is  substantially  the 
same  as  that  explained  above,  excepting  some  slight  altera- 
tions in  the  arrangement  of  the  lessons  which,  from  my  own 
experience,  I  have  deemed  indispensable  to  avoid  many 
tedious  repetitions  which  were  necessary  in  the  original 
system.  The  superiority  of  Ollendorff's  method  is  now  so 
readily  and  universally  acknowledged,  that  I  deem  it  un- 
necessary to  set  forth  its  peculiar  merits  at  length,  or  by 
comparisons  derogatory  to  others. 

The  Spanish  language  is  now  spoken  by  so  many  on  this 
Continent,  with  whom  we  are  yearly  becoming  more  closely 
connected  in  business  and  political  relations,  that  a  know- 
ledge of  it  is  becoming  more  and  more  indispensable  ;  and  I 
shall  be  happy  if  I  can  contribute  in  any  way  by  the  publi- 
cation of  this  volume  to  extend  that  knowledge. 

Francisco  J.  Vingut. 


EDITOR'S  PREFACE  TO  REVISED  EDITION. 

In  the  publication  of  this  revised  and  improved  edition 
of  Vingut's  Spanish  Teacher  a  debt  due  to  the  public  for 
its  appreciation  of  it  for  many  years  has  been  paid. 

The  advantages  over  previous  editions  consist  in  part  in 
its  more  methodical  arrangement,  corrections  of  typograph- 
ical errors,  enlargement  of  the  theoretical  part,  a  mercan- 
tile vocabulary  and  correspondence,  and  a  collection  of  dia- 
logues, which  altogether  make  the  book  valuable  not  only  to 
those  studying  the  language  grammatically,  but  to  those  who 
wish  to  acquire  a  practical  knowledge  of  it  for  mercantile 
purposes. 

The  Editor. 

New  Yokk,  July  1,  1871. 


EXERCISE  ON  PRONUNCIATION. 

(a  figured  pronunciation  is  given  below  each  line,.* 


MO-KAL  CRIS-TI-A-NA. 

MO-BAL    CBEES-TE-AH-NA. 

Mo-ral  Cris-ti-a-na  es  la  ci-en-ci-a  que  di-ri-je  las  ac-ci- 

Mo-rdl  Orees-tee-dh-na  ess  la  lhee-din-thee<ih  kay  dee-rie-hay  las  ac-thee- 
o-nes  pro-pi-as  del  hom-bre  se-gun  la  re-li-ji-on  de  Je-su- 
6h-nais  pro-pee-ass  dell    6?n-bray  sai-ydon  la  rai-lee-hee-6n  day  Hai-soo- 

cris-to. 

crces-io. 

El  ob-je-to  de  la  mo-ral  cris-ti-a-na  es  mos-trar  al  hom-bre 
Ml  ob-hdi-to  day  la   mo-rdl  crees-tee-dh-na  ess  mos-trdrr  al    6m -bray 

la  con-for-mi-dad  de  sus  ac-ci-o-nes  con  la  ley.  y  pre-ca-ver 

la   con-for-mee-ddd  day  soos  ac-thee-6h-nais  con  la  lai-ee,  e  pral-kah-vdir 

6  cor-re-jir  el  de-sor-den  de  e-llas. 

6    cor-rai-heer  el  dai-sor-dain  day  ell-yass. 

Es-ta    ci-en-ci-a  es  con-for-me  con  los  sen-ti-mi-en-tos  y 
£ss-ta  thee-din-lhee-ah  ess  con -for -may  con  los  sain-tee-mee-din-tos  e 

a-fec-tos  del  hom-bre  en  to-do  lo  que  le  con-vi-e-ne,  mas  no 

ahjdic-tos  dell    6m -bray   en    t6-do    lo   kay  lay  con-vee-di-nay,  mass  no 

si   em-pre  con  lo  que  de-se-a. 

see-dim-pray  con   lo  kay  dai-sdi-ah. 

Es  con-for-me  en  to-do  con  lo  que  con-vi-e-ne  al  hom-bre, 
Ess  con-f&r-may  en   id-do    con  lo    kay   con-vee-di-naval    6m -bray, 

por-que  to-das  sus  re-glas  y  mac-si-mas  se   en-ca-mi-nan  a 

por-kay   to  das s  soos  rdi-glass  e   mdc-see-mass  say  en-kah-m6e-nan  ah 

ha-cer-le  bi-en-a-ven-tu-ra-do. 

ah-tMir-laybee-din-ah-vain-too-rdh-do. 

*  This  Exercise  will  enable  the  scholar  to  know  all  the  sounds  of  th* 
Spanish  pronunciation. 


6  EXERCISE   ON  PRONUNCIATION. 

No  es  si-em-pre  con-for-me  con  lo  que  de-se-a,  por-que 
No  ess  see-dim-pray    con-for-may   con    lo    kay  dai-sdi-ah,  por  -  kay 

nu-es-tra  na-tu-ra-le-za   vi-ci-a-da  por  el  pe-ca-do  o-ri-ji- 
noo-dis-tra  nah-too-rah-ldi-tha  vee-thee-dh-da  por  ell  pai-kdh-do  oh-ree-hee- 

nal,  se  in-cli-na  al  que-bran-ta-mi-en-to  de  la  Ley. 
ndl,  say  in-clie-na  al   Jcai -bran -tah-mee-din-lo  day  la  Ldi-ee. 

Es-ta  ci-en-ci-a  no  es  con-tra-ri-a   a   la   ra-zon,  an-tes 
Es-ta  thee-din-thee-ah  no  ess  con-trdfi-ree-ah  ah  la    rah-thon,    dn-tais 

bi-en  es   con-for-me   a  los  in-ti-mos   sen-ti-mi-en-tos  del 
bee-din  ess    con-for-may  ah  los    ien-tee-mos    sain-tee-mee-din-tos     dell 

hom-bre,  ins-pi-ra-dos  por  la  Ley  na-tu-ral. 
6m  -  bray,  inss-pee-rdh-dos    por  la  Ldi-ee  nah-too-rdl. 

Por  me-dio   de  es-ta   ci-en-cia     a-pren-de-mo3  el    ca- 
Por  mdi-dee-oh  de   6s -ta  thee-din-thee-ah  ah-prain-ddi-mos     ell    kah- 

mi-no  de   ser  fe-li-zes  en  es-ta  vi-da   pre-sen-te,   y  en  la 
mie-no  day  sair  fai-Ue-thais  en  iss-ta  vie-da  prai-sdin-tay,    e    en    la 

ve-ni-de  -  ra. 

vai-nee-ddi-rah. 

El  cum-pli-mi-en-to  de  nu-es-tras  o-bli-ga-ci-o-nes,  se- 
El  koom-plee-mee-din-to  day  noo-dis-lrass  oh-blee-gah-thee-6h-nais,  sai- 

gun  los  vin-cu-los  que  nos  u-nen  con  Dios,  con  no-so-tros 
goon    los  vien-koo-los  kay  nos  6o-nain    con  Bee-dss,  con    no-sd-tros 

mis-mos  y  con  los  de-mas  hom-bres,  nos  ha-ce  dig-nos  de 
mies-mos    e    con    los   dai-mdss    &m-braiss,  nos   dh-lhay  dieg-nos   day 

Di-os. 
Det-6sM. 


PRONUNCIATION  AND  ACCENTUATION. 

The  Spanish  Alphabet  is  composed  of  the  following  chap« 
acters  : 


A, 

B, 

o, 

Ch, 

D, 

E, 

F, 

Names — ah, 

bay, 

thay, 

chay, 

day, 

a, 

aiffay, 

G, 

H, 

i, 

J, 

L, 

U$ 

M, 

bay, 

atchay, 

et 

hdttah, 

ailay, 

ailyeay, 

aimay, 

N, 

N, 

o, 

p, 

Q, 

b, 

Br, 

ainay, 

ain-neay, 

o, 

pay. 

koo, 

airay, 

air-ray, 

l°8' 

T, 

II, 

v, 

x, 

% 

z. 

aissay, 

tay, 

oo, 

vay 

aikeys, 

e,* 

thai-tali. 

Observation. — In  Spanish  each  letter  represents  a  pecu- 
liar and  distinct  sound  ;  consequently  there  is  not,  as  in 
English  and  in  French,  a  letter  without  sound  and  a  sound 
without  a  letter,  but  every  letter  must  be  pronounced 
clearly  and  distinctly. 

VOWELS. 

a,      e,      i,      o,      u, 
Their  sounds,         ah,     a,       i,       o,      oo, 

Vowels,  in  Spanish,  always  preserve  the  same  sound. 
I3ut,  in  the  syllables  que,  qui,  gue,  gui,  the  u  is  not  sounded, 
except  when  gue,  gui  have  a  diaeresis  on  the  ut  thus  :gue, 
gui. 

*  The  y  is  pronounced  e  like  the  Spanish  i,  but  is  denominated 
et-gree-diyah. 


8  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

CONSONANTS. 

[A  figured  pronunciation  is  given  below  each  combination.] 

B. 

B,  is  pronounced  as  in  English. 

ba,       be,      bi,       bo,       bu. 
bah,    bay,   bee,    boh,    boo. 

The  B  is  used  in  sound  with  all  the  five  vowels,  as  in 
balanza,  balance  ;  belleza,  beauty  ;  bigamia,  bigamy  ;  borrico, 
jackass  ;  bullicioso,  noisy  :  and,  with  the  letters  I  and  r  inter- 
posed, the  b  must  always  be  written,  as  in  bloqueo,  blockade  ; 
bianco,  white  ;  bravo,  brave ;  bramar,  to  roar  :  also  at  the 
end  of  a  syllable,  as  in  absolver,  to  absolve  ;  obtener,  to  obtain, 
objeto,  an  object ;  subdito,  a  subject ;  substantia,  substance  ; 
although  in  some  of  these  words,  as  well  as  in  others  like 
them,  the  b  is  suppressed  to  soften  the  pronunciation,  as 
several  classic  writers  of  the  sixteenth  century,  and  some 
more  modern  ones,  write  oscuro  instead  of  obscuro,  obscure  ; 
sustancia,  instead  of  substantia,  substance,  &c. 

In  order  to  know  the  proper  use  of  this  letter  and  to 
avoid  mistakes,  the  following  rules  are  adopted  by  the 
Spanish  Royal  Academy  : 

Rale  1.- — Write  with  a  b  all  the  words  which  have  it  in 
the  original,  as  beber,  to  drink,  from  the  Latin  bibere  ;  escri- 
Mr,  to  write,  from  the  Latin  scribere. 

Rule  2. — B  is  generally  used  before  consonants,  and  before 
the  vowel  u,  as  in  buey,  an  ox  ;  buitre,  a  vulture  :  but  most 
commonly  before  I  and  r,  as  they  follow  in  all  the  combina- 
tions of  bla,  ble,  bli,  blo,  blu  ;  bra,  bre,  bri,  bro,  bru. 

Rule  3. — In  the  tenses  of  the  verb  haber,  to  have,  the  b 
must  be  used,  as  in  habria,  I  would  have  ;  hubo,  he  had ; 
hubiese,  I  should  have  :  and  also  in  the  syllable  ba  of  the 
Imperfect  tense  of  verbs  of  the  First  Conjugation,  as  amaba, 
I  loved  ;  bvscaba,  I  looked  for  ;  and  the  syllables  ab,  ob,  sub, 
as  in  absolver,  to  absolve  ;  oblener,  to  obtain  ;  subrvgar,  to 
dej3utize,  to  surrogate. 

Rule  4. — The  p,  which  is  in  some  words  derived  from  the 
Latin  or  the  Greek,  is  commonly  translated  into  b,  as  obixpo, 
bishop,  from  episcopus  ;  cabello,  hair,  from  capillus. 


PRONUNCIATION  AND   ACCENTUATION.  9 

Bale  5. — Although  some  words  are  written  with  v  in  their 
original,  the  custom  of  writing  them  with  b  is  common  and 
constant ;  as  abogado,  a  lawyer  ;  baluarte,  a  bulwark  ;  borla, 
a  tassel ;  builre,  a  vulture  :  and  those  of  known  original,  or 
of  various  use,  should  always  be  written  with  a  b  in  prefer- 
ence to  a  v,  as  in  ballena,  a  whale  ;  besugo,  a  fish. 

C. 

C,  before  e,  i,  is  pronounced  as  th  in  thank,  think  ;  before 
a,  o,  u,  like  k. 

ca,        ce,        ci,        co,        cu. 
kah,     thay,    thee,      ko,       koo. 

The  syllables  ce,  ci,  can  also  be  written  ze,  zi,  both  sounds 
being  exactly  the  same. 

With  regard  to  the  sound  of  c,  before  e  or  i,  as  well  as 
that  of  z,  it  must  be  observed  that  it  is  not  universal.  In 
some  provinces  of  Spain,  as  for  instance,  Galicia,  Estrema- 
dura,  Asturias,  and  in  all  South  America,  people  generally 
sound  c  and  z  as  s,  in  the  English  words  set,  seat.  The  An- 
dalusians  give  them  a  kind  of  lisp,  and  sound  them  with 
some  affectation.  It  is  in  Old  and  New  Castile  alone,  that 
it  is  generally  given  to  these  letters  the  sound  of  th.  But, 
as  the  most  erudite  people  of  all  the  provinces,  both  of  Old 
and  New  Spain,  sound  the  c  and  z  in  the  manner  that  is 
done  by  the  Castilians  ;  as  no  rules  of  the  Spanish  Academy 
at  Madrid  are  more  strongly  inculcated  than  those  relative 
to  the  proper  sounding  of  these  letters,  and  as  this  sound, 
according  to  our  opinion,  is  the  most  compatible  with  the 
genius  of  the  Spanish  language,  we  have  no  hesitation  in 
saying  that  those  who  wish  to  speak  the  Spanish  with  purity 
Bhould  adopt  this  manner  of  pronouncing  the  c  and  z. 

Cli. 

Ch,  as  ch,  in  the  English  words  charity,  church. 

cha,        che,        chi,        cho,        chni. 
chah,     chay,      chee,      cho,        choo. 


10  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

D. 

D,  is  pronounced  as  in  the  English  word  dell, 
da,         de,         di,         do,        du> 
dah,      day,      dee,       doh,      doo. 

The  sound  of  d  and  t  is  not  exactly  the  same  in  English 
as  in  Spanish  ;  there  is  a  difference,  which,  although  trifling 
in  itself,  is  very  perceptible,  and  therefore  should  be  noticed. 
It  will  be  observed  tha«t  in  speaking  the  English,  the  sound 
of  d  and  t  is  formed  by  striking  the  end  of  the  tongue 
against  the  roof  of  the  mouth.  In  Spanish  the  tongue  is 
used  in  the  same  manner,  but,  instead  of  striking  the  roof 
of  the  mouth,  it  strikes  the  upper  teeth  ;  the  d,  therefore, 
uttered  after  the  Spanish  manner,  is  pronounced  as  in  the 
English  word  dell. 


F. 


F,  sounds  as  in  English. 


fa,        fe,        A       fo,       fu. 
fah,       fe,        fee,      fo,        foo. 

G. 

G,  before  e,  i,  is  pronounced  like  h  in  hen,  hill ;  in  every 
other  case  as  in  gap. 

ga,         ge,        gi,         go,         gu. 
gah,      hay,      hee,      go,        goo. 

The  G  is  a  palatal  or  guttural  consonant,  and  in  Spanish 
nas  two  distinct  sounds  in  pronunciation,  as  happens  to 
the  c ;  the  soft  and  smooth,  as  when  it  coalesces  with  the 
vowels  a,  o,  u,  as  in  the  words  gana,  appetite  ;  gota,  a  drop  : 
gusto,  taste  :  and  also  when  the  u  interposes  between  it  and 
e  or  it  syncopating  or  destroying  its  sound,  as  is  shown  in 
the  words  guerra,  war ;  guia,  guide ;  and  this  is  its  most 
common  pronunciation. 

When  the  u  preserves  all  its  sound  after  the  g,  as  in  the 
words  aguero,  omen;  verguenza,  shame;  arguii,  to  argue  ; 


PRONUNCIATION  AND  ACCENTUATION.  11 

to  distinguish  its  pronunciation  from  the  other  and  more 
frequent  sound,  we  place  two  dots,  or  a  diaeresis,  over  the  u, 
as  we  have  already  written  in  the  above  examples. 

The  syllabes  ge,  gi,  can  be  written  with  as  much  justice 
to  sound  with  a  g  as  with  a  j. 

H. 

H,  always  mute. 

ha,        he,        hi,        ho,        hu. 
ah,         ai,        ee,        oh,         oo. 

This  letter  has  no  sound  before  a  vowel  but  when  com- 
bined with  c.     See  CH. 

The  F  in  many  words  from  the  Latin,  and  in  the  ancient 
Spanish  language,  is  now  converted  into  h,  as  hacer,  to  do, 
from  facere;  hijo,  a  son,  instead  of  fijo,  from  filius.  To 
distinguish  these  cases,  and  to  furnish  rules  in  writing  for 
correctly  using  the  h,  the  following  are  established  : 

Rule  1. — The  h  must  be  used  in  all  those  words  whose 
original  etymology  has  it ;  as  hombre,  a  man  ;  honra,  honor, 
hora,  an  hour. 

Rule  2. — When  the  word  begins  with  the  syllable  ue,  it 
always  has  an  h  before  it,  as  in  huevo,  an  egg  ;  hueso,  bone ; 
huerta,  a  garden. 

Rule  8. — We  must  also  write  with  an  h,  all  those  words 
which  in  their  origin,  and  from  ancient  usage,  have  been 
spelled  with  an  f,  as  hacer,  to  do,  from  facere  ;  higo,  a  fig, 
from  feus  ;  hijo,  »on,  from  flius,  and  the  ancient  Spanish 
fijo,  hierro,  irowferrum  and  the  ancient  Spanish  fierro,  iron. 

J. 

J,  is  pronounced  always  as  h  in  the  English  words  hill, 
hall,  hand,  that  is  the  same  as  the  g  with  e,  i,  in  Spanish. 

ja,        Je>        jh        jo,        ju. 
hah,     hay,     hee,     ho,       hoo. 

L. 

L,  sounds  as  in  English. 

la,         le,         li,         lo,        lu. 
lab,      lay,      lee,      loh,      loo. 


12  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Id. 


LI,  as  Hi  in  William. 

lla,        lie, 

Hi, 

llo, 

llu. 

lliah,     lliay, 

lliee, 

Uio, 

llioo. 

M,  N,  P. 

These  letters  are  pronounced  as  in  English. 

In  Spanish  no  syllable  or  word  ends  in  m,  except  before 
a  6  or  a  p ;  when  we  must  write  an  m,  as  in  the  worda 
ambos,  both  ;  imperial,  imperial  ;  for  in  such  words,  the  m 
occ.urs  in  the  same  manner  as  in  Latin,  from  which  language 
we  have  obtained  the  rule  for  its  pronunciation. 

N. 
N,  as  in  onion  in  English,  or  gn  in  French. 
ha,         he,         hi,         ho,         hu. 
niah,     niay,     niee,     nio,       nioo. 

Q. 

Q.  This  letter  is  used  now  only  in  the  syllables  que,  quu 
where  the  u  is  not  sounded. 

que,         qui. 
kay,        key. 

The  q  is  used,  in  Spanish,  when  it  is  followed  "by  a  u  and 
this  vowel  is  not  pronounced  ;  but  when  the  u  is  sounded, 
we  always  use  the  c,  for  which  reason  we  may  adopt  the 
following  rules  of  the  Spanish  Academy. 

Bute  1. — We  must  always  use  the  c  instead  of  q,  in  such 
words  as  cual,  which,  instead  of  qual ;  cuanlo,  how  much, 
instead  of  quanto,  &c,  because  the  u  is  sounded. 

Rule  2. — We  must  not  use  the  c  in  those  words  which 
suffer  an  elision  of  the  u,  or  in  which  the  u  is  not  sounded, 
as  occurs  in  the  combination  que,  qui,  in  the  words  queridt% 
beloved  ;  quinto,  fifth. 

R. 

It.  has  two  pronunciations  :  one  soft,  signified  by  a  single 
r,  and  sounds  as  in  bar,  card  ;  the  other  sound  is  hard,  as  in 


PRONUNCIATION   AND  ACCENTUATION.  13 

rage,  river,  Borne,  and  is  signified  by  rr ;  except  in  these 
cases  : — 1st.  In  the  ^beginning  of  a  word  it  should  always 
be  single  and  pronounced  as  double.  2d.  When  the  conso- 
nants/,  n,  s,  are  before  r,  either  in  the  simple  or  in  the  com- 
pound word,  this  letter  must  never  be  doubled,  and  nevei*- 
theless  it  ought  to  be  pronounced  hard,  as  in  malrotar,  to 
destroy ;  enriquecer,  to  grow  rich ;  honra,  honor.  3d. 
In  the  compounds  of  two  nouns,  or  of  one  noun,  or  verb, 
and  the  preposition  pre  or  pro  ;  the  r  is  likewise  single  in 
the  second  part  of  the  compound,  though  its  sound  is  hard, 
as  in  manirolo,  cariredondo,  prerogative  prorogar. 

S. 

S,  is  always  pronounced  strongly,  as  in  six. 

sa,        se,        si,        so,        su. 
sah,      say,      see,       so,        soo. 

In  Spanish,  there  is  no  word  which  begins  with  I  followed 
by  a  consonant ;  for  which  reason,  although  anciently  fol- 
lowing the  Latin  origin  the  liquid  s  was  used,  it  has  since 
been  suppressed  and  the  spelling  made  to  correspond  with 
the  Castilian  pronunciation,  for  its  smoothness  does  not 
allow  of  any  middle  or  hissing  sound  that  requires  the  liquid 
s ;  and  thus  from  the  Latin  words  scientia,  science,  sceplrum, 
sceptre,  we  derive  the  Spanish  words  ciencia,  cetro ;  to 
other  words  we  add  an  e  before  their  Latin  original  s,  to 
pronounce  it  with  greater  facility,  as  in  estudiar,  to  study, 
from  studere  ;  escribir,  to  write,  from  scribere. 

T. 

T,  as  in  temerity,  see  letter  D. 

ta,        te,        ti,        to,        tu. 
tah,     tay,     tee,      to,        too. 

V. 

The  distinction  between  the  sound  of  this  lettei  &nd  the 
letter  b  has  been  lately  abolished. 


14  THE   SPANISH   TEACHEK. 

To  distinguish  them  in  writing,  the  following  rules  must 
be  followed. 

Rule  1, — The  consonant  v  forms  a  syllable  with  its  conse- 
quent vowel,  as  in  valentia,  bravery  ;  velo,  a  veil  ;  vitlano,  a 
villain  ;  voraz,  voracious  ;  vulgar,  vulgar. 

Rule  2. — All  words  having  a  v  in  their  originals,  as  valer, 
to  be  worth  ;  velar,  to  watch  ;  vil,  vile  ;  voluntad,  will ;  vuelo, 
flight  ;  and  their  derivatives,  ought  to  be  written  with  a  v. 

Rule  3. — We  must  also  write  with  a  v  the  terminations  of 
nouns  ending  in  ava,  ave,  avo,  iva,  ivo,  and  their  derivatives, 
as  octavo,  eighth  ;  suave,  soft  ;  dozavo,  a  twelfth  part ;  comi- 
tiva,  suite  ;  motivo,  motive  ;  pensativo,  thoughtful ;  donativo, 
donative  ;  espectativa,  expectation. 

Rule  4. — The  v  is  also  preserved  in  words  proper  to  the 
language,  which  from  a  long  and  constant .  use  are  written 
with  it ;  for  instance,  vihuela,  a  guitar  ;  aleve,  treacherous ; 
atreverse,  to  venture,  to  dare,  and  their  derivatives. 

With  these  rules,  and  those  which  are  established  for  the 
letter  b,  there  can  remain  but  few  doubtful  cases. 

X. 

X.  This  letter  has  now  very  little  use  in  Spanish,  being 
supplied  by  j  and  8.  In  those  words  where  retained,  it  is 
pronounced  as  in  English. 

xa,        xe,        xi,        xo,        xu. 

xah,  xay,  xee,  xo,  xoo. 
For  the  easy  transition  and  commutation  of  the  x  into  s, 
we  can  use  the  latter,  whenever  it  is  followed  by  a  conso- 
nant, as  in  estranjero,  a  stranger,  instead  of  extrangero,  &c, 
both  to  make  the  pronunciation  more  soft  and  smooth,  and 
to  avoid  a  certain  affectation  with  which  the  x  would  be 
pronounced  in  these  cases. 

Y. 

Y,  when  it  stands  alone,  in  which  case  it  is  a  Conjunction, 
meaning  and,  and  when  a  vowel,  is  pronounced  as  the  Span- 
ish i ;  in  any  other  case,  as  in  the  English  words  yesterday, 
year. 

ya,        ye,        yo        yu. 
yah,       yay      yoh,     yoo. 


PRONUNCIATION  AND  ACCENTUATION.  15 

It  is  usual  to  make  it  perform  the  function  of  a  vowel 
•whenever  i  terminates  a  word  without  an  acute  accent,  as 
in  rey,  king;  ley,  law  ;  hay,  there  is  ;  muy,  very  ;  eMoy,  I 
am  ;  and  also  whenever  it  is  a  conjunctive  conjunction,  as 
in  Juan  y  Pedro,  John  and  Peter  ;  mar  y  tierra,  sea  and 
land.  To  distinguish  these  cases  we  must  observe  the  fol- 
lowing rules  : 

Rule  1. — The  y  performs  the  proper  function  of  a  conso- 
nant in  all  words  where  it  comes  before  a  vowel,  as  in  ensa- 
yar,  to  essay  ;  yerro,  error  ;  rayo,  ray  ;  ensayo,  a  trial ;  ayu- 
nar,  to  fast. 

Rule  2. — The  y  occupies  the  place  of  the  vowel  i,  in  those 
words  which  terminate  in  i  without  the  acute  accent,  as  in 
hay,  there  is  ;  ley,  law  ;  rey,  king ;  doy,  I  give  ;  estoy,  I  am  ; 
muy,  very,  &c. ;  but  whenever  the  word  terminates  with  an 
acute  accent  ( ' )  on  the  i,  the  vowel  %  must  be  retained,  as  in 
maravedi,  an  imaginary  coin ;  aleli,  a  gilliflower,  &c. ;  and 
in  the  Preterite  Perfect  of  some  verbs  of  the  2d.  and  3d. 
Conjugations,  as  rei,  I  laughed  ;  lei,  I  read ;  cai,  I  fell ;  vi,  I 
saw ;  oi,  I  heard  ;  escribi,  I  wrote. 


Z.  The  sound  of  z,  before  all  vowels,  and  at  the  end  oi 
words,  is  like  that  of  th  in  its  sharp  pronunciation,  ae  in 
thought,  throne,  death,  breath. 

za,        ze,         zi,        zo,        zu. 
thah,    thay,    thee,    thoh,    thoo. 

See  letter  G. 


DIPHTHONGS  AND  TRIPHTHONGS. 

When  in  the  same  syllable  two  vowels  come  together, 
they  are  called  a  diphthong ;  and  when  three,  a  triphthong. 

The  sounds  that  in  English  are  given  to  the  vowels  m 
the  following  words,  will  be  regarded  as  a  guide  to  render 
the  Spanish  pronunciation  of  the  vowels  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  and 


16  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

the  yt  which  also  is  considered  one  when  it  stands  alone  gj? 
at  the  end  of  a  syllable.  By  means  of  this,  we  shall,  at 
once,  be  able  to  fix  the  sound  of  the  Spanish  diphthongs 
and  triphthongs. 

1  2  3  4  6 

Fat,     met,    pin,     no,     foot. 

DIPHTHONGS. 


1 


13  q  32 

ai,  as  in  amai's,  ye  love.         y  ie,  as  in  cielo,  heaven. 

13  i  35 

ay,    "    hay,  there  is  or  are.  1U  iu,      u    ctwdad,  city, 


15  42 

*     au,         causa,,  cause.  **     oe,      M    heroe,  hero. 

/   23  /   43 

ei,  "    tenets,  ye  have.       1 0  J  ot,     "    sots,  ye  are. 


( ey,     "    rey,  king.  ( oy,    "    doy,  I  give. 

A        21  1Q        51 

4     ea,     "    sea,  let  it  be.  1»     wa,  "    fragwa,  fodge. 


24  -  .         62 


*     eo,      "    virjineo,  virginal.  1^    ue,    "    hwevo,  egg. 


6    eu,     "    dcuda,  debt.  Kjm*,    "    cmdado,  care. 

7 


15 


(53. 

)ui, 

I"3 


ta,  gracta,  grace,  {w?/,    "    mwv,  very. 

8    ie,      "    bien,  well.  ■*•"     uo,   "    ardwo,  arduous. 

TRIPHTHONGS. 


*  iai,   as  in  tenmts,  ye  had. 

*  iei,        "    lidieis,  ye  may  contend. 

/    513 

o  J  uni,      "    santigwats,  you  bless. 
(  way,      "    Paraguay,  Paraguay. 

523 

uei,      "  averigiieis,  you  may  search 

523 


uey,      "    huey,  ox. 

"Whenever  any  of  the  vowels  of  the  dipthongs  are  accent- 
ed, they  cease  to  be  diphthongs,  because  each  vowel  belongs 


PRONUNCIATION  AND  ACCENTUATION.  17 

then  to  a  separate  syllable  ;   as,  lei,  brio ;  le-i,  bri-o,  pro- 
nounced lai-ee,  bree-oh. 


WORDS  SIMILAR   IN  SOUND,  BUT  DIFFERENT    IN  SPELIINt*. 

/  Ay  !  Alas  !  Ha.  He  has. 

Hay.  There  is  or  are.  A.  To. 

Deshojar.  To  deprive  of  leaves.  Halon.  A  halloo. 

Desojar.  To  deprive  of  eyes.  Alon.  A  pinion. 

Jlasta.  Until.  He.  I  have. 

Asia.  A  haft.  R  And. 

TT         )  A  beach  tree,  and  the  P.  Hetica.  A  phthysis. 

liaya'  \    subj.  of  the  verb  Haber.  Eiica.  Ethics. 

Ay  a.  A  governess.  H'da.  A  brad  nail. 

Herrar.  To  shoe  horses.  Ita.  Eta. 

Errar.  To  err.  /  Hola  I  Hulloo  ! 

Hierro.  Iron.  Ola.  A  wave. 

Yerro.  Error.  Hondas.  Slings. 

jr  .  j  To  turn  over  the  leaves  Ondas.  Billows. 

aojear.    -j    ofabook.  jIus0m  a  spindle. 

Ojear.  To  start  game.  Uso.  Usage. 


DIVISION  OF  WOKDS  INTO  SYLLABLES. 

Compound  words  are  to  be  divided  into  their  component 
parts  ;  as,  ab-negacion,  con-cavidod,  pre-dmbuto,  mai-rotar. 

When  the  second  component  part  of  a  word  begins  with 
s,  followed  by  another  consonant,  the  6  belongs  to  the  first 
part  ;  as,  cons-truir,  ins-pirar,  jiers-picaz. 

Two  vowels  coming  together  must  be  parted  ;  as,  Sa- 
avedra,  le-er,  pi-isimo,  co-operar. 

A  consonant  coming  between  two  vowels  belongs  to  the 
Towel  by  which  it  is  followed  :  as,  a-mor, pe-na,  le-che*  ga-Ilo. 

Two  consonants  coming  between  two  vowels  are  divided  ; 
as,  cl-zar,  can- tor,  mdr-tir. 

But  should  the  first  consonant  be  the  semi-vowel/' or  any 
of  the  mutes,  and  the  second  /,  or  r,  both  the  consonauts 

(*)  Ch  and  Q  are  deemed  only  single  consonants. 


18  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

are  then  joined  to  the  tow  el  by  which  they  are  followed  ; 
as,  la-bla,  co-bre,  la-cre. 

Except,  at-leta  and  at-lante. 

Where  8  is  preceded  by  b,  I,  m,  n,  or  r,  and  followed  by 
another  consonant  at  the  same  time,  s  must  be  joined  to  the 
consonant  by  which  it  is  preceded  ;  as,  Amsterdam. 

Four  consonants  coming  between  two  vowels  are  equally 
divided  between  them  \  as,  trans-cribir. 


MAKES  USED  IN  PUNCTUATION. 

Note  of  Interrogation  (?). 

This  mark  is  not  only  used  at  the  end,  but  is  also 
placed,  inverted,  at  the  beginning  of  an  interrogatory,  in 
order  to  warn  the  reader  ;  as,  "  i  Que  es  lo  que  Vd.  acoslum- 
bra  comer  Vs  pregunto  al  enfermo. 

"  Ahora  Men,"  me  pregunto  friamente  el  chalan,  "  ^cudnto 
fide  Vd.  por  su  mvJa  ?" 

Note  of  Admiration  (!). 

This  note  is  also  inverted  at  the  beginning  of  ejaculations  ; 
as,  Mirundome  con  ternura  esctamaba  :  "  /  O  que  graciom  tres 
y  que  Undo  !"  "  /  Pastas  dulces  y  viandas  suculentas  /"  csclamb 
mspenso  y  admirado  el  doctor. 

Diaeresis  (**). 

This  is  only  used  over  the  u  of  ue  and  ui  when  the  n  ia 
to  be  sounded  ;  as,  unguento,  arguir. 

The  accent  ('). 

Accent,  in  orthography,  is  the  mark  which  is  placed  over 
some  letters  to  denote  the  manner  of  their  pronunciation. 
In  Spanish  it  is  commonly  placed  over  that  vowel  on  which 


PRONUNCIATION  AND   ACCENTUATION.  19 

the  stress  is  laid  in  pronouncing  a  word,  if  it  cannot  be  as- 
certained without. 

1.  Monosyllables  having  only  one  signification  are  never 
accented  ;  as,  col,  pal,  coz,  mat. 

2.  Monosyllables  having  more  than  one  signification 
should  be  accented ;  as,  el,  he,  him  ;  mi,  me,  Personal  Pro- 
noun ;  si,  yes,  oneself,  affirmative  particle,  or  Pronoun  ;  de 
and  se,  from  the  verbs  dar  and  ser,  to  give  and  to  be  :  to 
distinguish  these  monosyllables  from  el,  the,  Article  ;  mi, 
my,  Possessive  pronoun  ;  8i,  if,  a  Conditional  particle  ;  de, 
of,  a  Preposition  ;  and  se,  himself,  etc.,  a  Pronoun. 

3.  The  vowels  a,  e,  6,  u,  when  used  either  as  Preposi- 
tions or  Conjunctions,  are  always  accented  :  as,  Voy  a  Lbn- 
dres  ;  padre  e  hijo,feliz  b  infehz  :  mujer  u  hombre. 

4.  Dissyllables  and  polysyllables  ending  in  a  vowel  may 
be  accented  on  any  vowel  (the  penultima  excepted)  where- 
on the  stress  is  laid  ;  as,  cdntico,  expimtu,  santiximo,  tisu,  alia. 

5.  But  if  to  some  Person  of  a  verb  ending  in  an  accent- 
ed vowel  the  case  of  a  Pronoun  should  be  added,  the  accent 
must  be  continued,  although  it  falls  on  the  penultima  ;  as, 
temi,  temile ;  enseflo,  ensefldla,  miro,  mirb,  mirbme. 

6.  Dissyllables  ending  in  a  diphthong  are  never  accent- 
ed ;  as,  indio,  Julio,  agua,  gloria,  mutuo. 

Words  which  end  in  y  must  not  be  accented  ;  as,  Para- 
guay, rey,  comboy. 

7.  Trisyllables  and  polysyllables  ending  in  two  vowels 
must  be  accented  on  whichever  of  the  two  vowels  the  stress 
happens  to  be  laid  ;  as,  alegria,  puntapie,  ganzua,  continue. 
(See  No.  9.) 

Except  the  first  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  imper- 
fect of  the  indicative,  and  of  the  subjunctive,  ending  in  la, 
which  are  never  accented  ;  as,  temia,  amaria,  sufriria,  etc. 

8.  Trisyllables  and  polysyllables  ending  in  any  of  these 
diphthongs,  ia,  ie,  io,  ua,  ue,  uo,  must  be  accented  on  any 
vowel  (the  penultima  excepted)  whereon  the  stress  is  laid. 

9.  Words  ending  in  ae,  ao,  au,  ea,  oa,  oe,  oo  not  being 
diphthongs,  must  not  be  accented  ;  as  pelea,  sarao,  albacea. 
But  should  these  two  vowels  form  a  diphthong,  the  word 
must  be  accented  on  whatever  vowel  the  stress  is  laid  ;  as 
heroe,  linea,  eterea. 


20  PRONUNCIATION  AND  ACCENTUATION. 

10.  Words  ending  in  a  consonant  may  be  accented  on 
any  of  the  vowels,  excej)t  the  last,  whereon  the  stress  is 
laid  ;  as,  drbol,  virjen,  metamorfosis,  alferez.  Except  the 
second  person  singular  and  third  plural  of  the  Future  Indi- 
cative, which  are  always  accented  on  the  last  vowel ;  as, 
amards,  vendrdn. 

11.  All  nouns  which  require  to  be  accented  in  the  sin- 
gular, generally  retain  the  accent  on  the  same  syllable  in 
the  plural ;  as,  brden,  brdenes  ;  drbol,  drboles. 

Except  cardcter  and  rejimen,  which  change  into  caracteres 
and  re}imenes  in  the  plural  number. 

12.  If  to  an  unaccented  person  of  a  verb,  consisting 
only  of  two  syllables,  we  affix  one  or  more  pronominal 
cases,  the  first  vowel  must  then  be  accented  ;  as,  oye, 
oyeme ;  compra,  cbmpramelo :  but  if  the  person  of  the  verb 
consist  of  more  than  two  syllables,  its  penultima  should  be 
accented  ;  as,  enlrega,  entregalo,  entregaselo  ;  comuniquemos, 
comuniq  u  em  oslo. 

13.  If  an  Adverb  ending  in  mente  be  formed  from  an 
unaccented  Adjective,  the  Adverb  remains  unaccented  ;  as, 
feliz,  ft'lizmentti ;  humilde,  humildemente :  but  should  the  Ad- 
jective be  accented,  the  accent  continues  on  the  same  vowel 
in  the  Adverb;  &s,fdcil,fdcilmente;  dificil,  dificilmente  ;  in- 
util,  inut'dmente. 

14.  If  a  dissyllable  ending  in  two  vowels  be  increased 
by  the  prefixing  of  a  monosyllable,  the  penultima  is  then 
generally  accented  ;  as,  via,  desuia  ;  lia,  deslia. 


EXPLANATION  OF  THE  SIGNS  USED  IN  THIS  BOOK. 

Expressions,  which  vary  either  in  their  construction  or 
idiom  from  the  English,  are  marked  thus  :  f 

The  Irregular  verbs  are  designated  by  an  (*)  asterisk. 

Rules  of  Syntax  or  construction  will  be  found  at  the  end 
of  each  Lesson  according  to  numbers. 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHEK, 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


FIKST  LESSON. 


DEFINITE   ARTICLE.  (1.) 


ENGLISH 

SPANISH. 

PRONUNCIATION.    (2) 

Nominative,  Uu 

el, 

ell. 

Possessive,  of,  a*   ¥om 

del, 

dell. 

the, 

Objective,     to  the, 

al, 

al. 

Have  you  ? 

i  Tiene  Vd.?  <3.) 

Tee-ainay  oostaid? 

Yes,  Sir,  I  have. 

Si,  Sefior,  tengo. 

See,  Sain-yor,  taingo. 

The  hat. 

El  sombrero. 

Ell  sombrairo. 

Have  you  the  hat  ? 

1  Tiene    Vd.    el    som- 

Tee-ainay  oostaid    ell 

brero  ? 

sombrairo  ? 

\es,  Sir,  I  have  the  hat. 

Sf,  Seiior,  tengo  el  som- 

See,   Sain-yor,    taingo 

brero. 

ell  sombrairo. 

The  bread. 

El  pan. 

Ell  pan. 

The  plate. 

El  plato. 

Ell  plah-to. 

The  soap. 

El  jabon. 

Ell  ha-b6n. 

The  sugar. 

El  aziicar. 

Ell  athookar.  (4.) 

The  paper. 

El  papel. 

Ell  pah-pail. 

My  hat. 

Mi  sombrero. 

Me  sombrairo. 

Your  bread. 

Su  pan. 

Soo  pan. 

Have  you  my  hat  ? 

1  Tiene  Vd.    mi    som- 

Tee-ainay oostaid   me 

brero  ? 

sombrairo  ? 

Yes,  Sir,  I  have  your  nat. 

Sf,  Seiior,  tengo  su  (or 

See,    Sain-yor,    taingo 

el)  sombrero  de  V. 

soo  sombrairo  day 
oostaid. 

Have  you  your  bread  ? 

£  Tiene  Yd.  su  pan? 

Tee-ainay  oostaid  soo 
pan? 

I  have  my  bread. 

Tengo  mi  pan. 

Taingo  me  pan. 

Which  or  what? 

(?Cual<Jque'? 

KwaUkay? 

Qu£  and  cudl  (which 

or  what)  interrogative 

pronouns,  are    accent- 

ed  in  the  singular  and  ] 

n  the  plural  numbers. 

When  they  are  relative 

pronouns,  they  are  writ 

ten  wiUiout  any  accent. 

(5.) 

22  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Which  hat  have  you  ?      i  Cual  sombrero   tiene  i  Kwa  I    sombrairo    tee. 

Vd  ?  ainay  oostaid  ? 

I  have  my  hat.  Tengo  mi  sombrero.         Taingo  me  sombrairo. 

Which  bread  have  you  ?    £  Cual  pan  tiene  Vd.  ?      Kwal    pan    tee-ai-nay 

oostaid  ? 
I  have  your  bread.  Tengo  su  (or  el)  pan  de   Taingo  su  pan  day  oos 

Vd.  taid. 

Obs.  1. — To  Teachers. — Each  Lesson  should  be  dictated  to  the  pupils, 
who  should  pronounce  each  word  as  soon  as  dictated.  Each  Lesson  in- 
cludes three  operations  :  the  teacher  in  the  first  place,  looking  over  the 
exercises  of  the  most  attentive  of  his  pupils,  will  put  to  them  the  ques- 
tions contained  in  the  printed  exercises  ;  he  then  dictates  to  them  the 
next  Lesson  ;  and  lastly,  puts  fresh  questions  on  all  the  preceding  Les- 
sons. The  teacher  may  divide  one  Lesson  into  two,  or  two  into  three, 
or  even  make  two  into  one,  according  to  the  degree  of  intelligence  of 
his  pupils. 

Obs,  2. — It  is  characteristic  of  the  Spanish  language  to  have  every 
letter  sounded,  but  most  especially  when  a  vowel  is  the  termination  of 
a  word.  This  observation  is  important  inasmuch  as  the  gender  of  a 
Noun  is  known  by  its  termination.  Ex. :  hermano,  brother  ;  hermana, 
sister. 

Obs.  3. — It  is,  perhaps,  an  abuse  of  civilization  that  the  use  of  the 
second  person  plural,  you,  has  been  introduced  in  some  modern  lan- 
guages instead  of  the  second  person  singular,  thou.  In  Spanish,  how- 
ever, they  go  still  further,  and  use  listed  for  the  singular,  and  Ustedes 
for  the  plural,  instead  of  till  (thou)  and  vosotros  (you).  It  relates  to 
Vuestra  Merced  (Your  Honor)  and  Vuestras  Mercedes  (Your  Honors). 
These  titles  in  writing  are  generally  abbreviated  thus  :  V.,  Vd.,  orFm., 
for  listed.  Ustedes  is  contracted  by  adding  an  s  to  any  of  .those  abbre- 
viations, as  Vs.,  Vds.,  or  Vms.  Examples  :  Sehor,  i  como  lo  pasa  Vd.  ? 
Sir,  how  do  you  do  ?  Sehor es,  Vds.  usan  demasiadas  ceremonias—  Gen- 
tlemen, you  use  too  many  ceremonies.  It  scarcely  seems  necessary  to 
observe,  that  in  conjugating  the  verb,  according  to  listed  and  Ustedes, 
the  second  and  third  person  of  the  same  are  always  alike.  Ex. :  Vd. 
tiene,  you  have — 41  tiene,  he  has — Vds.  tienen,  you  have  -  -ellos  iienen,  they 
have.  It  will  at  the  same  time  be  observed,  that  the  interrogative 
point  is  not  only  used  at  the  end,  but  is  also  placed,  inverted,  at  the 
beginning  of  the  sentence,  in  order  to  warn  the  reader  when  the  em- 
phasis begins. 

Obs.  4. — Particular  attention  must  be  paid  to  the  peculiai  accent  of 
each  word,  which  has  been  carefully  done  to  facilitate  the  pronuncia- 
tion. In  the  word  azucar,  for  instance,  the  accent  placed  over  the  « 
indicates  that  the  stress  of  the  voice  must  be  laid  on  that  vowel  The 
following  examples  will  show  how  important,  this  observation  is.  Amo, 
I  love — amo,  he  did  love.      Tomo,  I  take— tomo,  he  took. 

Obs.  5. — Ex.:  He  aqui  dos  espadas ;  £cual  quiere  V.  ?— Here  are  two 
swords,  which  will  you  have  ?  i  Cudles  de  estos  libros  son  U>a  mio*  /  — 
Which  of  those  books  are  mine? 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


23 


Exercisk  No.  1.   (T). 

Have  you  the  bread  ?  Yes,  sir,  I  have  the  bread.  Have 
you  your  bread  ?  I  have  my  bread.  Have  you  your  plate  ? 
I  have  my  plate.  Have  you  the  plate  ?  I  have  the 
plate.  Have  you  the  soap  ?  I  have  the  soap.  Have  you 
my  soap  ?  I  have  your  soap.  Which  soap  have  you  ?  I 
have  my  soap.  Have  you  your  sugar?  I  have  my  sugar. 
Which  sugar  have  you  ?  I  have  your  sugar.  Which  paper 
have  you  ?  I  have  my  paper.  Have  you  my  paper  ?  I 
have  your  paper.  Which  hat  have  you  ?  I  have  my  hat. 
Which  soap  have  you?     I  have  your  soap  (2). 

Obs.  1. — This  exercise  must  be  done  in  the  following  manner.  The 
pupil  will  read,  for  instance  :  "  Have  you  the  bread  ?"  and  pronounce 
the  translation,  i  Tiene  Vd.  el  pan  ?  If  he  feels  any  doubt  as  to  the  pro- 
nunciation, he  must  look,  as  a  reference,  at  the  column  where  the  pro- 
nunciation of  the  words,  of  which  the  phrase  is  composed,  is  figured. 
After  he  has  gone  through  this  exercise  once,  twice,  or  more,  until  he 
may  be  completely  satisfied  of  the  operation,  he  will  then  write  the 
translation  in  a  copy-book,  with  which  every  pupil  ought  to  be  pro- 
vided, to  write  in  it  all  the  exercises  in  Spanish. 

Obs.  2. — Pupils  desirous  of  making  rapid  progress  may  compose  a 
great  many  phrases  in  addition  to  those  given  in  the  exercises,  but  they 
must  pronounce  them  aloud  as  they  write  them  in  the  copy-book. 
They  should  also  make  separate  lists  of  such  Substantives,  Adjectives, 
Pronouns,  and  Verbs  as  they  meet  with  in  the  course  of  the  Lessons,  in 
order  to  be  able  to  find  those  words  more  readily  when  required  to  refer 
to  them  in  writing  their  exercises. 


SECOND  LESSON. 


ENGLISH. 
IT(1) 

Have  you  my  hat  ? 


SPANISH. 

Lo. 

I  Tiene   V.    mi    soi 

brero  ? 
Si,  Senor,  lo  tengo. 
Bueno. 
Malo. 
Bonito. 
Lin  do,  bello. 
Hcrmoso. 
Feo. 


Yes,  Sir,  I  have  it, 

Good. 

Pad. 

Pretty. 

Beautiful,  fine. 

Handsome, 

Ugly. 

Note.— When  dividing  words  into  syllables,  observe,  that  a  com- 
pound syllable  must  begin  with  a  consonant.  Example  :  le-ner,  a-z&* 
car,  som-bre-ro,  ce-re-mo-nia,  ca-ba-Uo,  etc. 


PRONUNCIATION. 

Lo. 
Tee-ai-nay  oostaid   me 

sombrairo  ? 
See,  Sain-yor,  lo  taingo. 
Boo-ai-no. 
Mahlo. 
Bone'eto. 
Leendo,  bail-yo. 
Airmoso. 
Fai-o. 


24 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


ENGLISH. 
Old. 

The  handkerchief. 
The  shoe. 
The  cotton. 
The  fan. 

The  looking-glass. 
The  dog. 
The  horse. 

Have  you  my  pretty 
dog? 

Not. 
I  have  not. 
I  have  not  the  bread. 
No,  Sir. 
Have  you  my  old  hat  ? 

No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not. 

Which     paper     have 

you? 
I  have  the  good  paper. 

Which  dog  have  you  ? 

I  have  my  good  dog. 


Of. 
The  cotton  handker- 
chief. 
The  paper  hat. 

The  leather. 
The  leather  shoe. 

Which  handkerchief 
have  you  ? 

I  have  your  handker- 
chief. 

Which  hat  have  you  ? 

1  have  my  paper  hat. 

Have  you  my  lpather 
shoe? 


Viejo. 

El  panuelo. 
El  zapato. 
El  algodon. 
El  abanico. 
El  espejo. 
El  perro. 
El  caballo. 

I  Tiene  Vd,  mi  bonito 
perro  ? 


No.  (3). 
No  tengo. 
No  tengo  el  pan. 
No,  Sefior. 

,;  Tiene  Vd.  mi  som- 
brero viejo  ?  (4) 
No,  Sefior,  no  lo  ten- 

;  Cual      papel      tiene 

Vd.  ? 
Tengo  el  papel  bueno. 

I  Cual  perro  tiene 
Vd.  ? 

Tengo  mi  buen  per- 
ro (5). 


I  have  it  noc. 


De. 

El  panuelo    de   algo- 
don (6). 
El  sombrero  de  papel. 

El  becerro. 

El"  zapato  de  becerro. 

,}Cual  panuelo    tiene 

Vd.? 
Tengo  su  pafiuelo  de 

Vd. 
<;Cual  sombrero  tiene 

Vd.  ? 
Tengo    mi    sombrero 

de  papel. 
(iTieue  Vd.  mi  zapato 

de  becerro  1! 

No  lo  tengo. 


rKONUNCTATIOII. 

Veeai-ho. 
Ell  pan-yoo-ailo. 
Ell  thaphahto. 
Ell  algodon. 
Ell  ahbane'eco. 
Ell  ais-pai-ho. 
Ell  pair-ro  (2). 
Ell  kah-bal-yo. 
Tee-ai-nay  oostaid    me 
boneeto  pair-ro  ? 

No. 

No  taingo. 

No  taingo  ell  pan. 

No,  Sain-yor. 

Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  me 
sombrairo  vee-ai-ho  ? 

No,  Sain-yor,  no  lo 
taingo. 

Kwal  pah-pail  tee-ai- 
nay  oostaid  ? 

Taingo  ell  pah-pail  boo- 
ai-no. 

Kwal  pair-ro  tee-ai-nay 
oos-taid  ? 

Taingo  me  boo-ain  pair- 
ro. 


Day. 

Ell  pan-yoo-ailo  day  al- 
godon. 

Ell  sombrairo  day  pah- 
pail. 

Ell  bai-thair-ro. 

El  thahpahto  day  bai* 
thair-ro. 

Kwal  pan-yoo-ailo  tee- 
ai-nay  oostaid  ? 

Taingo  soo  pan-yoo- 
ailo  day  oostaid. 

Kwal  sombrairo  tee-ai- 
n  iy  oostaid  ? 

Taingo  me  sombrairo 
day  pah-pail. 

Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  me 
thahpahto  day  bai- 
thair-ro  ? 

No  lo  taingo. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  25 

1.  It,  when  placed  before  a  verb,  is  rendered  by  el,  or 
etto,  according  to  the  gender  of  the  Noun  it  refers  to.  Those 
cases  will  be  found  explained  in  their  proper  place  (Lesson 
28th).  For  our  purpose,  in  this  Lesson,  we  only  have  to 
say  that  when  it  is  used  after  the  verb  it  is  translated  by 
to  or  la :  by  lo  when  it  refers  to  a  Noun  whose  gender  is 
doubtful  or  not  mentioned,  and  also,  when  it  refers  to  a 
masculine  Noun  whenever  the  action  of  the  verb  falls  and 
remains  in  the  subject  itself,  and  it  is  not  an  objective  case  ; 
for  then  it  must  be  rendered  by  le,  (referring  to  a  mascu- 
line Noun).  Exanrple  :  £  Ha  publicado  Yd.  ya  su  librof^ 
Have  you  already  published  your  book  ?  No  lo  he  publicado 
todavia,  porque  tengo  que  afladirle  antes  un  capilido.  I  have 
not  published  it  yet,  because  I  have  to  add  a  chapter  to  it 
before.  Finally,  it  is  rendered  by  la  when  it  refers  to  a 
feminine  Noun.  Lo,  le  or  la  is  generally  placed  before  the 
verb,  except  when  it  is  used  in  the  Infinitive,  Present  Par- 
ticiple, or  Imperative. 

2.  Double  rr  in  Spanish  is  pronounced  a  little  stronger 
than  the  r  in  English  at  the  beginning  of  the  word,  thus  : 
in  similar  words  as  perro  (dog),  guerra  (war),  etc.,  the  rr 
must  be  pronounced  a  little  stronger  than  the  r  in  the 
English  words  rich,  right. 

3.  When  a  verb  is  used  negatively  no  is  placed  before  it. 
4  Adjectives  are  generally  used  in   Spanish  after    the 

Substantive  ;  however,  the  Spaniards,  like  the  French,  con- 
sult taste  and  harmony  in  its  collocations.  Hermoso,  Undo, 
and  all  those  Adjectives  which  denote  excellence  or  superior- 
ity, are  sometimes  elegantly  placed  before  the  Substantive, 
especially  when  used  with  any  of  the  Possessive  pronouns. 

5.  The  Adjectives  hueno,  good  ;  malo,  bad  ;  uno,  a  or 
one  ;  alguno,  some  ;  ninguno,  none  ;  primero,  first  ;  tercero, 
third  ;  and  podrero,  last,  lose  the  final  o  when  followed  by 
a  masculine  Noun  in  the  singular,  for  the  sake  of  euphony. 

6.  The  Preposition  de  is  always  put  between  the  name 
of  the  thing  and  the  name  of  the  substance  of  which  it  is 
made. 


26 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Exercise  No.  2. 

Have  you  my  fine  horse  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  it.  Have  you 
my  old  shoe  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not.  Which  dog  have 
you  ?  I  have  my  pretty  dog.  Have  you  my  bad  paper  ? 
No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not.  Have  you  my  good  looking-glass  ? 
Yes,  Sir,  I  have  it.  Have  you  my  ugly  fan  ?  No,  Sir,  I 
have  it  not.  Which  fan  have  you  ?  I  have  your  fine  fan. 
Which  handkerchief  have  you  ?  I  have  the  cotton  hand- 
kerchief. Have  you  my  cotton  handkerchief  ?  I  have  not 
your  cotton  handkerchief.  Which  hat  have  you  ?  I  have 
the  paper  hat.  Have  you  my  paper  hat  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have 
it  not.  Have  you  the  old  bread  ?  I  have  not  the  old  bread. 
Which  shoe  have  you  ?  I  have  my  fine  leather  shoe.  What 
soap  have  you  ?  I  have  my  old  soap.  Which  sugar  have 
you  ?  I  have  your  good  sugar.  Which  looking-glass  have 
you  ?  I  have  my  old  looking-glass.  Have  you  my  fine  fan  ? 
No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not.  Have  you  the  Exercise  number 
two  (Ejercicio  numero  don)  ?     Yes,  Sir,  I  have  it. 


ENGLISH. 

Something,  anything, 
Have  you  anything  ? 
I  have  something. 


THIKD  LESSON. 


AEGO  Or  ALGUNA   COSA. 

I  Tiene  Yd.  algo  ? 
Tengo  algo. 


PBONUNCEmON. 

Algo  or  algo6-na  cosa. 
Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  algo? 
Taingo  algo. 


Nothing,     not    any- 
thing. 
The  wine.* 
My  money. 
The  gold. 
The  string. 
The  gold  string. 
The  button. 
The  coffee. 
The  cheese. 
The  vest. 
The  copper. 
'She  candlestick. 
The    copper    candle- 
utiek. 


NO— NADA  (1). 

El  vino. 

Mi  dinero. 

El  oro. 

El  cordon  (2). 

El  cordon  de  oro. 

El  boton. 

Ei  cafe". 

El  queso. 

El  chaleco. 

El  cobre. 

El  candelero. 

El  candelero  de  cobre. 


No— nadah. 

Ell  veeno. 
Me  dee-nairo. 
Ell  oro. 
Ell  kurdon. 
Ell  kordon  day  6r<x 
Ell  boton. 
Ell  kahfay. 
Ell  kaiso. 
E  1  chalaico. 
Ell  kobray. 
Ell  kandalairo. 
Ell    kan- dai-lai-ro  c'ay 
k  6 -bray. 


PKACTIOAL   EXERCISES. 


27 


ENGLISH. 

Are  you  hungry  ? 

[  am  hungry. 
I  am  not  hungry. 
kre  you  thirsty? 
1  am  thirsty. 
I  am  not  thirsty. 
Are  you  sleepy  ? 

1  am  sleepy. 

I  am  not  sleepy. 

Are  you  warm  ? 

I  am  warm. 
I  am  not  warm. 
Are  you  cold  ? 

I  am  cold* 
I  am  not  cold. 
Are  you  afraid  ? 

I  am  afraid. 
I  am  not  afraid. 
Are  you  ashamed  ? 

I  am  ashamed. 
I  am  not  ashamed. 


SPANISH. 

fi  Tiene  Vd.  hambre  ? 

fTengo  hambre. 
fNo  tengo  hambre. 
fa  Tiene  7d.  sed? 
fTengo  sed. 
fNo  tengo  sed. 
fi  Tiene  Vd.  suefio? 

fTengo  suefio. 
fNo  tengo  suefio. 
fi  Tiene  Vd.  calor? 

fTengo  calor. 
fNo  tengo  calor. 
t i  Tiene  Vd.  frio  ? 

fTengo  frio. 

fNo  tengo  frio. 

f^  Tiene  Vd.  miedo? 

fTengo  miedo. 

fNo  tengo  miedo. 

\l  Tiene  Vd.  verguen- 
za? 

fTengo  vergiienza. 

fNo  tengo  vergiien- 
za. 


PRONUNCIATION. 

Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  am* 
bray  ? 

Taingo  ambray. 

No  taingo  ambray. 

Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  said  J 

Taingo  said. 

No  taingo  said. 

Tee-ainay  oostaid  swahv 
yo? 

Taingo  swain-yo. 

No  taingo  swain-yo. 

Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  ka- 
16r? 

Taingo  kal6r. 

No  taingo  kal6r. 

Tee-ai-nay  oostaid 
fredo  ? 

Taingo  i'ree'o. 

No  taingo  freeo. 

Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  mee- 
aido  ? 

Taingo  mee-aido. 

No  taingo  mee-aido. 

Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  vair- 
goo-ain-tha  ? 

Taingo  vair-goo-aintha. 

No  taingo  vair-goo-ain- 
tha. 


1.  Two  negatives  in  Spanish  add  strength  to  one  another;  as  No  ten- 
go  nada,  I  have  nothing  ;  No  he  visto  a  nadie,  I  have  seen  nobody.  If 
the  negative  adverb  commences  the  sentence,  the  no  then  cannot  be 
used  ;  as  nada  tengo,  I  have  nothing — A  nadie  he  visto,  etc. 

2.  String  is  cordon  if  it  is  made  of  silk,  cotton,  or  any  fine  thread, 
but  if  it  is  made  of  hemp  or  hide,  as  those  of  musical  instruments, 
etc.,  it  will  be  called  cuerda. 


Exeecise  No.  3. 

Have  you  any  good  wine  ?  I  have  iL  Have  you  the 
gold?  I  have  it  not.  Have  you  the  money?  Yes,  Sir,  I 
have  it.  Have  you  the  good  horse  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not. 
Have  you  your  copper  candlestick  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  it. 
Have  you  my  old  hat  ?  I  have  your  old  hat.  Have  you 
your  fine  cheese  ?    I  have  it.     Have  you  your  cotton  vest  ? 


28 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


Yes,  Sir,  I  have  my  cotton  vest.  Have  you  your  gold  but- 
ton ?  I  have  it  not.  Which  horse  have  you  ?  I  have  your 
good  horse.  Which  handkerchief  have  you  ?  I  have  your 
fine 'cotton  handkerchief.  Have  you  anything?  I  have 
something.  I  have  good  coffee,  I  have  good  sugar.  Are 
you  hungry  ?  No,  Sir,  I  am  not  hungry.  Are  you  thirsty  ? 
Yes,  Sir,  I  am  thirsty.  Are  you  sleepy  ?  No,  Sir,  I  am 
not  sleepy.  Are  you  cold?  Yes,  Sir,  I  am  cold.  Are  you 
not  ashamed  ?  No,  Sir,  I  am  not  ashamed.  Are  you  warm  ? 
I  am  warm.  Are  you  not  afraid  ?  No,  Sir,  I  am  not 
afraid.  Have  you  the  copper  candlestick  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have 
the  fine  gold  candlestick.  Which  vest  have  you  ?  I  have 
your  pretty  cotton  vest.  Have  you  your  fine  gold  button  ? 
No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not,  I  have  my  copper  button.  Have  you 
my  paper  hat  ?  Yes,  JSir,  I  have  it.  Have  you  my  fine 
dog  ?  I  have  not  your  old  dog.  Have  you  my  good  wine  ? 
No,  Sir,  I  have  not  your  good  wine. 


FOUKTH  LESSON. 


ENGLISH. 

That. 
That  book. 

Of  the,  or  from  the. 
Of  the  dog. 
Of  the  tailor. 
Of  the  baker. 
Of  the  neighbor. 

That,  or  the  one. 
The  neighbor's. 
The  baker's. 
The  dog's. 


Have  you  my  book,  or 
the  neighbor's  ? 

I  have  the  neighbor's. 


SPANISH. 

Aqtteij. 
Aquel  libro. 


Del. 
Del  perro. 
Del  sastre. 
Del  panadero. 
Del  vecino. 


El— 
El  del  vecino . 
El  del  panadero. 
El  del  perro. 


O.  (1). 
,;Tiene  Vd.    mi  libro, 
6  el  del  vecino  ? 

Tengo  el  del  vecino. 


PRONUNCIATION. 

Ah-kaiL 
Ah-kail  iee'bro. 


Dell. 
Dell  pair-ro. 
Dell  sas-tray. 
Dell  pana-dai-ro. 
Dell  vai-thee'-no. 


Ell- 
Ell  dell  vai-thee'-no. 
Ell  dell  pana-dai-ro. 
Ell  dell  pair-ro. 


Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  me 
leebro,  6  ell  dell  vai- 
thee'-no  ? 

Taiugo  ell  dell  vai- 
the^no. 


& 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


23 


ENGLISH. 

Have  you   my  bread, 
or  the  baker's  ? 

I  have  yours. 

I  have  not  the  baker's. 

Mine,  my  own. 
Of,  from  mine. 
Yours. 

Of,  from  yours. 


The  man. 
The  man's  friend. 
Of  the  friend. 
That  of  the  friend. 
The  stick. 
The  thimble. 
The  coal. 
My  brother. 
My  brother's. 
Your  friend's. 


I  Tiene  Vd.  mi  pan,  6 
el  del  panadero  ? 

Tengo  el  de  Vd. 

No  tengo  el  del  pana- 
dero. 

El  mio. 

Del  mio. 

El  suyo  (2)  (or  el  de 
Vd). 

Del  suyo  (or  del  de 
Vd). 


El  hombre. 

El  amigo  del  hombre. 

Del  amigo. 

El  del  amigo. 

El  baston. 

El  dedal. 

El  carbon. 

Mi  hermano. 

El  de  mi  hermano. 

El  de  su  amigo  de  Vd. 


PRONUNCIATION. 

Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  mfe 

pan,  6  ell  dell  pana- 

dai-ro  ? 
Taingo  ell  day  oostaid. 
No  taingo  ell  dell  pana- 

dai-ro. 
Ell  med-oh. 
Dell  med-oh. 
Ell  soo-yo,   or  ell  day 

oostaid. 
Ell  soo-yo,  or  dell  day 

oostaid. 


Ell  6mbray. 
Ell  amedge  dell  6mbray 
Dell  amedgo. 
Ell  dell  amedgo. 
Ell  baston. 
Ell  day-dak 
Ellkarbon. 
Me  air-mah-no. 
Ell  day  me  air-mah-no. 
Ell  day  soo  amedgo  day 
oostaid. 


1.  Conjunctions  used  for  the  sake  of  euphony. 
A  u  is  used  instead  of  6  when  the  word  begins  with  o  or 
ho;  as, 

Ver  ti  oir.  To  see  or  to  hear. 
Siete  u  ocho.  Seven  or  eight. 
Mujer  it  hombre.     Woman  or  man. 

An  e  is  used  instead  of  y  when  the  word  following  the 
Conjunction  begins  with  %  or  hi ;  as, 

Escribir  £  imprimir.     To  write  and  to  print. 
Padre  6  hijo.     Father  and  son. 

But  if  the  Conjunction  y  is  followed  by  a  word  beginning 

with  hie,  it  is  retained  ;  as, 

Cobre  y  hierro.     Copper  and  iron. 
Destroza  y  hiere.     It  destroys  and  wounds. 

Because  then  the  word  does  not  begin,  properly  speak- 
ing, with  an  i,  but  y,  as  hierro  and  hiere,  are  pronounced 
the  same  as  if  they  were  written  yerro,  yere,  and  for  this 
reason  many  indiscriminately  write  yelo  or  hielo,  ice  ;  and 
yerba  or  hierba,  herb. 


30  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

2.  El  suyo  is  the  Pronoun  now  in  use  in  good  society 
instead  of  el  vuestro,  though  the  former  is  defective,  since  it 
means  yours,  his,  hers,  theirs  ;  so  then,  whenever  there  may 
be  doubt  as  to  the  person  to  whom  we  allude,  el  de  Vd' 
(yours),  el  de  el  (his),  el  de  ella  (hers),  el  de  ellas,  or  e/la 
(theirs),  is  used  instead  of  el  suyo,  The  same  observation 
is  applied  to  su,  which  means  your,  his,  her,  their. 


Exercise  No.  4. 

Have  you  that  book?  No,  Sir,  I  have  it  not.  Which 
book  have  you  ?  I  have  that  of  the  neighbor.  Have  you 
my  stick,  or  that  of  my  friend  ?  I  have  that  of  your  friend. 
Have  you  my  bread  or  the  baker's  ?  I  have  not  yours  ;  I 
have  the  baker's.  Have  you  the  neighbor's  horse  ?  No,  Sir, 
I  have  it  not.  Which  horse  have  you  ?  I  have  that  of  the 
baker.  Have  you  your  thimble  or  the  tailor's  ?  I  have  my 
own.  Have  you  the  pretty  gold  string  of  my  dog  ?  I  have 
it  not.  Have  you  my  gold  button  or  the  tailor's  ?  I  have 
not  yours  ;  I  have  the  tailor's.  Have  you  my  brother's  vest 
or  yours  ?  I  have  your  brother's.  Which  coffee  have  you  ? 
I  have  the  neighbor's.  Have  you  your  dog  or  the  man's  ? 
I  have  the  man's.  Have  you  your  friend's  money  ?  I 
have  it  not. 


Exercise  No.   5. 

Are  you  cold  or  warm  ?  I  am  warm.  Are  you  thirsty  or 
hungry  ?  I  am  hungry.  Are  you  ashamed  or  afraid  ?  I 
am  ashamed.  Have  you  my  vest  or  the  tailor's  ?  I  have 
the  tailor's.  Have  you  my  good  candlestick  or  that  of  my 
neighbor  ?  I  have  yours.  Have  you  your  paper  or  mine  ? 
I  have  mine.  Have  you  your  cheese  or  the  baker's  ?  I 
have  my  own.  Which  vest  have  you  ?  I  have  that  of  the 
tailor.  Which  handkerchief  have  you  ?  I  have  my  own. 
Have  you  the  old  hat  of  my  brother  ?  I  have  it  not.  Which 
soap  have  you?  I  have  my  brother's  good  soap.  Have  you 
my  stick  or  that  of  my  brother?  I  have  yours.  Which 
shoe  have  you  ?  I  have  my  friend's  leather  shoe.  Have 
vou  your  cotton  handkerchief  or  mine  ?  I  have  not  yours  ; 
I  have  my  own.     Have  you  any  thing  ?    I  have  nothing. 


PKACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


31 


Have  you  your  pretty  dog  ? 
Have  you  my  pretty  stick  ? 
my  own. 


I  have  my  friend's  pretty  dog. 
I  have  not  your  stick  ;  I  have 


ENGLISH. 

The  merchant 
The  shoemaker. 
The  boy. 
The  pencil. 
The  chocolate. 
The  cloth. 


To    HAVE,     TO    HOLD, 
TO  POSSESS. 

To  have    (an  Aux- 
iliary verb). 


FIFTH  LESSON. 

SPANISH. 

El  comerciante. 
El  zapatero. 
El  muchacho. 
El  lapiz. 
El  chocolate. 
El  pafio. 


Teneb. 


Habeb. 


PBONUNCIATTON. 

Ell  comairthee-ante. 
Ell  thah-pah-tairo. 
Ell  moo-cha-cho. 
Ell  lah-peeth. 
Ell  cho-co-lah-tay. 
Ell  pan-yo. 


Tai-nair. 


Ah-bair. 


Obseevation  A. — Haber  (to  have)  is  an  Auxiliary  verb,  and,  conse- 
quently, it  is  generally  used  before  a  Past  Participle.  Tener  is  an  Auxil- 
iary and  Active  verb.  As  an  Auxiliary,  it  is  seldom  used  ;  as  an  Active, 
it  denotes  possession,  and  must  always  be  used  to  translate  the  verb  to 
have,  when  it  is  not  Auxiliary .  "We  say,  he  leido  el  libro,  I  have  read  the 
book ;  but  we  must  say,  tengo  un  libro,  I  have  a  book  ;  because  in  the 
first  example  the  verb  to  have  is  auxiliary  to  read,  and  in  the  second  it  is 
active  and  denotes  possession. 

I  have.  Yo  he. 

You  have.  Vd.  ha. 

He  has.  El  ha. 


To  receive. 

Received. 

Have  you  received  the 

pencil  ? 
I  have  not  received  it. 


Recibir. 

Recibido. 

,iHa    recibido    Vd.    el 

lapiz  ? 
No  lo  he  recibido. 


Yoe-h. 
Oostaid  ah. 
Ell  ah. 

Rai-thee-be'er. 
Rai-thee-be'e-do. 
Ah  rai-thee-be'e-do  oos- 
taid ell  lah-peeth? 
No  lo  eh  rai-thee-be'e-do 


Observation  B. — "When  the  Auxiliary  verb  haber  is  used  in  the  Indica- 
tive present,  the  Past  Participle  must  always  be  placed  immediately  after 
the  Auxiliary,  consequently  it  is  not  proper  to  say  in  Spanish,  1 11a  Vd. 
recibido?  but  jHa  recibido  Vd.  ?  (Have  received  you?^  This  obser- 
vation is  applicable  only  to  the  Indicative  present. 


Has  the  merchant  re- 1 1  Ha  recibido  el  comer-  I  Ah 
ceived  his  stick,   or  !      ciante  su  baston  6  el  | 


yours? 


de  Vd.  ? 


rai-thee-bed-do  ell 
co  -  mair  -  thee  -  antay 
soo  baston  6  ell  day 
oostaid  ? 


32 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Neither. 
No. 
The  merchant  has  re- 
ceived   neither    his 
stick  nor  mine. 

Are   you    hungry    or 

thirsty  ? 
I  am  neither  hungry 

nor  thirsty. 
Are  you  warm  or  cold  ? 

I  am  neither  warm  nor 

cold. 
Have  you  received  the 

wine  or  the  bread  ? 
The  cork. 
The  corkscrew. 
The  hammer. 
Of  the  carpenter. 
The  iron. 
The  nail. 
The  iron  nail. 
The  Frenchman. 
The  Spaniard. 
The  Englishman. 
The  umbrella. 

What  have  you  ?        ] 

What  is  the  matter  V 

with  you  ?  ) 

Nothing. 
I  have  nothing.  ) 

Nothing  is  the  mat-  > 

ter  with  me.  ) 

Is  anything  the  matter 

with  you  ? 
Nothing  is  the  matter 

with  me. 


SPANISH. 

No — NL 

No. 
El  comerciante  no  ha 
recibido  ni  su  baston 
ni  el  mio. 

f^  Tiene  Vd.  hambre  6 

sed? 
|No  tengo  ni  hambre 

ni  sed. 
\l  Tiene  Vd.    calor    6 

Mo? 
fNo  tengo  ni  calor  ni 

frio. 
^Ha    recibido   Vd.    el 

vino  6  el  pan  ? 
El  corcho. 
El  sacacorchos. 
El  martillo. 
Del  carpintero. 
El  hierro  or  fierro. 
El  clavo. 

El  clavo  de  hierro. 
El  trances. 
El  espafiol. 
El  ingles. 
El  paraguas. 


t  £  Que"  tiene  Vd.  ? 


NO — NAD  A. 

f  No  tengo  nada. 
\  I  Tiene  Vd.  algo? 
f  No  tengo  nada. 


PRONUNCIATION. 

No — nee. 
No. 

Ell  comairthee-antay  no 
ah  raithee-beeVlo  nee 
soo  baston  nee  ell 
mee-o. 

Tee-ai-nay  oostaid  am- 
bray  6  said? 

No  taingo  nee  ambray 
nee  said. 

Tee-alnay  oostaid  kah- 
lor  6  free-o  ? 

No  taingo  nee  k&h-16r 
nee  free'-o. 

Ah  rai-thee-beedo  oos- 
taid ell  veeno  6  ell  pan  ? 

Ell  corcho. 

Ell  sacah-c6rchos. 

Ell  martee'1-yo. 

Dell  karpeen-tairo. 

Ell  ee-air-ro  or  fee-air-ro. 

Ell  clah-vo. 

Ell  clah-vo  cky  ee-air-ro. 

Ell  franthais. 

Ell  espan-\6L 

Ell  eenglais. 

Ell  paragwas. 


Kay  tee-ai-nay  oostaid  ? 

Nah-da. 
No  taingo  nah-da. 
Tee-ainay  oostaid  algoY 
No  taingo  nah-da. 


Exercise  No.  6. 

I  am  neither  hungry  nor  thirsty.  Have  yon  received  my 
shoe  or  the  shoemaker's  ?  I  have  received  neither  yours 
nor  the  shoemaker's.  Have  you  your  pencil  or  the  boy's  ? 
I  have  neither  mine  nor  the  boy's.      Which  pencil  have 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES,  33 

you  received  ?  I  have  received  that  of  the  merchant.  Have 
you  my  chocolate  or  that  of  the  merchant  ?  I  have  neithei 
yours  nor  the  merchant's  ;  I  have  my  own.  Have  you  re- 
ceived the  coffee  or  the  wine  ?  I  have  received  neither  the 
coffee  nor  the  wine.  Have  you  your  thimble  or  the  tailor's? 
I  have  neither  mine  nor  the  tailor's.  Have  you  received 
your  corkscrew  or  mine?  I  have  received  neither  yours 
nor  mine  ;  I  have  received  the  copper  nail.  Are  you  warm 
or  cold  ?  I  am  neither  warm  nor  cold  ;  I  am  sleepy.  Are 
you  afraid  ?  I  am  not  afraid.  Have  you  received  my  han> 
mer  or  the  carpenter's  ?  I  have  received  neither  yours  nor 
the  carpenter's.  Which  nail  have  you  ?  I  have  the  iron 
nail.  Which  hammer  have  you  received  ?  I  have  received 
the  iron  hammer  of  the  carpenter.  Have  you  any  thing  ? 
I  have  something.  What  have  you?  I  have  the  French- 
man's fine  umbrella.  Have  you  received  the  cotton  hand- 
kerchief of  the  Englishman  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  received  the 
fine  handkerchief  of  the  Spaniard. 


Exercise  No.  7. 

£  Tiene  Vd.  mi  paraguas  6  el  de  Vd.  ?  No  tengo  ni  el  de 
Vd.  ni  el  mio.  £  Cual  baston  ha  recibido  Vd.  ?  He  reci- 
bido  el  de  mi  amigo.  £  Ha  recibido  Vd.  mi  chaleco  de  algo- 
don  6  el  de  mi  hermano  ?  No  he  recibido  ni  el  de  Vd.  ni 
el  de  su  hermano.  i  Cual  cordon  tiene  Vd.  ?  Tengo  el 
cordon  de  algodon  de  mi  vecino.  <?  Ha  recibido  Vd.  el  libro 
del  frances  6  el  del  comerciante  ?  No  he  recibido  ni  el  del 
frances  ni  el  del  comerciante.  <;  Cual  libro  ha  recibido  Vd.  ? 
He  recibido  el  mio.  £  Que  tiene  Vd.  ?  Nada.  £  Tiene  Vd. 
algo?  No  tengo  nada.  ^  Tiene  Vd.  frio  ?  No  tengo  frio  ; 
tengo  calor.  <;  Ha  recibido  Vd.  algo  ?  No  he  recibido  nada. 
I  No  ha  recibido  Vd.  su  ejercicio  ?  Si,  Seflor,  he  recibido  mi 
ejercicio.  £  Cual  ejercicio  tiene  Vd.  ?  Tengo  mi  ejercicio. 
El  frances  tiene  el  de  Vd. 


ENGLISH. 

The  thread. 
The  fork. 
The  biscuit 


SIXTH  LESSON. 


SPANISH. 

El  hilo. 
El  tenedor. 
El  bizcocho. 


34 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


ENGLISH. 

Of  the  captain. 
Of  the  cook. 
The  fish.     • 


SPANISH. 

Del  capitan. 
Del  cocinero. 
El  pescado. 


Observation  A. —Fish  is  called  pescado  when  it  is  caught,  and  p« 
When  it  is  in  the  water. 


ENGLISH , 

Havel? 
You  have. 
You  have  not. 
Am  I  right  ? 


SPANISH. 

£  Tengo  yo? 

Vd.  tiene. 

Vd.  no  tiene. 

f  ,;  Tengo  yo  razon  ? 


Observation  B.— The  Spaniards  generally  dispense  with  the  use  of  the 
Personal  pronouns  (with  the  exception  of  Vd. )  in  speaking  as  well  as  in 
writing,  except  when  the  verb  is  used  interrogatively,  and  when  speaking 
emphatically  ;  as,  Tengo  yo  ? — Have  I  ?  or,  Yo  tengo  un  perro  y  el  tient 
un  caballo,  I  have  a  dog  and  he  has  a  horse. 

t  i  Tiene  el  hombre  razon  ? 
t  No  tiene  razon. 
f  Vd.  tiene  razon. 
f  Vd.  no  tiene  razon. 
j  Vd.  no  tiene  razon. 
t  Yo  no  tengo  razon. 
t  l  Tengo  yo  razon  6  no  ? 
I  Qud  he  recibido  yo  ? 
Vd.  ha  recibido  su  dinero. 


Is  the  man  right  ? 

He  is  not  right. 

You  are  right. 

You  are  not  right. 

You  are  wrong. 

I  am  wrong. 

Am  I  right  or  wrong  ? 

What  have  I  received  ? 

You  have  received  your  money. 

The  mutton. 

The  knife. 


El  carnero. 
El  cuchillo. 


Which  one  ? 

Which  one  have  you  ? 

That  of  the  carpenter,  or  the  car- 
penter's. 

That  of  the  cook,  or  the  cook's. 

The  fine  one. 

The  ugly  one. 

The  new  one. 

Have  you  your  knife  or  mine  ? 

I  have  neither  yours  nor  mine. 

Have  you  received  your  umbrella 
or  mine  ? 

I  have  received  neither  yours  nor 
mine. 


£CUAL? 

j  Cual  tiene  Vd.  ? 
El  del  carpintero. 

El  del  cocinero. 

El  hermoso. 

El  feo. 

El  nuevo. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  su  cuchillo  6  el  mio? 

No  tengo  ni  el  de  Vd.  ni  el  mio. 

I  Ha  recibido  Vd.  su  paraguas  6  eJ 

mio? 
No  he  recibido  ni  el  de  Vd.  ni  el 

mio. 


The  French  General. 
The  Spanish  lawyer. 
The  English  ship. 
The  Ameiican  physician. 


El  jeneral  frances. 
El  abogado  espanol. 
El  buque  ingles. 
El  medico  americano 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  35 

Exercise  No.  8. 

Have  you  received  your  English  dog  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have 
not  received  it.  Have  you  my  American  hat  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I 
have  it.  Is  the  Spanish  general  right  or  not  ?  He  is  not 
right  ;  he  is  afraid  and  ashamed.  Has  the  American  cook 
my  new  leather  shoe  ?  He  has  it.  Have  I  your  French 
chocolate  ?  You  have  it  not ;  you  have  your  own.  Has 
the  Spanish  captain  received  his  fine  English  horse  ?  He 
has  not  received  his  English  horse,  he  has  received  his 
beautiful  American  horse.  Has  the  American  general  the 
French  ship  ?  He  has  the  English  ship.  Has  the  baker 
my  bread  or  that  of  my  friend  ?  He  has  yours.  Has  he 
not  my  friend's  ?  No,  Sir,  he  has  it  not.  Has  the  French 
tailor  my  vest  ?  He  has  not  yours  ;  he  has  mine.  Have 
you  received  your  good  wine  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  noj;  received 
it.  Has  my  boy  your  knife  ?  He  has  it  not.  Have  you 
my  cotton  handkerchief  ?  I  have  not  yours  ;  I  have  mine. 
Have  you  my  friend's  new  umbrella  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  not 
your  friend's  umbrella  ;  I  have  my  own.  Has  your  cook 
my  chocolate,  or  that  of  the  merchant  ?  He  has  neither 
yours  nor  the  merchant's.  Have  you  received  my  pencil  ? 
Which  one?  The  gold  one.  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  received 
your  fine  gold  pencil.  Have  you  your  biscuit  or  mine  ?  I 
have  neither  yours  nor  mine.  Which  have  you  ?  I  have 
that  of  my  brother.  Have  I  your  thimble  or  that  of  the 
tailor?  You  have  neither  mine  nor  that  of  the  tailor. 
Which  one  have  I?  You  have  your  friend's.  Have  you 
my  iron  ship  ?  I  have  it  not.  Have  I  your  mutton  or  the 
cook's  ?  You  have  neither  mine  nor  the  cook's.  Have  I 
received  your  fine  knife  ?  You  have  not  received  it.  Have 
you  received  it  ?  I  have  received  it.  Which  handkerchief 
have  I?  You  have  the  fine  cotton  handkerchief  of  my 
brother.     Which  exercise  have  you  ?    I  have  mine. 


Exercise  No.  9. 

I  Tengo  yo  razon  ?  Vd.  Tiene  razon.  i  Tiene  mi  amigo 
el  capitan  frances  frio  6  calor?  No  tiene  ni  frio  ni  calor  ; 
tiene  sueuo.     £  Tiene  miedo  el  muchacho  ingles?     El  mu- 


36 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


chacho  ingles  no  tiene  miedo.  £  Tiene  vergttenza  ?  Si,  Se- 
nor,  tiene  vergiienza.  £  Tengo  yo  buen  cafe  6  buen  azucar  ? 
Vd.  no  tiene  ni  buen  cafe  ni  buen  azucar.  ,?  Que  tengo 
yo  ?  Vd.  no  tiene  nada.  £  Tiene  Vd.  el  hermoso  buque  de 
mi  amigo  ?  No  tengo  su  hermoso  buque.  £  Cual  buquo 
tiene  Vd.  ?  Tengo  el  bonito  buque  de  liierro  de  Vd.  i  Cual 
carnero  he  recibido  yo  ?  Vd.  ha  recibido  el  de  su  cocinero. 
£  Tengo  yo  el  sacacorchos  de  Vd.  6  el  del  comerciante  ? 
Vd.  no  tiene  ni  el  mio  ni  el  del  comerciante.  <:  Cual  cho- 
colate ha  recibido  Vd.  ?  He  recibido  el  del  frances.  £  Cual 
zapato  tiene  Vd.  ?  Tengo  el  zapato  de  becerro  del  zapa- 
tero.  4  Cual  tengo  yo?  Vd.  tiene  el  del  panadero  viejo. 
^Cual  tiene  Vd.?  Tengo  el  de  mi  buen  vecino.  ,?Que 
tiene  Vd.  ?  Tengo  miedo.  £  Tengo  yo  algo  ?  Vd.  no  tiene 
nada.  ,;  Cual  ejercicio  tiene  Vd.  ?  Tengo  mi  ejercicio. 
£  Tiene  Vd.  el  ejercicio  del  muchacho  frances?  No,  Senor, 
no  lo  tengo.  £  Cual  tiene  Vd.  ?  Tengo  el  mio.  £  No  tiene 
Vd.  mi  ejercicio  ?  No,  Senor,  no  lo  tengo.  £  Cual  ejercicio 
tiene  Vd.  ?    Tengo  el  mio. 


SEVENTH  LESSON. 


Who? 

Who  has? 

Who  has  the  pencil  ? 

The  man  has  the  pencil. 

Who  has  it? 

The  boy  has  it. 

The  boy  has  it  not. 

The  ox. 

The  chicken. 

The  trunk. 

The  bag,  the  sack. 

The  young  man,  the  youth. 

He. 


,;  Quie'n? 

I  Quie'n  tiene  ? 

I  Quie'n  tiene  el  lapiz  ? 

El  hombre  tiene  el  lapiz. 

I  Quie'n  lo  tiene  ? 

El  muchacho  lo  tiene. 

El  muchacho  no  lo  tiene. 

El  buey. 

El  polio. 

El  haul. 

El  saco. 

El  joven. 

Eh 


ill  (pronoun)  always  must  be  accented  to  distinguish  it  from  Kl 

(article).  ***q^.. 


He  has. 

He  has  the  trunk. 

He  has  it. 

He  has  it  not. 

Has  he? 

Has  l)e  the  knife  ? 


El  tiene. 

El  tiene  el  haul. 

£1  lo  tiene. 

El  no  lo  tiene. 

I  Tiene  (51? 

I  Tiene  el  el  cuchillo  ? 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


37 


To  see. — Seen. 
Have  you  seen  your  dog  ? 
1  have  not  seen  it. 
Have  you  seen  my  paper  ? 
No,  Sir,  I  have  not  seen  it. 
Is  your  brother  warm  or  cold  ? 

He  is  sleepy. 

Is  the  young  man  right  or  not? 
He  is  not  right. 

Has  the  boy  the  bag  of  the  carpen- 
ter ? 
He  has  it  not. 
Has  the  baker  it  ? 
What  has  my  friend? 
The  gilliflower. 
The  rice. 
The  countryman. 
The  peasant. 
The  servant. 


Vee. — Visto. 
,i  Ha  visto  Vd.  su  perro  ? 
No  lo  he  visto. 
,;  Ha  visto  Vd.  mi  papel  ? 
No,  Senor,  no  lo  he  visto. 
t  £  Tiene  su  hermano  de  Vd.  calof 

6  frio  ? 
f  Tiene  suefio. 

j  i  Tiene  el  joven  razon  6  no? 
f  No  tiene  razon. 
I  Tiene  el  muchacho  el  saco  del  car- 

pintero  ? 
No  lo  tiene. 
I  Lo  tiene  el  panadero  ? 
j  Qud  tiene  mi  amigo  ? 
El  aleli. 
El  arroz. 
El  paisano. 
El  campesino. 
El  criado. 


His  or  her  shoe. 

Su  zapato. 

His  or  her  dog. 

Su  perro. 

His  or  her  foot. 

Su  pie\ 

His  or  her  sofa. 

Su  sofa. 

His  or  her  tissue. 

Su  tisu. 

His  or  hers,  ] 

His  own,       > 

El  suyo.. 

Her  own,      ) 

Has  the  servant  his  trunk  or  mirw? 

1  Tiene  el  criado  su  baul  6  el  mio 

He  has  his  own. 

Tiene  el  suyo. 

Somebody  ob  anybody. 

Some  one  ok  any  one. 
Has  any  body  my  book  ? 
Somebody  has  it 
Who  has  my  stick? 

Nobody. 

No  ONE. 
Nobody  has  your  stick. 
Nobody  has  it. 
No  one  has  it. 


Algdeen. 

AxGUNO. 

,;  Tiene  alguien  mi  libro  ? 

Alguien  lo  tiene. 

I  Quie'n  tiene  mi  baston  ? 

Nadie. 

Ninguno. 
Nadie  tiene  su  baston  de  Vd. 
Nadie  lo  tiene. 
Ninguno  lo  tiene. 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Exercise  No.  10. 

"Who  has  my  trunk  ?  The  boy  has  it.  Has  the  man  the 
vhicken  ?  He  has  it.  Who  has  my  vest  ?  The  young  man 
has  it.  Has  the  young  man  my  ship  ?  The  young  man 
has  it  not.  Who  has  it  ?  The  American  captain  has  it. 
What  has  the  French  cook  received  ?  He  has  received  the 
chicken.  Has  he  received  my  good  knife  ?  He  has  not  re- 
ceived it.  Who  has  received  it  ?  Nobody  has  received  it. 
Is  the  man  right  or  not  ?  He  is  not  right  Have  you  seen 
the  sugar?  No,  Sir,  I  have  not  seen  it.  Have  you  seen 
your  old  thread  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  seen  it.  Which  cloth 
have  you  seen  ?  I  have  seen  the  fine  one  of  my  friend. 
Who  has  seen  my  cloth  ?  The  Spanish  servant  has  seen  it. 
Who  has  seen  my  horse  ?  The  countryman  has  seen  it. 
What  has  the  young  man  seen?  He  has  seen  nothing. 
Has  the  cook  the  chicken  or  the  rice?  He  has  neither  the 
chicken  nor  the  rice.  Who  has  my  fork  ?  The  French  bov 
has  it. 


Exercise  No.  11. 

Has  any  body  my  book  ?  Nobody  has  it.  Has  the  coun- 
tryman my  hat  ?  He  has  it  not.  Has  the  tailor  received 
my  pretty  vest  ?  He  has  not  received  it.  Wbat  has  he 
received  ?  He  has  received  nothing.  Has  the  carpenter 
seen  his  hammer  ?  He  has  not  seen  it.  Has  he  seen  any 
thing  ?  He  has  seen  something.  Has  he  my  English  dog 
or  my  Spanish  horse  ?  He  has  neither  your  English  dog 
nor  your  Spanish  horse.  Has  he  received  my  good  Ameri- 
can cheese  or  my  good  French  wine  ?  He  has  received 
neither  your  fine  American  cheese  nor  your  good  French 
wine  ;  he  has  received  his  pretty  gold  button.  Have  I  your 
bag  or  your  friend's?  You  have  neither  mine  nor  my 
friend's  ;  you  have  your  own.  Who  has  seen  the  country- 
man's ox  ?  I  have  seen  it.  Who  is  afraid  ?  The  tailor's 
boy  is  afraid.  What  is  the  matter  with  him  ?  Nothing. 
Is  he  cold  or  hungry  ?  He  is  neither  cold  nor  hungry  ;  he 
is  sleepy.    Has  the  young  man  his  trunk  ?     Yes,  Sir,  he  has 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


39 


it.  Has  the  captain  received  his  money  ?  No,  Sir,  he  hag 
not  received  it.  Who  has  seen  my  bag?  Nobody  has 
seen  it. 


Exercise  No.  12. 

I  Tiene  el  comerciante  mi  paraguas  6  el  suyo  ?  No  tiene 
ni  el  de  Vd.  ni  el  suyo.  f,  Que  aleli  ha  recibido  el  ?  Ha  re- 
cibido  el  de  mi  hermano.  <;  Que  dedal  tiene  el  sastre  finan- 
ces ?  Tiene  el  suyo.  i  Ha  recibido  su  hermano  de  Vd.  mi 
buen  vino  espaiiol  6  el  del  vecino?  No  ha  recibido  ni  el  de 
Vd.  ni  el  del  vecino.  ^  Cual  vino  ha  recibido  el  ?  Ha  reci- 
bido el  suyo.  ^Ha  visto  alguien  mi  cordon  de  oro?  Nadie 
lo  ha  visto.  <?  Quien  tiene  mi  candelero  de  cobre  ?  Su  mu- 
chacho  de  Vd.  lo  tiene.  i  Ha  recibido  el  mi  sombrero  de 
papel?  No,  Sefior,  no  lo  ha  recibido.  I  Quien  tiene  el 
zapato  feo  del  frances?  El  comerciante  lo  tiene.  <?Lo 
tiene  el  ?  Si,  Senor,  lo  tiene.  <?  Ha  recibido  su  cocinero  de 
Vd.  su  carnero?  Lo  ha  recibido.  I  Tiene  Vd.  mi  pan  6  mi 
queso  ?  No  tengo  ni  su  pan  ni  su  queso  de  Vd.  £  Tiene  Vd, 
mi  paraguas  nuevo  ?  No  lo  tengo  ;  tengo  el  mio  £  Tiene 
Vd.  el  sofa  del  espaiiol  6  el  del  ingles  ?  No  tengo  ni  el  del 
espanol  ni  el  del  ingles  ;  tengo  el  mio. 


EIGHTH  LESSON. 


The  sailor. 

His  tree. 

His  bird. 

His  mattress. 

The  stranger. 

The  foreigner. 

The  garden. 

His  glove. 

This  or  that  hay. 

This  or  that  gentleman. 

This  or  that  ass. 


El  marinero. 

Su  arbol. 

Su  pajaro. 

Su  colchon. 

El  forastero. 

El  estranjero. 

El jardin. 

Su  guante. 

Este  heno  6  aquel. 

Este  caballero  6  aquei 

Esto  asno  (or  burro)  6  aquel. 


£0 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


This  book. 

That  book. 

Have  you  received  this  or  that  book? 

I  have  received  this  one. 

I  have  not  received  that  one. 

From  my  friend, 

From  the  ship. 


Este  libro. 

Aquel  libro. 

<;Ha  recibido  Vd.  este  libio  6  aquel? 

He  recibido  este. 

No  he  recibido  aquel. 

De  mi  amigo. 

Del  buque. 


This  one. 
That  one. 


Este. 

Aquel.    Ese. 


Este  designates  the  object  near  the  person  who  speaks  ;  ese,  the 'ob- 
ject distant  from  the  person  who  speaks  and  near  the  person  spoken 
to  ;  but  aquel  designates  the  object  distant  from  both  the  person  who 
speaks  and  the  person  spoken  to 


Has  he  seen  this  one  or  that  one  ? 
He  has  seen  this  one  ;  he  has  not 

seen  that  one. 
Has  the  man  seen  this  one  or  that 

one? 


I  Ha  visto  el  este  6  aquel  ? 

El  ha  visto  este  ;  el  no  ha  visto 

aquel. 
Ha  visto  el  hombre  este  6  aquel  ? 


But.  Pero — sino. 

The  conjunction  but,  not  being  preceded  by  a  negative,  is  expressed 
by  pero  or  mas  ;   after  a  negative  by  sino.  * 

He  has  seen  this  one,  but  not  that 

one. 
He  has  not  seen  this  one,  but  that 

one. 
The  note,  the  billet,  the  ticket. 
The  corn. 
Have    you  received  this  ticket  or 

that  one  ? 
I  have  not  received  this   one,  but 

that  one. 
I  have   received  this  one,  but  not 

tbat  one. 
Has  the  neighbor    seen  this   mat- 
tress, or  that  one  ? 
He  has  seen  this  one,  but  not  that 

one. 


El  ha  visto  este,  pero  no  aqueL 

El  no  ha  visto  este,  sino  aquel. 

El  billete. 
El  grano. 
I  Ha  recibido  Vd.  este  billete  6 

aquel  ? 
No  he  recibido  este,  sino  aqueL 

He  recibido  este,  pero  no  aqueL 

I  Ha  visto  el  vecino  este  colchon  4 

aquel  ? 
El  ha  visto  este,  pero  no  aquel. 


*  It  is  to  be  observed,  that  although  sino  is  the  most  proper  to  be 
used  after  a  negative,  pero  or  mas  is  preferable  when  the  verb  is  re 
peated  ;  as,  "They  did  not  go  on  Monday,  but  they  went  on  Tuesday — 
Ellos  no  fueron  el  Lunes,  pero  or  mas  fucron  el  Martes." 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


41 


That  or  which. 

Have  you  the  note  that  my  brother 
has  received  ? 

I  have  not  the  note  that  your  broth- 
er has  received. 


Que. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  el  billete  que  mi  her 

mano  ha  recibido  ? 
No  tengo  el  billete  que  su  herma- 

no  ha  recibido. 


Have  you  the  horse  that  I  have  re- 
ceived from  my  friend  ? 

I  have  the  horse  that  you  have  re- 
ceived from  your  friend. 


That  which,  the  one  which. 

I  have  not  the  one  which  you  have 
received. 

I  have  the  one  which  he  has  re- 
ceived. 

Have  I  the  glove  which  you  have 
received  ? 

You  have  not  the  one  which  I  have 
received. 


I  Tiene  Vd.  el  caballo  que  he  reci- 
bido de  mi  amigo  ? 

Tengo  el  caballo  que  Vd.  ha  reci- 
bido de  su  amigo. 


El  que. 
No  tengo  el  que  Vd.  ha  recibido 


Tengo  el  que  61  ha  recibido. 

I  Tengo  yo  el  guante  que  Vd.  ha 

recibido  ? 
Vd.  no  tiene  el  que  yo  he  recibido. 


What. 
What  a  pity ! 

What  a  beautiful  country  ! 
"What  a  handsome  dog ! 
What  a  beautiful  boy ! 
What  a  shame  ! 


Que. 

;  Que*  lAstima ! 
i  Que'  hermoso  pals ! 
j  Que  hermoso  perro ! 
;  Que'  lirdo  muchaoho ! 
;  Que"  vergiienza ! 


The  note  of  exclamation  inverted  (;)  is  placed  in  Spanish  before  the 
exclamation.    It  is  the  same  with  the  interrogation  note  (j)  (?). 


Exercise  No.  13. 

Which  hay  have  you  ?  I  have  that  of  the  countryman. 
Has  the  tailor  received  my  new  vest  ?  He  has  not  received 
it.  Have  you  received  this  fish  or  that  one  ?  I  have  re- 
ceived this  one.  Have  you  seen  the  hay  of  the  stranger  ? 
I  have  not  seen  it.  Have  you  seen  this  mattress  ?  I  have 
seen  it.  Which  looking-glass  have  you  ?  I  have  my  own. 
Who  has  received  this  note?  This  man  has  received  it. 
Who  has  received  that  candlestick  ?    Your  friend  has  re- 


4*2  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

ceived  it.  Have  you  the  corn  of  your  garden  or  that  of 
mine  ?  I  have  neither  that  of  your  garden  nor  that  of 
mine,  but  that  of  the  merchant.  Who  has  my  glove  ? 
That  servant  has  it.  What  has  your  servant  seen  ?  He 
has  seen  the  tree  of  the  garden.  Has  the  countryman  seen 
this  or  that  bird  ?  He  has  seen  neither  this  nor  that,  but 
that  which  the  boy  has  received.  What  gentleman  has  re- 
ceived my  ticket  ?  This  gentleman  has  received  your  ticket, 
and  your  neighbor  has  received  mine.  Have  I  your  ticket 
or  his  ?  You  have  neither  mine  nor  his,  but  that  of  your 
friend.  Have  you  this  gentleman's  cotton  handkerchief? 
I  have  not  this  gentleman's  handkerchief.  Who  has  it  ? 
Your  brother  has  it.  Has  the  stranger  received  my  bird 
or  his  own  ?  He  has  received  neither  yours  nor  his  ;  he 
has  received  that  of  the  captain.  Have  you  seen  my  gar- 
den ?  I  have  not  seen  it.  Are  you  hungry  or  thirsty  't  No, 
Sir,  I  am  sleepy.  Are  you  afraid  or  ashamed  ?  I  am  afraid. 
Are  you  cold  or  warm  ?    I  am  cold. 


Exercise  No.  14 

What  is  the  matter  with  the  captain  ?  What  captain  ? 
The  Spanish  captain.  Nothing  is  the  matter  with  him. 
Who  has  his  ship  ?  The  American  captain  has  it.  Has  the 
sailor  received  this  or  that  bird  ?  He  has  not  received  this 
bird  but  that  one.  Has  your  servant  seen  that  mattress  or 
this  one  ?  He  has  seen  this  one,  but  not  that  one.  Has 
your  cook  received  this  chicken  or  that  one  ?  He  has  re- 
ceived neither  this  nor  that  one,  but  that  of  his  neighbor. 
Has  the  stranger  his  knife  ?  No,  Sir,  he  has  that  of  the 
French  boy.  Have  you  the  note  which  my  brother  has  re- 
ceived ?  I  have  it  not.  Which  ticket  have  you?  I  ha-\e 
my  own.  Which  thread  have  you  ?  I  have  that  which  the 
tailor  has  received.  Have  you  the  fine  horse  which  my 
friend  has  received?  I  have  not  that  which  he  has  re- 
ceived, but  the  one  which  the  Frenchman  has  seen. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES,  43 

Exercise  No.  15. 

j  Que  verguenza  !  El  capitan  ingles  tiene  miedo.  I  Que 
tiene  ?  Tiene  miedo  y  verguenza.  j  Que  lastima  !  £  Quier, 
tiene  su  buque  ?  El  capitan  frances  lo  tiene.  <?  Que  tiene 
el  jeneral  espafiol  ?  Tiene  calor.  j  Que  hermoso  perro  ! 
I  Quien  ha  recibido  este  perro  ?  El  jeneral  americano  lo 
ha  recibido  de  su  amigo  el  capitan  espafiol.  £  Ha  recibido 
Vd.  este  pafio  del  sastre  ?  No,  Sefior,  no  lo  he  recibido 
del  sastre,  sino  de  mi  amigo  el  frances.  j  Que  hermoso 
pajaro !  <?  Quien  lo  ha  recibido  ?  Mi  cocinero  lo  ha  re- 
cibido de  su  paisano  el  marinero  espafiol.  £  Cual  saco 
tiene  el  joven?  Tiene  el  que  mi  muchacho  ha  recibido  de 
Vd.  <?  Tengo  yo  el  cordon  de  oro  de  Vd.  ?  Vd.  no  lo  tiene. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  mi  chaleco  ?  No  lo  tengo.  <;  Cual  tiene  Vd.  ? 
Tengo  el  que  mi  hermano  ha  recibido  del  ingles.  £  Tiene 
Vd.  frio  ?  No,  Sefior,  tengo  calor.  $  Tiene  alguien  mi  para- 
guas?  Nadie  lo  tiene.  £  Tiene  alguien  miedo?  Nadie 
tiene  miedo  sino  mi  amigo. 


NINTH  LESSON. 

DECIiBNSION  OF  THE  DEFINITE  MASCULINE  ABTICLE  IN  THE  PLUEAIi. 


Norn. 

the. 

los. 

Foss. 

of  or  from  the. 

de  los. 

Obj. 

to  the. 

4  los. 

The  Articles,  like  the  Pronouns,  must  agree  with  their 
substantives  and  adjectives  in  Gender,  Number  and  Case. 

FORMATION   OF   THE   PLURAL. 

1st  Buh. — Nouns  terminating  with  a  vowel,  not  being  art 
accented  a  or  i  form  the  plural  by  adding  an  s  to  the  sin- 
gular. This  rule,  as  well  as  the  following,  is  not  only 
applicable  to  Nouns,  but  also  to  the  Article,  to  Adjectives, 
and  to  many  of  the  Pronouns. — Ex.  : 

El  libro,  los  libros. 

El  libro  bueno,  los  libros  bueno* 

Del  libro,  de  los  libros. 

El  tisu,  los  tisiis. 

El  pie',  los  pies. 


The  book,  the  books. 

The  good  book,  the  good  books, 

Of  the  book,  of  the  books. 

The  tissue,  the  tissues. 

The  foot,  the  feet. 


44 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


2d  Rule. — When  the  noun  terminates  with  y,  an  accented 
a  or  i,  or  a  consonant,  the  plural  is  formed  by  addiug  es  to 
the  singular.^) — Ex.  : 


Tb^  ox,  the  oxen. 
The  king,  the  kings. 
The  bashaw,  the  bashaws. 
The  gillihower,  the  gilhnowers 
The  wild  boar,  the  wild  boars. 
The  stick,  the  sticks. 
The  pencil,  the  pencils. 
The  Spaniard,  the  Spaniards. 


El  buey,  los  bueyes. 
El  rey,  los  reyes. 
El  baja,  los  bajaes 
El  aleli,  los  aleiies. 
El  jabali,  los  jabalies. 
El  baston,  los  bastones. 
El  lapiz,  los  lapizes. 
El  espafiol,  los  espafioles. 


3d  Rule. — If  the  final  consonant  be  an  s  preceded  by  a 
vowel,  and  the  stress  of  the  voice  does  not  lie  on  the  last 
syllable,  no  change  takes  place  in  the  formation  of  the  plu- 
ral.— Ex.  : 


The  atlas,  the  atlases. 
The  parenthesis,  the  parentheses. 
The  crisis,  the  crises. 
Monday,  Mondays. 
Tuesday,  Tuesdays. 
Wednesday,  Wednesdays. 
Thursday,  Thursdays. 
Friday,  Fridays. 


El  atlas,  los  atlas. 

El  pare'ntesis,  los  pare'ntesis. 

La  crisis,  las  crisis. 

El  Lunes,  los  Liines. 

El  Martes,  los  Martes. 

El  Miercoles,  los  Mi  Creoles. 

El  Jue'ves,  loi  Judves. 

El  Viernes,  los  Viernes. 


The  same  rule  is  applied  to  nouns  compounded  of  a  verb 
and  a  substantive. 

The  umbrella,  the  umbrellas. 
The  pen-knife,  the  pen-knives. 
The  lightning  rod,   the  lightning 
rods.. 

Finally,  there  are  some  nouns  which  are  always  used  in 
the  plural ;  as, 


El  paraguas,  los  paraguas. 

El  cortapliimas,  los  cortaplumas. 

El  pararayos,  los  pararayos. 


Handcuffs. 

Fetters. 

Pin-money. 

A  piece  of  good  news. 

Jealousy. 


My. 

Your. 


Esposas. 
Grillos. 
Alfileres. 
Albricias. 
Celos  (or  zelos). 


Singular. 

Mi. 

Su. 


Plural. 
Mis. 

Sus. 


(1).  Except  papa,  mama,  and  sofa,  whose  plurals  are  papas,  mama*, 
and  sofas. 


PBACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


45 


Bis  or  her. 

Our. 

Their. 

His  or  her  books. 

Our  book,  our  books. 

Their  book,  their  books. 

Which  book,  which  books  ? 

Which  oue,  which  ones  ? 

This  or  that  book. 

These  or  those  books. 

This  or  that  pencil. 

These  or  those  pencils. 


Su.  Sus. 

Nuestro.  Nuestros. 

Su.  Sus. 

Sus  libros  (2). 

Nuestro  libro,  nuestros  libros, 

Su  libro,  sus  libros. 

I  Cual  libro,  cuales  libros  ? 

,iCual,  cuales  r 

Este  libro  6  aquel. 

Estos  libros  6  aquellos. 

Este  lapiz  6  aquel. 

Estos  lapizes  6  aquellos. 


Which  horses  have  you  ? 

I  have  the  fine  horses  of  your 
neighbors. 

Have  I  my  pretty  gloves  ? 

You  have  not  your  pretty  gloves  ; 
you  have  my  old  hats. 

Which  gloves  have  I  ? 

You  have  the  ugly  gloves  of  your 
brothers. 

Have  you  the  hammers  of  the  car- 
penters ? 

I  have  not  their  hammers,  but 
their  nails. 

Has  your  brother  my  gold  tissues  ? 

He  has  not  your  gold  tissues. 

Which  ones  has  he  ? 

Have    you    the    Frenchman's    fine 

umbrellas  ? 
I  have  not  his  fine  umbrellas,  but 

his  sofas. 
My  gilliiiowers. 
Their  asses. 
Of  my  gardens. 
Hive  you  the  trees  of  my  gardens  ? 

I  have   not  the  trees  of  your  gar- 
dens. 
Of  my  pretty  gardens. 


;  Cuales  caballos  tiene  Vd.  ? 

Tengo  los  hermosos  caballos  de 
sus  vecinos  de  Vd. 

I  Tengo  yo  mis  guantes  bonitos? 

Vd.  no  tiene  sus  guantes  bonitos  ; 
Vd.  tiene  mis  sombreros  viejos. 

,;  Cuales  guantes  tengo  yo  ? 

Vd.  .tiene  los  guantes  feos  de  sua 
hermanos. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  los  martillos  de  los  car- 
pinteros  ? 

No  tengo  sus  martillos,  sino  sus 
clavos. 

j  Tiene  su  hermano  mis  tisiis  de 
oro? 

No  tiene  sus  tisiis  de  oro. 

I  Cuales  tiene  e'l  ? 

I  Tiene  Vd.  los  hermosos  paraguas 
del  los  franceses  ? 

No  tengo  sus  hermosos  paraguas. 
sino  sus  sofas. 

Mis  alelies. 

Sus  burros. 

De  mis  jardines. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  los  arboles  de  mis  jar- 
dines? 

No  tengo  los  arboles  de  sus  jar- 
dines  de  Vd. 

De  mis  bonitos  jardines. 


(2).  It  is  to  be  noticed  that  in  Spanish  the  Possessive  pronoun  does 
not  derive  its  number  or  gender  from  the  number  or  gender  of  the  per* 
son  or  thing  to  which  it  belongs,  but  from  the  number  or  gender  ol  the 
person  or  thing  possessed.  Consequently,  we  must  say  sus  Ubros,  speak- 
ing  of  many  books  belonging  to  one  or  more  persons. 


46 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


Of  my  fine  horses.  De  mis  hermosos  caballoa 

I  have  not  your  cotton  handker-    No  tengo  sus  panuelos  de  algodon, 

chiefs. 
The  bread,  the  loaves.  El  pan,  los  panes. 

The  gun,  the  guns.  El  fusil,  los  fusiles. 

The  son,  the  sons.  El  hijos ,  los  hijos. 

There  are  in  Spanish  certain  masculine  nouns,  which,  used  in 
the  plural,  comprehend  the  individuals  of  both  sexes.  Example  • 
Hijos,  son  and  daughter  ;  Padres,  father  and  mother,  or  parents , 
Jlermanos,  brother  and  sister  ;  Tios,  uncle  and  aunt ;  Sobrinos,  nephew 
and  niece ;  Metos,  grand-son  and  grand-daughter ;  Abuelos,  grand- 
father and  grand-mother — and  so  on  as  to  all  other  relations.  In  the 
same  manner  all  the  hereditary  titles  or  dignities,  from  Baron  and  Count 
to  King  and  Emperor,  when  used  in  the  plural,  l^ply  also  the  indivi- 
duals of  both  sexes.  Thus,  by  saying,  for  example,  los  duques  de  Mont- 
pensler,  we  denote  the  duke  and  duchess  of  that  titte.  It  ought  to  be 
understood  that  this  is  not  applicable  to  those  names  or  titles  derived 
from  public  offices,  as  President,  Senator,  Judge,  etc.,  because  by  them 
we  denote  the  persons  who  hold  such  offices,  and  not  their  wives,  who 
are  called,  for  instance,  La  Presidenta,  or  la  mujer  del  Presidente :  the 
Presidentess,  or  the  wife  of  the  President. 


Exercise  No.  16. 

Have  you  the  gloves  ?  Yes,  sir,  I  have  the  gloves.  Have 
you  seen  my  gloves  ?  No,  sir,  I  have  not  seen  your  gloves. 
Have  you  my  fine  looking-glasses  ?  Yes,  sir,  I  have  your 
fine  looking-glasses.  Have  I  your  good  guns?  You  have 
not  my  good  guns.  Which  oxen  has  the  countryman? 
He  has  the  old  oxen  of  his  friends.  Has  the  foreigner  our 
pretty  sticks  ?  He  has  not  our  pretty  sticks,  but  our  good 
ships.  Who  has  my  fine  horses  ?  Nobody  has  your  fine 
horses,  but  somebody  has  your  old  asses.  Has  your  neigh- 
bor seen  the  trees  of  your  garden?  He  has  not  seen  the 
trees  of  my  garden,  but  he  has  seen  your  pretty  notes 
Have  you  the  horses'  hay  ?  I  have  not  their  hay,  but  theii 
shoes  (herraduras).  Has  your  tailor  my  pretty  gold  but 
tons?  He  has  not  your  pretty  gold  buttons,  but  your 
pretty  gold  strings.  What  has  the  sailor  ?  He  has  his  fine 
ships.  Has  he  my  gilliflowers  or  my  knives?  He  has 
neither  your  gilliflowers  nor  your  knives.  Who  has  the 
tailor's  good  vests?  Nobody  has  his  vests,  but  somebody 
has  his  copper  buttons.    Has  the  Frenchman's  boy  my  good 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  47 

umbrellas?  He  has  not  your  good  umbrellas,  but  your 
good  pencils.  Has  the  shoemaker  my  leather  shoes  ?  He 
has  your  leather  shoes.  What  has  the  Spanish  captain  ? 
He  has  the  good  Spanish  sailors.  What  has  our  friend 
the  young  Englishman  ?  He  has  his  fine  leather  trunks. 
Which  forks  have  you  ?    I  have  the  old  forks  of  our  cooks. 


Exercise  No.  17. 

£  Cuales  colchones  tiene  el  marinero  ?  Tiene  los  buenos 
colchones  de  su  capitan.  £  Cuales  jardines  tiene  el  frances ? 
Tiene  los  jardines  de  los  ingleses.  <;  Cuales  criados  tiene 
el  ingles  ?  Tiene  los  criados  del  caballero  espafiol.  £  Que 
tiene  su  muchacho  de  Vd.  ?  Tiene  sus  bonitos  pajaros. 
I  Que  tiene  el  comerciante?  Tiene  nuestros  tisus.  £  Quo 
tiene  el  panadero  ?  Tiene  sus  panes.  I  Tiene  el  carpintero 
su  martillo  de  hierro  ?  No  tiene  su  martillo  de  hierro,  sino 
sus  clavos  de  cobre.  £  Cu&les  bizeochos  tiene  el  panadero  ? 
Tiene  los  bizeochos  de  sus  amigos.  ^  Tiene  nuestro 
amigo  nuestros  hermosos  cortaplumas  ?  No  tiene  nuestros 
hermosos  cortaplumas  ?  <?  Cuales  espejos  tiene  el  joven  ? 
Tiene  los  espejos  de  su  paisano.  £  Tiene  su  hermano  de 
Vd.  los  billetes  de  los  comerciantes  ?  No  tiene  los  billetes 
de  los  comerciantes,  sino  sus  candeleros  de  oro.  <;  Ha  reci- 
bido  Vd.  estos  billetes  ?  No  he  recibido  estos  billetes,  sino 
estos  cuchillos  de  hierro.  $Ha  recibido  el  hornbre  este 
billete  6  aquel  ?  No  ha  recibido  ni  este  ni  aquel.  £  Ha 
visto  Vd.  los  libros  que  he  recibido  ?  No  he  visto  los  libros 
que  Vd.  ha  recibido.  £  Ha  recibido  Vd.  estos  papeles  de  los 
franceses  6  de  los  americanos  ?  No,  Senor,  he  recibido 
estos  papeles  de  los  espanoles.  <?  Tiene  Vd.  el  chocolate  del 
jeneral  frances  6  el  de  su  amigo  de  Vd.  ?  No  tengo  ni  el  del 
jeneral  frances  ni  el  de  mi  amigo  ;  tengo  el  mio.  £  Tiene 
el  capitan  ingles  su  vino  6  el  que  Vd.  ha  recibido  ?  No 
tiene  ni  el  suyo  ni  el  que  he  recibido.  ,£  Cual  vino  tiene  el  ? 
Tiene  el  de  los  comerciantes.  $Ha  visto  Vd.  el  saco  que 
mi  criado  ha  recibido  ?  No  lo  he  visto.  <?  Tiene  el  campe- 
Bino  frio  6  calor  ?     No  tiene  ni  frio  ni  calor, 


.-.Mtm*. 


18 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


TENTH  LESSON. 


Those. 
Have  you  my  books  or  those  of  the 

man  ? 
'I    have    not  yours  but  those  of  the 

man. 
Have  you  received  your  books  ? 
I  have  not  received  my  books. 


Those  which. 

Have  you  the  books  which  I  have 
received  ? 

I  have  those  which  you  have  re- 
ceived. 

Has  the  Englishman  seen  the  knives 
which  you  have,  or  those  which 
I  have  ? 

He  has  seen  neither  those  which 
you  have,  nor  those  which  I 
have. 

Which  knives  has  he  seen? 

He  has  seen  those  of  our  friends. 

Which  forks  has  he  ? 

He  has  his  own. 

Mine,  or  my  own. 

Yours,  or  your  own. 

His,  hers,  (his  own,  her  own.) 

Ours,  or  our  own. 
Yours,  or  your  own. 
Theirs  (their  own.) 

Thine,  thy  own. 


These. 
Those. 

Those  books. 

Those  books. 

Have  you  seen  these  books  or  those? 

I  have  seen  neither  these  nor  those. 

Have  you  received  these  or  those  ? 

I  have  received  these,  I  have  not  re- 
ceived those. 

Have  I  the  looking-glasses  of  the 
French,  or  those  of  the  English  ? 

You  have  neither  these  nor  those. 

You  have  neither  the  former  nor  th? 
latter. 


Los. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  mis  libros,  6  los  del 

hombre  ? 
No  tengo  los  de  Vd.  sino  los  del 

hombre. 
I  Ha  recibido  Vd.  sus  libros  ? 
No  he  recibido  mis  libros. 


Los  que. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  los  libros  que  he  reci- 
bido? 
Tengo  los  que  Vd.  ha  recibido. 

«jHa  visto  el  ingles  los  cuchilloa 
que  Vd.  tiene,  6  los  que  yo  tengo? 

No  ha  visto  ni  los  que  Vd.  tiene,  ni 
los  que  yo  tengo. 

I  Cuales  cuchillos  ha  visto  el  ? 

Ha  visto  los  de  nuestros  amigos. 

£  Cuales  tenedores  tiene  el? 

Tiene  los  suyos. 

El  mio,  los  mios. 

Ei  de  Vd,  los  de  Vd. 

El  suyo,  or  el  de  j  los  suyos,  or  loa 

el,  (or  ella).       j  de  el,  {or  ella). 
El  nuestro,  los  nuestros. 
El  de  Vds.,  los  de  Vds. 
El  suyo,  or  el  de  j  los  suyos,  or  loa 

ellos  (ellas;.      1  de  ellos  (ellas). 
El  tuyo,  Los  tuyos. 


Estos. 

Aquellos,  esos. 
Estos  libros. 
Aquellos  libros. 

,;  Ha  visto  Vd.  estos  libros  6  aquellos? 
No  he  visto  ni  estos  ni  aquellos. 
I  Ha  recibido  Vd.  estos  6  aquellos  T 
He  recibido  estos,  no  he  recibido 

aquellos. 
I  Tengo  yo  los  espejos  de  los  franco- 

ses,  6  los  de  los  mgleses  ? 
Vd.  no  tiene  ni  estos  ni  aquellos. 
Vd.  no  tiene  ni  estos  ni  aquellos. 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


49 


In  Spanish,  the  former  and  the  latter,  are  generally  expressed  by  este, 
tsbjs,  referring  to  the  latter,  and  aqael,  aqadlos  to  the  former. 


Has   the  man  seen  these  birds  or 

those  ? 
He  has  seen  these,  but  not  those. 
Have  you  your  muskets  or  mine  ? 
I  have  neither  yours  nor  mine,  but 

those  of  our  good  friends. 


I  Ha  visto  el  hombre  estos  pajaros  6 

aquellos  ? 
Ha  visto  estos,  pero  no  aquellos. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  sus  fusiles  6  los  mios  ? 
No  tengo  ni  los  de  Vd.  ni  los  iuu^ 

sino  los  de  nuestros  buenos  ami 

gos. 


Exercise  No.  18. 

Have  you  these  or  those  notes?  I  have  these,  but  not 
those.  Have  you  the  horses  of  the  French  or  those  of  the 
English  ?  I  have  those  of  the  English,  but  I  have  not 
those  of  the  French.  Which  oxen  have  you  ?  I  have  those 
or  the  foreigners.  Have  you  the  forks  which  I  have  re- 
ceived from  the  Spaniards  ?  I  have  not  those  which  you 
have  received  from  the  Spaniards,  but  those  which  my 
brother  has  received  from  you.  Has  your  son  your  biscuits 
or  mine  ?  He  Las  neither  yours  nor  mine.  Which  biscuits 
has  he  ?  He  has  his  own.  Which  asses  has  your  friend  ? 
He  has  the  English  asses.  Has  your  boy  my  knives  or 
his  ?  He  has  neither  yours  nor  his,  but  he  has  those  of  the 
captain.  Have  I  your  vests  or  those  of  the  tailors  ?  You 
have  neither  these  nor  those.  Have  I  your  penknives? 
You  have  not  ours,  but  those  of  our  neighbors.  Have  you 
the  birds  of  the  sailors  ?  I  have  not  their  birds,  but  their 
fishes.  Which  candlesticks  has  your  brother?  He  has 
mine.  Have  I  my  shoes  or  those  of  the  shoemaker's  ?  You 
have  not  yours,  but  theirs. 


Exercise  No.  19. 

Which  sugar  has  the  man  ?  He  has  ours.  Has  he  our 
cofTee?  He  has  it  not.  Have  you  our  mattresses  or  those 
of  the  strangers  ?  I  have  not  yours  but  theirs.  Has  your 
carpenter  our  hammers  or  those  of  our  friends  ?  He  has 
neither  ours  nor  those  of  our  friends.     Which  nails  has  he  ? 


50  THE   SPANISH  TEACHEK. 

He  nas  his  good  iron  nails.  Has  any  one  of  my  friends 
the  ships  of  the  English  ?  Not  one  of  your  friends  has  the 
ships  of  the  English,  but  somebody  has  those  of  the  French. 
Who  has  the  cook's  chickens  ?  Nobody  has  his  chickens, 
but  somebody  has  his  mutton.-  Who  has  his  cheese  ?  His 
boy  has  it.  Who  has  my  old  muskets  ?  The  countryman 
has  them.  Have  I  the  neighbor's  bag?  You  have  not  his 
bag,  but  his  corn.  Which  coal  has  the  young  man  ?  He 
has  the  Spaniard's.  Which  umbrellas  has  the  Frenchman 
received  ?  He  has  received  those  of  his  friends.  Has  he 
our  soap  ?  He  has  not  ours,  but  that  of  his  countrymen. 
Is  the  merchant's  boy  hungry  ?  He  is  not  hungry  but 
thirsty.  Is  your  friend  cold  or  warm  ?  He  is  neither  warm 
nor  cold.  Is  he  afraid  or  ashamed  ?  He  is  ashamed,  but 
not  afraid.  Am  I  right  or  not  ?  You  are  right.  Has  the 
baker  the  bread  of  our  servants  ?  He  has  not  their  bread, 
but  their  birds.  Has  he  anything?  He  has  nothing. 
What  is  the  matter  with  you  ?  Nothing  is  the  matter  with 
me. 


ELEVENTH  LESSON. 

AUGMENTATIVES. 

The  Augmentative  nouns  add  to  the  positive  the  significa- 
tion of  the  words  big  or  large,  and  are  formed  by  adding 
on,  azo,  onazo,  or  ote  for  the  masculine,  and  ona,  aza,  onaza, 
or  ota,  for  the  feminine,  but  suppressing  the  last  letter  if  it 
be  a  vowel. 

The  man. 

The  big  or  large  man. 

The  woman. 

The  big  or  large  woman. 


El  hombre. 

El  hombron. 

El  hombrazo. 

El  hombronazo. 
La  inujer. 

La  mnjerona. 
La  mujero naza. 

DIMINUTIVES. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  Diminutive  nouns,  viz. : 

1st.  Thoso  which  express  tenderness  or  gentleness  of  any 


PRACTICAL  EXEECISES. 


51 


object  whatever  that  is  small ;  and  their  termination  is  in 
ito,  ico,  for  the  masculine,  ita  or  ica  for  the  feminine,  fol- 
lowing the  same  rule  as  the  Augrnentatives  in  regard  to  the 


termination,  that  is,  suppressing 
vowel. 


the  last  letter  when  it  is  a 


The  inkstand. 

The  small,  or  pretty  little  inkstand. 
The  house. 

The  small,  or  pretty  little  house. 
The  turtle-dove. 

The  small,  or  pretty   little   turtle- 
dove. 


El  tintero. 
El  tinterifo. 
La  casa. 
La  casifa. 
La  t6rtola. 
La  tortolifa. 


It  is  the  same  regarding  proper  names  : 


John. 

Little  John. 
Adela. 
Little  Adela. 


Juan. 
Juanifo. 
Adela. 
AdelUa. 


2d.  Those  which  denote  contempt,  or  pity,  or  which  les- 
sen the  object  without  adding  the  idea  of  prettiness,  are 
generally  terminated  in  zuelo,  illo,  or  cillo. 


Dog. 

Pretty  little  dog. 

Ugly  little  dog. 


Perro. 
Perrifo. 
Perr  illo. 


Those  nouns  terminating  in  co  change  it  into  quito,  01 
quillo,  to  form  the  diminutive. 


Bag. 

Pretty  little  bag. 

Fan. 

Pretty  little  fan. 

Small. 

Smaller. 

Very  small. 

Extremely  small. 


Saco. 

Sa^mfo. 

Abanico. 

Abixniquito. 

Chico  (or  pequeno). 

Ghiquilo. 

Chiquiiito. 

Chiquirritito. 


Nouns  ending  in  r,  n,  or  e,  take  ciio  or  cillo,  to  form  the 
diminutive. 


52 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


Contemptible  little  woman. 
Miserable  little  man. 
The  fork. 

The  small  or  ugly  little  fork. 
The  button. 

The  pretty  little  button. 
Great. 

Anything  a    little    larger    than  a 
regular  size. 


MujerciZZa,  or  mujerzue?a. 

Hombreci/Jo,  or  hombrezueZo. 

El  tenedor. 

El  tenedorci^o. 

El  boton. 

El  botoneifo. 

Grande. 

Grandecifo. 


There  are  other  Diminutives  terminating  in  uito  or  uilto 
for  nouns  ending  in  go,  as  amigro,  kmiguitd  or  amiguillo,  and 
others  in  ete,  in,  ejo,  etc.,  though  the  latter  are  compara- 
tively little  used. 

The  plural  of  Augmentatives  and  Diminutives  is  formpd 
like  that  of  nouns. 

The  termination  azo  added  to  a  noun — suppressing  the 
last  letter  if  it  be  a  vowel — has  sometimes  the  import  to  be 
perceived  in  the  following  examples  ; 


Shoe. 

Zapato. 

Blow  with  a  shoe. 

Zapatazo. 

Cudgel. 

Garrote. 

Blow  with  a  cudgel. 

Garrotazo. 

Cannon. 

Canon. 

Cannon  shot. 

Canonazo. 

We  observed  that  the  adjectives  bueno,  malo,  uno,  primero, 
alguno,  tercero,  and  poatiero,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  lose 
the  final  o  when  used  before  a  masculine  noun  in  the  sin- 
gular ;  and  now  we  add  the  following,  which,  for  the  same 
reason,  require  a  change  in  their  termination,  viz.  : 

1st.  Ciento  (a  hundred)  loses  the  final  syllable  in  the  sin- 
gular when  immediately  followed  by  a  noun.     Example  : 


One  hundred  soldiers. 


|  Cien  soldados. 


But  whenever  Ciento  takes  after  it  another  number,  not 
being  1,000  or  1,000,000  it  preserves  all  its  letters.  Ex- 
ample :   " 


One  hunured  and  two  soldiers. 


\  Ciento  y  dos  soldados. 


PKACTICAL  EXEECISES. 


53 


San  Pedro. 
San  Jose*. 


2d.  Santo  (saint)  loses  also  the  syllable  to  when  followed 
by  a  proper  masculine  noun.     Example  : 

Saint  Peter. 
Sainfr  Joseph. 

We  except,  however,  from  this  rule  Santo  Tomas,  Santa 
Tome,  Santo  Toribio,  and  Santo  Domingo. 

3d.   Grande  (great,  large)  loses  the  syllable   de  before  a 
singular  noun  beginning  with  a  consonant.     Example  * 

El  gran  proyecto. 


The  great  project. 
The  great  battle. 
The  great  friend. 
The  great  prattler. 
The  great  writer. 


La  gran  batalla. 
El  grande  amigo. 
El  grande  hablador. 
El  grande  escritor. 


It  is  worthy  of  notice,  as  a  peculiarity,  that  the  Adjec- 
tives grande,  pobre,  pequefto,  and  alguno,  convey  a  different 
meaning  according  to  the  place  they  occupy  with  the  sub  - 
stantives.     Examples  : 


A  great  man. 

A  big  or  large  malt 

A  needy  man. 

An  unhappy  or  weak  man. 

A  needy  writer. 

A  poor  writer. 

An  insignificant  man. 

A  small  or  short  man. 

Some  man. 

Any  man. 


Un  grande  hombre. 
Un  hombre  grande. 
Un  hombre  pobre. 
Un  pobre  hombre. 
Un  escritor  pobre. 
Un  pobre  escritor. 
Un  pequefio  hombre. 
Un  hombre  pequefio. 
Algun  hombre. 
Hombre  alguno. 


It  will  be  readily  observed  by  the  examples  above  that 
the  adjectives  grande,  pequefio,  etc.,  placed  before  the  sub- 
stantive, qualify  the  merit,  and  placed  after  it,  qualify  the 
shape  or  size. 


Exercise  No.  20. 

Who  has  my  pretty  little  dog  ?  The  large  woman  has  it. 
What  is  the  matter  with  that  miserable  little  man  ?  Noth- 
ing is  the  matter  with  him.  Have  you  seen  my  pretty  little 
house  ?  I  have  not  seen  your  pretty  little  house  ;  but  I 
have  seen  your  ugly  little  dog.     Which  inkstand  have  you  ? 


54  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

I  have  the  pretty  little  inkstand  of  my  little  brother.  Which 
horse  have  you  seen  ?  I  have  seen  the  little  horse  of  my 
friend.  Who  has  your  little  book  ?  My  little  friend  has  it. 
Have  you  received  anything  from  that  large  man  ?  I  have 
received  nothing  from  that  big  man,  but  my  little  boy  has 
received  something  from  that  big  woman.  What  is  the 
matter  with  that  contemptible  little  woman?  Nothing. 
Have  you  the  biscuit  of  little  John  ?  I  have  not  his  bis- 
cuit, but  his  pretty  little  bird.  Has  my  little  ass  his  hay  ? 
He  has  it  not.  What  a  large  man  !  What  a  large  woman ! 
Have  you  my  little  bag  ?  I  have  not  your  little  bag,  but 
your  little  gold  plate.  Which  bird  has  my  son  ?  He  has 
his  pretty  little  turtle-dove.  Have  you  his  little  fork  ?  I 
have  not  his  little  fork,  but  I  have  his  little  knife.  Have 
you  the  little  vest  of  the  little  boy  ?  I  have  it  not,  but  I 
have  his  little  gold  button.  Have  you  seen  the  little  note 
which  little  Adela  has  received  from  her  little  friend  ?  I 
have  not  seen  the  little  note,  but  I  have  seen  her  little 
friend. 


Exercise  No.  21. 

What  number  of  English  soldiers  have  you  seen  ?  I  have 
seen  one  hundred  soldiers.  I  have  seen  one  hundred  and 
six  soldiers.  What  is  the  matter  with  that  needy  man  ? 
Nothing  is  the  matter  with  him.  Have  you  seen  some 
birds  ?  I  have  not  seen  any  bird.  Have  you  some  great 
project?  I  have  not  any  project.  Is  the  great  French 
captain  ashamed  or  afraid  ?  He  is  ashamed,  but  not  afraid. 
Have  you  seen  my  great  horse  ?  I  have  not  seen  your  great 
horse,  but  your  large  horse.  Is  the  great  man  thirsty  ?  The 
great  man  is  not  thirsty  ;  but  the  big  man  is  afraid.  What 
is  the  matter  with  that  poor  writer  ?  Nothing  is  the  mat- 
ter with  the  poor  writer  ;  but  the  needy  writer  is  hungry. 
Who  has  received  a  (im)  blow  with  a  shoe?  That  little 
boy.  What  has  that  little  sailor  received  ?  He  has  re- 
ceived a  blow  with  a  cudgel.  Has  your  ship  received  some 
cannon  shot  ?     My  ship  has  not  received  any  cannon  shot. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


55 


TWELFTH  LESSON. 


The  comb. 

The  glass,  the  tumbler. 

Have  you  my  small  glasses  ? 

I  have  them. 

Thorn. 

Has  he  my  fine  glasses  ? 

He  has  them. 


The  scholar  will  apply  to  los 

regarding  to. 

Have  I  received  them  ? 

You  have  received  them. 

You  have  not  received  them. 

Has  the  Spaniard  my  fine  gold  but- 
tons ? 

He  has  them  not. 

Have  the  English  them  ? 

The  boys  have  them. 

Have  the  boys  them  ? 


El  peine. 

El  vaso. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  mis  vasitos 

Los  tengo, 

Los. 

;Tiene  el  mis  hermosos  tasos ? 

El  los  tiene. 


the  rule  given  in  the  Second  Lesson 


I  Los  he  recibido  yo  ? 
Vd.  los  ha  recibido. 
Vd.  no  los  ha  recibido. 
I  Tiene  el  espafiol  mis  hermosos  bo- 
tones  de  oro  ? 
El  no  los  tiene. 
;  Los  tienen  los  ingleses  ? 
Los  muchachos  los  tienen. 
I  Los  tienen  los  muchachos  ? 


They. 
They  hav»  them. 
They  have  them  not. 
Who  has  them  ? 
The  German. 
The  Italian. 
The  Turk. 
The  Mexican. 
The  Russian. 
The  Prussian. 
The  Germans  have  them. 
The  Mexicans  have  them  not. 


Some  (1)  any  (2). 


Elix)S. 
Ellos  los  tienen. 
Ellos  no  los  tienen. 
i  Quien  los  tiene  ? 
El  aleman. 
El  italiano. 
El  turco. 
El  mejicano. 
El  ruso. 
El  prusiano. 

Los  alemanes  los  tienen. 
Los  mejicanos  no  los  tienen. 


Alguno. 


Ahjuno,  before  a  noun,  means  some  ;  after  a  noun,  means  any.  (See 
Eleventh  Lesson.) 

1.  Some,  before  a  singular  noun,  which  means  something  to  eat  or 
to  drink,  is  generally  expressed  by  un  poco  de;  as,  "  Trdlgame  Vd.  un 
poco  de  agua,"  bring  me  some  water. 

2.  Any,  interrogatively  used,  before  a  singular  noun  which  expresses 
something  to  eat,  or  to  drink,  is  generally  suppressed  ;  as,  "  i  Hay  vino 
en  la  botella  ?"  is  there  any  wine  in  the  bottle  ?  Should  any  precede  any 
other  kind  of  noun,  it  may  be  either  suppressed  or  expressed  like  some; 
as,  i  Tiene  Vd.  algunos  libros,  or  tiene  Vd.  libros  ?  have  you  any  books  ? 


56 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


But  when  a  noun  is  used  in  Spanish,  without  being  preceded  by 
any  definite  adjective,  it  has  a  partitive  meaning  by  itself.  Ex.  :  En 
todas  partes  hay  hombrts  honrados :  everywhere  there  are  some  honest 
men. 


The  fire. 

The  sealing  wax. 

The  vinegar. 

The  tea. 

Have  you  any  fire  ? 

I  have  some  fire. 

Has  the  Italian  any  sealing  wax  ? 

He  has  some  sealing  wax. 

Has  he  any  vinegar  ? 

He  has  some  vinegar. 

Have  you  any  tea  ? 

I  have  some  tea. 


No  or  not  any  (before  a  noun). 

I  have  no  fire. 

He  has  no  tea. 

You  have  no  sealing  wax. 

They  have  no  friends. 

Some  or  any  good  vinegar. 

Some  or  any  bad  cheese. 

Some  or  any  excellent  tea. 

Some  or  any  good  coffee. 

Some  or  any  good  books. 

Some  or  any  pretty  glasses. 

Some  or  any  fine  horses. 

Some  or  any  old  wine. 

The  satin. 

The  velvet. 

The  picture. 

The  painter. 

The  pencil  (of  the  painter). 

Have  you  any  good  satin  ? 

I  have  no  good  satin,  but  some  ex- 
cellent velvet. 

Has  the  painter  any  fine  pictures  ? 

He  has  not  any  fine  pictures,  but 
some  good  pencils. 


El  fuego. 

El  lacre. 

El  vinagre. 

Elte-. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  fuego  ? 

Tengo  fuego. 

,j  Tiene  el  italiano  lacre? 

Tiene  lacre. 

I  Tiene  vinagre  ? 

Tiene  vinagre. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  t<$? 

Tengo  te*. 


No. 
No  tengo  fuego. 
El  no  tiene  te. 
Vd.  no  tiene  lacre. 
No  tienen  amigos. 
Vinagre  bueno. 
Queso  malo.  « 

Td  escelente. 
Cafd  bueno. 
Libros  buenos. 
Vasos  bonitos. 
Caballos  hermosos. 
Vino  afiejo. 
El  raso. 
El  terciopelo. 
El  cuadro. 
El  pintor. 
El  pincel. 

,;  Tiene  Vd.  raso  bueno  ? 
No  tengo  raso  bueno,  sino  ttr*eio- 

pelo  escelente. 
I  Tiene  el  pintor  cuadros  hermwiiw  f 
El  no  tiene  cxiadros  hermosos,  *riin> 

buenos  pinceles. 


Exercise  No.  22. 

Have  you  my  fine  glasses?  I  have  them.  Have  you  the 
fine  horses  of  the  Englishman  ?  I  have  them  not.  Who 
has  my  small  combs?     My  boys  have  them.    Which  knives 


PBACTICAL  EXERCISES.  5? 

lave  you?  I  have  those  of  your  friends.  Have  I  your 
good  muskets  ?  You  have  them  not,  but  your  friends  have 
them.  Have  you  my  pretty  birds,  or  those  of  my  brothers? 
I  have  neither  yours  nor  your  brothers',  but  my  own.  Which 
ships  have  the  Mexicans?  The  Mexicans  have  no  ships. 
Have  the  sailors  our  fine  forks?  They  have  them  not. 
Have  the  cooks  them  ?  They  have  them.  Has  the  captain 
your  pretty  books  ?  He  has  them  not.  Have  I  them  ?  You 
have  them.  You  have  them  not.  Has  the  Spaniard  them  ? 
He  has  them.  Have  the  Turks  our  fine  muskets  ?  They 
have  them  not.  Have  the  Italians  them  ?  They  have  them. 
Has  the  German  the  pretty  umbrellas  of  the  Frenchman  ? 
He  has  them.  Has  he  them  ?  Yes,  Sir,  he  has  them.  Has 
the  Spaniard  our  pretty  gloves  ?  He  has  them  not.  Who 
has  them  ?  The  English  have  them.  Has  the  tailor  our 
vests  or  those  of  our  friends  ?  He  has  neither  the  latter  nor 
the  former.  Has  your  brother  any  soap  ?  He  has  no  soap. 
Have  I  an}-  mutton  ?  You  have  no  mutton,  but  you  have 
some  sugar.  Have  your  friends  any  money  ?  They  have 
some  money.  Have  you  any  fire  ?  I  have  no  fire,  but  I 
have  coal.  Have  you  any  good  coffee?  I  have  no  good 
coffee,  but  some  excellent  wine. 


Exercise  No.  23. 

^  Tiene  el  comerciante  buenos  libros  ?  Tiene  buenos  li- 
bros.  i  Tienen  los  franceses  buenos  guantes  ?  Tienen  es- 
celentes  guantes.  J  Quien  tiene  los  hermosos  lapizes  de  los 
ingleses  ?  Sus  amigos  los  tienen.  ^  Quien  tiene  los  bizco- 
chos  de  los  panaderos  ?  Los  marineros  de  nuestro  capitan 
los  tienen.  <;  Tienen  ellos  nuestro  pafio  ?  Si,  Senor,  lo 
tienen.  ,?  Que  tienen  los  espafioles  ?  Tienen  hermosos 
cuadros.  i  Que  tienen  los  mejicanos  ?  Tienen  hermosos 
asnos.  i  Que  tienen  los  alemunes  ?  Tienen  te  escelente. 
i  Tiene  Vd.  amigos  ?  Tengo  amigos.  Tienen  lacre  sus 
amigos  de  Vd.  ?  Tienen  lacre.  ^  Tienen  buenos  zapatos 
los  zapateros?  No  tienen  buenos  zapatos,  sino  escelente 
becerro.  ,?  Tienen  los  sastres  buenos  chalecos  ?  No  tienen 
buenos  chalecos,  sino  escelente  pafio.     £  Tiene  paraguas  e\ 


58 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


pintor?  No  tiene  paraguas,  pero  tiene  hermosos  cuadros. 
I  Tiene  alguien  mis  peinecitos  ?  Nadie  los  tiene.  i  Quien 
tiene  los  hermosos  polios  del  paisano  ?  Su  cocinero  de  Vd. 
los  tiene.  iQue  tiene  el  joven  ?  Tiene  sus  bueyes.  ^  Tie- 
nen  sus  amigos  de  Yd.  vino  afiejo  ?  No  tienen  vino  afiejo, 
sino  escelente  vinagre.  i  Tiene  alguien  los  candeleros  de 
oro  de  Vd.  ?     Nadie  los  tiene. 


THIRTEENTH  LESSON. 


Some  of  it,  any  of  it,  of  it. 
Some  of  them,  any  of  them,  of 

THEM. 

Have  you  any  wine  ? 

I  have  some. 

Have  yon  any  bread  ? 

I  have  not  any,  or  none. 

Have  you  any  good  wine? 

I  have  some  good  wine. 

Has  the  merchant  any  sugar  ? 

He  has  some. 

He  has  not  any. 

Has  he  any  good  cheese  ? 

He  has  some  good  cheese. 

Have  I  any  coffee? 

You  have  some. 

You  have  no  coffee. 

You  have  not  any. 

Have  you  any  shoes  ? 

I  have  some. 

I  have  no  shoes. 

1  have  not  any. 

Has  the  man  any  good  horses  ? 

Has  he  any  good  knives  ? 

He  has  not  any,  or  none. 

Has  he  any  money? 

He  has  some. 

He  has  not  any. 

Have  our  friends  any  good  hats  ? 

They  have  some  good  hats. 
They  have  not  any  good  hats. 
Who  has  some  good  wine  ? 
Our  merchant  has  some. 
The  hatter. 
The  blacksmith. 


Un  poco  de. 


,;  Tiene  Vd.  vino  ? 

Tengo. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  pan? 

No  tengo. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  vino  bueno  ? 

Tengo  vino  bueno. 

I  Tiene  aziicar  el  comerciante  ? 

Tiene. 

No  tiene. 

I  Tiene  queso  bueno? 

Tiene  queso  bueno. 

I  Tengo  yo  cafe"  ? 

Vd.  tiene. 

Vd.  no  tiene  cafe. 

Vd.  no  tiene. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  zapatos? 

Tengo. 

No  tengo  zapatos. 

No  tengo. 

I  Tiene  el  hombre  buenos  caballcsf 

I  Tiene  el  buenos  cuchillos  ? 

No  tiene. 

I  Tiene  dinero  ? 

Tiene. 

No  tiene. 

,;  Tienen  nuestros  amigos  sombreros 

buenos  ? 
Tienen  sombreros  buenos. 
No  tienen  sombreros  buenos. 
I  Qui  en  tiene  vino  bueno  ? 
Nuestro  comerciante  tiene. 
El  sombrerero. 
El  herrero. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


59 


A,  an,  or  ONE. 


II 


Un,  before  a  masculine  noun. 
Uno,  when  it  stands  alone,  or  not 
before  a  masculine  noun. 


A  or  one  horse. 

Havo  you  an  umbrella  ? 

I  have  an  umbrella. 

Have  you  a  glass  ? 

I  have  no  glasses. 

I  have  one. 

Have  you  a  good  stick  ? 

I  have  a  good  one. 

I  have  two  good  ones. 

I  have  two  good  sticks. 

I  have  three  good  ones. 

Have  I  a  gun  ? 

Yoti  have  one. 

You  have  a  good  one. 

5Tou  have  two  good  ones. 

Has  your  brother  a  friend  ? 

He  has  a  friend. 

He  has  one. 

He  has  a  good  one. 

He  has  two  good  ones. 

He  has  three  good  ones. 

He  has  four  good  friends. 

He  has  five  good  ones. 

Has  the  blacksmith  a  knife  ? 

He  has  One. 

He  has  none. 

He  has  two  of  them. 

He  has  three. 

He  has  four. 

Have  you  five  good  horses  ? 

I  have  six. 

I  have  six  good,  and  seven  bad  ones. 

Who  has  a  fine  umbrella  ? 

The  merchant  has  one. 


Un  caballo. 

<j  Tiene  Vd.  un  paraguas? 

Tengo  un  paraguas. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  un  vaso  ? 

No  tengo  vasos. 

Tengo  uno. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  un  baston  bueno  ? 

Tengo  uno  bueno. 

Tengo  dos  buenos. 

Tengo  dos  bastones  buenos 

Tengo  tres  bjtoios. 

I  Tengo  yo  un  fusil  ? 

Vd.  tiene  uno. 

Vd.  tiene  uno  bueno. 

Vd.  tiene  dos  buenos. 

I  Tiene  su  hermano  un  amigo  ? 

Tiene  un  ainigo. 

Tiene  uno. 

Tiene  uno  bueno. 

Tiene  dos  buenos. 

Tiene  tres  buenos. 

Tiene  cuatro  buenos  amigos. 

Tiene  cinco  buenos. 

I  Tiene  el  herrero  un  cuchillo  ? 

Tiene  uno. 

No  tiene. 

Tiene  dos. 

Tiene  tres. 

Tiene  cuatro. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  cinco  caballos  buenos  ? 

Tengo  seis. 

Tengo  seis  buenos  y  siete  malos. 

I  Qui  en  tiene  un  paraguas  bermoso? 

El  comerciante  tiene  uno. 


Exercise  No.  24. 

Have  you  any  sugar?  I  have  some.  Have  you  any 
coffee  ?  I  have  not  any.  Have  you  any  good  wine  ?  I 
have  some  good  wine.  Have  you  received  any  good  cloth '? 
I  have  not  received  any  cloth,  but  I  have  received  some 
money.     Have  I  any  good  chocolate  ?    You  have  not  any 


U\t  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

good.  Has  the  American  any  rice  ?  He  has  some.  Have 
the  French  any  cheese  ?  They  have  not  any.  Have  thA 
English  any  new  hats  ?  They  have  no  new  hats,  but  they 
have  some  excellent  tea.  Who  has  some  good  soap  ?  The 
merchant  has  some.  Who  has  some  good  bread  ?  The 
baker  has  some.  Has  the  foreigner  any  coal  ?  He  has  not 
any.  Has  he  any  vests  ?  He  has  some.  What  fish  have 
you?  I  have  some  good  fish.  What  hay  has  the  horse? 
He  has  good  hay.  What  leather  has  the  shoemaker  ?  He 
has  some  excellent  leather.  Have  you  any  cotton  ?  I  have 
not  any.  Who  has  some  copper  ?  The  merchant  has 
some.  Have  I  any  gilliflowers  ?  You  have  some.  Have  I 
any  corkscrews?  You  have  no  corkscrews.  Has  your 
friend  any  old  knives  ?  He  has  some  old  ones.  Have  the 
Italians  any  fine  horses  ?  They  have  not  any  fine  ones. 
Who  has  some  fine  asses  ?  The  Mexicans  have  some.  Has 
the  captain  any  good  sailors  ?  He  has  some  good  ones. 
Who  has  some  biscuits  ?  The  baker  of  our  neighbor  has 
some.  Has  he  any  bread  ?  He  has  not  any.  Who  has 
excellent  iron  nails?  The  carpenter  has  some.  Has  he 
any  hammers  ?  He  has  some.  What  hammers  has  he  ? 
He  has  some  iron  hammers. 


Exercise  No.  25. 

I  Que  tiene  el  hermano  de  Vd.  ?  No  tiene  nada.  £  Tiene 
frio  ?  No  tiene  frio,  tiene  calor.  i  Tiene  miedo  ?  No  tiene 
miedo.  £  Tiene  vergiienza  6  hambre  ?  Tiene  hambre,  pero 
no  vergiienza.  i  Quien  tiene  guantes  bonitos  ?  Yo  tengo. 
I  Quien  tiene  hermosos  cuadros  ?  Los  espafioles  tienen. 
I  Tienen  los  pintores  hermosos  jardines  ?  Tienen  hermosos. 
I  Quien  tiene  hermosos  solas  ?  Nuestros  comerciantes  tienen. 
i  Tienen  pajaros  ?  No  tienen.  <?  Tiene  Vd.  arroz  ?  No 
tengo.  i  Quien  tiene  ?  Mi  criado  tiene.  <j,  Tiene  Vd.  un 
lapiz  ?  Tengo  uno.  £  Tiene  su  muchacho  de  Vd.  un  buen 
libro.  Tiene  uno  bueno.  ,;  Tiene  el  aleman  un  buen 
buque  ?  No  tiene.  &  Tiene  el  joven  un  buen  panuelo  ? 
Tiene  uno  bueno.  Tiene  dos  buenos.  Tiene  tres  buenos. 
£  Quien  tiene  buenos  tenedores  ?  El  americano  tiene.  £  Tiene 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  61 

el  capitan  un  hermoso  perro  ?  Tiene  dos.  -J  Tienen  sus 
amigos  de  Vd.  dos  caballos  herrnosos  ?  Tienen  cnatro. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  un  buen  cocinero  ?  Tengo  uno  bueno.  Tengo 
uno  malo.  i  Teugo  yo  un  ainigo  ?  Vd.  tiene  uno  bueno. 
Vd  tiene  dos  buenos  amigos.  Vd.  tiene  tres  buenos.  Su 
hermano  de  Vd.  tiene  cuatro  buenos.  £  Tiene  el  capitan  un 
clavo  de  hierro  ?  Tiene  seis  clavos  de  liierro.  Tiene  seis 
buenos  y  siete  malos.  <?  Quien  tiene  cinco  caballos  buenos  ? 
Nuestro  vecino  tiene  seis.  £  Quien  tiene  buenos  amigos  ? 
Los  turcos  tienen.  £  Tienen  ellos  dinero?  No  tienen. 
£  Quien  tiene  su  dinero  ?  Sus  amigos  lo  tienen.  i  Ha 
recibido  Vd.  estos  sacos  6  aqnellos  ?  No  be  recibido  ni 
estos  ni  aquellos.  £  Cuales  buques  ha  visto  Vd.  ?  He  visto 
los  mios.  i  Tiene  Vd.  un  buen  criado  ?  Tengo  uno  bueno. 
£  Quien  tiene  un  buen  baul  ?     Mi  hermano  tiene  uno. 


FOURTEENTH  LESSON. 

THE   FEMININE   GENDER. — DEFINITE  ARTICLE. 


Nom.  the. 

Poss.  of  or  from  the. 
Obj.  to  the. 


Singular.  Plural. 

la.  las. 

de  la.  de  las. 

&  la.  &  las. 


The  table,  the  tables.  [  La  mesa,  las  mesas. 

Of  or  from  the  table,  the  tables.        I  De  la  mesa,  de  las  mesas. 

To  the  table,  to  the  tables.  J  A  la  mesa,  a  las  mesas. 

The  Article  never  admits  of  any  elision  in  Spanish  ;  but 
there  are  some  feminine  Nouns  beginning  with  a  that  take 
the  masculine  Article  el  instead  of  la,  in  order  to  avoid  the 
disagreeable  meeting  of  two  a.  See  a  list  of  those  Nouna 
at  the  end  of  this  Lesson. 

RULES   TO   DISTINGUISH   THE   GENDER   OF   NOUNS. 

Eule  1. — Nouns  and  Adjectives  ending  in  a,  d,  ez,  ie, 
umbre,  or  ion,  are  feminine  ;  ending  otherwise  are  mascu- 
line, except  mano,  hand,  tarde,  evening,  noche,  night,  which 
are  feminine ;  dia,  day,  idioma,  language,  which  are  mascu- 
line.    See  list  of  other  exceptions  at  Lesson  55. 


62 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHEK. 


Rule  2. — The  letters  of  the  alphabet  are  feminine. 

The  plural  of  the  feminine  Nouns  is  formed  like  that  of 
the  masculine  ones  ;  and  the  Article,  like  the  Pronoun,  must 
agree  with  the  Substantives  and  Adjectives,  in  Gender, 
Number,  and  Case. 


EXAMPLES. 


The    woman,    the    wife,    women, 

wives. 
The  mother,  mothers. 
The  good  daughter,  good  daughters. 
The  sister,  sisters. 
The  cousin,  (/em.)  cousins. 
The  girl,  girls. 
The  servant,  (/em.)  servants. 


She,  they. 
Has  she  the  book? 
She  has  it  not. 
Have  they  (/em.)  it? 
They  have  it. 

This  or  that  woman. 
These  or  those  women. 

This  young  lady,  these  young 

dies. 
That  young  lady,  those  young 

dies. 

The  hand,  the  hands. 

The  right  hand. 

The  left  hand. 

The  face. 

The  mouth. 

The  cheek. 

The  tongue,  the  language, 

The  door. 

The  window. 

The  street. 

The  city. 

The  pen. 

The  note. 

The  bottle. 

The  candle. 


La  mujer,  las  mujeres. 

La  madre,  las  madres. 

La  buena  hija,  las  buenas  hijas. 

La  hermana,  las  hermanas. 

La  prima,  las  primas. 

La  muchacha,  las  muchachas. 

La  criada,  las  criadas. 


Ella,  ellas. 
^Tiene  ella  el  libro? 
No  lo  tiene. 
,:Lo  tienen  ellas? 
Lo  tienen. 


|  Esta  aquella,  or  esa  mujer. 

j  Estas  aquellas,  or  esas  mujeres. 


Esta  seiiorita,  estas  seiioritas. 
Aquella  seiiorita,  aquellas  senoritaSi 


La  mano,  las  manos. 

La  mano  derecha. 

La  mano  izquierda. 

La  cara. 

La  boca. 

La  mejilla. 

La  lengua. 

La  puerta. 

La  ventana. 

La  calle. 

La  ciudad. 

La  pluma. 

La  esquela  or  el  billete. 

La  botella. 

La  vela. 


Las. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  mi  pluma  ? 
No  la  tengo. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  mis  plumas  ? 
Las  tengo. 


PEACTICAL  EXERCISES.  63 

The  light.  La  luz. 

The  silver.  La  plata. 

The  cloak.  La  capa. 

The  letter.  La  carta. 

TLa  spoon.  La  cuchara. 

Them  (fern.) 
Have  you  my  pen  ? 
I  have  it  iiOt. 
Have  you  ray  pens? 
I  hk.ve  them. 

FEMININE   NOUNS   WITH    THE   MASCULINE   ARTICLE. 

JtCl  agua,  the  water  ;  el  ala,  the  wing  ;  el  alma,  the  soul ;  el 
ama,  the  mistress  ;  el  area,  the  chest ;  el  area,  the  area  ;  el 
habU,  the/  speech  ;  el  arma,  the  weapon  ;  el  asta,  the  horn  ;  el 
ave,  the  /owl  ;  el  uguila,  the  eagle  ;  el  alba,  the  dawn  ;  el 
hamvre,  tiunger  ;  el  arpa,  the  harp  ;  el  hacha,  the  axe  ;  el  aya, 
the  governess  ;  el  aura,  the  buzzard  ;  el  ansia,  the  anxiety  ; 
el  anola  or  dncora,  the  anchor  ;  el  ara,  the  altar  ;  el  asa,  the 
handie  ;  el  dscua,  the  red  hot  coal  ;  el  asma,  the  asthma  ;  el 
haba,  tli6  bean  ;  el  acta,  the  act ;  el  arte,  the  art  ;  el  aula,  the 
lectuie-Ldll ;  el  Asia,  Asia  ;  el  Africa,  Africa ;  el  Austria, 
Austiia  ,  instead  of  la  agua,  la  ala,  etc.,  all  for  the  sake  of 
euphony.  But  it  is  necessary  to  observe — l3t.  That  this 
change  of  Article  is  admitted  only  in  the  singular,  since  the 
clashing  of  the  two  vowels  does  not  take  place  in  the  plural. 
2d.  If  this  Noun  be  accompanied  by  an  Adjective,  this  Ad- 
jective must  be  put  in  the  feminine  ;  therefore,  we  say  el 
agua  esfria,  el  ala  derecha,  the  water  is  cold  ;  the  right  wing  ; 
and  not  el  agua  frio,  el  ala  derecho.  3d.  Observe  that  the 
Nouns  above  mentioned  are  nearly  all  which  usage  has  per- 
mitted to  deviate  from  the  general  rule  ;  and  amistad,  friend- 
ship ;  America,  America  ;  Habana,  Havana  ;  and  all  the 
other  feminine  Nouns  not  having  the  stress  of  the  voice  on 
the  first  a  are  not  comprehended  in  the  number  of  the  ex- 
ceptions, but  they  follow  the  general  rule. 


Exeiicise  No.  26. 
Has  the  servant  (female)  the. table  ?    No,  Sir,  she  has  it 
not.     Has  she  the  gold  pen  ?    She  has  it.     Have  you  seen 


64  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

my  table  ?  I  have  not  seen  it.  Have  you  the  water  ?  I 
have  it  not.  Have  you  received  the  fowl  ?  Yes,  I  have  re- 
ceived it.  Have  you  seen  the  eagle  ?  I  have  not  seen  it. 
Have  you  received  the  harp  ?  I  have  received  it.  Have 
you  received  my  letter?  No,  Sir,  I  have  not  received  it. 
Have  you  seen  my  pen  ?  I  have  not  seen  it.  Who  has  seen 
my  pen  ?  Nobody  has  seen  it.  Have  you  seen  my  little 
table  ?  (See  Lesson  XL,  Diminutive  Nouns.)  I  have  not 
seen  it.  Have  you  seen  my  little  house  ?  I  have  seen  it. 
Have  you  seen  my  pretty  little  bird  ?  I  have  seen  it.  Have 
you  seen  the  large  woman  ?  I  have  not  seen  the  large  wo- 
man, but  the  contemptible  little  woman.  Have  you  seen 
the  little  coat  (casaca)  of  my  little  brother  ?  I  have  seen  it. 
Have  you  seen  the  little  spoon  of  my  little  sister  ?  Have 
you  seen  the  pretty  little  gold  pen  of  my  little  cousin  (fe- 
male) ?  I  have  not  seen  her  little  gold  pen,  but  her  little 
hat.  Have  you  the  little  chair  (xilla)  of  my  little  sister?  I 
have  it  not.  Have  you  the  little  cup  (taza)  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I 
have  it. 


Exercise  No.  27. 

;,  Ha  recibido  Vd.  las  velas  ?  No  he  recibido  Hs  velas, 
pero  he  recibido  las  botellas.  ,?  Ha  visto  Vd.  lo,  ciudad  ? 
La  he  visto.  i  Ha  visto  Vd.  la  calle  ?  No  la  he  visto.  ^Ha 
visto  Vd.  la  puerta  ?  No  la  he  visto.  J  Ha  visto  Vd.  la 
ventana  ?  La  he  visto.  i  Ha  visto  Vd.  esta  mano  6  aquella  ? 
He  visto  esta,  pero  no  aquella.  £  Ha  visto  Vd.  la  mano  de- 
recha  ?  No  he  visto  la  mano  derecha,  sino  la  mano  izqui- 
erda.  £  Ha  visto  Vd.  esta  mujer  6  aquella  ?  He  visto  esta, 
no  he  visto  aquella.  <?  Ha  visto  Vd.  estas  mujeres  6  aque- 
Uas  ?  He  visto  estas,  pero  no  aquellas.  £  Ha  visto  Vd.  p-stas 
bonitas  senorifcas  6  aquellas?  No  he  visto  ni  estas  ni  aque- 
llas, pero  he  visto  la  tea.  ;  Ha  recibido  Vd.  sus  mesas  nne- 
vas?  No  he  recibido  las  nuevas,  sino  las  viejas.  ,;  Ha  visto 
Vd.  mi  casa  nueva  ?  No  la  he  visto.  £  Tiene  ella  su  m^sa  ? 
No  la  tiene.  £  Tiene  Vd.  la  cuchara  de  plata  ?  No  la 
tengo,  pero  tengo  la  pluma  de  plata.  i  Tiene  Vd.  la  capa 
de  mi  her  mano  ?    No  la  tengo.    £  Ha  visto  Vd.  las  hermosaa 


% 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


G5 


muchachas  ?  No  he  visto  las  hermosas  muchachas,  sino 
las  muchachitas.  ^Ha  visto  VJ.  la  criada?  No  he  visto 
la  criada. 


FIFTEENTH  LESSON. 


INDEFINITE   ARTICLE,    FEMININE. 


A,  AN  or  ONE. 

A  woman. 

A  young  woman. 

A  young  lady. 

A  pen. 

Have  you  a  pen  ? 

A  person. 

A  silk  stocking. 


Una. 

Una  mujer. 

Una  joven. 

Una  seilorita. 

Una  pluma. 

i  Tiene  "Vd.  una  pluma? 

Una  person*. 

Una  media  de  seda. 


PRONOUNS   POSSESSIVE   ABSOLUTE,    FEMININE. 


Mine  or  my  own. 
Yours  or  your  own. 
His  (or  hers,  its)  his  own. 
Ours  or  our  own. 
Yours  or  your  own. 
Theirs  or  their  own. 
Thine  or  thine  own. 


La  mia. 

La  de  Vd. 

La  suya  (or  la  de  el,  or  ella. ) 

La  nuestra. 

La  de  Vd. 

La  suya  (la  de  ellos  or  ellas). 

La  tuya. 


Iii  English  the  Possessive  adjectives  or  pronouns  are  m 
the  gender  of  the  possessor  ;  in  Spanish  they  must  be  in 
the  gender  of  the  thing  possessed — Mine,  thine,  his,  hers, 
yours,  etc.,  must  be  expressed  by  el  mio,  el  tuyo,  el  suyo, 
etc.,  when  the  thing  possessed  is  masculine,  and  by  la  mia, 
la  tuya,  la  suya,  etc.,  when  it  is  feminine,  without  consider- 
ing in  the  least  the  gender  of  the  possessor,  as  may  be  seen 
by  the  following  examples  : 

Have  you  my  pen  or  his? 

I  have  neither  yours  nor  his,  but 

mine. 
Have  you  my  sister's  book? 
I  have  not  hers,  I  have  mine. 
Which  candle  have  you  ? 
What  light  have  you  ? 
I  have  mine. 

Which  stockings  have  you  ? 
I  have  mine.  I 


I  Tiene  Vd.  mi  pluma  6  la  de  6*1  ? 
No  tengo  ni  la  de  Vd,  ni  1a  de  el, 

sino  la  mia. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  el  libro  de  mi  hermaaa? 
No  tengo  el  suyo,  tengo  el  mio. 
,;  Cual  vela  tiene  Vd.? 
I  Cual  luz  tiene  Vd.  ? 
Tengo  la  mia. 
,:  Cuales  medias  tiene  7d.  ? 
Tengo  las  mias. 


(>i6  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

ADJECTIVES,    THEIR    GENDER,    ETC. 

Adjectives  ending  in  o  change  o  into  a,  when  they  modify 
a  feminine  noun  :  Hombre  honrado,  honest  man  ;  mujer  hon- 
rada,  honest  woman  ;  hombre  virtuoso,  a  virtuous  man  ;  mujer 
virtuoso,,  a  virtuous  woman. 

Adjectives  ending  in  n  or  r  take  an  a  as,  fuego  devoradorf 
devouring  fire  ;  pasion  devoradora,  devouring  passion  ;  hom- 
bre haragan,  idle  man  ;  mujer  haragana,  idle  woman. 

Except  mejor,  peor,  superior,  inferior,  mayor,  menor,  jbven, 
ulterior,  interior,  esterior,  anterior,  posterior. 

Adjectives  ending  otherwise  keep  the  same  termination 
in  both  genders,  exito  admirable,  admirable  success  ;  mujer 
admirable,  admirable  woman  ;  hombre  feliz,  fortunate  man  ; 
mujer  feliz,  fortunate  woman  ;  maridofiel,  faithful  husband  ; 
esposafiel,  faithful  wife  ;  hijo  obediente,  obedient  son  ;  hija 
obedient e,  obedient  daughter.  But  those  Adjectives  derived 
from  the  names  of  nations,  provinces,  etc.,  always  take  an  a 
when  modifying  a  feminine  noun,  whatever  its  termination 
may  be.     Examples  : 


French  gold. 

French  silver. 

A  Spanish  gentleman. 

A  Spanish  lady. 

Cuban  Institute. 

Cuban  industry. 

English  government. 

English  Constitution. 

A  young  Andalusian. 

A  young  Andalusian  woman. 

An  American  senator. 

An  American  Jaly. 


Oro  francea. 
Plata  franc  esa. 
Un  caballero  espanoL 
Una  Sefiora  espafiola, 
Instituto  cubano. 
Industria  cubana 
Gobierno  ingles. 
Constitucion  inglesa. 
Un  j6ven  andaluz. 
Una  joven  andaiuza. 
Un  senador  americano. 
Una  sefiora  americana. 


There  are  included  in  the  class  of  Adjectives,  the  Cardi- 
nal and  Ordinal  numbers.  The  Cardinal  have  all  one  ter- 
mination, except  the  number  one  (uno),  and  the  compounds 
of  (ciento)  one  hundred,  as  doscientos,  doscientas.  The  Ordi 
nal  have  two  terminations. 

Two  or  more  nouns  in  the  singular  require  an  Adjective 
in  the  plural ;  and  if  the  nouns  vary  in  gender,  the  Adjective 
must  be  in  the  masculine.  Example  :  Life  and  honor  are 
dear  :  La  vida  y  el  honor  son  caros. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  67 

Exercise  No.  28. 

Have  you  my  spoon  or  yours  ?  I  have  yours.  Have  you 
the  silver  spoon  ?  I  have  not  the  silver  spoon,  but  the 
golden  one.  Have  you  seen  my  sister's  silver  spoons  ?  I 
have  not  seen  them.  Have  you  my  cloak?  I  have  it. 
Have  you  any  French  gold?  No,  Sir,  I  have  not  any. 
Have  you  the  silver  spoon  of  my  good  sister  ?  I  have  not 
your  good  sister's  silver  spoon,  but  her  gold  spoon.  Have 
you  received  my  beautiful  cloth  cloak  ?  I  have  received  it. 
Have  you  the  new  cloak  or  the  old  one  ?  I  have  the  old 
one.  Have  you  a  pen  ?  Yes,  sir,  I  have  one.  Have  you 
a  silk  stocking  ?  I  have  not  a  silk  stocking,  but  I  have  a 
cotton  stocking.  Have  you  not  my  silk  stockings  ?  No, 
Sir,  I  have  not  your  silk  stockings,  but  mine.  Have  you 
seen  an  honest  man  ?  I  have  seen  one.  Have  you  seen  an 
honest  woman  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  seen  one.  Have  you  an 
obedient  son  ?  I  have  one.  Have  you  an  obedient  daugh- 
ter ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  one.  Have  you  seen  a  faithful  hus- 
band ?  I  have  seen  one.  Have  you  seen  a  faithful  wife  ? 
I  have  seen  one.  Have  you  a  fortunate  friend?  I  have  a 
fortunate  friend.  Have  you  a  fortunate  friend ?  (female;. 
I  have  not  a  fortunate  one,  but  an  unfortunate  (infeliz)  one. 


Exercise  No.  29. 

Have  you  seen  the  Spanish  Constitution  ?  I  have  seen 
it.  Have  you  seen  the  Cuban  Institute  ?  I  have  not  seen 
it.  Have  you  the  new  English  Constitution  ?  I  have  it 
not.  Have  you  seen  the  new  American  flag  (bandera)  ?  I 
have  seen  it.  Have  you  seen  the  English  pavilion  {pabellon)  ? 
I  have  not  seen  the  English  pavilion.  Have  you  seen  a 
young  Andalusian  woman  ?  I  have  seen  one.  Have  you 
received  my  letter  ?  I  have  not  received  it.  Who  has  re- 
ceived a  letter  from  my  mother  ?  My  sister  has  received 
two  letters  from  your  mother  to-day.  What  a  pretty  girl ! 
Have  you  seen  that  young  lady  ?  Yes.  What  a  handsome 
face !  What  pretty  hands  !  What  beautiful  eyes  !  What 
a  pretty  mouth  I  Have  you  my  cloak  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  my 
own.     Who  has  mine  ?    I  have  it.     Have  you  any  silver  ? 


68  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

No,  but  I  have  some  gold.  Have  you  a  pen  ?  I  have 
neither  pen  nor  ink  (tinta).  Have  you  any  letter  paper 
( papel  de  cartas)  ?  I  have  not  any.  Has  that  young  lady 
a  pretty  dog?  She  has  a  very  handsome  one.  Have  your 
sisters  any  birds  ?  They  have  some  very  pretty.  Have  you 
the  little  cloak  of  the  young  Andalusian  woman  ?  I  have 
not  hers,  but  I  have  that  of  the  young  American  lady.  Have 
you  seen  the  shoe,s  of  the  little  girl  ?  I  have  not  seen  her 
shoes,  but  her  little  chair.  Have  you  the  penknife  of  my 
little  daughter  ?  I  have  not  her  penknife,  but  her  little 
gold  pen. 

Exercise  No.  30. 

Have  you  a  white  handkerchief  ?  No,  but  I  have  a  white 
gown  (bata).  Has  your  brother  a  new  hat?  He  has  a  new 
coat.  Has  the  peasant  a  fat  (gordo)  ox  ?  No,  but  he  has 
a  fat  cow  (vaca).  Have  you  seen  a  cruel  mother  ?  No,  but 
I  have  seen  a  cruel  father.  Have  you  a  sweet  melon  (melon 
dulce)  ?  No,  I  have  a  sweet  apple  (manzana).  Have  you 
seen  an  elegant  gentleman  to-day?  No,  but  I  have  seen 
an  elegant  lady.  Honor  is  dearer  (el  honor  ex  mas  caro) 
than  life  (la  vida),  and  life  dearer  than  fortune  (laforhina.) 
Has  your  sister  my  gold  ribbon  (cinta)  ?  She  has  it  not. 
What  has  she  ?  She  has  nothing.  Has  your  mother  any- 
thing ?  She  has  a  beautiful  silver  spoon.  Who  ha*t  my 
large  (grande)  bottle?  Your  cousin  (fern.)  has  it.  Has 
she  my  silver  ribbons?  She  has  them  not.  Who  has 
them  ?  Your  mother  has  them.  What  fork  have  you  ?  I 
have  my  iron  fork.  Have  you  seen  the  windows  ol  my 
room?  I  have  not  seen  them.  Have  yo\\  seen  the  silk 
curtains  (cortinas)  of  my  window  ?     I  have  seen  them. 


How  MUCH? 
HOW   MANY? 

How  much  sugar  ? 
H'»\v  nmeh  money? 
How  many  knives? 
How  many  men? 
How  many  friends? 


SIXTEENTH  LESSON. 

I  CuANTO  ? 
I  CuANTOS  ? 

I  Cuanto  aziicar  ? 
I  Cuanto  dinero  ? 
I  Cuantos  cuchillos  ? 
,;  Cuantos  hombres  ? 
I  Cuantos  amigos  ? 


PRACTICAL  EXIIICISES. 


69 


Only,  but. 

I  have  but  one  friend. 

I  have  only  one  friend. 

I  have  but  one. 

I  have  only  one. 

I  have  but  one  good  gun. 

I  have  only  one  good  gun. 

You  have  but  one  good  one. 

You  have  only  one  good  one. 
How     many     horses     has 

brother  ? 
He  has  but  one. 
He  has  only  one. 
He  has  but  two  good  ones. 

He  has  only  two  good  ones. 


your 


Solo,    Solamente,    no-sin  o,  no 

MAS  QUE. 

No    tengo    sino  or   mas   que    un 

amigo. 
Tengo  un  amigo  solamente. 
No  tengo  sino  or  mas  que  uno. 
Te  igo  uno  solamente. 
No  tengo  sino  un  buen  fusil. 
Tengo  un  buen  fusil  solamente, 
Vd.  no  tiene  sino  or  mas  que  uno 

bueno. 
Vd.  tiene  uno  bueno  solamente. 
,;Cuantos    caballos  tiene  su   her- 

mano  de  Vd.  ? 
No  tiene  sino  or  mas  que  uno. 
Tiene  uno  solamente. 
No  tiene  sino  or  mas  que  dos  bue« 

nos. 
Tiene  dos  buenos  solamente. 


Much,  a  good  deal  of,  very  much. 

Many,  a  good  many,  a  great  many. 

Much  bread. 

A  good  deal  of  good  bread. 

Many  men. 

Have  you  much  money  ? 

I  have  a  good  deal. 

Have  you  a  great  many  friends  ? 

I  have  a  good  many. 


Mucho,  muchIsimo. 

Muchos,  muchisimos. 

Mucho  paD. 

Muchisimo  pan  bueno. 

Muchos  hombres. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  mucho  dinero? 

Tengo  muchisimo. 

i  Tiene  Vd.  tauchisimos  amigo»? 

Tengo  inuchisiiuos. 


Too  MUCH 
TOO  MANY. 

You  have  too  much  wine, 
They  have  too  many  books. 


Enough. 
Enough  money. 
Knives  enough. 


Little  (in  size). 

Little  (in  quantity  or  number). 

A  little. 

A  little  cloth. 

A  little  rice. 


Ofmantado. 

Demam.vdos. 
Vd  tione  domj.siado  vino. 
Ellis  t.  en  fin  di'masiados  libros. 


Bastante  (plur.  Bastantes, 
Bastante  dinero. 
Bastantes  cuchillos. 


Pequeno  or  chico. 

Poco. 

Un  poco  de. 

Un  poco  de  pano. 

Un  poco  de  arroz. 


70 


THE  SPANISH  TLACHJMI. 


But  little. 

Only  a  little, 

Not  much. 

Not  many. 

But  few. 

I  have  but  little  sugar. 

He  has  but  few  friends. 
"We  have  but  little  gold. 


No— sino  mas  que  or  UN  POCO. 
Un  poco  solamente. 

NO  MUCHO. 

No  MUCHOS. 

POCOS,   UNOS  CUANTOS. 

No  tengo  mas  que  un  poco  de  aztl- 
,  car. 

El  tiene  pocos  amigos. 
No  tenemos  mas  que  un  poco  de 
oro. 


Coueage. 
You  have  not  much  courage. 
We  have  but  few  friends. 
Have  we  ? 
"We  have. 
We  have  not. 
Some  oil. 
Some  pins. 
Have  we  any  oil  ? 
We  have  some. 
We  have  not  any. 


Have  you  a  good  deal  of  money  ? 
I  have  but  little  of  it. 
You  have  but  little  of  it. 

He  has  but  little  of  it. 

Have  you  wine  enough  ? 
We  have  but  little  of  it. 

I  have  only  a  little,   but  I  have 
enough?    ' 


Valor,  a  nemo. 
Vd.  no  tiene  mucho  valor. 
Tenemos  pocos  amigos. 
,;  Tenemos  nosotros? 
Tenemos. 
No  tenemos. 
Aceite. 
Alfileres. 

I  Tenemos  nosotros  aceite  ? 
Tenemos. 
No  tenemos. 


I  Tiene  Vd.  muchisimo  dinero  ? 
No  tengo  sino  or  mas  que  un  poco. 
Vd.  no  tiene  sino  or  mas  que  un 

poco. 
El  no   tiene  sino  or  mas  que  un 

poco. 
j  Tiene  Vd.  bastante  vino  ? 
No   tenemos  sino  or  mas  que  un 

poco. 
Tengo    un   poco    solamente,   pero 

tengo  bastante. 


Exkrcisi  No.  31. 

How  many  friends  have  you  ?  I  have  two  good  friends. 
Have  you  eight  old  trunks  ?  I  have  nine.  Has  your  ser- 
vant three  fishes  ?  He  has  only  one  good  one.  Has  the 
captain  two  good  ships?  He  has  only  one.  How  many 
hammers  has  the  carpenter  ?  He  has  but  two  good  ones. 
How  many  shoes  has  the  shoemaker  ?  He  has  ten.  Has 
the  young  man  nine  good  books  ?     He  has  only  five  new 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES.  71 


ones.  How  many  muskets  has  your  brother?  He  has 
only  four.  Have  you  much  bread  ?  I  have  a  good  deal. 
Have  the  Spaniards  much  money?  They  have  but  little 
Has  our  neighbor  much  coffee  ?  He  has  only  a  little.  Has 
the  stranger  much  corn  ?  He  has  a  good  deal.  What  has 
the  American  ?  He  has  much  sugar.  What  has  the  Rus- 
sian ?  He  has  a  great  deal  of  satin.  Has  the  countryman 
much  rice  ?  He  has  not  any.  Has  he  much  cheese  ?  He 
has  but  little.  What  have  we?  We  have  much  bread, 
much  wine,  and  many  books.  Have  we  much  money?  We 
have  only  a  little,  but  we  have  enough.  Have  you  many 
brothers  ?  I  have  only  one.  Have  the  French  many 
friends  ?  They  have  but  few.  Has  our  friend  much  hay  ? 
He  has  enough.  Has  the  Italian  much  velvet  ?  He  has  a 
good  deal.  Has  this  man  courage  ?  He  has  none.  Has 
the  painter's  boy  any  pencils  ?     He  has  some. 


Exercise  No.  32. 

Have  you  many  forks?  I  have  only  one.  How  many 
oxen  has  the  German  ?  He  has  eight.  How  many  horses 
has  he  ?  He  has  only  four.  Who  has  a  good  many  bis- 
cuits? Our  sailors  have  a  good  many.  Have  we  many 
notes  ?  We  have  only  six.  How  many  notes  have  we  ? 
We  have  only  three  pretty  ones.  Have  you  too  much  coal  ? 
I  have  not  enough.  Have  your  boys  too  many  books  ? 
They  have  too  many.  Has  our  friend  too  much  velvet  ? 
He  has  only  a  little,  but  enough.  Who  has  a  good  deal  of 
money  ?  The  countrymen  have  a  good  deal.  Have  they 
many  gloves  ?  They  have  not  any.  Has  the  cook  enough 
vinegar?  He  has  not  enough.  Has  he  enough  oil?  He 
has  enough.  Have  you  much  soap?  I  have  but  a  little. 
Has  the  merchant  much  cloth  ?  He  has  a  good  deal.  Who 
has  a  good  deal  of  paper  ?  Our  neighbors  have  a  good 
deal.  Has  our  tailor  many  buttons  ?  He  has  a  good  many. 
Have  the  painters  many  gardens  ?  They  have  not  many. 
How  many  gardens  have  they  ?  They  have  but  two.  How 
many  asses  have  the  Mexicans?  They  have  many.  Has 
the  captain  many  knives  ?     He  has  only  three.     Have  we 


72  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

many  horses?  We  have  a  good  many.  Have  the  English 
many  ships  ?  They  have  many.  Has  the  merchant  many 
handkerchiefs?  He  has  a  good  many.  What  have  the 
Americans  ?  They  have  a  good  many  muskets.  How  many 
dogs  has  our  friend  ?  He  has  only  two.  What  candle- 
sticks have  our  friends  ?    They  have  copper  candlesticks. 


Exercise  No.  33. 

£  Tiene  el  joven  bastones  buenos?  No  tiene  bastones 
buenos,  sino  hermosos  pajaros.  iQue  polios  ha  recibido 
nuestro  cocinero?  Ha  recibido  bonitos  polios.  <?  Cuantos 
ha  recibido  ?  Ha  recibido  seis.  £  Tiene  el  sombrerero 
sombreros  ?  No  tiene  ;  pero  nuestro  comerciante  ha  reci- 
bido muchisimos.  ;,  Tiene  el  herrero  mucho  hierro?  No 
tiene  muchisimo.  £  Tenemos  los  caballos  de  los  franceses,  6 
los  de  los  mejicanos  ?  No  tenemos  ni  estos  ni  aquellos. 
I  Cuales  caballos  tenemos  ?  Tenemos  los  nuestros.  i  Ha 
visto  Vd.  mis  peinecitos  ?  No  los  he  visto.  ^  Ha  visto  el 
turco  los  asnos?  No  los  ha  visto.  ,?  Quien  los  ha  visto? 
Su  hijo  de  Vd.  los  ha  visto.  £  Han  recibido  nuestros  ami- 
gos  mucho  aziicar?  Han  recibido  un  poco,  pero  bastante. 
I  Quien  ha  visto  nuestros  espejos  ?  El  uleman  los  ha  visto. 
^Ha  visto  el  espafiol  este  6  aquel  billete  ?  Ha  visto  este,  pero 
no  aquel.  ,;  Ha  visto  el  caballero  trances  este,  6  aquel  libro  ? 
No  ha  visto  ni  este  ni  aquel.  <;  Tiene  el  italiano  los  her- 
mosos colchones  que  hemos  recibido  ?  No  tiene  los  que 
hemos  recibido,  sino  los  de  su  amigo.  £  Tiene  verguenza? 
No  tiene  vergftenza  sino  miedo.  £  Tiene  Vd.  frio  6  sueno  ? 
Tengo  frio,  pero  no  sueno.  <?  Tiene  el  jeneral  razon  ?  No 
tiene  razon,  sino  hambre. 


SEVENTEENTH  LESSON. 


A  FEW. 

A  few  books. 

Have  you  a  few  books  ? 

I  have  a  few. 

Have  you  a  few  ? 

He  has  a  few. 


Algunos. 
Algunos  libros. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  algunos  libros? 
Tengo  algunos. 
,j  Tiene  Vd.  algunos  ? 
El  tiene  algunos. 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


73 


t  Lave  but  a  few  relations. 


You  have  but  a  few  cents. 
He  has  but  a  few  relations. 
I  have  but  a  few  cents. 
You  have  but  a  few. 
He  has  but  a  few. 


One,  or  a  cent ;  plur.,  cents. 
One,  or  a  real ;  plur.,  reals. 
One,  or  a  dollar  ;  plur.,  dollars. 

One,  or  a  franc  ;  plur,  franca 


No  tengo  sino  or  mas  que  algunos 

parientes. 
Vd.  no  tiene  sino  algunos  centavos. 
El  no  tiene  sino  algunos  parientes. 
No  tengo  wino  algunos  centavos. 
Vd.  no  tiene  sino  algunos. 
El  no  tiene  sino  algunos. 


Un  centavo  ;  plur. ,  centavos. 

Un  real ;  plur.,  reales. 

Un  peso,  or  duro ;  plur.,  pesos,  or 

duros  (1). 
Un  franco  \  plur.,  francos. 


Other,  anotheb. 
Another  cent. 
Some  other  cents. 
Have  you  another  horse  ? 
I  have  another. 
I  have  no  other  horse. 
I  have  no  other  relations. 
Have  you  any  other  relations  ? 
I  have  some  others. 
I  have  no  others. 


Oteo. 
Otro  centavo. 
Otros  centavos. 
j  Tiene  Vd.  otro  caballo  ? 
Tengo  otro. 
No  tengo  otro  caballo. 
No  tengo  otros  parientes. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  otros  parientes  ? 
Tengo  otros. 
No  tengo  otros. 


1.  In  Spanish  America  the  money  is  counted  by  pesetas,  reales,  and 
medios  reales  ;  thus  :  peso,  a  dollar,  is  divided  into  cualro  pesetas,  four 
quarters  of  a  dollar  ;  every  peseta  into  dos  reales,  two  rials  ;  and  every 
real  into  dos  medios,  two  half  rials.  It  is  precisely  equivalent  to  the 
United  States,  counting  in  this  manner :  six  and  a  quarter  cents,  un 
medio ;  twelve  and  a  half  cents,  un  real ;  twenty-five  cents,  una  peseta  or 
dos  reales  :  fifty  cents,  or  half  a  dollar,  either  cuatro  reales  or  medio  peso; 
fifty-six  and  a  quarter  cents,  cuatro  reales  y  medio,  etc.  In  Old  Spain, 
although  almost  every  province  divides  the  effective  coins  into  different 
imaginary  ones,  yet  in  keeping  accounts,  or  in  writing,  the  money  which 
they°  generally  use  are  the  following  coins  :  pesos  or  duros,  reales  de 
vellon,  and  maravedls,  dividing  them  thus  :  a  duro,  dollar,  is  divided 
into  twenty  reales  vellon,  and  a  real  vellon  into  thirty-four  maravedis.  In 
conversation  they  sometimes  divide  the  money  in  the  above  manner,  and 
at  others  into  duros,  pesetas,  cuartos,  and  ochavos,  thus  :  a  duro  is 
divided  into  five  pesetas  (having  no  pillars),  five  twenty  cent  pieces  ; 
e^very  peseta  into  thirty-four  cuartos,  and  every  cuarto  into  two  ochavos. 
But  when  the  pesetas  have  pillars,  four  of  them  make  a  dollar.  Hence 
the  denomination  of  pesetas  fuertes  (twenty-five  cent  pieces),  and  pesetas 
sencillas  (twenty  cents).  The  same  in  regard  to  the  reales,  the  realms 
fuertes  (twelve  and  a  half  cents),  and  reales  sencillos  (ten  cents). 


74 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


The  arm . 

The  heart 

The  month. 

The  author. 

The  volume. 

What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ? 

It  is  the  first. 

It  is  the  second. 

It  is  the  third. 


El  brazo. 

El  corazon. 

El  mes. 

El  autor. 

El  tomo,  el  voliimen. 

f  i  A  cuantos  estamos  del  mes  ? 

t  Estamos  a  primero. 

f  Estamos  a  dos. 

f  .Estamos  a  tres. 


The  cardinal  numbers  must  be  used  in  Spanish  when 
speaking  of  the  days  of  the  month,  though  the  ordinal  be 
used  in  English  ;  except  el  primero  (the  first)  speaking  of 
the  first  day  of  every  month. 


It  is  the  eleventh. 
Which  volume  have  you  ? 
I  have  the  fourth. 


The  first. 
The  second. 
The  third. 
The  fourth. 
The  fifth. 
The  sixth. 
The  seventh. 
The  eighth. 
The  ninth. 
The  tenth. 
The  eleventh. 
The  twelfth. 
The  thirteenth. 
The  fourteenth. 
The  fifteenth. 
The  sixteenth. 
The  seventeenth. 
The  eighteenth. 
The  nineteenth. 
rrhe  twentieth. 
The  twenty-first. 
The  twenty-second. 
The  twenty-third. 
The  thirtieth. 
The  fortieth. 


Estamos  a  once. 

I  Cual  tomo  tiene  Vd? 

Tengo  el  cuarto. 


OKDINAI.  NUMBERS. 


E«l  primero. 

El  segundo. 

El tercero. 

El  cuarto. 

El  quinto. 

El  sesto. 

El  se'timo. 

El  octavo. 

El  nono. 

El  de'cimo. 

El  unde'cimo. 

El  duodecimo. 

El  de'cimo  tercio. 

El  de'cimo  cuarto. 

El  de'cimo  quinto. 

El  de'cimo  sesto. 

El  de'cimo  se'timo. 

El  de'cimo  octavo. 

El  de'cimo  nono. 

El  vije'simo. 

El  vije'simo  primo. 

El  vije'simo  segundo. 

El  vije'simo  tercio. 

El  trije'simo. 

El  cuadraje'simo. 


All  the  ordinal  numbers  become  feminine  by  changing  the 
termination  o  into  a,  and  the  article  el  into  la  to  agree  iu 
gender  ;  as,  el  primero,  la  primera  ;  el  dscimo  tercio.  la  di- 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


75 


cima  tercia.  Its  plural  is  formed  as  that  of  the  nouns,  but 
the  scholar  will  remember  that  the  plural  of  el  is  los.  The 
remainder  of  these  numbers  will  be  found  in  the  next 
Lesson. 


Have  you  the  first  volume  ? 

I  have  not  the  first,  I  have  the 

third. 
Which  volume  have  you? 
I  have  the  third  volume. 


I  Tiene  Vd.  el  primer  torao  ? 

No  tengo  el  primero  ;  t^-i^o  el  tep> 

cero. 
I  Cual  tomo  tiene  Vd.  ? 
Tengo  el  tercer  tomo. 


OABDINAIi  NUMBERS. 


One. 
Two. 

Three. 

Four. 

Five. 

Six. 

Seven. 

Eight 

Nine. 

Ten. 

Eleven. 

Twelve. 

Thirteen. 

Fourteen. 

Fifteen. 

Sixteen. 

Seventeen. 

Eighteen. 

Nineteen. 

Twenty. 

Twenty-one. 

Twenty-two. 

Twenty-three. 

Twenty-four. 

Twenty-five. 

Twenty-six. 

Twenty-seven. 

Twenty-eight. 

Twenty-nine. 

Thirty. 

Thirty-one. 

Forty. 

Forty-one. 

Fifty. 

Fifty-one. 

Sixty. 

Sixty-one. 


Uno. 
Dos. 

Tres. 

Cuatro. 

Cinco. 

Seis. 

Siete. 

Ocho. 

Nueve. 

Diez. 

Once. 

Doce. 

Trece. 

Catorce. 

Quince. 

Diez  y  seis. 

Diez  y  siete, 

Diez  y  ocho. 

Diez  y  nueve. 

Veinte. 

Veinte  y  uno. 

Veinte  y  dos. 

Veinte  y  tres. 

Veinte  y  cuatro. 

Veinte  y  cinco. 

Veinte  y  seis. 

Veinte  y  siete. 

Veinte  y  ocho. 

Veinte  y  nueve. 

Treinta. 

Treinta  y  uno. 

Cuarenta. 

Cuarenta  y  una 

Cincuenta. 

Cincuenta  y  uno« 

Sesenta. 

Sesenta  y  una 


76 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Seventy. 

Seventy-one. 

Eighty. 

Eighty-one. 

Ninety. 

Ninety-one. 

A,  or  one  hundred. 

A,  or  one  hundred  and  one. 

Two  hundred. 

Three  hundred. 

Four  hundred. 

Five  hundred. 

Six  hundred. 

Seven  hundred. 

Eight  hundred. 

Nine  hundred. 

A  thousand  and  one. 

Eleven  hundred. 

Twelve  hundred. 

Two  thousand. 

A,  or  one  hundred  thousand. 

Two  hundred  thousand. 

A,  or  one  million. 

Two  millions. 

Etc. 


Setenta. 
Setenta  y  uno. 
Ochenta. 
Ochenta  y  uno. 
Noventa. 
Noventa  y  una 
Ciento. 
Ciento  y  uno. 
Doscientos. 
Trescientos. 
Cuatrocientos. 
Quinientos. 
Seiscientos. 
Setecientos. 
Ochocientos. 
Novecientos. 
Mil  y  uno. 
Mil  y  ciento. 
Mil  y  doscientos. 
Dos  mil. 
Cien  mil. 
Doscientos  mil. 
Un  millon 
Dos  millones. 
Etc. 


Observe   that  instead   of  cincoeientos,  sidecientos,  and 
nuevecientos,  we  say,  quinientos,  setecientos,  y  novecientos. 


MONTHS   OF   THE   YEAE. 


January. 

Enero. 

February. 

Febrero. 

March. 

Marzo. 

April. 

Abril.     • 

May. 

Mayo. 

June. 

Junio 

July. 

Julio. 

August. 

Agosto. 

Septembei 

Setiembre. 

October. 

Octubre. 

November. 

Noviembre. 

December. 

Diciembre. 

Exercise 

No.  34. 

Have  you  many  knives  ?    I  have  a  few.     Have  you  many 
pencils  ?    I  have  only  a  few.    Has  the  painter's  friend  many 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  77 

looking-glasses  ?  He  has  only  a  few.  Has  four  son  a  few 
cents  ?  He  has  a  few.  Have  you  a  few  francs  ?  We  have 
a  few.  How  many  dollars  have  you  '/  I  have  ten.  How 
many  dollars  has  the  Spaniard  ?  He  has  not  many  ;  he  has 
only  six.  Who  has  the  beautiful  glasses  of  the  Italians  ? 
We  have  them.  Have  the  English  many  ships  ?  They  have 
a  good  many.  Have  the  French  many  horses  ?  They  have 
not  many  horses,  but  a  good  many  asses.  What  have  the 
Americans  ?  They  have  many  dollars.  How  many  dollars 
have  they  ?  They  have  eleven  millions.  Have  we  the 
horses  of  the  Mexicans  or  those  of  the  Germans  ?  We  have 
neither  the  former  nor  the  latter.  Have  we  the  umbrellas 
of  the  Spaniards  ?  We  have  them  not,  but  the  Americans 
have  them.  Have  you  much  copper  ?  I  have  only  a  little, 
but  enough.  Have  the  sailors  the  mattresses  which  we 
have  received  ?  They  have  not  those  which  we  have  (hemos) 
received,  but  those  which  their  captain  has.  Has  the 
Frenchman  many  francs  ?  He  has  only  a  few,  but  he  has 
enough.  Has  your  servant  many  cents  ?  He  has  no  cents, 
but  dollars  enough. 


Exercise  No.  35. 

I  Tienen  los  rusos  terciopelo  ?  No  tienen  sino  un  poco 
de  terciopelo,  pero  tienen  muchisimo  raso.  <?  Tienen  los 
turcos  mucho  vino  ?  No  tienen  mucho  vino,  sino  muchisi- 
mo cafe,  <J  Quien  tienen  muchisimo  carbon  ?  Los  meji- 
canos  tienen  muchisimo.  <?  No  tiene  Vd.  otro  fusil?  No 
tengo  otro.  I  Tenemos  otro  queso  ?  Tenemos  otro.  ^  No 
tengc  yc  otro  cuadro  ?  Vd.  tiene  otro.  i  No  tiene  nuestro 
vecino  otro  caballo  ?  No  tiene  otro.  <?  No  tiene  su  her- 
mano  de  Vd.  otros  amigos?  Tiene  otros.  <:No  tiene  el 
zapatero  otros  zapatos  ?  No  tiene  otros.  ^  Tienen  los 
sastres  muchos  chalecos  ?  Tienen  algunos  solamente. 
Tienen  solamente  cuatro.  <:  Cuantos  pescados  tiene  Vd.  ? 
Tengo  dos  solamente.  £  Tiene  Vd.  otros  bizcochos  ?  No 
tengo  otros.  Cuantos  sacacorchos  tiene  el  comerciante  ? 
Tiene  nueve.  l  Cuantos  brazos  tiene  este  hombre  ?  Tiene 
solamente  uno.     <;  Que  corazon  tiene  su  hijo  de  Vd. '?     Tiene 


78  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

un  buen  corazon.  £  No  tiene  Yd.  otro  criado  ?  Tengo 
otro.  £  No  tiene  su  amigo  de  Vd.  otros  pajaros  ?  Tiene 
otros.  <j  Cuantos  pajaros  tiene?  Tiene  seis.  I  Cuantos 
jardines  tiene  Vd.  ?  Tengo  uno  solamente,  pero  mi  amigo 
tiene  dos.  £  Cuantos  caballeros  ha  visto  Vd.  ?  He  vis  to 
solamente  uno.  <?  Ha  visto  Vd.  otro  ?  No  lie  visto  otro. 
^  Cuantos  alfileres  ha  recibido  Vd.  ?  He  recibido  dos  sola- 
mente. ,;  Cuantos  pafiuelos  hemos  recibido  ?  Hemos 
recibido  dos. 


Exercise  No.  36. 

Which  volume  have  you  ?  I  have  the  first.  Have  you 
the  second  volume  of  my  book  ?  I  have  it.  Have  you  the 
third  or  fourth  book  ?  I  have  neither  the  former  nor  the 
latter.  Have  we  the  fifth  or  sixth  volume  ?  Which  volume 
has  your  friend  ?  He  has  the  seventh  volume.  What  day 
of  the  month  is  it  ?  It  is  the  eighth.  Is  it  not  the  eleventh  ? 
No,  Sir,  it  is  the  tenth.  Who  has  our  dollars  ?  The  Mexi- 
cans have  them.  Have  they  our  gold  ?  They  have  it  not. 
Has  the  young  man  much  money?  He  has  not  much 
money,  but  much  courage.  Have  you  the  nails  of  the 
carpenter  or  those  of  the  smith  ?  I  have  neither  those  of 
the  carpenter  nor  those  of  the  smith  ;  but  those  of  my 
merchants.  Have  you  received  these  or  those  gloves  ?  I 
have  received  neither  these  nor  those.  Has  your  friend 
seen  this  or  that  note?  He  has  seen  this,  but  not  that. 
Has  the  Spaniard  a  few  dollars  ?  He  has  a  few.  Has  he 
received  a  few  francs  ?  He  has  received  five  hundred. 
Have  you  another  stick?  I  have  another.  What  other 
stick  have  you  ?  I  have  another  iron  stick.  Have  you  a 
few  good  candlesticks?  We  have  a  few.  Has  your  boy 
another  hat  ?  He  has  another.  Have  these  men  any  vine- 
gar ?  These  men  have  none,  but  their  friends  have  some. 
Have  the  countrymen  any  other  bags?  They  have  no 
others.     Have  they  any  other  bread  ?     They  have  some. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 
EIGHTEENTH  LESSON. 


79 


The  remainder  of  the  Ordinal  numbers  are 


The  fiftieth. 

The  sixtieth. 

The  seventieth. 

The  eightieth. 

The  ninetieth. 

The  hundredth. 

The  two  hundredth. 
The  three  hundredth. 
The  four  hundredth. 
The  five  hundredth. 
The  six  hundredth. 
The  seventh  hundredth. 
The  eight  hundredth. 
The  nine  hundredth. 
The  thousandth. 
The  last  but  two. 
The  last  but  one. 
The  last. 


El  quincuaje'simo, 
El  sexaje'simo. 
El  septuaje'simo. 
El  octoje'simo. 
El  nonajesimo. 
El  cente'simo. 
El  ducente'simo. 
El  trecente'simo. 
El  cuadrajente'simo. 
El  quinjente'simo. 
El  sexacente'simo. 
El  setejente'simo. 
El  octajentdsimo. 
El  nonajente'simo. 
El  mile'simo. 
El  antepeniiltimo. 
El  penultimo. 
El  ultimo  or  postrero. 


Besides  the  Cardinal  and  Ordinal  numbers,  there  are  yet 
three  other  kinds  that  belong  to  the  class  of  substantives. 
These  are  the  Collective,  Distributive,  and  Proportional. 

The  Collective  numbers  serve  to  denote  determined  quan- 
tities, as  : 


A  couple. 
Half  a  soore. 
A  dozen. 
Half  a  d  Dzen. 
A  score 
A  huudi  ad. 
A  thousand. 
A  million. 


Un  par. 
Una  decena. 
Una  docena. 
Media  docena. 
Una  veintena. 
Una  centena. 
Un  miliar. 
Un  cuento. 


The  Distributive  serve  to  denote  the  different  parts  of 
whole  ;   as  ; 


The  halt 
The  thhd. 
The  fourth. 


La  mitad. 
El  tercio. 
El  cuarto. 


The  P?-oportional  are  those  that  serve  to  denote  the  pro« 
gressive  increase  of  the  number  of  things,  as  : 


80 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHEE. 


The  double. 
The  quadruple. 
The  hundred  fold. 
The  volume. 

Have  you  the  first  or  second  volume 
of  my  book  ? 


El  duplo. 
El  cuadruplo 
El  celituplo. 
El  tomo,  el  voliimen, 
£  Tiene  Vd.  el  primero,'  6  el  »oguu(lo 
tomo  de  mi  libro  ? 


Both. 
Have  you  my  book,  or  my  stick  ? 
I   have    neither  the   one    nor  the 

other. 
I  have  both. 


Ambos. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  mi  libro  6  mi  hasten  ? 
No  tengo  ni  lo  uno  ni  lo  otro. 

Tengo  ambos. 


The  one  and  the  other. 


j  EL  UNO,  Y  EL  OTRO. 
1  Lo  TJNO,  Y  LO  OTLO. 


Use  el  uno  y  el  otro  when  speaking  of  things  of  the  same 
kind,  as  two  books,  etc.,  and  lo  uno  y  lo  otro  when  speaking 
of  two  different  thiDgs,  as  a  stick  and  a  hat,  etc. 

Vd.   mis 


Has  your  brother  my  gloves  or  his 

own? 
He  has  both. 
Has  he  my  books,  or  those  of  the 

Spaniards  ? 
He  has  neither  the  one  nor  the 

other. 


The  Scotchman. 
The  Irishman. 
The  Dutchman. 

Some  or  any  more. 
Some  more  wine. 
Some  more  money. 
Some  more  buttons. 

Not  any  more,  no  more. 
I  have  no  more  bread. 
He  has  no  more  forks. 
Have  you  any  more  fish 
I  have  no  more. 
We  hav  3  no  more. 
Has  he  any  more  vinegar  ? 
He  has  no  more. 


I  Tiene    su    hermano  do 

guantes  6  los  de  e'l  ? 
Tiene  ambos. 
I  Tiene  el  mis  librae  6  V>s  de  los 

espafioles  ? 
No  tiene  ni  los  un.*  »\  k*<  otros. 


El  escoces. 
El  irlandes. 
El  holandes. 


Mas. 
Mas  vino. 
Mas  dinero. 
Mas  botones. 


No— mas. 
No  tengo  mas  pan. 
El  no  tiene  mas  tenedores. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  mas  pescado  ? 
No  tengo  mas. 
No  tenemos  mas. 
I  Tiene  el  mas  vinagre  * 
No  tiene  mas. 


PRACTICAL  EXEilClSES. 


81 


Not  much  moke. 

Not  many  moke. 
Have  you  much  more  tea  ? 
I  have  not  much  more. 
Have  you  many  more  hats  ? 
I  have  not  many  more. 
One  book  more. 
One  good  book  more. 


No  MUCHO  MAS. 
No  MUCHOS  MAS. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  mucho  mas  te*  ? 

No  tengo  mucho  mas. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  muchos  mas  sombreros 

No  tengo  muchos  mas. 

Un  libro  mas. 

Un  buen  libro  mas. 


If  two  of  those  adjectives  which  lose  the  final  o,  when  used 
before  a  masculine  singular,  are  connected  together,  both 
lose  the  o.     Ex.  :  un  buen  libro,  a  good  book. 

Have  you  a  few  dollars  more  ? 
I  have  a  few  more. 
We  have  a  few  more. 
They  have  a  few  more. 


I  Tiene  Vd.  algunos  duros  mas  ? 
Tengo  algunos  mas. 
Tenemos  algunos  mas. 
Ellos  tienen  algunos  mas. 


Exercise  No.  37. 

Which  volume  of  his  book  have  you  ?  I  have  the  first. 
How  many  volumes  has  this  book  ?  It  has  two.  Have  you 
my  book  or  my  brother's  ?  I  have  both.  Has  the  stranger 
my  comb  or  my  knife?  He  has  both.  Have  you  my  bread 
or  my  cheese  ?  I  have  neither  the  one  nor  the  othur.  Has 
the  Dutchman  my  glass  or  that  of  my  friend?  He  has 
neither  the  one  nor  the  other.  Has  the  Irishman  our 
horses  or  our  trunks  ?  He  has  both.  Has  the  Scotchman 
our  shoes  or  our  vests  ?  He  has  neither  the  one  nor  the 
other.  What  has  he  ?  He  has  his  good  iron  muskets. 
Have  the  Dutch  our  ships  or  those  of  the  Mexicans?  They 
have  neither  the  one  nor  the  other.  Which  ships  have 
they?  They  have  their  own.  Have  we  any  more  hay? 
We  have  some  more.  Has  our  merchant  any  more  velvet  ? 
He  has  some  more.  Has  he  any  more  satin  ?  Have 
you  any  more  coffee?  We  have  no  more  coffee,  but  we 
have  some  more  tea.  Has  the  Irishman  any  more  forks  ? 
lie  has  no  more  forks,  but  he  has  some  more  copper. 
Has  the  painter  any  more  pictures  ?  He  has  no  more  pic- 
tures, but  he  has  some  more  pencils.  Have  the  sailors  any 
more  biscuits?  They  have  not  any  more.  Have  your  sons 
any  more  books?  They  have  not  any  more.  Has  the 
young  man  any  more  friends  ?    He  has  no  more 


S2  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Exercise  No.  38. 

Has  our  cook  much  more  fish  ?  He  has  not  much  more. 
Has  he  many  more  chickens?  He  has  not  many  more.  Has 
the  countryman  more  asses?  He  has  not  many  more 
asses,  but  he  has  much  more  coal.  Have  the  French 
many  more  horses?  They  have  not  many  more.  Have 
you  much  more  oil  ?  I  have  much  more.  Have  you  one 
book  more  ?  I  have  one  more.  Have  we  many  more 
looking-glasses  ?  We  have  many  more.  Have  our  neigh- 
bors one  more  garden  ?  They  have  one  more.  Has  our 
friend  one  umbrella  more?  He  has  no  more.  Have  the 
Scotch  a  few  more  books  ?  They  have  a  few  more.  Has 
the  tailor  a  few  more  buttons  ?  He  has  not  any  more.  Has 
our  carpenter  a  few  more  nails?  He  has  no  more  nails, 
but  he  has  a  few  more  sticks.  Have  the  Spaniards  a  few 
more  cents  ?  They  have  a  few  more.  Has  the  German  a 
few  more  oxen?  He  has  a  few  more.  Have  you  a  few 
more  francs  ?  I  have  no  more  francs,  but  I  have  a  few  dol- 
lars. What  more  have  you  ?  We  have  a  few  more  ships. 
and  a  few  more  good  sailors.  Have  I  little  more  money  \ 
You  have  a  little  more.  Have  you  any  more  courage  ?  1 
have  not  much  more,  but  my  brother  has  a  great  deal 
more. 


Exercise  No.  39. 

I  Tiene  el  bastante  azucar  ?  No  tiene  bastante.  £  Tene- 
mos  bastantes  francos  ?  No  tenemos  bastantes.  <:  Tiene  el 
herrero  bastante  hierro  ?  Tiene  bastante.  £  Tiene  bastan- 
tes martillos  ?  Tiene  bastantes.  ,;  Que  martillos  tiene  el  ? 
Tiene  martillos  de  hierro  y  de  cobre.  i  Tienen  Vds.  bas- 
tante arroz?  No  tenemos  bastante  arroz,  pero  tenemos 
bastante  azucar.  £  Tiene  Vd.  muchos  mas  guantes?  No 
tengo  muchos  mas.  £  Tienen  los  americanos  otros  buques? 
Tienen  otros.  ^  Tiene  Yd.  otro  saco?  No  tengo  otro. 
I A  cuantos  estamos  del  mes  ?  Estamos  a  seis.  i  Cuantos 
amigos  tiene  Vd.  ?  No  tengo  sino  un  buen  amigo.  <;Ha 
risto  Vd.  mi  perro  ?  No  lo  he  visto.  i  Cuantos  panuelos 
ha  recibido  Vd.  ?     H<*  recibido  solamente  dos.     £  Tiene  ei 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


83 


criado  demasiado  pan?  No  tiene  bastante.  <?Ha  recibido 
Vd.  demasiado  dinero  ?  No  he  recibido  demasiado.  ^  Tiene 
Vd.  demasiados  ejercicios?  No  tengo  demasiados,  pero 
tengo  bastantes.  ,:Ha  visto  Vd.  demasiados  libros?  No 
he  visto  demasiados,  pero  he  visto  bastantes.  £  Tiene  Vd. 
nmcho  fuego  ?  No  tengo  sino  un  poco,  pero  tengo  bas- 
tante carbon.  ,?Ha  visto  Vd.  el  algodon  de  los  america- 
nos  ?  No  lo  he  visto.  £  Han  visto  Vds.  sus  jardines  ?  No 
hemos  visto  sus  jardines,  sino  los  de  nuestros  vecinos. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  mas  bueyes  ?    No  tengo  mas. 


NINETEENTH  LESSON. 


Several  men. 
Several  children. 
Several  pins. 

The  father. 
The  child. 
The  inkstand. 
The  pie. 
The  pastry-cook. 


As  MUCH. 
As  MANY. 
As  MUCH  AS. 
As  MANY  AS. 

As  much  bread  as  wine. 
As  many  men  as  children. 
Have  you  as  much  gold  as  copper  ? 
I  have  as  much  of  this  as  of  that. 
I  have  as  much  of  the  former  as  of 

the  latter. 
I  have  as  much  of  the  one  as  of 

the  other. 
Have  you  as  many  forks  as  knives  ? 

I   have  as  many  of  these  as  of 

those. 
I  have  as  many  of  the  former  as  of 

the  latter. 
I  have  as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the 

other. 


Vaeios. 
Varios  hombres. 
Varios  niiios. 
Varios  alfileres. 


El  padre. 
El  nino. 
El  tintero. 
El  pastel. 
El  pastelero. 


Tanto. 

Tantos. 

Tanto.   )      

Tantos.  [como- 
Tanto  pan  como  vino. 
Tantos  hombres  como  nifios. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  tanto  oro  como  cobre  ? 
Tengo  tanto  de  este  como  de  aquel. 
Tengo  tanto  de  este  como  de  aqueL 

Tengo  tanto  de  lo  uno  como  de  lo 

otro. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  tantos  tenedores  como 

cuchillos  ? 
Tengo    tantos  de  estos    como   de 

aquellos. 
Tengo    tantos  de  estos    como  de 

aquellos. 
Tengo  tantos  de  los  unos  como  de 

los  otros, 


84 


THE  SPANISH  TEACH  EM. 


Quite  or  just  as  much,  as  many. 
I  have  quite  as  much  of  this  as  of 

that. 
Quite  as  much  of  the  former  as  of 

the  latter. 
Quite  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the 

other. 
Quite  as  many  of  these  as  of  those. 


Otro  tanto,  otros  tantos. 
Tengo  otro  tanto  de  este  como  de 

aquel. 
Otro  tanto  de  este  como  de  aquel. 

Otro  tanto  del  uno  como  del  otro. 

Otros  tantos    de    estos    como    de 
aquellos. 


An  enemy,  enemies. 
My  dear  friend. 


Un  enemigo,  los  enemigos. 
Mi  querido  amigo. 


Dear.  |  Querido,  caeo. 

Querido  is  generally  applied  only  to  persons,  caro  to  both  things  and 
persons. 
The  finger. 


Your  welfare. 
My  opinion. 
More. 
More  bread. 
More  men. 

Than. 
More  bread  than  wine. 
More  knives  than  forks. 
More  of  this  than  of  that. 
More  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. 
More  of  these  than  of  those. 
More  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. 
I  have  more  of  your  sugar  than  of 

mine. 
He  has  more  of  your  books  than  of 

his  own. 

Less,  fewer. 
Less  wine  than  bread. 
Less  knives  than  forks. 
Less  than  I. 
Less  than  he. 
Less  than  we. 
Less  than  you. 
Less  than  they. 


El  dedo. 

Su  bienestar  de  Vd. 

Mi  opinion,  mi  parecer. 

Mas. 
Mas  pan. 
Mas  hombres. 

Que. 
Mas  pan  que  vino. 
Mas  cuchillos  que  tenedores. 
Mas  de  este  que  de  aquel. 
Mas  del  uno  que  del  otro. 
Mas  de  estos  que  de  aquellos. 
Mas  de  los  unos  que  de  los  otros. 
Tengo  mas  de  su  azucar  de  Vd.  que 

del  mio. 
El  tiene  mas  de  los  libros  de  Vd. 

que  de  los  de  el. 

Menos. 
Me'nos  vino  que  pan. 
Me'nos  cuchillos  que  tenedores, 
Me'nos  que  yo. 
Menos  que  el. 
Me'nos  que  nosotros. 
Me'nos  que  Vd.  or  Vds. 
Me'nos  que  ellos. 


They. 

As  they. 
Than  they. 
As  much  as  you. 
As  much  as  he, 
As  much  as  they. 


Ellos. 
Como  ellos. 
Que  ellos. 

Tanto  como  Vd.  or  Vds. 
Tanto  como  el. 
Tanto  como  ellos. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  85 

The  comparison  of  equality  is  formed  by  tanto  como,  tantos 
como  for  the  plural,  and  by  (an  como.  Tanto  is  used  with 
Nouns  and  Verbs. 

He  sells  as  much  wheat  as  John.       I  El  vende  tanto  trigo  como  Juan. 
He  sells  as  much  as  John.  |  El  vende  tanto  como  Juan. 

Tan  is  used  before  Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 

She  is  as  white  as  snow.  I  Ella  es  tan  blanca  como  la  nieve. 

She  dresses  as  well  as  her  aunt.        |  Ella  viste  tan  bien  como  su  tia. 

But  tanto,  when  modifying  a  Noun,  changes  its  termina- 
tion according  to  the  gender  and  number  of  the  Noun. 


ias  much  flour 
as  many  apples  V  j^Q 
as  many  eggs 


( tanta  harina         )  como 
El  vende  \  iavtas  manzanas  >■  T 

( tantos  huevos      )  duan* 


Exercise  No.  40. 

Have  you  a  horse?  I  have  several.  Has  he  several 
vests?  He  has  only  one.  Who  has  several  looking- 
glasses?  My  brother  has  several.  What  looking-glasses 
has  he  ?  He  has  beautiful  looking-glasses.  Who  has  good 
pies  ?  Several  pastry-cooks  have  some.  Has  your  brother 
a  child?  He  has  several.  Have  you  as  much  coffee  as 
tea  ?  I  have  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other.  Has  this 
man  a  son?  He  has  several.  How  many  sons  has  he? 
He  has  four.  How  many  children  have  our  friends? 
They  have  many  ;  they  have  ten.  Have  we  as  much  bread 
as  wine  ?  You  have  as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other. 
Has  this  man  as  many  friends  as  enemies  ?  He  has  as 
many  of  the  one  as  of  the  other.  Have  we  as  many  forks 
as  knives?  We  have  as  many  of  the  one  as  of  the  ether. 
Has  your  father  as  much  gold  as  copper?  He  has  more  of 
the  latter  than  of  the  former.  Has  the  captain  as  many 
sailors  as  ships  ?  He  has  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the 
former..    He  has  more  of  the  one  than  of  the  other. 


Exercise  No.  41. 

Have  you  as  many  muskets  as  I  ?    I  have  as  many.     Has 
the  stranger  as  much  courage  as  we?     He  has  quite  as 


86  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

much.  Have  we  as  much  chocolate  as  coffee  ?  "We  have 
as  much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other.  Have  our  neighbors 
as  much  cheese  as  fish?  They  have  more  of  the  latter  than 
of  the  former.  Have  your  sons  as  many  pies  as  books? 
They  have  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former  ;  more  of 
the  one  than  of  the  other.  How  many  feet  has  the  man  ? 
He  has  two.  How  many  fingers  has  he  ?  He  has  several. 
How  many  sofas  have  you  ?  I  have  but  one,  but  my  father 
has  more  than  I ;  he  has  five.  Have  my  children  as  much 
courage  as  yours  ?  Yours  have  more  than  mine.  Have  I 
as  much  money  as  you  ?  You  have  less  than  I.  Have  you 
as  many  books  as  I?  I  have  less  than  you.  Have  I  as 
many  enemies  as  your  father  ?  You  have  fewer  than  he. 
Have  the  Prussians  (P?*usianos)  as  many  children  as  we  ? 
We  have  fewer  than  they.  Have  the  French  as  many  ships 
as  we  ?  They  have  fewer  than  we.  Aa\e  we  as  many  pins 
as  they  ?  We  have  fewer  than  they.  Have  we  fewer  pins 
than  the  children  of  our  friends?  W~e  have  fewer  than 
they.  • 


Exercise  No.  4  K 

I  Tiene  el  carpintero  tantos  bastonf  s  como  clavos  ?  Tiene 
tantos  de  estos  como  de  aquellos.  £  1  vsne  Vd.  mas  bizcochofc 
que  vasos  ?  Tengo  mas  de  estos  qui  de  aquellos.  £  Tiene 
nuestro  amigo  mas  azucar  que  diner  ">  ?  No  tiene  tanto  de 
este  como  de  aquel.  ,?  Tiene  mas  g  ^^tes  que  paraguas  ? 
No  tiene  tantos  de  estos  como  de  aqroWos.  i  Quien  tiene 
mas  jabon  que  yo  ?  Mi  hijo  tiene  mas  I  Quien  tiene  map 
pinceles  que  el  ?  El  pintor  tiene  mai  4  Tiene  el  tantos 
caballos  como  yo  ?  No  tiene  tantos  f*ab.*\llos  como  Yd. 
pero  tiene  mas  cuadros.  £  Tiene  el  o.  vuercicnte  inenof 
bueyes  que  nosotros  ?  Tiene  menos  buevT  que  nosotros,  j 
nosotros  tenemos  menos  grano  que  el.  £'X*ene  Vd.  otro  bi- 
llete  ?  Tengo  otro.  i  Tiene  su  hijo  de  Vd.  un  tintero  mas  r 
Tiene  varios  mas.  £  Tienen  los  holandeses  tantos  jardines 
como  nosotros  ?  Nosotros  tenemos  menos  que  ellos.  Te- 
nemos menos  pan  y  menos  cafe  que  ellos.  No  tenemos 
mucho  dinero,  pero  tenemos  bastante  pan,  carnero,  queso 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  87 

y  vino.  I  Tiene  Yd.  tan  to  valor  como  el  hijo  de  nuestro 
vecino  ?  Tengo  otro  tanto.  j  Tiene  el  joven  tantos  billetes 
como  nosotros  ?     Tiene  otros  tantos. 


TWENTIETH  LESSON. 

THE  INFINITIVE. 


There  are  in  Spanish  three  Conjugations,  which  are  dis- 
tinguished by  the  termination  of  the  Present  of  the  Infini- 
tive, viz.  : 

1.  The  first  has  its  Infinitive  terminated  in  or,  as  : 

Hablar,  to  speak ; 
Comprar,  to  buy ; 
Cortar,  to  cut. 

2.  The  second,  in  er,  as  : 

Temer,  to  fear ; 
Comer,  to  eat ; 
Beber,  to  drink. 

3.  The  third,  in  ir,  as  : 

Sufrir,  to  suffer ; 
Unir,  to  unite ; 
Escribir,  to  write. 

Every  Verb  which  is  marked  with  an  asterisk  (*)  is  irregular. 


Fear. 

Shame. 

Eight. 

Time. 

Need,  necessity. 

Courage. 

A  mind,  a  wish. 


Miedo,  temor. 

Vergiienza. 

Razon. 

Tiempo. 

Necesidad. 

Valor. 

Deseo. 


All  the  above  words  require  the  preposition  de  (of)  aftar 
them,  when  followed  by  an  Infinitive. 

To  work.  Trabajar. 

To  speak.  Hablar. 

Have  you  a  mind  to  work  ?  t  Tiene  Vd.  deseo  de  trabajar  ? 


I  have  a  mind  to  work. 

He  has  not  the  courage  to  speak, 

Are  3  ou  afraid  to  speak  ? 

I  am  ashained  to  speak. 


Tengo  deseo  de  trabajar. 
El  no  tiene  valor  de  hablar. 
i  Tiene  Vd.  miedo  de  hablar  ? 
1  Tengo  vergiienza  de  hablar. 


88 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


To  CUT. 

To  cut  it. 

To  cut  them. 

To  cut  some. 

Have  you  time  to  cut  the  bread  ? 

I  bave  time  to  cut  it. 

Has  he  a  mind  to  cut  trees  ? 

He  has  a  mind  to  cut  some. 


To  BUT. 
To  buy  some  more. 
To  buy  one. 
To  buy  two. 
To  buy  one  more. 
To  buy  two  more. 

To  BEEAK. 

I  break. 

You  break. 

He  breaks. 

We  break. 

You  (plural)  break. 

They  break. 

Thou  breakest. 


To  PICK  UP. 

To   MEND,    TO   BEPAIR. 

to  look  for,  to  seek. 
Still,  yet. 
Have  you  a  mind  to  buy  one  more 

horse  ? 
I  have  a  mind  to  buy  one  more. 
Have  you  a  mind   to  buy  some 

books  ? 
I  have  a  mind  to  buy  some,  but  I 

have  no  money. 
Are  you  afraid  to  break  the  glasses  ? 

I  am  afraid  to  break  them. 


COBTAB. 

Cortarlo. 

Cortarlos. 

Cortar. 

£  Tiene  Vd.   tiempo   de   cortar  el 

pan? 
Tengo  tiempo  de  cortarlo. 
I  Tiene  el  deseo  de  cortar  arboles  ? 
Tiene  deseo  de  cortar. 


Compbab. 
Comprar  mas. 
Comprar  uno. 
Comprar  dos. 
Comprar  uno  mas. 
Comprar  dos  mas. 


BoMPER,    QUEBRAB*(1). 

Yo  quiebro. 
Vd.  quiebra. 
El  quiebra. 
Nosotros  quebramos. 
Vds.  quiebran. 
Ellos  quiebran. 
Tu  quiebras. 


Becojeb.  * 
componeb,  beparab. 

BUSCAB.* 

A  UN,    TODAV1A. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  deseo  de  comprar  an 

caballo  mas  ? 
Tengo  deseo  de  comprar  uno  mas. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  deseo  de  comprar  li- 

bros  ? 
Tengo  deseo  de  comprar.  pero  no 

tengo  dinero. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  miedo  de  quebrar  loa 

vasos  ? 
Tengo  miedo  de  quebrarlos. 


(1).  The  import  of  these  Verbs  is  to  destroy  any  object  by  separation 
01  fracture,  liomper,  however,  is  not  so  limited  in  sense  as  quebrar, 
It  is  used  with  regard  to  anything  physical  or  abstract,  which  is  sus- 
ceptible of  being  broken  Quebrar  is  only  used  in  reference  to  a  tan 
gible  substance  of  a  vitreous  or  inflexible  nature  :  we  therefore  say, 
*' El  rompio  el  contrato,"  he  broke  the  contract.  " El  quehro  el  vaso," 
he -broke  the  tumbler.  "Ellos  despedazar on  los  Ubros,  y  quebrar on  los 
iarros,"  they  tore  the  books  to  pieces,  and  broke  the  jugs. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  89 


,:  Tiene  el  necesidad  de  trabajar  ? 
El  tiene  necesidad,  pero  no  deseo 

de  trabajar. 
^Tengo  yo  razon  de  comprar  un 

eaballo  ? 
¥ou  are  riglit  in  buying  one.  j  Vd.  tiene  razon  de  comprar  uno. 


Has  he  need  to  work  ? 

He    has    need,    but    no  mind  to 

work. 
Am  I  right  in  buying  a  horse? 


Exercise  No.  43. 

Have  you  still  a  mind  to  buy  my  friend's  horse  ?  I  have 
still  a  mind  to  buy  it,  but  I  have  no  more  money.  Have 
you  time  to  work?  I  have  time,  but  no  mind  to  work. 
Has  your  brother  time  to  cut  some  sticks  ?  He  has  time 
to  cut  some.  Has  he  a  mind  to  cut  some  bread  ?  He  has 
a  mind  to  cut  some,  but  he  has  no  knife.  Have  you  time 
to  cut  some  cheese  ?  I  have  time  to  cut  some.  Has  he  a 
desire  to  cut  the  tree  ?  He  has  a  desire  to  cut  it,  but  he 
has  no  time.  Has  the  tailor  time  to  cut  the  cloth  ?  He 
has  time  to  cut  it.  Have  I  time  to  cut  the  trees  ?  You 
have  time  to  cut  them.  Has  the  painter  a  mind  to  buy  a 
horse  ?  He  has  a  mind  to  buy  two.  Has  your  captain 
time  to  speak  ?  He  has  time,  but  no  desire  to  speak.  Are 
you  afraid  to  speak  ?  I  am  not  afraid,  but  I  am  ashamed 
to  speak.  Am  I  right  in  buying  a  gun  ?  You  are  right  in 
buying  one.  Is  your  friend  right  in  buying  a  great  ox  ? 
Am  I  right  in  buying  some  oxen  ?  You  are  right  in  buy- 
ing some. 


Exercise  No.  44. 

Have  you  a  desire  to  speak?  I  have  a  desire,  but  I 
Lave  not  the  courage  to  speak.  Have  you  the  courage  to 
cut  your  arm  ?  I  have  not  the  courage  to  cut  it.  Am  I 
right  in  speaking  ?  You  are  right  in  speaking,  but  you  are 
not  right  in  cutting  my  trees.  Has  the  son  of  your  friend 
a  desire  to  buy  one  more  bird  ?  He  has  a  desire  to  buy 
one  more.  Have  you  a  desire  to  buy  a  few  more  horses? 
"We  have  a  desire  to  buy  a  few  more,  but  we  have  no  more 
money  What  has  our  tailor  a  mind  to  mend  ?  He  has  a 
mind  to  mend  our  old  vests.     Has  the  shoemaker  time  to 


90  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

mend  our  shoes?  He  has  time,  but  he  has  no  mind  to 
mend  them.  Who  has  a  mind  to  mend  our  hats  ?  The 
hatter  has  a  mind  to  mend  them.  Are  you  afraid  to  look 
for  my  horse  ?  I  am  not  afraid,  but  I  have  no  time  to  look 
for  it.  What  have  you  a  mind  to  buy  ?  We  have  a  mind 
to  buy  something.  Are  their  children  afraid  to  pick  up 
some  nails  ?  They  are  not  afraid  to  pick  up  some.  Have 
you  a  mind  to  break  my  pins  ?  I  have  a  mind  to  pick 
them  up,  but  not  to  break  them.  Am  I  right  in  picking 
up  your  gloves  ?  You  are  right  in  picking  them  up,  but 
you  are  not  right  in  cutting  them. 


Exercise  No.  45. 

I  Tiene  Yd.  valor  de  {or  para)  quebrar  estos  vasos?  Tengo 
valor,  pero  no  tengo  deseo  de  quebrarlos.  <?  Quien  tiene 
deseo  de  quebrar  nuestro  espejo?  Nuestro  enemigo  tiene 
deseo  de  quebrarlo.  £  Tienen  los  forasteros  deseo  de  rom- 
per nuestros  f usiles  ?  Tienen  deseo,  pero  no  tienen  valor 
{or  para)  romperlos.  ,?  Tiene  Vd.  deseo  de  romper  el  buque 
del  capitan  ?  Tengo  deseo,  pero  tengo  miedo  de  romperlo. 
I  Quien  tiene  deseo  de  comprar  mi  hermoso  perro  ?  Nadie 
tiene  deseo  de  comprarlo.  £  Tiene  Vd.  deseo  de  comprar 
mis  hermosos  baules,  6  los  del  frances  ?  Tengo  deseo  de 
comprar  los  de  Vd.,  y  no  los  del  frances.  £  Cuales  libros 
tiene  el  ingles  deseo  de  comprar  ?  Tiene  deseo  de  comprar 
el  que  Vd.  tiene,  el  que  su  hijo  tiene,  y  el  que  el  mio  tiene. 
Cuales  guantes  tiene  Vd.  deseo  de  buscar?  Tengo  deseo 
de  buscar  los  de  Vd.,  los  mios,  y  los  de  nuestros  ninos. 


TWENTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


To  MAKE,  TO  DO. 

To  BE  WILLING,  TO  WISH, 

Are  you  willing? 

Will  you  ? 

Do  you  wish? 

T  will,  I  am  willing:  I  wish. 

Will  he,  is  he  willing,  does  he  wish  ? 

He  will,  he  is  willing,  he  wishes. 


Hacee.  * 
Quekeb.  * 

L Quiere  Vd.? 

Yo  quiero. 
I  Quiere  £1? 
El  quiere. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


91 


We  will,  we  are  willing,  we  wish. 
You  will,  you  are  willing,  you  wish. 
They  will,  they  are  willing,  they 

wish. 
Thou  wilt   thou  art  willing,  thou 

wishest. 


Do  you  wish  to  make  my  fire  ? 
I  am  willing  to  make  it. 
I  do  not  wish  to  make  it. 
Does  he  wish  to  buy  your  horse  ? 

He  wishes  to  buy  it. 

He  does  not  wish  to  buy  it. 


To  BURN. 
TO  WARM. 
TO  TEAK. 


The  broth. 
My  room. 
The  bed. 


Togo. 

With,  or  at  the  house  of. 

To,  or  at  the  house  or. 

To  be. 
To  be  at  the  man's  house. 
To  go  to  the  man's  house. 
To  be  at  his  (one's)  friend's  house. 
To  go  to  my  father's  house. 


At  home. 
To  be  at  heme. 

To  go  home. 
To  be  with  me,  or  at  my  house. 
To  go  to  me,  to  my  house. 
To  be  with  him,  her,  at  his, 

house. 
To  go  tc  him,   her,   to  his, 

house. 
To  be  with  us,  at  our  house. 
To  go  to  us,  to  our  house. 
To  be  with  you,  at  your  house. 
To  go  to  you,  to  your  house. 
To  be  with  them,  at  their  house. 


Nosotros  queremos. 
Vds.  quieren. 
Ellos  quieren. 

Tu  quieres. 


£  Quiere  Vd.  hacer  fuego? 

Quiero  hacerlo. 

No  quiero  hacerlo. 

j  Quiere  e'l  comprar  su  caballo 

Vd.? 
Quiere  comprarlo. 
No  quiere  comprarlo. 


her 
her 


QuEMAR,  ABBASAB. 

Calentab.  * 
Despedazab,  Basgab. 


El  caldo. 
Mi  cuarto. 
La  cama. 


Ib.* 

En  casa  DJB. 

A  casa  de. 

See,*  estab.* 
Estar  en  casa  del  hombre. 
Ir  a  casa  del  hombre. 
Estar  en  casa  de  su  amigo. 
Ir  a  casa  de  mi  padre. 


En  casa. 
Estar  en  casa. 


Ib  a  casa. 
Estar  en  mi  casa. 
Ir  a  mi  casa. 
Estar  en  casa  de  el  or  ella. 

Ir  a  su  casa. 

Estar  en  nuestra  casa. 

Ir  a  nuestra  casa. 

Estar  en  casa  de  Vd. 

Ir  a  su  casa,  6  a  casa  de  Vd. 

Estar  en  su  casa. 


92 


THE   SFANISH  TEACHEIi. 


To  go  to  them,  to  their  house. 

To  be  with  sonic  one,  at  some  one's 

house. 
To  go  to  some  one,  or  to  some  one's 

house. 
To  be  with  no  one,  at  no  one's 

house. 
To  go  to  no  one,  to  no  one's  house. 


Ir  a  su  casa. 

Estar  en  casa  de  alguien. 

Ir  a  casa  de  alguien. 

No  estar  en  casa  de  nadie. 

No  ir  a  casa  de  nadie. 


At  whose,  with  whom  ? 
To  whose  house,  to  whom  ? 
To  whom  or  to  whose  house  do 

you  wish  to  go  ? 
E  wish  to  go  to  no  one,  to  no  one's 

house. 
At  whose  house  (with  whom)  is 

your  brother? 
He  is  at  ours,  with  us. 


4  En  que  casa  ? 
£a  que  casa  ? 
I A  que  casa  quiere  Vd.  ir? 

No  quiero  ir  a  casa  de  nadie. 

En  que  casa  esta  su  hermano  de 

Vd.? 
Esta  en  nuestra  casa. 


The  Verb  estar,  when  used  in  the  third  person  singular  of  the  present 
tense,  must  be  accented  to  distinguish  it  from  the  demonstrative  Pro- 
noun feminine  esta  (this). 


Is  he  at  home  ? 
He  is  not  at  home. 

Are  you  ? 

Tired. 

Are  you  tired  ? 

I  am  tired. 

I  am  not  tired. 

Is  he? 

He  is. 

We  are. 

You  are. 

They  are. 

Thou  art. 


To  DEINK. 

Wheke  ? 
"What  do  you  wish  to  do  ? 
Wha<  does  your  brother  wish  to  do  ? 


Is  your  father  at  home  ? 
What  will  the  Mexicans  buy  1 

They  will  buy  something. 
They  will  buy  nothing. 


I  Esta  dl  en  casa  ? 
No  esta  en  casa. 


iEs  Vd.,  esta  Vd.  ? 
Gausado. 

^Esta  Vd.  cansado? 
Estoy  cansado. 
No  estoy  cansado. 
;Estaelores  el? 
El  esta  or  61  es. 
Estamos  or  somos. 
Vds.  estau  or  Vds.  son. 
Ellos  estan  or  ellos  son. 
Tu  estas  or  tii  eres. 


Bebek. 

4D0NDE,  Ad6nde? 
£  Qud  quiere  Vd.  hacer? 
I  Que*  quiere  hacer  su  hermano  de 
Vd.? 


I  Esta  en  casa  su  padre  de  Vd.  ? 
iQue'  quieren  comprar  los  niejica* 

110s? 
Quieren  comprar  algo. 
No  quieren  comprar  nada. 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


93 


Do  they  wish  to  buy  an  ass? 
They  wish  to  buy  one. 
Do  you  wish  to  drink  any  thing  ? 
I  do  not  wish  to  drink  any  thing. 


I  Quieren  ellos  comprar  un  asno  ? 
Quieren  comprar  uno. 
,;  Quiere  Vd.  beber  algo  ? 
JNo  quiero  beber  nada. 


use  of  the  vekb  ser  and  estar,  TO  BE. 


Ser  is  used  when  the  attribute?  or  quality  is  considered 
inherent  or  permanent  in  the  subject ;  as, 


P 


edro  es 


(hombre. 
honrado. 
valiente. 


un  borrachon 


Peter  is 


a  man. 
honest, 
valiant, 
a  drunkard. 


Ser  is  also  used  when  the  quality  affirmed  in  the  subject 
is  one  denoting  the  dignity  or  profession  of  a  person,  in  the 
most  abstract  sense,  for  it  comprehends  even  profession  of 
principles  and  human  feelings,  as  friendship,  love,  etc 
Thus  we  say : 


Pedro  es 


(coroneL 
sastre. 
democrata. 
mi  amigo. 


f  a  colonel. 

Peter  is   I  a  tailor" 
ceteris   i  a  democraL 

[  my  friend. 


Edar  is  used  when  the  attribute  or  quality  is  considered 
transient ;  as, 


ienfermo. 
triste. 
borracho. 


{sick, 
sad. 
drunk. 


Estar  is  also  used  when  it  denotes  locality,  that  is,  the 
place  in  which  the  subject  is  located  ;  as, 


isu 
l<: 
el 


su  casa. 
adro  esta  en  ^  Londres. 

otro  mundo. 


)his  nouse. 
London, 
the  other  world. 


1.  The  English  Auxiliary  Verb  to  do,  as  well  as  will,  shall,  may,  aiu 
never  translated  in  Spanish  except  when  they  are  used  as  principal 
Verbs, 


94  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Exercise  No.  46. 

Do  you  wish  to  work  ?  I  am  willing  to  work,  but  I  am 
tired.  Do  you  wish  to  break  my  glasses  ?  I  do  not  wish 
to  break  them.  Are  you  willing  to  look  for  my  stick  ?  I 
am  willing  to  look  for  it.  "What  do  you  wish  to  pick  up  ? 
I  wish  to  pick  up  that  dollar  and  that  franc.  Do  you  wish 
to  pick  up  this  cent  or  that?  I  wish  to  pick  up  both. 
Does  your  neighbor  wish  to  buy  these  combs  or  those? 
He  wishes  to  buy  both  these  and  those.  Does  that  man 
wish  to  cut  your  foot  ?  He  does  not  wish  to  cut  mine,  but 
his  own.  Does  the  painter  wish  to  burn  some  oil  ?  He 
wishes  to  burn  some.  What  does  the  shoemaker  wish  to 
mend?  He  wishes  to  mend  our  old  shoes.  Does  the 
tailor  wish  to  mend  anything  ?  He  wishes  to  mend  some 
vests.  Is  our  enemy  willing  to  burn  his  ships?  He  is  not 
willing  to  burn  his  own,  but  ours.  Do  you  wish  to  do  any- 
thing? I  do  not  wish  to  do  anything.  What  do  you  wish 
to  .do  ?  We  wish  to  warm  our  tea  and  our  father's  coffee. 
Do  you  wish  to  warm  my  brother's  broth  ?  I  am  willing  to 
warm  it.  Is  your  servant  willing  to  make  my  lire  ?  H*?  is 
willing  to  make  it,  but  he  has  no  time. 


Exercise  No.  47. 

UPON   THE   VERBS   S6T  AND   estar. 

Is  Peter  an  honest  man?  He  is  (Lo  es).  Is  he  va- 
liant? He  is  not.  Is  he  a  colonel?  He  is  not,  he  is 
a  captain.  Is  he  a  shoemaker?  No,  Sir,  he  is  a  tailor. 
Is  Peter  your  friend?  No,  he  is  not  my  friend,  he  is 
my  enemy.  Is  Peter  a  drunkard  ?  He  is  not  a  drunk- 
ard, although  (aunque)  he  is  drunk  now  (ahora).  Is  he 
sad  ?  He  is  not  sad,  he  is  very  glad  (alegre).  Is  Peter  in 
London  ?  He  is  not  in  London,  he  is  in  the  other  world. 
Is  Peter  your  brother  r  He  is  not  my  brother,  he  is  my 
friend.  Is  Peter  sick  ?  He  is  not  sick,  although  he  is 
rather  indisposed.  Is  Peter  a  sailor  ?  He  is  not  a  sailor 
he  is  a  soldier.  Is  Peter  at  Havana  ?  He  is  not  at  Havana 
now,  he  is  here  (aqui).     Is  Peter  a  Spaniard?     He  is  not  a 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  95 

Spaniard,  he  is  a  Mexican.  Is  Peter  a  white  {bianco)  man  ? 
He  is  a  negro  {negro).  He  is  a  mulatto  (midato).  Is  Peter 
a  peasant  ?  He  is  not  a  peasant,  he  is  a  blacksmith.  Is 
Peter  your  countryman  ?  He  is  not  my  countryman,  but 
my  friend's  countryman.  Of  what  is  this  candlestick  made 
(hecho)  ?  It  is  made  of  copper.  Of  what  is  this  hand- 
kerchief made?  It  is  made  of  silk  (seda).  It  is  made  of 
cotton.  "Where  (en  donde)  is  your  handkerchief  ?  It  is  in 
my  room  (cuarto).     - 


Exercise  No.  48. 

Am  I  right  in  warming  your  broth  ?  You  are  right  in 
warming  it,-  Is  my  servant  right  in  warming  your  bed? 
He  is  right  in  warming  it.  Is  he  afraid  of  tearing  your 
vest  ?  He  is  not  afraid  of  tearing  it,  but  of  burning  it.  Do 
your  children  wish  to  go  to  our  friend's  ?  They  do  not 
wish  to  go  to  your  friend's,  but  to  ours.  Are  your  children 
at  home  ?  They  are  not  at  home,  but  at  their  neighbor's. 
Is  the  captain  at  home  ?  He  is  not  at  home,  but  at  his 
brother's.  Is  the  foreigner  at  our  brother's  ?  He  is  not  at 
our  brother's,  but  at  our  father's.  At  whose  house  is  the 
Englishman  ?  He  is  at  yours.  Is  the  American  at  our 
house  ?  He  is  not  at  our  house,  but  at  his  friend's.  With 
whom  is  the  Italian  ?  He  is  with  nobody  ;  he  is  at  home. 
Do  you  wish  to  go  home  ?  I  do  not  wish  to  go  home  ;  I 
wish  to  go  to  the  son  of  my  neighbor.  Is  your  son  at 
home  ?  No,  Sir,  he  is  not  at  home.  With  whom  is  he  ? 
He  is  with  the  good  friends  of  my  old  neighbor.  Will  you 
go  to  any  one's  house  ?    I  will  go  to  no  one's  house. 


Exercise  No.  49. 

Where  is  your  son  ?  He  is  at  home.  What  will  he  do 
at  home  ?  He  wishes  to  drink  some  good  wine.  Is  your 
brother  at  home  ?  He  is  not  at  home  ;  he  is  at  the  for- 
eigner's. What  do  you  wish  to  drink  ?  I  wish  to  drink 
some  coffee.    What  will  the  German  do  at  home  ?    He  will 


96 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


work,  and  drink  some  good  wire.  Wbat  have  you  at 
home  ?  I  have  nothing  at  home.  Has  the  merchant  a  de- 
sire to  buy  as  much  sugar  as  tea  ?  He  wishes  to  buy  as 
much  of  the  one  as  of  the  other.  Are  you  tired?  I  am 
not  tired.  Who  is  tired?  My  brother  is  tired.  Has  the 
Mexican  a  mind  to  buy  as  many  horses  as  asses  ?  He 
wishes  to  buy  more  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former.  Do 
you  wish  to  drink  anything  ?  I  do  not  wish  to  drink  any- 
thing. How  many  chickens  does  the  cook  wish  to  buy? 
He  wishes  to  buy  four.  Do  the  French  wish  to  buy  any- 
thing ?  They  do  not  wish  to  buy  anything.  Does  the 
Spaniard  wish  to  buy  anything  ?  He  wishes  to  buy  some- 
thing, but  he  has  no  money.  Do  you  wish  to  go  to  our 
brothers'  ?  I  do  not  wish  to  go  to  their  house,  but  to  their 
children's.  Is  the  Scotchman  at  anybody's  house  ?  He  is 
ut  nobody's.     Where  is  he  ?    He  is  at  his  own  house. 


TWENTY-SECOND  LESSON 


Where?     Whither?    Where  to? 

Theee  or  thither,  at  it,  to  it,  in  it. 

1  o  go  thither. 

To  be  there. 

It  there  or  thither. 

Them  there  or  thither. 

To  take,  to  carry. 

To  send. 

To  lead,  to  conduct. 

To  take  it  there  or  thither. 


I  Donde  ?   ,t  En  donde  ?  ,:  Adonde  ? 

AHI,    ALli,    ALLA   (Y\ 

Ir  alia. 
Estar  alii. 
Lo...  allf. 
Los . . .   alii. 
Llevar. 

Enviar,  mandar. 
Conducir.* 
Llevarlo  alia. 


(1)  Ahi,  Alii,  Alia. — The  equivalents  in  English  are,  there,  thither,  that 
place;  but  they  can  by  no  means  be  indiscriminately  used.  A  hi  always 
denotes  a  place  near  at  hand,  as  it  generally  supposes  it  close  to  the 
person  addressed  to,  as  :  "Examine,  O  mortal !  thy  heart,  thou  wilt  there 
see  the  motives  of  thy  actions  :"  /  examina,  oh  mortal !  tu  corazon,  ahi 
verds  los  motivos  de  tus  acetones.  As  for  Alii,  Alia  (there  or  thither),  as 
well  as  Aqui,  Acd  (here,  hither',  the  following  rule  will  be  observed  : 
Alll  and  Aqui  will  be  used  when  the  idea  of  rest  or  permanence  is 
implied,  and  Alia  and  Acd  when  that  of  motion,  Ex.  :  Venga  Vd.  acd, 
not  aqid  (come  here) ;  Vaya  Vd.  alia,  not  aUi  (go  there)  ;  but  we  must 
say,  aqui  vivo,  here  I  live;  Aqui  le  vi,  here  I  saw  him  ;  Aqui  tengo  la 
carta,  I  have  here  the  letter,  &c.  For  the  same  reason,  we  make  use  oi 
AM,  and  not  Alii,  to  indicate  a  remote  epoch  or  country— Alia,  en  el 
siglo  dicimo  (in  the  tenth  century)  ;  AM  en  Turquia  (in  Turkey),  &c. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


97 


Iim  ('object  of  the  Verb.) 
Chem  (object  of  the  Verb). 

It  to  him  or  to  them. 

To  send  it  to  him  or  to  them. 

To  take  him  there  or  thither. 

Them  to  him,  or  to  them. 

To  carry  them . 

Will  you  send  it  to  my  father  ? 

I  will  send  it  to  him. 


Lo. 

Los. 


Selo. 

Enviarselo. 

Conducirle. 

Se  los. 

Llevarlos. 

I  Quiere  Vd.  enviarlo  a  mi  padre  ? 

Quiero  enviarselo. 


Will  has  been  and  is  here  used  not  as  an  auxiliary,  but  as  a  principal 
Verb. 


To  come. 
When? 
To-morrow. 
To-day. 


Venir.* 
,;  Cuando  ? 
Mafiana. 
Hoy. 


HERE  Or  TO  SOME  PLACE. 
ov  TO  ANY  PLA.CE. 
Or   TO  NO  PLACE. 

Do  you  wish  to  go  anywhere  ? 

I  wish  to  go  somewhere. 

I  do  not  wish  to  go  anywhere. 


En  or  A  alguna  parte. 

En  or  A  cualquier  parte. 

En  or  A  ninguna  parte. 
I  Quiere  Vd.  ir  a  cualquiera  parte? 
Quiero  ir  a  alguna  parte. 
No  quiero  ir  a  ninguna  parte. 


To  write. 
At  what  o'clock  ? 
At  one  o'clock. 
At  two  o'clock. 

Half. 

The  quarter. 

At  half-past  one. 

At  a  quarter  past  one. 

At  a  quarter  past  two. 


Escribir  (2). 
I A  que"  hora  ? 
A  la  una. 
A  las  dos. 


Medio  (Jem.  media). 
El  cuarto. 
A  la  una  y  media. 
A  la  una  y  cuarto. 
A  las  dos  y  cuarto. 


Again  :  Por  acd  and  por  alia  are  employed  to  designate  the  locality,  not 
circumscribed  to  a  certain  place,  but  comprehending  the  several  of  which 
a  city,  province  or  kingdom  is  composed,  ex.  :  por  acd  no  es  buena  la 
cosecha  este  ano,  The  crop  is  not  good  here  this  year.  Escribe  que  por 
olid  hay  rum-ores  de  guerra,  He  writes  that  there  are  rumors  of  war  there. 
The  same  rule  is  applicable  to  the  adverbs  En  donde  and  Adonde — the 
first  implies  rest,  and  the  second  motion.  In  short,  when  motion  is 
implied,  acd,  alia,  adonde  or  a  must  be  used,  and  aqui,  alii,  en  donde  or  en 
when  it  implies  rest. 

(2).  This  verb  is  irregular  only  in  its  past  participle,  which  is  escriio, 
and  not  escri'oido. 


98  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


At  a  quarter  to  one. 
At  twelve  o'clock  or  at  noon. 
At  twelve  o'clock  at  night  or  mid- 
night. 

Less. 


A  la  una  menos  cuarto. 

A  las  doce,  6  a  medio  dia. 

A  las  doce  de  la  noche,  6  a  media 

nszt-he. 
Me'nos. 


Exercise  No.  50. 

"Will  you  Fend  one  more  trunk  to  our  friends?  I  will 
send  several  more  there.  How  many  more  hats  does  the 
hatter  wish  to  send  ?  He  wishes  to  send  six  more.  Has 
your  son  the  courage  to  go  to  the  captain's  ?  He  has 
the  courage  to  go  there,  but  he  has  no  time.  Do  you  wish 
to  buy  as  many  dogs  as  horses  ?  I  will  buy  more  of  the 
latter  than  of  the  former.  At  what  o'clock  do  you  wish 
to  send  your  servant  to  the  Dutchman's  ?  I  will  send  him 
thither  at  a  quarter  to  six.  At  what  o'clock  is  your  father 
at  home  ?  He  is  at  home  at  twelve  o'clock.  At  what 
o'clock  does  your  friend  wish  to  write  his  notes  ?  He  will 
write  them  at  midnight.  Are  you  afraid  to  go  to  the  cap- 
tain's ?     I  am  not  afraid,  but  ashamed  to  go  there. 


Exercise  No.  51. 

Do  you  wish  to  go  home  ?  I  wish  to  go  thither.  Does 
your  son  wish  to  go  to  my  house  ?  He  wishes  to  go  there. 
Is  your  brother  at  home  ?  He  is  there.  Whither  do  you 
wish  to  go  ?  I  wish  to  go  home.  Do  your  children  wish 
to  go  to  my  house  ?  They  do  not  wish  to  go  there.  To 
whom  will  you  take  that  note  ?  I  will  take  it  to  my  neigh- 
bor. "Will  your  servant  take  my  note  to  your  father's  ? 
He  will  take  it  there.  Will  your  brother  carry  my  guns  to 
the  Russians  ?  He  will  carry  them  thither.  To  whom  do 
our  enemies  wish  to  carry  our  guns  ?  They  wish  to  carry 
them  to  the  Turks.  Whither  will  the  shoemaker  carry  my 
shoes  ?  He  will  carry  them  to  your  house.  Will  he  carry 
them  home  ?  He  will  not  carry  them.  Will  you  come  to 
my  house  ?  I  will  go.  Whither  do  you  wish  to  go  ?  I 
wish  to  go  to  the  good  English.  Will  the  good  Italians  go 
to  our  house  ?  They  will  not  go  thither.  Whither  do  they 
wish  to  go  ?     They  will  go  nowhere 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


99 


Exercise  No.  52. 

I  Quiere  Vd.  llevar  a  su  hijo  de  Vd.  a  mi  casa  ?  No 
quiero  llevarle  a  su  casa  de  Vd.  sino  a  la  del  capitau. 
I  Cuando  quiere  Vd.  llevarle  a  casa  del  capitau  ?  Quiero 
llevarle  (alia)  manana.  £  Quiere  Vd.  llevar  a  mi  nifio  a  casa 
del  medico  ?  Quiero  llevarle  (alia),  ,?  Cuando  quiere  Vd, 
llevarle  ?  Quiero  llevarle  hoy.  <?  A  que  hora  quiere  Vd. 
llevarle  ?  A  las  dos  y  media.  £  Cuando  quiere  Vd.  enviar 
su  criado  a  casa  del  medico  ?  Quiero  enviarle  (alia)  hoy. 
I A  que-  hora  ?  A  las  diez  y  cuarto.  I  Quiere  Vd.  ir  a 
alguna  parte  ?  Quiero  ir  a  alguna  parte.  I  Adonde 
quiere  Vd.  ir  ?  Quiero  ir  a  casa  del  escoces.  <f  Quiere  el 
irlandes  venir  a  su  casa  de  Vd.  ?  Quiere  venir  a  mi  casa. 
,5  Quiere  su  hijo  de  Vd.  ir  a  casa  de  alguien  ?  Quiere  ir  a 
casa  de  alguien.  £  A  que  casa  quiere  ir  ?  Quiere  ir  a 
casa  de  su  aniigo.  <?  Quieren  los  espafioles  ir  a  alguna 
parte  ?  No  quieren  ir  a  ninguna  parte.  £  Quiere  nuestro 
amigo  ir  a  casa  de  alguien  ?  No  quiere  ir  a  casa  de 
nadie. 


TWENTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


To,    IN  OKDEB  TO. 

To   SEE. 

Have  you  any  money  to  buy  bread  ? 

I  have  money  to  buy  some. 

Will  you  go  to  your  brother's  in 

order  to  see  him  ? 
I  have  no  time  to  go  there  to  see 

him. 
Has  your  brother  a  knife  to  cut  his 

bread  ? 
He  has  none  to  cut  it. 
The  salt. 
To  salt. 


To   SWEEP. 

To   KILL. 

To   BE   ABLE    (CAN). 

Can  you  ?  or  are  you  able  ? 
I  can.  I  am  able. 


Paba. 

Veb. 
^Tiene  Vd.  dinero  para  comprar 

pan  ? 
Tengo  dinero  para  comprar. 
,:  Quiere  Vd.  ir  a  casa  de  su  her- 

mano  de  Vd.  para  verle  ? 
No  tengo  tiempo  de  ir  alia  para 

verle. 
(iTiene    su    hermano    de   Vd.    im 

cuchillo  para  cortar  su  pan  ? 
El  no  tiene  para  cortarlo. 
La  sal. 
Salar. 


Baeree. 
Matab. 

PODER.  * 

I  Puede  Vd.  ? 
Yo  puedo. 


100 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


I  cannot,  I  am  not  able. 

Yo  no  puedo. 

Can  he  V  is  he  able  ? 

-j  Puede  el? 

He  can,  he  is  able. 

El  puede. 

He  cannot,  he  is  unable. 

El  no  puede. 

We  can,  we  are  able. 

Nosotros  podemos. 

You  can,  you  are  able. 

Vds.  pueden. 

They  can,  they  are  able. 

Ellos  pueden. 

Me. 

Me. 

Him. 

Le. 

To  see  me. 

Verme. 

To  see  him. 

Verle. 

To  kill  him. 

Matarle. 

To. 

A. 

To   THE   Of  AT   THE. 

Ax,  plur.  A 

To    HTM,    TO   HEB. 

Le. 

To  YOU. 

Le— A  Vd. 

TO   ME. 

Me. 

To  the  friend. 

Al  amigo. 

To  the  man. 

Al  hombre. 

To  the  captain. 

Al  capitan. 

To  the  book. 

Al  libro. 

To  the  frienda 

A  los  amigos. 

To  the  men.   . 

A  los  hombres. 

To  the  captains. 

A  los  capitanes. 

To  the  books. 

A  los  libros. 

To  speak  to  me. 

Hablarme. 

To  speak  to  him,  to  her. 

Hablarle. 

To  write  to  him  or  to  her. 

Escribirle. 

To  write  to  me. 

Escribirme. 

To  speak  to  the  friend. 

Hablar  al  amigo. 

To  write  to  the  man. 

Escribir  al  hombre. 

LOft. 


Can  you  write  to  me  ? 

I  can  write  to  you. 

Can  the  captain  speak  to  you  ? 

He  can  speak  to  me. 

Will  you  write  to  your  brother? 

f  will  write  to  him. 

The  basket 

The  carpet. 

The  floor. 

The  cat. 

W  ill  you  sond  the  book  to  the  man  ? 


I  Puede  Vd.  escribirme  ? 

Puedo  escribir  a  Vd. 

;  Puede  el  capitan  hablar  4  Vd.  ? 

El  puede  hablarme. 

;  Quiere  Vd.  escribir  a  su  hermano 

de  Vd.  ? 
Quiero  escribirle. 
El  canasto,  el  cesto. 
La  alfombra. 
El  piso,  el  suelo. 
El  gato. 
<;  Quiere    Vd.    enviar    el    libro    al 

hombre  ? 


/ 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


101 


.  I  -will  send  it  to  him. 
When  will  you  send  it  to  him? 
I  will  send  it  to  him  to-morrow. 
I  wish  to  see  my  father. 


Quiero  enviarselo. 
I  Cuando  quiere  Vd.  enviarselo  ? 
Quiero  enviarselo  manana. 
Quiero  ver  a  mi  padre. 


SINGULAB. 

Me, 

You, 

Him, 

To  me. 
To  you. 
To  him. 

Me— a  mf. 
Le-a  Vd. 
Le— &  el. 

PLURAL. 

Us, 

You, 
Them, 

To  you. 
To  us. 
To  them. 

Nos — a  nosotros. 
Les— a  Vds.,  Vds. 
Les — a  ellos,  ellos. 

Does  he  wish  to  speak  to  you  ? 
He  does  not  wish  to  speak  to  me, 

but  to  you. 
Do  you  wish  to  write  to  him  ? 
I  do  not  wish  to  write  to  him,  but 

to  his  brother. 


i  Quiere  e'l  hablar  a  Vd.  ? 

El  no  quiere  hablarme  a  mi  sino  a 

Vd. 
I  Quiere  Vd.  escribirle  ? 
No  quiero  escribirle  a  e'l,  sino  a  su 

hermano. 


It  to  me. 

Them  to  me. 

fMelo. 

t  Me  los. 

It  to  him. 

Them  to  him. 

t  Se  lo. 

f  Se  los. 

It  to  us. 

Them  to  us. 

t  Nos  lo. 

f  Nos  los. 

It  to  you. 

Them  to  you. 

t  Se  lo. 

t  Se  los. 

It  to  them. 

Them  to  them. 

f  Se  lo. 

t  Se  los. 

When    will 

you    send    mo    the 

1  Cuando  quiere 

7d.  enviarme 

basket  ? 

canasto  ? 

I  will  send  it  to  you  to-day. 

Quiero  enviarselo  a  Vd.  hoy. 

To  GIVE. 
TO  LEND. 

Are  you  willing  to  give  me  some 

bread  ? 
I  am  willing  to  give  you  some. 
Will  you  lend  some  money  to  my 

brother  ? 
I  will  lend  him  some. 


el 


Dae.* 
Peestab. 
£  Quiere  Vd.   darme  un   poco    de 

pan  ? 
Quiero  darle  a  Vd. 
Quiere  Vd.   prestar  dinero    &  mi 

hermano  ? 
Quiere  prestarle. 


102 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


g^SgS 
rf  1*8  3  M 


fl~  s 

°£        H3  V3 

re  ,» 


R^< 


h4  S  ®  2 
i     ^      o 

i  °  i 

°  ..    I> 

!    «    i 
i     S    ^j 


£*a°g 


Sv3 


CD    ft    R 


J* 


a  a^ 
s 

a 

,o 
V3 


Bid     h 


°a*„.s 

O    CO 


CN 


.©  «> 


c  o 
daP4 


a^       g 

<2e         .g 


K 


cu 


^R  2 


d  cd 


■*  OS 

CD   £ 

>s 

fl 

P-WI 

H  ■+*"  <3 
5  o  ~ 

C    CD  *• 

Hi 

<D    03    CD 

ll 


■    CD 


oil 

.© 

I* 

if 


05    >t 

4 


Go 


S 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  103 

Exercise  No.  53. 

Has  the  carpenter  money  enoagii  to  buy  a  hammer  ?  He 
has  enough  to  buy  one.  Has  the  captain  money  enough  to 
buy  a  ship  ?  He  has  not  enough  to  buy  one.  Has  the 
peasant  a  desire  to  buy  some  bread ?  He  has  a  desire  to 
buy  some,  but  he  has  not  money  enough  to  buy  some.  Has 
your  son  ink  (linta)  to  write  a  note  ?  He  has  not  any  to 
write  one.  Have  you  time  to  see  my  brother  ?  I  have  no 
time  to  see  him.  Does  your  father  wish  to  see  me  ?  He 
does  not  wish  to  see  you.  Has  your  servant  a  broom 
(escoBa)  to  sweep  the  room  ?  He  has  one  to  sweep  it.  Is 
he  willing  to  sweep  it  ?  He  is  willing  to  sweep  it.  Has  the 
sailor  money  to  buy  some  tea  ?  H©  has  none  to  buy  any. 
Has  your  cook  money  to  buy  some  fish  ?  He  has  money  to 
buy  some.  Has  he  money  to  buy  some  chickens  ?  He  has 
money  to  buy  some.  Have  you  salt  enough  to  salt  my  fish  ? 
I  have  enough  to  salt  it.  Will  your  friend  come  to  my 
house  in  order  to  see  me  ?  He  will  neither  come  to  your 
house,  nor  see  you.  Has  your  neighbor  a  desire  to  kill  his 
horse?     He  has  no  desire  to  kill  it. 


Exercise  No.  54. 

Can  you  cut  me  some  bread  ?  I  can  cut  you  some. 
Have  you  a  knife  to  cut  me  some  ?  I  have  one.  Can  you 
mend  my  gloves  ?  I  can  mend  them,  but  I  have  no  wish  to 
do  it.  Can  the  tailor  make  me  a  coat  (canaca)  ?  He  can 
make  you  one.  "Will  you  speak  to  the  physician  ?  I  will 
speak  to  him.  Does  your  son  wish  to  see  me  in  order  to 
speak  to  me  ?  He  wishes  to  see  you,  in  order  to  give  you  a 
dollar  (pesoj.  Does  he  wish  to  kill  me  ?  He  does  not  wish 
to  kill  you  ;  he  only  wishes  to  see  you.  Does  the  son  of 
our  old  friend  wish  to  kill  an  ox  ?  He  wishes  to  kill  two. 
Wrho  has  a  mind  to  kill  our  cat  ?  Our  neighbor's  child  has 
a  mind  to  kill  it.  How  much  money  can  you  send  me  ?  I 
can  send  you  twenty  francs.  Will  you  send  me  my  carpet  ? 
I  will  send  it  to  you.  Will  you  send  the  shoemaker  any- 
thing ?  I  will  send  him  my  shoes.  "Will  you  send  him  your 
coats  ?     No  ;  I  will  send  them  to  my  tailor.     Can  the  tailor 


104:  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

send  me  my  coat  ?  He  cannot  send  it  to  you.  Aie  your 
children  able  to  write  to  me  ?  They  are  able  to  write  to 
you.    Will  you  lend  me  your  basket  ?     I  will  lend  it  to  you. 


Exercise  No.  55. 

£  Quiere  Vd.  hablar  a  los  ninos  de  los  holandeses  ?  Quiero 
hablarles.  £  Que  quiere  Vd.  darles  ?  Quiero  darles  buenos 
pasteles.  £  Quiere  Vd.  prestarles  algo  ?  Quiero  prestaiies 
algo.  i  Puede  Vd.  prestarles  algo  ?  No  puedo  prestarles  ; 
no  tengo  nada.  £  Tiene  el  cocinero  mas  sal  para  salar  el 
pescado  ?  Tiene  un  poco  mas.  £  Tiene  el  mas  arroz  ?  Tiene 
muchisimo  mas.  l  Quiere  el  darme  ?  Quiere  darle  a  Vd. 
I  Quiere  el  dar  a  mis  niilitos  ?  Quiere  darles.  i  Quiere  el 
matar  este  6  aquel  polio  ?  No  quiere  matar  ni  este  ni  aquel. 
I  Cual  buey  quiere  el  matar  ?  Quiere  matar  el  del  bueii 
paisano.  £  Quiere  el  matar  este  6  aquel  buey  ?  Quiere  ma- 
tar ambos.  ,?  Quien  quiere  enviarnos  bizcochos?  El  pana- 
dero  quiere  enviarles  a  Vds.  £  Tiene  Vd.  algo  que  hacer  ? 
No  tengo  nada  que  hacer. 


TWENTY-EOUBTH  LESSON. 

TO  WHOM  ?  I  I A  QUIEN  ? 

Whom  ?  i  Quien  ?  i  A  quien  ? 

What?  .  iQuE? 

Quien   (plur.  quienes)  always  refers  to  persons  without 
distinction  of  sex. 

Que  has  no  plural,  and  refers  to  persons  and  things  (*). 


Who?    What? 
Of  or  from  whom  ? 
Of  or  from  what? 
To  whom,  whom  ? 
To  what  ? 


I  Quien?    iQud? 


i.  V^UXCli  i         i  ' 

I  De  quie'n  ? 
I  De  que'  ? 
I A  quie'n? 
,:  A  que  ? 

1.  Who,  when  it  is  used  to  begin  a  sentence,  or  interrogatively,  is 
rendered  by  quiin  ;  when  it  is  found  in  the  middle  of  a  sentence,  or  re- 
latively, by  que.  Ex.  :  Who  is  in  Havana  ?  j  Quien  estd  en  la  Habana  ? 
My  father  who  is  in  Havana,  etc.  Mi  padre  que  estd  en  la  Habana,  etc. 
He,  she,  they,  who,  rendered  by  il,  la,  los  (or  las),  que.  He  who  speaks, 
Ml  que  habla.  She  who  speaks,  La  que  habla.  They  who  speak,  Los 
(or  las)  que  hablan. 


gL 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


105 


To  answer. 

To  answer  the  man. 

To  answer  the  men. 

Who  is  it? 

Of  whom  do  you  wish  to  speak  ? 

What  do  you  wish  to  say  ? 

To  whom  do  you  wish  to  answer  ? 

I  wish  to  answer  my  brother. 


To  answer  him. 
To  answer  you. 
To  answer  them. 
To  answer  the  note. 
To  answer  it. 
To  answer  the  notes. 

To  it,  to  them. 

Will  you  answer  my  notes  ? 

I  will  answer  them. 

My  father  wishes  to  speak  to  them. 


The  theatre,  the  play. 

The  ball. 

To  the  theatre. 

To  the  ball. 

To  the  garden. 

The  magazine. 

The  warehouse. 

The  storehouse. 

The  market. 

Do  you  wish  to  go  to  the  theatre  ? 

I  wish  to  go. 


At,  in. 
At  the  theatre. 
At  the  ball. 
In  the  garden. 
Is  your  brother  at  the  theatre  ? 

He  is  in  the  garden. 

He  is  there. 

He  is  i.ot  there. 

Where  is  he  ? 

Is  your  father  at  the  ball? 

He  is  there. 

Where  is  the  merchant  ? 

He  is  in  his  counting-house. 


Responder,  contestar. 

Responder  al  hombre. 

Responder  a  los  hombres. 

I  Quie'n  es  ? 

I  De  quie'n  quiere  Vd.  hablai  ? 

I  Que  quiere  Vd.  decir  ? 

I A  quien  quiere  Vd.  responder  ? 

Quiero  responder  a  mi  hermano 


Responderle. 
Responder  a  Vd. 
Responderles. 
Contestar  al  billete. 
Contestarlo. 
Contestar  a  los  billetes. 


Lo,  los. 

I  Quiere  Vd.  contestar  a  mis  bille. 

tes? 
Quiero  contestarlos. 
Mi  padre  quiere  hablarles. 


El  teatro. 
El  baile. 
Al  teatro. 
Al  baile. 
Al  jardin. 

>■  El  almacen. 

El  mercado,  la  plaza. 
I  Quiere  Vd.  ir  al  teatro  ? 
Quiero  ir. 


En. 

En  el  teatro 

En  el  baile. 

En  el  jardin. 

,;Esta  su  hermano  de  Vd.  en  el 

teatro  ? 
Esta  en  el  jardin. 
Esta  alii. 
No  esta  alii. 
^En  dondeesta  dl? 
I  Esta  su  padre  de  Vd.  en  el  baile  » 
Esta  alii. 

I  En  ddnde  esta  el  comerciante  ? 
Esta  en  su  escritorio. 


106 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


The  Preposition  to  is  rendered  by  que  when  it  precedes 
an  Infinitive  depending  on  the  Verb  tener ;  or,  in  other 
words,  whenever  in  English  the  words  to  have  to  are  used, 


I  have  nothing  to  do. 

What  has  the  man  to  drink  ? 

He  has  nothiDg  to  drink. 

Have  you  anything  to  do  ? 

T  have  to  answer  a  note. 

I  have  to  speak  to  youi  brother. 

Where  is  your  brother  ? 
He  is  in  the  store. 
Where  does  he  wish  to  go  ? 
He  wishes  to  go  in  the  garden. 


No  tengo  nada  que  hacer. 

,;  Que'  tiene  que  beber  el  hombre  \ 

No  tiene  nada  que  beber. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  algo  que  hacer  ? 

Tengo  que  contestar  a  un  billete. 

Tengo  que  hablar  a  su  herinano  de 

Vd. 
I  En  donde  esta  su  hermano  de  Vd.? 
Est  a  en  el  almacen. 
j  Adonde  qui  ere  el  ir? 
Quiere  ir  al  jardin. 


The  milk. 

The  butter. 

The  stockings. 

The  clothes. 

The  pocket-book,  portfolio. 

2.  Butter  is  called  maniequilla  in  every  part  of  Spanish  America,  but 
in  Spain  it  is  called  manteca,  which  latter  in  America  means  lard. 


La  leche. 

La  mantequilla  (2). 

Las  medias. 

La  ropa,  los  vestidos. 

La  cartera. 


Exercise  No.  56. 

Will  you  write  to  me  ?  I  will  write  to  you.  Will  you 
write  to  the  Spaniard  ?  I  will  write  to  him.  Will  your 
brother  write  to  the  English  ?  He  will  write  to  them,  but 
they  do  not  wish  to  answer  him.  Will  you  answer  your 
friend  ?  I  will  answer  him.  But  whom  will  you  answer  ? 
I  will  answer  my  good  father.  Will  you  not  answer  your 
good  friends  ?  I  will  answer  them.  Who  will  write  to  you  ? 
The  Mexican  wishes  to  write  to  me.  Will  you  answer  him  ? 
I  will  not  answer  him.  Who  will  write  to  our  friends? 
The  children  of  our  neighbors  will  write  to  them.  Will 
they  answer  them  ?  They  will  answer  them.  To  whom  do 
you  wish  to  write  ?  I  wish  to  write  to  the  Eussian.  Will 
he  answer  you  ?  He  wishes  to  answer  me,  but  he  cannot. 
Can  the  Spaniards  answer  us  ?  They  cannot  answer  ns, 
but  we  can  answer  them.  To  whom  do  you  wish  to  send 
this  note  ?     I  wish  to  send  it  to  the  smith. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  107 

Exercise  No.  57. 

What  have  you  to  do  ?  I  have  to  write.  What  have  you 
to  write?  I  have  to  write  a  note.  To  whom?  To  the 
carpenter.  What  has  your  father  to  drink?  He  has  to 
drink  some  good  wine.  Has  your  servant  anything  to 
drink  ?  He  has  to  drink  some  tea.  What  has  the  shoe- 
maker to  do  ?  He  has  to  mend  my  shoes.  What  have  you 
to  mend  ?  I  have  to  mend  my  thread  handkerchiefs.  To 
whom  have  you  to  speak  ?  I  have  to  speak  to  the  captain. 
When  will  you  speak  to  him?  To-day.  Where  will  you 
speak  to  him  ?  At  his  house.  To  whom  has  your  brother 
to  speak  ?  He  has  to  speak  to  your  son.  What  has  the 
Englishman  to  do  ?  He  has  to  answer  a  note.  Which 
note  has  he  to  answer  ?  He  has  to  answer  that  of  the  good 
German.  Have  I  to  answer  the  note  of  the  Frenchman? 
You  have  to  answer  it.  Which  note  have  you  to  answer  ? 
I  have  to  answer  that  of  my  good  friend.  Has  your  father 
to  answer  a  note  ?  He  has  to  answer  four.  Who  has  to 
answer  notes  ?  Our  children  have  to  answer  a  few.  Will 
you  answer  the  notes  of  the  merchants?  I  will  answer 
them.  Will  your  brother  answer  this  note  or  that  ?  He 
will  answer  neither  this  nor  that.  Will  any  one  answer  my 
note  ?     No  one  will  answer  it. 


Exercise  No.  58. 

I A  cuales  billetes  quiere  su  padre  de  Vd.  contestar? 
Quiere  contestar  a  los  de  sus  buenos  amigos  solamente. 
,i  Quiere  el  contestar  a  mi  billete  ?  Quiere  contestarlo. 
<:  Tiene  Vd.  que  contestar  a  alguien  ?  No  tengo  que  con- 
testar a  nadie.  £  Quien  quiere  contestar  a  mis  billetes  ? 
Sus  amigos  de  Vd.  quieren  contestarlos.  «?  Tiene  Vd.  deseo 
de  ir  al  baile  ?  Tengo  deseo  de  ir.  <?  Cuando  quiere  Vd 
ir  ?  Hoy.  <?  A  que  hora  ?  A  las  diez  y  media.  <?  Cuando 
quiere  Vd.  llevar  su  hijo  al  teatro  ?  Quiero  llevarle  mafiana. 
/%  A  que  hora  quiere  Vd.  llevarle  ?  A  las  seis  menos  cuarto. 
I  En  donde  esta  su  hijo  de  Vd.  ?  Esta  en  el  teatro.  <?  Esta 
su  araigo  de  Vd.  en  el  baile  ?     Alii  esta.     £  En  donde  esta 


108 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


el  comercianfce  ?  Esta  en  su  escritorio.  £  Adonde  quiere  Vd 
conducirme  ?  Quiero  conducir  le  a  mi  alrnacen.  ^  Adonde 
quiere  ir  su  cocinero  de  Vd.  ?  Quiere  ir  a  casa  del  comer- 
ciante.  £  Esta  su  hermano  de  Vd.  en  el  mercado  V  No  esta 
alii,     i  En  donde  esta  el  ?    Esta  en  su  alrnacen. 


TWENTY-FIETH  LESSON. 


To  or  at  the  corner. 

Where  is  your  cat  ? 

It  is  in  the  bag. 

To  or  at  the  bottom. 

To  or  at  the  bottom  of  the  bag. 

At  the  corner  of  the  house. 


A  la  esquina  al  or  en  el  rincon  (lj. 
i  D6nde  esta  su  gato  de  Vd.  ? 
Esta  en  el  saco. 
Al  or  en  el  i'ondo. 
En  el  fondo  del  saco. 
A  la  esquina  de  la  casa. 


To  or  at  the  end. 

To  the  end  of  the  forest 

To  the  end  of  the  woods. 


To  send  for. 

To  go  for,  to  fetch. 


Will  you  send  for  some  wine  ? 

I  will  send  for  some. 

Will  your  son  go  for  some  bread  ? 

He  will  go  for  some. 

I  will  send  for  the  physician. 

I  will  send  for  him. 

He  will  send  for  my  brother. 

He  will  send  for  them. 

Will  you  send  for  some  glasses  ? 

I  will  send  for  some. 
What  have  you  to  do  ? 
I  have  to  go  to  the  market. 
What  have  you  to  drink  ? 
We  have  to  drink  some  good  wine. 
You  have  to  mend  your  handker- 
chiefs. 


Al  fin,  al  cabo. 
Al  fin  del  bosque. 
Al  fin  de  los  bosqi 


Mandar  a  buscar,  enviar  por. 
Ir  a  buscar,  ir  por,  traer. 


,;  Quiere  Vd.  mandar  a  buscar  vino  ? 

Quiero  mandar  a  buscar. 

I  Quiere  su  hijo  de  Vd.  ir  a  buscar 

pan  ? 
Quiere  ir  a  buscar. 
Quiero  mandar  a  buscar  al  medico. 
Quiero  mandar  a  buscarle. 
El  quiere  mandar  a  buscar  a  mi 

hermano . 
El  quiere  mandar  a  buscarles. 
I  Quiere    Vd.    mandar    a    buscar 

vasos  ? 
Quiero  mandar  a  buscar. 
I  Que*  tiene  Vd.  que  hacer  ? 
Tengo  que  ir  al  mercado. 
I  Que  tienen  Vds.  que  beber  ? 
Tenemos  buen  vino  que  beber. 
Vd.  tiene  que  reparar  sus  panuelos. 


1.  Corner  is  esquina  when  it  is  on  tho  cutside,  and  rincon  when  it  is 
within. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


109 


They  have. 
What  have  the  men  to  do  ? 

They  have  to  go  to  the  warehouse. 
This  evening,  to  night, 
Jn  the  evening. 


Ellos  tienen. 
I  Que*  tienen  que  hacer  los  hon> 

bres  ? 
Tienen  que  ir  al  almacen. 
Esta  noche. 
Por  la,  de  la,  en  la  noche. 


When  the  hour  is  mentioned,  then  de  la  is  used  ;  and  por 
la  when  it  is  not  mentioned.  Ex.  :  A  las  ocho  de  la  maftana 
6  de  la  noche,  etc. 

This  morning. 
In  the  morning. 
Now,  at  present. 


Esta  maiiana. 
Por  la  maiiana. 
Ahora. 


Thou. 
Thou  hast,  thou  art. 
John,  art  thou  here  ? 
Yes,  Sir,  I  am. 
Art  thou  fatigued  ? 
1  am  not  fatigued. 
Are  the  men  tired  ? 


Tu  (2). 
Tu  has  or  tienes,  tu  eres  or  est&s. 
Juan,  i  estas  tu  aqui  ? 
Si,  Seiior,  aqui  estoy. 
I  Estas  fatigado  ? 
No  estoy  fatigado. 
I  Estan  cansados  los  hombres  ? 


The  Past  participle  in  Spanish,  must  agree  in  number  and 
gender  with  the  noun  or  pronoun  which  precedes  it,  that  is, 
if  the  noun  or  pronoun  is  in  the  plural  number  and  fem- 
inine gender,  the  past  participle  must  agree  in  both  ;  ex- 
cept only  when  the  verb  haber  is  the  auxiliary  of  the  past 
participle,  as  may  be  seen  from  the  examples  in  the  question 
above  and  the  answer  below. 


They  are  not  tired. 

Are  the  ladies  tired  ? 

They  are  not  tired. 

My  friends  have  tired  themselves. 

My  sisters  have  loved. 

My  sisters  are  loved. 


Ellos  no  estan  cansados. 
I  Estan  cansadas  las  sefioras  ? 
Ellas  no  estan  cansadas. 
Mis  amigos  se  han  cansado. 
Mis  hermanas  han  amado. 
Mis  hermanas  son  amadas. 


Thou  wilt  (wishest). 

Thou  art  able  (canst). 

Art  thou  willing  to  make  my  fire  ? 


Tu  quieres. 
Tu  puedes. 
I  Quieres  hacer  mi  fuego  ? 


2.  In  addition  to  what  we  have  already  said,  speaking  of  the  use  of 
the  personal  pronoun  Vd.,  we  must  now  observe  that  the  second  per- 
son singular  tu  (thou)  is  used  by  masters  speaking  to  servants,  or  by 
parents  to  their  children,  and  between  brothers  and  sisters,  lovers, 
husbands  and  wives  ;  in  general  it  implies  familiarity  founded  or;  affec- 
tion and  fondness,  or  hatred  and  contempt 


110 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


I  am  willing  to  make  it,  but  I  can- 
not. 
Art  thou  afraid  ? 
Art  thou  hungry  ? 


Quiero  hacerlo.  pero  no  puedo. 

I  Tienes  miedo  ? 
I  Tienes  hambre  ? 


To  SELL. 

To  TELL,  TO  SAT. 

To  tell  some  one. 

The  word. 

Will  you  tell  the  servant  to  make 

the  fire  ? 
I  will  tell  him  to  make  it. 


Vender 

Decir.* 
Decir  a  alguno. 
La  palabra. 
iQuiere  Vd.   decir  al  criado   qu« 

haga  el  fuego  ? 
Quiero  decirle  que  lo  haga. 


*Thy. 
Thine. 

Thy  book,  thy  books. 

With  me. 

With  thee. 

With  himself,  or  herself. 


Tu,  tus. 

El  tuyo,  los  TUYOS. 
Tu  libro,  tu  libros. 
Conmigo. 
Contigo. 
Consigo. 


"When  mi,  ti,  si,  are  preceded  by  the  Preposition  con 
(with),  they  take  the  syllable  go  and  form  the  above  com- 
pound words. 

Wilt  thou  go  with  me  ? 

I  will  not  go  with  thee,  but  with 

him. 
With  our  friends. 
With  her. 
With  us. 
With  you. 
With  them. 


I  Quieres  ir  conmigo  ? 

No  quiero  ir  contigo,  sino  con  4L 

Con  nuestros  anrigos. 

Con  ella. 

Con  nosotros. 

Con  Vd. 

Con  ellos  (/em,  ellas). 


Exercise  No.  59. 

Will  you  send  for  some  sugar  ?  I  will  send  for  some. 
Son  (hijo  mto),  wilt  thou  go  for  some  pies  ?  Yes,  father 
(padre  mio),  I  will  go  for  some.  "Whither  wilt  thou  go  ? 
I  will  go  into  the  garden.  Who  is  in  the  garden?  The 
children  of  our  friends  are  there.  Will  you  send  for  tho 
physician  ?  I  will  send  for  him.  Who  will  go  for  my 
brother?  My  servant  will  go  for  him.  Where  is  he?  He 
is  in  his  counting-house.  Will  you  give  me  my  broth?  I 
will  give  it  to  you.     Where  is  it  ?    It  is  at  the  corner  o( 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES.  Ill 

the  fire.  Will  you  give  me  some  money  to  (para)  bring 
some  milk  ?  I  will  give  you  money  to  buy  some.  Where 
is  your  money  ?  It  is  in  my  counting-room.  Will  you  go 
for  it  ?  I  will  go  for  it.  Will  you  buy  my  horse  ?  I  can- 
not buy  it  ;  I  have  no  money.  Where  is  your  cat  ?  It  is 
in  the  bag.  In  which  bag  is  it  (estd)  ?  In  the  bag  of  the 
countryman.  Where  is  this  man's  dog  ?  It  is  in  the  cor- 
ner of  the  ship.  Where  has  the  peasant  his  corn  ?  He  has 
it  in  his  bag.  Has  he  a  cat  ?  He  has  one.  Where  is  it  ? 
It  is  at  the  bottom  of  the  bag.  Is  your  cat  in  the  bag  ?  It 
is  there  (ahi). 

Exercise  No.  60. 

Have  you  to  write  as  many  notes  as  the  Englishman  ?  I 
have  to  write  less  than  he.  Will  you  speak  to  the  German  ? 
I  will  speak  to  him.  When  will  you  speak  to  him  ?  Now. 
Where  is  he  ?  He  is  at  the  other  end  of  the  wood.  Will 
you  go  to  the  market?  I  will  go  thither  to  (para)  buy 
some  cloth.  Do  not  your  neighbors  wish  to  go  to  the  mar- 
ket? They  cannot  go,  they  are  fatigued.  Hast  thou  the 
courage  to  go  to  the  wood  in  the  evening  ?  I  have  the 
courage  to  go  thither,  but  not  in  the  evening.  Are  your 
children  able  to  answer  my  notes  ?  They  are  able  to  an- 
swer them.  What  do  you  wish  to  say  to  my  servant  ?  I 
wish  to  tell  him  to  make  the  fire,  and  to  sweep  the  ware- 
house. Will  you  tell  your  brother  to  sell  me  his  horse  ?  I 
will  tell  him  to  sell  it  to  you.  What  do  you  wish  to  tell 
me  ?  I  wish  to  tell  you  something.  Whom  do  you  wish  to 
Bee  ?  I  wish  to  see  the  Scotchman.  Have  you  anything  to 
tell  him  ?  I  have  a  word  to  tell  him.  Which  books  does 
my  brother  wish  to  sell  ?  He  wishes  to  sell  thine  and  his 
own.  Will  you  come  with  me  ?  I  cannot  go  with  you. 
Who  will  come  with  me  ?  Nobody.  Will  your  friend  come 
with  us?  He  will  go  with  you.  With  whom  wilt  thou  go  ? 
I  will  not  go  with  any  body.  Will  you  go  with  my  friend  ? 
I  will  not  go  with  him,  but  with  thee.  Wilt  thou  go  with 
me  to  the  warehouse  ?  I  will  go  with  you,  but  not  to  the 
warehouse.  Wliither  wilt  thou  go?  I  will  go  with  our 
good  friends  into  the  garden  of  the  captain. 


112 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


TWENTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


To  GO  OUT. 

To  KEMAIN,   TO  STAY. 

When  do  you  wish  to  go  out  ? 

I  wish  to  go  out  now. 

To  remain  (to  stay)  at  home. 

Here. 
To  remain  here. 
Will  you  stay  here  ? 
I  will  stay  here. 
Will  your  friend  remain  there  ? 

He  will  not  stay  here. 

Will  you  go  to  your  brother  ? 

I  will  go  to  him. 
The  pleasure,  the  favor. 
To  give  pleasure. 
To  do  a  favor. 

Togo. 
Are  you  going  ? 
I  am  going. 
I  am  not  going. 
Thou  art  going. 
Is  he  going  ? 
He  goes  or  is  going. 
He  is  not  going. 
Are  we  going  ? 
We  go  or  are  going. 
They  go  or  are  going. 

Are  you  going  to  your  brother  ? 

I  am  going  there. 

Where  is  he  going  ? 

He  is  going  to  his  father. 

ALIi,    EVERY. 

Every  day. 


Saij;r. 

quedarse,  esta.rse. 
I  Cuando  quiere  Vd.  salir  ? 
Quiero  salir  ahora. 
Quedarse  or  estarse  en  casa. 


Aqui,  aca. 
Estarse  or  quedarse  aqui. 
I  Quiere  Vd.  estarse  aqui 
Quiero  estarme  aqui. 
I  Quiere  su  amigo   de  Vd.   estarse 

alii? 
No  quiere  estarse  aqui. 
I  Quiere  Vd.  ir  a  casa  de  su  her- 

mano? 
Quiero  ir  a  su  casa. 
El  gusto,  el  placer,  el  favor. 
Dar  gusto  or  placer. 
Hacer  un  favor  or  un  servicio. 


Ir,  irse  (1). 
iSevaVd.? 
Me  voy. 
No  me  voy. 
Te  vas. 
iSe  vael? 
Se  va. 
No  se  va. 
I  Nos  vamos  ? 
Nos  vamos. 
Ellos  se  van. 

I  Va  Vd.  a  casa  de  su  hermano  ? 

Voy  alia. 

I  Adonde  va  el  ? 

Va  a  casa  de  su  padre. 

Todo,  TODOS. 
Todos  los  dias. 


1.  Ir,  irse.  Both  of  these  Verbs  import  the  act  of  leaving  a  place; 
the  first,  however,  is  used  when  the  place  to  which  the  person  is  going 
is  mentioned;  and  the  second,  when  no  reference  is/nade  to  it.  For 
example  :  El  va  d  Mijico — he  goes  to  Mexico  ;  and  El  se  va  de  MSjieo 
— he  goes  away  from  Mexico .  So  that  ir  is  made  reflective  (irse)  when- 
ever in  English  it  may  be  employed  to  go  auccy,  that  is,  when  the  place 
is  not  designated,  or  otherwise  alluded  to. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


113 


Every  morning. 
Every  afternoon. 
Every  evening,  night. 


Todas  las  mafianas. 
Torias  las  tardes. 
Todas  las  noches. 


To  BE  ACQUAINTED  WITH,  TO  KNOW. 

To  be  acquainted  with  a  man. 


Conocer  (2). 
Conocer  a  un  hombre. 


Need. 

TO   WANT. 
TO   BE  IN  WANT   OF. 


Necesidad. 
f  Necesitar. 
}  Haceb  falta. 


In  the  phrase  hace  falta,  the  Verb  is  used  in  the  third  person,  and 
must  agree  in  number  with  the  thing,  and  not  with  the  person  or  per- 
sons to  whom  it  refers. 


I  want  it. 

I  am  in  want  of  it. 

Are  you  in  want  of  this  knife  ? 

I  am  in  "want  of  it. 

Are  you  in  want  of  those  knives  ? 

I  am  in  want  of  them . 
I  am  not  in  want  of  anything. 
Is  he  in  want  of  money  ? 
He  is  not  in  want  of  any. 


Lo  necesito. 

Me  hace  falta. 

t ;  Le  hace  falta  a  Vd.  este  cuchi- 

llo? 
f  A  mi  me  hace  falta. 
1 1  Le  hacen  falta  a  Vd.  esos  cu- 

chillos  ? 
f  Me  hacen  falta. 
f  No  me  hace  falta  nada. 
f  i  Le  hace  falta  a  el  dinero  ? 
f  No  le  hace  falta. 


What? 
What  are  you  in  want  of? 
What  do  you  want  ? 
Whom  ? 

Of  me,  of  thee,  of  him. 
Of  her. 
Of  us,  of  you,  of  them. 

Of  you  (sing.),  of  you  (plur.) 
Is  your  father  in  want  of  me  ? 
He  is  in  want  of  you. 
Are  you  in  want  of  those  books  ? 

I  am  in  want  of  them. 

Is  he  in  want  of  my  brothers  ? 

He  is  in  want  of  them. 

2.  Conocer,  to  know  beings. 


iQuE? 
I  Qud  le  hace  falta  a  Vd.  ? 
I  Que'  necesita  or  quiere  Vd.  ? 
I  De  quie'n  ? 
De  mi,  de  ti,  de  el. 
De  ella. 
De  nosotros,  de  vosotros,  de  voso* 

tras(3),  de  ellos,  de  elks. 
De  Vd.,  de  Vds. 
j  Me  necesita  su  padre  de  Vd.  ? 
Necesita  a  Vd. 
I  f  Le  hacen  a  Vd.  falta  esos  li« 

bros  ? 
f  Me  hacen  falta. 
I  Necesita  el  a  mis  hermanos  ? 
j  Los  necesita. 

Saber,  to  know  things.     Ex.  :  Do  you 


know  him  ?  i  Le  conoce  Vd.  ?  I  know  him,  Le  connzco.  Do  you  know 
how  to  work  ?  i  Sabe  Vd.  trabajar  ?  I  know  how  to  work,  Si  trabajar. 
3.  We  remember  here  what  we  have  said  (Lesson  V.)  of  this  Pro- 
noun, that  it  is  not  used  in  common  parlance  ;  it  is  merely  employed 
in  subhme  or  serious  style,  and  in  poetry,  especially  in  dramatic 
works. 


114  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

TO   READ  LiEEB. 


Exercise  No.  61. 

Will  you  do  me  a  favor  ?  Yes,  Sir,  which  ?  Will  you 
tell  my  servant  to  make  the  fire  ?  I  will  tell  him  to  make 
it.'  Will  you  tell  him  to  sweep  the  warehouses  ?  I  will  tell 
him  to  sweep  them.  What  will  you  tell  your  father  ?  I 
will  tell  him  to  sell  you  his  horse.  Will  you  tell  your  son 
to  go  to  my  father  ?  I  will  tell  him  to  go  to  him.  Have 
you  anything  to  tell  me  ?  I  have  nothing  to  tell  you.  Have 
you  anything  to  say  to  my  father  ?  I  have  a  word  to  say 
to  him.  Do  these  men  wish  to  sell  their  carpets  ?  They 
do  not  wish  to  sell  them.  John,  art  thou  here  ?  Yes,  Sir, 
I  am  here.  What  art  thou  going  to  do  ?  I  am  going  to 
your  hatter  to  (para)  tell  him  to  mend  your  hat.  Wilt 
thou  go  to  the  tailor  to  tell  him  to  mend  my  coats  ?  I  will 
go  to  him.  Are  you  willing  to  go  to  the  market  ?  I  am 
willing  to  go.  What  has  your  merchant  to  sell  ?  He  has 
to  sell  some  beautiful  gloves,  combs,  good  cloth,  and  fine 
baskets.  Has  he  any  iron  guns  to  sell '{  He  has  some  to 
sell.  Does  he  wish  to  sell  me  his  horses  ?  He  wishes  to 
sell  them  to  you.  Have  you  anything  to  sell  ?  I  have 
nothing  to  sell. 


Exercise  No.  62. 

Is  it  late  ?  It  is  not  late.  What  o'clock  is  it  ?  It  is  a 
quarter  past  twelve.  At  what  o'clock  does  the  captain 
wish  to  go  out  ?  He  wishes  to  go  out  at  a  quarter  to 
eight.  What  will  you  do  ?  I  wish  to  read.  What  have 
you  to  read  ?  I  have  a  good  book  to  read.  Will  you  lend 
it  to  me  ?  I  will  lend  it  to  you.  When  will  you  lend  it  to 
me  ?  I  will  lend  it  to  you  to-morrow.  Have  you  a  mind 
to  go  out  ?  I  have  no  mind  to  go  out.  Are  you  willing  to 
stay  here,  my  dear  friend  ?  I  cannot  remain  here.  Whither 
have  you  to  go?  I  have  to  go  to  the  counting-house. 
When  will  you  go  to  the  ball  ?  To-night.  At  what  o'clock  ? 
At  midnight.     Do  you  go  to  the  Scotchman  in  the  evening 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  115 

or  in  the  morning  ?  I  go  to  him  in  the  morning  and  in  the 
evening.  Where  are  you  going  now  ?  I  am  going  to  the 
theatre.  Where  is  your  son  going?  He  is  going  no- 
where; he  is  going  to  stay  at  home  to  (para)  write  his 
notes.  Where  is  your  brother  ?  He  is  at  his  warehouse. 
Does  he  not  wish  to  go  out  ?  No,  Sir,  he  does  not  wish  to 
go  out.  What  does  he  wish  to  do  ?  He  wishes  to  write  to 
his  friends.  Will  you  stay  here  or  there?  I  will  stay 
there.  Where  will  your  father  stay  ?  He  will  stay  there. 
Has  our  friend  a  mind  to  stay  in  the  garden  ?  He  has  a 
mind  to  stay  there. 


Exercise  No.  63. 

I A  que  hora  esta  el  holandes  en  casa  ?  Esta  en  casa  to- 
das  las  noches  a  las  nueve  y  cuarto.  <?  Cuando  va  su  cocinero 
de  Vd.  al  mercado  ?  Va  todas  las  mafianas  a  las  cinco  y 
media.  £  Cuando  va  nuestro  vecino  a  casa  de  los  irlandeses  ? 
Va  a  su  casa  todos  los  dias.  £  A  que  hora  ?  A  las  ocho  de 
la  mariana.  £  Que  quiere  Vd.  comprar  ?  No  quiero  com- 
prar  nada,  pero  mi  padre  quiere  comprar  un  buey. 
I  Quiere  comprar  este  6  aquel  buey  ?  No  quiere  comprar 
ni  el  uno  ni  el  otro.  <?  Cual  quiere  comprar  ?  Quiere  com- 
prar el  de  su  amigo  de  Vd.  <?  Tiene  el  comerciante  una  ca- 
saca  mas  que  vender  ?  Tiene  una  mas,  pero  no  quiere  ven- 
derla.  <?  Tiene  este  hombre  un  cuchillo  mas  que  vender  ? 
No  tiene  un  cuchillo  que  vender,  pero  tiene  algunos  fusiles 
mas  que  vender.  <;  Cuando  quiere  venderlos  ?  Quiere  ven- 
derlos  hoy.  ,;  En  donde  ?  En  su  casa.  <?  Quiere  Vd.  ver  a 
mi  amigo  ?  Quiero  verle  para  conocerle.  £  Quiere  Vd.  co- 
nocer  a  mis  niiios  ?  Quiero  conocerles.  £  Cuantos  nifios 
tiene  Vd.  ?  No  tengo  sino  dos,  pero  mi  hermano  tiene  mas 
que  yo,  tiene  seis.  £  Quiere  este  hombre  tomar  demasiado 
vino?  Quiere  tomar  demasiado.  £  Tiene  Vd.  bastante  vino 
para  beber?  Tengo  un  poco  solamente,  pero  bastante. 
£  Quiere  su  hermano  de  Vd.  comprar  demasiados  pas? teles  ? 
Quiere  comprar  muchisimos,  pero  no  demasiados. 


116 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Exercise  No.  64. 

Can  you  lend  me  a  knife  ?  I  can  lend  you  one.  Can 
your  father  lend  me  a  book?  He  can  lend  you  several. 
What  are  you  in  want  of  ?  I  am  in  want  of  a  good  musket. 
Are  you  in  want  of  this  picture  ?  I  am  in  want  of  it.  Does 
your  brother  want  money  ?  He  does  not  want  any.  Does 
he  want  some  boots  ?  He  does  not  want  any.  What  does 
he  want  ?  He  wants  nothing.  Are  you  in  want  of  these 
sticks  ?  I  am  in  want  of  them.  Who  wants  some  sugar  ? 
Nobody  wants  any.  Does  anybody  want  oil?  Nobody 
wants  any.  What  do  I  want  ?  You  want  nothing.  Does 
your  father  want  these  pictures  or  those  ?  He  wants  nei- 
ther these  nor  those.  Are  you  in  want  of  me  ?  I  am  in 
want  of  you.  When  do  you  want  me  ?  At  present.  What 
have  you  to  say  to  me  ?  I  have  something  to  say  to  you. 
Is  your  son  in  want  of  us  ?  He  is  in  want  of  you  and 
your  brothers.  Are  you  in  want  of  my  servants  ?  I  am  in 
want  of  them.  Does  anybody  want  my  brother  ?  No  one 
wants  him.  Does  your  brother  want  anything  ?  He  does 
not  want  anything.  What  does  the  Englishman  want? 
He  wants  some  corn.  Does  he  not  want  some  jewels  ?  He 
does  not  want  any.  What  does  the  sailor  want?  He 
wants  some  biscuits,  cheese,  and  coffee.  Will  you  give  me 
anything  ?     I  will  give  you  some  bread  and  wine. 


TWENTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 

THE    PEESENT    OF    THE    INDICATIVE. 


FIRST   CONJUGATION. 

Hablar,  to  speak. 


INFINITIVE. 


SECOND. 


Yo  hablo. 
Tu  bablas, 
El  Labia. 

Nosotros  hablamos. 
Vosotros  bablais. 
Ellos  bablau. 


Beber,  to  drink. 

PEESENT  TENSE. — SINGULAE. 

Yo  bebo. 
Tu  bebes. 
El  bebe. 

PLUKAL. 

Nosotros  beberaos. 
Vosotros  bebeis. 
Ellos  beben. 


THIRD. 

Escribir,  to  write. 


Yo  escribo. 
Tu  escribes. 
■  El  escribe. 

Nosotros  escribimos. 
Vosotros  escribis. 
Ellos  escriben. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


117 


As  the  rules  given  on  the  preceding  page  on  the  formation  of  the 
present  tense,  are  applicable  only  to  Regular  verbs,  it  remains  now  to 
point  out  the  irregularities  in  the  present  tense  of  those  verbs  which 
we  have  employed  already  to  enable  the  learner  to  use  them  in  his  exer- 
cises.    They  are  as  follows  : 


TO   GIVE,    GIVING,    GIVEN. 

I  give,  you  give,  he  gives. 
We  give,  you  give,  they  give. 
Thou  givest,  you  give. 

TO  BE,    BEING,    BEEN. 

1  am,  you  are,  he  is. 

We  are,  you  are,  they  are. 

Thou  art,  you  are. 


To  MAKE,  TO  DO,  MAKING  OT  DOING, 
MADE  OT  DONE. 

I  make  or  do,  you  make  or  do,  he 

makes  or  does. 
We  make  or  do,  you  make  or  do, 

they  make  or  do. 
Thou  makest,  doest,  you  make  or 

do. 


TO  SEE,    SEEING,    SEEN. 

I  see,  you  see,  he  sees. 
We  see,  you  see,  they  see. 
Thou  seest,  you  see. 

To   BEAD,    BEADING,    BEAD. 

I  read,  you  read,  he  reads. 
We  read,  you  read,  they  read. 

Thou  readest,  you  read. 


TO   KNOW,    KNOWING,    KNOWN. 

I  know,  you  know,  he  knows. 
We  know,  you  know,  they  know. 

Thou  knowest,  you  know. 


To  SAT,    SAYING,    SATD. 

I  say,  you  say,  he  says. 
We  say,  you  say,  they  say. 

Thou  sayest,  you  say. 


Dab,  dando,  dado. 
Yo  doy,  Vd.  da,  el  da. 
Nosotros  damos,  Vds  dan,  ellos  dan. 
Tii  das,  vosotros  dais. 


See  or  estab,  siendo  or  estando, 

SIDO   Or  ESTADO. 

Yo  soy,  or  estoy,  Vd.  es  or  esta,  el 

es  or  esta. 
Nosotros  somos  or  estamos,  Vds.  son 

or  estan,  ellos  son  or  estan. 
Tu  eres,  or  estas,  vosotros  sois  or 

estais. 


Haceb,  haciendo,  hecho. 

Yo  hago,  Vd.  hace,  el  hace. 

Nosotros  hacemos,  Vds.  hacen,  ellos 

hacen. 
Tu  haces,  vosotros  hacels. 


Veb,  vtendo,  visto. 
Yo  veo,  Vd.  ve,  el  ve. 
Noaotros  vemos,  Vds.  ven,  ellos  ven. 
Tii  ves,  vosotros  veis- 


Leeb,  letendo,  leido. 
Yo  leo,  Vd.  lee,  el  lee. 
Nosotros  leemos,   Vds.   leen,  ellos 

leen. 
Tii  lees,  vosotros  leels. 


CONOCEB,  CONOCIENDO,  CONOCIDO. 

Yo  conozco,  Vd.  conoce,  el  conoce, 
Nosotros  conocemos,  Vds.  conocen, 

ellos  conocen. 
Tii  conoces,  vosotros  conocels. 


Decib,  diciendo,  dicho. 
Yo  digo,  Vd.  dice,  e'l  dice. 
Nosotros  decimos,  Vds.  dicen,  ellos 

dicen. 
Tii  dices,  vosotros  decfs. 


118 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


To  COME,  COMING,  COME. 

I  come,  you  come,  he  comes. 
We  come,  you  come,  they  come. 

Thou  comest,  you  come. 


To  GO  OUT,  GOING  OUT,  GONE  OUT. 

I  go  out,  you  go  out,  he  goes  out 
We  go  out,  you  go  out,  they  go  out. 

Thou  goest  out,  you  go  out 


To  GO,    GOING,    GONE. 

I  go,  you  go,  he  goes. 
We  go,  you  go,  they  go. 
Thou  goest,  you  go. 

To  LOVE. 
I  love,  do  love,  am  loving. 
Thou  lovest 
He  loves. 
We  love,  do  love. 
You  love,  do  love. 
They  love,  do  love. 


To  AEEANGE,    TO   SET  IN   Or.DSE. 

What  are  you  arranging  ? 
I  set  in  order  my  books. 

To  SELL. 
Do  you  sell  your  horse  ? 
I  do  sell  it 
Do  you  sell  it? 
Does  he  send  you  the  note  ? 
He  does  send  it  to  me. 


To  OPEN. 
Do  you  open  his  note  ? 
I  do  not  open  it. 
Does  he  open  his  eyes  ? 
He  opens  them. 
Whom  do  you  love  ? 


Venib,  vtniendo,  venido. 
Yo  vengo,  Vd.  viene,  e'l  viene. 
Nosotros    venimos,    Vds.    vienen, 

ellos  vienen. 
Tu  vienes,  vosotros  venis. 


Salie,  saliendo,  salido. 
Yo  salgo,  Vd.  sale,  e'l  sale. 
Nosotros  salimos,  Vds,   salen,  ellos 

salen. 
Tu  sales,  vosotros  sails. 


Ie,  tendo,  n>o. 
Yo  voy,  Vd.  va,  e'l  va. 
Nosotros  vamos,  Vds.  van,  ellos  van. 
Tu  vas,  vosotros  vais. 


Amae. 
Yo  amo. 
Tu  amas. 
El  ama. 

Nosotros  amamos. 
Vds.  aman. 
Ellos  aman. 


AEEEGLAE — PONEB*  EN   OEDEN. 

I  Que*  arregla  Vd.  ? 

Pongo  en  orden  mis  libros. 

Vendee. 
<iVende  Vd.  su  caballo? 
Lo  vendo. 
,;  Lo  vende  Vd.  ? 
Le  envia  a  Vd.  el  billete  ? 
Me  lo  envia. 


Abete  (past  part  abieeto). 
i  Abre  Vd.  su  billete  ? 
No  lo  abro. 
I  Abre  el  los  ojos  ? 
Los  abre. 
I A  quien  ama  Vd.  ? 


The  article  is  used  instead  of  the  possessive  pronoun,  when  by  the 
meaning  of  the  phrasa  it  is  sufficiently  plain  to  whom  the  object  possessed 
belongs.     Ex.  : 

I  took  my  hat,  and  went  away.  Tome  el  sombrero,  y  me  fuf. 

He  washed  his  hands.  Se  lavo  las  manos. 

He  brings  his  hat  in  his  hand.  Trae  el  sombrero  en  la  mano. 


PRACTICAL  .EXERCISES. 


119 


I  love  my  father. 

Does  your  father  love  his  son  ? 

He  does  love  him. 

Do  you  love  your  children  ? 

I  do  love  them. 


Amo  a  mi  padre. 

I ,Ama  bu  padre  de  Vd.  a  su  hijo  ? 

El  le  ama. 

I  Ama  Vd.  a  sus  nifios  ? 

Los  amo. 


What  we  observed  in  Lesson  XXVI.  regarding  the  verb 
in  the  phrase  hacer  falta  applies  also  to  the  verb  yastar ;  that 
it  mast  agree  in  number  with  the  thing  liked,  and  not  with 
the  person  or  persons,  always  using  the  verb  in  the  third 
person. 

I  like,  you  like,  he  likes. 

We  like,  you  like,  they  like. 


Thou  likest,  you  like. 

Are  you  fond  of  wine  ? 

I  am  fond  of  it. 

What  are  you  fond  of? 

Cider. 

J  am  fond  of  cider. 

Do  you  like  flowers? 

I  like  them. 

What  are  the  Americans  fond  of? 

They  are  fond  of  tea. 


A  ml    me  gusta,  a  Vd.  le  gusta, 

a  el  or  ella  le  gusta  or  gustan. 
A  nosotros-as  nos   gusta,    a   Vds. 

les  gusta,    a   ellos  or  elias    les 

gusta  or  gustan. 
A  ti  te  gusta  or  gustan,  a  vosotroa 

os  gusta  or  gustan. 
^Le  gusta  a  Vd.  el  vino? 
A  mi  me  gusta. 
i  Que  le  gusta  a  Vd.  ? 
Sidra. 

A  mf  me  gusta  la  sidra. 
I  Le  gustan  a  Vd.  las  flores  ? 
A  mi  me  gustan. 

I  Que  les  gusta  a  los  american*>s  ? 
A.  ellos  les  gusta  el  te'. 


To  Finish. 
Now. 
At  once. 

What  are  you  going  to  do  ? 
I  am  going  to  read. 
What  is  he  going  to  do  V 
He  is  going  to  write  a  note. 
Are  you  going  to  give  me  any- 
thing? 
I  am  going  to  give  you  some  bread. 


AcABAR. 

Ahora. 

De  una  vez. 

,;  Que'  va  Vd.  a  hacer  ? 

Voy  a  leer. 

I  Que'  va  el  a  hacer? 

Va  a  escribir  un  billete. 

iVa  Vd.  a  darme  aiguna  cosa  or 

algo? 
Voy  a  dar  a  Vd.  pan. 


To  know,  (to  know  things.) 
I  know,  you  know,  he  knows. 
We  know,  you  know,  they  know. 

!Thou  knowest  you  know. 


Sabeb.* 
Yo  s6,  Vd.  sabe,  el  sabe. 
Nosotros    sabenus,    Vds. 

ellos  saben. 
Tii  sabes,  vs>sotros  sabe'is. 


saben, 


120  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Exercise  No.  65. 

Do  you  love  your  brother  ?  I  do  love  him.  Does  your 
brother  love  you  ?  He  does  not  love  me.  My  good  child, 
dost  thou  love  me  ?  Yes,  I  do  love  thee.  Dost  thou  love 
this  ugly  little  man  (hombrezuelo)  ?  I  do  not  love  him. 
Whom  do  you  love?  I  love  my  children.  Whom  do  we 
love  ?  We  love  our  friends.  Do  we  like  any  body  ?  We 
like  nobody.  Does  any  body  like  us  ?  The  Americans  like 
us.  Do  you  want  any  thing  ?  I  want  nothing.  Whom  is 
your  father  in  want  of?  He  is  in  want  of  his  servant. 
What  do  you  want  ?  I  want  the  note.  Do  you  want  this 
or  that  note  ?  I  want  this.  What  do  you  wish  to  do  with 
it  {con  el)  ?  I  wrish  to  open  it,  in  order  to  read  it.  Does 
your  son  read  our  notes  ?  He  does  read  them.  When 
does  he  read  them  ?  He  reads  them  when  he  receives 
them.  Does  he  receive  as  many  notes  as  I  ?  He  receives 
more  than  you.  What  do  you  give  me  ?  I  do  not  give  you 
any  thing.  Do  you  give  this  book  to  my  brother  ?  I  do 
give  it  to  him.  Do  you  give  him  a  bird  ?  I  do  give  hiin 
one.  To  whom  do  you  lend  yonr  books  ?  I  lend  them  to 
my  friends.  Does  your  friend  lend  me  a  coat  ?  He  lends 
you  two.  To  whom  do  you  lend  your  clothes  ?  I  do  not 
lend  them  to  any  body. 


Exercise  No.  66. 

Do  we  arrange  any  thing  ?  We  do  not  arrange  any  thing. 
What  does  your  brother  set  in  order  ?  He  sets  his  books 
in  order.  Do  you  sell  your  ship  ?  I  do  not  sell  it.  Does 
the  captain  sell  his?  He  does  sell  it.  What  does  the 
American  sell?  He  sells  his  oxen.  Does  the  Englishman 
finish  his  note  ?  He  does  finish  it.  Which  notes  do  you 
finish?  I  finish  those  which  I  write  to  the  Mexicans. 
Dost  thou  see  any  thing  ?  I  see  nothing.  Do  you  see  my 
large  garden?  I  do  see  it.  Does  your  father  see  our 
ships?  He  does  not  see  them,  but  we  see  them.  How 
many  soldiers  do  you  see?  We  see  many,  we  see  more 
than  (de)  thirty.     Do  you  dvink  any  thing  ?     I  drink  somo 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES.  121 

wine.  What  does  the  sailor  drink?  He  drinks  some 
cider.  Do  we  drink  wine  or  cider?  We  drink  wine  and 
cider.  What  do  the  Italians  drink?  They  drink  some 
coffee.  Do  we  drink  wine?  We  do  drink  some.  What 
art  thou  writing  ?  I  am  writing  a  note.  To  whom  ?  To 
my  neighbor.  Does  your  friend  write  ?  He  does  write  ? 
To  whom  does  he  write  ?  He  writes  to  his  tailor.  What 
are  you  going  to  do  ?  I  am  going  to  write  What  is  your 
father  going  to  do?  He  is  going  to  read.  What  is  he 
going  to  read?  He  is  going  to  read  a  book.  What  are 
you  going  to  give  me  ?  I  am  not  going  to  give  you  any 
thing.  What  is  our  friend  going  to  give  you  ?  He  is  going 
to  give  me  something.  Do  you  know  my  friend?  I  do 
know  him. 


Exercise  No.  67. 

I  Conocen  Vds.  a  mis  nifios  ?  Les  conocemos.  { Les 
conocen  elloc  a  Vds.  ?  No  nos  conocen.  £  A  4111611  conoce 
Vd.  ?  No  conozco  a  nadie.  i  Le  conoce  a  Vd.  algnien  ? 
Alguien  me  conoce.  1  Quien  le  conoce  a,  Vd.  ?  El  buen 
capitan  me  conoce.  ,;  Que  comes  ?  Como  pan.  No  come 
bu  hijo  de  Vd.  queso  ?  No  come.  £  Cortan  Vds.  algo  ? 
Cortamos  pan.  £  Que  cortan  los  comerciantes  ?  Cortan 
pano.  1  Me  envia  Vd.  algo  ?  Le  envio  a  Vd.  un  buen  fusil, 
^Le  envia  a  Vd.  dinero  su  padre  de  Vd.  ?  Me  envia.  <?Le 
envia  a  Vd.  mas  que  yo  ?  Me  envia  mas  que  Vd.  ,;  Cuanto 
le  envia  a  Vd.  ?  Me  envia  mas  de  cincuenta  pesos.  ^  Ouando 
recibe  Vd.  sus  billetes?  Los  recibo  todas  las  mafianas. 
I  A  que  hora  ?  A  las  diez  y  media.  £  Viene  su  hijo  de  Vd.  ? 
Viene.  £  A  que  casa  viene  el?  Viene  a  mi  casa.  £  Viene 
Vd.  a  mi  casa  ?  No  voy  a  su  casa  de  Vd.  sino  a  la  de  sus 
ninos.  1  Adonde  va  nuestro  amigo  ?  No  va  a  ninguna 
parte,  se  queda  en  casa.  1  Van  Vds.  a  su  casa  ?  No  vamos 
a  casa,  sino  a  casa  de  nuestros  amigos.  £  En  donde  estan 
bus  amigos  de  Vd.  ?  Estan  en  su  jardin.  <?  Estan  loa 
escoceses  en  sus  jardines  ?     Alii  estan. 


122 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

TWENTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


To  go  to  the  theatre. 
To  be  at  the  theatre. 


Ir  al  teatro. 
Estar  en  el  teatro. 


To  BEING. 
To  FIND. 

The  butcher, 
f  he  sheep. 


Teaeb.* 

HATiTiAB. 

El  carnicero. 

La  oveja,  el  camera 


What  or  the  thing  which. 
Do  you  find,  what  you  look  for  ? 
I  find  what  I  look  for. 
lie  does  not  find  what  he  is  look- 
ing for. 
We  find  what  we  look  for. 
They  find  what  they  look  for. 
I  mend  what  you  mend. 
I  buy  what  you  buy. 
I  pay  what  you  pay. 
Are  you  in  want  of  money  ? 
I  am  not  in  want  of  any. 
Do  you  take  him  to  the  theatre  ? 
I  do  take  him  thither. 


Lo  QUE. 
I  Halla  Vd.  lo  que  buscal 
Hallo  lo  que  busco. 
El  no  halla  lo  que  busca. 

Hallamos  lo  que  buscamos. 
Ellos  hallan  lo  que  buscan. 
Reparo  lo  que  Vd.  repara. 
Compro  lo  que  Vd.  compra. 
Pago  lo  que  Vd.  paga. 
I  Neeesita  Vd.  dinero  ? 
No  necesito. 
a  Le  lleva  Vd.  al  teatro  ? 
Le  llevo  alia. 


There  are  in  Spanish  some  words  which  have  a  form, 
called  neuter,  namely  :  Lo>  Edo,  Eso,  Aquello,  and  the  per- 
sonal pronoun  of  the  third  person  ello  (it)  which  is  used  to 
determine  a  phrase  or  an  object  whose  name  is  unknown. 
Lo  is  used,  1st.  before  the  defining  adjectives,  when  the 
noun  thing  is  either  expressed  or  understood  in  English  : 
Lo  primero  que  vi,  the  first  (thing)  which  I  saw.  Li  que 
compre,  the  thing  which  I  bought,  or  that  I  bought.  2d. 
Before  qualifying  adjectives  employed  as  nouns,  and  then 
is  generally  translated  by  the.  No  distingue  lo  bianco  de  lo 
negro,  he  does  not  distinguish  the  white  from  the  black.  Edo, 
Eso,  Aquello,  are  used  to  designate  an  object  whose  name  we 
do  not  know,  or  do  not  wish  to  express.  For  instance,  if 
I  should  see  a  thing  moving  at  a  distance,  and  I  could  not 
perceive  whether  it  was  a  man  or  a  beast,  or  a  tree  ;  or  if  T 
perceived  it,  and  did  not  wish  to  express  its  name,  I  should 
say:  ^  Ve  Vd.  aquello?  Do  you  see  the  (or  that  thing)? 
Observe  that  the  neuter  gender  has  no  plural. 


PEACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


123 


To  STUDY. 

Instead  of. 


EsTTTDIAR. 
En  LUGAJR  DE,    Or  EN  YFZ  DE. 


Instead  of,  is  in  English  followed  by  the  present  participle,  whilst  in 
Spanish  it  is  followed  by  the  infinitive,  as  is  generally  the  case  when  a 
preposition  is  used  before  the  verb. 


To  PLAY. 
To   LISTEN. 
To  HEAR. 

Instead  of  listening. 
Instead  of  playing. 
Do  you  play  instead  of  studying? 
I  study  instead  of  playing. 
That  man  speaks  in-tead  of  listen- 
ing  


To  ACHE. 

To  COMPLAIN. 

I  complain,  we  complain. 
You  complain  (sing,  and  plur.) 
He  complains,  they  complain. 
Thou  complainest. 

Have  you  a  sore  finger  ? 
Have  you  the  headache  ? 
I  have  a  sore  finger. 
I  have  the  headache  ? 


Jugae.  * 

Escuchab. 

Oik.* 
En  vez  or  en  lugar  de  escuchar. 
En  vez  or  en  lugar  de  jugar. 
I  Juega  Vd.  en  vez  de  estudiar  1 
Estudio  en  vez  de  jugar. 
Aquel   hombre   habla  en  vez    da 
escuchar. 


Doles.  * 

qoejarse. 
Me  quejo,  nos  quejamos. 
Vd.  se  queja  Vds.  se  quejan. 
El  se  queja,  ellos  se  quejan. 
Tii  te  quejas. 


f  i  Tiene  Vd.  un  dedo  malo  ? 
j  f  i  Le  duele  a  Vd.  la  cabeza  ? 
I  f  4  Tiene  Vd.  dolor  de  cabeza  ? 
f  Tengo  un  dedo  malo. 

f  Me  duele  la  cabeza. 

t  Tengo  dolor  de  cabeza. 


Has  your  brother  a  sore  foot? 

He  has  a  sore  eye. 
We  have  sore  eyes. 


I  Tiene  su  bermano  de  Vd.  un  pie 

malo  ? 
Tiene  un  ojc  malo. 
Tenemos  los  ojos  malos 


The  study,  a  closet. 

The  desk. 

The  elbow. 

The  back. 

The  knee. 

The  bed. 

I  have  a  sore  elbow. 

Thou  hast  a  pain  in  thy  back. 

He  has  a  sore  arm. 

You  have  a  sore  knee. 


El  estudio,  un  gabincte 
El  escritorio,  el  bufete. 
El  codo. 
La  espalda. 
La  rodilla. 
La  cama. 


Tengo  un  codo  malo. 
A  ti  te  duele  la  espalda. 
El  tiene  un  brazo  inalo. 
Vd.  tiene  una  rodilla  mala. 


124 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHEE. 


Do  you  read  instead  of  writing?       |  i  Lee  Vd.  en  vez  de  escribir  ? 
Does  your  brother  read  instead  of  j  i  Lee  su  hermano  de  Vd.  en  vez  de 

speaking  ?  hablar  ? 

Does  the  servant  make  the  bed  ?       1 1  Hace  la  cama  el  criado  ? 
He  makes  the  fire  instead  of  mak-    Hace  el  fuego  en  vez  de  hacer  la 

ing  the  bed.  I      cama. 


To  LEARN. 
To  learn  to  read. 
I  learn  to  read. 
He  learns  to  write. 
The  physician. 
The  jewels. 
The  boots. 


Aprender. 
Aprender  a  leer. 
Aprendo  a  leer. 
El  aprende  a  escribir. 
El  me'dico. 
Las  joy  as. 
Las  botas. 


Exercise  No.  68. 


Do  you  go  to  the  play  this  evening  ?  I  do  not  go  to  the 
theatre.  What  have  you  to  do  ?  I  have  to  study.  At 
what  o'clock  do  you  go  out  ?  I  do  not  go  out  in  the  even- 
ing. Does  your  father  go  out  ?  He  does  not  go  out.  What 
does  he  do  ?  He  writes.  Does  he  write  a  book  ?  He  does 
write  one.  When  does  he  write  it  ?  He  writes  it  in  the 
morning  and  in  the  evening.  Is  he  at  home  now  ?  He  is 
at  home  (He  is).  Does  he  not  go  out  ?  He  cannot  go  out, 
he  has  a  sore  foot.  Does  the  shoemaker  bring  our  shoes  ? 
He  does  not  bring  them.  Is  he  not  able  to  work  ?  He  is 
not  able  to  work,  he  has  a  sore  knee.  Has  any  body  a  sore 
elbow  ?  My  tailor  has  a  sore  elbow.  Who  has  a  sore  arm  ? 
I  have  a  sore  arm.  Do  you  cut  me  some  bread  ?  I  cannot 
cut  you  any,  I  have  sore  fingers  {tengo  los  dedos  malos).  Do 
you  read  your  book  ?  I  cannot  read  it,  I  have  sore  eyes 
{tengo  los  ojos  malos).  Who  has  sore  eyes  ?  The  French 
have  sore  eyes.  Do  they  read  too  much  ?  They  do  not 
read  enough.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day  ?  It  is 
the  third.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-morrow  ?  To- 
morrow is  the  fourth.  Are  you  looking  for  any  body  ?  I 
am  looking  for  nobody.  What  is  the  painter  looking  for  ? 
He  is  not  looking  for  any  thing.  Wbom  are  you  looking 
for  ?  I  am  looking  for  your  son.  Have  you  any  thing  to 
tell  him  ?  I  have  something  to  tell  him.  What  have  you 
to  tell  him  1  I  have  to  tell  him  to  go  to  the  play  this  even- 
ing. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  125 

Exercise  No.  69. 

Who  is  looking  for  me  ?  Your  father  is  looking  for  you. 
Is  any  body  looking  for  my  brother  ?  Nobody  is  looking 
for  him.  Dost  thou  find  what  thou  art  looking  for  ?  I  do 
find  what  I  am  looking  for.  Does  the  captain  find  what  ho 
is  looking  for  ?  He  finds  what  he  is  looking  for,  but  his 
children  do  not  find  what  they  are  looking  for.  What  are 
they  looking  for  ?  They  are  looking  for  their  books. 
Where  dost  thou  take  me  to  ?  I  take  you  to  the  theatre. 
Do  you  not  take  me  to  the  market  ?  I  do  not  take  you 
thither.  Do  the  Spaniards  find  the  umbrellas  which  they 
are  looking  for  ?  They  do  not  find  them.  Does  the  tailor 
find  his  thimble  ?  He  does  not  find  it.  Do  the  merchants 
find  the  cloth  which  they  are  looking  for  ?  They  do  find 
it.  What  do  the  butchers  find  ?  They  find  the  oxen  and 
the  sheep  which  they  are  looking  for.  What  does  your 
cook  find  ?  He  finds  the  chickens  which  he  is  looking  for. 
What  is  the  physician  doing  ?  He  is  doing  what  you  are 
doing.  What  is  he  doing  in  his  study?  He  is  reading. 
What  is  he  reading  ?  He  is  reading  your  father's  book. 
Whom  is  the  Englishman  looking  for  ?  He  is  looking  for 
his  friend,  in  order  to  take  him  to  the  garden.  What  is  the 
German  doing  in  his  study  ?  He  is  learning  to  read.  Does 
he  not  learn  to  write?  He  does  not  learn  it.  Does  your 
son  learn  to  write  ?    He  learns  to  write  and  to  read. 


Exercise  No.  70. 

Does  the  Dutchman  speak  instead  of  listening?  He 
speaks  instead  of  listening.  Do  you  go  out  instead  of  re- 
maining at  home  ?  I  remain  at  home,  instead  of  going  out. 
Does  your  son  play  instead  of  studying  ?  He  studies  in- 
stead of  playing.  When  does  he  study  ?  He  studies  every 
day.  In  the  morning  or  in  the  evening  ?  In  the  morning 
and  in  the  evening.  Do  you  buy  an  umbrella  instead  of 
buying  a  book  ?  I  buy  neither  the  one  nor  the  other.  Does 
our  neighbor  break  his  sticks  instead  of  breaking  his 
glasses  P     He  breaks  his  guns.     Do  the   children  of  our 


126 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


instead  of  writing. 


What  is 


neighbor  read  ?     They  read 

onr  cook  doing  ?  He  makes  a  fire  instead  of  going  to  the 
market.  Does  the  captain  give  you  any  thing  ?  He  does 
give  me  something.  What  does  he  give  you?  He  givea 
me  a  great  deal  of  money.  Does  he  give  you  money  in 
stead  of  giving  you  bread  ?  He  gives  me  money  and  bread. 
Does  he  give  you  more  cheese  than  bread  ?  He  gives  me 
less  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. 


TWENTY-NINTH  LESSON. 


Do  you  learn  Spanish  ? 
I  do  learn  it. 
I  do  not  learn  it. 

Spanish. 

French. 

English. 

Italian. 

Polish. 

Eussian. 

Latin. 

Greek. 

Syrian,  Syriac. 

German. 

Arabian. 

I  learn  Spanish. 

My  brother  learns  French. 

The  Pole. 

The  Koman. 

The  Arab,  Arabian. 

Are  you  an  Englishman  ? 
No,  Sir,  I  am  an  American. 
Are  you  a  Spaniard  ? 
ifes,  Sir,  I  am  a  Spaniard. 


4  Aprendre  Vd.  el  espafiol? 
Lo  aprendo. 
No  lo  aprendo. 


El  espanol. 

El  frances. 

El  ingles. 

El  italiano. 

El  polaco. 

El  ruso. 

El  latin. 

El  griego. 

El  siriaco. 

El  aleman. 

El  arabigo. 

Aprendo  el  espanol. 

Mi  hermano  aprende  el  trances. 


El  polaco. 
El  romano. 
El  arabe. 

I  Es  Vd.  ingles  ? 

No,  Sefior,  soy  americano. 

,;  Es  Vd.  espaiiol  ? 

Si,  Seiior,  soy  espafioL 


When  the  indefinite  article  is  used  in  English  to  denote 
qualities  or  professions,  the  Spaniards  make  use  of  no  ar- 
ticle. 


He  is  a  German. 

Is  he  a  tailor  ? 

No,  he  is  a  shoemaker. 


El  es  aleman. 
I  Es  sastre  ? 
No,  eszapatero. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


127 


The  fool. 
The  morning. 
The  afternoon. 
The  evening,  night. 
The  day. 


To  WISH. 
I  wish  yon  a  good  morning. 
Does  he  wish  me  a  good  evening  ? 
He  wishes  you  a  good  morning. 
He  wishes  you  a    good 
journey. 


The  nose. 

Blue. 

Black. 

The  coat 

Large. 

He  has  a  large  nose. 

He  has  blue  eyes. 
She  has  black  eyes. 
Do  you  like  black  eyes  ? 
I  like  them  much. 


A  French  book. 

An  English  book. 

French  money. 

American  gold. 

Spanish  gold. 

Do  you  read  a  Spanish  book  ? 

I  read  a  French  book. 

To  listen  to  some  one. 

To  listen  to  something. 

Do  you  listen  to  what  the  man  tells 

you? 
I  listen  to  it. 

Does  he  listen  to  what  I  tell  him  ? 
Do  you  listen  to  what  I  tell  you  ? 
I  do  listen  to  what  you  say. 
Do  you  listen  to  what  my  brother 

says  to  you  ? 
I  do  listen  to  him. 


To  TAKE  AWAY. 
To  TAKE  OFF. 

Do  you  take  off  your  hat? 


El  necio,  tonto  or  bobo 

La  manana. 

La  tarde. 

La  noche. 

Eldia. 


Desear. 
Deseo  a  Vd.  felizes  dias. 
I  Me  desea  e'l  felizes  noches  ? 
Le  desea  a  Vd.  felizes  dias. 
Le  desea  a  Vd.  un  buen  viaje. 


La  nariz. 

Azul. 

Negro. 

La  casaca. 

Largo,  grande. 

El  tiene  una  nariz  grande  or  una 

narizona. 
Tiene  ojos  azules. 
Ella  tiene  ojos  negros. 
I  Le  gustan  a  Vd.  los  ojos  negros? 
Me  gustan  mucho. 


Un  libro  trances. 
Un  libro  ingles. 
Dinero  frances. 
Oro  americano. 
Oro  espafiol. 

I  Lee  Vd.  un  libro  espafiol  t 
Leo  un  libro  frances. 
Escuchar  a  alguno. 

f  Escuchar  alguna  cosa  or  algo. 

I I  Escucha  Vd.  lo  que  el  hombre  le 
dice  ? 

f  Lo  escucho. 

1 1  Escucha  el  lo  que  le  digo  ? 

1 1  Escucha  Vd.  lo  que  le  digo  ? 

t  Escucho  lo  que  Vd.  dice. 

f  ,;  Escucha  Vd.  lo  que  mi  herman  J 

le  dice? 
Lo  escucho. 


QUITAR  (iiEVAKSE). 
QUTTAKSE. 

f  i  Se  quita  Vd.  el  sombrero  ? 


128 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


I  take  it  off. 

Does  he  take  off  his  coat? 

Take  off  your  coat. 

Take  those  plates  away. 

Do  you  take  off  your  gloves  ? 

We  take  off  our  gloves. 

We  take  them  off. 


To  COBEECT. 

Does  your  father  correct  your  exer- 
cises ? 
He  corrects  them. 


To  speak  Spanish, 
To  speak  English. 
Do  you  speak  Spanish  ? 
No,  Sir,  I  speak  French. 

To  TAKE,  TO  DBINK. 

To  take  or  drink  coffee. 

To  take,  to  drink  tea. 

Will  you  take  tea  ? 

I  will  take  some. 

Do  you  drink  tea  every  day? 

I  drink  it  every  day. 

My  father  drinks  coffee. 

He  drinks  coffee  every  morning. 


f  Me  lo  quito. 

f  iSe  quita  el  la  casaca? 

f  Quitese  Vd.  la  casaca. 

Quite  Vd.  esos  platos. 

f  i  Se  quitan  Vds.  los  guantcs? 

Nos  quitamos  los  guantes. 

Nos  los  quitamos. 


Coeeejie.  * 
I  Corrije  su  padre  de  Vd.  sus  ejer- 

cicios? 
El  los  corrije. 


I  Hablar  el  espanol. 
Hablar  el  ingles. 
jHabla  Vd.  el  espanol? 
No,  Sefior,  hablo  el  frances. 


Tomae.     Bebee. 
Tomar  or  beber  cafe*. 
Tomar  or  beber  te\ 
t  Qui  ere  Vd.  tomar  te*? 
Tomare*  un  poco. 
I  Toma  Vd.  te'  todos  los  dias  ? 
Lo  tomo  todos  los  dias. 
Mi- padre  toma  cafe. 
El  toma  cafe*  todas  las  maSanas. 


Exercise  No.  71. 

Do  you  go  for  any  thing  ?  I  do  go  for  something.  What 
do  you  go  for  ?  I  go  for  some  cider.  Does  your  father 
send  for  any  thing  ?  He  sends  for  some  wine.  Does  your 
servant  go  for  some  bread  ?  He  goes  for  some.  For  whom 
does  your  neighbor  send?  He  sends  for  the  physician. 
Does  your  servant  take  off  his  coat  in  order  to  make  the 
fire  ?  He  does  take  it  off  in  order  to  make  it.  Do  you  take 
off  your  gloves  in  order  to  give  me  some  money  ?  I  do  take 
them  off  in  order  to  give  you  some.  Do  you  learn  French  ? 
I  do  learn  it.  "Who  learns  English  ?  The  Frenchman  learns 
it.  Does  your  brother  learn  German  ?  He  does  learn  it. 
Do  we  learn  Italian  ?  You  do  learn  it.  What  do  the  Eng- 
lish  learn?     They   learn   French   and   German.     Do   you 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  129 

speak  Spanish?  No,  Sir,  I  speak  Italian.  Who  speaks 
Polish?  My  brother  speaks  Polish.  Do  our  neighbors 
speak  Russian  ?  They  do  not  speak  Russian,  but  Arabic. 
Do  you  speak  Arabic?  No.  I  speak  Greek  and  Latin. 
What  knife  have  you?  I  have  an  English  knife.  What 
money  have  you?  is  it  Italian  or  Spanish  money?  It  is 
Russian  money.  Have  you  an  Italian  hat  ?  No,  I  have  a 
Spanish  hat.  Are  you  an  Englishman?  No,  I  am  a 
Frenchman.     Are  you  a  Greek  ?    No,  I  am  a  Spaniard. 


Exercise  No.  72. 

Are  (son)  these  men  Germans  ?  No,  they  are  Russians. 
Do  the  Russians  speak  Polish  ?  They  do  not  speak  Polish, 
but  Latin,  Greek  and  Arabic.  Is  your  brother  a  merchant? 
No,  he  is  a  smith.  Are  these  men  merchants  ?  No,  they 
are  carpenters.  Are  (es)  you  a  cook  ?  No,  I  am  a  baker. 
Are  (somos)  we  tailors?  No,  we  are  shoemakers.  Art 
(eres)  thou  a  fool?  lam  (soy)  not  a  fool.  What  is  (es) 
that  man  ?  He  is  a  physician.  Do  you  wish  me  any  thing  ? 
I  wish  you  a  good  morning.  What  does  the  young  man 
wish  me  ?  He  wishes  you  a  good  evening.  Do  your  child- 
ren come  to  me  in  order  to  wish  me  a  good  evening  ?  They 
come  to  you  in  order  to  wish  you  a  good  morning.  Has 
the  German  black  eyes?  No,  he  has  blue  eyes.  Has  this 
man  large  feet  ?  He  has  little  feet  ( pies  pequeflos)  and  a 
large  nose  (nariz  grande).  Have  you  time  to  read  my  book? 
I  have  no  time  to  read  it,  but  I  have  a  great  desire  (un  gran 
deseo)  to  study  Spanish.  What  dost  thou  do  instead  of 
playing  ?  I  study  instead  of  playing.  Dost  thou  learn  in- 
stead of  writing  ?  I  write  instead  of  learning.  What  does 
the  son  of  our  friend  do  ?  He  goes  into  the  garden  instead 
of  doing  his  exercises.  Do  the  children  of  our  neighbors 
read  ?  They  write  instead  of  reading.  What  does  our  cook 
do  ?  He  makes  the  fire  instead  of  going  to  the  market. 
Does  your  father  sell  his  ox  ?  He  sells  his  horse  instead  of 
selling  his  ox. 


130  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Exercise  No.  .  73. 

£  Estudia  el  ingles  el  hijo  del  pintor?  Estudia  el  griego 
en  vez  de  estudiar  el  ingles.  I  Mata  bueyes  el  carnicero  ? 
Mata  ovejas  en  lugar  de  matar  bueyes.  ,?  Me  escucha  Vd.  ? 
Le  escucho  a  Vd.  I  Me  escucha  su  hermano  de  Vd.  ?  Ha- 
bla  en  vez  de  escuchar  a  Vd.  <:  Escucha  Vd.  lo  que  le  digo  ? 
Escucho  lo  que  Vd.  me  dice.  £  Escuchas  tii  lo  que  te  dice 
tu  hermano  ?  Lo  escucho.  i  Escuchan  los  nifios  del  medi- 
co lo  que  les  decimos  ?  No  lo  escuchan.  <?  Va  Vd.  al  tea- 
tro  ?  Voy  al  almacen  en  vez  de  ir  al  teatro.  i  Quiere  Vd. 
leer  mi  libro  ?  Quiero  leerlo,  pero  no  ahora  ;  ten  go  los 
ojos  malos.  <:  Corrije  su  padre  de  Vd.  mis  ejercicios  6  loa 
de  mi  hermano  ?  No  corrije  ni  los  de  Vd.  ni  los  de  su  her- 
mano. i  Cuales  ejercicios  corrije  el  ?  Corrije  los  mios. 
I  Se  quita  Vd.  el  sombrero  para  hablar  a  mi  padre  ?  No  me 
lo  quito  para  hablarle.  <i  Se  descalza  Vd.  los  zapatos  ?  No 
me  los  descalzo.  <?  Quien  se  quita  el  sombrero  ?  Mi  amigo 
se  lo  quita.  <?  Se  quita  el  los  guantes  ?  No  se  los  quita. 
I  Que  se  quitan  estos  muchachos  ?  Se  quitan  las  botas  y 
los  vestidos.  £  Quien  se  lleva  los  vasos  ?  Su  criado  de  Vd. 
se  los  lleva.  i  Que  se  Uevan  sus  nifios  de  Vd  ?  Se  llevan 
los  libros  y  mis  billetes.  <?  Que  se  lleva  Vd.  ?  No  me  llevo 
nada.  <:  Nos  llevamos  algo  ?  Nos  llevamos  el  cortaplumas 
de  nuestro  padre  y  el  baul  de  nuestro  hermano.  i  Me  da 
Vd,  pano  ingles  6  aleman  ?  No  doy  a  Vd.  pano  ingles  ni 
aleman  ;  doy  a  Vd.  pano  frances.  £  Lee  Vd.  el  espanol  ? 
No  leo  el  espanol,  sino  el  aleman.  &  Quo  libro  lee  su  her- 
mano de  Vd.  ?  Lee  un  libro  frances.  ,?  Bebe  Vd.  por  la 
mafiana  te  6  cafe  ?  Bebo  te.  i  Bebe  Vd.  te  todas  las  ma- 
ftanas  ?  Lo  bebo  todas  las  mafianas.  £  Que  bebe  Vd.  ? 
Bebo  cafe.  £  Que  bebe  su  hermano  de  Vd.  ?  Bebe  te.  £  Lo 
bebe  todas  las  mafianas  ?  Lo  bebe  todas  las  mafianas. 
I  Beben  te  sus  nifios  de  Vd.  ?  Beben  cafe  en  vez  de  beber 
te.    4  Que*  bebemos  nosotros  ?    Bebemos  cafe. 


n 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 

THIRTIETH  LESSON. 


13* 


To  WET,  TO  MOISTEN. 

To  SHOW 
I  show. 

Thou  showest. 
He  shows. 


TO  SHOW  SOME  ONE. 

Do  you  show  me  your  musket  ? 
I  do  show  it  to  you. 
What  do  you  show  the  man  ? 
I  show  him  my  fine  clothes. 


To  SMOKE. 

The  tobacco. 
A  segar. 
Snuff. 

The  gardener. 
The  valet. 
The  concert. 


MoJAE,    HUMEDECEB. 
MoSTBAB,  *  EnSENAB,   HaCEB 

Muestro  or  enseno. 

Tu  muestras  or  enseiias. 

El  muestra  or  enseiia. 


i.  AEGUNO. 


MOSTBAB.    ) 

Ensenae.    j 
I  Me  muestra  or  enseiia  Vd.  su  fusil . 
Se  lo  muestro  or  enseno  a  Vd. 
I  Que'  muestra  Vd.  al  hombre  ? 
Le  muestro  mis  hermosos  vestidos 


Fumae. 
El  tabaco. 
Un  tabaco 
Polvo  de  tabaco,  rape. 


El  jardinero. 

El  criado  de  mano. 

El  concierto. 


To  INTEND. 

The  ball. 

Do  you  intend  to  go  to  the  ball  this 

evening  ? 
I  intend  to  go. 


Pensab,*  intentab. 
El  baile. 
I  Piensa  Vd.  ir  al  baile  esta  noche  ? 

Pienso  ir. 


To  SWTM. 

Do  you  know  how  to  swim  ? 


Nadab. 
I  Sabe  Vd.  nadar  ? 


To  know  is  in  English  followed  by  how  before  the  infini- 
tive, whilst  in  Spanish  the  infinitive  joined  to  the  verb  saber 
is  not  preceded  by  any  particle,  if  how  does  not  express  the 


manner. 

Do  you  know  how  to  write  ? 
I  know  how  to  write. 
Does  he  know  how  to  read  ? 

To  EXTINGUISH,  TO  PUT  OUT. 

Do  you  extinguish  the  fire  ? 
I  do  extinguish  it. 
He  extinguishes  it>. 
Thou  extinguishest  it. 


I  Sabe  Vd.  escribir  ? 
Sd  escribir. 
;Sabe  el  leer? 


APAGAB,  *  ESTINGUTB.  * 

I  Apaga  Vd.  el  fuego  ? 
Lo  apago. 
El  lo  apaga. 
Tu  lo  apagas. 


132 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


To  LIGHT,  TO  KINDLE. 

Do  you  light  the  candle  ? 
I  do  light  it. 


Often. 

Ofteneb. 
Do  you  often  go  to  the  ball  ? 
As  often  as  you. 
As  often  as  I. 
As  often  as  he. 
As  often  as  they. 
Do  you  often  see  my  father  ? 
I  see  him  oftener  than  you. 

Not  so  often. 
Not  so  often  as  you. 
Not  so  often  as  I. 
Not  so  often  as  they. 

The  ribbon. 

The  candle,  the  light. 

Into,  in. 

Into  (meaning  to). 
To  go  into  the  garden. 


Encender.  * 
,:Enciende  Vd.  la  vela? 
La  enciendo. 


a  menudo,  fbecuentementi 

Mas  a  menudo. 
I  Va  Vd.  a  menudo  al  baile  ? 
Tan  a  menudo  como  Vd. 
Tan  a  menudo  como  yo. 
Tan  a  menudo  como  6\. 
Tan  a  menudo  como  ellos. 
I  Ve  Vd.  a  menudo  a  mi  padre  ? 
Le  veo  mas  a  menudo  que  Vd. 


No  TAN  A  MENUDO. 

No  tan  a  menudo  como  Vd. 
No  tan  a  menudo  como  yo. 
No  tan  a  menudo  como  ellos. 


La  cinta. 

La  vela,  la  luz. 


En. 
A. 

Ir  al  jardin. 


THE  ARTICLE   USED  IN   SPANISH  AND  NOT  IN   ENGLISH. 

1st.  Before  Collective  Nouns  when  employed  to  desig- 
nate the  whole  collection  of  individuals  comprehended  in 
them  : 


2d.  Before  Nouns  denoting  abstract  qualities,  when  em- 
ployed in  a  general  sense  : 


TInehn^man)  i  ^e  their  existence 
,rers  f     to  the  Creator. 


{bondad 
virtud 
opinion 


debe  respetarse. 


Goodness ) 

Virtue       J-  must  be  respected. 


3d.  Before  Adjectives  denoting  the  dignity  or  profession 
of  a  person,  when  followed  by  his  name  : 


El  Jeneral  Washington. 
El  Coronel  N. 


I  General  Washington. 
Colonel  N. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  133 

Except  befoie  Don  and  Dofla,  when  they  are  not  preceded 
by  another  qualifying  Adjective  : 

Don  Juan.  I  El  Seilor  Don  Juan. 

Dona  Juana.  |  La  Seflora  Dofla  Juana. 

THE  AKTICLE  USED  IN  ENGLISH  AND  NOT  IN   SPANISH. 

1st.  Before  the  Ordinal  Numbers,  when  the  Noun  they 
modify  is  expressed  ;  as, 

Capitulo  priniero.  I  Chapter  the  first. 

Carlos  segundo.  |  Charles  the  Second. 

2d.  Before  a  Noun  used  in  apposition  to  another ;  as, 

Madrid,  capital  de  Espafla.  |  Madrid,  the  capital  of  Spain. 


Exeecise  No.  74. 

What  does  your  father  want  ?  He  wants  some  tobacco. 
Will  you  go  for  some  ?  I  will  go  for  some.  What  tobacco 
does  he  want?  He  wants  some  snuff.  Do  you  want  to- 
bacco (for  smoking/  ?  I  do  not  want  any  ;  I  do  not  smoke. 
Do  you  show  me  any  thing?  I  show  you  gold  ribbons. 
Does  your  father  show  his  musket  to  my  brother?  He 
does  show  it  to  him.  Does  he  show  him  his  beautiful 
birds?  He  does  show  them  to  him.  Does  the  French  man 
smoke  ?  He  does  not  smoke.  Do  you  go  to  the  ball  ?  1 
go  to  the  theatre  instead  of  going  to  the  ball.  Does  the 
gardener  go  into  the  garden  ?  He  goes  to  the  market  in- 
stead of  going  into  the  garden.  Do  you  send  your  valet  to 
the  tailor  ?  I  send  him  to  the  shoemaker  instead  of  send- 
ing him  to  the  tailor.  Does  your  brother  intend  to  go  to 
the  ball  this  evening?  He  does  not  intend  to  go  to  the  ball, 
but  to  the  concert.  When  do  you  intend  to  go  to  the  con- 
cert? I  intend  to  go  this  evening.  At  what  o'clock  ?  At 
a  quarter  past  ten.  Do  you  go  for  my  son  ?  I  do  go  for 
him.  Where  is  he?  He  is  in  the  counting-house.  Do  you 
find  the  man  whom  you  are  looking  for  ?  I  do  find  him. 
Do  your  sons  find  the  friends  whom  they  are  looking  for  ? 
They  do  not  find  them. 


134  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Exercise  No.  75. 

Do  your  friends  intend  to  go  to  the  theatre  9  They  do 
intend  to  go.  When  do  they  intend  to  go  ?  They  intend 
"to  go  to-morrow.  At  what  o'clock  ?  At  half-past  seven, 
i  What  does  the  merchant  wish  to  sell  you  ?  He  wishes  to 
tsell  me  some  pocket-books  (carteras).  Do  you  intend  to 
'buy  some  ?  I  will  not  buy  any.  Dost  thou  know  any- 
thing? I  do  not  know  any  thing.  What  does  your  little 
brother  know  ?  He  knows  how  to  write  and  to  read.  Does 
he  know  French  ?  He  does  not  know  it.  Do  you  know 
German  ?  I  do  know  it.  Do  your  brothers  know  Spanish  ? 
They  do  not  know  it,  but  they  intend  to  study  it.  Do  you 
know  English  ?  I  do  not  know  it,  but  I  intend  to  learn  it. 
Do  my  children  know  how  to  read  Italian  ?  They  know 
how  to  read,  but  not  how  to  speak.  Do  you  know  how  to 
swim  ?  I  do  not  know  how  to  swim,  but  how  to  play.  Does 
your  son  know  how  to  make  coats  ?  He  does  not  know 
how  to  make  any,  he  is  not  a  tailor.  Is  he  a  merchant  ?  He 
is  not  (no  lo  en).  What  is  he  ?  He  is  a  physician.  Do  you 
intend  to  study  Arabic  ?  I  do  intend  to  study  Arabic  and 
Latin.  Does  the  Frenchman  know  Russian  ?  He  does  not 
know  it,  but  he  intends  learning  it.  Whither  are  you  go- 
ing ?  I  am  going  into  the  garden  in  order  to  speak  to  my 
gardener.     Does  he  listen  to  you  ?     He  does  listen  to  me. 


Exercise  No.  76. 

Do  you  wish  to  drink  some  cider  ?.  I  wish  to  drink  some 
wine,  have  you  any  ?  I  have  none,  but  I  will  send  for 
some.  When  will  you  send  for  some  ?  Now.  Do  you 
know  how  to  make  tea  ?  I  know  how  to  make  some.  Where 
is  your  father  going  ?  He  goes  nowhere,  he  remains  at 
home.  Do  you  know  how  to  write  a  note  ?  I  know  how 
to  write  one.  Can  you  write  exercises  ?  I  can  write  some. 
Dost  thou  conduct  any  body  ?  I  conduct  somebody.  Whom 
do  you  conduct  ?  I  conduct  my  son.  Where  do  you  con- 
duct him?  I  conduct  him  to  my  friends  to  (jjara)  wish 
»hom  a  good  morning.     Does  your  servant  conduct  your 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


135 


child?  He  conducts  him.  Whither  does  he  conduct  it? 
He  conducts  it  into  the  garden.  Do  we  conduct  any  one  ? 
We  conduct  our  children.  Whither  are  our  friends  con- 
ducting their  sons  ?     They  are  conducting  them  home. 


THIKTY-FIRST  LESSON. 


Are  you  acquainted  with  that  man  ? 

I  am  not  acquainted  with  him. 

Is  your  brother  acquainted   with 

him? 
He  is  aeouainted  with  him. 
Do  you  dlrink  cider  ? 
I  do  drink  cider,  but  my  friend 

drinks  wine. 
Do  you  receive  a  note  ? 
I  do  receive  one. 
"What  do  we  receive  ? 
What  do  our  children  receive  ? 
They  receive  some  books. 


I  Conoce  Vd.  a  aquel  hombre  ? 

No  le  conozco. 

I  Le  conoce  su  hermano  de  Vd.  ? 

El  le  conoce. 

I  Bebe  Vd.  sidra  ? 

JBebo  sidra,  pero  mi  amigo   boba 

vino. 
I  Recibe  Vd.  un  billete  ? 
Recibo  uno. 

,;  Que  recibimos  nosotros  ? 
I  Que'  reciben  nuestros  nifios  ? 
Ellos  reciben  libros. 


Before,  beforehand. 

Before,  in  presence  of. 
Do  you  speak  before  you  listen  ? 
Do  you  smoke  before  ladies  ? 
Does  he  go  to  the  market  before  he 
breakfasts  ? 


Antes  (takes  de  before  the 
Infinitive). 

Delante  de. 
I  Habla  Vd.  antes  de  escuchar  ? 
I  Fuma  Vd.  delante  de  las  sefior^s  ? 
I  Va  el  al  mercado  antes  de  almor- 
zar  ? 


TO  BREAKFAST. 

I  breakfast,  you  breakfast,  he 
breakfasts,  we  breakfast,  you 
breakfast,  they  breakfast. 

The  breakfast. 
He  does  go  before  he  breakfasts. 
Do  you  take  off  your  stockings  be- 
fore you  take  off  your  shoes  ? 


Almorzar*  or  desavunarse. 

Yo  almuerzo,  Vd.  almuerza,  el  al- 

muerza,    nosotros    almorzamos, 

Vds.  almuerzan,  ellos  almuerzan. 

El  almuerzo  or  el  desayuno. 
El  va  antes  de  almorzar. 
£  Se  quita  Vd.  las  medias  antes  da 
quitarse  los  zapatos  ? 


TO  FINISH. 

[  finish. 

We  finish. 

You  finish  (sing,  an&plur.) 

Be  finishes. 
They  finish. 
Thru  finishest. 


ACABAR,    CONCLUTR. 

Yo  acabo  or  concluyo. 

Nosotros  acabamos  or  concluimos, 

Vd.  acaba  or  concluye,  Vds.  acaban 

or  conoluyen. 
El  acaba  or  concluye. 
Ellos  acaban  or  concluyen, 
Tu  acabas  or  concluyes. 


136 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


To  DEPART,  TO  SET  OUT,  10  SAIL. 

When  do  .you  intend  to  depart? 
I  intend  to  depart  to-morrow. 
I  depart,    thou  dispartest,   he  de- 
parts. 


Partir,  salts.* 
^Cuando  piensa  Vd.  partir?*  (1). 
Pienso  partir  mafiana. 
Yo  parto  or  salgo,   tii   partes  or 
sales,  el  parte  or'  sale. 


To  BEGIN,  TO  COMMENCE. 

Do  you  begin  to  speak  Spanish  ? 
Yes,   Sir,    I  begin  to  speak  it  a 
little. 


Empezar,*  comenzar,*  phincipiar. 
I  Empieza  Vd.  a  hablar  el  espafiol  ? 
Si,  Senor,  empiezo  a  hablarlo  un 
poco. 


Well. 

Badly. 
Do  I  speak  well  ? 
Yes,  Sir,  you  commence  to 
well. 

The  broom. 
The  honey. 
The  pistol. 


BlEN. 

Mal.     Malatmente. 
I  Hablo  bien  ? 

Si,   Senor,   Vd.   empieza  a  hablar 
bien. 


La  escoba. 
La  miel. 
La  pistola. 


When  the  Adjective  has  two  terminations,  then  amente  is 
added  to  the  positive,  dropping  the  last  vowel  to  make  an 
Adverb,  as  :  Antig^o,  a»%wamente.  And  when,  in  English, 
two  or  more  Adverbs  in  ly  follow  each  other  in  Spanish, 
mente  is  expressed  only  after  the  last  one,  as  :  real  y  ver 
daderamente,  really  and  truly. 

1.  Partir,  if  the  journey  is  by  land ;  Salir,  if  either  by  land  or  by 
water. 


Exercise  No.  77. 

Do  I  read  well  ?  You  do  read  well.  Do  I  speak  well  ? 
You  do  not  speak  well.  Does  my  brother  speak  French 
well?  He  speaks  it  well.  Does  he  speak  German  well? 
He  speaks  it  badly.  Do  we  speak  well  ?  You  speak  badly. 
Do  I  drink  too  much  ?  You  do  not  drink  enough.  Am  I 
able  to  make  hats  ?  You  are  not  able  to  make  any,  you  are 
no  hatter.  Am  I  able  to  write  a  note?  You  are  able  to 
write  it.  Am  I  doing  my  exercise  well?  You  are  doing  it 
well.  What  am  I  doing  ?  You  are  doing  exercises.  What 
is  my  brother  doing  ?    He  is  doing  nothing.     What  do  I 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  137 

say?  You  say  nothing.  Do  I  begin  to  speak?  You  do 
begin  to  speak.  Do  I  begin  to  speak  well  ?  You  do  not 
begin  to  speak  well,  but  to  read  well.  Where  am  I  going  ? 
You  are  going  to  your  friend.  Is  he  at  home  ?  Do  I  know 
it?  Am  I  able  to  speak  as  often  as  the  son  of  our  neigh- 
bor ?  He  is  able  to  speak  oftener  than  you.  Can  I  work 
as  much  as  he?  You  cannot  work  as  much  as  he.  Do  I 
read  as  often  as  you  ?  You  do  not  read  as  often  as  I.  but 
you  speak  oftener  than  I.  Do  I  speak  as  well  as  (tan  Men 
como)  you  ?  You  do  not  speak  so  well  as  (tan  Men  como)  I. 
Do  I  go  (voy  yo)  to  you,  or  do  you  come  (viene  Yd.)  to  me  ? 
You  come  to  me,  and  I  go  (voy)  to  you.  When  do  you 
come  to  me?  Every  morning  at  half-past  six.  Do  you 
know  the  Russian  whom  I  know  ?  I  do  not  know  the  one 
(al  que)  you  know,  but  I  know  another. 


Exercise  No.  78. 

Do  vou  drink  as  much  cider  as  wine  ?  I  drink  less  cider 
than  wine.  Does  the  Pole  drink  as  much  as  the  Russian  ? 
He  drinks  just  as  much.  Do  the  Germans  drink  as  much 
as  the  Poles  ?  The  latter  drink  more  than  the  former. 
Dost  thou  give  any  thing?  I  do  give  something.  What 
dost  thou  give?  I  give  some  money.  Does  your  friend 
receive  books  ?  He  does  receive  some.  What  do  we  sell  ? 
We  sell  some  cider.  Do  the  Mexicans  smoke  ?  They  do 
smoke.  From  whom  (de  quien)  do  the  Spaniards  receive 
money  ?  They  receive  some  from  the  English.  Have  you 
as  many  friends  as  enemies  ?  I  have  less  of  the  latter  than 
of  the  former.  From  whom  do  your  children  receive 
books?  They  receive  some  from  me  (de  mi),  and  from 
their  friends.  Do  our  tailors  make  as  many  vests  as  coats  ? 
They  make  less  of  the  latter  than  of  the  former. 


Exercise  No.  79. 

£  Cuando  piensa  partir  el  f orastero  ?  Piensa  partir  hoy. 
I  A  que  hora  ?  A  la  una  y  media,  i  Piensa  Vd.  partir  esta 
noche?    Pienso   partir   niafiana.     ^  Parte  hoy  el  frances? 


138 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


Parte  aliora.  i  Adonde  va  el?  Ya  a  casa  de  sus  amigos. 
I  Va  el  a  casa  de  los  ingleses  ?  Va  a  su  casa.  i  Sales  tu 
nianana  ?  £  Salgo  esta  noclie  ?  ,;  Cuando  piensa  Vd.  escribir 
a  sus  auiigos  ?  Pienso  escribirles  hoy.  £  Le  contestan  a 
Vd.  sus  amigos  ?  Me  contestan.  ,;  Contesta  su  padre  de 
Vd.  a  su  billete  V  Lo  contesta.  <;  Contesta  Vd.  a  los  billetes 
de  mi  liermano  ?  Los  contesto.  <;  Empieza  su  hermano  de 
Vd.  a  aprender  el  espanol?  Empieza  a  aprenderlo.  ^  Sabe 
Vd.  hablar  el  frances  ?  Se  hablarlo  un  poco.  £  Empiezan 
nuestros  amigos  a  hablar  el  aleman  ?  Empiezan  a  hablarlo. 
£  Saben  ellos  escribirlo  ?  Saben  escribirlo.  <:  Empieza  el 
comerciante  a  vender?  Empieza.  <fHabla  Vd.  antes  de 
escuchar?  Escucho  antes  de  hablar.  <r  Le  escucha  su  her- 
mano a  Vd.  antes  de  hablar  ?  Habla  antes  de  escucharme. 
<iLeen  nuestros  ninos  antes  de  escribir?  Escriben  antes 
de  leer. 


THIRTY-SECOND  LESSON. 

COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVE3    AND    ADVERBS. 

We  have  seen  (Lessons  XIX.  and  XX.)  that  the  Compara- 
tive of  equality  is  formed  by  tanto,  or  tan  como,  otro  tanto  ; 
the  Comparative  of  superiority  by  mas  ;  and  that  of  inferior- 
ity by  menos.  As  for  the  Superlative,  it  is  formed  by 
changing  the  last  vowel  of  the  Adjective  into  isimo,  isima, 
and  into  isimamente  for  Adverbs. 


Great,  greater,  greatest. 
Illustrious,  more  illustrious,  most 

illustrious. 
Poor,  poorer,  poorest. 
Pretty,  prettier,  prettiest. 
Old,  older,  oldest. 
Excellent,    more    excellent,    most 

excellent. 

The  Relative  Superlative  is  expressed  by  el  mas,  el  menos, 
and  la  mas,  la  menos,  for  the  Adjectives  ;  lo  mas,  lo  menos, 
for  Adverbs. 


Pos.       Com.  Sup. 

Grande,  mayor,  grandisimo. 
Ilustre,  mas  ilustre,  ilustrisimo. 

Pobre,  mas  pobre,  pobrfsimo. 
Lindo,  mas  lindo,  lindisimo. 
Viejo,  mas  viejo,  viejisimo. 
Escelente,  mas  escelente,  escelen 
tisimo. 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


The  most  excellent. 

The  least  illustrious. 

This  child  is  pretty,  that  is  prettier, 

and  that  one  is  the  prettiest  of 

all. 
A  very  fine  book. 
Very  fine  books. 
A  very  pretty  knife. 


El  mas  escelente. 
El  rnenos  ilustre. 
Este  niflo  es  bonito,  aquel  es  mas 

bonito,  y  ese  es  el  mas  bonito 

de  todos. 
Un  libro  hermoslsimo. 
Libros  hermosisimos. 
Un  cuchillo  muy  bonito. 


That  man  is  extremely  old. 
This  bird  is  very  handsome. 


Ese  hombre  es  viejisimo. 
Este  pajaro  es  lindisimo. 


Muy  serves  also  to  form  the  Absolute  Superlative. 


Very  handsome. 
Very  large  or  great. 


Muy  Undo. 
Muy  grande. 


The  following  Adjectives  and  Adverbs  are  irregular  in 
the  formation  of  their  Comparatives  and  Superlatives. 


ADJECTIVES. 


Good,  better,  very  good,  best. 
Bad,  worse,  very  bad,  worst. 
Great,  greater,  very  great,  greatest. 
Small,  smaller,  very  small,  smallest. 
High,  higher,  highest. 
Low,  lower,  lowest. 


Bueno,  mejor,  optimo. 
Malo,  peor,  pe'simo. 
Grande,  mayor,  niaximo. 
Pequeiio  menor,  minimo. 
Alto,  superior,  supremo. 
Bajo,  inferior,  infimo. 


ADVEKBS. 

Bien,  mejor,  lo  mejor. 
Mai,  peor,  lo  peor. 
Poco,  me'nos,  lo  me'nos. 
Mucho,  mas,  lo  mas. 


Well,  better,  the  best. 
Bad,  worse,  the  worst. 
Little,  less,  the  least. 
Much,  more,  the  most. 

But  the  Adjectives  best,  worst  and  greatest  are  rendered  by 
mejor,  peor  and  mayor,  in  like  manner  as  better,  worse  and 
greater,  especially  in  similar  phrases,  as  the  following  :  My 
best  friend,  mi  mejor  (and  not  optimo)  amigo ;  my  worst 
enemy,  mi  peor  (and  not  pesimo)  enemigo;  my  greatest 
crime,  mi  mayor  (and  not  maximo)  crimen. 


This  hat  is  large,  but  that  is  larger.  I  Este    sombrero    es   grando,    pero 

aquel  es  mayor. 

Is  your  hat  as  large  as  mine  ?  I  £Es  su  sombrero  tan  grande  como 

el  mio? 


uo 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


It  is  larger  than  yours.  I  Es  mayor  que  el  de  Vd. 

Are  oui  neighbor's  servants  as  good    i  Son  los  criados  de  nuestro  veeino 

as  ours  ?  I      tan  buenos  como  los  nuestros  ? 

They  are  better  than  ours.  Son  mejores  que  los  nuestros. 

No  son  tan  buenos  como  los  nues- 
tros. 


They  are  not  so  good  as  ours. 
He  is  the  happiest  man. 


El  es  el  mas  feliz  de  los  hombres. 


Whose  hat  is  this  ? 
Mine. 


I  De  quien  ? 
I  ;  De  quien  es  este  sombrero  ? 
I  Mio.  (1.) 


It  is. 
It  is  my  father's. 
Who  has  the  finest  hat? 
My  father  has  the  finest. 
Which    vest    is    the    handsomest, 

yours  or  mine? 
Mine. 


Es,  ESTA. 

Es  de  mi  padre. 

I  Quie'n  tiene  el  sombrero  mas  fino  ? 

Mi  padre  tiene  el  mas  fino. 

I  Cual  chaleco  es  el  mas  lindo,  el  de 

Vd.  6  el  mio  ? 
El  mio. 


Adjectives  ending  in  ble  change  ble  into  bilisimo.     Ex. : 

Amiable,  very  amiable.  |  Amable,  amabilfsimo. 

Some  Adjectives  before  taking  isimo,  undergo  in  their 
orthography  the  changes  exhibited  in  the  following  exam- 
ples : 


Ancient,  very  ancient. 
Long,  very  long. 
Rich,  very  rich. 


Antiguo,  antiquisimo. 
Largo,  larguisimo. 
Rico,  riquisimo. 


Those  ending  in  iente  drop  the  *  before  taking  isimo. 

Courageous,  very  courageous.  |  Valiente,  valentfsimo. 

1.  The  Pronouns  mio,  suyo,  nuestro,  etc.,  answer  to  a  question  without 
the  article  when  the  question  defines  the  possessor,  as  in  the  present  in- 
stance or  any  other  simdar.  Ex. :  ,;  De  qulin  es  este  caballo  ?  Mio. 
Whose  horse  is  this  ?  Mine.  Be  quien  (whose)  declares  already  that 
the  horse  belongs  to  some  one,  and  the  answer  (mio)  mine,  ascertains  the 
person  to  whom  it  belongs.  But  should  the  question  be,  "What  horse 
is  this?"  then  we  do  not  say  that  it  belongs  to  any  one,  therefore  the  an- 
swer must  be  definite  to  ascertain  the  possessor  or  owner  of  it,  through 
the  medium  of  an  article,  so  we  must  say,  el  mio  (the  one,  mine,  or,  it 
belongs  to  me,  it  is  mine;. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  14J 

The  following  are  also  irregular  : 

Bueno,  bonisimo. 
Nuevo,  novisimo. 
Fuerte,  fortisimo. 
Cierto,  certisimo. 
Sabio,  sapientisimo. 
Sagrado,  sacratisimo. 
Fiel,  fidelisimo. 
Integro,  inteje'rrirno. 
Salubre,  salube'rrimo. 
Ce'lebre,  celebe'rrimo. 


Good,  very  good. 
New,  very  new. 
Strong,  very  strong. 
Certain,  very  certain. 
Wise,  very  wise. 
Sacred,  very  sacred. 
FaitMul,  very  faithful. 
Honest,  very  honest. 
Healthy,  very  healthy. 
Celebrated,  very  celebrated. 


.  Exekcise  No.  80. 

Whose  book  is  this  ?  It  is  mine.  Whose  hat  is  that  V 
It  is  my  father's.  Are  you  taller  (mas  alio)  than  I  ?  I  am 
taller  than  you.  Is  your  brother  as  tall  as  you  ?  He  is  as 
tall  as  I.  Is  thy  hat  as  bad  as  that  of  my  father  ?  It  is 
better,  but  not  so  black  as  his.  Are  the  clothes  of  the  Ita- 
lians as  fine  as  those  of  the  Irish  ?  They  are  finer,  but  not 
so  good.  Who  have  the  finest  gloves  ?  The  French  have 
them.  Who  has  the  finest  horses  ?  Mine  are  fine,  yours 
are  finer  than  mine  ;  but  those  of  our  friends  are  the  finest 
of  all.  Is  your  horse  as  good  as  mine  ?  It  is  good,  but 
yours  is  better,  and  that  of  the  Englishman  is  the  best  (ma- 
jor) of  all  the  horses  which  we  know  (conocemos).  Have 
you  pretty  boots  ?  I  have  very  pretty  ones,  but  my  brother 
has  prettier  than  I.  From  whom  (de  quien)  does  he  receive 
them  ?    He  receives  them  from  his  best  friend. 


Exercise  No.  81. 

Is  your  wife  as  good  as  mine  ?  She  is  better.  Does  your 
merchant  sell  good  knives?  He  sells  the  best  knives  that  I 
know.  Do  we  read  more  books  than  the  French  ?  We  read 
more  than  they  ;  but  the  English  read  more  than  we.  Hast 
thou  a  finer  garden  than  that  of  our  physician '?  I  have  a 
finer  one  than  he  (el  suyo).  Has  the  American  a  finer  stick 
than  thine  ?  He  has  a  finer  one.  Have  we  as  fine  children 
as  our  neighbors?     We  have  finer  ones.     Is  your  coat  as 


142 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


pretty  as  mine?  (la  mia,  feminine).  It  is  not  so  pretty,  but 
better  than  yours.  Do  you  depart  to-day  ?  I  do  not  depart 
to-day.  When  does  your  father  set  out  ?  He  sets  out  this 
evening  at  a  quarter  to  nine.  Which  of  these  two  children 
is  the  best  ?  The  one  who  studies  is  better  than  the  one 
who  plays.  Does  your  servant  sweep  as  well  as  (tan  Men 
como)  mine  ?  He  sweeps  better  than  yours.  Does  the  Eng- 
lishman read  as  many  bad  books  as  good  ones  ?  He  reads 
more  good  than  bad  ones. 


THIRTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


TO  BEIJEVE. 
To  PUT  ON. 

I  put  on  my  hat. 

lie  puts  on  his  gloves. 

Do  you  put  on  your  shoes  ? 

We  do  put  them  on. 

What  do  your  brothers  put  on  ? 

They  put  on  their  clothes. 

Whither  do  you  carry  me  ? 

I  conduct  you  to  my  lather. 

Do  you  go  out  ? 

I  do  go  out. 

Do  we  go  out  ? 

We  do  go  out. 

When  does  your  father  go  out  ? 

Early, 
As  early  as  you. 
He  goes  out  as  early  as  you. 

Lape. 
Too  late. 

Too  soon,  too  early. 
Too  large,  too  great. 
Too  little,  too  smalL 

Too  MUCH. 
Do  you  speak  too  much  ? 
I  do  not  speak  enough. 


Cbeer. 

Ponerse  (or  calzIrse,  speaking  oi 

shoes). 
Me  pongo  el  sombrero. 
Se  pone  los  guantes. 
;  Se  calzan  Vds.  los  zapatos  ? 
Nos  los  calzamos. 
iQae  se  ponen  sus  hermanos  de 

Vd.  ? 
Se  ponen  los  vestidos. 
£  Adonde  me  conduce  Vd.  ? 
Conduzco  a  Vd.  a  casa  de  mi  padre 
I  Sale  Vd.  ? 
Salgo. 

I  Salimos  nosotros  ? 
Salimos. 
I  Cuando  sale  su  padre  de  Yd  ? 


Temprano. 
Tan  temprano  como  Vd. 
El  sale  tan  temprano  como  Vd. 


Tarde. 
Demasiado  tarde. 
Demasiado  temprano. 
Demasiado  grande. 
Demasiado  pequefio  or  chica, 


Demasiado. 
I  Habla  Vd.  demasiado  ? 
No  hablo  bastante. 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


143 


Later  than  you. 

I  go  out  later  than  you. 

Do  you  go  to  the  theatre  as  early 

as  I? 
I  gb  earlier  than  you. 

Sooner. 
•Earlier. 
Does  your  lather  go  earlier  than  I? 

He  goes  too  early. 

Not — yet. 

Already. 
Do  you  speak  already  ? 
I  do  not  speak  yet. 
Do  you  finish  your  note  ? 
I  do  not  finish  it  yet. 
Do  you  breakfast  already  ? 
Do  you  come  to  see  me  ? 


Mas  tarde  que  Yd. 

Salgo  mas  tarde  que  Vd. 

^  Va  Vd.  al  teatro   tan   tenipran<> 

como  yo  ? 
Voy  mas  teinprano  que  Vd. 

Mas  presto,  mas  pronto. 

Mis  temprano. 
I  Va  su  padre  de  Vd.  mas  teinprano 

que  yo  ? 
El  va  demasiado  temprano. 


No — TODAvf  a  (or  au»\ 
Ya. 

jHabla  Vd.  ya? 
No  hablo  todavia. 
I  Acaba  Vd.  su  billete  ? 
No  lo  acabo  aun. 
j  Almuerza  Vd.  ya  ? 
;  Viene  Vd.  a  verme  ? 


Verbs  of  motion  always  require  the  Preposition  d,  and 
Verbs  of  rest  the  Preposition  en.     Ex.  : 

Voy  d  ver  a  mis  niSos. 
Mando  d  buscar  vino. 
Mando  d  buscar  al  me'dico. 
Voy  al  teatro. 
Estoy  en  el  jardin. 


I  go  to  see  my  children. 

I  send  for  some  wine. 

I  aia  sending  for  the  physician, 

I  am  going  to  the  theatre. 

I  stay  in  the  garden. 


But  as  we  have  seen  in  the  foregoing  lessons,  the  Infini- 
tive is  in  Spanish  sometimes  preceded  by  de,  sometimes  by 
a,  sometimes  by  para,  and  sometimes  by  que.  Jt  is  used 
without  any  of  those  Prepositions  before  it,  in  every  other 
case  not  specified  as  requiring  any  of  them.  Yet  the  Arti- 
cle el  is  placed  before  the  Infinitive  when  it  is  used  sub- 
stantively.    Ex.  : 


To  eat  too  much  Is  dangerous. 

To  speak  too  much  is  foolish. 

2b  do  good  to  those  that  have  of- 
fended us  is  a  commendable  ac- 
tion. 


EL  comer  demasiado  es  peligroso. 
El  hablar  demasiado  es  necedad. 
El  hacer  bien  d  los  que  nos  ban 
ofendido  es  una  accion  laudable. 


Exercise  No.  82. 

Do  you  put  on  another  coat  in  order  to  go  to  the  play  ? 
I  do  put  on  another.     Do  you  put  on  your  gloves  before 


144  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

you  put  on  your  shoes  ?  I  put  on  my  shoes  before  I  put  on 
my  gloves.  Does  your  brother  put  on  his  hat  instead  of 
putting  on  his  coat  ?  He  puts  on  his  coat  before  he  puts 
on  his  hat.  Do  our  children  put  on  their  boots  in  order  to 
go  to  our  friends  ?  They  put  them  on  in  order  to  go  to 
them.  What  do  our  sons  put  on  ?  They  put  on  their 
clothes  and  their  gloves.  Do  you  already  speak  Spanish  '? 
I  do  not  si:>eak  it  yet,  but  I  begin  to  learn  it.  Does  your 
father  go  out  already?  He  does  not  go  out.  At  what 
o'clock  does  he  go  out  ?  He  goes  out  at  ten  o'clock.  Does 
he  breakfast  before  he  goes  out  ?  He  breakfasts  and  writes 
his  notes  before  he  goes  out.  Does  he  go  out  earlier  than 
you  ?  I  go  out  earlier  than  he.  Do  you  go  to  the  play  as 
often  as  I  ?  I  go  thither  as  often  as  you.  Do  you  begin 
to  know  that  man  ?  I  do  begin  to  know  him.  Do  you 
breakfast  early  ?  We  do  not  breakfast  late.  Does  the 
Englishman  go  to  the  concert  earlier  than  you  ?  He  goes 
there  later  than  I.  A*  what  o'clock  does  he  go  ?  He  goes 
at  half^ast  seven. 


Exercise  No.  83. 

I  No  va  Vd.  demasiado  temprano  al  concierto  ?  yoy  de- 
niasiado  tarde.  <;  Escribo  yo  demasiado  ?  Vd.  no  escribe 
demasiado,  pero  habla  demasiado.  £  Hablo  yo  mas  que 
Vd.  ?  Vd.  habla  mas  que  yo  y  que  mi  hermano.  £  Es  mi 
sombrero  demasiado  grande  ?  No  es  ni  demasiado  grande, 
ni  demasiado  pequeno.  ,;  Habla  Vd.  el  espafiol  mas  a  me- 
nudo  que  el  ingles  ?  Hablo  el  ingles  mas  a  menudo  que  el 
espafiol.  i  Compran  sus  amigos  de  Vd.  mucho  grano  ?  No 
compran  sino  un  poco.  <;  Tiene  Vd.  bastante  pan  ?  Tengo 
un  poco  solamente,  pero  tengo  bastante.  £  Es  tarde  ?  No 
es  tarde.  ^  Que  hora  es?  Es  la  una.  <;  Es  demasiado  tarde 
para  ir  a  casa  de  su  padre  ?  Es  demasiado  tarde  para  ir  a 
su  casa.  <?Me  conduce  Vd.  a  su  casa?  Le  conduzco  a 
Vd.  a  su  casa.  <?  En  donde  esta  el  ?  Esta  en  su  escritorio. 
^Compra  el  mejicano  un  caballo?  No  puede  compmrlo. 
^Es  pobre?  No  es  pobre,  es  mas  rico  que  Vd.  ^Es  su 
hermano  de  Vd.  tan  bueno  como  Vd.  ?  Es  mejor  que  yo, 
pai'o  Vd.  es  mejor  que  el  y  que  yo. 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


145 


THIRTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


THE    PAST    PARTICIPLE. 


The  Past  Participle,  when  it  is  regular,  always  terminates  in  do.  It  is 
formed  from  the  Infinitive,  whose  termination  is,  for  the  first  conjuga- 
tion, changed  into  ado,  thus :  hablar,  hablado ;  and  for  the  second  and 
third  into  ido,  thus  :  beber,  bebido  ;  recibir,  recibido.     Examples  : 


To  speak,  spoken. 
To  buy,  bought. 
To  study,  studied. 


FIBST   CONJUGATION. 


Hablar,  hablado. 
Comprar,  comprado. 
Estudiar,  estudiado. 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


To  drink,  drunk. 

To  sell,  sold. 

To  answer,  answered. 


To  receive,  received. 
To  suffer,  suffered. 
To  unite,  united. 


Beber,  bebido. 
Vender,  vendido. 
Eesponder,  respondido. 


THIRD   CONJUGATION. 


Kecibir,  recibido. 
Sufnr,  sufrido. 
Unir,  unido. 


To  BE— BEEN. 

Have  you  been  to  market  ? 
I  have  been  there. 
I  have  not  been  there. 
Have  I  been  there  ? 
You  have  been  there. 
You  have  not  been  there. 
Has  he  been  there  ? 
He  has  been  there. 
He  has  not  been  there. 


Seb — SIDO. 
*        EsTAB— ESTADO. 

<iHa  estado  7d.  en  el  mercado? 

He  estado. 

No  he  estado. 

J  He  estado  yo  ? 

Vd.  ha  estado. 

Vd.  no  ha  estado. 

I  Ha  estado  el  ? 

El  ha  estado. 

El  no  ha  estado. 


Evee. 

Neveb. 
Have  you  been  at  the  ball  ? 
Have  you  ever  been  at  the  ball  ? 

1  have  never  been  there. 
Thou  hast  never  been  there. 
He  has  never  been  there. 


Alguna  vez. 

nunca  or  jamas — no  nunca, 
I  Ha  estado  Vd.  en  el  baile  ? 
<;Ha  estado  Vd.   alguna  vez  eu  ei 

baile? 
Nunca  he  estado. 
No  he  estado  nunca. 
Tii  nunca  has  estado. 
Tii  no  has  estado  nunca. 
El  nunca  ha  estado. 
El  no  ha  estado  nunca 


146 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHEJl. 


AlJtEADY. 

Have  you  already  been  at  the  play? 
I  have  already  been  there. 
You  bave  already  been  there. 


Ya. 

I  Ha  estado  Yd.  ya  en  el  teatro  ? 
He  estado  ya. 
Yd.  ha  estado  ya. 


INot  YET. 
I  have  not  yet  been  there. 
He  has  not  yet  been  there. 
Have  you  not  been  there  yet? 
We  have  not  yet  been  there. 
Have    you    already    been    at 

father's  ? 
I  have  not  yet  been  there. 


my 


No— ATTN,  TODAVIA. 

No  he  estado  aun. 
El  no  ha  estado  todavfa. 
,i  No  han  estado  Vds.  aun  ? 
No  hemos  estado  todavia. 
^Ha  estado  Vd.  ya  en  casa 

padre  ? 
No  he  estado  alii  todavia.. 


nu 


YVhere  have  you  been  this  morning  ? 

I  have  been  in  the  garden. 
Where  has  thy  brother  been  ? 
He  has  been  in  the  warehouse. 
Has  he  been  there  as  early  as  I  ? 

He  has  been  there  earlier  than  you. 


,;En  donde  ha  estado  Yd.  esta  ma- 

nana  ? 
He  estado  en  el  jardin. 
I  En  donde  ha  estado  tu  hermano  ? 
El  ha  estado  en  el  almacen. 
,;Ha  estado  el   alii    tan  temprano 

como  yo? 
Ha  estado  mas  temprano  que  Yd. 

The  Past  Participle  of  a  verb  is  often  used  in  ellipsis  of  the  present 
participle  of  the  auxiliaries  Ilaber  or  Ser. 


Comprada  la  casa. 
Apagado  el  fuego. 


The  house  being  bought. 
The  tire  being  extinguished. 


Exercise  No.  84 

Where  have  you  been  ?  I  have  been  at  the  market.  Have 
you  been  at  the  ball  ?  I  have  been  there.  You  have  been 
there.  Hast  thou  been  there  ?  I  have  not  been  there.  Has 
your  son  ever  been  at  the  theatre?  He  has  never  been 
there.  Hast  thou  already  been  in  my 'warehouse?  I  have 
never  been  there.  Do  you  intend  to  go  thither?  I  intend 
to  go.  When  will  you  go  ?  I  will  go  to-morrow.  At  what 
o'clock?  At  twelve  o'clock.  Has  your  brother  already 
been  in  my  garden  ?  He  has  not  been  there.  Does  he  in- 
tend to  see  it?  He  does  intend  to  see  it.  When  will  he 
go  thither?  He  will  go  to-day.  Does  he  intend  to  go  to 
the  ball  this  evening  ?  He  intends  to  go.  Have  you  alrea- 
dy been  at  the  ball?     I  have  not  yet  been  there.    When  do 


M 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  147 

yon  intend  to  go  ?  I  intend  to  go  to-morrow.  Have  yon 
already  oeen  in  the  Frenchman's  garden  ?  I  have  not  yet 
been  there.  Have  you  been  in  my  warehouses?  I  have 
been  there.  When  did  you  go  there  ?  I  went  there  this 
morning.  Have  I  been  in  your  counting-house,  or  in  that 
of  your  friend?  You  have  neither  been  in  mine  nor  in  that 
of  my  friend,  but  in  that  of  the  Englishman. 


Exercise  No.  85. 

Has  the  Italian  been  in  our  warehouses  or  in  those  of  the 
Dutch  ?  He  has  neither  been  in  ours  nor  in  those  of  the 
Dutch,  but  in  those  of  the  Germans.  Hast  thou  already 
been  at  the  market?  I  have  not  yet  been  there,  but  I  in- 
tend to  go.  Has  our  neighbor's  son  been  there?  He  has 
been.  When  has  he  been  there?  He  has  been  to-day. 
Does  the  son  of  our  gardener  intend  to  go  to  the  market? 
He  intends  to  go.  What  does  he  wish  to  buy  there  ?  He 
wishes  to  buy  some  chickens,  oxen,  corn,  wine,  cheese  and 
cider.  Have  you  already  been  at  my  brother's  ?  I  have  al- 
ready been.  Has  your  friend  already  been  there  ?  He  has 
not  yet  been.  Have  we  already  been  at  our  friend's?  We 
have  not  yet  been.  Have  our  friends  already  been  at  onr 
house  ?  They  have  never  been.  Have  you  ever  been  at  the 
theatre?  I  have  never  been.  Have  you  a  mind  to  write 
an  exercise  ?  I  have  a  mind  to  write  one.  To  whom  do 
you  wish  to  write  a  note  ?  I  wish  to  write  one  to  my  son. 
Has  your  father  been  already  at  the  concert  ?  He  has  not 
yet  been,  but  he  intends  to  go.  Does  he  intend  to  go  to- 
day? He  intends  to  go  to-morrow.  At  what  o'clock  will 
he  set  out  ?  He  will  set  out  at  half-past  six.  Does  he  in- 
tend to  leave  ( partir)  before  he  breakfasts  ?  He  intends  to 
breakfast  before  he  leaves  (antes  de  partir). 


Exercise  No.  86. 

Have  you  been  to  the  play  as  early  as  I  ?    I  have  been 
earlier  than  you.     Have  you  often  been  at  the  concert  ?     1 


148 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


have  often  been.  Has  our  neighbor  been  at  the  theatre  as 
often  as  we  ?  He  has  been  there  oftener  than  we.  Do  our 
friends  go  to  their  counting-house  too  early  ?  They  go  too 
late.  Do  they  go  thither  as  late  as  we  ?  They  go  later 
than  we.  Do  the  English  go  to  their  warehouses  too  early? 
They  go  too  early.  Is  your  friend  as  often  in  the  counting- 
house  as  you  ?  He  is  there  oftener  than  I.  What  does  he 
do  there  ?  He  writes.  Does  he  write  as  much  as  you  ?  He 
writes  more  than  I.  Where  does  your  friend  remain  ?  He 
remains  in  his  counting-house.  Does  he  not  go  out?  He 
does  not  go  out.  Do  you  remain  in  the  garden  ?  I  remain 
there.  Do  you  go  to  your  friend  every  day  ?  I  go  to  him 
every  day.  When  does  he  come  to  you  ?  He  comes  to  me 
every  morning.  Do  you  go  any  where  in  the  evening?  I 
go  nowhere,  I  stay  at  home.  Do  you  send  for  any  one  ?  I 
send  for  my  physician.  Does  your  servant  go  for  any  thing? 
He  goes  for  some  wine.  Have  you  been  anywhere  this 
morning?  I  have  been  nowhere.  Where  has  your  father 
been  ?  He  has  been  nowhere.  When  do  you  drink  tea  ? 
I  drink  some  every  morning.  Does  your  son  drink  coffee  ? 
No,  Sir,  he  only  drinks  chocolate. 


THIRTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 


Every  Past  Participle  that  does  not  terminate  in  ado  or 
ido  is  called  irregular;  such  are  the  following,  from  the 
Verbs  : 


Abbib. 

Cubrir. 

Descubrir. 

Encubrir. 

Absolves. 

Desenvolver. 

Disolver. 

Euvolver. 

Resolver. 

Revolver. 

Volver. 

Devolver  (*). 


To  open. 
To  cover. 
To  discover. 
To  conceal. 
To  absolve. 
To  unroll. 
To  dissolve. 
To  wrap. 
To  resolve. 
To  revolve. 
To  return. 
To  give  back. 
To  return. 


Pabt. 

Abieeto. 

Cubierto. 

Descubierto. 

Encubierto. 

Absuelto. 

Desenvuelto. 

Disuelto. 

Envuelto. 

Resuelto. 

Revuelto. 

Vuelto. 

Devuelto 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


149 


Decib. 

Contradecir, 

Desdecir. 

Predecir. 

Esckibib. 

Iuscribir. 

Prescribir. 

Proscribir.         * 

Haceb. 

Contrahacer. 

Deshacer. 

Rehacer. 

Satisfacer. 

Impkimib. 

Mobib. 

PoNEB. 

Anteponer. 

Componer. 

Deponer. 

Descomponer. 

Disponer* 

Esponer. 

Imp  oner. 

Indisponer. 

Oponer. 

Preponer. 

Presuponer. 

Propouer. 

Reponer. 

Sobreponer. 

Suponer. 

Trasponer. 

Veb. 

Prever. 

Rever. 

There  are  also  some  Verbs  which  have  two  Past  Participles,  the  one 
regular  and  the  other  irregular.  The  first  is  always  employed  with  the 
Auxiliary  Verb  haber,  to  have  ;  the  second  is  never  joined  to  it,  but  fol- 
lows the  rule  of  Adjectives ;  as  61  estd  despierto,  sin  que  le  hayan  desper* 
lado,  he  is  awaked  without  any  person's  having  awaked  him.  But  preso 
seized,  provisto  provided,  and  roto  broken,  are  oftener  used  with  the 
Auxiliary  haber  than  the  Regular  Participle. 

*  Volver  is*  used  when  it  relates  to  persons,  and  devolver  relating  t<? 
things  ;  as,  to  return  a  book,  devolver  un  llbro. 
t  As  a  Noun  it  means  an  exile. 


To  say. 

DlCHO. 

To  contradict. 

Contradicha 

To  give  the  he. 

Desdicho. 

To  predict. 

Predicho. 

To  write. 

Escbito. 

To  inscribe. 

Inscrito. 

To  prescribe. 

Prescrito. 

To  proscribe.              j 
To  banish.                   j 

Proscrito  (f). 

To  make,  to  do. 

Hecho. 

To  counterfeit 

Contrahecho. 

To  undo. 

Deshecho. 

To  do  over  again. 

Rehecho. 

To  satisfy. 

Satisfecho. 

To  print. 

Impbeso. 

To  die. 

Muerto. 

To  place.                     ( 
To  put.                         J 

PUESTO. 

To,  prefer. 

Antepuesto. 

To  compose. 

Compuesto. 

To  depose. 

Depuesto. 

To  discompose. 

Descompuesto 

To  dispose. 

Dispuesto. 

To  expose. 

Espuesto. 

To  impose.                   ) 
To  inform.                   j 

Impuesto. 

To  indispose. 

Indispuesto. 

To  oppose. 

Opuesto. 

To  place  first. 

Prepuesto. 

To  presuppose. 

Presupuesto. 

To  propose. 

Propuesto . 

To  replace. 

Repuesto. 

To  place  over. 

Sobrepuesto. 

To  suppose. 

Supuesto. 

To  transpose. 

Traspuesto. 

To  see. 

VlSTO. 

To  foresee. 

Previsto. 

To  review. 

Revisto. 

150 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Infinitive. 

Pakt.  eeg. 

Part,  iebeo. 

Ahitarse. 

To  surfeit. 

Ahitado. 

Ahito. 

Bendecir. 

To  bless. 

Bendecido. 

Bendito. 

tfienquerer. 

To  esteem. 

Bienquerido. 

Bienquisto. 

■Oircuncidar. 

To  circumcise. 

Circnncidado. 

Circunciso. 

Compeler. 

To  compel. 

Compelido. 

Compulso. 

Completar. 

To  complete. 

Completado. 

Completo. 

Concluir 

To  conclude. 

Concluido. 

Concluso  (1). 

Confesai. 

To  confess. 

Confesado. 

Confeso  (2). 

Confundir.        -j 

To  confound     j 
To  confuse.       j 

Confundido. 

Confuso. 

Consumir. 

To  consume. 

Consumido. 

Consunto. 

Contentar. 

To  content. 

Contentado. 

Contento  (3). 

Contundir. 

To  bruise. 

Contundido. 

Contuse 

Oonvencer. 

To  convince. 

Convencido. 

Convicto. 

Correjir. 

To  correct. 

Correjido. 

Correcto. 

Corroniper. 

To  corrupt. 

Corrompido. 

Corrupto.     . 

Desertar. 

To  desert. 

Desertado. 

Desierto  (4). 

Despertar. 

To  awake. 

Despertado. 

DespieHo. 

Desquitarse. 

To  retrieve. 

Desquitado. 

Desquito. 

Difundir. 

To  diffuse. 

Difundido. 

Difuso . 

Dispersar. 

To  scatter. 

Dispersado. 

Disperse 

Dividir. 

To  divide. 

Dividido. 

Diviso. 

Elejir. 

To  elect. 

Elejido. 

Electo. 

Enjugar. 

To  wipe. 

Enjugado. 

Enjuto. 

Erijir. 

To  erect. 

Erijido. 

Erecto. 

Escluir. 

To  exclude. 

Escluido. 

Escluso. 

Espeler. 

To  expel. 

Espelido. 

Esj^ulso. 

Espresar. 

To  express. 

Espresado. 

Espreso. 

Esiinir. 

To  exempt. 

Eximido. 

Exento. 

Fechar. 

To  date. 

Fechado. 

Fecho. 

Fijar. 

To  fix. 

Fijado. 

Fijo. 

Freir. 

To  fry. 

Freido. 

Frito 

Hartar. 

To  satiate. 

Hartado. 

Harto. 

Incluir.             ) 

To  include.       ) 
To  inclose.        j 

Incluido. 

Incluso. 

Incurrir. 

To  incur. 

Incurrido. 

Incurso. 

Infectar. 
Inficionar. 

To  infect.          1 

Infectado.           ( 
Inricionado.       ) 

Infecto. 

Injerir. 
Injertar. 

To  ingraft.        > 

Injerido.             ) 
Injertado.           j 

Injerto. 

1.  Bar  una  causa  6  pleito  per  concluso — To  consider  a  suit  ready  to 
pass  sentence  upon. 

2.  Convicto  y  confeso— Found  and  plead  guilty. 

3.  Contento,  as  a  Noun,  means  contentment.  + 

4.  Desierto,  as  a  Noun,  means  desert. 


PRACTICAL"  EXERCISES. 


151 


Invertir. 

To  invert. 

Invertido. 

Inverso. 

Juntar. 

To  join. 

Juntado. 

Junto. 

Maldecir. 

To  curse. 

maldecido. 

Maldito. 

Malquitarse 

To  get  bated, 

malquistado. 

Malquisto. 

Manifesfcar.        >• 

To  sbow.           ) 
To  manifest.      ) 

Manifestado.     (■ 
) 

Manifiesto  (1) 

Manumitir. 

To  manumit. 

Manumitido. 

Manumiso. 

Marcbitar. 

To  witber. 

Marchitado. 

Marobito. 

Ocultar. 

To  bide. 

Ocultado. 

Oculto. 

Oniitir. 

To  omit. 

Omitido . 

Omiso. 

Oprimir. 

To  oppress. 

Oprimido. 

Opreso. 

Pagar. 

To  pay. 

Pagado. 

Pago  (famil.) 

Prender. 

To  seize. 

Prendido. 

Preso. 

Proveer. 

To  provide. 

Proveido. 

Provisto. 

Ranciarse. 

To  grow  rancid. 

Ranciado. 

Rancio. 

Repletar. 

To  stuff. 

Repletado. 

Repleto. 

Recluir. 

To  sbut  up. 

Recluido. 

Recluso. 

Respouder. 

To  answer. 

Respondido. 

Respuesto. 

Rizar. 

To  curl. 

Rizado. 

Rizo. 

Romper. 

To  break. 

Rompido. 

Roto. 

Salvar. 

To  save. 

Salvado. 

Salvo. 

Situar. 

To  locate. 

Situado. 

Sito. 

Soltar.                | 

To  loosen.         ) 
To  release.         J 

Soltado.             i 

Suelto. 

Sujetar. 

To  subdue. 

Sujetado 

Sujeto. 

Suprimir. 

To  suppress. 

Suprimido. 

Supreso. 

Surjir. 

To  anchor. 

Surjido. 

Surto. 

Suspender. 

To  suspend. 

Suspendido. 

Suspense 

Torcer. 

To  twist. 

Torcido. 

Tuerto. 

Zafar. 

To  escape. 

Zafado. 

Zafo. 

1.  Manijiesto,  ai 

3  a  Noun,  means  r 

nanifest. 

Exercise  No.  87. 

Is  he  a  soldier?  (*)  No,  but  he  has  been.  Am  I  not 
your  friend  ?  No,  Sir  ;  you  have  been,  but  you  are  no 
longer  (ya).  Is  he  young?  Yes,  Sir,  he  is.  Is  she  pretty  ? 
No,  Sir,  she  is  ugly  and  old.  Is  this  a  gold  pen  ?  It  is  not 
of  gold,  but  of  silver.     Are  you  well?    No,  Sir,  I  am  not 

*  The  scbolar  will  bear  in  mind  tbat  Ser  affirms  what  a  person  or 
thing  is  ;  and  Eslar  indicates  how  or  where  it  is.     Examples  : 

What  is  that  man  ?  Que  es  ese  hombre  ?  He  is  a  physician,  a  saiioJ, 
a  lawyer,  a  democrat,  a  friend  or  neighbor  of  mine,  a  young  man,  a 
handsome  man,  a  negro,  etc.  Es  medico,  marinero,  abogado,  democrat^ 
mi  amigo,  6  mi  vecino,  joven,  hermoso,  negro. 


152  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

very  well.  Is  lie  an  honest  man  ?  I  believe  lie  is.  Is  he 
sad  ?  No,  Sir,  he  is  very  happy  (contenlo).  Where  is  he  ? 
He  is  here.  Has  your  sister  been  in  the  garden  ?  She  has 
not.  If  the  general  has  been  victorious,  he  shall  be  praised 
and  rewarded  ;  but  if  he  has  been  beaten  (derrotado),  he 
ehall  bo  blamed,  and  perhaps  also  (acaso  tambien)  punished. 


Exercise  No.  88. 

Is  the  door  opened  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  opened  it.  Are 
the  letters  opened?  No,  Sir,  nobody  has  opened  them. 
Have  you  covered  the  basket  ?  It  is  covered.  Have  you 
found  out  any  thing?  All  has  been  found  out.  Is  the 
packet  unrolled  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  have  unrolled  it.  Have  you 
dissolved  the  salt  (la  sal)  in  water  ?  It  is  already  dissolved. 
Has  the  Assembly  (Asamblea)  been  dissolved  ?  Not  yet. 
Have  you  wrapped  up  all  the  papers  ?  They  are  all  ready. 
What  have  you  resolved  on  that  subject  (sobre  aquel  asunto)  ? 
I  have  not  yet  resolved  upon  any  thing.  Has  she  returned  ? 
She  has  not.  Have  you  told  him  any  thing  ?  I  have  not 
seen  him.  Have  you  contradicted  him?  Has  he  (se  ha) 
given  the  lie  ?  He  has  not.  Had  (habia)  any  body  predict- 
ed to  you  your  fate  (suerte)  ?  Nobody  had.  How  many 
letters  have  you  already  written  ?  I  have  not  written  any 
yet.  What  has  the  physician  prescribed  for  the  sick  ?  He 
has  prescribed  nothing  yet.  Has  your  friend  been  banish- 
ed? Yes,  Sir,  he  is  already  an  exile.  What  have  you 
done  ?  I  have  done  nothing.  Where  is  the  carpenter  who 
made  that  table?  He  is  dead,  and  must  be  now  in  the 
other  world.      Are  you  satisfied  ?     Have  you  ever  seen  a 

How  is  he?  Como  estd?  He  is  sick,  sad,  seated,  laid  down.  Esla 
malo  (or  enfcrmo),  triste,  sentado,  acostado. 

Where  is  he  ?  En  donde  estd  ?  He  is  here,  at  home,  out,  up  stairs,  in 
his  room,  in  Europe,  etc.  Enid  aqui,  en  casa,  fuera,  arriba,  en  su  cuarto, 
en  Europa. 

Finally,  when  the  verb  to  be  is  used  in  English  speaking  of  any 
thing  that  has  happened,  or  will  at  any  time  happen,  it  is  rendered  m 
Spanish  by  Ser ;  as,  he  has  been,  or  shall  be  punished,  blamed,  reward- 
ed, applauded,  praised,  etc.  Ha  sido  6  sera  casligado,  culpado,  reoom- 
pensado,  aplaudido,  alabado,  etc. 


%. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  15? 


book  better  printed  than  this  ?  It  is  very  well  printed 
Who  has  placed  that  picture  there?  Who  has  put  this 
(thing)  (esto)  here?     I  have  (Yo,  or  yo  lo  he puesto). 


Exercise  No.  89. 

Blessed  be  (sea)  the  Lord  !  Unfortunate  is  he  who  (Des- 
graciado  de  aquel  que)  has  never  blessed  Him !  Have  you 
completed  your  Dictionary?  Yes,  Sir,  it  is  completed. 
Have  you  awaked  your  brother  ?  He  was  (edaba)  awaked 
a  long  time  ago  (hacia  mucho  tiempo).  Why  (For  que)  are 
these  birds  scattered?  Because  (porque)  the  children 
have  scattered  them.  Who  has  elected  your  friend  ?  He 
has  been  elected  by  the  people.  Is  the  meaning  of  the  law 
well  expressed  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  think  (creo  que)  the  body  who 
have  passed  it  has  expressed  it  weJl.  The  cook  has  fried 
the  eggs  (huevon),  thinking  that  you  liked  them  fried. 
Have  you  included  in  the  bill  (cuenla)  all  that  I  owe  you  ? 
Yes,  Sir,  it  is  all  included.  Is  your  advertisement  inserted? 
The  printer  (impi'eso?-)  has  not  inserted  it  yet.  All  the 
flowers  (lasjiores)  of  the  garden  are  withered  ;  the  sun  has 
been  too  hot  (muy  fuerte)  to-day,  and  it  has  withered 
them.  Have  you  ever  hid  any  thing  ?  I  have  never  hid 
anything.  A  thief  has  been- seized.  Who  has  seized  him? 
Have  you  provided  your  friend  with  letters  ?  He  is  well 
provided.     Is  that  chair  broken  ?     Who  has  broken  it  ? 


Exercise  No.  90. 

The  door  is  open,  because  the  servant  has  opened  it.  He 
is  covered  with  wounds  (de  heridas).  He  has  discovered 
every  thing  (todo).  He  has  concealed  all  his  crimes  (cri- 
menes).  He  has  unrolled  the  map  (el  mapa).  The  meeting 
is  dissolved.  The  pamphlet  (folleto)  is  wrapped.  He  is 
resolved  to  marry  (a  casarse).  She  has  returned.  He  has 
said  the  truth.  He  has  contradicted  himself.  He  has  pre- 
dicted it.  I  have  written  the  letter.  He  has  inscribed  his 
name.  He  has  prescribed  for  the  sick.  He  is  proscribed. 
Ho  has  made  all  his  efforts.     This  letter  is  counterfeited 


154 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


It  is  undone.  Ifc  is  done  over  again.  I  am  satisfied.  She 
is  dead.  He  has  died.  He  has  placed  it  here.  She  has 
composed  it.  It  is  discomposed.  It  is  well  disposed.  It 
is  exposed.  It  is  imposed.  She  is  indisposed.  He  is  op- 
posed to  that  (a  eso).  I  have  proposed  that.  She  lias  re- 
placed it.  He  has  supposed  that.  He  has  transposed  it. 
She  has  seen  that.  I  have  foreseen  it.  It  is  already  printed. 


Exercise  No.  91. 

The  soup  (sopa)  is  warm,  because  the  cook  (fern,)  has 
warmed  it.  The  book  is  completed,  because  the  author 
has  completed  it.  The  man  is  confused,  because  his  friend 
has  confounded  him.  The  boy  is  contented,  because  you 
have  pleased  him.  The  criminal  is  convicted,  because  the 
jury  has  convicted  him.  The  exercise  is  corrected,  because 
you  have  corrected  it.  The  youth  is  corrupted,  because 
bad  company  has  corrupted  him.  The  house  is  deserted, 
because  the  people  have  deserted  it.  The  child  is  undress- 
ed, because  the  nurse  (la  nodriza)  has  undressed  him.  He 
is  awaked,  because  somebody  has  awaked  him. 


THIKTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 


To  HAVE  HAD. 

Have  you  had  my  book  ? 
I  have  not  had  it. 
Have  you  had  the  books  ? 
I  have  had  them. 
I  have  not  had  them. 
Have  I  had  them  ? 
You  have  had  them. 
You  have  not  had  them. 
Has  he  had  them  ? 
He  has  had  them. 
He  has  not  had  them. 

What  has  he  had  ? 

What  has  been  the  matter  with 

him? 
He  has  had  nothing. 
Nothing    has    been    tbe  matter 

with  him. 


Habek  habido  or  Haber  TENIDa 
I  Ha  tenido  Vd.  mi  libro  ? 
No  lo  he  tenido. 
I  Ha  tenido  Vd.  los  libros  ? 
Los  he  tenido. 
No  los  he  tenido. 
;  Los  he  tenido  yo? 
Vd.  los  ha  tenido. 
Vd.  no  los  ha  tenido. 
I  Los  ha  tenido  el  ? 
Los  ha  tenido. 
No  los  ha  tenido. 


t  i  Que*  ha  tenido  el  ? 
f  No  ha  tenido  nada. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


155 


Have  you  been  hungry  ? 

I  have  been  afraid. 

He  has  never  been  right 


TO  TAKE  PLACE. 


Does  the  ball  take  place  this  even- 
ing? 
tt  does  take  place. 
£t  takes  place  this  evening, 
[t  does  not  take  place  to-day. 
When  did  the  ball  take  place  ? 

Et  took  place  yesterday. 


Yestebday. 

the  dat  before  yestebday. 
How  many  times  ?  (how  often  ?) 
Once. 
Twice. 

Thrice  (three  times). 
Many  times. 
JBeveral  times. 


t  i  Ha  tenido  Vd.  hambre  ? 

f  He  tenido  miedo. 

t  El  nunca  ha  tenido  razon. 


f  Teneb  eeecto. 

t  Celebbaese  or  dabse. 

f  i  Se  da  or  se  celebra  el  baile  esta 

noche  ? 
f  Se  da  or  se  celebra. 
t  Se  da  or  se  celebra  esta  noche. 
f  No  se  da  or  no  se  celebra  hoy. 
t  i  Cuando  se  dio  or  se  celebro  el 

baile  ? 
f  Se  dio  or  se  celebro  ayer. 


Ayeb. 

Anteayeb  or  Antes  de  ayeb. 
I  Cuantas  vezes  ? 
Una  vez. 
Dos  vezes. 
Tres  vezes. 
Muchas  vezes. 
Varias  vezes. 


fobmerly. 

Sometimes. 
Do  you  go  sometimes  to  the  thea- 
tre? 
I  go  sometimes. 

Have  you  gone  thither  sometimes? 
Have  you  gone  thither  often  ? 
Oftener  than  you. 
Have  the  men  had  my  trunk  ? 
They  have  not  had  it. 
Who  has  had  it? 
Nobody  has  had  it. 
Somebody  has  had  it. 
Have  they  had  my  knives  ? 
They  have  not  had  them. 


Have  I  been  right  in  buying  books? 

You    have   been  right  in  buying 

some. 
The  work. 
The  silver. 


En  oteo  teempo — Anttguamente. 
Algunas  vezes. 
^Va  Vd.  algunas  vezes  al  teatro? 

Voy  algunas  vezes. 

,iHa  ido  Vd.  alia  algunas  vezes? 

j  Ha  ido  Vd.  alia  a  menudo  ? 

Mas  a  menudo  que  Vd. 

I  Han  tenido  los  hombres  mi  baul  ? 

No  lo  han  tenido. 

I  Quie'n  lo  ha  tenido  ? 

Nadie  lo  ha  tenido. 

Alguien  lo  ha  tenido. 

I  Han  tenido  ellos  mis  cuchillos  ? 

No  los  han  tenido. 


,;He  tenido  yo  razon  de  or  hechs 

bien  en  comprar  libros  ? 
Vd.  ha  tenido  razon  de  or  hecho 

bien  en  comprar. 
La  obra. 
La  plata. 


156  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Haber  is  employed  as  an  auxiliary  verb,  and  consequently  is  generally 
used  before  a  Past  Participle.  Ex.  :  He  dicho.  I  have  saia.  Tenet 
meaning  to  have,  to  hold,  ty  possess,  is  generally  used  as  an  active  verb. 
Ex. :  He  dicho  que  tengo  un  hijo.     I  have  said  that  I  have  a  son. 

.The  Past  Participle  of  Haber  (habido),  is  only  used  impersonally,  and 
it  is  rendered  in  English  by  that  of  the  verb  to  be.  Ex. :  Ha  habido  un 
rumor,  There  has  been  a  rumor  ;  Ha  habido  un  fuego  en  la  ciudad, 
There  has  been  a  fire  in  the  city  ;  Ha  habido  un  baile,  There  has  been  a 
ball. 

Haber  is  also  used  impersonally  in  any  tense.  Ex. :  If  there  should  be 
any  thing,  I  will  tell  you,  Si  hubiese  algo  se  lo  dire"  a  Vd. 


Exercise  No.  92. 

Have  you  had  my  pocket-book  ?  I  have  had  it.  Have 
you  had  my  glove  ?  I  have  not  had  it.  Hast  thou  had  my 
umbrella?  I  have  not  had  it.  Have  I  had  your  knife? 
You  have  had  it.  When  have  you  had  it  ?  You  have  had 
it  yesterday.  Have  I  had  your  gloves?  You  have  had 
them.  Has  your  brother  had  my  hammer  ?  He  has  had  it. 
Has  he  had  my  golden  ribbon?  He  has  not  had  it.  Have 
the  English  had  my  beautiful  ship  ?  They  have  had  it. 
Who  has  had  my  handkerchiefs  ?  Your  servants  have  had 
them.  Have  we  had  the  iron  trunk  of  our  good  neighbor  ? 
We  have  had  it.  Have  we  had  his  fine  gun  ?  We  have  not 
had  it.  Have  we  had  the  mattresses  of  the  foreigners?  We 
have  not  had  them.  Has  the  American  had  my  good  book? 
He  has  had  it.  Has  he  had  my  silver  knife  ?  He  has  not 
had  it.  Has  the  young  man  had  the  first  volume  of  my 
work?  He  has  not  had  the  first,  but  the  second.  Has  he 
had  it  ?  Yes,  Sir,  he  has  had  it.  When  has  he  had  it  ?  He 
has  had  it  this  morning.  Have  you  had  any  sugar?  I  have 
had  some.  Have  I  had  any  paper  ?  You  have  not  had  any. 
Has  the  cook  of  the  Russian  captain  had  any  chickens?  Hq 
has  not  had  any. 


Exercise  No.  93. 

Has  the  Frenchman  had  good  wine  ?  He  has  had  some, 
and  he  has  still  (awn)  some.  Hast  thou  had  large  books? 
I  have  had  some.     Has  thy  brother  had  any  ?     He  has  not 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISER.  157 

had  any.  Has  the  son  of  our  gardener  bad  any  butter  ? 
He  lias  had  some.  Have  the  Poles  had  good  tobacco  ? 
They  have  had  some.  What  tobacco  have  they  had?  They 
have  had  tobacco  and  snuff.  Have  the  English  had  as 
touch  sugar  as  tea  ?  They  have  had  as  much  of  the  one,  as 
jf  the  other.  Has  the  physician  been  right  ?  He  has  not 
been  right.  Have  the  Mexicans  been  right  or  wrong  ?  They 
have  never  been  right.  Have  I  been  right  in  buying  honey? 
You  have  been  right  in  buying  some.  What  has  the  paint- 
er had  ?  He  has  had  fine  pictures.  Has  he  had  fine  gar- 
dens ?  He  has  not  had  any.  Has  your  servant  had  my 
shoes?  He  has  not  had  tbem.  What  has  the  Spaniard 
had  ?  He  has  had  nothing.  Who  has  had  courage  ?  The 
English  sailors  have  had  some.  Have  the  Germans  had 
many  friends  ?  They  have  had  many.  Have  we  had  more 
friends  than  enemies  ?  We  have  had  more  of  the  latter  than 
of  the  former.  Has  your  son  had  more  wine  than  cider  ? 
He  has  had  more  wine  than  cider.  Has  the  Turk  had  more 
hay  than  corn  ?  He  has  had  less  of  the  latter  than  of  the 
former.  Has  the  Italian  painter  had  any  thing  ?  He  has 
had  nothing. 


Exercise  No.  94. 

Have  I  been  right  in  writing  to  my  brother  ?  You  have 
been  right  in  writing  to  him.  Have  you  had  a  sore  foot  ? 
I  have  had  a  sore  eye.  Have  you  had  any  thing  ?  I  have 
had  nothing.  Did  the  ball  take  place  yesterday  ?  It  did 
not  take  place.  Does  it  take  place  to-day  ?  It  takes  place 
to-morrow.  When  does  the  ball  take  place  ?  It  takes  place 
this  evening.  Did  it  take  place  the  day  before  yesterday  ? 
It  did  take  place.  At  what  o'clock  did  it  take  place  ?  It- 
took  place  at  eleven  o'clock.  Did  you  go  {ha  extado  Vd.)  to 
my  brother's?  I  went  thither  (he  estado).  How  many 
times  have  you  been  at  my  friend's  ?  I  have  been  twice. 
Do  you  go  sometimes  to  the  theatre  ?  I  go  sometimes. 
How  many  times  have  you  been  at  the  theatre  ?  I  have 
been  but  once.  Have  you  sometimes  been  at  the  ball  ?  I 
have  often  been.     Has  your  brother  ever  gone  to  the  ball? 


158  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

He  has  never  gone.  Has  lie  gone  there  as  often  as  you  ? 
He  has  gone  oftener  than  I.  Dost  thou  go  sometimes  into 
the  garden  ?  I  go  sometimes.  Hast  thou  often  been  there  ? 
I  have  often  been  there.  Does  your  old  cook  often  go  to 
the  market  ?  He  goes  there  often.  Does  he  go  there  as 
often  as  my  gardener  ?  He  goes  oftener  than  he.  Did  that 
take  place  ?  It  did  take  place.  When  did  it  take  place  ? 
I  do  not  know. 


Exercise  No.  95. 

When  have  you  been  at  the  concert  ?  I  was  there  the 
day  before  yesterday.  Did  he  find  any  body  there  ?  He 
found  nobody  there.  Hast  thou  gone  to  the  ball  oftener 
than  thy  brothers  ?  I  have  not  gone  thither  oftener  than 
they.  Has  your  friend  often  been  at  the  play  ?  He  has 
been  there  several  times.  Have  you  sometimes  been  hun- 
gry? I  have  often  been  hungry.  Has  your  valet  often 
been  thirsty  ?  He  has  never  been  either  hungry  or  thirsty. 
Did  yon  go  to  the  play  early  ?  I  went  late.  Did  I  go  to 
the  ball  as  early  as  you  ?  You  went  earlier  than  I.  Did 
your  brother  go  there  too  late  ?  He  went  there  too  early. 
Have  your  brothers  had  any  thing?  They  have  had  no- 
thing. Who  has  had  my  stick  and  my  gloves  ?  Your  ser- 
vant has  had  both.  Has  he  had  my  hat  and  my  gun  ?  He 
has  had  both.  Hast  thou  had  my  horse  and  my  brother's  ? 
I  have  had  neither  yours  nor  your  brother's.  Have  I  had 
your  note  or  the  physician's  ?  You  have  had  neither  the 
one  nor  the  other.  What  has  the  physician  had?  He  has 
had  nothing.  Has  any  body  had  my  gold  candlestick  ?  No- 
body has  had  it.  Has  any  one  had  my  silver  knives  ?  No 
one  has  had  them. 


THIRTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 

THE   PAST  INDEFINITE. 

This  tense  is  formed  as  the  Perfect  tense  in  English,  viz.  :  from  the 
Present  of  the  auxiliai  y  and  the  Past  Participle  of  the  verb  you  conju- 
gate.    Examples : 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


159 


I  have  studied  this  morning. 

I  studied  yesterday. 

I  studied  last  month. 

I  have  studied  this  month. 

Last  month. 

Last  year. 

Last  week. 


He  estudiado  esta  manana. 

He  estudiado  ayer. 

He  estudiado  el  mes  pasado. 

He  estudiado  este  mes. 

El  mes  pasado. 

El  alio  pasado. 

La  semana  pasada. 


To  MAKE,  TO  DO— MADE,  DONE. 

What  have  you  done  ? 
I  have  done  nothing. 


Haceb* — HECHO. 
J  Que*  ha  hecho  Vd.  ? 
No  he  hecho  nada. 


Has  the  shoemaker  made  my  boots? 
He  lias  made  them. 
He  has  not  made  them. 


I  Ha  hecho  el  zapatero  mis  botas  * 
Las  ha  hecho. 
No  las  ha  hecho. 


To  put — PUT. 

To  PUT  ON — PUT  ON. 

Have  you  put  on  your  coat? 
I  have  put  it  on. 
Have  you  put  on  your  shoes  ? 
I  have  put  them  on. 

To  TAKE  OFF,  TAKEN  OFF. 

Have  you  taken  off  your  gloves  ? 
I  have  taken  them  off. 


To  TELIi,  TO  SAY — TOLD,  SAID. 

Ha^  you  said  the  words  ? 
I  nave  said  them. 
Have  you  told  me  the  word? 
I  have  told  you  the  word. 
I  have  told  it  to  you. 

That,  that  thing. 

This,  this  thing. 
Has  he  told  you  that? 
He  has  told  me  that. 
Have  I  told  you  that  ? 
You  have  told  me  that. 


It. 
Have  you  t  >ld  it  to  me  ? 


PONEK* — PUESTO. 
PONERSE — PUESTO,  OT  CALZARSE- 

calzado  (speaking  of  shoes). 
I  Se  ha  puesto  Vd.  ia  casaca  ? 
Me  la  he  puesto. 
I  Se  ha  calzado  Vd.  los  zapatos  ? 
Me  los  he  calzado. 


QUITARSE,  QUITADO. 

I  Se  ha  quitado  Vd.  los  guantes  ? 
Me  los  he  quitado. 


Decir* — dicho. 
j  Ha  dicho  Vd.  las  palabras  ? 
Las  he  dicho. 

I  Me  ha  dichc  Vd.  la  palabra  ? 
He  dicho  a  Vd.  la  palabra. 
Se  la  he  dicho  a  Vd. 


Aquello,  eso. 

Esto. 
I  Le  ha  dicho  a  Vd.  eso  ? 
Me  ha  dicho  eso. 
I  He  dicho  a  Vd.  eso  ? 
Vd.  me  ha  dicho  eso. 


Lo — LA. 
I  Me  loiia  dicho  Vd.  ? 


160 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHEE. 


The  Pronouns  me  lo  (it  to  me),  se  lo  (it  to  him,  to  her, 
to  you),  are  used  separate  before  the  verb,  except  when  the 
verb  is  in  the  Infinitive,  Present  participle  or  Imperative, 
in  which  case  they  are  placed  after  the  verb  an<*  joined  to 
it. 


1  imagine  it. 
I  promised  it  to  you. 
I  may  assure  it  to  him. 
Can  you  promise  it  to  me  ? 
I  have  told  it  to  you. 
I  have  not  told  it  to  you. 
Has  he  told  it  to  you  1 
He  has  told  it  to  me. 
He  has  not  told  it  to  me. 
Have  you  told  him  that? 
I  have  told  it  to  him. 


Me  lo  figuro. 

Se  Zo.prometo  a  Vd. 

Puedo  asegurarsefo. 

I  Puede  Vd.  promete'r?n  to  ? 

Se  lo  he  dicho  a  Vd. 

No  se  lo  he  dicho  a  V<? 

I  Se  lo  ha  dicho  a  Vd.  ? 

Me  lo  ha  dicho. 

No  me  lo  ha  dicho. 

I  Le  ha  dicho  Vd.  eso ) 

tie  lo  he  dicho. 


Have  you  spoken  to  the  men  ? 
I  have  spoken  to  them. 
To  whom  do  you  speak  ? 


^Ha  hablado  Vd.  a  los  Ombres? 

Les  he  hablado. 

,;  A  qui  en  habla  Vd.  ? 


Are  you  the  brother  of  my  friend  ?    |  i  Es  Vd,  el  hermano  de  -"li  amigo  ? 

The  Pronoun  lo,  rendered  in  English  by  so,  and  more  elegar'l  '  omit- 
ted, may  in  Spanish  relate  to  a  substantive,  an  adjective,  or  ».ven  a 
whole  sentence.     It  alters  neither  gender  nor  number. 


Are  you  rich  ? 

I  am. 

I  am  not. 

Is  he  a  lawyer  ? 

He  is. 

He  is  not. 

Are   your    neighbors  as    poor  as 

they  say? 
They  are  so. 


jEs  Vd.  rico? 

Si,  Senor  (lo  soy). 

No,  Senor  (no  lo  soy). 

,iEs  (el)  abogado? 

Si,  Senor  (lo  es). 

No,  Senor  (no  lo  es). 

I  Son  sus  vecinos  de  Vd.  tan  f^^oi 

como  dicen  ? 
Si,  Senor  (lo  son). 


The  letter. 

To  WRITE,  WRITTEN. 

Which  letters  have  you  written  ? 

I  have  written  these. 

Which  words  has  he  written  ? 

He  has  written  these  which  you  see. 


La  carta. 

escribir,  escrito. 
I  Cuales  cartas  ha  escrito  Vd.  1 
He  escrito  estas. 
I  Cuales  palabras  ha  escrito  el1 
Ha  escrito  esas  que  Vd.  ve. 


PRACTICAL   EXEECISES. 


161 


To  DRINK,  DRUNK. 
TO  SEE,  SEEN. 

To  read,  read  (past  part). 
Which  men  have  you  seen  ? 
I  have  seen  those. 
Which  books  have  you  read  ? 
I  have  read  those  which  you  have 

lent  me. 
Have  you    beeu  acquainted,  with 

those  men  ? 
I  have  not  been  acquainted  with 

them. 


To  CALL. 

To  THROW,  THROW  AWAY. 

Do  you  call  me  ? 

I  do  call  you. 

Who  calls  me? 

Your  lather  calls  you. 

Have  you  called  the  men  ? 

I  have  called  them. 

Do  you  throw  your  money  away  ? 

I  do  not  throw  it  away. 

Who  throws  away  his  books  ? 

Have  you  thrown  away  any  thing  ? 

I  have  thrown  away  my  gloves. 

Have  you  thrown  them  away  ? 

I  have  thrown  them  away. 


Beber,  bebddo. 

Ver,*  visto. 

Leer,*  leido. 
)  A  cuales  hombres  ha  visto  Vd,  ? 
He  visto  a  aquellos. 
i  Cuales  libros  ha  leido  Vd.  ? 
He  leido  los  que  Vd.  me  ha  pres- 

tado. 
I  Ha  conocido  Vd.  a  esos  hombres  ? 

No  los  he  conocido. 


Llamar. 

tlrar,  echar,  arrojab. 
jMeHftnwVd.? 

Llamo  a  Vd. 

I  Quie'n  me  llama  ? 

Su  padre  de  Vd.  le  llama. 

I  Ha  llamado  Vd.  a  los  hombres  ? 

Los  he  llamado. 

j  Tira  Vd.  su  dinero  ? 

No  lo  tiro. 

iQuien  tira  sus  libros? 

i  Ha  tirado  Vd.  algo  V 

He  tirado  mis  guantes. 

I  Los  ha  tirado  Vd.  ? 

Los  he  tirado. 


Exercise  No.  96. 


Have  you  any  thing  to  do  ?  I  have  nothing  to  do.  "W  hat 
hast  thou  done  ?  I  have  done  nothing.  Have  I  done  any 
thing  ?  You  have  done  something.  What  have  I  done  ? 
You  have  torn  my  books.  What  have  your  children  done  ? 
They  have  torn  their  clothes  ?  What  have  we  done  ?  You 
have  done  nothing,  but  your  brothers  have  burnt  my  fine 
books.  Has  the  tailor  already  made  your  coat  ?  He  has 
not  yet  made  it.  Has  your  shoemaker  already  made  your 
shoes?  He  has  already  made  them.  Have  you  ever  made 
a  hat  ?  I  have  never  made  one.  Have  our  neighbors  ever 
written  books  ?  They  wrote  some  formerly.  How  many 
coats  has  your  tailor  made  ?  He  has  made  twenty  or  thirty. 
Has  he  made  good  or  bad  coats  ?     He  has  made  good  and 


162  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

bad  ones.  Has  your  father  put  on  his  coat  ?  He  has  not 
yet  put  it  on,  but  he  is  going  to  put  it  on.  Has  your  brother 
put  on  his  shoes  ?  He  has  put  them  on.  Have  our  neigh- 
bors put  on  their  shoes  and  their  gloves  ?  They  have  put 
on  neither  (ni  los  unos  ni  los  otros).  What  has  the  physician 
taken  away  ?  He  has  taken  nothing  away.  What  have  you 
taken  off?  I  have  taken  off  my  large  hat.  Have  your 
children  taken  off  their  gloves  ?  They  have  taken  them  off. 
When  did  the  ball  take  place  ?  It  took  place  the  day  be- 
fore yesterday.  Who  has  told  you  that  ?  My  servant  has 
told  it  to  me.  What  has  your  brother  told  you  ?  He  has 
told  me  nothing.  Did  I  tell  you  that  ?  You  did  not  tell  it 
to  me.  Has  he  told  it  to  you  ?  He  has  told  it  to  me. 
Who  has  told  it  to  your  neighbors?  The  English  have 
told  it  to  them.  Have  they  told  it  to  the  French  ?  They 
have  told  it  to  them.  Who  has  told  it  to  you  ?  Your  son 
has  told  it  to  me.  Has  he  told  it  to  me  ?  Are  you  willing 
to  tell  your  friends  that  ?     I  am  willing  to  tell  them. 


Exercise  No.  97. 

Are  you  the  brother  of  that  young  man  ?  I  am.  Is  that 
young  man  your  son  ?  He  is.  Are  your  friends  as  rich  as 
they  say?  They  are  so.  Are  these  men  as  learned  as  they 
say  ?  They  are  not  so.  Do  you  often*  sweep  the  warehouse  ? 
I  sweep  it  as  often  as  I  can.  Has  our  neighbor  money 
enough  to  buy  some  coal  ?  I  do  not  know.  Has  your  cook 
gone  to  the  market?  He  has  not  gone  thither.  Is  he  ill 
(malo)  ?  He  is.  Am  I  ill  ?  You  are  not.  Are  you  as  tall 
as  I  ?  I  am.  Are  you  as  fatigued  as  your  brother  ?  I  am 
more  so  than  he.  Have  you  written  a  note  ?  I  have  not 
written  a  note,  but  an  exercise.  What  have  your  brothers 
written?  They  have  written  their  exercises.  When  did 
they  write  them  ?  They  wrote  them  yesterday.  Have  you 
written  your  exercises  ?  I  have  written  them.  Has  your 
friend  written  his  ?  He  has  not  written  them  yet.  Which 
exercises  has  your  little  brother  written  ?  He  has  written 
his  own.  Have  you  spoken  to  my  father  ?  I  have  spoken 
to  him.     When  did  you  speak  to  him  ?     I  spoke  to  him  the 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  163 

day  before  yesterday.  How  many  times  have  yon  spoken 
to  the  captain  ?  I  have  spoken  to  him  several  times.  Have 
you  often  spoken  to  his  son  ?  I  have  often  spoken  to  him. 
To  which  men  has  your  friend  spoken  ?  He  has  spoken  to 
these  and  to  those. 


Exercise  No.  98. 

Have  you  spoken  to  the  Mexicans  ?  I  have  spoken  to 
them.  Have  the  English  ever  spoken  to  you  ?  They  have 
often  spoken  to  me.  What  has  the  German  told  you  ?  He 
has  told  me  the  words.  Which  words  has  he  told  you  ? 
He  has  told  me  these  words.  What  have  you  to  tell  me  ? 
I  have  a  few  words  to  tell  you.  Which  exercises  has  your 
friend  written  ?  He  has  written  those.  Which  books  have 
your  children  read  ?  They  have  read  those  which  you  have 
lent  them.  Have  you  seen  these  men  or  those  ?  I  hava 
seen  neither  these  nor  those.  Which  men  have  you  seen  ? 
I  have  seen  those  to  whom  you  have  spoken.  Have  you 
been  acquainted  with  these  men  ?  I  have  been  acquainted 
with  them.  With  which  boys  has  your  brother  been  ac- 
quainted ?  He  has  been  acquainted  with  those .  of  our 
merchant.  Has  he  been  acquainted  with  those  Spaniards  ? 
He  has  not  been  acquainted  with  them.  Which  wine  has 
your  servant  drunk  ?  He  has  drunk  mine.  Have  you  seen 
my  brothers  ?  I  have  seen  them.  Where  have  you  seen 
them  ?  I  have  seen  them  at  their  own  house.  Have  you 
ever  seen  Greeks?  I  have  never  seen  any.  Has  your 
father  seen  any?  He  has  sometimes  seen  some.  Do  you 
call  me?  I  do  call  you.  Who  calls  your  brother?  M\ 
father  calls  him.  Dost  thou  call  any  one  ?  I  call  no  one. 
Have  you  thrown  away  your  hat  ?  I  have  not  thrown  it 
away.  Does  your  father  throw  away  any  thing?  He 
throws  away  the  letters  which  he  receives.  Have  you 
thrown  away  your  pencils  ?  I  have  not  thrown  them  away. 
Dost  thou  throw  away  thy  book  ?  I  do  not  throw  it  away  ; 
I  want  it  to  study  Spanish. 


J  61 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


THIRTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 

NEUTEB  VERBS. 

In  neuter  verbs  the  action  is  intransitive  ;  that  is,  it  remains  in  tha 
f  gent.  They,  in  Spanish,  always  form  their  compound  tenses  with  the 
auxiliary  haber,  and  the  participle  is  indeclinable.  In  their  simple 
tenses  they  are  conjugated  like  the  verbs  of  the  conjugation  to  which 
they  belong. 


To  arrive — arrived. 

To  go — gone. 

To  stay— stood. 

To  remain — remained. 

To  set  out — set  out. 

To  go  out — gone  out. 

To  come — come. 

Did  you  stay  long  in  that  country ' 

When  did  you  go  to  the  ball  ? 


Llegar,  (1)  llegado. 

Ir,  * — ido. 

Estarse,  * — estado. 

Quedarse—  quedado. 

Par  l  ir — par  ti  do. 

Salir,* — salido. 

Venir,  *  — venido. 

(iHa   estado   (Estuvo)  Vd.    mucno 

tiempo  en  aquel  pais  ? 
I  Cuando  ha  estado  (estuvo  Vd.)  eu 

el  bade  ? 


Whenever  the  period  or  hour  in  which  an  action  takes  place  is  men- 
tioned, the  Preterite  Definite  must  be  used. 


I  went  thither  at  midnight. 

Did  he  remain  long  in  Paris  ? 

He  remained  there  a  year. 
Has  your  father  set  out  ? 
Have  your  friends  set  out  ? 
They  have  not  set  out. 
When  did  your  brothers  go  out  ? 

They  went  out  at  ten  o'clock. 


He  estado   (Estuve)   alii  a   media 

noche. 
<;Ha  estado  el  mucho   tiempo  an 

Paris  ? 
Ha  estado  alii  un  afio. 
I  Ha  partido  su  padre  de  Vd.  ? 
I  Han  partido  sus  amigos  de  Vd.  ? 
No  han  partido. 
,;  Cuando  han  salido  (salieron)  sua 

hermanos  de  Vd.  ? 
Han  salido  (salieron)  a  las  diez. 


Which  fire  have  you  extinguished  ? 

Which  warehouses  have  you  open- 
ed? 

Have  you  conducted  them  to  the 
storehouse  ? 

I  have  conducted  them  thither. 

Which  books  have  you  taken  ? 

How  many  notes  have  you  receiv- 
ed? 


I  Cual  fuego  ha  apagado  Vd.  ? 

I  Cuales  almacenes  ha  abierto  Vd.  ? 

^Los  ha  conducido  Vd.  al  almacen? 

Los  he  conducido  alia. 

I  Cuales  libros  ha  tornado  Vd.  ? 

I  Cuantos  billetes  ha  recibido  Vd.  ? 


1.  Llegar,  although  it  is  not  an  irregular  verb,  takes  a  u  after  the  g, 
in  all  the  persons  in  which  it  is  immediately  followed  by  an  e.  This 
rule  applies  to  all  verbs  that  end  in  gar. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


1G5 


I  have  received  but  one. 
Have  you  opened  the  trunks  ? 
I  have  oj)ened  them. 
Which    nails    has    the    carpenter 
picked  up  ? 


To  PICK  UP— PICKED  UP. 

Which  letters  have  you  answered  ? 
To  answer  a  letter. 
Which  books  has  he  taken  ? 
Have  they  broken  the  glasses  ? 
They  have  not  broken  them. 
Have  you  the  gloves  which  I  gave 

you? 
I  have  had  them,  but  have  them  no 

longer. 


On,  upon. 
On  the  bench. 
Upon  it. 

UltDEB. 

Under  the  bench. 

Underneath  (under  it). 

Where  is  my  hat  ? 

It  is  upon  the  bench. 

Are  my  gloves  on  the  bench  ? 

They  are  under  it. 

Do  you  learn  to  read? 

I  do  learn. 

I  learn  to  write. 

Have  you  learned  to  speak  ? 

I  have  learned. 

In  the  warehouse. 
The  stove. 
In  the  stove. 
In  it  or  within. 


To  WASH. 
To  get  or  have  mended. 
Got  or  hud  mended. 
To  get  or  to  have  washed. 
Got  or  had  washed. 
To  get  or  have  made. 
Got  or  had  made. 


No  he  recibido  sino  uno. 
I  Ha  abierto  Vd.  los  baules  ? 
Los  he  abierto. 

iCuaLs  clavos  ha  recojido  el  car 
pintero  ? 


ReCOJER — RECOJIDO. 

I A  cuales  cartas  ha  contestado  Vd.  ? 

Contestar  a  una  carta. 

I  Cuales  libros  ha  tornado  el  ? 

I  Han  quebrado  los  vasos  ? 

No  los  han  quebrado. 

£Tiene  Vd.  los  guantes  que  le  he 

dado? 
Los  he  tenido.  pero  no  los  tengo  ya 


Sobee. 
Sobre  el  banco. 
Sobre  el. 


Deb  a  jo  de. 
Debajo  del  banco. 
Debajo. 

I  Donde  esta  mi  sombrero  ? 
Esta  sobre  el  banco. 
I  Estan  mis  guantes  sobre  el  banco  f 
Estan  debajo,  or  debajo  de  el. 
I  Api*ende  Vd.  a  leer  ? 
Aprendo. 

Aprendo  a  escribir. 
<;Ha  aprendido  Vd.  a  hablar? 
He  aprendido. 


En  el  almacen. 
La  estufa. 
En  la  estufa. 
Dentro. 


Lavab. 

f  Mandar  or  hacer  reparar. 
t  Mandado  or  hecho  reparar. 
f  Mandar  or  hacer  lavar. 
f  Mandado  or  hecho  lavar. 
t  Mandar  or  hacer  hacer. 
t  Mandado  or  hecho  hacer. 


166 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHES. 


Are  you  getting  a  coat  made  (do 

you  order  a  coat)  ? 
.  am   getting  one  made  (I  order 

one). 
I  have  had  one  made. 

H^ve  you  had  your  coat  mended  ? 

I  have  had  it  mended. 

I  have  had  my  shoes  mended. 

1  have  had  them  mended. 


To  WIPE. 
Have  you  not  seen  my  book  ? 
I  have  seen  it. 

When  ? — Whebe  ? 
When  did  you  see  my  brother  ? 


I  saw  him  the  day  before  yesterday. 
Where  have  you  seen  him  ? 
I  have  seen  him  at  the  theatre. 


f  i  Se  manda  or  hace  Vd.  hacer  una 

casaca  ? 
t  Me  mando  or  "hago  hacer  una. 

f  Me  he  mandado  or  hecho  hacer 

una. 
I  Ha  mandado  or  hecho  Vd.  reparar 

su  casaca  ? 
He  mandado  or  hecho  repararla. 
He  mandado  or  hecho  reparar  mis 

zapatos. 
He  mandado  or  hecho  repararlos. 


Enjugab. 
i  No  ha  visto  Vd.  mi  libro  ? 
Lo  he  visto. 


I  CUANDO  1—1  D6NDE  ?— jEn 
DONDE  ? 

^Cuando  ha  visto  Vd.  a  mi  her- 

mano  ? 
Le  he  visto  anteayer. 
I  En  donde  le  ha  visto  Vd.  ? 
Le  he  visto  en  el  teatro. 


Exercise  No.  99. 

Where  are  your  brothers  gone  ?  They  are  gone  to  the 
theatre.  Have  your  friends  left  (partir)  ?  They  have  not 
yet  left.  When  do  they  set  out  ?  This  evening.  At  what 
o'clock  ?  At  half-past  nine.  When  did  the  French  boys 
come  to  your  brother  ?  They  came  to  him  yesterday.  Did 
their  friends  come  also  ?  They  came  also.  Has  any  one 
come  to  us  ?  The  good  Germans  have  come  to  us.  Who 
has  come  to  the  English  ?  The  French  have  come  to  them. 
When  did  you  drink  any  wine  ?  We  drank  some  yesterday 
and  to-day.  Has  the  servant  carried  my  note?  He  has 
carried  it.  Where  has  he  carried  it  ?  He  has  carried  it  to 
your  friend.  Which  letters  have  you  carried  ?  I  have  car- 
ried those  which  you  have  given  me  to  carry.  To  wnom 
have  you  carried  them  ?  I  have  carried  them  to  your  father. 
Which  books  has  your  servant  taken  ?  He  has  taken  those 
which  you  do  not  read.    Have  your  merchants  opened  their 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  167 

warehouses  ?  They  have  opened  them.  Which  warehouses 
have  they  opened?  They  have  opened  those  which  you 
have  seen.  When  have  they  opened  them?  They  have 
opened  to-day.  Have  you  conducted  the  foreigners  to  the 
warehouses  ?  I  have  conducted  them  thither.  Which  fires 
have  the  men  extinguished  ?  They  have  extinguished  those 
which  you  have  seen.  Have  you  received  any  letters  ?  We 
have  received  some.  How  many  letters  have  you  received  ? 
I  have  received  only  one  ;  but  my  brother  has  received 
more  than  I :  he  has  received  six. 


Exercise  No.  100. 

Where  is  my  coat  ?  It  is  on  the  bench.  Are  my  shoes 
upon  the  bench  ?  They  are  under  it.  Is  the  coal  under 
the  bench  ?  It  is  in  the  stove.  Have  you  put  some  coal  in 
the  stove  ?  I  have  put  some  into  it.  Are  you  cold  ?  I  am 
not  cold.  Is  the  coal  which  I  have  seen  in  the  stove  ?  It 
is  in  it.  Are  my  letters  upon  the  stove  ?  They  are  in  it 
/within).  Have  you  not  been  afraid  to  burn  my  letters? 
[  have  not  been  afraid  to  burn  them.  Have  you  sent  your 
little  boy  to  the  market?  I  have  sent  him  thither.  When 
did  you  send  him  ?  This  morning.  Have  you  written  to 
your  father  ?  I  have  written  to  him.  Has  he  answered 
you  ?  He  has  not  yet  answered  me  Are  you  getting  your 
room  swept  ?  I  am  getting  it  swept.  Have  you  had  your 
counting-house  swept  ?  I  have  not  had  it  swept  yet,  but  I 
intend  to  have  it  swept  to-day.  Have  you  wiped  your  feet  ? 
I  have  wiped  them.  Where  did  you  wipe  them  ?  I  wiped 
them  upon  the  carpet.  Have  you  had  your  benches  wiped  ? 
I  have  had  them  wiped.  What  does  your  servant  wipe  ? 
He  wipes  the  knives.  Have  you  ever  written  to  the  physi- 
cian ?  I  have  never  written  to  him.  Has  he  ever  written 
to  you  ?  He  has  often  written  to  me.  How  many  times 
have  your  friends  written  to  you  ?  They  have  written  to 
me  more  than  twenty  times.  Have  you  seen  my  sons  ?  I 
have  never  seen  them. 


168  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Exercise  No.  101. 


Have  you  ever  seen  any  Greeks  ?  I  have  never  seen  any 
Have  you  already  seen  the  Mexicans  ?  I  have  already  seen 
one.  Where  have  you  seen  one  ?  At  the  theatre.  Have 
you  given  the  book  to  my  brother  ?  I  have  given  it  to  him. 
Have  you  given  money  to  the  merchant?  I  have  given  him 
some.  How  much  have  you  given  him?  I  have  given  him 
fourteen  dollars.  Have  you  given  any  gold  ribbon  to  the 
children  of  our  neighbors?  I  have  given  them  some. 
Wilt  thou  give  me  some  wine  ?  I  have  given  you  some 
already.  When  didst  thou  give  me  some?  I  gave  you 
some  formerly.  Wilt  thou  give  me  some  now  ?  I  cannot 
give  you  any  ;  I  have  none.  Has  the  American  lent  you 
money  ?  He  has  never  lent  me  any.  Is  he  poor  ?  He  is 
not  poor  ;  he  is  richer  than  you.  Will  you  lend  me  a 
dollar  ?  I  will  lend  you  two.  Has  your  boy  come  to  mine  ? 
He  has  come  to  him.  When?  This  morning.  At  what 
o'clock  ?  Early.  Did  he  come  earlier  than  I  ?  He  came 
earlier  than  you.  At  what  o'clock  did  he  come  ?  He  came 
at  half-past  live. 


Exercise  No.  102. 

Has  the. concert  taken  place?  It  has  taken  place.  Bid 
it  take  place  late  ?  It  took  place  early.  At  what  o'clock  ? 
At  twelve.  At  what  o'clock  did  the  ball  take  place  ?  It 
took  place  at  midnight.  Does  your  brother  learn  to  write  ? 
He  does  learn.  Does  he  know  how  to  read  ?  He  does  not 
know  how  yet.  Do  you  know  the  Frenchman  whom  I 
know?  I  do  not  know  the  one  whom  yon  know,  but  I 
know  another.  Does  your  friend  know  the  same  (a  los 
mistnos)  merchants  that  I  know?  He  does  not  know  the 
3ame  (a  los  mismos),  but  he  kno.ws  others.  Have  you  ever 
had  your  coat  mended?  I  have  sometimes  had  it  mended 
Hast  thou  already  had  thy  shoes  mended  ?  I  have  not  yet 
hid  them  mended.  Has  your  brother  had  his  vest  mended  ? 
He  has  had  it  mended  several  times  (varias  vezes).  Hast 
thou  had  thy  hat  or  thy  vest  mended  ?  I  have  neither  had 
the  one  nor  the  other  mended.     Have  you  had  your  gloves 


PRACTICAL   EXEKCISES. 


.69 


or  your  handkerchiefs  mended  ?  I  have  had  neither  the 
one  nor  the  other  mended.  Has  your  brother  had  any 
thing  made?  He  has  not  had  any  thing  made.  Have  you 
looked  for  my  gloves?  I  have  looked  for  them.  Where 
have  you  looked  for  them?  I  have  looked  for  them  upon 
the  bed,  and  have  found  them  under  it.  Have  you  found 
my  notes  in  the  stove  ?  I  have  found  them  in  it.  Have 
you  found  my  shoes  under  the  bed  ?  I  have  found  them 
upon  it.  How  long  did  you  stay  in  that  country  ?  I  stayed 
there  two  years.  Did  your  father  remain  long  at  the  ball  ? 
He  remained  there  only  a  few  minutes. 


THIRTY-NIISTH  LESSON. 


THE   IMPERFECT. 


The  Imperfect  of  the  Indicative  is  formed  from  the  present  of  the  In- 
Cnitive,  for  the  first  conjugation  by  changing  the  termination  ar, 


For  the  singular  into 
For  the  plural  into 


1st.  Per. 

aba, 

dbamos, 


2d.  Per. 

abas, 
dbais, 


3d.  Per. 
aba. 
aban. 


And  for  the  second  and  third  conjugations,  changing  ee,  and  ru, 

1st.  Per.         2d.  Per.        3d.  Per. 
.     .        ia,  ias,  ia. 

.     .        iamos,  lais,  ian. 


For  the  singular  into    .     .     .     . 
^r  the  plural  into        •  .     . 

Pres.  Infinitive. 
To  speak — I  spoke.     Hablar. 

To  fear — I  was  fearing.  Temer. 

To  suffer— I  was  suffering.  Sufrir. 


Imperfect. 
Yo  hahlaba,  Vd.  habla&a,  elhabia&a. 
JELabldbamos,  habldbais,  habla&an. 
Yo  tenvia,  Vd.  temia,  El  tern  ia. 
Temiamos,  temiais,  temian 
Yo  sufrirt,  tii  sufrias,  El  sufria. 
Sufriownos,  sufriais,  sufria^ 

The  preceding  rule  holds  good  for  all  verbs  whether  regular  or  irregu- 
lar, with  only  the  three  following 


EXCEPTION' 


To  be — I  was.     Ser 

To  see — I  was  seeing.     Ver. 

To  go— I  was  going.     Ir. 


Yo  era,  Vd.  era,  El  era. 

Eramos,  Vds.  eran,  Ellos  eran. 
j  Yo  veia,  Vd.  veia,  El  vela. 
\  Veiimos,  Vds.  veidn,  El  veian. 
j  Yo  iba,  Vd.  iba,  El  iba. 
\  lbamos,  Vds.  iban,  Ellos,  iban 


170 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


The  Imperfect  tense  denotes  the  past  with  relation  to  the 
present,  and  makes  known  that  a  thing  was  present  in  a 
past  time  ;  as,  yo  escribia,  or  estaba  escribiendo  cuando  Vd. 
llegb,  I  wrote  (was  writing)  when  you  arrived.  Conse- 
quently it  answers  to  the  English  was,  or  were,  followed  by 
the  present  participle. 

It  serves  also  to  denote  habitual  action,  or  action  often 
repeated  in  a  past  time  :  as,  yo  iba  a  la  opera  el  invierno 
pasado  dos  vezes  a  la  semana,  I  went  (used  to  go)  last  winter 
to  the  opera  twice  a  week.  In  this  case  it  answers  to  the 
English  used  to  go. 

Besides  this  tense,  there  is  another  in  Spanish  which 
answers  to  the  English  imperfect  in  other  instances.  It  is 
the  Preterito  definido,  so  called  because  it  defines  the  time 
or  period  when  the  action  took  place,  (1)  and  denotes  a 
thing  done  at  a  time  of  which  nothing  remains  :  as,  Comi 
ayer  en  casa  del  Seflor  Altida,  I  dined  yesterday  at  the  house 
of  Mr.  Altula.  It  may  be  noticed  therefore,  that  it  answers 
to  the  English  did,  or  the  termination  ed  of  the  past 
definite. 

The  best  and  most  certain  rule  for  beginners  to  follow, 
until  they  become  well  acquainted  with  these  t\\v_  Senses 
in  Spanish,  is  the  following  one  :  to  use  the  imperfect, 
except  when  the  period  in  which  the  action  took  place,  is 
expressed  or  otherwise  understood,  and  entirely  past  ;  or 
when  the  words  was,  were,  or  used  to  could  not  be  employed 
in  English  ;  as  in  the  three  following  instances  :  I  saw  you 
yesterday,  Vi  a  Vd.  ayer.  Did  you  write  last  night  ?  $  Es- 
cribib  Vd.  anoche?  I  wrote  (or  did  write)  two  letters, 
Escribi  dos  cartas^ 


When  I  was  in  Havana  I  often  went 
to  see  my  friends. 

When  you  were  in  Paris,  you  often 
went  to  the  Elysian  fields. 


Cuando  yo  estaba  en  la  Habana, 

iba  a  inenudo  a  ver  a  mis  ami- 

gos. 
Cuando  Vd.  estaba  en  Paris,   iba 

frecuentemente    a   los    Campoa 

Eliseos. 


1.  However,  it  cannot  be  used  for  what  took  place  to-day.  It  can- 
not be  accompanied  by  the  words  this  week,  this  month,  etc.,  or  by  any 
others  expressing  a  time  which  is  not  entirely  past.  The  pastindehnito 
is  then  employed. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


171 


Rome   was   at  first  governed  by 

kings. 
Ccesar  was  a  great  man. 
Cicero  was  a  great  orator. 
Our  ancestors  went  a  hunting  every 

day. 
The  Romans  cultivated  the  arts  and 

sciences,  and  rewarded  merit. 

"Were  you  walking  ? 

I  was  not  walking. 

"Were  you  in  Madrid  when  the  Queen 

was  there  V 
I  was  there  when  she  was  there. 
"Where  were  you  when  I  was  in 

London  ? 
At  what  time  did  you  (used  you  to) 

dine  when  you  were  in  Germany  ? 
I  dined  when  my  father  dined. 
Did  you  (used  you  to)  work  when 

he  was  working  ? 
I  studied  when  he  was  working. 


Roma  era  al  principio  gobernada 

por  reyes. 
Ce'sar  era  un  grande  hombre. 
Ciceron  era  un  grande  orador. 
Nuestros  abuelos  iban  a  la  caza  to- 
dos  los  dias. 
Los  Rom  an  os  cultivaban  las  artes 
y  las  ciencias,   y  premiaban  el 
me'rito. 
i  Estaba  Vd.  paseando  ? 
No  me  paseaba. 
,.;  Estaba  Vd.  en  Madrid  cuando  la 

reina  estaba  alii  ? 
Yo  estaba  alii  cuando  ella  estaba. 
I  En  donde  estaba  Vd.  cuando  yo 

estaba  en  Londres  ? 
I A  que  hora  comia  Vd.  cuando  es- 
taba en  Alemania  ? 
Yo  comia  cuando  mi  padre  comia. 
(iTrabajaba  Vd.   cuando   el  traba- 

jaba  ? 
Yo  estudiaba  cuando  6*1  trabajab?* 


Some  fish. 
Some  game. 
A  fishing. 
A  hunting. 

When  I  lived  at  my  father's  I  rose 
earlier  than  I  do  now. 

"When  we  lived  in  that  country  we 

went  a  fishing  often. 
When  I  was  ill  I  kept  my  bed  all 

day. 
Last  summer,  when  I  was  in  the 

country,  there  was  a  great  deal 

of  fruit. 


Pez — Pescado. 

Caza. 

La  pesca. 

La  caza. 

Cuando  yo  vivia  en  casa  de  mi  ps« 

dre,  me  levantaba  mas  temprano 

que  ahora. 
Cuando   viviamos   en  aquel   pais, 

ibamos  a  menudo  a  la  pesca. 
Cuando  yo  estaba  malo,  me  estaba 

en  cama  todo  el  dia. 
Cuando  yo  estaba  en  el  campo  el 

verano    pasado,    habia    muchas 

frutas. 


A  THING. 
The  same  thing. 
The  same  (the  very)  man. 
It  is  all  one  (the  same). 


Una  cosa. 
La  misma  cosa. 
El  mismo  hombre. 
Es  todo  uno  (Es  lo  mismo.) 


Such. 
Such  a  man. 
Buch  men. 


Tat,.     Semejante.     Igttai. 
Tal  hombre.     Un  hombre  tal. 
Tales  hombres. 


172 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


Such  a  woman, 

Such  things. 

Such  men  merit  esteem 


Tal  mujer.     Una  mujer  tal. 
Tales  cosas.     Cosas  semejantes. 
Semejantes  homhres  merecen  apre* 
cio. 


Out. 
Out  of  the  city. 
Without,  or  out  of  doors. 
The  church  stands  outside  the  city. 
The  town  or  city  gate. 
The  barrier,  the  turnpike. 
Seldom,  rarely. 
Some  brandy. 
The  life. 

To  earn  one's  livelihood  by  ... 
I  earn  my  livelihood  by  working. 
He  earns  his  livelihood  by  writing. 

I  gain  my  money  by  working. 
By  what  does  that  man  gain  his 
livelihood? 


Afuera.     Fuera. 
Fuera  de  la  ciudad. 
Fuera. 

La  iglesia  esta  fuera  de  la  ciudad. 
La  puerta  de  la  ciudad. 
La  barrera. 
Raramente,  rara  vez. 
Aguardiente. 
La  vida. 

Ganar  la  vida  en  ... 
Gano  la  vida  trabajando. 
El  gana  la  vida  en  escribir,  or  escri- 

biendo. 
Gano  mi  dinero  trabajando. 
I  En  que  gana  aquel  hombre  la  vida  ? 


To  PROCEED,  TO  GO  ON,  TO  CONTINUE. 

He  continues  his  speech. 

A  good  appetite. 

The  narrative,  the  tale. 

The  edge,  the  brink. 

The  bank,  the  shore. 

The  coast. 

The  edge  of  the  brook. 

On  the  sea  shore. 


People  or  folks. 
They  are  good  folks. 
They  are  wicked  folks. 

I  forgot.     We  forgot 


fou  forgot.     (Sing,  and  Plur.) 
Je  forgot.     They  forgot. 
Chou  forgottest. 

When  we  went  to  school  we  often 
forgot  our  books. 

flThen  you  went  to  church  you  often 
prayed  to  God  for  your  children. 


CoNTINUAR.      PrOSEGUIR. 

El  continua  su  discurso. 

Un  buen  apetito. 

La  narracion,  el  cuento. 

La  orilla,  la  uiarjen. 

La  ribera,  la  playa. 

La  costa. 

La  orilla  del  arroyo. 

En  la  orilla  del  mar. 


Jente. 

Es  buena  jente. 

Es  mala  jente. 


Yo  olvidaba.     Nosotros  olvidaba- 

mos. 
Vd.  olvidaba.     Vds.  olvidaban. 
El  olvidaba.     Ellos  olvidaban. 
Tu  olvidabas. 
Cuando  nosotros  ibamos  a  la  escue- 

la,  olvidabamos  a  menudo  nues- 

tros  libros. 
Cuando  Vd.  iba  a  la  iglesia,  rogaba 

a  menudo  a  Dios  por  sus  hijos 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


173 


I  paid.     We  paid. 

You  paid.     (Sing,  and  Plur.) 

He  paid.     They  paid. 

Thou  paidst. 

When  we  received  some  money  we 

employed  it  in  purchasing  good 

books. 
When  you  bought  of  that  merchant, 

you  did  not  always  pay  in  cash. 


Has  your  sister  succeeded  in  mend- 
ing your  cravat  ? 

She  has  succeeded  in  it. 

Has  the  woman  returned  from  the 
market  ? 

She  has  not  yet  returned. 

Did  the  women  agree  to  that  ? 

They  did  agree  to  it. 

Where  is  your  sister  gone  to? 

She  is  gone  to  the  church. 


Yo  pagaba.     Nosotros  pagabamos. 

Vd.  pagaba.  Vds.  pagaban. 

El  pagaba.  Ellos  pagaban. 

Tii  pagabas. 

Ouando  recibfamos  dinero,  lo  em- 

pleabamos  en  comprar    buenoa 

libros. 
Cuando  Vd.  compraba  de  aquel  co- 

merciante,  no  siempre  pagaba  al 

contado. 


I  Ha  logrado  componerle  la  corbata 

su  hermana  de  Vd.? 
Lo  ha  logrado. 
<;Ha  vuelto  del  mercado  la  mujer? 

No  ha  vuelto  aun. 

I  Han  convenido  las  mujeres  en  eso  ? 

Han  convenido  en  ello. 

,;  Adonde  ha  ido  su  hermana  de  Vd.  ? 

Ella  ha  ido  a  la  iglesia. 


The  United  States. 

Spain. 

France. 

England. 

Mexico. 

Why? 
Because. 


i  Los  Estados  Unidos. 
Espana. 
Francia. 
Inglaterra. 
Mejico. 


jPobque? 

POBQUE. 


Exercise  No.  103. 


Were  you  loved  when  you  were  in  Mexico  ?  I  was  not 
hated.  Was  your  brother  esteemed  when  he  was  in  Lon- 
don? He  was  loved  and  esteemed.  When  were  you  in 
Spain  ?  I  was  there  when  you  were  there.  Were  you  in 
Madrid  when  the  Queen  was  there  ?  I  was  there  when  she 
was  there.  Was  your  uncle  in  London  when  I  was  there  ? 
He  was  there  when  you  were  there.  Where  were  you  when 
I  was  in  Spain  ?  I  was  in  Paris.  Where  was  your  father 
when  you  were  in  the  United  States  ?  He  was  in  England. 
At  what  time  did  you  breakfast  when  you  were  in  France  ? 


174  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

I  breakfasted  when  my  uncle  breakfasted.  Did  you  work 
when  he  was  working  ?  I  studied  when  he  was  working. 
Did  your  brother  work  when  you  were  working  ?  He  play- 
ed when  I  was  working.  On  what  (De  que)  lived  our  an 
cestors  ?  They  lived  on  nothing  but  fish  and  game,  for 
they  went  a  hunting  and  fishing  every  day.  What  sort  oi 
people  were  the  Romans?  They  were  very  good  people, 
for  they  cultivated  the  arts  and  sciences,  and  rewarded 
merit.  Did  you  often  go  to  see  your  friends  when  you  were 
in  Havana  ?  I  went  to  see  them  often.  Did  you  sometimes 
go  to  the  Elysian  fields  when  you  were  at  Paris?  I  often 
went  thither. 


Exercise  No.  104. 

What  did  you  do  when  you  lived  in  that  country  ?  When 
we  lived  there  we  went  a  fishing  often.  Did  you  not  go  out 
walking  (iba  a  pasear)?  I  went  out  walking  sometimes. 
Do  you  rise  early  ?  Not  so  early  as  you  ;  but  when  I  lived 
at  my  uncle's  I  rose  earlier  than  I  do  now.  Did  you  some- 
times keep  (quedar)  your  bed  when  you  lived  at  your  uncle's  ? 
When  I  was  ill  I  kept  my  bed  all  day.  Is  there  much  fruit 
this  year  ?  I  do  not  know  ;  but  last  summer,  when  I  was 
in  the  country,  there  was  (habia)  a  great  deal  of  fruit.  What 
do  you  get  your  livelihood  by?  I  get  my  livelihood  by 
working.  Does  your  friend  get  his  livelihood  by  writing  ? 
He  gets  it  by  speaking  and  writing.  Do  these  gentlemen 
get  their  livelihood  by  working?  They  get  it  by  doing 
nothing,  for  they  are  too  idle  to  work.  How  has  your 
friend  made  that  money?  He  has  made  it  by  working. 
What  did  you  get  your  livelihood  by  when  you  were  in 
England  ?  I  got  it  by  writing.  Did  your  cousin  get  his 
livelihood  by  writing  ?  He  got  it  by  working.  Have  you 
ever  seen  such  a  person  ?  I  have  never  seen  such  a  one. 
Have  you  already  seen  our  church  ?  I  have  not  seen  it  yet. 
Where  does  it  stand?  It  stands  outside  the  town.  If  you 
wish  to  see  it  I  will  go  with  you  in  order  to  show  it  to  you. 
What  do  the  people  live  upon  that  live  on  the  sea  shore? 
They  live,  on  fish  alone.     Why  will  you  not  go  a  hunting 


PRACTICAL  EXEECISES.  175 

wwy  more  ?  "Why  do  you  not  eat  ?  Because  I  have  not  a 
g-»od  appetite.  Why  does  your  brother  eat  so  much  ?  Be* 
cause  he  has  a  good  appetite. 


Exercise  No.  105. 

Whom  are  you  looking  for  ?  I  am  looking  for  my  little 
brother.  If  you  wish  to  find  him  you  must  go  into  the  gar- 
den, for  he  is  there.  The  garden  is  large  and  I  shall  not 
be  able  to  find  him  if  you  do  not  tell  me  in  which  part  of  it  he 
is.  He  is  sitting  under  the  large  tree  under  which  we  were 
sitting  yesterday.  Now  I  shall  find  him.  Why  did  you  not 
bring  my  shoes  ?  They  were  not  made,  so  that  I  could  not 
bring  them  ;  but  I  bring  them  to  you  now.  You  have  learn- 
ed your  lesson  ;  why  has  not  your  sister  learned  hers  ?  She 
has  taken  a  walk  with  my  mother,  so  that  (de  suerte  que) 
she  could  not  learn  it ;  but  she  will  learn  it  to-morrow. 
When  will  you  correct  my  exercises  ?  I  will  correct  them 
when  you  bring  me  those  of  your  sister.  Do  you  think  you 
have  made  errors  in  them  ?  I  do  not  know.  If  you  have 
made  errors  it  is  because  you  have  not  studied  your  lesson 
well ;  for  the  lesson  must  be  learned  well  to  make  no  errors 
in  the  exercises.  It  is  all  the  same  ;  if  you  do  not  correct 
them  to-day,  I  shall  not  learn  them  before  (hasta)  to-mor- 
row. You  must  not  make  any  errors  in  your  exercises,  for 
you  have  all  you  want  in  order  to  make  none. 


Exercise  No.  106. 

Did  you  forget  any  thing  when  you  went  to  school  ?  We 
often  forgot  our  books.  Where  did  you  forget  them  ?  We 
forgot  them  at  the  school.  Did  we  forget  any  thing  ?  You 
forgot  nothing.  Did  your  mother  pray  (rogar)  for  any  one 
when  she  went  to  church  ?  She  prayed  for  her  children. 
For  whom  did  we  pray  ?  You  prayed  for  your  parents. 
For  whom  did  your  parents  pray  ?  They  prayed  for  their 
children.  When  you  received  your  money  what  did  you  do 
with  it  ?    We  employed  it  in  purchasing  some  good  books, 


176  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Did  you  employ  yours  also  in  purchasing  books  ?  No  ;  \v6 
employed  it  in  assisting  the  poor  (en  socorier  a  los  pobres). 
Did  you  not  pay  your  tailor  ?  We  did  pay  him.  Did  you 
always  pay  in  cash  when  yon  bought  of  that  merchant  ?  We 
always  paid  in  cash,  for  we  never  buy  on  credit  (&  credito). 
Has  your  sister  succeeded  in  mending  your  stockings  ?  She 
has  succeeded  in  it.  Has  your  mother  returned  from 
church?  She  has  not  yet  returned.  Whither  has  your 
aunt  gone  ?  She  has  gone  to  church.  Whither  have  your 
cousins  (fern.)  gone  ?  They  have  gone  to  the  concert.  Have 
they  not  yet  returned  from  it  ?    They  have  not  yet  returned. 


FORTIETH  LESSON. 

THE   PAST    DEFINITE. 

This  tense  is  formed  from  the  Infinitive,  by  changing,  for  tho  first  coat 
•ugation,  ab, 

1st  Per.  2d.  3d. 

For  the  singular  into    .     .     .     .     e,  aste,  6. 

For  the  plural  into dmos,  dsteis,  aron. 

And  for  the  second  and  third  conjugations,  changing  eb,  and  ib, 

Is*  Per.  2d.  3d 

For  the  singular  into    ...  i,  iste,  id. 

For  the  plural  into imos,  isteis,  ieron. 

examples. 
Infinitive.  Pbeteeite  Definite. 

Yo      Vd.         El      Nosotros      Vds.         Ellos. 
Amar     (To  love),     ame,    amd,      amo,      amamos,    amaron,     oxaaron. 
Temer    (To  fear),      temi,  temio,    temio,    temimos,    temieron,  temieron. 
Sufrir     (To  suffer)    sufri,  sufrio,    sufrio,   Bufrimos,    sufrieron,  safrieron, 

exceptions. 

The  verbs  which  we  give  as  exceptions  to  the  formation  of  the  imper- 
fect of  Subjunctive  (Lesson  45th),  form  the  same  exceptions  to  the  for- 
mation of  the  Past  Definite  ;  this  is  regularly  formed  from  that  tense  as 
in  regular  verbs,  excepting  only  the  verbs  domlr,  morir  and  podrir, 
which  are  regular  in  the  first  two  persons.  Those  having  e  in  the  peuuJ- 
timate  syllable  of  the  third  conjugation,  are  regular  in  the  first  twa 
persons. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


177 


1  bad  done  reading  when  he  enter- 
ed. 

You  had  lost  your  purse  when  I 
found  mine. 


Yo  habia  acabado  de  leer  cuando 

el  entrd. 
Vd.  habia  perdido  su  bolsa  cuando 

yo  encontre  la  mia. 


These  examples  show  that  the  Pluperfect  is  formed  in  Spanish  as  in 
English,  viz. :  with  the  imperfect  of  the  auxiliary  and  the  past  participle 
of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 


We  dined  when  he  arrived. 

The  King  had  appointed  an  Admi- 
ral when  he  heard  (did  hear)  of 
you. 

After  having  spoken  you  went  away. 

After  shaving  I  washed  my  face. 

After  having  warmed  themselves, 
they  went  into  the  garden. 

As  soon  as  the  bell  rung  (did  ring), 
you  awoke. 

As  soon  as  they  called  (did  call) 
me,  I  got  (did  get)  up. 

As  soon  as  he  was  ready  he  came  to 
see  me. 

As  soon  as  we  had  our  money  we 
agreed  to  that. 

As  soon  as  he  had  his  horse,  he 
came  to  show  it  to  me. 

After  trying  several  times,  they  suc- 
ceeded in  doing  it. 

As  soon  as  I  saw  him,  I  obtained 
what  I  wanted  (was  wanting). 

As  soon  as  I  spoke  to  him  he  did 
what  I  told  him. 

The  business  was  soon  over. 


Habiamos  comido  cuando  61  llego. 
El  rey  habia  nombrado  un  almiran- 
te  cuando  le  hablaron  de  Vd. 

Despues  de  haber  hablado,  Vd.  so 

fue'. 
Despues  de  haberme  afeitado  me 

lave  la  cara. 
Despues  de  haberse  calentado,  fue- 

ron  al  jardin. 
Luego  que  sono  la  campana,  Vd.  se 

desperto. 
Luego  que  me  Uamaron,  me  levan- 

te. 
Luego  que  estuvo  listo,  vino  a  ver- 

me. 
Luego  que  tuvimos  nuestro  dinero, 

convinimos  en  eso. 
Luego  que  el  tuvo  su  caballo,  vino 

a  mostrarmelo. 
Despues  de  haber  probado  varias 

vezes,  lograron  hacerlo. 
Luego  que  le  vi,  consegui  lo  que 

queria. 
Luego  que  le  liable',  hizo  lo  que  le 

dije. 
El  negocio  estuvo  pronto  concluido. 


This  tense  is  composed  of  the  Preiirito  Definido  of  the  auxiliary  ha' 
her,  and  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated.  It  is  used 
(from  its  name  anterior),  to  express  an  action  passed  before  anothel 
which  is  likewise  past ;  and  is  hardly  ever  used  except  after  one  of  the 
conjunctions  : 


As  soon  as. 

After. 

When. 

No  sooner,  scarcely. 


I  Luego  que.     Asf  que. 
I  Despues  que. 

I  Cuando. 
Apenas. 


173 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


As  soon  as  I  had  finished  my  work, 

I  cat  riod  it  to  him. 
As  soon  as  I  had  dressed  myself,  I 

went  out. 
When  they  had  done  playing,  they 

began  singing. 
When  I  had  dined,  it  struck  twelve. 

As  soon  as  the  guests  were  assem- 
bled, the  repast  commenced. 

I  had  soon  done  eating. 

After  the  soldiers  had  pillaged  the 

town,  they  slaughtered  without 

pity  the  women  aud  children. 
Scarcely  had  we  arrived,  when  we 

were  conducted  to  the  king. 
He  had  no  sooner  perceived  us  than 

ho  advanced  towards  us. 


Luego  que  hube  concluido  mi  tra- 

bajo,  se  lo  lleve*. 
Luego  que  me  hube  vestido,  sail. 

Cuando  hubieron  acabado  de  jugar, 
comenzaron  a  cantar. 

Cuando  hube  comido  dieron  las 
doce. 

Luego  que  los  hue'spedes  se  hubie- 
ron reunido,  comenzo  el  refri- 
jerio. 

Pronto  hube  acabado  de  comer. 

Despues  que  los  soldados  hubieron 
saqueado  la  ciudad,  mataron  sin 
piedad  las  mujeres  y  los  ninos. 

Ape'nas  hubimos  llegado,  cuando 
nos  condujeron  al  rey. 

Ape'nas  nos  hubo  visto  que  se  acer- 
co  a  nosotros. 


Exercise  No.  107. 

What  did  you  do  {Que  kizo  Vd.)  when  you  had  finished 
your  letter  ?  I  went  to  my  brother  who  took  me  to  the 
theatre,  where  I  had  the  pleasure  to  find  (encontrar  a)  on6 
of  my  friends  whom  I  had  not  seen  for  ten  years.  What 
did  you  do  after  getting  up  (levantarse)  this  morning? 
When  I  had  read  the  letter  of  the  Polish  Count,  I  went  to 
see  the  theatre  of  the  Prince,  which  I  had  not  seen  before 
(habia  visto  todavia).  What  did  your  father  do  when  he  had 
breakfasted  ?  He  shaved,  and  went  out.  What  did  your 
friend  do  after  he  had  been  a  walking  ?  He  went  to  the 
Baron.  Did  the  Baron  cut  the  meat  after  he  had  cut 
(rebanar)  the  bread  ?  He  cut  the  bread  after  he  had  cut 
the  meat.  When  do  you  set  out  ?  I  do  not  set  out  until  to- 
morrow ;  for  (pues)  before  I  leave  (partir),  I  will  once  more 
see  (volver  a  ver)  my  good  friends.  What  did  your  children 
do  when  they  had  breakfasted?  They  went  a  walking  with 
their  dear  preceptor.  Where  did  your  uncle  go  after  he 
had  warmed  himself  (se  hubo  calentado)  ?  He  went  no- 
where ;  after  he  had  warmed  himself,  he  undressed  (as 
desnudo)  and  went  to  bed   (se  fue  a  la  car.na).     At  what 


% 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  179 

o'clock  did  he  get  up  ?  He  got  up  at  sunrise  (al  salir  el  sol). 
Did  you  wake  him  ?  I  had  no  nee  1  to  wake  him,  for  he  had 
got  up  before  me.  What  did  your  cousin  do,  when  ha 
heard  of  the  death  (muerte)  of  his  best  friend  ?  He  waa 
much  afflicted  (qflijidu),  and  went  to  bed  without  saying  a 
word.  Did  you  shave  before  you  breakfasted  ?  I  shaved 
when  I  had  breakfasted.-  Did  you  go  to  bed  when  you  had 
supped  (cenado)  f  When  I  had  eaten  supper  I  wrote  my 
letters,  and  when  I  had  written  them  I  went  to  bed.  At 
what^(De  que)  are  you  afflicted?  I  am  afflicted  at  that 
accident.  Are  you  afflicted  at  the  death  of  your  relative? 
I  am  much  afflicted  at  it  (de  ella).  When  did  your  relation 
die  (murib)  ?  He  died  last  month.  Of  whom  do  you  com- 
plain (se  queja  Vd.)  t  I  complain  of  your  boy.  Why  do  you 
complain  of  him  ?  Because  he  has  killed  the  pretty  dog 
which  I  received  from  one  of  my  friends.  Of  what  has 
your  uncle  complained  ?  He  has  complained  of  what  you 
have  done.  Has  he  complained  of  the  letter  which  I  sent 
him  the  day  before  yesterday  ?  He  has  complained  of  it. 
Did  you  go  out  last  night  ?  No,  Sir,  I  did  not  go  out,  be- 
cause I  was  afraid  of  catching  cold.  Have  you  ever  had  a 
sore  throat  {mat  de  garganta)  ? 


Exercise  No.  108. 

Why  did  you  not  stay  longer  (se  estuvo  Vd.  mas  tiempo)  in 
Havana  ?  Because  I  had  no  money  to  stay  longer.  Where 
have  you  been  since  I  saw  you  ?  I  have  been  in  the  United 
States.  A  peasant  having  seen  that  old  men  (los  ancianos) 
used  spectacles  (anteojos)  to  read,  went  (se  dirijib)  to  an 
optician  (un  optica)  and  asked  for  a  pair.  The  peasant  then 
took  a  book,  and  having  opened  it,  said  (dijo  que)  the 
spectacles  were  not  good.  The  optician  took  another  pair 
(por)  of  the  best  which  he  could  find  in  his  shop  (la  tieada) 
and  placed  them  (se  lo  puso)  upon  his  (las)  nose  ;  but  the 
peasant  being  still  unable  to  read,  the  optician  said  to  him  : 
"  My  friend,  perhaps  you  cannot  read  at  all"  (sabe  leer  abso- 
lutamente).  "  If  I  could"  (Si  yo  supiera),  said  the  peasant, 
"  I  should  not  want  (necesitaria)  your  spectacles."    Henry 


180  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

IV.  meeting  (encontrando)  one  day  in  his  palace  (palacio)  a 
man  whom  he  did  not  know,  asked  him  to  whom  he  be- 
longed. "  I  belong  to  myself"  (Me  pertenezco  a  mi  mismo)  t 
replied  (replied)  the  man.  "  My  friend,"  said  the  King, 
"you  have  a  stupid  master  (un  duetto  muy  necio)."  Tell  ua 
what  has  happened  to  you  lately  (recientemente).  Very 
willingly  (con  mucho  gusto)  ;  but  on  condition  (bajo  la  con- 
dition) that  you  will  listen  to  me  without  interrupting  (inte- 
rrumpir)  me.  We  will  not  interrupt  you,  you  may  be  sure 
(seguro)  of  it.  Being  lately  at  the  theatre,  I  saw  "  The 
Speaking  Picture"  (El  cuadro parlante),  and  "The  Weeping 
Woman"  (La  mujer  llorma)  performed  (ver  represenlar). 
This  latter  play  (esta  ultima  pieza)  not  being  very  amusing 
to  me  (no  divirtUndome  mucho),  I  went  to  the  concert, 
where  the  music  gave  me  a  violent  headache.  I  then  left 
the  concert,  cursing  it  (echando  pestes),  and  went  straight 
(en  derechura)  to  the  madhouse  (casa  de  locos)  in  order  to 
see  my  cousin.  On  entering  the  hospital  (Al  entrar  en  el 
hospital)  of  my  cousin,  I  was  struck  with  horror  (quede 
horrorizado)  at  seeing  several  madmen  (locos)  who  came  up 
to  me  (que  se  acercaron  a  mi),  jumping  (sallando)  and  howl- 
ing (aullando).  What  did  you  do  then?  I  did  the  same 
and  they  set  up  a  laugh  as  they  were  withdrawing  (se 
echaron  a  reir  al  mismo  tiempo  que  se  retirahan). 


Exercise  No.  109. 

give  an  answer  to  the  following  questions. 

£Vio  Vd.  ayer  a  su  primo?  Si  (or  No),  &c.  £  Comen- 
zaron  Vds.  anoche  sus  ejercicios  ?  Si,  &c.  £  Estuvo  Vd.  el 
viernes  pasado  en  la  opera  ?  Si,  &c.  ft  Salio  Vd.  el  mier- 
coles  pasado  ?  <?  Comio  Vd.  ayer  en  casa  de  su  tio  ?  <?  Es- 
tuvo Vd.  el  afio  pasado  en  la  Habana  ?  <?  Cerro  Vd.  la  puerta 
cuando  Vd.  salio  ?  (,  Se  dieron  Vds.  las  manos  (Did  you 
shake  hands  with  him  ?  <;  A  que  hora  nos  sentamos  ayer  a 
la  mesa  (Did  we  sit  down  at  table)  ?  ,;  Durmio  Vd.  bien  ante- 
noche  ?  i  Canto  anoche  su  hermana  de  Vd.  ?  i  Le  hablo 
Vd.  en  espafiol  V     £  Que  sono  Vd.  antenoche  ?     £  Tomaron 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  181 

Vds.  a  su  salud  (de  el)  ?  iComio  (ella)  ayer  alguna  fruta  ? 
I  Sintio  Vd.  anoclie  algun  dolor  (any  pain)  ?  A  que  bora 
se  fue  Vd.  a  su  casa  ?  j  Dard  mucho  tiempo  la  peiea  (the- 
fight)  ?  ^Le  dio  a  Vd.  algo  su  hermano  la  semana  pasada  ? 
I  Estudiamos  el  mes  pasado  el  frances  ?  <:Le  escondio  a 
Vd.  el  sombrero  cuando  Vd.  estuvo  en  su  casa?  £  Cum- 
plieron  ellos  su  promesa?  <fLo  dejo  ella  a  la  eleccion  de 
Vd.  (Did  she  leave  it  to  your  choice)  ?  <:  Le  dejo  a,  Vd.  ir  al 
teatro  su  padre  de  Vd.  ?  i  Le  encontramos  por  casualidad  ? 
I  Le  pagaron  al  liombre  V  £  Se  levanto  Vd.  temprano  ante- 
ay  er?  <:  Se  levanto  mi  hermano  antes  que  Vd.  el  domingo 
pasado  ?  £  Puso  Vd.  (Did  you  set)  el  tintero  sobre  la  mesa  ? 
I  Le  escribio  Vd.  la  semana  pasada  ?  <?  Le  envio  a  Vd.  una 
carta  el  lunes  pasado  ?  <:  Le  vio  Vd.  el  miercoles  pasado  ? 
^Compramos  algo  ayer  por  la  manana?  <?  Vendio  Vd.  su 
pajaro  el  jueves  pasado  ?  <?  Llegaron  a  tiempo  (in  time)  ? 
I  Estuvo  Vd.  malo  el  martes  pasado  ?  i  Contestamos  a  su 
esquela  (note)  el  sabado  pasado?  4  Estuvo  Vd.  anoclie  en 
el  concierto  ?  ^  Le  gusto  a  Vd.  ?  £  Se  divirtio  Vd.  (Did 
you  amuse  yourself  there)  ?  ,?  Hallo  Vd.  lo  que  buscaba  ? 
I  Se  acordo  Vd.  (Did  you  remember)  donde  lo  dejo  ?  £Ha- 
bian  ellos  (or  ellas)  vuelto  cuando  Vd.  llego  ?  <;  Estaban 
abiertas  las  puertas  cuando  Vds.  llegaron  ?  £  Habia  el  es- 
crito  cuando  Vd.  la  vio  ?  £  Lo  habian  impreso  todo  cuando 
Vd.  les  hablo  ?  £  Habia  ya  muerto  cuando  llegamos  ?  £  Ha- 
bia Vd.  puesto  el  libro  en  su  lugar  cuando  su  padre  de  Vd. 
lo  pidio?  ^Estaba  indispuesto  cuando  Vds.  le  vieron? 
Estaba  ya  roto  su  abanico  de  Vd.  cuando  lo  compro  ? 


FORTY-FIKST  LESSON. 


To  WAIT. 


TO  PEOMISE. 
TO  LEARN. 

Do  you  promise  me  to  come  ? 
I  do  promise  you  (it  to  you). 
What  have  you  promised  the  man  ? 
I  have  promised  him  nothing. 


Prometer. 
Aprendee. 

EsPERAR. 

Aguardar. 
xilfl  promete  Vd.  veuir? 
Se  lo  prometo  a  Vd. 
i  Que'  ha  prometido  Vd.  al  hombre  ! 
No  le  he  prometido  nada. 


182 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


To  LOSE — LOST.  PeRDER* — PERDIDO. 

B  ow  much  has  your  brother  lost  ?      ,;  Cuanto  ha  perdidc  su  hermanc 

de  Vd.  ? 
He  has  lost  about  two  dollars.  |  Ha  perdido  como  uuos  dos  duros. 


About. 
It  is  about  two  o'clock. 


Have  you  ever  learned  Spanish  ? 
I  have  learned  it  formerly. 


Como.     Como  unos. 
Son  como  las  dos. 


I  Ha  aprendido  Vd.  alguna  vez  el 

espanol ? 
Lo  he  aprendido  en  otro  tiempo. 


To  WEAR  OUT.       TO  USE. 
To  REFUSE. 
To  SPELL. 

Usar.     Gastar.     Consumib. 

Kehusar. 
Deletreab. 

How? 
Well. 
Badly. 

1 Como  ? 

BlEN. 

Mal.     Malamente. 

So.     Thus. 
So  so. 

Asi.     De  este  modo. 
Tal  cual.     Asf ,  ASf . 

In  this  manner.                  -J 

How  has  your  brother  written  his 

exercise  ? 
He  has  written  it  well. 

De  esta  maneba. 

De  este  modo. 
^Como  ha  escrito  su  ejercicio  su 

hermano  de  Vd.? 
Lo  ha  escrito  bien. 

To  DRY. 

Do  you  put  your  coat  to  dry  ? 
I  do  put  it  to  dry. 


How  old  are  you  ? 
I  am  twelve  years  old. 

How  old  is  your  brother  ? 

He  is  thirteen  years  old. 

Almost. 
He  is  almost  fourteen  years  eld. 


Secar. 
I  Pone  Vd.  a  secar  su  casaca? 
La  pongo  a  secar. 


f  ,iQue'  edad  tiene  Vd.  ? 

f  i  Cuantos  aiios  tiene  Vd. 

f  Tengo  doce  aiios. 

f  ;  Que-  edad  tiene  su  hermano  de 

Vd.? 
f  ;  Cuantos  aiios  tiene  su  bermana 

de  Vd.  ? 
f  Tiene  trece  aiios. 


Casi. 
f  Tiene  casi  catorce  aiios. 


PRACTICAL  EXEHCISES. 


133 


About.     Something  like. 
Neaklt. 
fam  about  (or  something' like)  fif- 
teen years  old. 


COMO  UNOS.       COMO. 

Cebca  de. 
f  Tengo  como  unos  quince  afios. 


Hardly. 
You  are  hardly  seventeen  years  old. 


Apenas. 
I  Vd.  tiene  ape'nas  diez  y  siete  afioa 


Not  quite. 


I  am  not  quite   eighteen  years 
old. 


Are  you  older  than  your  brother? 
I  am  younger  than  he. 
Of  age. 


ToDAVIA  NO  HA  CUMPLIDO. 
No  —TOD  AVI  A.       No  —DEL  TODO. 

f  Todavia  no  he  cumplido  diez  y 
ocho  afios. 

f  No  tengo  todavia  diez  y  ocho 
afios. 

f  i  Es  Vd.  mayor  que  su  hermano  ? 

.{  ,;  Es  Vd.  de  mas  edad  que  su  her- 
mano ? 

f  Soy  menor  que  el. 

{  Soy  mas  joven  que  el. 

f  S<>y  de  mdnos  edad  que  el. 


|  MAYOR  DE  EDAD. 

Mayor  de  edad  (of  age),  is  the  person  who  has  arrived  at  the  age  fixed 
by  the  laws  of  the  country  to  enable  him  to  transact  business  on  his 
own  account.  According  to  the  Spanish  law,  males  are  of  age  at  twenty- 
five,  and  females  at  twenty-three. 


Aged. 

Old. 

Youug. 


Avanzado  en  edad  or  afios. 
Viejo.     Anciano. 
Joven. 


There  is.     There  are. 
How  many  persons  are  there  at  the 

ball? 
There  are  nearly  twenty. 

To  UNDERSTAND.  -j 

I  understand.     We  understand. 
You  understand  (Sing,  and  Plur.) 
He  understands.  They  understand 
Thou  understandest. 

The  noise.  -j 

The  wind. 
The  noise  (roaring)  of  the  wind. 

Do  you  hear  the  roaring  of  the 
wind? 


Hay. 

,;  Cuantas  personas  hay  en  el  baile 

Hay  cerca  de  veinte. 

Entendeb.  * 

compeender. 
Yo  entiendo.  Nosotros  entendemo* 
Vd.  entiende.     Vds.  entiendo  i. 
El  entiende.     Ellos  entienden. 
Tii  entiendes. 

El  ruido.    El  esibuendo. 

El  susurro. 

El  viento. 
El  ruido,   susurro  or  silbido   del 

viento. 
{  Oye  Vd.  el  ruido  del  viento  ? 


184: 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHEK. 


TO  HEAK-  -HEARD. 

I  liear.     We  hear. 

Yon  hear.     (Sing,  and  Plur.) 

He  hears.     They  hear. 

Thou  hearest. 
X  do  hear  it. 


To  BARK. 

The  barking. 
Have  you  heard  the  barking  of  the 

dogs  ? 
I  have  heard  it. 


To  wait  for  some  one  or  some- 
thing. 

To  expect  some  one  or  some- 
thing. 

To  hope. 

Are  you  waiting  for  my  brother  ? 

I  am  waiting  for  him. 

Do  you  expect  your  friends  ? 

I  do  expect  them,  but  do  not  wait 
for  them. 


Oir* — OIDO. 
Sentib*  senttdo. 
Yo  oigo  or  siento.     Nosotros  otmos 

or  sentimos. 
Vd.  oye  or  siente.     Vds.  oyen  or 
r  sienten. 
El  oye  or  siente.     Ellos  oyen  or 

sienten. 
Tii  oyes  or  sientes. 
Si,  lo  oigo.     Lo  siento. 


Ladrar. 
El  ladrido. 
,iHa  oido  Vd.  los  ladridos  de  los 

perros  ? 
Los  he  oido. 


Aguardar  por  alguien  (algun<>)  or 

por  algo  (alguna  cosa). 
Esperar  a  alguien  (alguno)  or  algo 

(alguua  cosa). 
Esperar. 

I  Aguarda  Vd.  por  mi  herman  *  ? 
Aguardo  por  e'l. 
i  Espera  Vd.  a  sus  amigos  ? 
Los  espero,  pero  no  aguardo  por 

ellos. 


The  nobleman. 

Noblemen. 

Gentle.     Pretty. 

Tame. 

Where  has  the  nobleman  remain- 
ed? 

He  has  remained  at  home. 

Has  your  brother  remained  with 
him? 


El  noble.     El  hidalgo. 

Los  nobles.     Los  hidalgos. 

Gracioso.     Lindo.     Bonito. 

Manso. 

^Eu  donde  se  ha  quedado  el  hidal- 
go? 

Se  ha  quedado  en  casa. 

,;  Se  ha  quedado  su  hermanc  de  Vd 
con  e'l? 


Exercise  No.  110. 

Do  you  promise  me  to  come  to  the  ball  ?  I  promise  you. 
Have  I  promised  you  any  thing  ?  You  have  promised  me 
nothing.  What  lias  my  brother  promised  you  ?  He  has 
promised  me  a  fine  book.  Have  you  received  it  ?  Not  yet. 
Do  you  give  me  what  you  have  promised  me?    I  give  it  to 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  185 

you.  Has  your  friend  received  much  money  ?  He  has  re- 
ceived but  little,  How  much  has  he  received?  He  has  re- 
ceived but  one  dollar.  How  much  money  have  you  given 
to  my  son?  I  have  given  him  thirty  dollars.  Did  you  not 
promise  him  more  ?  I  have  given  him  what  I  promised 
him.  Have  you  Spanish  money  ?  I  have  some.  Will  you 
lend  your  shoes  to  my  brother  ?  I  will  lend  them  to  him. 
To  whom  have  you  lent  your  hat  ?  I  have  not  lent  it ;  I 
have  given  it  to  somebody.  To  whom  have  you  given  it  ? 
I  have  given  it  to  a  pauper  (un  pobre).  Have  you  read  my 
book  ?  I  have  not  quite  read  it.  Has  your  friend  finished 
his  books  ?  He  has  almost  finished  them.  Do  you  under- 
stand me  ?  I  understand  you.  Does  the  Frenchman  under- 
stand us  ?     He  understands  us. 


Exercise  No.  111. 

Does  your  little  brother  know  how  to  spell?  He  does 
know.  Does  he  spell  well?  He  spells  well.  How  has 
your  little  brother  spelt  ?  He  has  spelt  so  so.  How  have 
your  children  written  their  exercises  ?  They  have  written 
them  badly.  Has  my  neighbor  lent  you  his  gloves  ?  He 
has  refused  to  lend  them  to  me.  Do  you  know  Spanish  ? 
I  know  it.  Does  your  son  speak  Italian  ?  He  speaks  it 
well.  How  do  your  friends  speak  ?  They  do  not  speak 
badly.  Do  they  listen  to  what  you  tell  him  ?  They  listen 
to  it.  How  have  you  learned  English  ?  I  have  learned  in 
this  manner.  Did  you  call  me  ?  I  have  not  called  you,  but 
I  have  called  your  brother.  Is  he  coming?  Not  yet 
Where  did  you  wet  your  clothes  ?  I  wetted  them  in  the 
garden.  Will  you  put  them  to  dry  ?  I  have  already  put 
them  to  dr}r.  Does  the  nobleman  wish  to  give  me  any 
thing  to  do  ?  He  wishes  to  give  you  something  to  do 
How  old  are  you  ?  I  am  hardly  eighteen  years  old.  How 
old  is  your  brother  ?  He  is  twenty  years  old.  Are  you  as 
old  as  he  ?  I  am  not  so  old.  How  old  art  thou?  I  am 
about  twelve  years  old.  Am  I  younger  than  you  ?  I  do 
not  know.  How  old  is  your  neighbor  ?  He  is  not  quite 
thirty  years  old.     Are  our  friends  a3  young  as  we  ?     They 


136  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

are  older  than  we.  How  old  are  they  ?  The  one  is  nine- 
teen, and  the  other  twenty  years  old.  Is  your  father  as  old 
as  mine  ?    He  is  older  than  yours. 


Exercise  No.  112. 

Do  you  understand  what  we  are  telling  you  ?  We  under- 
stand it.  Dost  thou  understand  Spanish  ?  I  do  not  under- 
stand it  yet,  but  I  am  learning  it.  Do  we  understand 
English?  We  do  not  understand  it.  Do  the  English 
understand  us  ?  They  understand  us.  Do  we  understand 
them?  We  hardly  understand  them.  Do  we  hear  any 
noise  ?  We  hear  nothing.  Have  you  heard  the  roaring  of 
the  wind?  I  have  heard  it.  What  do  you  hear?  I  hear 
the  barking  of  the  dogs.  Whose  dog  is  this  ?  It  is  the  dog 
of  the  Scotchman.  Have  you  lost  your  stick  ?  I  have  not 
lost  it.  Has  your  servant  lost  my  notes?  He  has  lost 
them.  Did  you  go  to  the  ball  ?  I  did  go.  Where  did  you 
remain?  I  remained  at  home.  Where  did  the  nobleman 
remain?  He  remained  in  the  garden.  Has  your  father 
lost  as  much  money  as  I  ?  He  has  lost  more  than  you. 
How  much  have  I  lost  ?  You  have  hardly  lost  one  dollar. 
Did  your  friends  remain  at  the  ball  ?  They  remained  there. 
Do  you  know  as  much  as  the  English  physician  ?  I  do  not 
know  as  much  as  he.  How  many  books  have  you  read  ?  I 
have  hardly  read  two.  Do  you  wait  for  any  one  ?  I  wait 
for  no  one.  Do  you  wait  for  the  man  whom  I  saw  this 
morning  ?  I  wait  for  him.  Art  thou  waiting  for  thy  book  ? 
I  am  waiting  for  it.  Do  you  expect  your  father  this  evening  ? 
I  do  expect  him.  Do  you  expect  any  friends  ?  I  do  expect 
some.  Where  is  your  little  brother  ?  He  is  gone  with  the 
nobleman.  Is  he  gone  to  the  play  with  him  ?  He  is  gone 
there  with  him. 


Exercise  No.  113. 

A  lawyer  addressing  the  court  one  day,  spoke  so  long 
without  imparting  any  information,  that  the  judge  (jvez) 
interrupted  him  by  remarking  that  he  appeared  like  {se 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


187 


parecia)  Necessity.  The  lawyer  demanded  the  reason  of 
such  a  comparison,  and  the  judge  replied,  "  Because 
Necessity  knows  no  law," 

A  young  lady  went  to  confess  to  a  priest.  He,  after 
having  made  many  inquiries  relative  to  her  confession, 
appeared  desirous  of  knowing  whom  he  confessed,  and 
asked  her  name.  The  young  lady  replied  :  "  Father,  my 
name  is  not  a  sin." 


FORTY-SECOND  LESSON. 


THE    FUTURE. 


The  Future  Absolute  is  formed,  in  all  Spanish  verbs,  by  adding  tc  the 
infinitive  an  accented  e  for  the  first  person  singular,  as  for  the  2d.,  and 
for  the  3d.  an  accented  d  ;  for  the  first  person  plural  imos,  for  the  2d. 
as,  and  for  the  3d.  an. 


EXAMPLES. 


TO  FINISH. 

I  shall  or  will  finish.     We,  etc. 
You,  etc.  (Sing,  and  Plur.) 
He,  etc.     They,  etc. 
Thou  shalt  or  wilt  finish. 

TO  SEE. 

I  shall  or  will  see.     We,  etc. 
Y6u,  etc.  (Sing,  and  Plur.) 
He,  etc.     They,  etc. 
Thou  shalt  or  wilt  see. 

To  SERVE. 

I  shall  or  will  serve.     We,  etc. 
You,  etc.  (Sing,  and  Plur.) 
He,  etc.     They,  etc. 
Thou  shalt  or  wilt  serve. 


ACABAR. 

Acabar^.     Acabar£??ios. 
Vd.  acabard.     Vds.  acabardw. 
El  acabard.     Ellos  acabardn. 
Tu  acabards. 


Ver. 
YerS.     "Vertmos. 
Vd.  vera.     Vds.  verdn. 
El  vera.     Ellos  verdn. 
Tu  verds. 


Server. 
Servird.     Ssrvir^mos. 
Vd.  servird.     Vds.  servirdn. 
El  servird.     Ellos  servirdn. 
Tu  servirds. 


The  following  verbs,  and  the  compounds  of  the  first  eight,  form  all 
the  exceptions  to  our  rule  on  the  formation  of  the  future.  We  need  not 
give  all  the  persons,  as  the  first  person  singular  of  the  exceptions  beiug 
once  known,  all  the  others  are  also  known. 


To  have.     I  shall  or  will  have. 

To  go  out.     I  shall  or  will  go  out. 

To  do.     I  shall  or  will  do. 

To  make.     I  shall  or  will  make. 


Haber. 
Tener. 
Salir. 

•  Hacer. 


Yo  habre*. 
"  tendre. 
"  saldre\ 

"  har<S 


188 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


To  put.     I  shall  or  will  put. 

To  come.     I  shall  or  will  come. 

To  be  contained.     To  hold  in.     I,  &c. 

To  be  worth.     I  shall  or  will  be  worth. 

To  say.     I  shall  or  will  say. 

To  tell.     I  shall  or  will  tell. 

To  know.     I  shall  or  will  know. 

To  be  able  (can)  •    I  shall  or  will  be  able. 

To  be  willing.     I  shall  or  will  be  willing. 

To  rot.     I  shali  or  will  rot. 


Poner. 
Venir. 
Caber. 
Valer. 

j-  Decir. 

Saber. 
Poder 
Querer. 
Podrir. 


pondre". 
vend  re. 
cabre'. 
valdre*. 

diie'. 

sabre*. 
podre'. 
querr^. 
pudrire*. 


When  the  verb  to  hold,  meaning  to  contain,  is  used  in  English,  the 
verb  caber  is  generally  employed  in  Spanish  ;  as :  This  trunk  cannot 
bold  all  my  clothes,  Toda  mi  ropa  no  puede  caber  en  este  haul,  which 
means  literally  :  All  my  clothes  cannot  hold  in  this  trunk.  Thus,  it  will 
be  perceived  that  the  passive  form  is  preferred  in  Spanish. 


Shall  or  will  he  have  money  ? 
He  will  have  some. 
He  will  not  have  any. 
When  will  you  do  your  exercises  ? 
[  will  do  them  soon  (ere  long). 
My  brother  will  do  his  exercises  to- 
morrow. 
Next  Monday. 
Last  Monday. 
Next  month. 

This  month. 
This  country. 


i  Tendril  el  dinero  ? 

El  tendra. 

El  no  tendra. 

I  Cuando  hara  Vd.  sus  ejercicios  ? 

Los  hare'  pronto. 

Mi  hermano  hara  sus  ejercicios  nia^ 

flana. 
El  liines  proximo. 
El  lunes  pasado. 
El  mes  pr6ximo  (que  entra  or  que 

viene). 
Este  mes. 
Este  pais. 


When  will  your  cousin  go  to  the 

concert  ? 
He  will  go  next  Tuesday. 
Shall  you  (plural)  go  anywhere  ? 
We  shall  go  nowhere. 
Will  he  send  me  the  book  ? 
He  will  send  it  to  you,  if  he  has 

done  with  it. 
Will  you  be  at  home  this  evening  ? 
I  shall  be  there. 
Will  your  father  be  at  home  ? 
He  will  be  there. 
Will  your  cousins  be  there  ? 
They  will  be  there. 


Will  he  send  me  the  books  ? 
He  will  send  them  to  you. 


I  Cuando  ira  al  concierto  su  pnmo 

de  Vd.  ? 
Ira  el  martes  pr6ximo. 
,;  Iran  Vds.  a  alguna  parte  ? 
No  iremos  a  ninguna  parte. 
I  Me  enviara  el  libro  ? 
Se  lo  enviara  a  Vd.  si  lo  ha  conclu- 

ido. 
I  Estara  Vd.  en  casa  esta  noche  ? 
Yo  estare. 

I  Estara  en  casa  su  padre  de  Vd.  ? 
El  estara. 

I  Estaran  alii  sus  primos  de  Vd.  V 
Ellos  estaran  alii. 


I  Me  enviara  el  los  libios  ? 
Se  los  enviara  4  Vd. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


189 


Will  you  send  some  ink  to  my 
cc  unting-house  ? 

I  will  send  some  thither. 

Will  you  be  able  to  pay  your  shoe- 
maker ? 

I  have  lost  my  money,  so  that  I 
shall  not  be  able  to  pay  him. 

My  friend  has  lost  his  pocket-book, 
so  that  he  will  not  be  able  to  pay 
for  his  boots. 


Will  you  hold  any  thing  ? 

I  will  hold  your  umbrella. 

Will  your  friend  come  to  my  con- 
cert? 

He  will  come. 

Will  you  come  ? 

I  will  come. 

Will  it  be  necessary  to  go  to  the 
market? 

It  will  be  necessary  to  go  to-morrow 
morning. 

It  will  not  ba  necessary  to  go. 

Will  you  see  my  father  to-day  ? 


I  Enviara  Vd.  tinta  a  mi  escrittrio  ? 

Yo  enviare. 

I  Podra  Vd.  pagar  a  su  zapatero  ? 

He  perdido   mi  dinero,  de  suerte 

que  no  podre  pagarle. 
Mi  amigo  ha  perdido  su  cartera,  de 

modo  que  no  podra  pagar  sus 

botas. 


,;.Tendra  Vd.  alguna  cosa? 
Tendre  su  paraguas  de  Vd. 
,;  Vendra  su  amigo   de  Vd.    a   mi 

concierto? 
El  vendra. 
i  Vendra  Vd.  ? 
Yo  vendre\ 
I  Sara  menester  (necesario  or  pro- 

ciso)  ir  al  mercado  ? 
Sera   menester   (necesario  or  pre- 

ciso)  ir  maiiana  por  la  maiiana. 
No  sera  manester  (or  &c.)  ir. 
I  Veran  Vds.  a  mi  padre  hoy 


To  owe. 

Deber. 

Assiduous. 

Laborioso. 

Idle. 

Perezoso. 

Naughty. 

Malo. 

To  despise. 

Despreciar. 

To  punish. 

Castigar. 

Exercise  No.  114. 

Will  you  have  any  books  ?  I  shall  have  some.  Who  will 
give  you  any  ?  My  uncle  will  give  me  some.  When  will 
your  cousin  have  money?  He  will  have  some  next  month. 
How  much  money  shall  you  have  ?  I  shall  have  thirty-iive 
dollars.  Who  will  have  good  friends  ?  The  English  will 
have  some.  Will  your  father  be  at  home  this  evening  ?  He 
will  be  at  home.  Will  you  be  there  ?  I  shall  also  be  there. 
Will  your  uncle  go  out  to-day?  He  will  go  out  if  it  is  line 
weather  (si  hace  buen  t tempo).  Shall  you  go  out?  I  shall 
go  out,  if  it  does  not  rain  (llueve).     Will  you  love  my  son? 


190  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

I  shall  love  him,  if  he  is  good.  Will  you  pay  your  shoema- 
ker? I  shall  pay  him  if  I  receive  my  money.  Will  you 
love  my  children  ?  If  they  are  good  and  assiduous  I  shall 
love  them  ;  but  if  they  are  idle  and  naughty  I  shall  despise 
and  punish  them.  Am  I  right  in  speaking  thus  ?  You  are 
right.  Is  your  friend  still  writing?  He  is  still  writing. 
Have  you  not  done  speaking?  I  shall  soon  have  done. 
Have  our  friends  done  reading  ?  They  will  soon  have  done. 
Has  the  tailor  made  my  coat  ?  He  has  not  made  it  yet  ; 
but  he  will  soon  make  it.  .When  will  he  make  it  ?  When 
he  shall  have  (tenga)  time.  When  will  you  do  your  exer- 
cises ?  I  shall  do  them  when  I  have  (tenga)  time.  When 
will  your  brother  do  his  ?  He  will  do  them  next  Saturday. 
Wilt  thou  come  to  me?  I  will  come.  When  wilt  thou 
come  ?  I  will  come  next  Friday.  When  did  you  see  my 
uncle  ?  I  saw  him  last  Sunday.  Will  your  cousins  go  to 
the  ball  next  Tuesday?  They  will  go.  Will  you  come  to 
my  concert  ?     I  will  come  if  I  am  not  ill. 


Exercise  No.  115. 

When  will  you  send  me  the  money  which  you  owe  me 
I  will  send  it  to  you  soon.  Will  your  brothers  send  me  the 
books  which  I  have  lent  them  ?  They  will  send  them  to 
you.  When  will  they  send  them  to  me  ?  They  will  send 
them  to  you  next  month.  Will  you  be  able  to  pay  me  what 
you  owe  me  ?  I  shall  not  be  able  to  pay  it  to  you,  for  I 
have  lost  all  my  money.  Will  the  American  be  able  to  pay 
for  his  shoes  ?  He  has  lost  his  pocket-book,  so  that  he  will 
not  be  able  to  pay  for  them.  Will  it  be  necessary  to  send 
for  the  physician  ?  Nobody  is  ill,  so  that  it  will  not  be 
necessary  to  send  for  him.  Will  it  be  necessary  to  go  to 
the  market  to-morrow?  It  will  be  necessary  to  go  thither, 
for  we  want  some  beef  (vaca),  some  bread  and  some  wine. 
Will  you  see  your  father  to-day?  I  shall  see  him.  Where 
will  he  be  ?  He  will  be  at  his  counting-house.  Will  you 
go  to  the  ball  to-night?  I  shall  not  go,  for  I  am  too  ill  to 
go  to  it.    Will  your  friend  go  ?    He  will  go,  if  you  go.    Will 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  191 

our  neighbors  go  ?     They  will  not  go  ;  they  will  remain  at- 
home,  for  they  have  a  great  deal  to  do. 


Exercise  No.  116. 

Shall  I  come  to-morrow  ?  Yes,  and  I  will  tell  you  many 
things  that  will  make  you  laugh  very  mucb.  Shall  we  go 
out  to-morrow  ?  I  do  not  know  if  it  will  be  worth  the  trou- 
ble, but  we  shall  know  this  evening.  Will  you  not  be  able 
to  go  with  me  ?  I  hope  (  Expero)  that  I  shall  be  able  to  go 
with  you  ;  but  I  do  not  know  if  my  sister  will  be  willing  to 
go  with  us.  Will  that  pine-apple  get  rotten  ?  I  think  it 
will  (Oreo  que  se  pudrird,  or  que  s£\.  Will  you  put  on  your 
new  coat  to-morrow  ?  I  will  put  it  on  when  I  go  (vat/a)  to 
the  concert.  Will  your  brothers  be  willing  to  accompany 
us?  I  think  they  will  (que  querrdn,  or  que  Hi).  Where  will 
you  put  all  the  books  that  you  wish  to  buy  ?  I  shall  put 
them  in  my  book-case  (entante).  Do  you  think  it  will  hold 
them?  I  think  it  will  (que  cabrdn,  or  que  Hi).  I  wonder  if 
the  stage  will  hold  us  all  ?  We  shall  know  it  very  soon.  Will 
you  come  to  my  ball  ?  I  will  come,  and  I  hope  to  have  a 
good  time  there.  Do  you  think  that  my  father  will  be  will- 
ing that  I  should  go  (vaya)  ?  I  think  he  will  (que  querrd, 
or  que  si).  Who  will  do  my  work  to-morrow  ?  I  will  do  it 
for  you.  What  will  you  do  this  evening  ?  I  will  make  a 
table. 


Exercise  No.  117. 

An  Italian  greatly  addicted  to  gaming  (al  juego)  and  in 
bad  circumstances,  used  to  say  (acostumbraba  deeir)  when- 
ever he  lost :  O  treacherous  Fortune !  (/  0  Foriuna  trai- 
dora!)  thou  canst  make  me  lose,  but  thou  shalt  never  force 
me  (podrdss  hacerme)  to  pay. 

Philip,  King  of  Macedon  (Macedonia),  wrote  to  Aristotle 
(Arislbteles)  the  following  letter  :  "  I  give  you  notice  that  I 
have  a  son  born  (Pongo  en  vuedra  noticia  que  acaba  de  nacerme 
un  hijo).     I  rendei  thanks  to  the  gods,  not  so  much  for  his 


192 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


birth  (nacimiento)  as  for  the  happiness  {felicidad)  he  has  in 
coming  into  the  world  {de  haber  venido  al  mundo)  whilst 
such  a  man  as  Aristotle  is  living  {mienlras  vive  un  Aria- 
ibteles)  ;  for  I  hope  that,  brought  up  by  you,  he  will  prove 
i  himself  {Regard  a  aer)  worthy  of  the  glory  of  his  father  and 
of  the  empire  that  I  will  leave  him." 

Alexander  {Alejandro)  did  not  love  Aristotle  less  than  his 
own  father  ;  for,  said  he,  to  the  one  I  am  indebted  for  living 
{debo  el  vivir),  and  to  the  other  for  my  living  well  {el  vivtr 
lien). 

A  man  who  had  contributed  to  make  King  Philip  master 
of  the  city  of  Olynthus  {Olinto),  of  which  he  was  a  citizen 
{ciudadano),  complained  to  him  that  the  Lacedemonians 
{Lacedemonioa)  called  him  traitor  {traidor).  I  don't  know 
why  you  wonder  at  it  {os  adm.ira.is  de  ello),  said  the  King  ; 
the  Lacedemonians  are  naturally  clownish  and  unmannerly 
{naluralmente  non  ruslicos  y  groseros),  and  call  everything  by 
its  name. 


FOKTY-THIRD  LESSON. 


To  bite — bitten. 
To  beat — beaten. 


To  strike— struck. 


Why  do  you  beat  the  dog  ? 

I  beat  him  (it)  because  he  (it)  has 

bitten  me. 
Have  the  enemy  been  beaten  ? 


How  much  do  you  owe  me  ? 
I  owe  you  five  hundred  dollars. 
Do  our  neighbors  owe  as  much  as 

we? 
We  owe  more  than  they. 
How  much  dost  thou  owe  ? 
A  hundred. 
A  hundred  dollars. 


Morder.  * 

Derrotar. 

Batir. 

Pegar. 

Golpear. 

Apalear. 

Dar,*  {familiar)  dado. 

I  Por  que'  le  pega  Vd.  al  perro  ? 

Le  pego  porque  me  ha  mordido. 

I  Ha  sido  derrotado  el  enemigo  ? 


I  Cuanto  me  debe  Vd.  ? 

Le  debo  a  Vd.  quinientos  pesos. 

^Deben     nuestros    vecinos    tauto 

como  nosotros  ? 
Nosotros  debemos  mas  que  ellos. 
I  Cuanto  debes  tii  ? 
Ciento. 
Cien  pesos. 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


193 


Ate  you  t<?      :  Have  you  to . .  ? 

I  am  to  . .     I  have  to . . 

Where  have  you  to  go  to  this  morn- 
ing? 

I  am  to  go  to  the  storehouse. 

hi  your  brother  to  come  hither  to- 
day? 

Soon.      Shortly. 

He  is  to  come  hither  soon. 


j  i  Tiene  Vd.  que . .?     Dsbo  Vd. . .  , 

Ha  de  . .  Vd. . .  ? 
f  Tengo  que . .  Debo . .  He  de. . . 
|  I  Adonde  tiene  Vd.    que  ir  esta 

mafia  na  ? 
t  Tengo  que  ir  al  almaeen. 
t  i  Ha   de  venir  aqui  hoy  su  her- 

mano  de  Vd.? 

Pronto.     Luego. 
f  El  debe  estar  aqui  pronto 


To  return.  -j 

At  what  o'clock  do  you  return  from 

the  market? 
I  return  at  twelve  o'clock. 


Volver.  * 

Regresar. 

I A  que*  hora  vuelve  Vd.  del  mer- 

cado.  ? 
Vuelvo  a  las  doce. 


From  it.    From  there.     Thence. 
Does  the  servant  return  early  from 

the  warehouse  ? 
He  returns  from  it  at  six  o'clock 

in  the  morning. 
At  nine  o'clock  in  the  morning. 
At  five  o'clock  in  the  afternoon. 
At  eleven  o'clock  at  night. 


De  ALLf.     De  aliX     De  ahi. 

,;  Vuelve  el  criado  temprano  del  al- 
maeen ? 

Vuelve  de  alii  a  las  seis  de  la 
mafiana. 

A  las  nueve  de  la  mafiana. 

A  las  cinco  de  la  tarde. 

A  las  once  de  la  noche. 


How  long  ? 

During.    For.  -j 

How  long  has  he  remained  there  ? 

A.  minute. 

An  hour. 

A  day. 

A  week. 

A  month. 

A  year. 

The  summer. 

The  winter. 


,;  Cuanto  ttempo  ? 

Durante.     Por  espacio  de. 

Por  (1) 
j  Cuanto  tiempo  ha  estado  el  allf  ? 
Un  minuto. 
Una  hora. 
Un  dia. 
Una  semana. 
Un  mes. 
Un  afio. 

El  verano,  el  estfo. 
El  invierno. 


The  names  of  seasons,  months,  and  days,  are  of  the  masculine  gander, 
except  la  prbnavera,  the  spring,  which  is  feminine. 


1 .  Durante  or  por  espacio  de,  when  it  signifies  for,  may  be  left  out  in 
Spanish  as  in  English,  but  it  is  then  understood. 


194 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


To  live.     To  reside.     To  STOP. 
Where  do  you  live  ? 
I  live  in  Queen  street,  number  one. 

Where  has  your  brother  lived  ? 

He  has  lived  in  King  street,  num- 
ber fourteen. 

Dost  thou  live  at  thy  brother's 
house  ? 

I  do  not  live  with  him,  but  at  my 
father's. 

Does  your  friend  still  live  where  I 
lived? 

He  lives  no  longer  where  you  lived. 


Long  (speaking  of  time). 

No  LONGER. 

How  long  were  you   speaking  to 

the  man  ? 
I  spoke  to  him  for  two  hours. 

Did    you   remain    long  with    my 

father  ? 
I  did  not  remain  long. 
I  remained  with  him  an  hour. 


Yivie.     Kestdir.     Parar. 

;  En  doude  vive  Vd.  ? 

Vivo  en  la  calle  de  la  Eeina- 
niimero  uno. 

<;En  donde  ha  vivido  su  hermano 
de  Vd.  ? 

Ha  vivido  en  la  calle  del  Key,  nii- 
mero catorce. 

I  Vives  tu  en  casa  de  tu  hermano  ? 

No  vivo  en  su  casa,  sino  en  casa  de 

mi  padre. 
I  Vive  todavia  su  amigo  de  Vd.  en 

donde  yo  vivia  ? 
Ya  no  vive  en  d6nde  Vd.  vivia. 


mucho  tiempo.     laego  tiempo. 
Ya  no.     Ya  no— mas. 
I  Cuanto  tiempo  ha  estado  Vd.  ha- 

blando  al  hombre  ? 
Le  he  hablado  durante  or  por  es- 

pacio  de  dos  horas. 
I  Ha  estado  Vd.  mucho  tiempo  con 

mi  padre  ? 
No  he  estado  mucho  tiempo. 
He  estado  con  el  una  hora. 


Exercise  No.  118. 


Why  do  you  not  drink  ?  I  do  not  drink,  because  I  am 
not  thirsty.  Why  do  you  pick  up  this  ribbon?  I  pick  it 
up,  because  I  want  it.  Why  do  you  lend  money  to  this 
man  ?  I  lend  him  some,  because  he  wants  it.  Why  does 
your  brother  study  ?  He  studies,  because  he  wishes  to 
learn  Spanish.  Has  your  cousin  drank  already  ?  He  has 
not  drank  yet,  because  he  has  not  yet  been  thirsty.  Does 
the  servant  show  you  the  floor  which  he  sweeps  ?  He  does 
not  show  me  that  which  he  sweeps  now,  but  that  which  he 
swept  yesterday.  Why  do  you  love  that  man  ?  I  love  him 
because  he  is  good.  Why  does  your  neighbor  beat  his  dog  ? 
Because  it  bas  bitten  his  boy.  Why  do  our  friends  love  us  ? 
They  love  us,  because  we  are  (somox)  good.  Why  do  you 
bring  me  wine  ?    I  bring  you  some,  because  you  are  thirsty. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  195 

Why  does  the  sailor  drink?  He  drinks,  because  he  is 
thirsty.  Do  you  see  the  sailor  who  is  in  the  ship  ?  I  do 
not  see  the  one  who  is  in  the  ship,  but  the  one  who  is  in 
the  market.  Do  you  read  the  books  which  my  father  has 
given  you?  I  read  them.  Do  you  understand  them?  I 
understand  them  so  so.  Do  you  know  the  Italians  whom 
we  know  ?  We  do  not  know  those  whom  you  know,  but 
we  know  others.  Does  the  shoemaker  mend  the  boots 
which  you  have  sent  him  ?  He  does  not  mend  them,  be- 
cause they  are  worn  out. 


Exercise  No.  119. 

Will  your  servant  return  from  market  early  ?  He  will  not 
return  very  early.  At  what  o'clock  will  your  brother  re- 
turn from  the  ball?  He  will  return  from  it  at  one  o'clock 
in  the  morning.  At  what  o'clock  didst  thou  come  back 
from  thy  friend  ?  I  came  back  at  eleven  o'clock  in  the 
morning.  Didst  thou  remain  long  with  him  ?  I  remained 
with  him  about  an  hour.  How  long  do  you  intend  to  re- 
main at  the  ball  ?  I  intend  to  remain  there  a  few  minutes. 
How  long  did  the  Frenchman  remain  with  you  ?  He  re- 
mained with  me  for  two  hours.  How  long  did  your  brothers 
remain  in  town  (la  ciudad)  ?  They  remained  there  during 
the  winter.  Do  you  intend  to  remain  long  with  us  ?  I 
intend  to  remain  with  you  during  the  summer.  How  much 
do  I  owe  you?  You  do  not  owe  me  much.  How  much  do 
you  owe  your  tailor  ?  I  owe  him  eighty  dollars.  How 
much  dost  thou  owe  thy  shoemaker  ?  I  owe  him  already 
eighty-five  dollars.  Do  I  owe  you  any  thing  ?  You  owe 
me  nothing.  How  much  does  the  Englishman  owe  you  ? 
He  owes  me  more  than  you  do.  Do  the  English  owe  as 
much  as  the  Spaniards  ?  Not  so  much.  Do  I  owe  you  as 
much  as  my  brother  ?  You  owe  me  more  than  he  does. 
Do  our  friends  owe  you  as  much  as  we  do  ?  They  owe  me 
less  than  you  do.  How  much  do  they  owe  you?  They 
owe  me  two  hundred  and  fifty  dollars.  How  much  do  we 
owe  you  ?    You  owe  me  three  hundred  dollars. 


196  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Exercise  No.  120. 

Why  do  you  give  money  to  the  merchant?  I  give  him 
some,  because  he  has  sold  me  something.  Whither  are  you 
to  go  ?  I  am  to  go  to  the  market  Is  your  friend  to  come 
hither  to-day  ?  He  is  to  come  hither.  When  is  he  to 
come  hither?  He  is  to  come  hither  soon.  When  are  our 
sons  to  go  to  the  play  ?  They  are  to  go  to-night.  When 
are  they  to  return  from  it?  They  are  to  return  at  half-past 
ten.  When  are  you  to  go  to  the  physician  ?  I  am  to  go  to 
him  at  ten  o'clock  at  night.  When  is  your  sou  to  return 
from  the  painter's  ?  He  is  to  return  from  him  at  five  o'clock 
in  the  evening.  Where  do  you  live  ?  I  live  in  Q:ieen  street, 
number  one.  Where  does  your  father  live  ?  He  lives  at 
his  friend's  house.  Where  do  your  brothers  live  ?  They 
live  in  King  street,  number  fourteen.  Dost  thou  live  at  thy 
brother's  house?  I  live  at  his  house.  Do  you  still  live 
where  you  did  ?  I  live  there  still.  Does  your  friend  still 
live  where  he  did?  He  no  longer  lives  where  he  did. 
Where  does  he  live  at  present?  He  lives  at  his  father's 
house. 


Exercise  No.  121. 
Give  an  answer  to  the  following  questions  : 

I  Quien  formo  el  mundo  ?  £  Quien  fue  el  primer  hombre  ? 
I  Quien  descubrio  la  America  ?  ^  Quien  fue  el  primer  Pre- 
sidente  de  los  Estados  Unidos?  £  Quien  fue  el  segundo  ? 
I  Quien  invento  la  imprenta  ?  <;  Quien  invento  el  vapor  ? 
I  Quien  conquisto  a  Mejico  ?  J  En  que  dia  nacio  Jorge 
Washington?  £Eu  donde  murio  Napoleon  Bonaparte? 
^En  que  ano  comenzo  la  guerra  de  la  revolucion  de  las 
colonias  ingiesas  ?  <;  En  que  ano  se  firmo  la  Declaracion 
de  su'independencia  ?  <:  Quien  la  redacto  ?  <?,  Cuantos  afios 
duro  esta  guerra  ?  £  Quien  formo  la  actual  Constitucion  de 
los  Estados  Unidos?  £  Quien  conquisto  el  Peru?  £  Quien 
causo  la  destruction  de  Troya?  £  Quien  hallo  aMoises? 
I  Quien  liberto  a  la  America  del  Sur  del  poder  de  Espana  ? 
i  Quien  conquisto  la  Persia  ?     £  En  que  ano  se  dio  la  batalla 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


197 


de  Waterloo?  <iQuien  ia  gano  ?  £  Quien  invento  el  tele- 
grafo  ?  i  Quien  invento  el  daguerreotipo  ?  £  Quien  descu- 
brio  ia  brujula  ? 

^Cual  es  la  cosa  mas  antigua  ?  Dios,  pues  Dios  ha  existido 
siempre.  £  Cual  es  la  (cosa)  mas  bella  ?  El  mundo,  pues 
es  la  obra  de  Dios.  iCual  es  la  (cosa)  mas  grande  ?  El 
espacio,  pues  lo  comprende  todo.  £  Cual  es  la  (cosa)  mejor  ? 
La  virtud,  pues  sin  ella  no  se  puede  decir  ni  hacer  nada 
bueno.  i  Cual  es  la  (cosa)  mas  facil?  Dar  consejos.  ^Cual 
es  la  (cosa)  mas  dificil  ?     Conocerse  a  si  mismo. 


FOKTY-FOURTH  LESSON. 


THE   PAST    FUTUKK. 


The  past  or  compound  Future  is  formed  from  the  future  of  the  Aux'< 
liary,  and  the  past  participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 


I  shall  have  loved. 
You  will  have  loved. 
He  {or  she)  will  have  loved. 
We  shall  have  loved. 
You  will  have  loved. 
They  will  have  loved. 
Thou  wilt  have  loved. 
I  shall  have  been  praised. 

You  will  have  been  praised. 
He  or  she  will  have  been  prais- 
ed. 

We  shall  have  been  praised. 

You  will  have  been  praised. 

They  will  have  been  praised. 
Thou  wilt  have  been  praised. 


Yo  habre"  amado. 

Vd.  habra  amado. 

El  (or  ella)  habra  amado. 

Nosotros  habremos  amado. 

Vds.  habran  amado. 

Ellos  (or  ellas)  habran  amado. 

Tu  habras  amado. 

Yo  habre"  sido  alabado  (or  alabada, 

if  it  is  a  female). 
yd.  habra  sido  alabado  (or  alabada) , 
El  habra  sido  alabado. 
Ella  habra  sido  alabada. 
Nosotros  habre'mos  sido  alabados. 
Nosotras  habre'mos  sido  alabadas. 
Vds.  habran  sido  alabados  (or  ala 

badas). 
Ellos  habran  sido  alabados. 
Ellas  habran  sido  alabadas. 
Tu  habras  sido  alabado  (or  alabada). 


When  you  will  return,  I  shall  have 

my  work  finished. 
When  you  will  arrive,  we  shall  have 

spoken  to  him. 
Will  you  have  written  when  we 

shall  arrive  ? 


Cuando  Vd.  vuelva  (or  este  de  vuel- 
ta),  habre"  concluido  mi  trabajo. 

Cuando  Vd.  llegue,  le  habre'mos 
hablado. 

I  Habra  Vd.  escrito  cuando  llegue- 
mos? 


198 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


By  the  preceding  and  following  examples  it  will  be  perceived  that 
whenever  two  futures  are  used  connected  in  a  sentence  in  English,  the 
cne  that  follows  immediately  after  cuando  que  (and  some  other  words, 
which  will  be  given  at  the  proper  time),  must  be  lendered  in  Spanish 
by  the  Subjunctive  mood. 


When  we  shall  arrive,  he  will  have 

seen  him. 
When  you  will  come,  all  will  be 

over. 
Before  we  shall  arrive,  the  steamer 

will  be  gone. 
Before  the  next  number  will  be  pub- 
lished, I  shall  have  finished  this. 
When  you  will  come,  the  hour  will 

have  struck. 
When  my  father  will  call  me,  I  shall 

have  returned. 
Before  the  help  will  come  to  us,  we 

shall  have  perished. 


Cuando    lleguemos,    el    le    habra 

visto. 
Cuando  Vd.  venga,  todo  se  habra 

concluido. 
Antes  que  lleguemos,  se  habra  ido 

el  vapor. 
Antes  que  se  publique  la  siguiente 

entrega,  habre'  concluido  esta. 
Cuando  Vd.  venga,  habra  dado  la 

hora. 
Cuando  mi  padre  me  Uame,  yo  ha- 
bre' vuelto  (or  estare'  de  vuelta). 
Antes  que  nos  llegue  el  socorro>  ha- 

bremos  perecido 


Idioms  with  Hacer. 


How  is  the  weather? 


It  is  fine  weather. 


Is  it  cold? 

It  is  very  cold. 

Is  it  warm  ? 

It  is  very  warm. 

Is  it  windy  ? 

It  is  very  windy. 

How  long  ago  :(  or 

How  long  is  it  since? 

It  is  three  years  ago. 

How  much  does  that  pitcher  hold  ? 

It  holds  two  pints. 

Virtue  renders  man  happy. 

Will  you  have  my  room  swept  ? 

I  will  have  it  swept. 

I  will  cause  the  servant  to  be  pun- 
ished. 

That  actress  performs  (or  plays) 
her  part  very  well 

1.  As  the  phrase  i  Qui  Uempo  hace  ?  has  a  double  meaning,  viz.  :  How 
is  the  weather  ?  and  How  long  is  it  since  or  ago  ? — in  order  to  avoid  mis- 
undenstanding,  it  would  be  preferable  to  make  use  of  the  nex';  one.  that 
is,  £  Como  estd  el  Uempo  ? 


I  Que*  tiempo  hace  ?  (1) 

I  Como  esta  el  tiempo  ? 

Hace  buen  tiempo. 

Hace  hermoso  tiempo. 

El  tiempo  esta  hermoso. 

I  Hace  frio  ? 

Hace  mucho  frio. 

I  Hace  calor? 

Hace  mucho  calor. 

I  Hace  viento  ? 

Hace  mucho  viento. 

£  Cuanto  tiempo  hace  (or  ha)  ? 

I  Qud  tiempo  hace  (or  ha)  ? 

Hace  tres  afios. 

I  Cuanto  hace  ese  jarro  ? 

Hace  dos  pintas  or  azumbres. 

La  virtud  hace  al  hombre  feliz. 

I  Hard  Vd.  barrer  mi  cuarto  ? 

Lo  hari  barrer. 

Hari  castigar  al  criado. 

Aquella  actriz  hace  (or  representa) 
muy  bien  su  papel. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


199 


Mr.  N makes  a  great  show  (or 

figure)  in  this  city. 

Nobody  minds  him  (or  takes  no- 
tice of  him). 

He  acts  as  Consul. 

He  performs  a  good  action. 

The  steamer  stops  to  take  in  water. 

The  vessel  leaks. 

I  want  to  ask  you  a  question. 

Will  you  play  a  game  at  chess  ? 

You  pay  me  a  compliment. 
Will  you  pay  me  a  visit  ? 
He  boasts  of  every  thing. 
He  faces  any  one. 
He  braves  all  dangers. 

He  keeps  me  waiting  too  long. 

He  exhausts  my  patience. 

The  sun  shines. 

The  moon  shines. 

Never  miud. 

It  is  cool  here. 

We  shall  lodge  (or  sleep)  at  Niagara. 

You  reckon  without  the  host. 


El  Sefior  N . . . .  hace  un  gran  papel 

en  esta  ciudad. 
Nadie  le  hace  caso  (or  se  ocupa  de 

el). 
Hace  de  consul. 
Hace  una  buena  acoion. 
El  vapor    se    detiene    para   hacer 

aguada. 
El  buque  hace  agua. 
Quiero  hacer  a  Vd.  una  pregunta. 
I  Quiere  Vd.   hacer  una  partida  al 

ajedrez? 
Vd.  me  hace  un  cumplimiento. 
I  Me  hard  Vd.  una  visita  ? 
Hace  alarde  de  todo. 
Le  hace  cara  or  frente  a  cualquiera. 
Hace  cara  a  (or  arrostra)  los  peli- 

gros. 
Me  hace  aguardar  demasiado. 
Me  hace  perder  la  paciencia. 
Hace  sol. 
Hace  luna. 
No  le  hace. 
Aqui  hace  fresco. 
Harimos  noche  en  Niagara. 
Vd.  hace  la  cuenta  sin  la  huespeda. 


Idioms  with  Hacer  se. 


Have  you  become  a  merchant  ? 

What  has  become  of  my  umbrella  ? 

What  has  become  of  you  ? 

He  has  become  a  man. 

You  get,  grow  or  become  rich. 

He  gets,  grows  or  becomes  poor. 

He  pretends  to  be  wise. 

He  plays  the  fool. 

He  gets  accustomed  to  every  thing. 

I  will  have  some  one.  to  accompany 

me. 
He  makes  himself  to  be  loved. 
The  vessel  is  setting  sail. 

It  becomes  or  is  becoming  late. 
It  becomes  or  is  becoming  night. 

It  grows  dark. 

It  is  becoming  day. 


I  Se  ha  hecho  Vd.  comerciante  ? 

<;  Qud  se  ha  hecho  de  mi  paraguas  ? 

,;  Que*  .se  ha  hecho  de  Vd  ? 

Se  ha  hecho  hombre. 

Vd.  se  hace  rico. 

Se  hace  pobre. 

Se  hace  el  sabio. 

Se  hace  el  tonto  or  bobo. 

Se  hace  a  todo. 

Me  hart"  acompahar  de  alguno. 

Se  hace  querer. 

El  buque  se  hace  (or  se  eMd  hacier* 

do)  a  la  vela. 
Se  hace  (or  se  estd  haciendo)  tarde. 
Se  hace  (se  estd  haciendo)  noche 

(or  simply  anochece). 
f  Oscurece. 
Se  hace  (se  estd  haciendo)  dia,  (or 

simply  amanece). 


200  THE  SPANISH  TEACH EK. 

The  weather  is  too  hot.  |  El  tiempo  esta  muy  caloroso. 


To  ENTEB,  TO  COME  IN. 

Will  you  go  into  my  room  ? 
I  will  go  in. 
Shall  I  go  in? 
Will  you  walk  in  ? 


To  srr  DOWN. 

To    SIT,   TO  BE  SEATED. 

He  is  seated  upon  the  large  chair 

or  arm-chair. 
She  is  seated  upon  the  bench. 


To  FILL  WITH. 

To  fill  a  bottle  with  wine. 

Do  you  fill  that  bottle  with  water  ? 

I  fill  my  purse  with  money. 

The  purse. 

The  pocket. 


Alone. 
Have  you  come  quite  alone  ? 
No  ;  I  have  brought  all  my  men 
along  with  me. 


To  BEING. 

He  has  brought  all  his  men  with 

him. 
Have    you  brought  your  brother 

along  with  you  ? 
I  have  brought  him  along  with  me. 

The  stable.  j 

The  groom.  ■] 

Have  you  told  the  groom  to  bring 
horse  ? 


LUVO  JUU    LU1U   111 

me  the  horse  ? 


Are  you  bringing  me  my  books  ? 
I  am  bringing  them  to  you. 


To  TAKE,  TO  CAEBT. 

Will  you  take  that  horse  to  the  sta- 
ble? 
I  will  take  it  thither. 


ENTEAE.       PaSAE  ADEIANTE. 

I  Quiere  Vd.  entrar  en  mi  cuarto  f 

Si,  Sefior  ;  entrare'. 

I  Entrare"  ? 

I  Quiere  Vd.  pasar  adelante  T 


Sentaese.  * 

estae  sentado. 
El  esta  sentado  en  el  sillon  {or  la 

silla  de  brazos). 
Ella  -^ita  sentada  en  el  banco. 


Llenae  de. 
Llenar  de  vino  una  botella. 
I  Llena  Vd.  de  agua  esa  botella  ? 
Lleno  de  dinero  mi  bolsa. 
La  bolsa. 
La  faltriquera.     El  bolsillo. 


Solo. 
j  Ha  venido  Vd.  absolutamente  solo  ? 
No  ;  he  traido  toda  mi  jente  con- 
migo. 


Teaee. 
Ha  traido  toda  su  jente  consigo. 

£Ha  traido  Vd.  consigo  a  su  her^ 

mano? 
Lo  he  traido  conmigo. 
La  caballeriza. 
El  establo. 
El  caballerizo. 
El  mozo  de  caballos, 
^Ha   dicho  Vd.    al  caballerizo   or 

mozo  de  caballos  que  traiga  mi 

caballo  ? 
I  Me  trae  Vd.  mis  libros  ? 
Se  los  traigo  a  Vd. 


LliEVAE.       CONDUCIB. 

,;  Quiere  Vd.  llevar  ese  caballo  a  1* 

caballeriza  or  al  establc  ? 
Lo  llevar  e"  alia. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


Are  you  carrying  that  gun  to  my 

father  ? 
I  carry  it  to  him. 
The  cane,  the  stick. 


To  GO  DOWN,  TO  COME  DOWN. 

To  go  down  into  the  well. 

To  go  down  the  hill. 

To  go  down  the  river. 

To  alight  from  one's  horse. 

To  dismount. 

To  alight,  to  get  out. 


To  GO  UP,  TO  MOUNT,  TO  ASCEND. 

To  go  up  the  mountain. 


Where  is  your  brother  gone  1 

He  has  ascended  the  hill. 
To  mount  the  horse. 
To  get  into  the  coach. 


To  GET  ON  BOARD  THE  SHIP. 

To  DESIRE,  TO  BEG,  TO  PRAY, 
TO  REQUEST. 

Will  you  desire  your  brother  to 

come  down  ? 
The  beard. 
The  river. 

The  stream.     The  torrent. 
To  go  or  come  up  the  river. 


Does  it  rain  ? 

It  rains. 

Does  it  snow  ? 

It  snows. 

Is  it  muddy  ? 

]  t  is  muddy. 

Is  it  muddy  out  of  doors  ? 

It  is  very  muddy. 

Is  it  dusty  ? 

It  is  very  dusty. 

Is  it  smoky  ? 

It  is  very  smoky. 

Out  of  doors. 


:  Lleva  Vd. 


201 

fusil  a  mi  padre  ? 


Se  lo  llevo  a  el. 
La  caua,  el  baston. 


Bajar. 

Bajar  al  pozo. 

Bajar  la  colina,  el  cerro. 

Bajar  el  rio. 

f  Apearse  del  caballo. 

Desmontarse. 

f  Apearse,  bajar,  salir  de. 


SUBIR.      MONTAR. 

Subir  el  monte. 


;  Adonde  ha  ido  su  hermaro  de 

Vd.? 
Ha  subido  la  colina. 
Montar  el  caballo. 
Entrar  en  el  coche. 


Embarcarse.     Ib  abordo  del 

BUQUE. 

Desear.      Pedir.      Rogab. 
suplicar. 
I  Quiere  Vd.  suplicar  a  su  he)  oaanc 

de  Vd.  que  baje  ? 
La  barba. 
El  rio. 

La  corriente.     El  torrente. 
Subir  el  rio. 


I  Llueve  ? 

Llueve. 

,;  Nieva  ? 

Nieva. 

I  Hay  lodo  ? 

Hay  lodo. 

,;  Hay  lodo  en  las  calles  ? 

Hay  mucho  lodo. 

,;  Hay  polvo  ? 

Hay  mucho  polvo. 

I  Hay  humo  ? 

Hay  mucho  humo. 

Afuera,  fuera,  en  la  calle. 


202 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


TO  HAVE  LEFT. 

When  I  have  paid  for  the  horse,  I 

shall  have  only  ten  dollars  left. 
How  much  money  have  you  left? 
I  have  one  dollar  left. 


Country  (out  of  town). 
Country  (region). 
Country  (native  land). 
Country-seat. 
Country-house. 

To  take  care. 
To  take  a  walk. 
At  last.     At  length. 
Parents. 


QUEDAB.       SoBBAB. 

Cuando  yo  haya  pagado  el  cabailo, 

solo  me  quedaran  diez  duros. 
(jCuanto  dinero  le  queda  a  Yd.  ? 
Me  queda  un  peso. 


Campo. 

Pais. 

Patria. 

Haciendo  de  campo. 

Casa  de  campo. 


Tener  cuidado.     Cuidar. 

Dar  un  paseo. 

Por  ultimo.     Al  fin. 

Padres. 


Exercise  No.  122. 

Will  you  have  seen  your  father  when  we  shall  return  ? 
When  you  will  return  I  shall  have  seen  him.  Will  all  be 
over  before  I  shall  come  ?  Before  you  will  come  all  will  be 
over.  Shall  we  have  finished  this  number  before  the  next 
will  be  published?  You  will  not  have  yet  finished  this, 
when  the  next  will  be  published  ;  because  it  will  soon  be 
published.  Will  you  soon  be  back  ?  I  shall  be  back  in  two 
years.  Will  you  be  back  when  we  shall  want  you  ?  When 
you  will  want  me  I  shall  have  returned.  Will  you  have  told 
him  what  we  are  looking  for,  when  we  shall  see  him  ?  I 
shall  have  told  it  to  him  already.  Will  you  have  sent  me 
back  my  book,  when  my  brother  will  want  it  ?  I  shall  have 
sent  it  back  to  you.  Will  they  have  written  when  we  shall 
speak  to  them  ?  They  will  already  have  written.  Will  he 
be  banished  when  he  will  be  eighteen  years  of  age  ?  Be- 
fore he  will  be  seventeen  he  will  have  been  banished.  Will 
the  book  have  been  printed  when  we  shall  return  ?  When 
you  will  return,  the  book  will  have  been  printed.  Will  my 
father  be  dead  when  my  brother  will  arrrve  home  ?  When 
your  brother  will  arrive  home,  your  father  will  not  be  dead. 
Will  the  servant  have  put  in  its  place  my  cousin's  book, 
when  he  will  come?  When  your  cousin  will  come,  the 
servant  will  have  put  the  book  in  its  place.     Will  my  aunt 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES.  203 

have  already  given  her  order  ?     "Will  the  doors  be  opened 

when  we  shall  arrive  there  ?     "When  you  will  arrive,  the 
doors  will  yet  be  shut  (cerradas). 


Exercise  No.  123. 

Will  your  parents  go  to  the  country  to-morrow  ?  They 
will  not  go,  for  it  is  too  dusty.  Shall  we  take  a  walk  to- 
day ?  We  will  not,  for  it  is  too  muddy  out  of  doors.  Do 
you  see  the  country-house  of  my  aunt,  behind  (detras  de) 
that  hill  ?  I  see  it.  Shall  we  go  in  ?  We  will  go  in,  if 
you  like.  Will  you  go  into  that  room  ?  I  shall  not  go  into 
it,  for  it  is  smoky.  I  wish  you  good  morning,  Madam. 
Will  you  not  come  in  ?  Will  you  not  sit  down  ?  I  will  sit 
down  upon  this  large  chair.  Will  you  tell  me  what  has  be- 
come of  your  brother  ?  I  will  tell  you.  Where  is  your 
sister?  Do  you  not  see  her?  She  sits  upon  the  bench.  Is 
your  father  seated  upon  the  bench  ?  No,  he  sits  upon  the 
chair.  Hast  thou  spent  all  thy  money  ?  I  have  not  spent 
all.  How  much  hast  thou  left  ?  I  have  not  much  left,  I 
have  but  ten  dollars  left.  How  much  money  have  thy 
sisters  left  ?  They  have  but  three  dollars  left.  Have  you 
money  enough  left  to  pay  the  tailor  ?  I  have  enough  left  to 
pay  him  ;  but  if  I  pay  him,  I  shall  have  but  little  left.  How 
much  money  will  your  brothers  have  left  when  they  shall 
have  paid  for  their  horses?  They  will  have  a  hundred 
dollars  left.  When  will  you  go  to  Havana  ?  I  shall  go  as 
soon  as  I  have  (luego  que  haya)  learned  Spanish.  When 
will  your  brothers  go  to  France?  They  will  go  thither  as 
soon  as  they  know  (sepan)  French.  When  will  they  learn 
it?  They  will  learn  it  when  they  have  found  a  good 
teacher.  How  much  money  shall  we  have  left  when  we  have 
paid  for  our  horses?  When  we  have  paid  for  them  we 
shall  have  only  a  hundred  dollars  left. 


Exercise  No.  124. 

Do  you  gain  any  thing  by  (en)  that  business  ?     I  do  not 
gain  much  by  it ;  but  my  brother  gains  a  good  deal  by  it ; 


204:  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

he  fills  his  purse  with  money.  How  much  money  have  you 
gained  ?  I  have  gained  only  a  little  ;  but  my  cousin  has 
gained  much  by  it  ;  he  has  filled  his  pocket  with  money. 
With  what  have  you  filled  that  bottle  ?  I  have  filled  it 
with  wine.  Will  this  man  take  care  of  my  horse  ?  He  will 
take  care  of  it.  Who  will  take  care  of  my  servant  V  I  will 
take  care  of  him.  Does  your  servant  take  care  of  your 
horses  ?  He  does  take  care  of  them.  Is  he  taking  care  of 
your  clothes  ?  He  takes  care  of  them,  for  he  brushes  them 
every  morning.  Have  you  ever  drank  Madeira  wine  {vino 
de  Madera)  J  I  have  never  drank  any.  Is  it  long  since 
you  saw  my  parents?     It  is  almost  three  years  since. 


Exercise  No.  125. 

Is  your  father  arrived  ab  last  ?  Every  body  ( Todos)  says 
that  he  has  arrived,  but  I  have  not  seen  him  yet.  Are  you 
pleased  with  your  servant?  I  am  pleased  with  him,  for  he 
is  fit  for  any  thing  {apto  para  todo).  What  doors  lie  know  ? 
He  knows  every  thing  {de  todo).  Can  he  ride  {Sabe  montar 
a  caballo)  ?  He  can.  Has  your  brother  returned  at  last 
from  England  ?  He  has  returned  thence,  and  has  brought 
you  a  fine  horse.  Has  he  told  his  groom  to  bring  it  to  me  ? 
He  has  told  him  to  bring  it  to  you.  What  do  you  think 
{Que  le  parece  a  Vd.,  or  Que  dice  Vd.)  of  that  horse?  I 
think  that  it  is  a  fine  and  good  one  {Me  parece  que  es  hermoxo 
y  bueno),  and  I  beg  you  to  lead  it  into  the  stable.  In  what 
did  you  spend  your  time  yesterday  ?  I  went  to  the  concert, 
and  afterwards  {despues)  to  the  play.  When  did  that  man 
go  down  into  the  well  ?  pe  went  down  into  it  this  morn- 
ing. Has  he  not  come  up  again  yet  {vuelto  a  subir)  f  He 
came  up  an  hour  ago.  Where  is  your  brother  ?  He  is  in 
his  room.  Will  you  tell  him  to  come  down  ?  I  will  tell  him 
bo,  but  he  is  not  dressed  yet.  Is  your  friend  still  on  the 
mountain  ?  He  has  already  come  down.  Did  you  go  down 
or  up  the  river  ?  We  went  down  it.  Did  my  cousin  speak 
to  you  before  he  started  {antes  de  partir)  ?  He  spoke  to  mo 
before  he  got  into  the  coach.  Have  you  seen  my  brother  ? 
I  saw  him  before  I  went  on  board  the  ship.     Is  it  better  to 


% 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


205 


get  into  a  coach  than  to  go  on  board  the  ship  ?  It  is  not 
worth  while  to  get  into  a  coach,  nor  to  go  on  board  a  ship 
when  one  has  no  wish  to  travel  (deseo  de  viajar). 


Exercise  No.  126. 

The  Ass  and  the  Wild  Boar. 

An  ass  had  the  impudence  to  follow  a  wild  boar  (jabali) 
and  bray  near  him  to  (para)  insult  him.  The  courageous 
animal  was  at  first  (at  pronto)  enraged  ;  but  turning  his 
(/a)  head,  and  seeing  whence  the  insult  came,  he  continued 
quietly  on  his  way,  without  honoring  the  despicable  animal 
with  a  single  word.  Silence  and  contempt  are  the  .only 
revenge  that  we  ought  to  take  of  fools. 


FORTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 

THE    CONDITIONAL,    OR   POTENTIAL   PRESENT. 

This  mood  is  formed  by  adding  to  the  Infinitive  of  any  of  the  three 
conjugations. 


SINGULAB. 

PLURAL. 

1st  Per. 

2d  Per. 

3d  Per. 

1st  Per. 

2d  Per. 

3d  Per. 

ia. 

ias. 

ia. 

1   iamos. 

iais. 

ian. 

To   SPEA.K. 

1  should  speak.  We  should  speak. 
You  should  speak.  (Sing.  andPlur.) 
He    should    speak.    They    should 

speak. 
Thou  wouldst  speak. 


To  BE. 
I  should  be.    We  should  be. 

You  would  be.    (Sing*  and  Plur.) 

He  would  be .    They  would  be . 

Thou  wouldst  be. 


Hablab. 
Yo  hablaria .  Nosotros  hablar iamos . 
Vd.  Hablaria.    Vds.  hablarian. 
El  hablaria.    Ellos  hablarian. 

Tu  hablarias. 


See,  or  Estab. 
Yo  seria  or  estaria.    Nosotros  ?.e 

riamos  or  estariamos. 
Vd.  seria  or  estaria.    Vd.  serian  or 

estarian. 
El  seria  or  estaria.    Ellos  serian  or 

estarian . 
Tu  serias  or  estarias. 


206 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


The  following;  Verbs  form  all  the  exceptions  to  our  rule  for  the  forma- 
tion of  the  Conditional.  It  must  be  remembered  that  the  lirst  personal 
singular  of  the  exceptions  being  once  known,  all  the  other  persons  are 
likewise  known. 


To  be  contained,    to  hold  in.    1 1  Caber.    Yo  cabria. 
should  be  contained. 
»  To   tell  or  say.    I  should  tell  or    Decir.    Yo  diria. 
say. 

and  its  compounds,  except  maldecir  (to  curse),  and 
bendecir  (to  bless),  which  follow  the  general  rule. 


To  have.     I  should  have, 

To  make,  to  do.    I  should  make, 

do. 
To  be  able.    I  should  be  able. 
To  put,  place.  I  should  put,  place. 

To  wish,  to  want.    I  should  wish, 

&c. 
To  know.    I  should  know. 
To  go  out.    I  should  go  out. 

To  have.    I  should  have. 

To  be  worth.    I  should  be  worth. 

To  come.    I  should  come. 


Haber.     Yo  habria. 
Hacer.     Yo  haria. 

and  all  its  compounds 
•Poder.     Yo  podria. 
Poner.    Yo  pondria. 

and  all  Us  compounds. 
Querer..    Yo  querria. 

Saber.    Yo  sabria. 
Salir.    Yo  saldria. 

and  all  its  compounds 
Tener.    Yo  tendria. 

and  all  its  compounds. 
Valer.    Yo  valdria. 

and  all  its  compounds 
Venir.     Yo  vendria. 

and  all  its  compounds. 


Whenever  this  mood  is  used,  there  is  always  an  if  in  the  sentence, 
expressed  or  understood  ;  as,  If  I  had  (or,  Had  I)  some  money  I  would 
buy  a  new  coat.  But  in  Spanish,  if  is  always  expressed,  and  we  say, 
Si  yo  luviera  (or  tuviese)  dinero  compraria  una  casaca  nueva.  The  Verb 
which  immediately  follows  if,  must  be  in  the  Imperfect  of  the  Subjunc- 
tive. 


To  GIVE. 
If  I  should  give.  If  we  should  give. 

If   you  would    give.      (Sing,  and 

Plur.) 
If  he  would  give.     If  they  would 

give. 
If  thou  wouldst  give. 


Dar. 

Si  yo  diera  or  diese.  Si  dieramos 
or  diesemos. 

Si  Vd.  diera  or  diese.  Si  Vds.  die- 
ran  or  dieisen. 

Si  el  diera  or  diese.  Si  ellos  dieran 
or  diesen. 

Si  tii  dieras  or  dieses. 


TO  BE. 

If  I  should  be.     If  we  should  be. 


Estar. 
Si  yo   estuviera  or  estuviese.     Si 
estuvie'ramos  or  estuvie'semos. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


207 


If  you  would  ba    (Sing,  and  Plur. ) 

If  he  would  be.     If  they  would  be. 

If  thou  wouldst  be. 

Andar  is  conjugated  like  Estar. 


Si  Vd.  estuviera  or  estuviese.  SI 
Vds.  estuvieran  or  estuviesen. 

Si  el  estuviera  or  estuviese.  Si 
ellos  estuvieran  or  estuviesen. 

Si  tii  estuvieras  or  estuvieses. 


To  have.     (An  auxiliary.) 
If  I  should  have.     If  we  should 

have. 
If  you  would  have.      (Sing,   and 

Plur.) 
If  he  would  have.    If  they  would 

have. 
If  thou  wouldst  have. 


HvBER. 

Si  yo  hubiera  or  hubiese.  Si  hu- 
bie'ramos  or  hubie'semos. 

Si  Vd.  hubiera  or  hubiese.  Si  Vds. 
hubieran  or  hubieseu. 

Si  e'l  hubiera  or  hubiese.  Si  ellos 
hubieran  or  hubiesen. 

Si  tu  hubieras  or  hubieses. 


Teneb  and  its  compounds  are  conjugated  like  Haber. 


To  MAKE,  TO  DO. 

If  I  should  do.    If  we  should  do. 


If  you  would  do.    (Sing,  and  Plur. ) 

If  he  would  do.     If  they  would  do. 

If  thou  wouldst  do. 

And  all  its  compounds 


Haceb. 

Si  yo  hiciera  or  hiciese .    Si  hiciera- 

mos  or  hicie'semos. 
Si  Vd.  hiciera  or  hiciese. 

hicieran  or  hiciesen. 
Si  el  hiciera  or  hiciese. 

hicieran  or  hiciesen. 
Si  tu  hicieras  or  hicieses. 


Si  Vds. 
Si  ellos 


To  KNOW. 
Ef  I  should  know.     If  we  should 

know. 
If  you  should  know.     (Sing,  and 

Plur.) 
If  he  would  know.    If  they  would 

know, 
[f  thou  wouldst  know. 


Sabeb. 
Si  yo  supiera  or  supiese.     Si  supie- 

ramos  or  supiesemos. 
Si  Vd.  supiera  or  supiese.     Si  Vds. 

supieran  or  supiesen. 
Si  e'l  supiera  or  supiese.    Si  ellns 

supieran  or  supiesen. 
Si  tu  supieras  or  supieses. 


To  being. 
If  I  should  bring.     If  we  should 

bring. 
If  you  would  bring.     (Sing,    and 

Plur.) 
If  he  would  bring.     If  they  would 

bring. 
K  thov  wouldst  bring. 


Tbaeb. 
Si  yo  tr ajera  or  trajese.     Si  trajdra- 

mos  or  traje'semos. 
Si  Vd.  trajera  or  trajese.     Si  Vds. 

trajeran  or  trajesen. 
Si  el  trajera  or  trajese.      Si   ellos 

trajeran  or  trajesen. 
Si  tii  trajeras  or  trajeses. 


And  all  its  compounds. 


208 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Advertir,  and  all  verbs  having  an  e  in  the  last  syllable  but  one  of  till 
infinitive,  change  e  into  i  in  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive,  as  : 

Si  yo  advirtiese  or  6  dvirtrera.  Si 
advirtiesemos  or  advirtieramos. 

Si  Vd.  advirtiese  or  advirtiera.  Si 
Vds.  advertiesen  or  advirtieran. 

Si  el  advirtiese  or  advirtiera.  Si 
ellos  advirtiesen  or  advirtieran. 

Si  tii  advirtieses  or  advirtieras. 


If  I  should  observe.     If  we  should 

observe. 
If  I  should  observe.     {Sing,  and 

Plur. 
If  he  would  observe.    If  they  would 

observe. 
If  thou  wouldst  observe. 


TO  LOVE,  TO  WISH. 

If  I  should  wish.      If  we  should 

wish. 
If  you  would  wish.      (Sing,  and 

Plur. 
If  he  would  wish.     If  they  would 

wish. 
If  thou  wouldst  wish. 


Querer. 
Si  yo  quisiera  or  quisiese.     Si  qui- 

sie'ramos  or  quisidsemos. 
Si  Vd.  quisiera  or  quisiese.  Si  Vds, 

quisieran  or  quisiesen. 
Si  e'l  quisiera  or  quisiese.     Si  ellos 

quisieran  or  quisiesen. 
Si  tii  quisieras  or  quisieses. 


To  TELE,  TO  SAT. 

If  I  should  say  or  tell.  If  we  should 

say,  etc. 
If   you    would    say.       (Sing,   and 

Plur.) 
If  he  would  say.    If  they  would 

say. 
If  thou  wouldst  say. 


Dectr. 

Si  yo  dijera  or  dijese.  Si  dijerantos 
or  dije'semos. 

Si  Vd.  dijera  or  dijese.  Si  Vds. 
dijeran  or  dijesen. 

Si  e'l  dijera  or  dijese.  Si  ellos  di- 
jeran or  dijesen. 

Si  t'i  dijeras  or  dijeses. 


And  all  its  compounds. 


To  CONDUCT. 
If  I  should  conduct.     If  we  should 

conduct. 
If  you  would  conduct.     (Sing,  and 

Plur.) 
If   he   would    conduct.      If   they 

conduct. 
If  thou  wouldst  conduct. 


CoNDUCTR. 

Si  yo  condujera  or  condujese.  Si 
conduj  eramos  or  conduj  e"semos . 

Si  Vd.  condujera  or  condujese.  Si 
Vds.  conduj  eran  or  conduj  esen. 

Si  el  condujera  or  condujese.  Si 
ellos  condujeran  or  condujesen. 

Si  tii  condujeras  or  condujeses. 


All  verbs  ending  in  ducir,  as  traducir  (to  translate),  inducir,  producir, 
reproducir,  reducir,  seducir,  etc.,  are  conjugated  like  conducir. 


Togo. 
If  I  should  go.     If  we  should  go. 

If   you    would   go.       (Sing,    and 

Plur.) 
If  he  would  go.     If  they  would  go. 

If  thou  wouldst  go. 


Ir. 

Si  yo  fuera  or  fuese.     Si  fuerainos 

o»*  fuesemos. 
Si  Vd.    fuera  or  fuese.      Si  Vds. 

fueran  or  fuesen. 
Si  e'l  fuera  or  fuese.    Si  ellos  fueran 

or  fuesen. 
Si  t  u  fueras  or  fueses. 


*> 


PRACTICAL  EXEIiCISES. 


209 


Verbs  ending  in  eer,  oir,  or  uir.  in  those  terminations  which.  1  avo  an  i, 
change  it  into  y  whenever  it  is  to  be  joined  to  another  vowel  ;  as,  Oir,  t< 
hear  ;  si  yo  oyera  or  oyese,  if  I  should  hear  ;  Creer,  to  believe  ;  si  yo 
oreyera  or  creye.se,  if  I  should  believe  ;  Hair,  to  ilee  ;  si  yo  huyera  or 
huye.se,  if  I  should  flee,  etc. 

The  verbs  dormir,  to  sleep  ;  morir,  to  die  ;  poner,  to  put  or  place  ; 
poder,  to  be  able  ;  podrir,  to  rot ;  and  their  compounds,  change  o  into 
u  ;  as,  si  yo  durmiera  or  durmiese,  if  I  should  sleep  ;  si  yo  muriera  or 
muriese,  if  I  should  die,  etc. 


If  I  had  money  I  would  buy  a  new 
coat. 

If  you  could  do  this  you  would  do 
that. 


Si  yo  tuviera  (or  tuviese)  dinero, 

compraria  (comprara)  una  casaca 

nueva. 
Si  Vd.  pudiera  (or  pudiese)  hacer 

esto,  querria  (or  quisiera)  hacer 

aquello. 

The  termination  ra  is  common  to  both  the  conditional  and  the  imper- 
fect of  the  subjunctive,  and  may  be  used  for  either  of  the  termination  ia 
or  se,  as  in  the  above  example  ;  but,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  it  should 
not  be  used  in  both  tenses  in  the  same  sentence,  especially  when  the 
same  verb  is  made  use  of  in  both  tenses  ;  as,  "If  I  had  money  I  would 
have  a  fine  hat,"  a  phrase  which  may  be  rendered  in  various  ways  :  Si 
yo  luoiera  dinero,  tendria  un  sombrero  fino,  or,  Si  yo  tuviese  dinero,  tuviera 
or  tendria,  etc.  ;  but  not  Si  yo  tuviera  dinero,  tuviera,  etc. 


If  he  could,  he  would. 

I  would  go,  if  I  had  time. 

If  he  knew  what  you  have  done,  he 
would  scold  you. 

If  there  were  any  wood,  he  would 
make  a  fire. 

Should  the  men  come,  it  would  be 
necessary  to  give  them  something 
to  drink. 

Should  we  receive  our  letters,  we 
would  not  read  them  until  to- 
morrow. 


Si  el  pudiese  (or  pudiera),  e'l  quer- 
ria (or  quisiera). 

Yo  iria  (or  fuera),  si  tuviese  (or 
tuviera)  tiempo. 

Si  el  supiese  (or  supiera)  lo  que  Vd. 
ha  hecho,  le  regaiiaria  (or  rega- 
hara). 

Si  hubiese  (or  hubiera)  leQa,  el 
haria  (or  hiciera)  fuego. 

Si  viniesen  (or  vinieran)  los  hom- 
bres,  seria  (or  fuera)  menester 
darles  algo  de  beber. 

Si  recibiesemos  (or  recibie'ramos) 
nuestras  cartas,  no  las  leeriamoa 
(or  leye'ramos)  hasta  maiiana. 


Exercise  No.  127. 

"Would  you  come  to  see  me  of  tener  if  I  were  iu  the  .;ity  ? 
If  you  were  in  the  city  I  would  come  to  see  you  every  day. 
What  would  you  buy  if  you  had  a  great  deal  of  money  ?  If 
I  had  the  money  you  would  know  it.     Would  you  love  me  if 


210  THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 

I  were  a  cousin  of  yours?  If  you  were  my  cousin,  perhaps 
I  would  love  you  a  great  deal.  Would  you  take  me  to  the 
country  if  the  weather  was  not  so  bad?  If  it  were  fine 
weather,  I  would  certainly  take  you  whenever  (adonde)  you 
liked.  Would  you  bring  your  brother  along  with  you  were 
he  well  ?  If  he  were  well  I  would  bring  him  along  with 
me.  Would  you  come  with  us  were  you  not  busy?  If  I 
were  not  so  busy,  I  would  go  with  you  with  the  greatest 
(mayor)  pleasure.  Would  you  go  to  bed  were  you  sleepy? 
If  I  were  sleepy,  I  would  without  doubt  go  to  bed.  Would 
you  warm  yourself  were  you  cold  ?  If  I  were  cold  I  would 
like  to  warm  myself.  Would  you  translate  a  letter  into 
Spanish  for  me,  if  I  should  ask -you?  I  would  do  it  with 
the  greatest  pleasure.  Would  you  go  to  the  opera  if  my 
cousin  would  go  ?  I  should  tell  you,  if  she  would  go. 
Would  you  study  your  Spanish  lesson  better  than  you  do, 
had  you  not  some  other  lessons  to  study?  If  I  had  but 
the  Spanish  to  study,  I  would  certainly  learn  it  better,  for 
I  like  it  (me  gusta)  very  much. 


Exercise  No.   128. 

Would  this  trunk  hold  all  my  clothes  (ropa)  were  it  a 
little  larger  ?  I  think  it  would  (que  cabria).  Would  you 
tell  me  all  that  you  wish  were  you  alone  with  me  ?  I 
would  (Si,  Seftor).  Would  you  have  done  what  I  told  you 
if  you  had  had  time  ?  I  would  certainly  have  done  it,  but 
you  know  that  I  have  had  no  time.  Would  you  do  it  if 
you  could  ?  If  I  could,  I  would  do  it  with  great  pleasure. 
Would  you  put  on  (Se  pondria  Vd.)  your  new  hat  to-day,  if 
it  were  finished  ?  If  it  were  finished,  I  should  put  it  on  to- 
morrow. Would  your  sister  go  out  to-day  if  it  were  fine 
weather  ?  I  believe  she  would  not  go  out  even  if  it  wero 
the  finest  weather.  Would  it  be  worth  the  trouble  ( Valdria 
la  pena)  to  go  to  school  (la  escuela)  to-day  if  it  were  fine 
weather  ?  It  would  certainly  be  worth  the  trouble,  because 
to-morrow  you  would  be  worth  more  than  (de  lo  que)  you 
are  (worth)  to-day.  Would  you  come  to  see  me  every 
other  day,  if  I  were  at  home  ?    If  I  were  certain  always  to 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  211 

meet  you  at  home,  I  would  come  and  see  you,  not  every 
other  day,  because  I  am  now  more  busy  than  formerly,  but 
I  would  come  as  often  as  I  could. 


Exercise  No.  129. 

If  I  accepted  (aceptar)  this  proposition,  woald  I  be 
blamed  ?  You  would  be  blamed  if  you  accepted  it.  Would 
he  have  answered  my  letter  if  he  had  received  it  in  time 
(a  tiempo)  ?  He  would  have  answered  it.  Would  he  arrive 
in  time  if  he  had  started  ( partir)  an  hour  ago  ?  He  would 
arrive  in  time.  Would  your  uncle  finish  his  house  if  he 
had  the  means  (los  medio*)  ?  He  would  finish  it  if  he  were 
richer  than  he  is.  Would  you  sit  down  if  you  had  time  ? 
I  would  sit  down  with  great  pleasure,  if  I  had  time. 
Would  you  buy  these  books  if  you  wanted  them  ?  I  should 
buy  them  if  I  wanted  them.  Would  you  dance  with  your 
cousin  if  you  were  not  engaged  (comprometer)  ?  If  I  were 
not  engaged  I  would  dance  with  him,  if  he  wished.  Would 
you  read  a  little  if  you  had  time  ?  If  I  had  time  I  would 
read  a  little  ;  but  my  teacher  of  music  (maestro  de  musica) 
will  come  at  ten  o'clock,  and  I  have  not  yet  prepared  my 
lesson,  so  that  I  have  not  a  single  moment  to  spare  (un 
nolo  momento  que  perder). 


Exercise  No.  130. 

give  an  answer  to  the  following  questions  i 

I  Que  me  daria  Vd.  si  yo  le  dijese  un  secreto  ?  £  Que 
comprariamos  si  tuviesemos  dinero  ?  ,?  Saldrian  Vds.  hoy  si 
hiciera  buen  tiempo  ?  <;  Seria  mas  amable  su  amigo  de  Vd. 
si  fuera  muy  rico  ?  £  Me  haria  Vd.  una  visita  si  yo  se  lo 
supHcase?  £  Haria  Vd.  una  partida  al  ajedrez  con  su  pri- 
rao  de  Vd.,  si  el  supiera  jugar  ?  ,;  Tocaria  Vd.  el  piano  si  su 
prima  de  Vd.  se  lo  pidiera  ?  £  Bailaria  conmigo  su  hija  de 
Vd.  si  yo  la  invitara  ?  £  Comeria  Vd.  hoy  con  nosotros  si  se 
lo  suplicaramos  ?      Si  yo  le  hiciese  a  Vd.  una  proposicion, 


212  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

I  la  aceptaria  Vd.  ?  £  Estudiaria  Vd.  si  yo  estudiara  ? 
^Estaria  Vd.  en  casa  si  no  lloviese?  jlria  Vd.  a  la  Habaua 
si  yo  fuese  ?  £  Irian  al  concierto  sus  primas  de  Vd.  si  Vds. 
fuesen  ?  £  Querria  Vd.  a  mi  hermanito  si  fuese  bueno  y 
estudioso  ?     £  Me  haria  Vd.  un  favor  si  yo  se  le  pidiera  ? 


Exercise  No.  131. 

Cierto  sujeto  que  se  habia  casado  con  una  muda,  se 
canso  de  vivir  condenado  a  perpetuo  silencio,  y  acudio  a  un 
medico  para  que  procurase  restituirla  el  uso  de  la  lengua. 
Tuvo  la  mujer  la  felicidad  de  recobrarle  ;  y  de  tal  suerte  se 
daba  priesa  a  desquitarse  del  tiempo  de  su  mudez.  que 
hablaba,  como  suele  decirse,  hasta  por  los  codos.  Cansado 
el  marido  de  tanta  cliarla,  volvio  al  facultativo  a  suplicarle 
que  emplease  en  enmudecer  a  su  mujer  la  misma  habilidad 
que  habia  manifestado  para  hacerla  hablar.  "  Esta  en  mi 
mano,"  le  contesto  el  medico,  "  liacer  hablar  a  una  mujer  ; 
pero  se  necesita  mucha  mayor  ciencia  para  hacerla  callar. 
Solo  encuentro  un  remedio,  calmante  a  lo  menos,  que  es 
dejar  a  Vd.  sordo." 


FOUTY-SIXTH  LESSON. 

CONDITIONAL,    OR   POTENTIAL    PAST. 

This  is  formed  from  the  Present  of  the  Conditional  of  the  Auxiliary, 
and  the  Past  Participle  of  the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 


I  should  have,  We  should  have. 
You  would  have  (Sing,  and  Plur). 
He  would  have,  They  would  have. 
Thou  wouldst  have. 


Yo  habria,  Habriamos. 
Vd.  habria,  Yds.  habrian. 
El  habria,  Ellos  habrian. 
Tii  habrias. 


SPOKEN.  HABLADO. 


1  should  have,  We  should  have. 
You  would  have  (Sing,  and  Plur). 
He  would  have.  They  would  have. 
Thou  wouldst  have. 


Yo  habria,  Habriamos. 
Vd.  habria,  Vds.  habrian. 
El  habria,  Ellos  habrian. 
Tii  habrias. 


m 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


213 


DEPAKTED. 

If   I  had  received  my  money,    I 
would  have  bought  new  shoes. 

If  you  had  risen  early,  you  would 

not  have  caught  cold. 
If   they  had  got  rid  of  their  old 

horse,  they  would  have  procured 

a  better  one. 
If  he  had  washed  his  hands,  he 

would  have  wiped  them. 
If  I  knew  (if  I  had  known)  that,  I 

would  have  behaved  differently. 
If  thou  hadst  taken  notice  of  that, 

thou  wouldst  not  have  been  mis- 
taken. 


paetido. 
Si  yo  hubiera  (or  hubiese)  reeibido 

mi  dmero,  habria  comprado  za- 

patos  nuevos. 
Si  Vd.   se  hubiera  levantado   tern- 

prano,  no  se  habria  resfriado. 
Si  se  hubieran  deshecho  de  su  ca- 

ballo  viejo,   habrian   conseguido 

otro  mejor. 
Si  dl  se  hubiera  lavado  las  manos, 

se  las  habria  enjugado. 
Si  yo  hubiera  sabido  eso,  me  habria 

comportado  de  otro  modo. 
Si  hubieras  advertido  eso,  no  te  ha- 

brias  equivocado. 


Would  you  learn  Spanish,  if  I  learn- 
ed if? 
I  would  learn  it,  if  you  learned  it. 

Would  you  have  learned  German, 

if  1  had  learned  it  ? 
I  would  have  learned  it,  if  you  had 

learned  it. 
Would  you  go  to  France,  if  I  went 

thither  with  you  ? 
I  would  go  if  you  went  with  me. 
Would  you  have  gone  to  Germany, 

if  I  had  gone  with  you  ? 
Would  you  go  out  if  I  remained  at 

home? 
I  would  remain  at  home  if  you  went 

out. 
Would  you  have  written  a  letter,  if 

I  had  written  a  note  ? 


There  is  my  boot. 

Here  is  my  book. 

There  it  is. 
There  they  are. 

Here  I  am. 

That  is  the  reason  why. 
Therefore  I  say  so. 


I  Aprenderia  Vd.  el  espafioL  si  yo 

lo  aprendiera  ? 
Yo  lo  aprenderia  si  Vd.  lo  apren- 
diera. 
I  Habria  Vd.  aprendido  el  alemau 

si  yo  lo  hubiera  aprendido  ? 
Yo  lo  habria  aprendido,  si  Vd.  lo 

hubiese  aprendido. 
I  Iria  Vd.  a  Francia,  si  yo  fuese  con 

Vd.? 
Yo  iria  si  Vd.  fuera  conmigo. 
I  Habria  Vd.  ido  a  Alemania,  si  yo 

hubiera  ido  con  Vd.  ? 
I  Saldria  Vd.  si  yo  me  quedara  en 

casa  ? 
Yo  me  quedaria  en  casa  si  Vd.  sa- 

liera. 
I  Habria  Vd.  escrito  una  carta,  si  yo 

hubiera  escrito  una  esquela  ? 


Alii  esta  mi  libro.     Alii  tiene  Vd. 

mi  libro.     He'  alii  mi  libro. 
Aqui  esta  mi  hbro.    Aqui  tiene  Vd. 

mi  hbro.     He  aqui  mi  libro. 
Alii  esta.  Alii  lo  tiene  Vd.   Heloalli. 
Alliestan.  Alii  lo  tiene  Vd.  He'losalli 
Aqui  estoy.     Aqui   me   tiene   Vd. 

He'teme  aqui. 
Esta  (or  esa)  es  la  razon  por  que'. 

He  aqui  (or  ahi)  la  razon  por  que. 
Por  eso  (or  por  tanto)  lo  digo. 


214 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


My  feet  are  cold. 

His  feet  are  cold. 

Her  bauds  are  cold. 

My  body  is  cold. 

My  bead  hurts  me. 

I  have  tbe  headacbe. 

Her  arm  hurts  her. 

He  has  a  pain  iu  his  aide. 

Her  tongue  hurts  her  very  much. 

The  son-in-law. 

The  step-son. 

The  daughter-in-law. 

The  step-daughter. 

The  father-in-law. 

The  step-father. 

The  mother-in-law. 

The  step-mother. 

The  sister-in-law. 

The  brother-in-law. 

Tbe  progress. 

To  improve  in  learning. 

Tbe  progress  of  a  malady. 

A  plate. 


f  Tengo  los  pies  frioa 

f  Tiene  los  pies  frios. 

f  Tiene  las  manos  frias. 

f  Tengo  el  cuerpo  frio. 

t  Me  duele  la  cabeza. 

f  Tengo  dolor  de  cabeza. 

f  Le  duele  el  brazo. 

t  Tiene  dolor  de  costado. 

f  Le  duele  mucho  la  lengua. 


El  yerno,  or  hijo  politico. 

El  bijastro,  or  entenado. 

La  nuera,  or  hija  politica. 

La  hijastra,  or  entenada. 

El  suegro,  or  padre  politico. 

El  padrastro. 

La  suegra,  or  madre  politica. 

La  madrastra. 

La  cufiada,  or  hermana  politica. 

El  cufiado,  or  bermano  politico. 

El  progreso. 

Adelantar  en  los  estudios. 

Los  progresos  de  una  enfermedad 

Un  plato. 


Exercise  No.  132. 

Who  is  there  ?  It  is  I  (Soy  yo).  Who  are  those  men  ? 
They  are  foreigners  who  wish  to  speak  to  yon.  Of  what 
country  are  they?  They  are  Americans.  Where  is  my 
book  ?  There  it  is.  And  my  pen  ?  Here  it  is.  Where  is 
your  sister  ?  There  she  is.  Where  are  our  cousins  (fern.)  ? 
There  they  are.  Where  are  you,  John  (Juan)  ?  Here  I  am. 
Why  do  your  children  live  in  Spain  ?  They  wish  to  learn 
Spanish  ;  that  is  the  reason  why  they  live  in  Spain.  Why 
do  you  sit  near  the  fire  ?  My  hands  and  feet  are  cold  ;  that 
is  the  reason  why  I  sit  near  the  fire.  Are  your  sister's 
hands  Cold  ?  No  ;  but  her  feet  are  cold.  What  is  the  mat- 
ter with  your  aunt?  Her  arm  hurts  her.  Is  there  any 
thing  the  matter  with  you  ?  My  head  hurts  me.  What  ia 
the  matter  with  that  woman  ?  Her  tongue  hurts  her  very 
much.  Why  do  you  not  eat  ?  I  shall  not  eat  before  (sin) 
I  have  a  good  appetite.     Has  your  sister  a  good  appetite  ? 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  215 

She  has  a  very  good  appetite  ;  that  is  the  reason  why  she 
eats  so  much.  If  you  have  read  the  books  which  I  have 
lent  you,  why  do  you  not  return  them  to  me  ?  I  intend 
reading  them  once  more  (volverios  a  leer)  ;  that  is  the  rea- 
son why  I  have  not  returned  them  to  you  ;  but  I  will  return 
them  to  you  as  soon  as  I  have  read  them  a  second  time 
(haya  leido  otra  vez).  Why  have  you  not  brought  my  shoes? 
They  were  not  made,  therefore  I  did  not  bring  them  ;  but 
I  bring  them  to  you  now  ;  here  they  are.  Why  has  your 
daughter  not  written  her  exercises  ?  She  has  taken  a  walk 
with  her  companion  (fern.),  that  is  the  reason  why  she  has 
not  written  them  ;  but  she  promises  to  write  them  to-mor- 
row, if  you  do  not  scold  her. 


Exercise  No.  133. 

Would  you  have  money  if  your  father  were  here  ?  I 
should  have  some  if  he  were  here.  Would  you  be  pleased 
if  I  had  some  books  ?  I  should  be  much  pleased  if  you  had 
some.  Would  you  praise  my  little  brother  if  he  were  good  ? 
If  he  were  good  I  should  certainly  praise  him.  Would  my 
sister  be  praised  if  she  were  not  assiduous  ?  She  would 
certainly  not  be  praised  if  she  were  not  assiduous  and  good. 
Would  you  give  me  someifciing  if  I  were  very  good  ?  If  you 
were  very  good,  and  if  you  worked  well,  I  would  give  you  a 
fine  book.  Would  you  write  to  your  sister  if  you  were  in 
Paris?  I  would  write  to  her,  and  send  her  something 
handsome,  if  I  were  there.  Would  you  speak  if  I  listened 
to  you  ?  I  would  speak  if  you  listened  to  me  and  if  you 
would  answer  me.  Would  you  have  spoken  to  my  mother 
if  you  had  seen  her  ?  I  would  have  spoken  to  her.  and 
have  begged  of  her  to  send  you  a  handsome  gold  watch,  if 
I  had  seen  her. 


Exercise  No.  134. 

One  of  the  valets-de-chambre  (ayuda  de  cdmara)  of  Louis 
XIV.  requested  that  prince,  as  he  was  going  to  bed    (a/ 


216  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

tiempo  que  el  se  xba  a  la  cama),  to  recommend  to  the  first  Pre- 
sident a  lawsuit  (un  pleito)  which  he  had  against  (contra) 
his  father-in-law  :  and,  in  urging  him  (urjiendole) ,  said  : 
"  Ah,  Sire  (Ah,  Seilor),  you  ( Vuestra  Majedad)  have  but  to 
say  one  word."  "Well,"  said  Louis  XIV.,  "it  is  not  that 
which  embarrasses  me  (me  embaraza);  but  tell  me,  if  thou 
wert  in  thy  father-in  law's  place,  and  thy  father-in-law  in 
thine,  wouldst  thou  be  glad  (te  alegrarias)  if  I  said  that 
word  ? 

If  the  men  should  come,  it  would  be  necessary  to  give 
them  something  to  drink.  If  he  could  do  this,  he  would  do 
that.  I  have  always  flattered  myself  (me  he  lisonjeado),  my 
dear  brother,  that  you  loved  me  as  much  as  I  love  you;  but 
I  now  see  that  I  have  been  mistaken.  I  should  like  to 
know  why  you  went  walking  without  me.  I  have  heard, 
my  dear  sister,  that  you  are  angry  (edda  enfadada)  with  me, 
because  I  went  walking  without  you.  I  assure  you  that, 
had  I  known  you  were  not  ill,  I  should  have  come  for  you  ; 
but  I  inquired  at  your  physician's  about  your  health,  and 
he  told  me  that  you  had  been  keeping  your  bed  the  last 
eight  days  (habias  edado  en  cama  durante  ocho  dias). 


Exercise  No.  135. 

A  French  oflfoer  having  arrived  at  the  court  of  Vienna,, 
the  Empress  Theresa  asked  him  (la  emperatriz  Teresa  le  pre- 
guntb)  if  he  believed  that  the  Princess  of  N.,  whom  he  had 
seen  the  day  before  (el  dia  anterior),  was  really  the  hand- 
somest woman  in  the  world  (delmundo),  as  was  said.  "  Ma- 
dam," replied  (replied)  the  officer,  "I  thought  so  yesterday." 

How  do  you  like  that  meat?  I  like  it  very  well.  May  I 
ask  you  for  a  piece  (Paedo  tomarme  la  libertad  de  pedir  a  Vd. 
un  poco)  of  that  fish?  If  you  will  have  the  goodness  to 
pass  me  your  plate,  I  will  give  you  some  (le  pondre  a  Vd.) 
Would  you  have  the  goodness  to  pour  me  out  something  to 
drink  (echarme  de  beber)  ?     WTith  much  pleasure. 

Cicero  seeing  his  son-in-law,  who  was  very  short,  arrive 
with  a  long  sword  (que  era  may  pequeKo,  venir  con  una  espada 
larga)  at  his  side  (a  la  cinla),  exclaimed  :  "  Who  has  fasten- 
ed (atado)  my  son-in-law  to  that  sword?" 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


217 


FORTY-SEVENTH  LESSON. 


The  Present  Participle  in  Spanish  is  formed  from  the  Infinitive,  by 
changing,  for  the  first  conjugation,  the  termination  ar  into  ando;  and 
for  the  two  others,  er  and  ir  into  iendo.     Ex.  : 


To  speak, — speaking. 
To  sell, — selling. 
To  write, — writing. 


1.  Hablar, — hs.bla.ndo. 

2.  Vender, — vendiendo. 

3.  Escribir, — escvibiendo. 


The  above  rule  holds  good  for  all  Verbs,  whether  regular  or  irregular. 
There  are,  however,  some  exceptions,  which  are  confined  to  some 
Verbs  of  the  2d  and  3d  conjugations. 


To  attract, — attracting. 

To  believe, — believing. 

To  gnaw, — gnawing. 

To  hear, — hearing. 

To  flee, — fleeing. 

To  ai-gue, — arguing. 

To  distinguish,  —distinguishing. 

To  laugh, — laughing. 


Atraer,  — atrayendo. 
Creer,  — cieyendo. 
Roer, — xoyendo. 
Oir, — oyendo. 
Huir,  — huyendo. 
Argiiir,  — nrgayendo. 
Distinguir,  — distinguiendo. 
Reir, — r iendo. 


Verbs  of  the  3d  conjugation  having  an  e  in  the  last  syllable  but  one, 
change  the  e  into  i  before  taking  the  termination  iendo.     Ex.  : 


To  say, — saying. 

To  follow,— following. 

To  amuse, — amusing. 


Decir,  — diciendo. 
Seguir,  — siguie?ido. 
Divertir,  — divirtiendo. 


The  four  following  Verbs  change  o  into  u,  to  take  the  termination  of 
the  Present  Participle : 


To  be  able,— being  able. 
To  sleep,— sleeping. 
To  die,— dying. 
To  rot, — rotting. 


Poder,  —  pudiendo. 
Dormir,  -  -  durmierafo. 
Morir,  —  muriendo. 
Podir,  — pudrierafo. 


It  is  to  be  observed  that  the  Present  Participle  is  not  so  often  used  in 
Spanish  as  in  English  ;  for,  whenever  it  is  used  in  English  after  a 
Preposition,  it  is  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  present  of  the  Iufinitive(l). 
Moreover,  it  is  often  substituted  by  the  Infinitive  with  one  of  the  Pre- 
positions con  or  en.     Ex.  : 


I.  pass  my  time  in  reading. 
I  gain  nothing  by  going  there. 


Paso  el  tiempo  en  leer  (leyendo). 
Nada  gano  con  ir  (yendo)  alia. 


1.  Excepting  only  the  Preposition  en  (in),  when  it  has  the  meaning 
of  cuando  (when),  as  in  the  following  instances  :  En  casdndose  (cuando 
se  case)  sera  masfeliz,  when  she  gets  married  she  will  be  happier ;  En 
yendo  (cuando  vaya)  a  su  casa,  le  hablare,  when  I  go  to  his  house,  I  will 
speak  to  him. 


218 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


>  The  Article,  preceded  by  the  Preposition  d,  is  used  before  an  Infini- 
tive, when  "tiempo  de"  (time  of)  is  understood.     Ex.  : 


At  (the  time  of)  arriving  at  my 

house. 
In  going  out  of  the  church. 
Upon  opening  the  door. 


Al  llegar  a  mi  casa. 

Al  salir  de  la  iglesia. 
Al  abrir  la  puerta. 


Yet  the  Present  Participle  is  used  when  an  agent  performs  two 
tions  at  the  same  time.     Ex.  : 


He  learns  while  teaching. 

I  correct  while  reading. 

It  instructs  while  delighting. 


El  aprende  ensefiando  (1). 
Corrijo  leyendo  (or  mie'ntras  leo). 
Instruye  deleitando. 


When  a  certain  continuation  or  succession  of  time  is  to  be  expressed, 
the  Present  Participle  is  made  use  of  with  the  Verb  estar,  and  some- 
times with  ir.     Ex.  : 


I  am  writing. 

Are  you  reading  ? 

He  is  telling  me  his  misfortunes. 

He  is  gathering  flowers  in  the  gar- 
den. 

She  was  crying  all  day. 

Her  grief  is  consuming  her  by  de- 
grees. 


You  are  thinking. 
What  were  you  doing  when  I  ar- 
rived? 
I  was  dining. 


To  QUESTTOH, 

The  cravat. 
The  carriage. 
The  family. 
The  promise. 
The  leg. 
The  sore  throat. 

I  have  a  sore  throat. 

The  meat. 


Estoy  escribiendo. 

j  Esta  Vd.  leyendo  ? 

Me  esta  contando  sus  desgracias. 

Esta  cojiendo  flores  en  el  jardin. 

Estuvo  Uorando  todo  el  dia. 
Su  dolor  la  va  consumiendo  gra- 
duahneDte,  or  por  grados. 


Vd.  esta  pensando. 

I  Que  estaba  Vd.  haciendo  cuando 

yo  llegue'  ? 
Estaba  comiendo,  or  comia. 


Peeguntae. 
La  corbata. 
El  carruaje. 
La  familia. 
La  promesa. 
La  pierna. 
El  mal  de  garganta. 
Tengo  mal  de  garganta. 
f  Tengo  la  garganta  mala. 
La  came. 


'  1.  While  is  expressed  by  mie'ntras  or  entreianto ;  but  we  cannot  say 
El  aprende  mienlras  ensehando,  for  if  we  make  use  of  mi/.niras,  the  Verb 
which  follows  must  be  in  the  Infinitive,  unless  the  verb  Estar  is  used 
before  the  Present  Participle  :  El  aprende  mi£nlra>s  enseia,  or  widntras 
esta  ensenando. 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


219 


The  salt  meat. 

The  fresh  meat. 

Cool  water. 

The  food,  the  victuals. 

The  dish  (mess). 

Milk  food. 

The  traveller. 


Carne  salada. 

Carne  fresca. 

Agua  fresca. 

El  alimento,  la  comida. 

El  plato. 

Lacticinios. 

El  viajero,  or  viajante. 


To    MARCH.       To   WALK.       To    STEP.    I  CAMINAR.      AnDAE.  *    I>AR*  UN  PASO. 

I  have  walked  a  good  deal  to-day.     |  Hoy  he  caminado  muchisimo. 

Caminar  or  Andar  must  not  be  mistaken  for  Pasear.     The  former 
means  to  walk  ;  and  the  latter,  to  walk  for  pleasure. 

He  estado  paseando  con  mi  madre 


I  have  been  walking  in  the  garden 

with  my  mother. 
To  walk,  to  travel  a  league,  two 

leagues. 
To  walk  a  step. 
To  take  a  step  (meaning,  to  take 

measures). 

To  go  on  a  journey. 

To  make  a  speech. 

A  piece  of  business,  an  affair. 

To  transact  business. 


TO  MEDDLE  WITH  SOMETHING.       -j 

What  are  you  meddling  with  *? 

I  am  meddling  with  my  own  busi- 


That  man  always   meddles    with 

other  people's  business. 
I  do  not  meddle  with  other  people's 

business. 
Others.     Other  people. 

He  employs  himself  in  painting.    •) 

The  art  of  painting.  -j 

Chemistry. 
The  chemist. 
The  art 
Strange. 
Surprising. 
It  is  strange. 


en  el  jar  din. 
Caminar    (andar    or   hacer)     una 

legua,  dos  leguas. 
Dar*  un  paso. 
j  Tomar  sus  medidas  or  providea- 

cias. 
f  Hacer  un  viaje. 
f  Salir  a  un  viaje. 
Hacer  un  discurso. 
Un  negocio,  un  asunto. 
Hacer  negocios. 


Meterse.  mezclarse  or  entro- 

METERSE  EN  ALGUNA  COSA. 

I  En  que  se  mete  or  mezcla  Vd.  ? 
Me  mezclo  en  mis  propios  asuntos. 

Ese  hombre  se  mezcla  siempre  en 
los  asuntos  de  otros  or  ajenoB. 

No  me  mezclo  en  los  asuntos 
ajenos. 

Otros.    Otra  jente. 

f  Trabaja  de  pintor. 

El  se  ocupa  en  la  pintura. 

El  arte  de  la  pintura. 

La  pintura. 

La  quimica. 

El  quimico. 

El  arte. 

Estrauo.     Singular. 

Sorprendente. 

Es  estraiio. 


TO  EMPLOY  ONE'S-SELF  IN.  EmPLEAESE  (Or  OCUPARSE) 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


To  CONCERN  SOME  ONE. 
TO  LOOK  AT  SOME  ONE. 

I  do  not  like  to  meddle  with  things 
that  do  not  concern  me. 

To  concern  one's-self  about  some- 
thing. 

To  trouble  one's  head  about  some- 
thing. 


TOCAR,  CoNCERNIR,  ImPORTAR,  In- 
TERESAR,  INCUMBIR,  PeRTENECER. 
MlRAR  A  ALGUNO. 

No  me  gusta  mezclarme  en  las 
cosas  que  no  me  conciernen  (or 
tocan). 

Molestarse  por  (or  de)  al'guna  cosa. 

Inquietarse    por    (or    de)    alguna 

cosa. 


To  ATTRACT. 

Loadstone  attracts  iron. 

Her  singing  attracts  me. 

To  charm. 

To  enchant. 

I  am  charmed  with  it 

The  beauty. 
The  harmony. 
The  voice. 
The  power. 


Atraer*. 
El  iman  atrae  el  hierro. 
Su  canto  me  atrae. 
Encantar.     Hechizar. 
Embelesar. 
Estoy  encantado  de  ello   (or  con 

ello). 
La  hermosura. 
La  armonia. 
La  voz. 
El  poder. 


To  repeat. 
The  repetition. 

The  commencement,  the  beginning. 
The  wisdom. 
Study. 
The  Lord. 
A  good  memory. 
A  memorandum. 
The  nightingale. 
All  beginnings  are  difficult 


To  create. 
Creation. 
The  Creator. 
The  benefit. 
The  benefactor. 
The  fear  of  the  Lord. 
Heaven. 
Earth. 
Solitude. 
The  lesson. 
The  goodness. 
Floixr,  meat 
The  mill. 


Kepetib. 
La  repeticion. 
El  principio. 
La  sabiduria,  el  saber. 
El  estudio. 
El  Senor. 

Una  buena  memoria. 
Memoranda,  nota,  apunte. 
El  ruisefior. 
Todos  los  principios  son  diffcilea. 


Cbear.     Criap 
La  creacion. 
El  Creador. 
El  beneficio. 

El  bienhechor,  or  benefactor. 
El  temor  de  Dios,  or  del  Sefior, 
El  cielo. 
La  tierra. 
La  soledad. 
La  leccion. 
La  bondad. 
La  harina. 
El  molino. 


»  h> 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  221 

Exercise  No.  136. 

Will  you  dine  with  us  to  to-day  ?  With  much  pleasure. 
What  have  you  for  dinner  ?  We  have  good  soup,  some 
fresh  and  salt  meat,  and  some  milk  food.  Do  you  like  milk 
food  ?  I  like  it  better  than  any  other  food.  Are  you  ready 
to  dine  ?  I  am  ready.  Do  you  intend  to  set  out  soon  ?  I 
intend  setting  out  next  week.  Do  you  travel  alone  (solo)  f 
No,  Madam,  I  travel  with  my  uncle.  Do  you  travel  on  foot 
or  in  a  carriage  ?  We  travel  in  a  carriage.  Did  you  meet 
any  one  in  your  last  journey  to  Berlin  ?  We  met  many 
travellers.  How  do  you  intend  to  spend  your  time  this 
summer  ?  I  intend  to  take  a  short  journey.  Did  you  walk 
much  in  your  last  journey  ?  No  ;  I  like  much  to  walk,  but 
my  uncle  likes  to  go  in  a  carriage.  Did  he  not  wish  to 
walk  ?  He  wished  to  walk  at  first,  but  got  into  the  coach 
after  having  walked  a  little,  so  that  I  did  not  walk  much. 
What  have  you  been  doing  at  school  to-day?  We  have 
been  listening  to  our  professor.  What  did  he  say?  He 
made  a  long  speech  on  the  goodness  of  God.  After  saying, 
"  Repetition  is  the  mother  of  studies,  and  a  good  memory 
is  a  great  benefit  of  God,"  he  said,  "  God  is  the  Creator  of 
Heaven  and  earth  ;  the  fear  of  the  Lord  is  the  beginning 
of  all  wisdom."  What  are  you  doing  all  day  in  this  garden  ? 
I  am  walking  in  it.  What  is  there  in  it  that  attracts  you  ? 
The  singing  of  the  birds  attracts  me.  Are  there  any  night- 
ingales in  it  ?  There  are,  and  the  harmony  of  their  singing 
enchants  me.  Have  those  nightingales  more  power  over 
(sobre)  you  than  the  beauties  of  painting,  or  the  voice  of 
your  tender  (tierna)  mother  so  much  ?  I  confess  that  the 
harmony  of  the  singing  of  those  little  birds  has-  more  power 
over  me  than  the  most  tender  words  of  my  dearest  friends. 


Exercise  No.  137. 

What  does  your  niece  amuse  herself  with  in  her  solitude  ? 
She  reads  a  good  deal,  and  writes  letters  to  her  mother. 
What  does  your  uncle  amuse  himself  with  in  his  solitude  ? 
He  employs  himself  in  painting  and  chemistry.     Does  he  no 


222  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

longer  do  any  business  ?  He  no  longer  does  any,  for  lift  ig 
too  old.  Why  does  he  meddle  with  your  business  ?  He 
does  not  generally  (jeneralmeate)  meddle  with  other  people's 
business  ;  but  he  meddles  with  mine  because  he  loves  me. 
Has  your  master  made  you  repeat  your  lesson  to-day  ?  H 
made  me  repeat  it.  Did  you  know  it  ?  I  knew  it  pretty 
well.  Have  you  also  written  your  exercises  ?  I  have 
written  some  ;  but  what  is  that  to  you,  I  beg  (sir vase  Vd. 
decirme  que  le  importa  eso  a  Vd.)  ?  I  do  not  generally 
meddle  with  things  that  do  not  concern  me,  but  I  love  you 
so  much  that  I  concern  myself  much  about  what  you  are 
doing.  Does  any  one  trouble  his  head  about  you  ?  No  one 
troubles  his  head  about  me,  for  I  am  not  worth  the  trouble. 
"Who  corrects  your  exercises  ?  My  master  corrects  them. 
How  does  he  correct  them  ?  He  corrects  them  in  reading 
them,  and  in  reading  them  he  speaks  to  me.  How  many 
things  does  your  master  do  at  the  same  time  (a  la  vez)  ? 
He  does  four  things  at  the  same  time.  How  so  ( Ccmo)  ? 
He  reads  and  corrects  my  exercises,  speaks  to  me  and  ques- 
tions me,  all  at  once  (todo  a  la  vez).  Does  your  sister  sing 
while  dancing  ?  She  sings  while  working,  but  she  cannot 
sing  while  dancing.  Has  your  mother  left  ?  She  has  not 
left  yet.  When  will  she  set  out  ?  She  will  set  out  to- 
morrow evening.  At  what  o'clock  ?  At  a  quarter  to  seven. 
Have  your  sisters  arrived  ?  They  have  not  arrived  yet  ; 
but  we  expect  them  this  evening.  Will  they  spend  the 
evening  with  us  ?  They  will  spend  it  with  us,  for  they  have 
promised  me  to  do  so.  Where  have  you  spent  the  morning  ? 
I  have  spent  it  in  the  country.  Do  you  go  every  morning 
to  the  country  ?  I  do  not  go  every  morning,  but  I  go  twice 
a  week.  Why  has  your  niece  not  called  upon  me  ( venido  a 
verme)  f  She  is  very  ill,  and  has  spent  the  whoje  day  in 
her  room. 


Exercise  No.  138. 

Pedaretes,  no  habiendo  tenido  el  honor  de  ser  escojido  por 
uno  de  los  trescientos  que  tenian  cierto  rango  de  distincion 
en  la  ciudad,  volvio  a  su  casa  muy  contento  y  alegre,  did' 


^^ 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  223 

endo  que  estaba  lleno  de  gozo  porque  Esparta  habia  hallado 
trescientos  hombres  mejores  que  el. 

Alejandro  el  Grande,  rey  de  Macedonia,  habiendo  vencido 
a  Dario,  rey  de  Persia,  tomo  un  gran  numero  de  prisioneros, 
y  entre  otros  la  mujer  y  la  madre  de  Dario.  Segun  las 
leyes  de  la  guerra  de  aquel  tiempo,  podia  haberlas  hecho 
esclavas  ;  pero  tenia  un  alma  demasiado  elevada  para  abu- 
sar  de  la  victoria  :  el  por  lo  tanto  las  trato  como  a  reinas, 
y  les  mostro  las  mismas  atenciones  y  respeto  que  si  hubiera 
sido  su  vasallo  :  lo  que  habiendo  llegado  a  oidos  de  Dario, 
dijo  este,  que  Alejandro  habia  merecido  ser  victorioso,  y  era 
el  unico  digno  de  reinar  en  su  lugar.  La  virtud  y  grandeza 
de  alma  compelen  a  prestar  alabanzas  aun  a  los  mismos 
enemigos. 

Julio  Cesar,  primer  emperador  de  los  romanos,  estaba 
tambien  poseido  de  un  grado  eminente  de  humanidad  y 
grandeza  de  alma.  Despues  de  haber  vencido  al  granPom- 
peyo  en  la  batalla  de  Farsalia,  perdon6  a  todos  aquellos 
que,  segun  las  leyes  de  la  guerra  que  entonces  rejian,  podia 
haber  condenado  a  muerte  ;  y  no  solo  les  concedio  la  vida, 
sino  que  tambien  les  devolvio  sus  bienes  y  honores.  Con 
cuyo  motivo  Ciceron,  en  una  de  sus  oraciones,  hace  esta 
bella  observacion  hablando  a  Julio  Cesar  :  La  fortuna  no 
podia  hacer  mas  por  ti,  que  darte  el  poder  de  perdonar  tarda 
jente  ;  ni  la  naturaleza  seruirte  mejor,  que  dandote  la  voluntad 
de  hacerlo.  Se  ve  por  estos  ejemplos  cuanta  gloria  y  ala- 
banzas se  ganan  obrando  bien  ;  ademas  del  placer  que  se 
siente  interiormente,  y  que  escede  a  todos  los  demas. 


Preguntado  {for  Habiendo  sido  preguntado)  Caton,  i  por 
que,  habiendo  merecido  bien  de  la  patria,  no  le  habian  eriji- 
do  estatuas  ?  "  Quiero  mas,"  respondio,  "  que  me  hagan 
esa  pregunta,  que  si  me  preguntaran  por  que  me  las  habian 
erijido." 


224 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


FORTY-EIGHTH  LESSON. 


HOW  LONG  ? 

Till.     Until. 
Till  twelve  o'clock. 
Till  noon. 
Till  to-morrow. 
Till  the  day  after  to-morrow. 
Till  Sunday. 
Till  Monday. 
Till  this  evening. 
Till  evening. 
Until  morning. 
Until  the  next  day. 
Until  that  day. 
Until  that  moment. 
Till  now.     Hitherto. 
Till  then  or  that  time. 
Then. 


Till  I  return. 

Till  my  brother's  return. 

Till  my  brother  returns. 

Till  four  o'clock  in  the  morning. 

Till  midnight 

Till  twelve  o'clock  at  night. 

The  return  or  coming  back. 


I  CuANTO  TISMPO  } 

I  Hasta  cuando  ? 

,;  Hasma  que  hoba  ? 

Hasta. 
Hasta  las  doce. 
Hasta  el  medio  dia. 
Hasta  manana. 
Hasta  pasado  manana. 
Hasta  el  domingo. 
Hasta  el  limes. 
Hasta  esta  noche. 
Hasta  la  noche. 
Hasta  la  manana. 
Hasta  el  dia  siguiente. 
Hasta  aquel  dia. 
Hasta  aquel  momento. 
Hasta  ahora.     Hasta  aquf. 
Hasta  ent6nces. 
Entonces. 


Hasta  que  vuelva. 
Hasta  mi  vuelta. 
Hasta  la  vuelta  de  mi  hermano. 
Hasta  que  vuelva  mi  hermano. 
Hasta  las  cuatro  de  la  manana. 
Hasta  media  noche. 
Hasta  las  doce  de  la  noche. 
La  vuelta. 


How  long  did  you  remain  at  my 

father's  house  ? 
I  remained  till  eleven  o'clock. 


It  is. . .  They  (the  people). 
It  is  said  (that  is,  people  say). 


I  Hasta  que*  hora  se  estuvo  (or  que- 

do)  Vd.  en  casa  de  mi  padre  ? 
Me  estuve  (or  quede")  hasta  las  onco. 


Se  . . .  (or,  a  verb  in  the  third 
person). 
Se  dice  or  dicen. 


When  it  is  not  determined  whether  it  is  one  or  many  persons  who 
perform  the  action  represented  by  the  verb,  the  reciprocal  pronoun  ia 
generally  used  in  Spanish.     Ex.  : 


It  is  said  that  only  the  Americans 
have  been  able  to  take  the  castle 
of  San  Juan  de  Uliia. 


Se  dice  que  solamente  los  Ameri- 
canos han  podido  tomar  el  caa- 
tillo  de  San  Juan  de  Ulua. 


But  they  is  sometimes  used  without  determining  whether  it  modifies  a 
masculine  or  feminine  noun.     In  such  a  case  we  put  the  verb  in  the 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


225 


third  person  plural,  which  has  the  same  import  as  they  in  English  ;  but 
we  do  n  jt  express  the  pronoun.     Ex.  : 


They  say  that  the  \merican  Union 
will,  in  a  short  time,  be  the  most 
powerful  nation  on  the  earth. 


Have  they  brought  my  hat  ? 

They  have  brought  it. 

They  have  not  brought  it. 

What  have  they  said  ? 

They  have  not  said  any  thing. 

They  have  said  nothing. 

What  have  they  done  ? 

They  have  not  done  any  thing. 

They  have  done  nothing. 


TO    BE    WILLING    (WISH)— BEEN 
WILLING  (WISHED). 

Have  they  been  willing  to  mend  my 

coat? 
They   have    not    been    willing   to 

mend  it. 
Have  they  been  willing  to  mend  my 

coats? 
They  have  been  willing  to  mend 

them. 


To  BE  ABLE   (CAN)— BEEN  ABLE  i 
(COULD).  J 

Have  they  been  able  to  find  the 

book? 
They  could  not  find  it. 

It  could  not  be  found. 

Can  they  find  it  ? 

Can  it  be  found  ? 

They  cannot  find  it. 

It  cannot  be  found. 

Can  they  do  what  they  wish  ? 
They  do  what  they  can,   but  not 
what  they  wish. 


Dicen  que,  en  poco  tiempo,  sera  la 
Union  americana  la  nacion  niaa 
poderosa  de  la  tierra. 


I  Han  traido  mi  sombrero  ? 
Lo  han  traido. 
No  lo  han  traido. 
,i  Que*  han  dicho  ? 
No  han  dicho  nada. 
Nada  han  dicho. 
I  Que  hail  hecho  ? 
No  han  hecho  nada. 
Nada  han  hecho. 


QuERER* — QUERIDO. 

I  Han  querido  componer  mi  rasa. 

ca? 
No  han  querido  componerla. 


I  Han  querido  componer  mis 

cas? 
Han  querido  componerlas. 


Poder* — PODIDO. 

,;  Han  podido  hallar  el  libro  ? 

No  han  podido  hallarlo. 
No  lo  han  podido  hallar. 
No  se  ha  podido  hallar. 
No  ha  podido  hallarse. 
I  Pueden  hallarlo  ? 
^Lo  pueden  hallar  ? 
I  Se  puede  hallar  ? 
1  Puede  hallar.se  ? 
No  pueden  hallarlo. 
No  lo  pueden  hallar. 
No  se  puede  hallar. 
No  puede  hallarse. 
i  Pueden  hacer  lo  que  quieren 
Hacen  lo  que  pueden,  pero  no  lo  qut 
quieren. 


226 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


What  do  they  say  ? 
What  do  they  say  now  ? 

They  say  nothing  now. 

Something  new. 
Any  thing  new. 
Nothing  new. 
Not  any  thing  new. 

Do  they  believe  that  ? 
They  do  not  believe  it. 
Do  they  speak  of  that  ? 
They  do  speak  of  it. 

They  do  not  speak  of  it. 


To  brush. 
The  brush. 


I  Que'  dicen  ? 
I  Que'  se  dice  ? 
I  Que  dicen  de  nuevo  ? 
I  Que*  se  dice  de  nuevo  ? 
No  dicen.  nada  de  nuevo. 
No  se  dice  nada  de  nuevo. 
Nada  dicen  de  nuevo. 
Nada  .se  dice  de  nuevo. 

Algo  de  nuevo. 
Nada  de  nuevo. 


I  Oreen  eso  ?    1  Se  cree  eso  ? 

No  lo  creen.     No  se  cree. 

,;  llablan  de  eso  ?  j  Se  habla  de  eso! 

Hablan  de  ello.     £e  ZiaWa  de  ello  ? 

No  hablan  de  ello. 

No  se  ftafr/a  de  ello. 


Acepillar. 
El  cepillo. 


Exercise  No.  139. 

How  long  have  you  been  writing  ?  I  have  been  writing 
until  midnight.  How  long  have  I  been  working?  You 
have  been  working  until  four  o'clock  in  the  morning.  How 
long  did  my  brother  remain  with  you?  He  remained  with 
me  until  evening.  How  long  hast  thou  been  working  ?  I 
have  been  working  until  now.  Hast  thou  still  long  to 
write  ?  I  have  to  write  till  the  day  after  to-morrow.  Has 
the  physician  still  long  to  work  ?  He  has  to  work  till  to- 
morrow. Am  I  to  remain  here  long  ?  You  are  to  remain 
here  till  Sunday.  Is  my  brother  to  remain  long  with  you  ? 
He  is  to  remain  with  us  till  Monday.  How  long  are  we  to 
work  ?  You  are  to  work  till  the  day  after  to-morrow. 
Have  you  still  long  to  speak?  I  have  still  an  hour  to 
speak.  Did  you  speak  long  ?  I  spoke  till  the  next  day. 
Did  you  remain  long  in  my  counting-house  ?  I  remained 
there  until  this  moment.  Have  you  still  long  to  live  at  the 
Frenchman's  house  ?  I  have  still  long  to  live  at  his  house. 
How  long  have  you  to  remain  at  his  house  ?    Till  Tuesday. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  227 

Has  the  servant  brushed  my  clothes?  He  has  brushed 
them.  Has  he  swept  the  room  ?  He  has  swept  it.  How 
long  did  he  remain  here  ?  Till  noon  (el  medio  dia).  Does 
your  friend  still  live  with  you  ?  He  lives  with  me  no  longer. 
How  long  did  he  live  with  you  ?  He  lived  with  me  only 
a  year.  How  long  did  you  remain  at  the  ball  ?  I  remained 
there  till  midnight.  How  long  did  you  remain  in  the  ship  ? 
I  remained  an  hour.  Have  you  remained  in  the  garden  till 
now  ?    I  have  remained  there  till  now. 


Exercise  No.  140. 

What  do  you  do  in  the  morning  ?  I  read.  And  what 
do  you  do  then  (despues)  ?  I  breakfast  and  study.  Do  you 
breakfast  before  you  read?  No,  Sir  ;  I  read  before  I  break- 
fast. Dost  thou  play  instead  of  studying?  I  study  in- 
stead of  playing.  Does  thy  brother  go  to  the  play  instead 
of  going  into  the  garden  ?  He  goes  neither  to  the  play 
nor  into  the  garden.  What  do  you  do  in  the  evening  ?  I 
study.  What  hast  thou  done  this  evening  ?  I  have  brush- 
ed your  clothes,  and  (have)  gone  to  the  theatre.  Didst 
thou  remain  long  at  the  theatre  ?  I  remained  there  but  a 
few  minutes.  Are  you  willing  to  wait  here  ?  How  long 
am  I  to  wait  here  ?  You  are  to  wait  till  my  father  returns. 
Has  any  body  come  ?  Somebody  has  come.  What  did  they 
want  ?  They  wanted  to  speak  to  you.  Would  they  not 
wait?  They  would  not  wait.  Have  you  waited  for  me 
long  ?  I  have  waited  for  you  two  hours.  Have  you  been 
able  to  read  my  note  ?  I  have  been  able  to  read  it.  Have 
you  understood  it  ?  I  have  understood  it.  Have  you  shown 
it  to  any  body  ?  I  have  shown  it  to  nobody.  Have  they 
brought  my  fine  clothes  ?  They  have  not  brought  them  yet. 
Have  they  swept  my  room  and  brushed  my  clothes  ?  They 
have  done  both  (lo  uno  y  lo  otro,  or  dmbas  cosas. )  What  have 
they  said?  They  have  said  nothing  What  have  they 
done  ?  They  have  done  nothing.  Has  your  little  brother 
been  spelling?  He  has  not  been  willing  to  spell.  Has  the 
merchant's  boy  been  willing  to  work  ?  He  has  not  been 
willing.  What  has  he  been  willing  to  do  ?  He  has  not 
been  willing  to  do  any  thing. 


228  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

Exercise  No.  141. 

Has  any  thing  been  lost  ?  Nothing  has  been  lost.  Is  it 
known  who  has  been  elected  ?  It  is  not  yet  known  with 
certainty  (con  cerleza,  or  de  cierto),  but  it  is  said  that  your 
father  will  be  elected.  Do  they  think  so  ?  Almost  every- 
body does.  Has  any  thing  been  found  out  about  that  af- 
fair ?  Nothing  has  been  found  out  yet.  Do  they  say  any 
thing  about  it  ?  There  is  a  little  said  in  the  papers,  but 
nobody  believes  any  thing  of  what  they  say.  Where  is  your 
book  sold  ?  It  is  sold  at  every  bookstore  in  (de)  the  city. 
Does  it  sell  well  ?  They  say  it  sells  very  well.  They  say 
it  is  very  dear  (caro).  It  cannot  be  sold  cheaper  (mas 
barato).  They  sell  everything  cheap  in  this  country  (pais). 
If  your  book  were  a  little  cheaper,  many  more  would  be 
sold.  That  cannot  be  doubted.  By  the  by,  be  pleased  to 
be  seated  and  tell  me  what  language  is  spoken  in  Mexico, 
South  America,  and  the  West  Indies  (Anlillas).  The  Span- 
ish language  is  spoken  in  all  those  countries.  What  lan- 
guage is  spoken  in  your  country?  The  English  is  the 
only  one  spoken  in  my  country.  And  in  your  country, 
what  language  is  spoken  there?  In  my  country  all  lan- 
guages are  spoken.  How  is  that  word  pronounced  ?  It  is 
pronounced  thus  ....  How  is  it  spelled  (se  escribe)  ?  It 
is  spelled  thus  ....  Is  your  work  published  ?  It  has  not 
yet  been  printed,  that  is  the  reason  why  it  has  not  yet 
been  published.  Can  you  lend  me  your  Spanish  Gram- 
mar ?  I  cannot  lend  it  to  you.  Will  you  give  those  flow- 
ers to  my  children  ?  I  will  give  them  to  them  with  great 
pleasure.  Will  you  send  your  umbrella  to  my  brother  ? 
I  have  sent  it  to  him  already.  How  many  houses  have 
been  burnt  down  ?  It  is  believed  that  more  than  (de)  six 
have  been  burnt  down.  Who  has  told  you  that  ?  Your 
servant  has  told  it  to  me.  Has  he  told  it  to  you  ?  He  has 
told  it  to  me.  Will  you  tell  it  to  my  sons  ?  I  will  tell  it 
to  them.  Have  you  told  it  to  your  cousin?  I  have  not 
told  it  to  him  yet,  but  I  will  (tell  it  to  him).  Have  you 
told  it  to  your  brother  ?  I  have  not  told  it  to  him,  because 
he  told  it  to  me.  Who  has  told  it  to  your  friend  ?  I  have 
told  it  to  him.  You  did  not  tell  it  to  me.  No  ;  but  I  tell 
it  to  you  now. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  229 

Exercise  No.  142. 

los  dos  amigos. 

Dos  amigos  que  hacia  mucho  tiempo  que  no  se  veian,  se 
encontraron  por  casualidad  {by  chance).  <?  Como  te  va  ? 
dijo  el  uno.  No  me  me  va  muy  bien,  respondio  el  otro  ; 
pues  me  he  casado  despues  que  no  nos  vemos.  Buena  no- 
ticia!  No  es  del  todo  {altogether)  buena,  porque  me  he 
casado  con  una  mujer  muy  ma]  a.  Malo !  Pero  no  tan 
malo,  porque  su  dote  era  de  40,000  duros.  Muy  bien  !  eso 
a  lo  menos  consuela.  No  enteramente,  porque  yo  empiee 
esa  cantidad  en  carneros  {sheep)  que  se  me  murieron  todos 
de  morrina(*).  En  verdad  que  esa  es  una  desgracia 
{misfortune).  No  es  tanta  la  desgracia,  porque  la  venta  de 
sus  pieles  {skins)  me  produjo  mas  que  los.  carneros.  En- 
t6nces  estas  indemnizado.  Pero  no  del  todo,  porque  mi 
casa  donde  habia  puesto  el  dinero,  se  me  quemo.  Oh  !  esa 
es  una  desgracia  que  debiashaberme  contado  {related)  antes 
de  todas.  No  es  tan  grande  como  te  la  has  figurado 
{imagined),  porque  mi  mujer  y  mi  casa  se  quemaron  juntas 
(were  burnt  together), 

*  Morriha,  murrain,  a  plague  among  cattle. 


FORTY-NINTH  LESSON. 

PKESENT  OP  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

In  Begular,  as  well  as  in  Irregular  Verbs,  the  present  of  the  Sub- 
junctive, in  Spanish,  is  formed  from  the  first  person  singular  of  the 
present  of  the  Indicative,  by  changing  its  last  letter  o,  with  which  it 
generally  terminates,  for  the  first  conjugation  • 

1st  Per.  2d.  3d. 

For  the  singular  into  .....        e,  es,  e. 

For  the  plural  into emos,  its,  en. 

And  for  the  second  and  third  conjugations  : 

1st  Per.  2d.  31 

For  the  singular  into a,  as,  a. 

For  the  plural  into amos,  dis,  an. 


230  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

examples. 
Pees,  of  the  Indicative.  Pees,  of  the  Subjunctive. 

Que  Yo     Vd.        El        Nosoteos      Vds.       Ellos 
Estoy  (I  am).  eaU,      est6,       est£       estemos,       estin,     esten. 

Tengo  (I  have).  tenga,  tenga,    tenga,    tengamos,    tenga  n,  tenga  n. 

Digo  (I  say).  diga,     diga,      diga,      digamos,      digan,    digan. 

Que  Tii  estes,  tengas,  digas.       Que  Vosotros  Esteis,  tengais,  digais. 

The  above  Kule  has  only  the  following  four 

EXCEPTIONS. 


Pees,  of  the  Indicative. 

Pees,  of  the  Subjunctive. 

Que  Yo 

Vd. 

El        Nosoteos      Vds. 

Ellos. 

He  (I  have).                haya, 

haya, 

haya,     hayamos,     hay  an, 

hayan. 

Soy  (I  am).                 sea, 

sea, 

sea,       seamos,        sean, 

sean. 

Se  (I  know).               sepa, 

sepa, 

sepa,     sepamos,     sepan, 

sepan. 

Voy  (I  am  going),      vaya, 

vaya, 

vaya,     vayamos,     vayan, 

vayan. 

Que  Tii  hayas,  seas,  sepas, 

vayas. 

Que  Vosotros  hayais,  seais 

,  sepais, 

vayais. 

When  may  is  used  only  as  an  auxiliary,  or  in  other  words,  whenever 
the  emphasis  is  not  laid  upon  it.  the  present  of  the  Subjunctive  is  used  ; 
as,  "I  fear  he  may  come."     **  Temo  que  il  venga." 


The  tenses  of  the  Indicative  correspond  to  those  of  the 
Subjunctive.  The  only  difference  between  them  is  this  :  the 
tenses  of  the  Indicative  denote  poFitive  and  certain  actions 
or  events,  present,  past,  or  future  ;  and  those  of  the  Sub- 
junctive, uncertain,  contingent,  or  conditional.  For  in- 
stance :  aunque  estaha  alii,  though  he  was  there.  In  this 
sentence,  the  act  of  his  being  there  is  expressed  as  certain, 
and  therefore  the  Verb  is  in  the  Indicative.  If  we  say, 
however,  aunque  estuviese  alii,  though  he  should  be  there  ; 
we  speak  in  a  doubtful  and  uncertain  manner  with  regard 
to  his  being  there  ;  and  for  this  reason  it  is  put  in  the 
Subjunctive. 

There  exists  an  erroneous  impression  concerning  con- 
junctions and  the  Subjunctive  mood.  It  is  generally  sup- 
posed that  a  conjunction  requires  the  Subjunctive  mood, 
merely  because  such  a  conjunction  is  placed  before  a  Verb. 
It  is  not  the  conjunction  that  has  any  influence  over  the 
Verb, — but  our  meaning.     Hence  it  is  that  the   student 


PKACTICAL  EXERCISES.  231 

should  not  be  carried  away  with  the  idea  that  any  Verb  is 
placed  in  the  Subjunctive  because  the  conjunction  which 
precedes  requires  it.  If  I  say,  "Aunque  llega  hoy  no  le  vcre," 
though  he  comes  to-day  I  shall  not  see  him  ;  I  speak  of  his 
arrival  as  certain,  yet  the  conjunction  presents  no  objection 
whatever  to  the  Verb  being  placed  in  the  Indicative. 
Should  my  intention  be  to  express  his  arrival  as  doubtful, 
then  the  Verb  must  necessarily  be  placed  in  the  Subjunc- 
tive, thus  :  "Aunque  viniese  hoy  no  le  veria"  though  he 
should  come  to-day  I  would  not  see  him.  There  are  a  few 
conjunctive  expressions  which,  as  they  express  doubt  in 
themselves,  if  they  be  used  at  all,  require  the  Subjunctive. 
They  are  dado  que,  granted  that ;  con  tal  que,  provided  ;  para 
que,  that,  or  in  order  that ;  a  menos  que,  unless  ;  and  por  tal 
que,  for  the  interest  that,  &c.  Of  this  we  shall  speak  in 
its  proper  place. 

To  elucidate  this  most  difficult  part  of  the  Spanish 
Grammar,  it  will  be  necessary  here  to  introduce  the  regi- 
men or  government  of  Verbs,  in  order  to  show  when  Verbs 
are  required  to  be  in  the  Subjunctive,  and  to  point  out 
when  and  under  what  circumstances  the  several  tenses  of 
this  mood  ought  to  be  used.  With  this  view,  we  lay  down 
the  following  rules  on  the  regimen  of  the  Subjunctive  : 

Rule  I. — When  the  signification  of  the  governing  or 
governed  Verb  does  not  refer  to  the  person  or  thing  which 
is  the  nominative  of  the  first,  the  second  is  governed  in 
Subjunctive  with  the  conjunction  que,  if  the  first  Verb  de- 
notes desire  or  wish,  admiration,  command,  doubt, fear,  entreat- 
ing, asking,  or  any  other  like  meaning  ;  as,  deseo  que  apren- 
das,  I  wish  you  to  learn. 

Rule  II. — If  the  first  Verb  is  in  the  future  of  the  Indica- 
tive, it  governs  the  second  Verb  with  que  or  cuando  in  the 
present  of  the  Subjunctive  ;  as,  habrd  querido  que  le  dejen  en 
libertad,  he  would  have  wished  to  be  left  at  liberty  ;  lo  hare 
cuando  tenga  tiempo,  I  will  do  it  when  I  have  time. 

Rule  III. — The  Verbs  decir  and  pensar,  and  all  of  like 
meaning,  as  declarar,  manifestar,  esponer,  concebir,  imajinar, 
creer,  if  they  are  in  the  Indicative  and  govern  Verb;*  whose 
actions  refer  to  them  and  their  nominative,  the    second 


232  THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 

Verb  will  also  be  in  the  Indicative,  and  in  any  tense  ;  as, 
digo  que  my,  que  iba,  que  ird,  &c.  :  but  if  a  negative  is  used, 
and  the  second  Verb  does  not  refer  to  the  nominative  of 
the  first,  the  second  will  be  in  the  Subjunctive  ;  and  ob- 
serve, if  the  first  is  in  the  present,  the  second  will  be  in  the 
future  of  the  Indicative,  or  present  of  the  Subjunctive  ;  as, 
no  imajino,  piemo  or  creo  que  se  case  or  canard  hoy,  I  think 
he  will  not  marry  to-day. 


CHANGES   IN   THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 
The  Subjunctive  changes  its  tenses  according  to  the  governing  Verb. 

EXAMPLES. 


IF  THE  GOVERNING  VERB      THE  GOVERNED  VERB 
IS  USED  IN  THE  MUST  BE  USED  IN  THE 

1.  Indicative  present,    1.  Subjunc.  present, 

3.  Indicative  future,      3.  Subjunc.  present, 

4.  Conditional,  4.  Subjunc.  imperfect. 


Le  suplico  que  hable. 
Le  suplicaba  que  habla- 

se. 
Le  suplicare  que  hable. 
Le  suplicaria  que  hable* 

se  or  hablara. 


The  second  termination  of  the  Subjunctive  imperfect  may  be  used 
instead  of  the  first,  or  instead  of  the  Conditional,  when  employed  in 
the  following  meaning  ;  and  as  the  termination  ria  expresses  futurity, 
and  we  but  seldom  affirm  future  events,  it  is  often  used  as  depending 
on  a  condition  ;  as,  El  comeria  or  comiera  si  tuvlese  or  tuviera  pan,  he 
would  eat  if  he  had  bread. 

"When,  in  English,  would,  should,  might  and  could  are  not  employed 
as  signs  of  the  Subjunctive  mood,  but  as  principal  Verbs,  they  are 
translated  by  querer  and  poder;  that  is,  should  and  would  by  the  for- 
mer, and  might  and  could  by  the  latter  ;  as, 

He  would  if  he  could.  I  El  querria  si  pudiera. 

I  might  if  I  could.  |  Yo  podria  si  quisiera. 


THE   SUBJUNCTIVE   IS   USED,  IN   SPANISH,  AFTER  THE  FOLLOWING  IMPERSON- 
ALS,  WHEN  THE  VERB  THAT  FOLLOWS  IS  PRECEDED  BX  que. 

Es  necesario  (preciso,  cr  menester) 

que. 
Es  lastima  que. 
Es  justo  que. 
Conviene  que. 
Es  estrafio  que. 


It  is  necessary  that. 

It  is  a  pity  that. 
It  is  right  that. 
It  is  proper  that. 
It  is  strange  that. 


PKACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


233 


It  is  becoming  that. 

It  is  time  that. 

It  is  important  that. 

It  is  sufficient  (it  suffices)  that. 

It  is  to  be  wished  that. 

It  is  possible  that. 

It  is  better  that. 


It  is  necessary  that  you  should  be 

here  at  an  early  hour. 
You  must  do  that. 
It  is  necessary  that  one  should  have 

money. 
I  must  go  to  market. 

I  must  go  away. 

It  is  right  that  you  should  be  pun- 
ished. 

It  is  sufficient  for  you  to  know  that. 

It  is  time  for  you  to  speak. 

We  must  sell  our  goods  immediate- 
ly- 

It  is  important  that  that  should  be 
done. 

What  must  I  say  ? 

It  is  proper  that  we  should  set  out. 

It  is  to  be  wished,  that  you  should 
go  to  the  country. 

It  is  to  be  desired  that  you  should 
return  soon. 

It  is  necessary  that  I  should  finish 
to-day. 

It  is  sufficient  that  you  are  satis- 
fied. 

It  is  better  that  we  should  have  ar- 
rived this  morning. 


Es  propio,  or  conviene  que. 

Es  tiempo  que. 

Importa  que. 

Basta  que. 

Es  de  desear  que. 

Es  posible  que. 

Es  mejor  (or  vale  mas)  que. 


Es  necesario  (or  menester)  que  Vd, 

esti  aqui  temprano. 
Es  preciso  que  Vd.  haga  eso. 
Es  menester  que  uno  tenga  dinero. 

Es  necesario  que  yo  vaya  al  mer- 

cado. 
Es  necesario  que  yo  me  vaya. 
Es  justo  que  Vd.  sea  castigado. 

Basta  que  Vd.  sepa  eso. 

Es  tiempo  que  Vd.  hable. 

Es    preciso    que    vendamos  luego 

nuestras  mercancias. 
Importa  que  eso  se  haga. 

j  Que*  es  necesario  que  yo  dlga  t 

Convieue  que  parlamos. 

Es  de  desear  que  Vd.  vaya  al  cam- 
po. 

Es  de  desear  que  Vd.  vuelva  pron- 
to. 

Es  necesario  qse  yo  concluya  hoy. 

Basta  que  Vd.  esU  satisfecho. 

Es  mejor  (or  vale  mas)  que  haya* 
mos  llegado  esta  manana. 


Exercise  No.  143. 

Does  that  young  lady  like  me  to  hold  (tener)  her  books  ? 
She  likes  to  hold  them.  Does  she  like  it  better  that  yon 
should  hold  them  ?  She  does  not  like  that  we  should  hold 
them  ;  she  likes  her  brother  to  hold  them.  Does  your 
father  wish  you  to  go  to  the  play  ?  He  does  not  wisk  me 
to  go  unless  I  go  with  you.     Do  you  wish  me  to  go  to  the 


234  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

market  ?  I  wish  you  to  go  there.  Does  the  merchant  wish 
us  to  go  to  the  store  ?  He  wishes  us  to  go  there.  Do  you 
desire  that  I  may  be  happy  ?  I  desire  that  you  may  be  so. 
Do  you  give  any  money  to  my  brother,  that  he  may  return  ? 
I  give  him  some,  that  he  may  soon  return.  Does  that  young 
lady  wish  me  to  take  her  parasol  ?  She  wishes  her  friend 
to  take  it.  Does  your  father  permit  me  to  take  his  horse  ? 
He  does  not  like  us  to  take  it.  Is  he  afraid  that  those  boys 
may  take  it  ?  He  is  not  afraid  that  they  will  take  it.  Does 
my  mother  desire  that  I  should  learn  Spanish  ?  She  desires 
that  you  should  learn  it.  Do  you  fear  that  we  cannot  finish 
our  exercises  to-day  ?  I  fear  that  you  cannot  finish  them. 
Will  you  go  out  hunting,  provided  that  I  give  you  some 
powder  (pblvora)  ?  I  will  go,  provided  that  you  will  give  me 
some  powder  and  lend  me  a  gun. 


Exercise  No.  144. 

Does  your  mother  approve  of  your  playing  all  day  ?    She 
approves  of  my  playing  often,  but  she  desires  me  to  read 
and  write  six  hours  every  day.     Is  it  necessary  for  you  to 
see  my  father  ?     If  he  is  at  home,  it  is  necessary  that  I 
should  see  him.     What  do  you  wish  me  to  buy  ?     I  wish 
you  to  buy  some  needles  and  pins  (agujas  y  alfileres),  and 
bring  them  home.     Is  it  necessary  for  me  to  be  there  ?     It 
is  proper  that  you  should  be  there.     Will  you  tell  the  ser- 
vant to  bring  me  a  glass  of  water  ?     I  will  tell  him  to  bring 
it  to  you.     When  will  you  begin  this  work  ?     I  will  begin 
it  when  I  shall  have  time  or  as  soon  as  I  have  finished  this 
one.     When  will  you  pay  me  what  you  owe  me  ?     I  will 
Pay  you  when  I  shall  receive  some  money.     Shall  I  begin 
my  exercises  before  you  come  ?     You  must  not  begin  them 
until  I  come.     Will  you  come  to  see  me  when  I  shall  be  a 
home  ?     I  will  come  to  see  you  whenever  (siempre  que) 
have  time.     Do  you  wish  him  to  go  away  or  to  remain  ?     I 
wish  him  neither  to  go  away  nor  to  remain  ;  he  may  do 
what  he  pleases. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  235 

Exercise  No.  145. 

Will  you  relate  (contar)  something  to  me  ?    What  do  you 
wish  me  to  relate  to  you  ?    A  little  anecdote,  if  you  like.    A 
little  boy,  one  day  at  table  (a  la  mesa)  asked  for  some  meat, 
his  father  said  that  it  was  not  polite  to  ask  for  any,  and 
that  he  should  wait  until  some  was  given  to  him.    The  poor 
boy,  seeing  every  one  eat,  and  that  nothing  was  given  to 
him,  said  to  his  father  :  "  My  dear  father,  give  me  a  little 
salt,  if  you  please."     "  What  will  you  do  with  it  ?"     (*  Que 
jztieres  hacer  con  ella)  ?  asked  the  father.     "  I  wish  to  eat  it 
with  (echarle  a)  the  meat  which  you  will  give  me,"  replied 
{replied)  the  child.     Every  body   admired  the  little  boy's 
wit  ;  and  his  father,  perceiving  that  he  had  nothing,  gave 
him  meat  without  his  asking  for  it.     Who  was  that  little 
boy  that  asked  for  meat  at  table  ?     He  was  the  son  of  ono 
of  my  friends.     Why  did  he  ask  for  some  meat  ?    He  asked 
for  some  because  he  had  a  good  appetite.     Why  did  his 
father  not  give  him  some  immediately  ?     Because  he  had 
forgotten  it.     Was  the  little  boy  wrong  in  asking  for  some  ? 
He  was  wrong,  for  he  ought  to  have  waited.     Why  did  he 
ask  his  father  for  some  salt  ?     He  asked  for  some  salt,  that 
his  father  might  perceive  that  he  had  no  meat,  and  that  he 
might  give  him  some.     Do  you  wish  me  to  relate  to  you 
another  anecdote  ?     You  will  greatly  oblige  me  (se  lo  agra- 
decere  a  Vd.  muchisimo).    Some  one  purchasing  some  goods 
from  a  shopkeeper  (tendero),  said  to  him :  "  You  ask  too 
much ;  you  should  not  sell  so  dear  to  me  as  to  another,  be- 
cause I  am  a  friend."     The  merchant  replied:  "Sir,  we 
must  gain  something  by  (con)  our  friends,  for  our  enemies 
will  never  come  to  the  shop  (tienda). 


FIFTIETH  LESSON. 

The  following  Examples  on  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive  in  Spanish 
rendered  in  various  tenses  in  English,  will,  we  think,  furnish  the  best 
rules  and  guide  that  can  be  given  to  those  scholars,  who  not  being  per- 
fectly acquainted  with  the  general  Grammar,  are  unable  to  understand 
fully  the  rules  given  in  the  preceding  Lesson,  on  the  regimen  of  verbs  ; 
and  to  the  others,  these  examples  will,  at  the  same  time,  serve  as  a  com- 
plement of  those  rules. 


236 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Temo  que  venga. 
Dudo  que  escriba. 


I  fear  he  may  come. 

I  doubt  if  or  whether  he  will  write, 


"Whenever  desire,  wish,  begging,  asking,  requesting  or  entreating  is  im- 
plied,  the  Subjunctive  is  used,  as  : 


El  desea,  quiere, 
pide    ruega    or  f  que 
suplica 


que 


Vd.    vaya,    escriba  He  desires,  wishes,  asks, 

coma,  nable,  lea,       prays  or   begs  you  to 

vea,  etc.  go,   write,   eat,    speak, 

read,  see,  etc. 

haga  ?  What  do  you  wish  me  to 

do? 

que     venga  ?  Do  you  wish  me  to  come  ? 


I  Que"  quiere  Vd. 
I  Quiere  Vd. 

The  Subjunctive  is  also  used  with  a  negative  : 
No  hay  nada  que     no  sea  de  Vd, 


There    is    nothing    but 
what  is  yours. 

No  hay  desgracia     que     no  me  suceda  a  mi.    There  is  no  misfortune 

but  what  haj>pens  to 
me. 

Moreover  the  Subjunctive  is  employed  after  the  impersonals  already 
mentioned,  when  they  are  used  with  a  pronoun,  but  when  the  pronoun 
is  not  expressed  or  otherwise  understood,  the  verb  is  put  in  the  present 
of  the  Infinitive.     Ex. 


Es    necesario,    lastima,    justo,   or 
conveniente  que  Vd.  lo  haga. 

Es  necesario,  lastima,  etc.,  hacerlo. 

Farther,  the  Subjunctive  is  used  after  the  following  conjunctions, 
which  are  the  only  ones,  after  which  it  is  always  indispensably  used. 


It  is  necessary,  a  pity,  just,  or 
proper  for  you  to  (or  that  you 
should)  do  it. 

It  is  necessary,  a  pity,  etc.,  to  do  it. 


Con  tal  que,  provided. 

A  menosque,  )    ^Q^ 

A  no  ser  que,  J 

Para  que,      )  th  t  {        d     ft  t 

A  fin  deque,  j         ' 

Ora,  ya  or  j  whether 

Sea  que,  Men  sea  que,  \ 

For  temer  de  que,  (for  fear  that 

No  sea  que,  J  or  lest  that. 

Antes  que,  before. 

No  porque,  not  because,  etc. 

Quiera  Dios  que,    \  would  to  God 

Ojalu  que,  J      that,  etc. 


En  caso  que,  in  case,  etc. 

Sin  que,  without. 

Puede  ser  que,  it  may  be  that,  etc. 

Quienquiera  que,  whoever. 

Gualquiera  que,  whichsoever. 

Nadie  que,  nobody  who. 

Por  (grande  or  any  other  adjective) 
que,  however. 

Por  mas  (an  adjective)  que,  how- 
ever, etc. 

Sea  el  (la  or  lo)que,  ]  fuere  ( 

Sea  de  ello  lo  que,  [    or    ) 

Oomo  quiera  que,  )  sea,   ( 


?itas  it 
may. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  237 

Exercise  No.  146. 
give  an  answer  to  the  following  questions  ! 

I  Quiere  Vd.  que  yo  vuelva  hoy,  6  manana  ?  j  Que  le 
a^onseja  a  Vd.  su  maestro  que  estudie  ?  £  Que  desea  Vd. 
que  yo  le  diga  a  mi  hermano  ?  <?  Me  trae  Vd.  esos  libroa 
para  que  los  lea  ?  i  Quiere  Vd.  decirle  a  su  hermanita  que 
toque  y  cante  un  poco  ?  £  Quiere  Vd.  teuer  la  bondad  de 
decirle  a  su  primo  que  venga  esta  noche  a  casa  ?  i  Desea 
Vd.  que  le  diga  a  su  tio  que  le  envie  a  Vd.  el  dinero  que 
reciba  hoy  ?  <?  Estara  Vd.  escribiendo  cuando  el  llegue  ? 
I  Habra  Vd.  concluido  sus  cartas  antes  que  saiga  el  vapor  ? 
I  Cuantas  manzanas  quiere  Vd.  que  le  de  a  los  ninos  ?  <?  Que 
quiere  Vd.  que  yo  haga  ?  ,?  Que  quiere  Vd.  que  le  diga  a  su 
amigo  ?  i  No  quiere  Vd.  que  el  sepa  nada  ?  ,:  Quiere  Vd.  que 
1g  llamemos  cuando  acabemos  de  escribir,  6  cuando  volva- 
mos  ?    <?  Cuando  quiere  Vd.  que  vengan  mis  hermanos  V 

Exercise  No.  147. 

A  young  prince,  seven  years  old,  was  admired  by  every 
body  for  his  wit  (injenio).  Being  once  in  the  society  of  an 
old  officer,  the  latter  observed,  in  speaking  of  the  young 
prince,  that  when  children  discovered  so  much  genius  in 
their  early  days,  they  generally  grew  very  stupid  when  they 
come  to  maturity.  u  If  that  is  the  case,"  said  the  prince, 
who  had  heard  it,  "  then  you  must  have  been  very  remarka- 
ble for  your  genius  when  yoii  were  a  child." 

An  Englishman,  on  first  visiting  France,  met  with  a  very 
young  child  in  the  streets  of  Calais,  who  spoke  the  French 
language  with  fluency  and  elegance.  "Good  heaven  (Santo 
cielo),  is  it  possible?"  exclaimed  he,  "  that  even  (aun)  chil- 
dren here  speak  the  French  language  with  purity  (pureza)." 

Let  us  seek  (solwitemos)  the  friendship  of  the  good,  aud 
avoid  the  society  of  the  wicked  ;  for  bad  company  corrupt 
good  manners.  How  is  the  weather  to-day  ?  It  snows 
continually,  as  i*  snowed  yesterday,  and  according  to 
(Begun)  all  appearances  (apariencias),  will  also  snow  to- 
morrow.    Let  it   snow   f  Que  nieve)  ;  I  should  like   it   to 


238  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

snow  (que  nemra)  still  more,  for  I  am  always  very  well 
when  it  is  very  cold.  And  I  am  always  very  well  when  it  is 
neither  cold  nor  warm.  It  is  too  windy  to-d.ay,  and  we 
should  do  (hariamos)  better  if  we  stayed  (queddsemos)  at 
home.  Whatever  weather  it  may  be,  I  mast  go  out ;  for  I 
promised  to  be  wi'uh  my  sister  at  a  quarter  past  eleven,  and 
I  must  keep  my  word. 


FIFTY-FIRST  LESSON. 

IMPERFECT  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

This  tense  is  formed  from  the  present  of  the  Infinitive  by  changing, 
for  the  first  conjugation,  the  termination  ar  : 

1st  Per.  2d  Per.  3d  Per. 

For  the  singular  into  .  .  ara  or  ase,  aras  or  ases,  ara  or  a.?e. 

For  the  plural  into  .  .  .  dramos  or  dsemos,  drais  or  dseis,  aran  or  asen^ 

and  for  the  second  and  third  conjugations,  by  changing  er  or  ir: 

1st  Per.  2d  Per.  3d  Per. 

For  the  singular  into  .          iera  or  iese,        ieras  or  ieses,      iera  or  ie.se. 
For  the  plural  into  .  .  Uramos  or  iisemos,  ierais  or  iiseis,  ieran  or  iesen. 

EXAMPLES. 

Hablar  (to  speak).     Yo  hablara  or  hablase.    Vd.  hablara  or  hablase, 
El  hablara  or  hablase. 

Nosotros  hablaramos  or  habldsemos.     Vds.  hablaran  or  hablasen.     Ellos 
hablaran  or  hablasen. 

Tu  hablaras  or  hablases.  Vosotros  hablarais  or  hablaseis. 

Temer  (to  fear).     Yo  temiera  or  temiesg.     Vd.  temiera  or  temiese.     El 
temiera  or  temiese. 

Nosotros  temieVaraos  or  temie*semos.     Vds.  temieran  or  temiesen.     Ellos 
temieran  or  temiesen. 

Tu  temieras  or  temieses.        Vosotros  temierais  cr  teniie'seis. 

Sufrir  (to  suffer).     Yo  sufriera  or  sufriese.     Vd.  sufriera  or  sufriese.     El 
sufriera  or  sufriese. 

Nosotros  sufrieramos  or  sufri&emos.    Vds.  sufrieran  or  sufriesen.     Ellos 
sufrieran  or  sufriesen. 

Tu  sufrieras  or  sufrieses.        Vosotros  sufrierais  or  sufri dseis. 

Although  the  termination  ra  is  common  to  the  Conditional  and  the 
Imperfect  of  the  Subjunctive,  it  is  necessary  to  remark  that  whenever 


PRACTICAL  EiEKCISES. 


239 


the  conjunction  if,  in  English,  is  used  in  the  sense  of  whether,  the  ter- 
mination ia  of  the  Conditional  is  the  only  one  that  can  be  employed,  as  : 
I  asked  him  if  his  brother,  or  whether  his  brother  would  come  to-morrow, 
le  pregunte  si  su  hcrmano  vendria  mahana :  he  wrote  to  us  to  know  if 
(whether)  we  would  buy  the  house,  nos  escribio  para  saber  si  compraria- 
mos  la  casa. 

Again,  when  the  governing  verb  denotes  promise,  information  or  an- 
nouncement, the  termination  ia  is  the  only  one  that  can  be  used,  as  :  He 
promised  me  that  he  would  come,  me  promelid  que  vendria  ;  I  told  you 
that  I  would  go  out,  le  dije  a  Vd.  que  saldria  ;  it  was  announced  that 
she  would  sing,  se  anuncw  que  cantaria. 

On  the  contrary,  if,  instead  of  promise,  etc.,  the  governing  verb  im- 
plies command,  request,  advice  or  a  purpose,  then  the  termination  ra  or 
se  should  be  used,  as  :  I  told  him  to  go  away,  le  dije  que  se  fuera  or 
fuese  ;  She  requested  me  to  accompany  her,  me  suplico  que  la  acompa- 
fiara  or  acompaiiase  ;  I  advised  him  to  he  down,  le  aconseje.  que  se  acos- 
tara  or  acostase  ;  I  gave  her  the  letter  that  she  might  read  it,  le  dila 
carta  para  que  la  ley  era  or  leyese. 


However  rich  and  learned  a  man 
may  be,  he  ought  not  to  be 
proud. 

However  feeble  or  weak  a  man 
may  be,  he  may  do  you  a  great 
injury  or  a  great  benefit. 

Be  industrious,  that  your  parents 
may  be  satisfied. 

"Whether  I  read  or  write,  it  is  noth- 
ing to  you. 

I  can  say  nothing  without  your 
knowing  it. 

Do  not  begin  before  I  give  you  no- 
tice. 

Wait  till  your  father  returns. 

I  will  not  have  her  for  a  wife,  how- 
ever rich  she  may  be,  only  be- 
cause she  is  not  good-hearted 


Por  rico  6  sabio  que  sea  un  hombre, 
no  debe  ser  orgulloso. 

Por    de'bil    que    sea    un    hombre 

puede  ser  capaz  de  hacernos  un 

gran  dafio  6  un  gran  beneficio. 
Sea  Vd.  industrioso  para  que  sus 

padres  est  en  contentos. 
Que  yo  lea,  6  que  escriba,  nada  le 

importa  a  Vd. 
No  puedo  decir  nada  sin  que  Vd. 

lo  sepa. 
No   enipieze  Vd.  antes  que  yo  le 

avise. 
Aguarde  Vd.  que  su  padre  vuelva 

{que  stands  for  hasta  que). 
No  la  quiero  por  esposa  por  rica 

que    sea,    solamente    porque  no 

tiene  buen  corazon. 


However,  howsoever. 
However  good  you  may  be. 
How  rich  soever  they  may  be. 


Por,  Por  mas  que, 
Por  bueno  que  Vd.  sea. 
Por  ricos  que  sean. 


"Whatever,  whatsoever.  -j 

However  much  courage  you  may 
have,  he  has  more  than  you. 

However  much  patience  we  may 
have,  we  will  never  have  enough. 


OUALQUIERA,  CuALESQUIERA  (pL  ) 

Sea  cual  fuere.  Por  mucho  que. 
Por  mucho  valor  que  Vd.  tenga,  61 

tiene  mas  que  Vd. 
Por  mucha  paciencia  que  iengamost 

nunca  tendre'mos  bastante. 


240 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Whatsoever  riches  he  may  have,  he 

will  soon  see  the  end  of  them. 
However  much  kindness  I  have  for 

him,  I  never  shall  have  as  much 

as  he  merits. 
Whatsoever  faults  you  may  make,  I 

will  take  care  to  correct  them. 
Whatsoever  may  be  the  happiness 

which  you  enjoy,  I  am  happier 

than  you. 
Whatsoever  may  be  the    fortune 

which  you  enjoy,  you  may  lose 

it  in  an  instant. 
Whatsoever    may    be    the    efforts 

which  you  make,  you  never  can 

succeed. 
Whatsoever  may  be  the  pains  which 

you  take,  no  one  will  be  under 

obligation  to  you  for  them. 


Por  muchas  riquezas  que  el  tenga* 

pronto  vera  el  fin  de  ellas. 
Por  mucha  bonded  que  yo  tenga 

por  e'l,  jamas  tendre  tanta  come 

merece. 
Sean  cuales  fueren  las  falta&que  Vd. 

haga,  cuidare'  de  correjirlas. 
Por  mucha  que  sea  la  felicidad  de 

que  Vd.   goze,  yo  soy  mas  feliz 

que  Vd. 
Por  mucha  que  sea  la  fortuna  de 

que  Vd.  goze,  Vd.  puede  perderla 

en  un  instante. 
Sean   cuales   fueren  los   esfuerzos 

que  Vd.   haga,  no  podia  jamas 

tener  buen  exito. 
Por  muchas  que  sean  las  molestias 

que  Vd.  se  tome,  nadie  se  lo  agra- 

decera. 


None.     No  one. 
Whateveb,  whatsoever. 


Ninguno.     Nadie. 
cualquiera  cosa  que.   todo  cuan- 
to.     todo  lo  que. 


Whatever  or  whatsoever  (meaning  all  things  soever)  is  generally  ex- 
pressed by  cualquiera  cosa  que,  todo  cuanto,  or  todo  lo  que,  when  at  the 
beginning  of  a  sentence,  and  by  cualquiera  que  sea  or  absoluiamente,  when 
after  a  verb,  or  at  the  end  of  a  sentence. 


Whatever  you  may  do  for  my  father, 

he  will  reward  you  for  it. 
I  complain  of  nothing  whatsoever. 


Cualquiera  cosa  que  Vd.  haga  por  mi 

padre,  e'l  se  lo  recompensara. 
No  me  quejo  de  nada  absolutamente. 


Whoever,  whosoever. 


QUIENQULERA,  CUALQUIERA. 


The  indeterminate  pronouns,  quienquiera,  cualquiera,  whoever  ;  por 
mas  6  por  mucho  que,  &c,  whatever  ;  nadie,  nobody ;  nada,  nothing  ;  re- 
quire the  next  verb  in  the  subjunctive. 


Of  whomsoever  you  may  speak, 

avoid  slander. 
I  know  nobody  who  is  so  good  as 

you  are. 
1  have  seen  nothing  that  could  be 

blamed  in  his  conduct. 


De  quienquiera,  que  Vd.  hable,  evita 

la  calumnia. 
No   conozco  a  nadie  que  sea  tan 

bueno  como  Vd. 
No  he  visto  nada  que  pudiera  cul- 

parse  en  su  conducta. 


The  subjunctive  is  employed  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  to  express  a 
rirprise,  a  desire,  or  an  imprecation. 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


241 


(juiem  el  cielo  preservar  a  Vd.  do 

una  desgracia  semejante  ! 
/  Ojala  !  i  Plague  a  Dios  or  al  Cielo  ! 
/  Plugulera  a  Dios  or  al  Cielo  ! 
/  Quiera  Dios,  or  el  Cielo  ! 
;  Ojala  que  el  lo  hubiese  hecho  ! 
j  Ojala  que  todos  los  grandes  sefiores 

amasen  la  paz  ! 
j  Ojala  (or  plegue  a  Dios  or  al  Cielo) 

que  nunca  seamos  mas  desdicha- 

dos ! 
/  Sea  Vd.  feliz  ! 

It  may  be  remarked,  in  conclusion,  on  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive,  that 
the  Relative  pronouns  quien,  que,  cuyo,  etc.,  govern  the  Indicative  when 
the  phrase  expresses  any  thing  certain  ;  and  the  Subjunctive  when  it  re- 
lates to  any  thing  uncertain  or  doubtful.     Ex. : 


May  heaven  ever  preserve  you  from 
such  a  misfortune  I 

Would  to  God  !  J 

Would  to  God  he  had  done  it ! 
Would  to  God  that  all  great  lords 

loved  peace ! 
Would  to  God  we  never  be  more 

unhappy  ! 

May  you  be  happy ! 


Here  is  a  book  which  you  may  con- 
sult occasionally. 

Give  me  a  book  that  I  may  consult 
occasionally. 

Lend  me  that  book  which  you  do 

not  want. 
Lend  me  a  book  which  you  may 

not  be  in  want  of. 
I  know  a  woman  whose  soul  is  very 

sensible. 
I  do  not  know  a  woman  whose  soul 

is  more  sensible  than  that    of 

Mrs.  N. 


Ind.  He"  aqui  un  libro  que  Vd.  puede 

consultar  do  cuando  en  cuando. 
Subj.    Deme  Vd.  un  libro  que  yo 

pueda  consultar  cuando  se   me 

ofrezca. 
Ind.  Presteme  Vd.  ese  libro  que  Vd. 

no  necesiia. 
Subj.    Presteme  Vd.   un  libro  que 

Vd.  no  necesite. 
Ind.  Conozco  una  mujer  cuya  alma 

es  muy  sensible. 
Subj.    No  conozco  una  mujer  cuya 

alma  sea  mas  sensible  que  la  de 

la  Sefiora  N. 


To  fly  into  a  passion. 

To  conquer  or  perish. 

God  forbid  ! 

Thoroughly. 

To  discourage  or  dishearten. 

Debt. 


f  Encolerizarse. 

Veneer  6  morir. 

f  j  No  quiera  Dios  or  el  Cielo ! 

t  Con  perfeccion  or  a  fondo. 

Desanimar. 

Deuda. 


Exercise  No.  148. 

¥ou  will  never  be  respected  unless  you  forsake  the  bad 
company  you  keep.  You  cannot  finish  your  work  to-night 
unless  I  help  you.  I  will  explain  to  you  every  difficulty, 
that   you  may  not  be  disheartened   in  your  undertaking. 


212  THE   SPANISH   TEACHEE. 

Suppose  you  should  lose  your  friends,  what  would  become 
of  you  ?  In  case  you  want  any  assistance,  call  me  ;  I  shall 
help  you.  A  wise  and  prudent  man  lives  with  economy  when 
young,  in  order  that  he  may  enjoy  the  fruit  of  his  labor 
when  he  is  old.  Carry  this  money  to  Mr.  N.  in  order  that 
he  may  be  able  to  pay  his  debts.  Will  you  lend  me  that 
money  ?  I  will  not  lend  it  to  you,  unless  you  promise  to  re- 
turn it  to  me  as  soon  as  you  can.  Did  the  general  arrive  ? 
He  arrived  yesterday  morning  at  the  camp,  weary  and  tired, 
but  very  seasonably  ;  he  immediately  gave  his  orders  to  be- 
gin the  action,  though  he  had  not  yet  all  his  troops.  Are 
your  sisters  happy  ?  They  are  not,  though  they  are  rich, 
because  they  are  not  contented.  Although  they  have  a  good 
memory,  that  is  not  enough  to  learn  any  language  what- 
ever ;  they  must  make  use  of  their  judgment.  Will  you 
lend  me  your  violin  1  I  will  lend  it  to  you,  provided  you 
return  it  to  me  to-night.  Will  your  mother  call  upon  me  ? 
She  will,  provided  you  will  promise  to  take  her  to  the  con- 
cert. I  shall  not  cease  to  importune  her  till  she  has  for- 
given me.  Give  me  that  penknife.  I  will  give  it  to  you, 
provided  you  will  not  make  a  bad  use  of  it.  Shall  you  go 
to  London  ?  I  will  go,  provided  you  accompany  me,  and  I 
will  write  again  to  your  brother,  lest  he  should  not  have  re- 
ceived my  letter. 


Exercise  No.  149. 

Where  were  you  during  the  engagement  ?  I  was  in  bed 
having  my  wounds  dressed.  Would  to  God  I  had  been 
there!  I  would  have  conquered  or  perished.  We  avoided 
an  engagement  for  fear  we  should  be  taken,  their  force  be- 
ing superior  to  ours.  God  forbid  I  should  blame  your 
conduct,  but  your  business  will  never  be  done  properly  un- 
less you  do  it  yourself.  Will  you  set  out  soon  ?  I  shall 
not  set  out  till  I  have  dined.  Why  did  you  tell  me  that  my 
father  had  arrived,  when  you  knew  the  contrary  ?  You  are 
so  hasty  that  however  little  you  are  contradicted  you  fiy 
into  a  jDassion  in  an  instant.  If  your  father  does  not  arrive 
to-day,  and  if  you  want  money,  I  will  lend  you  some.     I 


% 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  243 

am  much  obliged  to  you.  Have  you  done  your  task?  Not 
quite  ;  if  I  had  had  time,  and  if  I  had  not  been  so  uneasy 
about  the  arrival  of  my  father,  I  should  have  done  it.  If 
you  study,  and  are  attentive,  I  assure  you  that  you  will 
learn  the  Spanish  language  in  a  very  short  time. 


Exercise  No.  150. 

You  must  have  patience,  though  you  have  no  desire  to 
have  it ;  for  I  must  also  wait  till  I  receive  my  money. 
Should  I  receive  it  to-day,  I  will  pay  you  all  that  I  owe 
you.  Do  not  believe  that  I  have  forgotten  it  ;  for  I  think 
of  it  every  day.  Or  do  you  believe  perhaps  that  I  have  al- 
ready received  it  ?  I  do  not  believe  that  you  have  received 
it  ;  but  I  fear  that  your  other  creditors  may  already  have 
receive  1  it.  You  wish  you  had  more  time  to  study,  and 
your  brothers  wish  they  did  not  need  to  learn.  Would  to 
God  you  had  what  I  wish  you,  and  that  I  had  what  I  wish  ! 
Though  we  have  not  had  what  we  wish,  yet  we  have  almost 
always  been  contented  ;  and  Messrs.  B  have  almost  always 
been  discontented,  though  they  have  had  every  thing  a 
reasonable  man  can  be  contented  with.  Do  not  believe, 
madam,  that  I  have  had  your  fan.  Who  tells  you  that  I 
believe  it?  My  brother-in-law  wishes  he  had  not  had  what 
he  has  had.  Wherefore?  He  has  always  had  many  credi- 
tors, and  no  money.  I  wish  you  would  always  speak  Span- 
ish to  me,  and  you  must  obey,  if  you  wish  to  learn,  and  if 
you  do  not  wish  to  lose  your  time  uselessly  I  wish  you 
were  more  industrious,  and  more  attentive  when  I  speak  to 
you.  If  I  were  not  your  friend,  and  if  yoa  were  not  mine, 
I  should  not  speak  thus  to  you.  Do  not  trust  him,  for  he 
flatters  you.  Do  you  think  a  flatterer  can  be  a  friend  ? 
You  do  not  know  him  as  well  as  I,  though  you  see  him 
every  day.  Do  not  think  that  I  am  angry  with  him  be- 
cause his  father  has  offended  me.  Oh  !  here  he  is  coming  ; 
you  may  tell  him  all  yourself.  Whatever  your  intentions 
may  be,  you  should  have  acted  differently.  Whatever  the 
reasons  be  which  you  allege,  they  will  not  excuse  your  ac- 
tion, blamable  in  itself.     Whatever  may  happen  to  you  in 


24  k  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

this  world,  never  murmur  against  Divine  Providence,  for 
whatever  we  may  suffer,  we  deserve  it.  Whatever  I  may 
do,  you  are  never  satisfied. 


FIFTY-SECOND  LESSON. 

PUTUEE   OF  THE   SUBJUNCTIVE. 

The  Future  of  the  Subjunctive  is  formed  from  the  present  of  the  In- 
finitive by  changing,  for  the  first  conjugation,  the  termination  ar  : 

1st  Per.  2d  Per.      3d  Per. 

For  the  singular  into     .     .     .     ...     .        are,  ares,  are. 

For  the  plural  into dremos,  areis,  aren. 

and  for  the  second  and  third  conjugations  by  changing  er  or  ir  : 

1st  Per.         2d  Per.      3d  Per 

For  the  singular  into iere,  ieres,  iere. 

For  the  plural  into ieremos,  iereis,         ieren 

Yo.  Vd.         El.       Nosotros.      Vds.       Ellos. 

Amar  (to  love),  amare,  amare,  amare,  amdremos,  amaren,  amaren 
Beber  (to  drink),  bebiere,  bebiere,  beblere,  bebieremos,  bebieren,  bebieren. 
Unir  (to  unite),  uniere,  uniere,  uniere,  unieremos,  unieren,  unieren. 
Tii  amares,   bebieres,   unieres.  —  Vosotros,    amareis,    bebiereis,  uniereis. 

This  Euture  is  used  when  the  English  employ  the  Future 
of  the  Indicative  preceded  by  when  or  if.  This  tense  may 
be  rendered  by  will,  shall,  or  should.  If  si  and  cuando,  when 
used  with  the  Perfect,  do  not  always  apply  to  past  time, 
they  never  apply  to  a  future  time,  as  when  used  with  this 
tense.  Examples  :  Guando  yo  bebiere  el  vino,  when  I  shall 
drink  the  wine  (not  cuando  bebere,  etc. )  ;  Si  me  diere,  if  he 
will  give  me  (not  si  me  dard)  ;  Si  el  edificare  las  casas,  if  he 
.should  build  the  houses  (not  edificara,  etc.) 

In  the  definition  that  we  have  given  of  the  above  tenses, 
we  have  said  that  both  these  tenses  could  represent  a  fu- 
ture action.  That  the  student  may  not  misapply  them,  he 
must  observe,  that  the  future  expressed  by  the  imperfect  is 
always  referred  to  time  past,  counting  from  the  period  in 
which  we  speak  ;  and  that  which  is  expressed  by  the  future 
represents  an  action  which  is  yet  to  take  place.  If  we  say 
that  such  a  person  would  be  rich,  if  he  had  been  economi- 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


245 


cal,  we  have  no  reference  whatever  to  time  coming,  only  to 
time  past.  The  futurity  expressed  by  would  be  extends  only 
to  the  time  in  which  the  observation  is  made.  In  the 
phrase,  "  the  teacher  ordered  that  the  students  should  write 
exercises,"  there  is  futurity  expressed,  but  it  only  extends 
to  this  present  moment,  for  the  students  may  have  already 
complied  with  the  wishes  of  the  teacher,  and  consequently 
the  imperfect  should  be  employed.  But  if  the  phrase  be, 
"  the  teacher  says  that  every  student  that  shall  not  write 
exercises  will  be  punished,"  the  act  of  writing  the  exercises 
is  yet  to  take  place,  and  therefore  to  commence  after  the 
time  in  which  we  make  the  assertion,  the  future,  and  only 
the  future,  could  be  used.  The  first  sentence  would  there- 
fore be  translated  by  El  maestro  ordenb  que  los  discipulos 
escribiesen  ejercicios  ;  and  the  second  by  El  maestro  dice  que 
el  discipulo  que  no  escriba  or  escribiere,  ejercicios  sera  casti- 
gado.  We  say  escriba  or  escribiere,  for  the  present  may  be 
used  for  the  future  of  the  Subjunctive,  or  vice  versa,  pro- 
vided the  conjunction  if  be  not  employed. 


Just  a  little,  ever  so  little. 

Will  you  do  me  the  favor  to  give 

me  a  piece  of  bread  ? 
Do  you  wish  a  great  deal? 
No  ;  just  a  little. 

To  TURN  TO  ACCOUNT.       To  MAKE 
THE  BEST  OF.  .  . 

That  man  does  not  know  how  to 
make  the  most  of  his  talents. 

That  man  turns  his  money  to  ac- 
count in  trade. 

How  do  you  employ  your  money  ? 

I  employ  it  in  the  stocks. 


No  MAS  QUE  UN  POCO.   UN  POCO 
SOLAMENTE.   Un  POQUITO. 

(iQuiere  Vd.  hacerme  el  favor  de 

darme  un  pedazo  de  pan  ? 
I  Quiere  Vd.  mucho  'i 
No,  un  poco  solamente. 

f  Hacer  valer.     Sacar  el  mejor 

PARTIDO  DE   .  .    ApROVECHARSE. 

fAquel  hombre  no  sabe  hacer  valer 

su  talento.   * 
f  Ese  hombre  hace  valer  su  dinero 

en  el  comeroio. 
f  i  Como  emplea  Vd.  su  dinero  ? 
f  Lo  pongo  en  los  fondos  publicos. 


To  BOAST,  TO  BRAG. 

I  do  not  like  that  man,  because  he 
boasts  too  much. 


Jactarse. 
No  me  gusta  ese  hombre,  porque 
se  jacta  demasiado. 


Notwithstanding  that.     For  all 

that.     Although. 
That  man  is  a  little  bit  of  a  rogue, 

but   notwithstanding  he  passes 

for  an  honest  man. 


No  DEJAR  DE.  .  .  NO  OBSTANTE.  SlN 
EMBARGO.       CON  TODO.        iUNQUE. 

Aquel  hombre  es  algo  picarc,  pero 
no  deja  de  pasar  por  hi»n>h*e  cle 
bien. 


246 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


Although  that  man  is  not  very  well, 

he  notwithstanding  works  a  great 

deal. 
Although  that  woman  is  not  very 

pretty,  still  she  is  very  amiable. 
Although  that  mau  has   not    the 

least  talent,   yet  for  all  that  he 

boasts  a  great  deal. 
I  received  your  letter  on  the  fifth. 
On  the  sixth. 


Aunque  ese  hcmbre  no  este*  muy 

bueno,  no  deja  de  trabajar  mu- 

chisimo. 
Aunque  esa  mujer  no  sea  muy  bo- 

nita,  con  todo  es  muy  amable. 
Aunque  ese  hombre   no   tenga  el 

meuor  talento,  no  deja  de  jactarse 

muchisimo  de  e'l. 
Recibi  su  carta  de  Vd.  el  cinco. 
El  seis. 


To  GO  BACK,  TO  RETURN. 


YOLVEB. 


The  top. 

The  bottom. 
Up  to  the  top. 
From  top  to  bottom. 

The  eldest  brother. 
The  eldest  sister. 
He  is  the  eldest. 


El  tope.     La  cima.    Lo  alto.    La 

CUMBRE. 

El  pie.     El  fondo.     Lo  bajo. 
Hasta  el  tope.     Hasta  arriba. 
De  arriba  abajo. 


El  hermano  mayor. 
La  hermana  mayor. 
El  es  el  mayor. 


To  APPEAR,  TO  SEEM. 

I  appear,  thou  appearest,  he  ap- 
pears. 


To  KEEP,  TO  MAINTAIN.  •? 

My  keeping  or  maintenance. 

My  keeping  costs  me  six  hundred 
dollars  a  year. 


To  drive  in.     To  sink. 

To  converse  with. 

A  conversation. 

To  spare. 

Spare  your  money. 

To  get  tired. 

To  be  tired. 

To  handle. 

To  lean  against. 

Lean  against  me. 

Lean  against  the  wall. 


Pareceb. 
Yo  parezco,  tii  pareces,  e'l  parece. 


Tener.     Conservar. 
Mantener,  Sostener. 
Mi    mantenimiento    or    manuten- 

cion.     Mis  gastos. 
Mis  gastos  ascienden  a  seiscientoa 
pesos  al  afio. 


Clavar.    Hundir. 

Conversar  con. 

Una  conversacion. 

Ahorrar.     Economizar. 

Ahorre  or  economize  Vd.  su  dinero 

Cansarse. 

Estar  cansado. 

Mauejar. 

Apoyarse.    Reclinarse.   Recostarse. 

llecue'stese  Vd.  sobre  mi. 

Apoyese  Vd.  en  la  pared. 


PRACTICAL  EXEECISES. 


247 


To  AIM  AT. 

Short. 

To  stop  short. 


Virtue  is  amiable. 
Vice  is  odious. 


Apuntae.     Asbstae.     Dirijib, 
Corto.      Breve. 
Pararse.     Acortarsa 


La  virtud  es  amable. 
El  vicio  es  odioso. 


The  definite  article  is  used  in  Spanish  before  substantives  taken  in  a 
general  sense,  and  in  the  whole  extent  of  their  signification.  In  sucn 
instances  no  article  is  made  use  of  in  English.     Ex. : 


Men  are  mortal. 

Gold  is  precious. 

Corn  is  sold  at  a  dollar  a  bushel. 

Beef  costs  sixpence  a  pound. 

The  horror  of  vice  and  the  love  of 
virtue  are  the  delights  of  the 
wise. 


Los  hombres  son  mortales. 

El  oro  es  precioso. 

El  maiz  se  vende  a  un  peso  la 

fanega. 
La  carne  cuesta  a  medio  real  la 

libra. 
El  horror  del  vicio  y  el  amor  de  la 

virtud,  son  las  delicias  del  sabio. 


England  is  a  fine  country. 


|  Inglaterra  es  un  hermoso  pais. 


The  definite  article  is  not  used  by  modern  writers  before  the  names  of 
kingdoms,  countries,  and  provinces,  especially  when  preceded  by  a  pre- 
position. (1.) 


Italy  is  the  garden  of  Europe. 

I  shall  go  to  Germany  on  my  return 
to  France. 

The  dog  is  the  friend  and  compa- 
nion of  man. 


Italia  es  el  jardin  de  Europa. 

Ird  a  Alemania  a  mi  vuelta   da 

Francia. 
El  perro  es  el  amigo  y  el  companero 

del  hombre. 


The  articles  are  repeated  in  Spanish  before  every  substantive,  and 
agree  with  it  in  gender  and  number.     Ex. : 


He  ate  the  bread,  meat,  apples  and 
cakes,  and  drank  the  wine,  beer 
and  cider. 

Beauty,  gracefulness,  and  wit,  are 
valuable  endowments  when  heigh- 
tened by  modesty. 


El  se  comi6  el  pan,  la  carne,  las 
manzanas  y  los  dulces  ;  y  se  be- 
bi6  el  vino,  la  cerveza  y  la  sidra. 

La  hermosura,  las  gracias,  y  el  in- 
jenio,  son  dotes  apreciables  cuan- 
do  estan  adornadas  de  la  mo- 
destia. 


1 .  El  Japan,  el  Peru,  el  Canada",  la  Habana,  la  Florida,  la  Barbada,  el 
Ferrol,  la  Coruna,  el  Brasil,  el  Paraguay,  are  exceptions  to  the  rule. 


248 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


To  be  shot. 

f  Ser  pasado  por  las  arnuuk 

To  shudder. 

Aturdir. 

To  take  leave. 

Despedirse 

To  inhabit. 

Habitar. 

Inhabitants. 

Habitantes. 

A  law-suit. 

Un  pleito. 

Court-house. 

Casa  de  los  tribunales. 

Even  if. 

Aunque.     Aim  cuando. 

Kingdom.     Empire. 

Reino.     Imperio. 

The  West  Indies. 

Las  Antillas. 

The  South. 

El  Sur  or  Mediodfa. 

England.     France. 

Inglaterra.     Francia. 

Spain.     Portugal. 

Espafia.     Portugal. 

Germany.     Holland. 

Alemania.     Holanda. 

Italy.    Poland. 

Italia      Polonia. 

Russia.     Prussia. 

Rusia.     Prusia. 

Sweden.     Switzerland. 

Suecia.     Suiza. 

The  Alps. 

Los  Alpes. 

The  Pyrenees. 

Los  Pirineos. 

Englishman. 

Ingles. 

Frenchman. 

Frances. 

Spaniard. 

EspaiioL 

Italian. 

Italiano. 

Pole. 

Polaco. 

Portuguese. 

Portugues. 

German. 

Aleman. 

Dutchman. 

Holandes. 

Russian. 

Ruso. 

Prussian. 

Prusiano. 

Swede. 

Sueco. 

Swiss. 

Suizo. 

Mahometans. 

Mahometanos. 

Exercise 

No.  151. 

Though  it  should  rain  (Uover)  to-day,  the  weather  will 
not  be  cooler.  If  my  father  should  arrive  next  Monday  I 
shall  certainly  relate  to  him  this  affair.  Should  my  suit  be 
finished  to-morrow,  I  sball  depart  immediately.  Even  when 
such  a  thing  should  have  happened  (mceder)  before  he 
arrives,  do  not  divulge   (divulgar)  it.     Should  it  not  have 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  249 

rained  to-morrow  by  ten  o'clock,  we  will  find  all  the  plants 
withered  (marchitas).  If  they  should  have  pronounced  the 
sentence  before  we  reach  the  court-house,  we  shall  have 
walked  in  vain.  The  general  issued  an  order  that  all  the 
soldiers  who  might  desert  should  be  shot.  If  he  should  not 
come  to-day,  I  will  not  wait  any  longer.  If  the  contract 
had  been  made  last  year,  it  would  be  valid  (vdlido),  and 
there  would  be  no  necessity  that  another  should  be  made. 
There  are  some  men  who  would  not  shudder,  even  if  the 
whole  world  were  to  perish.  By  what  appellation  (nombre) 
should  we  distinguish  the  wretch  who  should  repay  with 
ingratitude  the  favors  received  in  time  of  need?  What 
words  can  express  the  pity  we  feel  (sentir)  for  him  who  has 
an  irresistible  desire  to  do  good,  and  not  the  means  of 
doing  it? 


Exercise  No.  152. 

Where  shall  you  go  next  year  ?  I  shall  go  to  England, 
for  it  is  a  fine  kingdom  where  I  intend  spending  the 
summer  on  (a)  my  return  from  France.  Where  shall  you 
go  in  the  winter  ?  I  shall  go  to  Italy  and  thence  to  the 
West  Indies,  but  before  that  I  must  go  to  Holland  to  take 
leave  of  my  friends.  What  country  do  these  people  inhabit  ? 
They  inhabit  the  south  of  Europe  ;  their  countries  are  called 
Italy,  Spain.  Portugal,  and  they  themselves  are  called 
Italians,  Spaniards,  or  Portuguese,  but  the  people  called 
Russians,  Swedes  and  Poles,  inhabit  the  north  of  Europe  ; 
and  the  names  of  their  countries  are  Russia,  Sweden  and 
Poland.  France  is  separated  from  Italy  by  the  Alps,  and 
from  Spain  by  the  Pyrenees.  Though  the  Mahometans 
are  forbidden  the  use  of  wine,  yet  for  all  that,  some  of  them 
drink  it.  Has  your  brother  eaten  any  thing  this  morning  ? 
He  has  eaten  a  great  deal ;  though  he  said  he  had  no 
appetite,  yet  for  all  that  he  ate  all  the  meat,  bread,  and 
vegetables,  and  drank  all  the  wine,  beer  and  cider.  Are 
eggs  dear  at  present  V  They  are  sold  at  one  dollar  a  hun- 
dred. Do  you  like  grapes  (nvas)  ?  I  do  not  like  grapes 
only,  but  also  plums,  almonds,  nuts,  and  all  sorts  of  fruit 


250 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Though  modesty,  candor,  and  an  amiable  disposition  are 
valuable  endowments,  yet  for  all  that,  there  are  some  ladies 
that  are  neither  modest,  candid,  nor  amiable,  The  fear  of 
death,  and  the  love  of  life,  being  natural  to  men,  they  ought 
to  shun  {liuir)  vice,  and  practice  virtue. 


FIFTY-THIKD  LESSON. 


OF   THE    IMPERATIVE. 


This  mood  is  used  in  the  same  manner  as  in  English.  It  is  used  to 
command,  exhort,  entreat  or  permit.  For  the  first  conjugation  it  is 
formed  by  changing  the  termination  ar,  of  the  Infinitive  : 

1st  Per.  2d  3d. 

For  tho  singular  into  ....  a  or  e  (1),        e. 

For  the  plural  into  emos,  ad  or  en  (2),    en. 

and  for  the  second  and  third  conjugations,  by  changing  er  and  ir, 


For  the  singular  into 
For  the  plural  into 


Infinitive  . 

Amar*.         ama  or  ame, 
Temer.        teme  or  tema, 
Sufrir.         sufre  or  surra, 
Tu.        Vd. 


1st  Per. 


amos, 


2d. 

e  or  a  (3), 

j$  [or  an  (4), 


3d. 

a. 


Examples. 

Imperative. 
ame,       ameraos, 
tema,      temamos, 
sufra,     suframos, 

El.      Nosotros. 


amaa"  or  amer?,  amen. 

temed  or  teman,  teman. 

sufrid"  or  sufran,  sufrara. 

Vosotbos.    Vds.  Ellos. 


Whenever  the  Imperative  is  used  with  a  negation,  the  conjugation  ot 
the  same,  in  all  verbs,  whether  regular  or  irregular,  is  exactly  alike  as 
that  of  the  Present  of  the  Subjunctive. 
Look. 

Let  him  look. 
Let  us  look. 
Look  ye. 
Let  them  look. 


Mira  tu.     Mire  Vd. 

Mire  el. 

Miremos  nosotros. 

Mirad  vosotros.     Miren  Vds. 

Miren  ellos. 


1.  According  to  the  pronoun  that  should  be  made  use  of :  if  it  is  tu, 
then,  the  termination  is  a,  as,  ama  tu;  if  it  is  Usted,  the  termination 
should  be  e,  as,  ame  Vd. 

2.  Ad  is  the  termination,  when  using  the  pronoun  vosot.'os,  as,  amad 
vosotros  ;  and  en,  when  using  Ustedes,  as,  amen  Vds. 

3.  The  termination  e  belong  to  the  pronoun  tu,  as,  teme  or  sufre  tu  ; 
and  a  is  used  with  listed,  tema  or  sufra  Vd. 

4.  Ed  and  id  should  be  used  with  the  pronoun  vosotros,  as,  ienvil  or 
sufrid  vosotros;  and  the  termination  an,  when  using  bstedes,  as  teman 
or  suj'ran  Vds% 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


251 


Do  not  look 
Let  us  not  look. 
Do  not  do  that. 

Do  not  say  that. 

Do  not  deny  that. 

Let  us  not  deny  that. 
Do  not  believe  that. 

Do  not  go. 
Let  us  not  go. 


No  mires  tii.     No  mire  Vd.     No 

mire'is  vosotros.     No  miren  Vds. 
No  miremos. 
No  hagas  eso.    No  haga  Vd.  eso.    No 

hagais  eso.     No  hagan  Vds,  eso. 
No  digas  eso.    No  diga  Vd.  eso!    No 

digais  eso.     No  digan  Vds.  eso. 
No  niegues  eso.    No  niegue  Vd.  eso. 

No    negudis  eso.      No  nieguen 

Vds.  eso. 
No  neguemos  eso. 
No  creas  eso.    No  crea  Vd.  eeo 

No  creais  eso.    No  crean  Vds.  eso. 
No   vayas   tii.     No  vaya  Vd.     No 

vayais  vosotros.     No  vayan  Vds. 
No  vayamos. 


The  reciprocal  pronouns  which  belong  to  reflective  verbs,  and  the 
dative  and  accusative  of  personal  pronouns  that  precede  the  verb,  must 
be  placed  after  the  imperative  and  joined  to  it  so  as  to  form  a  single 
word  when  it  is  affirmative,  and  precede  it  when  it  is  negative,  each  pro- 
noun being  placed  separately. 


Give  it  to  me. 

Do  not  give  it  to  me. 

Send  it  to  him. 

Do  not  send  it  to  him. 

Tell  it  to  me. 

Do  not  tell  it  to  me. 

Return  it  to  him. 

Do  not  return  it  to  him. 


DameZo.     ~D6melo  Vd. 
No  me  lo  des.     No  me  lo  dd  Vd. 
Envia.sdo.     Enviesefo  Vd. 
No  se  lo  envies.    No  se  lo  envfe  Vd. 
Dimelo.     Dig&melo  Vd. 
No  me  lo  digas.    No  me  lo  diga  Vd. 
Devue'lvesefo.     Devuelvasafo  Vd. 
No  se  lo  devuelvas.     No  se  lo  de- 
vuelva  Vd. 


The  first  and  second  person  plural  of  the  Imperative  of  the  reflective 
verbs,  lose  the  final  s  and  d  before  the  reciprocal  pronouns  nos  and  os 
respectively,  when  they  follow  the  verb,  that  is,  when  it  is  not  used  ne- 
gatively.    Ex. : 


Let  us  raise  ourselves. 
Arm  ye,  yourselves. 
Let  us  not  raise  ourselves. 
Do  not  arm  yourselves. 
Let  us  go  away. 
Let  us  not  go  away. 


Levante'monos. 

Armaos. 

No  nos  levantemos. 

No  os  arme'is. 

Vamonos.     Vayamonos.  (1  ) 

No  nos  vayamos. 


The  conjunction  and,  which  in  English  is  used  after  the  verbs  to  come, 
to  go,  and  to  stay,  when  another  verb  follows  them,  is  rendered  in  Spanish 
by  the  preposition  d.     Ex. : 

1.  Vayamonos  is  more  grammatical,  but  vamonos  is  more  in  use,  with* 
oat  a  negative. 


252 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Come  and  dine  with  me. 
Go  and  see  him . 
Stay  and  sup  with  us, 


To  borrow. 

I  will  borrow  some  money  of  you. 

I  will  borrow  that  money  of  you. 

Borrow  it  of  him. 
I  borrow  it  of  him. 
If  you  want  to  know  the  worth  of  a 
dollar,  ask  the  loan  of  it. 


Patience. 
Impatience. 
The  neighbor. 

The  snuff-box. 

Be  good. 

Be  good.    Be  ye  good. 

Know  it. 

Know  it.     Know  ye  it. 


Obey  your  masters  and  never  cause 
them  any  trouble. 

Pay  what  you  owe,  comfort  the  af- 
flicted, and  do  good  to  those  that 
have  offended  you. 

Love  God  and  thy  neighbor  as  thy- 
self. 


To  obey. 

To  comfort. 

To  offend. 

Let  us  always  love  and  practise  vir- 
tue, and  we  shall  be  happy  both 
in  this  life  and  the  next. 


Ven,  or  vengaVd.  a  comer  conmigo. 
Ve,  or  vaya  Vd.  d  verle. 
Quddate,  or  que'dese  Vd.  &  cena* 
con  nosotros. 


Pedir  prestado. 

Quiero  pedir  a  Vd.  prestado  algun 

dinero. 
Quiero  pedir  a  Vd.  prestado  esa 

dinero. 
Pidaselo  Vd.  prestado  a  el. 
Se  lo  pido  prestado  a  el. 
Si  quieres  saber  el  valor  de  un  peso, 

pidelo  prestado. 


Paciencia. 
Impaciencia. 
El  projimo. 
La  caja  de  polvo. 
La  tabaquera. 
Se  bueno. 
Sea  Vd.  bueno. 
Sean  Vds.  buenos. 
Sed  buenos. 
Sepalo  Vd. 
Sepanlo  Vds. 
Sabedlo  vosotros. 


Obedezca  7d.  a  sus  maestros,  y  no 

les  cause  jamas  ninguna  molestia. 
Pague  Vd.  lo  que  deba,  consuele  a 

los  aflijidos,  y  haga  bien  a  loa 

que  le  hayan  ofendido. 
Ama  a  Dios,  y  a  tu  projimo  como 

a  ti  mismo. 


Obedecer. 

Consolar.     Amparar. 

Ofender. 

Amemos  y  practiquemos  siempre  1» 
virtud,  y  seremos  dichosos  tanto 
en  esta  vida  como  en  la  otra. 


To  practise. 
Praotice. 

Let  us  see  which  of  us  can  shoot 
best. 


Practicar. 
Practica. 

Veamos  cual  de  nosotros  sabe  tirar 
mejor. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


253 


To  express. 

To  express  one's  self. 

To  make  one's  self  understood. 

To  have  the  habit.  J 

To  accustom .  1 

To  accustom  one's  self  to  some- 
thing. 

Children  must  be  early  accustomed 
to  labor. 

To  be  accustomed  to  a  thing. 


Espresar. 

Espresarse. 

Hacerse  entender,  or  comprender. 

Tener  la  costumbre  de. . . . 

Estar  acostumbrado. 

Acostumbrarse.     Soler. 

Acostumbrarse  a  alguna  cosa. 

A  los  nifios  es  menester  acostum* 

brarlos  temprano  al  trabajo. 
Estar  acostumbrado  a  una  cosa. 


I  cannot  express  myself  in  English, 
because  I  am  not  in  the  habit  of 
speaking  it. 

You  speak  properly. 

I  am  afraid  of  being  laughed  at. 


To  converse.     To  talk. 
To  chatter.     To  prate. 
A  chatterer. 
A  prattler. 

To  permit.     To  allow. 

The  permission. 

I  permit  you  to  go  there. 


Do  good  to  the  poor,  have  compas- 
sion on  the  unfortunate,  and  God 
will  take  care  of  the  rest. 

To  do  good. 

To  have  compassion  on  some  one. 

Pity. 

The  rest. 


If  he  comes,  tell  him  I  am  in  the 

garden. 
Ask  the  merchant  whether  he  can 

let  me  have  the  horse  at  the  price 

I  have  offered  him. 
I  read  and  was  told. 
"What  we  conceive  well,  we  express 

clearly. 
We  do  not  like  to  see  those  to  whom 

we  are  under  many  obligations. 


No  puedo  espresarme  en  ingles, 
porque  no  tengo  la  costumbre  de 
hablarlo. 

Vd.  habla  con  propiedad. 

Tengo  miedo  de  que  se  rian  de  mf. 


Conversar. 
Charlar.     Platicar. 
Un  charlatan.     Un  hablador. 
parlanchin. 


Un 


Permitir.     Conceder. 

El  permiso. 

Le  permito  a  Vd.  que  vaya  alia. 


Haga  Vd.  bien  a  los  pobres,  tenga 
compasion  de  los  desgraciados,  y 
Dios  cuidara  de  lo  demas. 

Hacer  bien. 

Tener  compasion,  or  compadecerse 
de  alguno. 

Lastima. 

Lo  demas.     El  resto. 


Si  el  viene,  digale  Vd.  que  estoy  en 

el jardin. 
Preguntele  Vd.   al  comerciante  si 

puede  venderme    el    caballo  al 

precio  que  le  he  ofrecido. 
Lei,  y  me  dijeron. 
Lo  que  se  concibe  bien,  se  espresa 

con  claridad. 
No  nos  gusta  ver  a  aquellos  a  quie- 

nes  debemos  muchos  favores. 


254 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


It  is  from  a  king  (Agesilaus)  we 
have  this  excellent  maxim :  ''That 
a  man  is  great  only  inasmuch  as 
he  is  just. 

To  be  sad. 
Be  not  sad. 
Sadness. 
Be  not  afraid. 
Do  not  fear. 

Pray  lend  me  that. 

Borrow  it  of  somebody  else. 

To  draw  a  landscape. 

Tolerably  well  for  so  short  a  time. 

So,  so. 

You  jest. 

He  kept  his  word. 

Not  quite. 

That  will  come  in  time. 

He  fell  asleep. 

That  is  nothing. 

To  behave  well  or  badly. 

Bad  behavior  or  conduct 


To  do  harm. 
To  be  angry. 
To  natter. 

Creditors. 

Debtor. 

Notwithstanding. 

However. 

In  spite  of  that. 

Besides. 

Moreover. 

Further. 

Just  now. 

You  have  said  it  just  now. 

He  is  gone  just  now. 

Tutor. 

Bitter. 

Iu  short. 

Strong. 

Strongly. 

Since. 

With  all  my  heart. 

Added  he  going  away. 


De  un  rey  (Ajesilao)  es  de  quien 
tenemos  aquella  gran  maxima  : 
"Que  uno  no  es  grande  sino  en 
cuanto  es  justo." 

Estar  triste. 

No  estd  Vd.  triste. 

La  tristeza. 

No  tenga  Vd.  miedo. 

No  tema  Vd.     No  tenga  Vd.   cui- 

dado. 
Hagame  Vd.  el  favor  de  prestarme 

eso. 
Pidaselo  Vd.  prestado  a  otro. 
Dibujar  un  paisaje. 
Bastante  bien  para  tan  corto  tiem- 

po. 
Asi,  asi. 

f  Vd.  se  chancea. 
f  Cumplio  con  su  palabra. 
f  No  del  todo.     No  enteramente. 
f  Eso  vendra  con  el  tiempo. 
}  Se  quedo  dorm i do. 
f  Eso  no  es  natta  .  >?*  no  le  hace. 
Comportarse  bien  6  mal. 
Mai  proceder.     Mala  conducta. 


Hacer  daiio. 
Estar  enfadado. 
Lisonjear.     Adular. 


Acreedores. 
Deudor. 
No  obstante. 
Sin  embargo. 
A  pesar  de  eso. 

Ademas. 

En  este  momento. 

Vd.  acaba  de  decirlo 

Acaba  de  irse. 

Ayo,  preceptor. 

Amai'go. 

En  una  palabra. 

Fuerte. 

Fuertemente. 

Ya  que.     Desde  que. 

f  De  todo  corazon. 

Aiiadio  al  irse. 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  255 

Exercise  No.   153. 

Have   patience,  my  dear   friend,   and   be  not    sad  ;  for 
nothing  is  gained  by  sadness  ;  and  impatience  makes  bad 
worse.     Be  not  afraid  of  your  creditors  ;  be  sure  that  they 
will  do  you  no  harm.     They  will  wait  if  you   cannot  pay 
them  yet.     When  will  you  pay  me  what  you  owe  me  ?     A3 
soon  as  I  have  money  I  will  pay  all  that  you  have  lent  me. 
I  have  not  forgotten  it,  for  I  think  of  it  every  day.     I  am 
your  debtor,  and  I  shall  never  deny  it.     What  a  beautiful 
inkstand  you  have  there !  pray  lend  it  to   me.     What  do 
you  wish  to  do  with  it  ?     I  wish  to  show  it  to  my  sister. 
Take  it,  but  take  care  not  to  break  it.     Do  not  fear.     What 
do  you  want  of  my  brother?     I   want   to   borrow   some 
money  of  him.     Borrow  some  of  somebody  else.     If  he  will 
not  lend  me  any,  I  will  borrow  some  of  somebody  else. 
You  will  do  well.     Do  not  wish  for  what  you  cannot  have, 
but  be  contented  with  what  Providence  has  given  you,  and 
consider  that  there  are  many  men  who  have  not  what  you 
have.     Life  being  short,  let  us  endeavor   to   make   it  as 
agreeable  as  possible.     But  let  us  also   consider  that  the 
abuse  of  pleasure  makes  it  bitter.     Have  you  done  your 
exercises  ?     I  could  not  do  them,  because  my  brother  was 
not  at  home.     You  must  not  haye  your  exercises  done  by 
your  brother,  but  you  must  do  them  yourself.     What  are 
you  doing  there  ?     I  am  reading  the  book  which  you  lent 
me.     You  are  not  right  in  reading  it  always.     What  am  I 
to  do  ?     Draw  this  landscape,  and  when  you  have  drawn  it, 
you  shall  decline  some  substantives  with  adjectives. 


Exercise  No.  154. 

What  must  be  done  in  order  to  be  happy  ?  Always  love 
and  practice  virtue,  and  you  will  be  happy  both  in  this  life 
and.  in  the  next.  Since  we  wish  to  be  happy,  let  us  do  good 
to  the  poor,  and  let  us  have  compassion  on  the  unfortunate  ; 
let  us  obey  our  masters,  and  never  give  them  any  trouble  ; 
let  us  comfort  the  unfortunate,  love  our  neighbor  as  our- 
selves, and  not  hate  those  that  have  offended  us  ;  in  short, 


256  THE   SPANISH  TEACHEB. 

let  us  always  fulfil  our  duty,  and  God  will  tak<}  care  of  the 
rest.  My  son,  in  order  to  be  loved,  you  must  be  laborious 
and  good.  You  are  accused  of  being  idle  and  negligent  in 
your  affairs.  You  know,  however,  that  your  brother  has 
been  punished  for  being  naughty.  Being  lately  in  town,  I 
received  a  letter  from  your  tutor,  in  which  he  strongly  com- 
plained of  you.  Do  not  weep.  Now  to  your  room,  learn 
your  lesson,  and  be  a  good  boy.  I  shall  be  so  good,  my 
dear  father,  that  you  will  certainly  be  satisfied  with  me. 
Has  the  little  boy  kept  his  word?  Not  quite;  for  after 
having  said  that,  he  went  into  his  room,  took  his  books, 
sat  down  at  the  table,  and  fell  asleep.  He  is  a  good  boy 
when  he  sleeps.  He  is  a  good  boy  when  he  sleeps,  said  his 
father,  seeing  him  some  time  after. 

Good  morning,  Miss  N.  Ah !  here  are  you  at  last ;  I 
have  been  waiting  for  you  with  impatience.  You  will 
pardon  me,  my  dear,  I  could  not  come  sooner.  Sit  down, 
if  you  please.  How  is  your  mother  ?  She  is  better  to-day 
than  she  was  yesterday.  I  am  glad  of  it.  Were  you  at  the 
ball  yesterday?  I  was  there.  Were  you  much  amused. 
Only  so  so.  At  what  o'clock  did  you  return  home  ?  At  a 
quarter  past  eleven. 


Exercise  No.  155. 

Have  you  been  learning  Spanish  long  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have 
been  learning  it  only  these  six  months.  Is  it  possible  !  you 
speak  tolerably  well  for  so  short  a  time.  You  jest  ;  I  do 
not  know  much  of  it  yet.  Indeed,  you  speak  it  well  already. 
I  think  you  flatter  me  a  little.  Not  at  all  ;  you  speak  it 
properly.  In  order  to  speak  it  properly  one  must  know 
more  of  it  than  I  know.  You  know  enough  of  it  to  make 
yourself  understood.  I  still  make  many  mistakes.  That  is 
nothing  ;  you  must  not  be  bashful ;  besides,  you  have  made 
no  mistakes  in  all  you  have  said  just  now.  I  am  still  timid, 
because  I  am  afraid  of  being  laughed  at.  They  would  be 
very  impolite  to  laugh  at  you.  Who  would  be  so  impolite 
as  to  laugh  at  you  ?  Do  you  not  know  the  proverb  ?  What 
I>roverb?     He  who  wishes  to  speak  well  must  begin  by 


PEACTICAL  EXERCISES.  257 

speaking  badly.  Do  you  understand  all  I  am  telling  you  ? 
I  understand  and  comprehend  it  very  well  ;  but  I  cannot 
yet  express  myself  well  in  Spanish,  because  I  am  not  in  the 
habit  of  speaking  it.  That  will  come  in  time.  I  wish  it 
with  all  my  heart. 

Do  you  sometimes  see  my  brother?  I  see  him  some- 
times ;  when  I  met  him  the  other  day  he  complained  of 
you.  "If  he  had  behaved  better,  and  had  been  more 
economical,"  said  he,  "  he  would  have  had  no  debts,  and  I 
would  not  have  been  angry  with  him."  I  begged  him  to 
have  compassion  on  you,  telling  him  that  you  had  not  even 
money  enough  to  buy  bread.  "  Tell  him  when  you  see  him," 
replied  he  to  me,  "  that  notwithstanding  his  bad  behavior 
towards  me,  I  pardon  him.  Tell  him  also,"  continued  he, 
"  that  one  must  not  laugh  at  those  to  whom  one  is  under 
obligations.  Have  the  goodness  to  tell  him  this,  and  I 
shall  be  much  obliged  to  you,"  added  he,  going  away. 


Exercise  No.  156. 

Come  and  take  a  walk.  I  thank  you,  I  will  rather  stay 
at  home  till  you  return.  Let  us  go  and  pay  a  visit  to  Miss 
B.  No,  because  I  have  promised  your  mother  to  stay  and 
take  dinner  with  her.  Come  and  take  a  cup  of  chocolate. 
I  am  much  obliged  to  you  ;  I  am  in  a  hurry.  I  have  to  go 
and  see  my  uncle,  who  has  just  arrived  from  China.  Come 
and  speak  Spanish  to  this  gentleman,  I  cannot  speak  it 
well  yet.  Finish  your  exercise.  I  have  finished  it  already. 
Let  us  send  to  the  Post-office  for  our  letters.  I  have  sent 
the  boy  for  them  already.  Don't  sell  all  your  books.  I 
have  to  sell  them  all,  because  I  am  going  to  Europe  ;  and 
besides  that,  I  am  short  of  money.  Tell  the  servant  to 
dress  the  children  and  take  them  to  school.  Count  that 
money.  How  much  is  it  ?  Three  thousand  and  thirty-five 
dollars. 


258 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHEB. 


FIFTY-FOURTH   LESSON. 


To  double. 

The  double. 

Your  share,  your  part. 

That  merchant  asks  twice  as  much 

as  he  ought. 
You  must  bargain  with  him  ;  he 

will  give  it  to  you  for  the  half. 
You  have  twice  your  share. 

You  have  three  times  your  share. 


To  renew. 
To  stun. 
Wild,  giddy. 
Open,  frank. 


I  told  him  yes. 
I  told  him  no. 


Allow  me,  my  lady,  to  introduce  to 
you  Mr.  G. ,  an  old  friend  of  our 
family. 

I  am  delighted  to  become  acquaint- 
ed with  you,  sir  (or  to  make  your 
acquaintance). 

I  shall  endeavor  to  deserve  it. 

Ladies,  allow  me  to  introduce  to 
you  Mr.  B.,  whose  brother  has 
rendered  eminent  services  to 
your  cousin. 

Sir,  we  are  very  happy  to  see  you 
at  our  house. 


To  whip. 
A  whipping. 


At  farthest. 

He  may  have  a  hundred  dollars, 
at  farthest. 


Even. 

And  even  then  he  will  not  be  able 

to  pay  all  his  debts. 
I  have  paid  him,  and  we  are  even. 


Doblar  or  duplicar. 

El  duplo  or  el  doble. 

Su  parte  de  Vd. 

Aquel  comerciante  pide  el  duplo 

de  lo  que  debe  pedir. 
Vd.  debe  ajustarse  con  dl  ;  el  se  lo 

dara  por  la  mitad. 
Vd.  tiene  doble  parte  de  lo  que  le 

toca. 
Vd.  tiene  tres  vezes  mas  de  lo  que 

le  toca. 


Kenovar. 

Aturdir.     Atontar. 
Atolondrado,  atronado. 
Franco,  injenuo. 


Le  dije  que  sf. 
Le  dije  que  no. 


Permitame,  Vd.,  Sefiora,  que  le 
presente  al  Sefior  de  G.,  antigue 
amigo  de  nuestra  familia. 

Celebro  mucho,  caballero,  de  hacer 
su  conocimiento. 

Me  esforzare  en  merecerlo. 

Sefloras,  permitanme  Vds.  que  le« 
presente  al  Senor  de  B.,  cuyo 
hermano  ha  hecho  importantes 
servicios  al  pnmo  de  Vdo. 

Caballero,  nos  alegramos  mucho 
de  ver  a  Vd.  en  nuestra  casa. 


Azotar,  zurrar. 
Una  zurra. 


A  lo  mas. 

El  puede  tener  cien  pesos  &  lo  mas. 


Aiin. 

Y  aiin  ent6nces  el  no  podra  pagar 

todas  sus  deudas. 
Le  he  pagado,  y  estamos  en  paz. 


PRACTICAL   EXERCISES. 


259 


Further. 

Further  improvements 

I  cannot  go  further. 

To  deliver. 

To  deliver  a  letter. 

To  deliver  a  speech. 

To  report. 

A  report. 

Off  hand. 

To  preach  off  hand. 

Good  luck. 

Faith  ! 

Sloth. 

Pro  and  con. 

A  beautiful  turn. 

To  conceal. 

To  be  deeply  concerned  in 

spiracy. 
Resolutely. 
Torture. 
Will  that  do  i 
To  enchant 


Ulterior.     Mas  adelante. 

Mejoras  ulteriores. 

No  puedo  ir  mas  adelante. 

Entregar. 

Entregar  una  carta 

f  Pronunciar  un  discurso. 

Informar. 

Un  informe. 

f  De  improviso. 

t  Predicar  de  improviso. 

Buena  suerte.    Buena  fortuna. 

Por  cierto ! 

La  pereza. 

En  pro  y  en  contra. 

Un  hermoso  rasgo. 

Ocultar  or  esconder. 

Estar  muy  iniplicado  en  una  cons* 

piracion. 
Resueltamente. 
La  tortura. 
f  i  Bastara  eso  ? 
Encantar. 


Exekcise  No.  157. 

Have  you  already  received  your  share  ?  Of  course  ;  and 
have  you  received  yours  ?  Not  yet.  Has  your  brother  re- 
ceived his  ?  He  has  received  twice  his  share.  Have  you 
ever  bought  of  that  merchant  ?  No,  because  he  asks  for 
every  thing  three  times  as  much  as  he  ought  Allow  me, 
Sir,  to  introduce  to  you  Mr.  A.,  an  intimate  friend  of  mine. 
I  am  delighted  to  become  acquainted  with  you,  Sir  ;  I  shall 
be  happy  to  cultivate  your  acquaintance.  I  shall  endeavor 
to  deserve  it,  Sir.  Ladies,  allow  me  to  introduce  to  you 
Mr.  M.,  who  has  just  arrived  from  Europe.  He  is  a  stran- 
ger in  this  country.  Sir,  we  are  very  happy  to  see  you  at 
our  house.  Why  does  that  man  wish  to  whip  that  boy  ? 
Because  he  deserves  a  good  whipping.  Do  you  intend  to 
make  any  further  advance  of  money  to  that  man  V  I  do, 
because  otherwise  he  will  not  be  able  to  go  any  farther 
with  his  work.  When  did  you  deliver  my  letter  to  your 
father  ?  I  delivered  it  to  him  yesterday.  Where  did  your 
brother  deliver  his  speech  ?  He  delivered  it  at  the  Capitol 
( Capitolio). 


260  THE  SPANISH  TEACHES. 

Exercise  No.  158. 

*A  man  had  two  sons,  one  of  whom  liked  to  sleep  very 
late  in  the  morning  ;  the  other  was  very  industrious,  and 
always  rose  at  day-break.  The  latter  having  one  day  gone 
out  very  early,  found  a  purse  filled  with  money.  He  ran 
to  his  brother  to  inform  him  of  his  good  luck,  and  said  to 
him  :  "  See,  Louis,  what  is  got  by  rising  early."  "  Faith!" 
answered  his  brother,  "  if  the  person  to  whom  it  belongs 
had  not  risen  earlier  than  I,  he  would  not  have  lost  it." 

A  lazy  fellow  was  asked  what  made  him  lie  in  bed  so 
long.  "lam  busied,"  said  he,  "  in  hearing  counsel  every 
morning.  Industry  advises  me  to  get  up  ;  sloth  to  lie  still. 
I  always  hear  what  is  said  on  both  sides,  and  by  the  time 
the  cause  is  over,  dinner  is  ready  (y  cuando  la  causa  se  ha 
concluido,  la  comida  estd  lista)" 

It  was  a  beautiful  reply  given  by  a  distinguished  lady, 
who  being  asked  where  her  husband  was,  when  he  lay  con- 
cealed for  having  been  deeply  concerned  in  a  conspiracy, 
resolutely  answered  she  had  him  hid.  This  confession  drew 
her  before  the  king,  who  told  her  that  her  discovering 
where  her  lord  was  concealed  could  save  her  from  tor- 
ture. "  And  will  that  do  ?"  said  the  lady.  "  Yes,"  replied 
the  king,  "  I  will  give  you  my  word  for  it.  "  Then,"  said 
she,  "  I  have  hid  him  in  my  heart,  where  you  will  find  him." 
This  surprising  answer  disarmed  her  enemies. 


Exercise  No.  159. 

Cornelia,  la  ilustre  madre  de  los  Gracos,  despues  de  la 
muerte  de  su  marido,  quien  le  dejo  doce.hijos,  se  dedico  al 
cuidado  de  su  familia  con  tal  acierto  y  prudencia  que  le 
granjearon  (1)  la  estimacion  universal.  De  los  doce,  sola- 
mente  tres  vivieron  hasta  edad  madura  ;  una  hija,  Sem- 
pronia,  que  caso  con  el  segundo  Escipion  el  Africo-no,  y  dos 
hijos.  Tiberio  y  Cayo,  a  quienes  educo  con  tanto  cuidado, 
que  aunque  se  confesaba  jeneralmente  que  habian  uu.eulo 


PRACTICAL  EXERCISES.  261 

con  fas  mejores  disposiciones,  se  juzgaba  que  aim  mas  de- 
bian  ellos  a  la  educacion  que  a  la  naturaleza.  La  respuesta 
que  dio  Cornelia  a  una  seiiora  de  Campania  (2)  con  refe- 
renda aellos,  es  muy  famosa,  y  contiene  una  grande  instruc- 
cion  para  las  seiloras  y  las  madres. 

Esta  senora,  que  era  muy  rica  y  apasionada  a  la  pompa 
y  a  la  ostentacion  (3),  habiendole  ensenado  sus  diam antes, 
sus  perlas  y  sus  mas  ricas  joyas,  suplico  con  mucho  empeno 
a  Cornelia  que  le  dejase  ver  tambien  las  suyas.  Cornelia 
dirijio  diestramente  la  conversacion  a  otro  asunto  para  dar 
tiempo  a  que  volviesen  sus  kijos  (4),  quienes  habian  ido  a  la 
escuela.  Cuando  volvieron  y  entraron  en  la  sala  (5)  de  su 
madre,  esta,  ensefiandoselos  a  la  senora  de  Campania,  le 
drjo  :  "  He  aqui  mis  joyas  y  los  unicos  adornos  que  yo  apre- 
cio  (6)."  Y  adornos  como  estos,  que  son  la  fuerza  y  el 
sosten  (7)  de  la  sociedad,  dan  un  lustre  mas  relevante  a  la 
hermosura  (8)  que  todas  las  joyas  del  Oriente  (9). 

1.  Granjearon,  acquired.  2.  Una  senora  de  Campania,  a  Campanian 
lady.  3.  Apasionada  a  la  pompa  y  d  la  ostentacion,  fond  of  pomp  and 
show.  4.  Cornelia  dirijio  diestramente  la  conversacion  d  otro  asunto  para 
dar  tiempo  d  que  volviesen  sus  hijos,  Cornelia  dexterously  turned  the 
conversation  to  another  object  to  give  time  for  the  return  of  her  sons. 
5.  Sola,  apartment.  6.  He  aqui  mis  joyas  y  los  unicos  adornos  que  yo 
aprecio,  There  are  my  jewels,  and  the  only  ornaments  I  prize.  7.  La 
fuerza  y  el  sosten,  the  strength  and  support.  8.  Dan  un  lustre  mas  rele- 
vante a  la  hermosura,  add  a  brighter  lustre  to  the  iair.    9.   Oriente,  East. 


FIFTY-FIFTH  LESSON. 

RULES    TO   DISTINGUISH   THE   GENDER   OP   NOUNS. 

Rule  1. — Nouns  ending  in  a,  d,  ie,  ez,  umbre,  or  ion,  arc 
feminine  ;  ending  otherwise  are  masculine.  Exceptions  to 
this  rule  will  be  found  below. 

Rule  2. — The  names  of  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  are 
feminine  ;  the  months  of  the  year  and  days  of  the  week  are 
masculine. 


262 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Masculine  Nouns  having  a  feminine  termination  : 


Adalid, 

the    chief    of    a 

Escorpion, 

scorpion. 

band    of    war- 

Gorrion, 

sparrow. 

riors. 

Guarda  or  guar- 

custom-houso 

Agricola  (sub.), 

a  lover  of  agricul- 

dacosta, 

cutter. 

ture. 

Guardamarina, 

midshipman. 

Agricola  (adj.), 

agricultural. 

Guardia  (2). 

a  soldier  of    the 

Ajedrez, 

chess. 

king's  guard. 

Alerta, 

watchword. 

Guion, 

dash. 

Albacea, 

executor. 

Herrumbre, 

rust. 

Almirez, 

mortar. 

Huesped, 

guest. 

Alumbre, 

alum. 

Idioma, 

language. 

Azumbre, 

pint. 

Laud, 

lute. 

Anagrama, 

anagram. 

Lema, 

lemma. 

Antipodas, 

antipodes. 

Mana, 

manna. 

Apotegma, 

apothegm. 

Mapa, 

map. 

Ardid, 

stratagem. 

Morrion, 

mui-rion. 

Aroma, 

aroma. 

Paraguas, 

umbrella. 

Ataud, 

coffin. 

Panorama, 

panorama. 

Axioma, 

axiom. 

Planeta, 

planet. 

Cesped, 

turf. 

Poema, 

poem. 

Clima, 

climate. 

Prisma, 

prism. 

Colera  (plague) 

cholera. 

Problema, 

problem. 

Coineta  (1), 

comet, 

Relumbre, 

brightness. 

Cortapliimas, 

penknife. 

Sarampion, 

measles. 

Crisma, 

chrism. 

Sintoma, 

symptom. 

Dia, 

day. 

Sistenia, 

system. 

Diagrama, 

diagram. 

Sofa, 

sola. 

Dilema, 

dilemma. 

Soiisma, 

sophism. 

Diploma, 

diploma. 

Sud, 

south. 

Dogma, 

dogma. 

Tapaboca, 

a  slap    giveu  on 

Drama, 

drama. 

the  mouth 

Emblema, 

emblem. 

Tema, 

theme. 

Embrion, 

embryo. 

Teorema, 

theorem. 

Enigma, 

enigma. 

Viva, 

cheer,  huzza. 

Epf  grama, 

epigram. 

Feminine  Nouns,  though  they  do  not  terminate  in  a,  d, 
ie,  umbre,  ez,  or  ion  : 


the 


Armazon, 

carcass  or  frame. 

Bilis, 

bile. 

Arte, 

art 

Bocacalles, 

junction    of 

Ave, 

fowL 

streets. 

Base, 

basis. 

Cal, 

lime. 

1.  Cometa,  meaning  a  kite,  is  feminine. 

2.  When  guardia  means  a  guard,  a  body  of  soldiers,  then  it  is  femin- 
ine. 


TRACTICAL  EXERCISES. 


263 


Calle, 

street. 

Hiel, 

gall. 

Canal  (1), 

gutter. 

Hijiene, 

hygiene. 

Capital  (2), 

metropolis. 

Hinchazon, 

swelling. 

Carcel, 

prison. 

Hipotesis, 

hypothesis. 

Cargazon, 

cargo. 

Hoz, 

sickle. 

Carne, 

flesh,  meat. 

Hueste, 

host. 

Oatastrofe, 

catastrophe. 

Hiperbole, 

hyperbole. 

Catedral, 

cathedral. 

Imajen, 

image. 

Cerviz, 

nape. 

Indole, 

temper. 

Clase, 

class. 

Ingle, 

groin. 

Cicatriz, 

a  scar. 

Jente, 

people. 

Clavazon, 

a  row  of  nails. 

Labor, 

Work. 

Clave, 

key-stone,  key. 

Larinje, 

larynx. 

Clin  or  crin, 

mane. 

Leche, 

milk. 

Codorniz, 

quail. 

Ley, 

law. 

Col, 

cabbage. 

Liebre, 

hare. 

Coliflor, 

cauliflower. 

Liendre, 

nit. 

Corriente, 

stream. 

Ligazon, 

contexture. 

Corte  (3), 

court. 

Lombriz, 

a  sort  of  worm. 

Coz, 

kick. 

Luz, 

light. 

Creciente. 

flood-tide. 

Llave, 

M- 

Crisis, 

crisis. 

Mano, 

hand. 

Cruz, 

cross. 

Marjen  (5), 

bank  (of  a  river). 

Ciispide. 

cuspis. 

Matriz, 

matrix. 

Desazon, 

uneasiness. 

Menguante 

last  quarter. 

Diocesi, 

diocese. 

Mente, 

mind. 

Estirpe, 

race. 

Metamorfosu*, 

m  etamorphosis 

Falanje, 

phalanx. 

Metropoli, 

metropolis. 

Fase, 

phase. 

Miel, 

honey. 

Fauces  (plural), 

fauces. 

Mies, 

crop. 

Faz, 

face. 

Mole, 

mass. 

Fe, 

faith. 

Moral, 

ethics,  moral. 

Fiebre, 

fever. 

Muerte, 

death. 

Frase, 

phrase. 

Nave  or  nao, 

ship. 

Frente  (4), 

forehead. 

Nariz, 

nose. 

Fuente, 

fountain. 

Nieve, 

snow. 

Flor, 

flower. 

Noche, 

night. 

Grey, 

flock. 

Nube, 

cloud. 

Hanibre, 

hunger. 

Orden  (6), 

command 

1.  When  meaning  canal  or  channel,  is  masculine. 

2.  When  meaning  money,  is  masculine. 

3.  When  corte  means  the  sharp  edge  of  a  tool,  a  pattern  for  a  dress,  it 
is  masculine. 

4.  When  frente  means  the  front,  it  is  masculine. 

5.  When  marjen  means  the  margin  of  a  book,  then  it  is  masculine. 

6.  When  meaning  regular  disposition,  or  methodical  arrangement  of 
things,  it  is  nraculine. 


264 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHEB. 


Parafrasis, 

Paralisis, 

Parte  (1), 

Patente, 

Paz, 

Perdiz, 

Perifrasis, 

Poste, 

Piel, 

Pir&inide, 

Plebe, 

Podre, 

Prole, 

Raiz, 

Razon, 

Res, 

Sal, 

Sangre, 

Sarten, 

Sazon, 

Sede, 


paraphrase. 

Segazon, 

palsy. 

Segur, 

part. 

Serial, 

patent 

Serpiente, 

peace. 

Sien, 

partridge. 

Sierpe, 

periphrasis. 

Simientc 

plague. 

Sincope, 

skin. 

Sinrazon, 

pyramid. 

Sintaxis, 

common  people. 

Sobrepelhz, 

pus. 

Suerte, 

issue. 

Tarde, 

root. 

Tilde, 

reason. 

Torre, 

head  of  cattle. 

Tos, 

salt. 

Trabazon, 

blood. 

Tribu, 

frying-pan. 

Ubre, 

seasoning. 

Vocal  (2), 

a  see. 

Voz, 

reaping  season. 

axe. 

signal. 

serpent. 

temple. 

young  serpent 

seed. 

syncope. 

injustice. 

syntax. 

surplice. 

chance,  fate. 

afternoon. 

a  dot 

tower. 

cough 

juncture. 

tribe. 

udder. 

vowel. 

voice. 


Nouns  which  are  common  to  both  genders,  and  therefor* 
may  be  used  with  the  masculine  or  the  feminine  article, 
thus  :  el  cutis  or  la  cutis,  the  skin. 


Anatema, 

anathema  (for  ex- 

Guia, 

guide. 

communication). 

Lente  (5), 

eye-glass. 

Azucar  (3), 

sugar. 

Mar  (6), 

sea. 

Cisma, 

schism. 

Puente, 

bridge. 

Cutis, 

skin. 

Reuma, 

rheum. 

Dote  (4), 

gift 

1.  When  parte  means  a  report,  it  is  masculine. 

2.  When  vocal  means  a  member  of  a  corporation,  it  is  masculine. 

3.  Azucar  is  most  commonly  used  with  the  masculine  article. 

4.  Dote,  when  meaning  a  gift  of  nature  or  endowment,  is  femininej 
and  it  is  generally  used  in  the  plural  (las  dotes). 

5.  Lente  is  more  generaUy  used  with  the  masculine  article. 

6.  Mar,  when  qualified  by  the  adjectives  Red,  Mediterranean,  etc.,  is 
masculine  (El  mar  hojo). 


CONVERSATIONAL     EXERCISES. 


FIRST  CONVERSATION. 


Good  morning  or  good  day,  Sir. 

Good  afternoon,  Madam. 

Good  evening  or  good  night,  Miss . 

How  do  you  do  ? 

Very  well,  and  you  ? 

Very  well,  at  your  service. 

Good-bye. 

Until  to-morrow. 

Until  the  day  after  to-morrow. 

1  shall  be  very  happy  to  see  you. 


Buenos  or  felizes  dias,  Seflor  (1), 

Buenas  or  felizes  tardes,  Senora. 

Buenas  or  felizes  noches,  Sefiorita 

I  Ooino  lo  pasa  Vd.  ? 

May  bien,  -t  y  Vd.  ? 

Sin  novedad,  para  servir  a  Vd.  (2. 

A  Dios. 

Hasta  manana. 

Hasta  pas  ado  mafiana. 

Me  alegrare  mucho  de  ver  a  Vd. 


How  do  you  do,  Sir  ?  Very  well,  and  you  ?  Very  well, 
at  your  service.  Good  evening,  Miss.  Good  evening,  Sir. 
Good-bye,  Sir,  until  the  day  after  to-morrow — perhaps  {tat 
vez  or  quizd)  to-morrow.  I  shall  be  very  happy  to  see  you. 
Thank  you  (gracias). 


SECOND  CONVERSATION. 


Will  you  favor  me  with  your  name? 

If  you  please. 

With  much  pleasure. 

I  am  much  obhged  to  you. 

Not  at  all. 

I  present  to  you  my  best  respects, 

Miss. 
I  am  your  humble  servant,  Sir. 


I  Quiere  Vd.  hacerme  el  favor  de 

darme  su  nombre  ? 
Si  Vd.  gusta. 
Con  mucho  gusto. 
f  Quedo  a  Vd.  muy  agradecido  (3). 
f  No  hay  de  que*, 
f  A  los  pies  de  Vd.  (4)  SeSorita. 

fBeso   a  Vd.  las   manos   (5)   ca- 
ballero. 

1.  In  Spanish  we  never  say  "good  morning,"  but  "good  day."  buenos 
dias,  in  the  plural. 

2.  Para  servir  6-  Vd.t — it  is  used  also  as  an  equivalent  of  the  English 
expression,  "You  nro  wc-kiome,"  to  answer  any  person  who  thanks  us. 

3.  If  it  is  a  female,  it  must  be  agradecida,  to  agree  in  gender. 

4.  Literally  translated,  ;iI  am  at  your  feet"  (to  be  said  only  to  ladies). 

5.  Literal  translation,  "I  kiss  your  hand,"  (to  be  said  only  to  gentle- 
men). Tb&  Spaniards  use  also  in  their  letters,  as  a  polite  expression,  the 
following  writing  bcluie  the  signature — Que  besa  sus  manos  (who  kissea 
your  hands),  abbreviated  thus  :  Q.  B.  S.  M. 


2G6 


TIIE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Good  morning,  Sir.  How  do  you  do?  Very  well,  Sir, 
and  you  ?  Very  well,  at  your  service.  Will  you  favor  me 
with  your  name?  Yes,  Sir,  with  much  pleasure.  I  am 
much  obKirCMi  to  you,  Sir.  Not  at  all.  I  present  to  you 
my  best  respects,  Miss.  I  am  your  humble  servant,  Sir. 
Good-bye,  until  to-morrow,r l<S^j|  the  day  after  to-morrow 
I  shall  be  very  happy  to  see  you. 


THIRD  CONVERSATION. 


"Walk  in,  come  in. 

Be  pleased  to  sit  down. 

Will  you  walk  in,  {or  come  in)  ? 

Excuse  me  a  moment. 
You  are  quite  a  stranger. 
I  am  always  busy. 


Adelante.  Entre  Vd. 
Sirvase  Vd.  sentarse. 
,;  Quiere  Vd.  pasar  adelante  {or  en« 

trar) ? 
Dispenseme  Vd.  un  momento. 
f  No  hay  quien  vea  a  Vd. 
Estoy  siempre  ocupado  (or  ocupvda 

if  it  is  a  female). 


I  present  to  you  my  best  respects,  Miss.  How  do  you  do, 
Sir  ?  Very  well,  at  your  service.  You  are  quite  a  stranger. 
Are  (estd)  you  very  busy?  I  am  always  busy.  Will  you 
walk  in?  Yes,  Miss,  with  much  pleasure.  Be  pleased  to 
sit  down,  and  excuse  me  a  moment.  How  is  your  friend 
($  Gomo  lo  pasa  su  amigo  de  Vd.  ?  fern,  amiga).  Very  well,  I 
thank  you.  Is  he  (eatd  el)  as  busy  as  (tan  ocupado  como) 
you?  By  no  means  (De  ningun  modo).  He  is  always  in 
company  with  ladies  (El  anda  siempre  en  sociedad  de  sefloras). 
I  am  much  obliged  to  you,  Miss.     You  are  welcome,  Sir. 


FOURTH  CONVERSATION, 

"What  is  the  best  news  with  you  ? 


Nothing  particular. 

What  is  that? 

Are  you  in  a  hurry  ? 

I  am  not  in  a  hurry. 

Are  you  ready  ? 

I  am  ready. 

I  am  very  glad  to  see  you. 


,;  Qud  nos  dice  Vd.  or  que*  hay  de 

nuevo  ? 
Nada  particular. 
I  Que  es  eso  ? 
,;Esta  Vd.  de  priesa? 
f  No  estoy  de  priesa. 
fiEsta  Vd.  listo? 
f  Estoy  lislo. 
}  Me  alegro  mucho  de  ver  a  Vd. 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 


267 


Walk  in.  Good  evening.  How  do  you  do?  I  am  very 
glad  to  see  you.  You  are  quite  a  stranger.  Be  pleased  to 
take  a  seat.  What  is  the  best  ne  ws  ?  Nothing  particular. 
Are  you  ready?  Not  yet  (todavia).  Excuse  me  a  moment, 
if  you  please.  Certainly  (seguramente)  with  much  pleasure, 
Are  you  in  a  hurry?  No,  Sir,  I  am  not  in  a  hurry.  I  pre- 
sent to  you  my  best  respects,  Miss.  I  am  your  humble  ser- 
vant, Sir.  Will  you  walk  in  ?  I  am  much  obliged  to  you, 
Miss  ;  I  am  in  a  hurry.  Good-bye,  until  to-morrow,  or  the 
day  after  to-morrow.     I  shall  be  happy  to  see  you. 


FIFTH  CONVERSATION. 


Bookkeeper. 

Cashier. 

In  haste. 

Do  not  trouble  yourself. 

It  is  not  a  trouble. 

I  thank  you  for  your  kindness. 

I  am  sorry  to  trouble  you  for  a  mo- 
ment. 

Not  at  all.     By  no  means. 

When  shall  I  have  the  pleasure  to 
see  you  again  ? 


Tenedor  de  libros. 

Cajero. 

t  De  priesa. 

f  No  se  moleste  Vd. 

No  es  molestia. 

f  Mil  gracias  por  su  bondad. 

f  Siento  molestar  a  Vd.  por  un  mo- 
rn ento. 

f  De  ningun  modo. 

I  Cuando  volvere  a  tener  el  placer 
de  ver  a  Vd.  ? 


I  am  sorry  to  trouble  you  for  a  moment.  Not  at  all.  I 
thank  you  for  your  kindness.  You  are  welcome.  I  am  very 
glad  to  see  you.  How  have  you  been  (Gomo  lo  ha  pasado 
Vd.)  ?  Very  well,  at  your  service.  When  shall  I  have  the 
pleasure  to  see  you  again?  Thank  you,  Sir,  perhaps  to- 
morrow, or  the  day  after.  I  shall  be  very  happy  to  see  you. 
Is  your  bookkeeper  busy?  He  is  always  busy.  Is  your 
cashier  in  a  hurry  for  the  money  ?  By  no  means  ;  there  ia 
no  hurry  (no  corre  priesa) . 


Sunday. 

Monday. 

Tuesday. 

Wednesday. 

Thursday. 

Friday. 


SIXTH  CONVERSATION. 

Domingo. 

Lunes. 

Martes. 

Miercoles. 

Jueves. 

Vie'rnes. 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHEK. 


Saturday. 

On  Sunday. 

On  Monday  next. 

On  Monday  last. 

What  day  of  the  week  is  it  ? 


Sabado. 

El  domingo. 

El  limes  proximo. 

El  liines  pasado. 

I  Que-  dia  de  la  semana  es  hoy  ? 


When  shall  I  have  the  pleasure  of  seeing  you  again  ?  On 
Monday  next,  or  perhaps  before  (antes).  I  will  be  very 
happy  to  see  you.  Thank  you.  What  day  of  the  week  is 
it  ?  To-day  is  (hoy  es)  Sunday.  To-day  is  Monday.  To- 
day is  Tuesday.  To-day  is  Wednesday.  To-day  is  Thurs- 
day. To-day  is  Friday.  To-day  is  Saturday.  Sunday. 
Monday.  Tuesday.  Wednesday.  Thursday.  Friday.  Sa- 
turday.    Next  Sunday.     Last  Sunday. 


SEVENTH  CONVERSATION. 


Who  is  there  ? 

Who  is  it? 

How  are  you  ? 

I  am  rather  indisposed. 

Has  the  steamer  arrived? 

It  has  just  arrived. 

It  brings  bad  news. 

I  am  very  sorry. 

I  am  very  glad. 


;.  Quien  esta  ahi  ? 
,;  Quien  es  ? 
I  Como  esta  Vd.  ? 
Estoy  algo  indispuesto, 
I  Ha  Uegado  el  vapor  ? 
f  Acaba  de  llegar. 
Trae  malas  noticias. 
f  Lo  siento  mucho. 
f  Me  alegro  mueho. 


Who  is  it  ?  Who  is  there  ?  Walk  in.  How  do  you  do  ? 
I  am  rather  indisposed  to-day.  How  are  you  ?  Very  well, 
I  thank  you.  Sit  down  (sientese  Vd.).  What  is  the  best 
news  with  you  ?  It  is  said  that  (se  dice  que)  the  steamer 
has  just  arrived.  What  news  does  it  bring  (Que  noticias 
trae)  ?  It  is  said  that  it  brings  very  bad  news.  I  am  very 
sorry.     It  is  said  that  it  brings  good  news.    I  am  very  glad. 


What  is  that? 
Take  care ! 
Be  careful. 
The  mail. 
The  post-office. 
That  is  it 


EIGHTH  CONVERSATION. 


I  Que*  es  eso  ? 

f  j  Cuidado  ! 

f  Tenga  Vd.  cuidado. 

El  correo. 

La  estafeta  de  correos. 

Eso  es. 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 


269 


Has  the  mail  arrived  ?  It  has  not  arrived  yet.  What  is 
it?  The  mail  has  just  arrived.  I  am  glad.  Is  there  any 
thing  new?  {Hay  algo  de  nuevo)  ?  Nothing  particular. 
Are  you  (estd  Vd.)  very  busy  to-day?  Rather  so  (aljo  or  un 
poco).  What  day  of  the  week  is  it  ?  It  is  Monday.  That 
is  it.  Take  care  !  to-day  is  mail  day,  (dia  de  correo).  Are 
you  not  busy  ?    By  no  means. 


NINTH  CONVERSATION. 


Shall  you  go  to  the  concert  ? 

I  suppose  so. 

Of  course. 

By  all  means. 

Any  how. 

By  no  means. 

On  no  account. 

Otherwise. 

I  would  go. 


jlra  Vd.  al  concierto  ? 

f  Supongo  que  si. 

f  Por  supuesto. 

|  De  todos  modos. 

t  De  cualquier  modo. 

f  De  ningun  modo. 

f  Por  ningun  motivo  or  pretesto. 

f  De  otro  modo. 

Iria. 


Shall  you  go  to  the  concert  ?  I  am  very  busy  ;  to-day  is 
mail  day,  otherwise  I  would  go.  Shall  you  go  to-morrow  ? 
I  suppose  so  ;  and  you  ?  Of  course,  by  all  means.  I  will 
accompany  you  (acompaftare  a  Vd.)  if  you  please.  With 
much  pleasure.  I  will  be  happy  to  go  (ir)  with  you. 
Thank  you.  What  is  the  best  news  with  you  ?  Nothing 
particular.  How  is  your  brother  ?  Very  well  I  thank  you. 
Remember  me  to  him  (Hdgale  Vd.  mis  recuerdos).  I  will 
do  so  {Lo  hare)  with  much  pleasure. 


TENTH  CONVERSATION. 


Is  it  cold? 
It  is  very  cold. 
It  is  very  warm. 
How  is  the  weather  ? 

It  is  very  fine  weather. 
It  is  a  very  fine  day. 

It  is  bad  weather. 
To-morrow  morning. 


t  i  Hace  frio  ? 

f  Hace  mucho  frio. 

f  Hace  mucho  calor. 

f  i  Que*    tiempo  hace  ?  or  i  Como 

esta  el  tiempo  ? 
f  Hace  muy  buen  tiempo. 
f  Hace  un  dia  muy  hermoso,    or 

hermosisimo. 
f  Hace  mal  tiempo. 
f  Mafiana  por  la  manana. 


270 


THE   SFANISH  TEACHER. 


Is  it  cold  ?  It  is  not  very  cold.  Is  it  warm  ?  It  is  very 
warm.  It  is  neither  cold  nor  warm.  How  is  the  weather  ? 
It  is  bad  weather.  It  is  very  fine  weather.  It  is  a  very 
fine  day.  "When  shall  I  have  the  pleasure  to  see  you  again  ? 
Perhaps  to-morrow  morning.  I  will  be  very  happy  to  see 
you.  How  is  your  son  ?  He  is  much  better  to-day  (edd 
mucho  mejor  hoy).  I  am  very  glad  to  hear  it  {me  alegro 
mucho).  He  is  worse  (peor).  I  am  very  sorry  to  hear  it 
{lo  siento  mucho). 


ELEVENTH  CONVERSATION. 


I  come  to  take  leave  of  you  for 

Havana . 
When  is  your  departure  ? 
It  may  be  this  afternoon. 
Don't  you  like  the  city  ? 
I  like  the  people  very  much. 
But   the    climate   does  not  agree 

with  me. 


Vengo  a  despedirme  de  Vd. 

la  Habana. 
,:  Cuando  es  su  partida  ? 
Puede  que  sea  esta  tarde. 
I  No  le  gusta  a  Vd.  la  ciudad  ? 
La  jente  me  gusta  mucho. 
Pero  el  chma  no  me  sienta  bien. 


para 


I  come  to  take  leave  of  you  for  Havana.  "When  is  your 
departure  ?  It  may  be  this  afternoon.  Don't  you  like  the 
city  ?  I  like  the  people  very  much  ;  but  the  climate  does 
not  agree  with  me.  Do  you  intend  to  return  (jriensa  Vd. 
volver)  ?  I  do  intend  to  return  after  this  winter  is  over 
(pienso  volver  despues  depatada  el  invierno).  I  shall  be  very 
happy  to  see  you. 


TWTELFTH  CONVERSATION. 


I  wish  you  good  success. 

An  honest  man. 

I  do  not  know  whether  he  is  mar- 
ried or  single. 

Is  it  Mr.  N.  to  whom  I  have  the 
honor  to  speak  ? 

That  is  my  name,  Sir. 


Deseo  a  Vd.  buen  e*xito. 

Un  hombre  de  bien. 

No  se  si  es  casado  6  soltero  (/em. 

casada  6  soltera). 
^Es  al  Seiior  N.  a  quien  tengo  el 

honor  de  hablar  ? 
f  Un  servidor  de  Vd. 


Is  your  friend  single  or  married  ?  He  is  married.  I  do 
not  know  whether  be  is  single  or  married?  I  know  that 
(se  qm )  he  is  an  honest  man  ?    Is  it  Mr.  N.  to  whom  I  have 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 


271 


the  honor  to  speak  ?  That  is  my  name,  Sir.  I  wish  you 
good  success  in  your  undertaking  (eh  su  empiesa).  I  thank 
you  very  much  (mil  gracias).  Are  you  very  busy?  Not  at 
this  moment.  I  am  sorry  to  trouble  you.  When  is  your 
departure  ?  It  may  be  to-morrow  morning.  Are  you 
ready  ?  No,  Sir,  I  am  not  ready  yet.  I  shall  not  be  (no 
edare)  ready  before  (hasta  el)  next  Thursday.  I  am  very 
sorry.  Sit  down,  and  excuse  me  a  moment.  Certainly. 
Are  you  in  a  hurry  ?  No,  Sir,  I  am  not  in  a  hurry.  I  shall 
wait  on  you  in  a  moment  (me  pondre  or  estare  a  sus  brdenes 
en  un  momento). 


THIRTEENTH  CONVERSATION. 


What  time  is  it  ? 
It  is  one  o'clock. 
It  is  two  o'clock. 
It  is  three  o'clock. 
It  is  four  o'clock. 
It  is  five  o'clock. 
It  is  six  o'clock. 
It  is  seven  o'clock. 
It  is  eight  o'clock. 
It  is  nine  o'clock. 
It  is  ten  o'clock. 
It- is  eleven  o'clock. 
It  is  twelve  o'clock. 


I  Que'  hora  es  ? 
Es  La  una. 
Son  las  dos. 
Son  las  ires. 
Son  las  cuatro. 
Son  las  cinco. 
Son  las  seis. 
Son  las  siete. 
Son  las  ocho. 
Son  las  nueve. 
Son  las  diez. 
Son  las  once. 
Son  las  doce. 


What  hour  is  it  ?    It  is  one  o'clock.     It  is  two  o'clock.     It 
is  three  o'clock.     It  is  four  o'clock.     It  is  five  o'clock,  etc, 


FOURTEENTH  CONVERSATION. 


Is  it  late? 

It  is  not  early. 

It  is  half  after  one. 

It  is  a  quarter  after  one. 

It  is  a  quarter  to  one . 

It  is  five  minutes  to  one. 

It  is  half  alter  two. 

It  is  ten  minutes  after  two. 


I  Es  tarde  ? 

No  es  temprano. 

Es  la  una  y  media. 

Es  la  una  y  cuarto. 

Es  la  una  ine'nos  cuarto. 

Es  la  una  menos  cinco  minutos. 

Son  las  dos  y  media. 

Son  las  dos  y  diez  minutos. 


Is  it  late  ?     It  is  not  late.     It  is  early.     What  hour  is  it  i 
It  is  one  o'clock.     It  is  two  o'clock.     It  is  half  after  two. 


272 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


It  is  three  o'clock.  It  is  a  quarter  to  three.  It  is  four 
o'clock.  It  is  two  minutes  after  four.  It  is  five  o'clock. 
It  is  five  minutes  to  five.  It  is  six  o'clock.  It  is  a  quarter 
to  six.  It  is  seven  o'clock.  It  is  half  after  seven.  It  ia 
eight  o'clock.  It  is  a  quarter  after  eight.  It  is  nine  o'clock. 
It  is  ten  minutes  to  nine.  It  is  ten  o'clock.  It  is  half  after 
ten  It  is  eleven  o'clock.  It  is  five  minutes  to  eleven.  It 
is  twelve  o'clock.     It  is  a  quarter  after  twelve. 


FIFTEENTH  CONVERSATION. 


I  wish  (or  want)  to  ask  you  a-ques- 

tion. 
I  beg  your  pardon. 
Sooner  or  later. 
Before  hand. 

To  be  well  off. 
To  look  out. 
Put  out  the  light. 
To  put  out  the  fire. 
Go  on. 

To  miss. 

I  miss. 

Have  you  good  sight  ? 

I  am  short-sighted. 

To  bell  the  cat. 

The  baker's  dozen. 


f  Deseo  or  quiero  hacer  a  Yd.  una 

pregunta. 
f  Perdone  Vd. 
f  Tarde  6  temprano. 
f  De  antemano,    or  con  anticipa- 

cion. 
t  Estar  bien. 
t  Precaverse. 
t  Apague  Vd.  la  luz. 
f  Apagar  el  fuego. 
t  Adelante.      Prosiga,  or  ccniimie 

Vd. 
f  Echar  de  me*nos. 
f  Echo  de  me'nos. 
I  Tiene  Vd.  buena  vista* 
I  Soy  corto  de  vista, 
f  Poner  el  cascabel  al  gate, 
f  La  docena  del  fraile. 

Are  you  very  busy  to-day  ?  I  wish  to  ask  you  a  question. 
I  will  be  happy  to  be  able  to  satisfy  you  (poder  satisfacer  a 
Vd.)  Is  your  friend  well  off?  I  do  not  know  whether  he 
is  well  off  or  not.  I  beg  your  pardon.  Not  at  all.  Will 
you  put  out  the  fire  and  the  light  before  hand?  Certainly, 
with  much  pleasure.  Go  on.  What  do  you  miss  ?  I  miss 
my  book  and  my  silk  gloves.  What  hour  is  it  ?  It  is  half 
past  six.  How  much  is  (cuanto  es)  the  baker's  dozen  ? 
Twelve.  I  beg  your  pardon,  Sir  ;  it  is  thirteen  (trece). 
That  is  it  ;  you  are  right.  Have  you  good  sight  ?  No,  Sir, 
I  am  short-sighted.  Do  you  like  this  city  ?  I  like  the 
people  very  much,  but  the  climate  does  not  agree  with  me. 
Do  you  intend  to  return  to  Havana  ?     Yes,  Sir,  I  do  intend 


m 


CONYERSATIONAL  EXEKCISES.  273 

to  return  before  winter.  When  is  your  departure  ?  It  may 
be  next  week.  Are  you  ready  ?  I  am  always  ready.  Who 
wishes  to  bell  the  cat  ?    Nobody. 


SIXTEENTH  CONVERSATION. 


Asiatic  luxury. 
Every  other  day. 
The  advertisement 
An  advice. 
To  advise. 
The  copy-book. 


Lujo  asiatico. 
f  Cada  dos  dias. 
El  anuncio  or  aviso. 
Un  consejo. 
Aconsejar. 
El  cuaderno. 


This  gentleman  lives  in  (vive  con  un)  Asiatic  luxury.  How 
often  is  this  advertisement  published  (4  Con  que  free uencid 
se  publica  este  anuncio)  ?  It  is  published  every  other  day. 
Every  other  Monday.  Every  other  Saturday.  Every  other 
Friday.  Every  other  Thursday.  Every  other  Sunday. 
Every  other  Wednesday.  Every  other  Tuesday.  Every 
other  week.  Every  other  evening.  Every  other  night. 
Have  you  received  good  advice  from  your  friend  ?  No,  Sir, 
he  is  not  accustomed  (ffl  no  acoslumbra)  to  advise  any  one 
(a  nadie).  I  am  sorry  to  trouble  you  for  my  copy-book. 
It  is  not  a  trouble. 


SEVENTEENTH  CONVERSATION. 


What  do  you  call  this  ? 
A  quotation. 
An  appointment. 
To  pay  a  compliment. 
To  quote  from  him. 
The  bell. 
The  little  bell. 
Railroad. 


I  C6mo  se  llama  esto  ? 

Una  cita. 

Hacer  un  cumplimiento. 

Citarle. 

La  campana. 

La  campanilla. 

Ferro-carril  or  camino  de  hierro. 


Which  is  the  greatest  (mayor)  compliment  that  can  be 
paid  (puede  hacerse)  to  an  author?  To  quote  from  him. 
What  do  you  call  wafer  in  Spanish  ?  It  is  called  oblea.  What 
do  you  call  railroad  in  Spanish  ?  It  is  called  ferro-carril  or 
'.'.amino  de  hierro.  Have  you  an  appointment  with  that  man  ? 
Yes,  I  have  an  appointment  with  him  to-night  (esta  noche). 


274 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


Have  you  heard  (ha  Udo  Vd.)  the  bell?  What  is  that?  It 
is  the  little  bell.  I  am  much  obliged  to  you  for  your  kind- 
ness (por  su  boadad).  Not  at  all.  You  are  welcome.  Are 
you  ready?  I  am  not  ready  yet.  Excuse  me  a  moment. 
Certainly. 


EIGHTEENTH  CONVERSATION. 


A  copy  of  a  book  or  periodical. 

As  you  please. 

A  copy. 

To  copy. 

To  copy  fairly. 

The  dictionary. 

The  grammar. 

Will  you  have  the  goodness  to,  &c.  ? 


Un  ejemplar. 

Como  Vd.  guste. 

Una  copia. 

Copiar. 

f  Poner  en  limpio. 

El  diccionario. 

La  gramatica. 

I  Quiere  Vd.  tener  la  bondad  dc,&c? 


"Will  you  have  the  goodness  to  copy  fairly  this  letter? 
With  much  pleasure.  Do  you  like  to  go  to  the  concert  or 
to  the  opera  ?  As  you  please.  Have  you  a  copy  of  my  Dic- 
tionary ?  I  have  not  a  copy  of  your  Dictionary,  but  I  have 
one  of  your  Grammar.  Have  you  a  copy  of  this  letter  ?  I 
have  one.  Will  you  have  the  goodness  to  tell  me  (de  de- 
tinue) the  names  of  the  months  of  the  year  in  Spanish? 
Certainly,  with  much  pleasure  :  January,  February,  March, 
April,  May,  June,  July,  August,  September,  October,  No- 
vember, December.  Now  (ahora)  be  pleased  to  translate 
(iraducir)  into  (al)  Spanish  the  following  dates  (las  fechas 
siguientes)  :  Jan.  1st,  1848.  March  2d,  1836.  June  3d,  1824. 
August  14,  1785.  July  4th,  1776.  December  15th,  1555. 
September  6th,  1847.  April,  1820.  October,  1111.  Feb- 
ruary 22d,  1732.     November,  1492.     May  2d,  1808. 


NINETEENTH  CONVERSATION, 

Never  mind,  no  matter,  it  is  of  no  ,  No  importa.     No  le  hace. 

consequence. 

Blotting  paper.  |  Teleta. 

Do  you  wish  a  receipt?  1 i  Quiere  Vd.  un  recibo? 
A  promissory  note.  Un  pagard. 

An  order.  Una  orden. 


1 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES.  275 


Hie  key. 

The  key  (of  a  book). 

The  signature. 


La  Have  (fem.). 
La  clave  (fem.). 
La  firma. 


To  sign.  Firmar. 

Will  you  have  (qi<  iere  Vd. )  a  receipt  ?  As  you  please.  It 
is  of  no  consequence.  Do  you  wish  a  promissory  note  ?  If 
you  please.  Will  you  sign  this  receipt  ?  Yes,  and  the  or- 
der also  (tambien)  if  you  wish.  Have  you  seen  my  signa- 
ture ?  I  have  seen  it  once  (una  vez),  twice  (dos  vezes).  Will 
you  have  the  kindness  to  (de)  pass  me  (pasarme)  the  blot- 
ting paper  ?  Do  you  want  it  ?  Of  course.  Have  you  the 
key  of  the  door  of  my  room  (cuarto)  ?  I  have  not  the  key 
of  your  room,  I  have  the  key  of  your  Grammar.  What  date 
has  the  promissory  note?  It  has  the  date  January  1st  or 
2d.  What  a  beautiful  signature !  Is  this  (es  este)  your 
name  ?  No,  Sir,  it  is  my  brother's  name.  Is  his  advertise- 
ment published  ?  No,  Sir,  he  is  not  accustomed  to  publish 
advertisements.  Who  lives  in  this  house  ?  My  friend  ;  he 
lives  in  Asiatic  luxury. 


TWENTIETH  CONVERSATION. 


Tenemos  a  la  vista. 

Un  hombre  raro  or  singular. 

,j  No  es  asl  ? 

Asf  es. 

Eso  es. 

Si'rvase  Vd. 

Asi  lo  espero. 


We  have  before  us. 
A  curious  man. 
Is  it  not  so  ? 
It  is  so. 
That  is. 
Help  yourself. 
I  hope  so. 

We  have  before  us  your  favor  of  the  2d  instant  (la  apre- 
ciable  de  Vd.  de  2  del  corriente).  Is  not  that  a  curious  man  ? 
So  he  appears  to  me  (Asi  me  parece).  Help  yourself.  How 
beautiful  she  looks  ( Que  hermosa  parece) !  Is  your  friend  an 
honest  man  ?  No  doubt  he  is  (Sin  duda  lo  es).  I  wish  him 
good  success  in  his  undertaking.  Has  he  written  (escrito) 
his  exercise  well?  I  hope  so.  I  suppose  so.  I  suppose 
not.  I  am  your  humble  servant,  Sir.  I  present  to  you  my 
respects,  Miss.  Will  you  have  the  kindness  to  walk  in  ( pa* 
sar  adelante)  ?  Are  you  busy  ?  Not  at  this  moment  (en  este 
momento).  What  is  the  best  news  with  you  ?  Nothing  par- 
ticular. 


276 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 


TWENTY-FIRST  CONVERSATION. 


That  is  right. 
That  is  wrong. 
"What  else? 
Nothing  else. 
He  will  repent  it. 
The  visiting  card. 
The  atlas. 
The  map. 
The  veil. 

It  is  very  strange. 
Strange ! 
Or  else. 


f  Bien  hecho. 

f  Mai  hecho. 

(iQue'  mas? 

Nada  mas. 

El  se  arrepentira. 

La  tarjeta. 

El  atlas  (plur.  los  atlas). 

El  mapa. 

El  velo. 

Es  muy  estrano. 

f  ;  Cosa  rara  ! 

f  0  de  lo  contrario. 


Will  you  have  the  goodness  to  write  to  my  father  ?  of 
else  he  will  be  offended  (se  ofenderd).  I  will  do  so  with 
much  pleasure.  It  is  very  strange  that  he  does  not  come 
(venga).  Strange !  He  will  repent  it.  Have  you  received 
my  visiting  card  ?  Yes,  Sir,  and  I  have  also  received  youi 
atlas.  And  what  else  ?  The  veil,  nothing  more.  "What  do 
you  call  railroad  in  Spanish?  How  many  copies  ©f  your 
atlas  have  you  printed  (impreso)  ?  I  have  printed  few  at- 
lases, but  many  maps.  That  is  right.  That  is  wrong.  Al- 
low me  to  advise  you  in  the  matter  (Permitame  Vd.  aconse- 
jarle  sobre  este  asunto.)  Certainly,  I  will  be  much  obliged  to 
you.  ( Quedare  a  Vd.  muy  agradecido,  or  Se  lo  agradecere  a 
Vd.  mucho) 


TWENTY-SECOND  CONVERSATION. 


Have  you  gone  through  the  book  ? 

I  have. 

To  pay  attention. 

Early  next  week.  ■< 

Early  in  April. 

Charge"  d' Affaires. 

Business  or  affairs. 

Matter  or  subject. 

He  will  pay  you  when  two  Sundays 

meet. 
Instalment. 


,» Ha  concluido  Vd.  el  libro  ? 

Si,  Senor. 

f  Poner  atencion. 

A  principios  de  la  semana  pr6xima, 

or  que  viene  or  entrante. 
A  principios  de  Abril. 
Encargado  de  negocios. 
Negocios. 
Asunto  or  materia. 
Le  pagara  a  Vd.   en  tres  plazos, 

tarde,  mal  y  nunca. 
Plazo. 


I 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 


277 


Have  you  gone  through  the  book?  I  have  (Si,  Setter), 
In  order  to  learn  we  must  pay  attention  (Para  aprender  es 
meneder  poner  atencion).  When  shall  I  have  the  pleasure 
to  see  you  again  ?  Early  next  week.  Has  the  Charge 
d' Affaires  arrived?  He  has  just  arrived  (Acaba  de  llegar). 
Have  you  business  with  him  ?  Yes,  on  (mbre)  an  important 
subject.  That  man  never  pays  his  debts  (Use  hombre  nunca 
paga  sus  deudas).  You  are  mistaken  (Vd.  se  equivoca).  He 
always  pays  his  debts  when  two  Sundays  meet.  It  is  a  good 
instalment. 


TWENTY-THIKD   CONVERSATION. 


With  open  arms. 
To-morrow   week,   or    eight 

from  to-morrow. 
It  is  no  such  thing. 
An  old  bachelor. 
An  old  maid. 
Widow,  widower. 
Do  you  wish  this  ? 
No. 

And  this  ? 
Neither  that. 
As  little,  so  little. 
So  well,  or  as  well. 
Also. 


Con  los  brazos  abiertos. 

De  manana  en  una  semana,  6  de 

mafiana  en  ocho  dias. 
No  hay  tal  cosa. 
Un  solteron. 
Una  solterona. 
Viuda,  viudo. 
I  Quiere  Vd.  esto  ? 
No. 

4 Y  esto? 
Tampoco. 
Tan  poco. 
Tan  bien. 
Tambien. 


When  will  your  brother  arrive  ?  To-morrow  week,  of 
eight  days  from  to-morrow.  I  will  receive  him  with  open 
arms.  Is  your  friend  a  bachelor?  No,  he  is  a  widower.  Is 
that  lady  a  widow?  (without  the  article.)  No,  she  is  an  old 
maid.  Excuse  me,  Sir,  you  are  mistaken,  it  is  no  such 
thing.  Do  you  wish  this  ?  No.  And  this  ?  Neither  that. 
How  much  do  you  ask  for  this  hat  ?  Three  dollars.  So 
little.  Who  writes  so  well  ?  It  is  my  brother,  but  I  can 
also  write  as  well.  Have  you  gone  through  all  the  book  ? 
Yes,  Sir.  Indeed!  and  have  you  paid  good  attention  (ha 
puedo  Vd.  mucha  atencion)  ?  Yes,  Sir,  a  great  deal  (muchi- 
sima).  That  is  right.  Where  does  the  poor  man  sleep? 
In  the  open  air  (al  raao).  I  am  sorry  to  trouble  you  for  a 
moment.    Not  at  all.    What  day  of  the  week  is  it '/    To-day 


278  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

is  Friday.  Who  is  there?  It  is  I  (yo  soy).  How  are  you 
(gcbmo  esta  Vd.)  ?  I  am  rather  indisposed.  I  am  very 
sorry.  "When  will  the  Charge  d' Affaires  arrive?  Early  next 
week,  or  perhaps  before.  I  shall  be  very  glad  to  see  him 
(Me  alegrare  mucho  de  verle).  Shall  you  go  to-morrow  ?  Yes, 
at  any  rate  (a  toda  costa).  And  you?  I  suppose  so,  of 
course,  by  all  means.  How  is  your  brother  ?  He  is  much 
f  better.  He  is  much  worse.  "What  time  is  it?  It  is  half- 
past  twelve.     And  are  you  not  ready  yet  ? 


TWENTY-FOUKTH  CONVERSATION. 


He  has  assisted  me  much. 

Look  here. 

On  the  other  hand. 

On  the  first  story. 

The  second  story. 

Is  the  opera  over  ? 

The  India  rubber. 

The  printing-office. 

The  printer. 

The  press. 

The  copy  (for  printing). 

The  proofs. 


Me  ha  ayudado  mucho. 

Mire  Vd. 

Por  otra  parte. 

En  el  primer  piso. 

El  segundo  piso. 

I  Se  ha  concluido  la  6pera  ? 

La  goma  elastica. 

La  imprenta. 

El  impresor. 

La  prensa. 

El  original. 

Las  pruebas 


This  man  has  much  assisted  him.  On  (en)  which  story 
is  your  room?  On  the  first  story.  On  the  second  story. 
Is  the  opera  over  ?  It  is  over.  Where  is  the  India  rubber  ? 
Where  is  the  printer?  In  the  printing-office.  Is  the  copy 
ready  for  the  printer  ?  Yes.  Are  the  proofs  corrected  ? 
They  are.  How  often  is  this  advertisement  published?  It 
is  published  every  other  Monday.  What  do  you  call  copy- 
book in  Spanish  ?  Allow  me  to  advise  you  in  this  matter. 
Certainly,  I  will  be  much  obliged  to  you.  We  have  before 
us  your  favor  of  the  2d  instant. 


TWENTY-FIFTH  CONVERSATION. 


Look-out ! 

The  matches. 

The  seal. 

The  pictorial  Bible. 


j  Cuidado ! 

Los  fosforos. 

El  sello. 

Biblia  con  laminas. 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES.  279 


The  -wafer.  La  oblea 


The  stair. 
The  lamp. 
The  gilding. 
The  steeple. 
The  scissors. 
The  slate. 


La  escalera. 
La  lampara. 
El  dorado. 
La  torre. 
Las  tijeras. 
La  pizarra. 


Have  you  seen  the  pictorial  Bible  ?  No.  They  say  it  is 
a  neat  work  (se  dice  que  en  una  obra  primorosa).  Where  is 
the  key  ?  It  is  in  the  door.  Be  good  enough  to  hand  me 
the  seal.  (Tenga  Vd.  la  bondad  de  pamrme  el  sello).  Have 
you  a  copy  of  the  key  to  (de)  the  Spanish  Grammar?  I 
have  one.  How  beautiful  is  the  gilding  of  that  work ! 
"Where  is  the  printer  ?  He  is  in  the  printing-office.  Have 
you  seen  the  scissors  ?  No,  but  I  have  seen  the  slate  and 
wafers.  I  present  to  you  my  best  respects,  Miss.  How  do 
you  do,  Sir  ?  Very  well,  I  thank  you.  You  are  quite  a 
stranger  (No  hay  quien  vea  a  Vd.,  or  more  familiar,  Dlchosos 
los  ojos  que  ven  a  Vd.,  which  literally  translated  is  :  happy 
are  the  eyes  which  see  you). 


TWENTY-SIXTH  CONVERSATION. 


Bookseller. 
Bookstore. 
An  engraver. 
The  washerwoman. 
N.  Nichols,  M.  D. 
The  seamstress. 
A  musician. 
The  milliner. 
The  chimney. 
A  minister. 


Librero. 

Libreria. 

Un  grabador. 

La  lavandera. 

N.  Nicholas,  Doctor  en  medicina. 

La  costurera. 

Ud  miisico. 

La  modista. 

La  chimenea. 

Un  cle'rigo. 


Where  is  the  bookseller  ?  He  is  in  his  bookstore.  Where 
is  the  engraver  ?  He  is  in  his  office.  Where  is  the  washer- 
woman ?  She  is  at  her  house.  Is  she  a  white  or  a  black 
woman  (Es  blanca  b  negra)  f  She  is  a  white  woman.  Is 
your  friend  an  M.  D.  (without  the  definite  article).  No 
Sir,  he  is  a  D.  D  (Doctor  en  Teolojia)  and  an  L.L.  D. 
{Doctor  en  Leyes).  Where  is  the  musician?  He  is  at  the 
concert.     Is  the  milliner  busy  ?     She  is  very  busy.     How 


280  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

many  seamstresses  has  she  ?  She  has  six  good  ones. 
Where  is  the  minister  ?  He  is  in  the  church.  Where  is 
my  book  ?  It  is  on  the  mantel-piece  (repim)  of  the  chimney. 
When  will  your  brother  arrive  ?  To-morrow  week,  or  eight 
days  from  to-morrow.  I  will  receive  him  with  open  arms. 
Do  you  pay  (Pone  Vd.)  attention  to  the  lesson?  I  pay 
(pongo)  much  attention.  That  is  right.  When  do  you  ex- 
pect (espera  Vd. )  your  father  ?  Early  next  month,  or  per- 
haps before.  What  excellent  matches !  What  good  scis- 
sors !  Have  the  goodness  to  hand  me  the  slate.  Do  you 
expect  that  this  man  will  pay  you  ?  Yes,  when  two  Sundays 
meet.     It  is  a  bad  affair.     So  it  is. 


TWENTY-SEVENTH  CONVERSATION. 


A  watch. 

A  clock. 

The  watchmaker. 

Your  watch  goes  too  fast. 

It  goes  too  slow. 

It  has  run  down. 

To  wind  up  a  watch  or  clock. 

Dry  goods  store. 

An  apothecary's  shop. 

Apothecary. 

Barber. 

A  barber's  shop. 


Un  reloj. 

El  reloj  ero. 

Su  reloj  de  Vd.  va  muy  adelantado. 

Va  muy  atrasado. 

f  No  tiene  cuerda. 

f  Dar  cuerda  a  un  reloj. 

f  Almacen  de  jeneros. 

Una  botica. 

Boticario. 

Barbero. 

Una  barberia. 


What  time  is  it  ?  I  do  not  know,  my  watch  goes  too 
slow.  It  goes  too  fast.  It  has  run  down.  It  must  be  (es 
preciso  darle)  wound  up.  How  many  watches  has  the  watch- 
maker ?  He  has  a  great  many.  How  many  clocks  has  he  ? 
He  has  not  many.  Where  is  the  barber?  He  is  in  the 
barber'3  shop.  Where  is  the  shopkeeper  (tendero)  f  Ho  is 
in  the  dry  good's  store.  Where  is  the  apothecary  ?  He  is 
in  the  apothecary's  shop.  Does  this  gentlemen  keep  (tiene) 
a  dry  good's  store  ?  No,  Sir,  he  keeps  an  apothecary's 
shop.  Is  your  brother  a  bookseller?  No,  Sir,  he  is  a 
musician.  Where  are  the  seamstresses  ?  They  are  at  the 
milliner's  store  (Almacen  de  modas).  Where  is  your  visiting 
card  ?  It  is  on  the  mantel-piece  of  the  chimney.  Has  the 
washerwoman  the  clothes  (la  ropa)  ?    She  has  not  yet  re* 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 


£81 


eeived  them.  When  does  your  class  begin  Q  cudndc  prin- 
cipia  su  clase  de  Vd.)  f  On  the  fifteenth  instant,  if  nothing 
happens  to  prevent  it  (si  nada  ocurre  que  lo  impida).  These 
scissors  are  very  good.  This  tower  is  very  high.  Do  you 
aee  the  pinnacle  (la  cuspide)  of  this  tower  ?  Where  is  the 
lamp  ?  What  a  pretty  slate  !  This  key  is  too  large.  Look 
out !  Is  your  friend  single  or  married  ?  He  is  a  widower. 
Is  your  cousin  a  widow  or  married  ?  She  is  a  widow.  It 
is  very  strange,-  she  is  very  young.  She  does  not  look  like 
(no  parece)  a  widow.  Look  here !  In  which  story  is  your 
friend's  room?  In  the  first  story.  In  the  second  story. 
In  the  third  story.  Is  the  concert  over  ?  It  is  over  long 
ago  (mucho  tiempo  ha).  Will  you  be  good  enough  to  hand 
me  the  blotting-paper  ?     With  much  pleasure. 


TWENTY-EIGHTH  CONVERSATION. 


I  cannot  wait  longer. 

My  patience  is  exhausted. 
He  exhausts  my  patience. 
To  be  penniless. 

To  make  a  great  show. 

In  earnest. 

Arm  in  arm. 

Much  noise  and  little  work. 

Never  be  weary  of  well  doing. 

Necessity  is  the  mother  of  invention. 

To  be  engaged  in  marriage. 


No  puedo    aguardar   (or  esperar) 

mas. 
f  He  perdido  la  paciencia. 
t  Me  hace  perder  la  paciencia. 
f  Estar  sin  un  cuarto  (or  sin  blanca, 

fern.) 
f  Hacer  gran  papel. 
f  De  ve'ras. 
f  De  brazo. 

f  Mas  es  el  ruido  que  las  nuezes. 
f  Haz  bien  y  no  mires  a  quien. 
La  necesidad  es  la  madre  de  la  in- 

vencion. 
Estar  comprometido. 


I  cannot  wait  longer.  My  patience  is  exhausted.  He  ex- 
hausts my  patience.  What  is  the  matter  with  that  man  ? 
He  is  penniless.  In  earnest.  Is  it  the  custom  in  this 
country  (Es  costumbre  en  este  pais)  for  the  gentleman  and 
lady  to  walk  (paseen)  arm  in  arm  ?  Not  unless  they  are 
(No,  a  menos  que  esten)  engaged.  It  seems  (parece)  that 
this  gentlemen  makes  a  great  show  in  this  country.  Is  he 
rich  (Es  rico)  ?  Can  you  not  assist  this  man  ?  Remember 
the  proverb  (Acuerdese  del  proverbio).  Never  be  weary  of 
well-doing.     Yes,  Sir,  I  remember  (me  acuerdo)  the  proverb, 


282  THE   SrANISH  TEACHER. 

but  you  ought  to  know  (debe  saber)  that  he  is  in  need,  and 
notwithstanding  (no  obstante)  has  no  mind  to  work.  Per- 
haps he  does  not  understand  (no  entiende)  that  necessity  is 
the  mother  of  invention.  Have  you  any  clock?  Yes,  I 
have  it.  Have  you  the  time  ( Tiene  Vd.  reloj)  f  I  have  not. 
Have  you  matches  ?  No,  but  I  have  some  fire.  Have  you 
a  slate?  No,  but  I  have  a  wafer.  Have  you  the  key  to  (de) 
the  exercises  ?  No,  but  I  have  the  key  of  the  room.  How 
beautiful  is  the  gilding  of  that  pictorial  Bible  !  Is  that  child 
fond  of  pies  ?  He  likes  them  very  much.  Have  you  a  wafer 
and  a  seal  ?    I  have  no  wafer,  but  I  have  a  seal. 


TWENTY-NINTH  CONVEBSATION. 


Something  is  better  than  nothing. 
Join  with  good  men  and  you  will 

be  one  of  them. 
Look  before  you  leap. 

He  that  has  a  trade  may  get  a  living 

anywhere. 
Put  it  down. 
I  understand  what  you  tell  me. 

In  the  least. 


f  Mas  vale  algo  que  nada. 

f  Allegate  a  los  buenos  y  seras  uno 

de  ellos. 
f  Antes  que  te  cases  mira  lo  que 

haces . 
f  Quien  tiene  arte    va  por  todaa 

partes. 
Pongalo  ahi. 
Quedo  enterado  or  entiendo  lo  que 

Vd.  me  dice, 
f  En  lo  mas  minimo 


That  (eso)  cannot  assist  me  in  the  least.  Something  is 
better  than  nothing.  Is  your  friend  going  to  be  married 
(g  Va  a  casarse  su  amigo  de  Vd.)  ?  Remind  him  (recuerdele 
Vd.)  of  the  proverb,  look  before  you  leap.  Never  mind  (no 
importa).  He  that  has  a  trade  may  get  a  living  anywhere. 
I  understand  what  you  say.  Here  is  something  for  you 
(He  aqui  algo  para  Vd.).  Put  it  down.  Who  sent  it  (Quien 
lo  envia)  ?  The  mistress  of  the  house  sent  it.  In  earnest. 
What  time  is  it  ?  I  do  not  know  ;  my  watch  goes  too  slow. 
It  goes  too  fast.  It  must  be  wound  up.  Where  is  the 
watchmaker  ?  He  is  in  his  room.  When  does  your  class 
begin  ?  On  the  10th  instant,  if  nothing  occurs  to  prevent 
it.  Where  are  the  seamstresses  ?  They  are  in  the  milliner's 
store.  Where  are  you  going  ?  I  am  going  to  the  barber's 
chop  to  see  the  barber.     Where  is  your  son?    He  is  in  his 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 


283 


room  in  the  third  story.  Where  is  the  musician  ?  He  is 
gone  to  church  {Ha  ido  a  la  iglesia).  Where  are  you 
going  ?  I  am  going  to  the  bookstore  to  see  the  bookseller. 
Where  are  the  scissors  ?  The  silversmith  has  them.  Where 
is  your  brother  ?  He  is  gone  with  his  friends.  Tell  him  to 
join  with  good  men  and  he  will  be  one  of  them  (Digale  Vd. 
±ue  se  allegue  a  los  buenos  y  sera  uno  de  ellos). 


THIRTIETH  CONVERSATION. 


It  is  better  to  avoid  the  evil  than 

afterwards  to  apply  the  remedy. 

Either. 

Give  it  to  me. 

Till  I  see  you  again. 

A/t  soon  as  possible. 

I  cnust  go. 

I  Dught  to  pay  the  postage  of  this 

letter. 
J  have  only  the  direction  to  write. 


Mas  vale  evitar  el  mal  que  despuoa 

poner  el  remedio. 
Uno  u  otro  or  cualquiera. 
Demelo. 

f  Hasta  otra  vista, 
t  Tan  pronto  como  sea  posible. 
f  Es  preciso  que  me  vaya. 
Debo  franquear  esta  carta. 

No  me  falta  mas  que  poner  el  sobre- 
scrito. 


You  ought  not  to  go  there.  Why?  {For  que?)  Because 
{Porque)  it  is  better  to  avoid  the  evil  than  afterwards  to 
apply  the  remedy.  Here  are  two  penknives,  which  will 
you  have  {quiere  Vd.)  ?  Either.  Give  it  to  me.  I  must 
go  as  soon  as  possible.  Good-bye,  till  I  see  you  again.  Is 
your  letter  ready  ?  It  is  almost  (estd  cast)  ready.  I  have 
only  the  direction  to  write.  I  cannot  wait  longer.  I  ought 
to  pay  the  postage  of  this  letter,  but  I  am  penniless.  Never 
mind,  if  you  are  penniless,  I  will  pay  the  postage  of  it 
( Yo  la  franqueare) .  On  no  account.  Don't  do  that  {No 
haga  Vd.  eso).  That  is  not  right.  That  is  wrong.  Is  this 
young  lady  engaged  ?  Yes,  Sir,  she  is  engaged  to  {con) 
my  cousin.  Why  don't  you  go  to  the  concert  ?  Because  I 
am  busy.  Can  you  not  go  to-morrow?  Neither  {tamjioco) 
to-morrow.  Shall  you  be  {estard  Vd.)  busy  the  day  after 
to-morrow  also  ?  Yes,  Sir,  the  day  after  to-morrow  I  shall 
be  {estare)  busy  also. 


284 


THE  SPANISH   TEACHER. 


THIRTY-FIRST  CONVERSATION. 


I  think  so,  I  believe  so. 

At  leisure. 

Pretty  well. 

You  are  very  kind. 

You  are  very  polite. 

You  are  very  amiable. 

Whose  contents,  or  the  contents  of 

which. 
In  the  twinkling  of  an  eye. 
Whereabouts. 
To  play  a  trick. 
I  know  him  like  a  book. 
To  pay  in  the  same  coin. 
At  his  ease. 


f  Creo  que  sf. 

f  Con  comodidad. 

f  Tal  cual. 

Vd.  es  muy  bondadoso. 

Vd.  es  muy  corte's. 

Vd.  es  muy  amable. 

Cuyo  contenido. 

En  un  abrir  y  cerrar  de  ojos 

f  Rum  bo. 

Jugar  una  treta. 

t  Le  conozco  como  a  mis  m    .0.1. 

Pagar  en  la  misma  moneda 

A  sus  anchuras. 


Does  your  brother  speak  Spanish?  I  think  so.  How 
does  he  speak  it?  Pretty  well.  Will  you  have  tb,  kind- 
ness to  copy  this  letter  for  me  at  your  leisure  ?  I  wiil  do  it 
in  the  twinkling  of  an  eye.  You  are  very  kind.  You  are 
very  polite.  You  are  very  amiable.  I  have  received  a  let- 
ter, the  contents  of  which  are  very  pleasing  (grato).  Do 
you  know  the  whereabouts  of  your  cousin  ?  I  do  not  know. 
Do  you  know  that  man  ?  I  know  him  like  a  book.  This 
man  has  played  me  a  trick,  but  I  will  pay  him  in  his  own 
coin.  Is  the  concert  over  ?  It  is  over  long  ago.  Will  you 
be  kind  enough  to  wind  up  my  watch  ?  It  has  run  down. 
I  must  go.     Good-bye,  till  I  see  you  again. 


THIRTY-SECOND  CONVERSATION. 


Last  night. 

The  night  before  last. 

Yesterday  afternoon. 

Yesterday  morning, 

The  day  before  yesterday. 

To-morrow  morning. 

A  kiss. 

My  darling. 

My  beloved. 
My  angel. 
My  dearest. 
Sweetheart. 


Anoche. 

Antenoche. 

Ayer  tarde  or  por  la  tarde. 

Ayer  maiiana  or  por  la  maiiana. 

Anteayer. 

f  Maiiana  por  la  mafiana. 

Un  beso. 

f  Tierno  bien  mio   (for  both  gets* 

ders). 
Mi  amado— a. 

Anjel  mio  (for  both  genders). 
Mi  queridito  or  queridisimo. 
f  Euamorado— a. 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 


285 


To  make  love. 
To  fall  in  love. 
Little  rogue. 
What  beautiful  eyes  ! 
What  pretty  feet ! 
What  pretty  hands ! 


f  Enamorar. 

f  Enamorarse. 

Picarillo. 

;  Qud  hermosos  ojos  ! 

;  Que"  bonitos  pies  ! 

;  Que  bonitas  manos  ! 


Where  were  you  Q En  dbnde  estuvo  Vd.)  last  night?  I 
Was  (estuve)  at  the  concert.  Where  were  you  the  night 
before  last?  At  a  party  (en  el  sarao).  Where  were  you 
the  day  before  yesterday  ?  I  was  at  the  theatre.  Where 
were  you  yesterday  afternoon  ?  I  was  at  home.  Where 
were  you  yesterday  morning  ?  In  the  garden.  Where  will 
you  be  to-morrow  morning?  At  church.  My  dear  son 
(querido  hijo  mid),  give  me  a  kiss  (wie  das  un  beso)  ?  Yes, 
my  dear  father  (Si,  querido  padre  mio).  My  angel.  My 
beloved.  My  dearest.  Where  is  your  little  friend  (fern.)  ? 
Will  you  fall  in  love  with  her  (de  ella)  ?  I  do  not  know 
how  to  make  love,  dear  father.  You  are  (Tu  eres)  a  little 
rogue.  What  beautiful  eyes  she  has  !  What  pretty  feet ! 
What  pretty  hands!  Where  is  she?  She  is  at  home. 
When  do  you  go  to  see  her?  When  you  will  let  me  go 
(cuando  Vd.  me  deje  ir).  You  ought  to  go  there.  Why  ? 
Because  it  is  better  to  go  there  to  see  her  than  to  go  to 
catch  butterflies  (cojer  mariposas).  You  are  very  amiable, 
dear  papa  (papa). 


THIRTY-THIRD  CONVERSATION. 


To  take  one  unawares. 

To  miss. 

To  be  mislaid. 

There  is  no  doubt  about  it. 

To  pass  along. 

To  have  remorse. 

With  the  utmost  pleasure. 

To  defend  with  all  one's  might. 

What  is  said  is  said. 

To  pass  the  night  without  sleep. 

To  take  one  at  his  word. 

I  take  you  at  your  word, 

To  cut  the  coat  according  to  the 
cloth. 

Too  much  familiarity  breeds  con- 
tempt. 

To  reckon  without  the  host. 


Cojer  a  uno  desprevenido. 

Echar  de  mdnos. 

Estar  traspapelado. 

No  hay  que  dudarlo. 

Pasar  de  largo. 

Acusar  la  conciencia  a  uno. 

Con  mil  am  ores  (familial). 

Defender  a  capa  y  espada, 

Lo  dicho  dicho. 

Pasar  la  noche  en  claro. 

Tomar  a  uno  la  palabra. 

Tomo  a  Vd.  la  palabra. 

Consultar  con  el  bolsillo. 

La  mucha  confianza  es  causa  de 

menosprecio. 
Hacer  la  cuenta  sin  la  hue*speda 


286  THE  SPANISH  TEACHEK. 

How  did  that  mean  play  you  that  trick  ?  He  took  me  (me 
cojio)  unawares.  He  will  have  remorse  for  it.  Where  is 
your  friend  ?  In  Havana.  We  have  missed  him  very 
much.  There  is  no  doubt  about  it.  Has  your  friend  been 
here  ?  No,  he  has  just  passed  along.  He  is  a  very  good 
friend  ;  he  is  always  ready  to  defend  his  friends  with  all 
his  might.  Will  you  go  with  us  to  the  concert  ?  I  will  go 
(Tre).  I  take  you  at  your  word.  What  is  said  is  said. 
How  are  you  to-day  ?  I  am  rather  indisposed  ;  I  have 
passed  the  night  without  sleep.  It  seems  that  that  gentle- 
man makes  a  great  show.  Much  noise  and  little  work 
( Mas  es  el  ruido  que  las  nuezes).  Many  forget  (oluidan)  to 
cut  the  coat  according  to  the  cloth.  You  are  right,  many 
reckon  without  the  host.  This  man  takes  too  many  liber- 
ties {Esle  hombre  se  toma  mucha  confianza).  Give  him  an 
inch  and  he  will  take  an  ell  (Al  villano  dale  el  pie,  y  tomard 
la  mano).     Too  much  familiarity  breeds  contempt. 


THIKTY-FOUKTH  CONVEKSATTON. 


Well  brought  up,  well  bred. 

Alter  all,  yet. 

All  the  time,  always. 

Every  thing,  all. 

The  bearer. 

The  watchman. 

Poor  little  thing  ! 

Do  you  wish  me  to  come  ? 

Mischief. 

Some  of  his  tricks. 


Bien  educado,  bien  criado 

Sin  embargo. 

Siempre. 

Todo. 

El  portador. 

El  sereno. 

j  Pobrecito ! 

I  Quiere  Vd.  que  venga  ? 

Travesura. 

Alguna  de  las  suyas. 


That  gentleman  is  well  brought  up,  and  yet  he  makes 
much  mischief.  What  has  he  done  ?  He  has  played  (hecho) 
some  of  his  tricks.  John,  I  wish  you  to  give  to  the  bearer 
my  cloak,  and  India  rubber  shoes,  because  it  is  very  damp 
(hay  mucha  humedad)  and  I  fear  that  I  may  take  a  cold 
(temo  cojer  un  resfriado).  What  a  pity !  Poor  little  thing  1 
I  went  (estuve)  to  my  counting-house  last  night.  What  did 
you  see  (vib)  there?  I  saw  (vi)  a  watchman  by  the  door. 
What  did  he  say  (dijo)  ?  Nothing  particular.  Do  you  wish 
me  to  come  in  (entrd)?    Yes,  Sir,  walk  in,  if  you  please. 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES.  287 

My  dear  daughter,  why  are  your  hands  so  cold?  I  ha\e 
been  in  the  school,  and  have  lost  my  gloves  in  the  street. 
Come,  warm  your  hands.  Did  you  see  any  (algano)  of  your 
friends  in  the  theatre  last  night?  I  was  not  in  the  theatre 
last  night,  but  the  night  before  last.  Have  you  seen  your 
little  friend  {female)  ?  Yes,  Sir,  I  saw  her  yesterday  morn- 
ing, and  I  hope  to  see  her  again  this  evening  or  to-morrow 
morning.  What  beautiful  eyes  she  has!  Has  she  not  {no 
es  verdad)  ? 


THIRTY-FIFTH  CONVERSATION. 


Unless. 

Provided. 

To  spoil. 

It  seems,  or  looks. 

To  miss. 

To  conelude  a  treaty. 

The  bride. 

The  bridegroom. 

The  wedding. 

The  honey-moon. 


A  menos  que. 

Con  tal  que. 

Echar  a  perder. 

Parece. 

Echar  de  mdnos. 

Ajustar  un  tratado. 

La  no  via. 

El  novio. 

La  boda. 

La  luna  de  miel. 


I  shall  go  to  the  city  of  Washington  to-morrow,  unless 
the  treaty  is  concluded,  and  provided  that  you  will  go  {vaya) 
with  me.  Boy,  I  wish  you  not  to  spoil  my  books.  My  son, 
when  you  have  time  {teagas  tiempo),  come  here.  I  wish  you 
to  look  for  one  of  my  books  that  I  miss  from  my  library. 
Do  you  see  that  lady  ?  Yes,  Sir  ;  how  beautiful  she  looks ! 
She  is  a  bride,  and  the  gentleman  who  is  walking  arm  in 
arm  with  her  is  her  bridegroom.  The  wedding  took  place 
this  morning  at  St.  Peter's  Church  ;  and  they  are  going  to 
pass  the  honey-moon  in  the  country.  It  seems  that  they  in- 
tend to  remain  there  a  long  time,  as  (pues)  they  carry  with 
them  {consigo)  a  great  many  musicians,  seamstresses,  and 
milliners.  I  congratulate  them.  When  will  you  be  {extara 
Vd.)  ready  to  accompany  me  to  the  country?  I  shall  not 
be  {No  estare)  ready  before  (hasta)  Wednesday  or  Thursday. 
Very  well ;  in  the  mean  time  {entretanlo)  I  will  read  {leerc) 
the  book  that  you  were  so  good  as  to  present  me  {t)ivo  la 
bondad  de  regalarme)  yesterday.   Why  do  you  wish  me  to  go 


288  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

with  you  ?  Because  I  would  not '  like  to  go  alone  ;  and  I 
shall  be  much  obliged  to  you  if  you  will  come.  Of  course  I 
will  with  pleasure. 


THIRTY-SIXTH  CONVERSATION 

Atade  to  order. 


Whenever. 
It  is  worth  while. 
What  detained  you  ? 
Short  of  money. 
To  take  a  glance. 

It  is  bad  walking.  ■] 

To  play  at  chess. 


fMandado  a  hacer,  hecho  de  en- 
cargo, 
f  Siempre  que. 
f  Vale  la  pena. 
tiQudledetuvoa  Vd.? 
t  Escaso  de  diuero. 
f  Echar  una  ojeada. 
f  El  piso  est  a  malo. 
f  Las  calles  estan  malas. 
f  Jugar  al  ajedrez. 


Where  did  you  buy  your  coat  ?  I  had  it  made  to  order. 
Whenever  I  want  a  coat  I  have  it  made  to  or  ler.  Have 
you  had  it  made  for  your  wedding  ?  No  ;  but  I  shall  put 
it  on  next  Sunday.  Is  it  worth  while  to  go  out  to-day  ? 
No  ;  but  it  is  worth  while  to  go  to  the  opera  to-night,  for 
(pues)  it  is  said  there  will  be  good  singing  (canto)  there.  I 
shall  go  if  you  will  accompany  me.  I  will  do  so  with  plea- 
sure. What  detained  you  ?  The  performance  will  be  over 
before  we  get  there  (la  representation  se  habrd  concluido  antes 
que  Ueguemos).  I  stopped  to  take  a  glance  at  the  new  store 
that  has  just  been  opened  (acaba  de  abrirse)  in  Broadway. 
Have  you  any  money?  No;  I  am  short  of  money.  Then 
(entbnces)  we  cannot  go  in  a  coach,  and  as  the  walking  is 
very  bad  we  stay  (nos  quedaremos)  at  home  and  play  at  chess. 
What  do  you  miss?  I  miss  the  chess-board  (tablero).  Will 
you  come  to  my  house  this  evening?  I  will  come  provided 
that  you  will  play  on  the  piano.  Certainly,  I  will  with 
pleasure.  What  is  the  matter  with  your  carpet  ?  The 
children  have  spoilt  it.  What  is  the  news  with  you  ?  They 
say  that  the  government  have  concluded  a  treaty  with  Mex- 
ico, and  we  shall  have  a  peace  at  last.  Where  are  all  these 
ladies  and  gentlemen  going  to  ?  They  are  going  to  a  wed- 
ding that  will  take  place  at  twelve  o'clock,  in  Saint  Mary's 
church.     Who  is  the  bride  ?     The  bride  is  a  very  handsome 


CONVERSATIONAL    EXERCISES. 


28(.) 


young  lady,  but  I  do  not  know  what  her  name  is.  Do  yon 
knew  the  name  of  the  bridegroom  ?  They  say  it  is  Mr.  N. 
but  it  is  more  likely  to  be  {probable  que  sea)  Mr.  B.,  who  has 
just  arrived  from  England. 


THIRTY-SEVENTH  CONVERSATION. 


Ever  since. 

For  sale  (to  be  had  or  sold). 

All  right. 

It  brings  the  dead  to  life. 

At  hrst  sight. 

At  the  first  glance. 

At  least  one. 

Not  even  one. 

On  aur  average. 

Come  and  see  roe. 


f  Desde  entonces.     Desde  que . . . 
}  Do  venta  (se  halla  de  venta  or 

vende). 
f  Esta  bien.     Corriente. 
t  Hace  resucitar  a  los  muertos. 
f  A  primera  vista, 
f  A  la  primera  ojeada. 
f  Siquiera  (or  a  lo  mdnos)  uno. 
f  Ni  siquiera  uno. 
f  Por  te'rmino  medio, 
f  Venga  Vd.  a  verme. 


When  did  you  see  my  brother  ?  I  saw  him  last  month, 
and  have  not  seen  him  again  ever  since.  For  sale  :  a  four 
story  house,  with  twelve  rooms.  How  much  do  you  ask 
(pide  Vd.)  for  it?  I  ask  ten  thousand  dollars  for  it.  Are 
the  titles  (Ulutos)  good  ?  They  are  good.  The  aroma  (el 
aroma)  of  this  flower  (edafior)  brings  the  dead  to  life.  How 
do  you  do  ?  Oh !  excuse  me,  Sir,  I  have  been  mistaken  (me 
he  equivocado).  At  first  sight,  I  thought  that  you  were  a 
friend  of  mine  whom  I  am  looking  for,  ever  since  I  am  in 
this  city.  Is  your  book  for  sale  at  all  the  principal  book- 
stores in  (librerias  de)  the  city?  No,  Sir,  all  the  edition  has 
been  sold,  and  not  a  single  copy  is  to  be  found  any  where 
(se  ha  vendido  or  agotado,  y  no  paede  hallarse  ni  un  solo  exem- 
plar enninguna  parte).  Not  even  a  cojry?  Can  you  not 
get  for  me  (conseguirme)  at  least  one  ?  You  can  do  it,  can't 
you  (710  es  verdad)  ?  I  will  try  (tratare  de)  to  get  a  copy  for 
you.  I  shall  be  much  obliged  to  you.  My  book  was  sold 
(se  vendib)  on  an  average  of  fifty  copies  per  day.  Indeed ! 
Where  did  you  get  that  hat  ?  I  got  it  at  the  store  of  Messrs. 
N.  It  was  made  to  order.  Whenever  I  want  a  hat  I  have 
it  made  to  order.  Do  you  think  it  worth  while  to  take  so 
much  trouble  ?    Yes,  I  always  do  it,  except  when  I  am  short 


290  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

of  money.  "What  detained  you  so  long  this  morning  ?  A 
gentleman  came  to  see  me  on  business,  and  I  was  not  able 
to  come  before.  Do  you  like  to  play  a  game  at  cards  (hacer 
una  partida  a  los  naipes)  ?  I  do  not  play  cards  ;  I  play  at 
nothing  but  chess.  Will  you  come  with  me  to  take  a  glance 
at  the  ladies  in  Broadway  ?  Certainly,  with  pleasure  (con 
mucho  gusto).  But,  my  dear  Sir,  (amigo  mio),  it  is  very  bad 
walking.  It  is  only  at  the  crossings  (lospasos).  Let  us  go, 
then  (Vdmos,  pues). 


THIRTY-EIGHTH  CONVERSATION. 


Come  here. 
Go  there. 
I  am  coming. 
Make  haste. 
Go  quickly. 

To  gratify  you. 
I  will  endeavor  to. 
To  congratulate. 
Now  and  then. 
Occasionally. 

Seldom. 


Venga  Vd.  aca.     Ven  aca. 

Vaya  Vd.  alia.     Ve  alia. 

f  Voy.     Voy  alia. 

f  De'se  Vd.  priesa.     Date  priesa. 

Ande  Vd.  lijero  or  pronto.     Anda 

lijero. 
f  Para  complacer  a  Vd. 
f  Me  esforzare  en. 
f  Felicitar. 
f  Una  que  otra  vez. 
f  De    cuando    en    cuando,   or    de 

tiempo  en  tiempo. 
f  Kara  vez. 


My  dear  child,  come  and  see  me  occasionally,  and  I  will 
endeavor  to  gratify  you.  Thank  you,  Madam.  John,  go 
home  quickly  to  congratulate  your  sister  before  she  goes 
out  (antes  que  saiga).  I  am  going  ( Voy)  now.  Come  here, 
my  son.  Make  haste,  I  wish  to  speak  to  you.  I  am  com- 
ing, father.  Have  you  been  to  your  cousin's  this  week? 
Not  yet  ;  I  seldom  go  there.  You  must  go  there  now  and 
then  ;  your  cousin  is  an  honest  man,  and  very  well  brought 
up.  You  ought  always  remember  the  proverb  :  "  Join  with 
good  men  and  you  will  become  one  of  them."  Have  you 
written  the  letter  ?  Yes,  Sir,  it  is  ready  since  this  morning. 
Give  it  to  me.  I  ought  to  pay  the  postage  of  this  letter. 
I  must  go  to  the  Post  Office  as  soon  as  possible  (to  ma* 
pronto posible).  Who  is  there?  Who  is  it?  It  is  I.  Walk 
in.  I  am  glad  to  see  you.  How  are  you  ?  Very  well,  Sir, 
and  how  do  you  do  ?     Very  well,  I  thank  you.     I  am  much 


CONVEBSATIONAL  EXEltCISES. 


291 


obliged  to  you  for  your  kindness  the  other  day.  Not  at  all. 
I  am  sorry  to  have  to  (tener  que)  trouble  you  again.  By  no 
means  ;  I  am  always  at  your  service.  You  are  very  kind. 
What  is  your  wish  ( Qui  se  le  ofrece  a  Vd.)?  What  can  I 
do  for  you  (En  que  puedo  servir  a  Vd.)?  What  time  is  it? 
Is  it  late  ?  No,  Sir,  it  is  very  early.  Do  me  the  favor  to 
sit  down,  and  excuse  me  a  moment.  Certainly,  with  great 
pleasure  ((Jon  muchisimo  gusto).  What  is  the  best  news  with 
you  ?  It  is  said  that  the  steamer  B.  has  just  arrived.  What 
news  does  she  bring?  Some  people  say  (Algunos  dlcen) 
that  she  brings  good  news.  I  am  very  glad.  But  some 
others  (otrvs)  say  quite  the  contrary  (todo  lo  contrario),  that 
she  brings  very  bad  news.  I  am  very  sorry  if  it  is  the  case 
(si  es  asi). 


THIRTY-NINTH  CONVERSATION. 


All  at  once.     At  once. 

Once  begun.  . . 

As  usual. 

To  be  married  to.  . . 

Here  it  is. 
There  it  is. 

Suddenly. 

To  be  silent. 

To  hold  one's  peace. 

Be  silent. 

Hold  your  peace. 

I  have  heard. 

Since. 

Boys,  I  am  very  glad  to  see  that  you  learn  your  lesson 
all  at  once,  and  since  you  have  once  begun,  I  hope  that  you 
will  continue  to  do  so  every  time.  My  friend,  I  have  heard 
that  you  are  going  to  be  married  to  a  young  lady  of  New 
York  ;  as  usual,  you  are  always  with  the  ladies.  Who  has 
a  copy  of  "the  Spanish  Grammar  ?  I  have  one.  Where  is 
it  ?  Here  it  is.  And  where  is  the  Key  to  it  ?  I  havn't  it 
here  ;  it  is  at  home.  Can  you  send  for  it  ?  Yes,  Sir.  Can 
you  see  the  Spanish  ship  from  this  tower  ?    Yes,  there  it 


f  A  la  vez.    De  una  vez. 
f  Una  vez  empezado.  . . 
f  Conio  de  costunibre. 
j  Casarse  con.  . . 
f  He'lo  aqui.     Aquf  esta. 
t  Aqui  lo  tiene  Vd. 
f  Helo  alii.     Alii  esta. 
f  Alii  lo  tiene  Vd. 
f  Repentinamente. 
f  De  repente. 

f  Callarse.     Guardar  silencio. 

f  Callese  Vd.     Callate. 

f  He  sabido.     He  oido  decir. 
f  Ya  que.  . .     Una  vez  que. 


292  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

is.  Have  you  seen  the  book  that  was  on  the  table  ?  I 
have  seen  it ;  there  it  is.  How  is  your  father  to-day?  He 
is  a  little  indisposed.  In  earnest?  Then  we  must  be  silent. 
Do  you  wish  to  read  the  Pictorial  Bible  ?  Not  at  present. 
Perhaps  you  wish  to  read  the  book  that  I  have  published  ? 
Not  that  either.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  ?  It  is  the 
thirtieth.  What  day  of  the  week  is  it  ?  To-day  is  Tues- 
day. What  month  is  it?  The  month  of  January,  one 
thousand  eight  hundred  and  seventy-one.  Why  do  you 
carry  that  umbrella  in  such  fine  weather  ?  Because  rain 
(la  lluvia)  may  come  suddenly.  Is  your  grandfather  dead  ? 
Yes,  Sir  ;  he  died  a  sudden  death  (rnurio  de  repente).  And 
since  that  time  (Desde  entonces)  you  think  that  every  thing 
may  happen  (suceder)  suddenly,  do  you  not  (no  es  verdad)  ? 
Certainly.  Come  hither  and  tell  me  where  you  have  been. 
I  am  coming.  Make  haste.  I  will  endeavor  to  go  as  soon 
as  possible.  Is  it  true  (Es  verdad  or  cierto)  that  you  have 
got  married?  It  is  true.  Then,  Sir,  I  congratulate  you 
with  all  my  heart  (de  todo  corazon).  Do  you  go  to  the 
Opera  often  ?  I  go  very  seldom  ;  my  brother  goes  now 
and  then,  but  my  sister  goes  twice  every  week.  Does  your 
wife  go  with  you  ?  She  goes  occasionally  ;  she  doesn't  like 
to  go  too  often,  for  her  health  is  very  delicate,  and  she  can- 
not go  out  at  night  without  catching  a  cold  (cojer  un  resfri- 
ado). 


FORTIETH  CONVERSATION. 


It  is  customary. 

All  things  being  equal. 

At  the  middle  of  next  month. 

That  is  not  my  business. 

That  is  not  your  business. 

That  is  his  business. 

To  attract,  to  call,  to  invite  the  at 

tention. 
It  looks  like  (resembles). 
Altogether. 


t  Se  acostumbra.  Es  costumbre. 
{  En  igualdad  de  circunstancias. 
{  A  mediados  del  mes  proximo,  que 

eutra  or  que  viene. 
Esa  no  es  cuenta  mia  or  asunto  mio. 
Esa  no  es  a  cuenta  de  Vd. 
Esa  es  cuenta  suya  (de  el). 
Llamar  la  atencion. 


f  Se  parece. 

Enteramente.      Del    todo.    Todo. 
Todo  junto. 

Are  you  ready  ?     Not  yet.     When  will  you  be  ready  to 
go  to  Spain  ?     I  shall  be  ready  about  the  middle  of  next 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 


293 


month.  I  have  heard  that  it  is  customary  in  this  country 
to  eat  in  a  hurry.  It  is  not  altogether  true  (verdad  or  cierto), 
for,  all  things  being  equal,  the  people  of  this  country  eat  as 
slowly  (deqjacio)  as  those  of  other  countries.  Why  do  some 
foreigners  (algunos  estranjeroo)  play  at  chess,  cards,  and 
every  kind  of  game  (todo  clone  dejuego)  on  Sunday?  Be- 
cause it  is  customary  among  themselves  (entre  ellos)  ;  but 
it  is  not  your  business,  nor  mine  either,  but  their  own  busi- 
ness. Certainly.  That  young  lady  puts  on  a  great  many 
jewels,  in  order  to  attract  the  attention  of  people.  She 
puts  them  on  in  order  to  gratify  her  father,  who  (quien) 
wishes  to  see  her  richly  attired.  She  looks  very  fine.  She 
resembles  her  mother  very  much. 


A   MAGNANIMOUS   ANSWER. 

A  lady  made  a  complaint  (presenlo  una  queja)  to  Frede- 
rick the  Great,  King  of  Prussia. 

"  Sire,''  said  she.  "  my  husband  treats  me  (me  trata)  very 
ill." 

"  That  is  not  my  business,"  replied  the  monarch. 

"  But  he  speaks  of  Your  Majesty  ( Vuestra  Majestad)  in  the 
most  injurious  terms  (en  los  terminos  mas  ofensivos)." 

"  That  is  not  your  business.'' 


FORTY-FIRST  CONVERSATION. 


To  meet  with  his  match. 

Come  what  may  (or  will.) 

According  to.     After  . . . 

He  ran  alter  him. 

To  long  for. 

To  sigh  for  his  liberty. 

To  apply  for  an  office. 

He  served  under  the  command  of 

General  T  .... 
To  have  good  times  (to  amuse  one's- 

self). 


f  Encontrarse  con  la  horma  de  su 

zapato. 
t  Venga  lo  que  viniere. 
f  Segun.     Conforme  a  . . . . 
j-  Corrio  tras  el. 
f  Apetecer.     Desear. 
f  Suspirar  por  su  libertad. 
f  Solicitar  un  empleo. 
f  Sirvio  a  las  6rdenes  del  jeneral 

T.... 
Tener  buenos  ratos,  divertirse. 


I  am  going  to  the  ball  to-night,  as  I  expect  ( pues  espero) 
to  have  a  good  time  there.     It  is  likely  that  I  will  go  also 


294 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHEE. 


This  word  is  correct  according  to  Webster's  Dictionary, 
The  child  has  just  passed,  and  the  nurse  runs  after  him. 
Are  you  in  a  hurry  ?  I  am  in  a  hurry  at  present,  but  I  shall 
have  the  pleasure  to  be  at  your  disposal  in  a  moment.  My 
friend  is  in  prison,  and  he  sighs  for  his  liberty.  What  does 
that  man  wish  ?  He  applies  for  an  office  ;  he  served  under 
the  command  of  General  T . . . .  What  are  you  in  want  of  ? 
I  am  not  in  want  of  any  thing  ;  I  have  all  that  I  can  wish 
for.  Has  the  mail  arrived  ?  It  has  just  arrived.  It  has 
not  yet  arrived.  Will  you  go  to  the  concert  with  me  ?  I 
will  (go)  with  pleasure.  What  are  the  best  news  ?  Nothing 
particular.  How  is  your  brother  ?  Very  well,  I  thank  you. 
Remember  me  to  him.  I  will  do  so  with  pleasure.  When 
do  you  set  out  ?  I  intend  to  set  out  in  the  middle  of  next 
month.  Why  does  that  man  ride  in  a  carriage  with  four 
horses  ?  Perhaps  he  does  it  in  order  to  attract  the  atten- 
tion of  the  people  ;  but  is  not  that  his  own  business  ?  Is  it 
customary  in  this  city  for  ladies  to  walk  in  the  streets  with- 
out gentlemen  ?  Certainly  it  is,  in  this  and  all  other  cities 
in  the  United  States. 


FORTY-SECOND  CONVERSATION. 


On  horseback. 

On  foot. 

In  the  meantime.     (Meanwhile.) 

I  beg  your  pardon. 

I  cannot  help  it. 

I  cannot  but. . ., 

To  call  on  me  (on  business). 

Call  and  see  me. 

Come  to  see  me. 

Sit  by  her  or  him. 

Ring. 

The  title-page  of  a  book. 


f  A  caballo. 

f  A  pie'. 

f  Entretanto,  mie'ntras  tanto. 

f  Perdone  Vd. 

f  No  puedo  evitarlo. 

f  No  puedo  mdnos  sino  or  de 

f  Acercarse  a  mi  casa. 

f  VengaVd.  a  verme  or  visitarme. 

f  Sientese  Vd.  a  su  lado. 

A.nillo,  sortija. 

La  portada  de  un  libro. 


Did  he  come  on  horseback  or  on  foot  ?  He  came  on  foot. 
He  does  not  look  as  well  as  usual.  He  has  been  somewhat 
indisposed,  but  he  is  better  now.  This  is  my  book.  I  beg 
your  pardon,  Sir,  it  is  mine.  I  cannot  but  believe  that  I 
was  mistaken.  Here  is  my  mother,  come  and  sit  by  her  ; 
in  the  meantime  I  wish  to  read  a  book.     Can  you  pay  me 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES.  295 

to-day  ?     I  cannot  ;  but  if  you  call  on  me  to-morrow  I  will 
pay  you.     I  must  go.     Why  do  you  go  so  early  ?     I  cannot 
help  it,  for  I  have  promised  to  be  at  home  at  four  o'clock. 
Good-bye,  until  to-morrow.     Good-bye  (Pdselo   Vd.   bien), 
come  and  see  me  as  often  as  possible.     I  will  do  so  with 
pleasure.     What   is   that?     It  is  a  ring.     Give  it  to   me. 
Take  it.     I  thank  you.     Have  you  seen  the  title-page  of 
that  book  ?     The  title-page  is  the  thing  least  important  in 
a   book.     Are  you  going    away  to-morrow?     Come   what 
will,  I  shall  go,  according  to  my  promise.     Where  is  your 
tailor?     He  has  just  gone  out,  but  my  boy  will  run  after 
him  and  conduct  him  to  your  house.     What  is  there  new  in 
Washington  ?     Nothing  particular,  except  that  two  or  three 
hundred  men  are  there  to  apply  for  offices.     Who  is  that 
soldier  who  has  but  one  arm  ?      He  is  one   who   served 
under  the  command  of  General  T . . . .  in  the  Mexican  war 
(guerra).     And  that  one  who  has  but  one  leg  ?     It  is  his 
brother,  who  served  under  the  command  of  General  S. . . ., 
in  the  same  war.     They  return  now  to  their  homes,  from 
which  they  have  been  absent  more  than  three  years.     Have 
you  finished  your  exercise  ?     Yes  Sir  ;  once  begun,  it  was 
necessary  to  finish  it.     Have  you  done  it  as  usual  ?     Not  so 
well  as  usual,  because  I  wrote  it  in  haste  (de  priesa).    Have 
you  finished  the  book?     Not  quite  (altogether),  but  I  hope 
to  finish  it  next  week.     Do  you  think  that  your  school-mate 
(co?idi$cipulo)  will  also  finish  his  by  that  time  ?     I  believe 
not.     Why  not  ?     It  will  be  very  strange,  since  you  both 
began  at  once.     It  seems  that  he  is  not  very  fond  of  study. 
It  seems  not.     Strange !     Please  advise  him  to  study,  or 
else  sooner  or  later  he  will  repent  it ;  for  neither  the  in- 
equality of  fortune,  nor  that  of  power  or  strength,  is  so 
great  as  that  of  knowledge  (pues  ni  la  desigualdad  de  la  for- 
tuna,  ni  la  del  poder  6  la  fuerza,  es  tan  grande  como  la  de  cono- 
cimientos). 


FORTY-THIRD  CONVERSATION. 

At  the  first  glance.  j  f  A  tiro  de  ballesta  (sarcastic) . 

To  bring  some  one  to  duty.  1  f  Ponerle   a  alguno    las    peras 

cuarto. 


296 


THE   SPANISH   TEACHER. 


Come  and  drink  a  cup  of  coffee 

and  milk. 
By  and  by. 

It  is  all  the  same  to  me. 
It  matters  little. 
It  all  comes  to  the  same  thing. 
The  clock  strikes  twelve. 
To  strike  oat,  or  to  erase.  ( 

To  blot.  J 

To  wash  out  a  slain. 


Venga  Vd.  (Ven)  d  tomar  una  taza 

de  cafe'  con  leche. 
f  Presto,  luego. 
t  Me  es  igual. 
t  Poco  importa. 
f  Todo  viene  a  ser  lo  mismo. 
f  El  reloj  da  las  doce. 

Borrar. 

t  Quitar  (or  lavar)  una  mancha. 


Will  you  do  me  the  favor  to  come  and  take  a  glass  of 
cool  water  with  me  ?  I  am  very  much  obliged  to  you,  Sir  ; 
I  had  rather  take  a  cup  of  coffee  and  milk.  What  is  the 
hour?  It  is  nearly  nine  o'clock.  It  is  too  late  to  go  to  the 
opera.  It  will  be  almost  over  when  I  shall  arrive  there. 
It  matters  little,  for  I  have  seen  the  same  piece  several 
times.  Where  is  your  visiting-card  ?  Here  it  is.  Shall  I 
give  it  to  my  father  or  my  mother  ?  Give  it  to  either  one  ; 
it  is  all  the  same.  Have  you  a  watch  ?  Yes,  but  it  has  run 
down  ;  I  must  wind  it  up.  It  goes  too  fast.  It  goes  too 
slow.  I  must  send  it  to  the  watchmaker.  How  often  does 
your  brother  go  to  the  ball  ?  He  goes  now  and  then  ;  bat 
he  goes  to  the  opera  almost  every  night.  Do  you  go  there 
often  ?  I  go  sometimes.  Does  your  sister  go  oftener  than 
you  ?  She  does  not ;  she  goes  very  seldom  ;  but  my  mother 
goes  occasionally  ever  since  we  have  had  the  opera.  Does 
she  like  it  ?  She  is  very  fond  of  it.  Is  it  bad  walking  ?  It 
is  not  very  bad,  except  at  the  crossings  of  the  streets. 
Boy,  why  do  you  spoil  those  books  ?  Why  are  you  so 
mischievous  (travieso)  ?  Take  care !  or  else  your  father 
will  punish  you.  The  clock  strikes  nine,  and  you  have  not 
yet  studied  your  lesson.  What  will  become  of  you,  if  you 
will  not  study  !  If  you  will  continue  so,  it  will  be  neces- 
sary to  strike  out  your  name  from  the  list  of  scholars.  Do 
you  not  yet  know  the  fate  (suerteordedino)  that  always  awaits 
(espera)  the  lazy  man  ?  Misery  without  end  (Miserias  sin 
Jin).  There  is  nothing  more  easily  known  (que  pueda  cono- 
cerse  mas  facihnente)  than  a  man  badly  brought  up.  He  is 
known  at  first  sight.  Do  you  think  this  is  a  translation 
(traduction)  ?  It  is  known  at  the  first  glance.  What  is 
that?     It  is  a  stain  that  cannot  be  washed   out.     It  re- 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES.  297 

sembles  those  that  fall  upon  the  reputation  of  some  men, 
which,  according  to  the  expressive  phrase  of  Cicero,  can 
neither  be  cleansed  by  the  lapse  of  time,  nor  washed  out  by 
the  waters  of  all  the  rivers.  Will  you  strike  out  that  word  ? 
I  will,  with  pleasure,  if  you  will  give  me  another  in  its 
place. 


FORTY-FOURTH  CONVERSATION. 


Make  up  your  mind. 

By  the  way.     By  the  by. 
He  is  doing  well  or  better. 
To  keep  a  holy-day. 

To  live  high. 

To  run  in  debt. 

To  put  in  mind.     To  remind. 

I  have  changed  my  mind. 


f  Determinese  Vd.  Resuelvase.  Re- 

signese. 
t  De  paso .    A  todo  esto. 
f  Va  bien  or  mejor. 
t  Santificar,  guardar  or  observar ua 

dia  de  fiesta, 
f  Vivir  suntuosamente. 
t  Contraer  deudas.     Adeudarso. 
f  Hacer  recordar,  pensar. 
t  He  mudado  de  parecer,  de  idea. 


How  is  the  weather  ?  It  is  very  pleasant  (Eda  muy  a  gra- 
dable).  Is  it  warm  or  cold?  It  is  neither  warm  nor  cold. 
It  is  a  very  fine  day  (Hace  un  dia,  or  el  dia  estd,  muy  hermoso). 
Is  it  very  windy?  It  is  not.  How  long  is  it  since  you  left 
(dejb)  Madrid?  It  is  nearly  two  years  since.  How  much 
does  that  bottle  hold  ?  It  holds  nearly  three  pints.  What 
is  it  that  renders  man  happy  ?  Virtue,  which  also  inspires 
all  the  good  qualities  that  render  man  respectable.  Will 
you  have  our  rooms  swept?  I  will  have  them  swept.  Will 
you  cause  the  boy  to  be  punished  if  he  will  not  sweep  them  ? 
Certainly  I  will  (Seg uramente  que  si).  Do  you  think  that 
both  the  actresses  play  well  their  parts  ?  I  think  this  one 
does  not  play  very  well ;  but  the  other  one  does  {pero  la 
otra  si).  I  think  that  one  plays  very  well,  but  this  one  does 
not  (pero  la  otra  no).  It  seems  that  Mr.  N.  makes  a  great 
show  (or  figure)  in  this  country.  So  it  appears  (Asi  parece). 
He  acts  as  Consul-General.  Formerly  nobody  minded  him. 
What  does  that  man  do  there  ?  He  is  performing  a  good 
action  (deed).  He  gives  alms  (Hace,  or  da,  una  limosna)  to 
a  pauper.  Does  the  steamer  stop?  She  stops  to  take  in 
water.  Does  the  vessel  leak?  She  does  (Si,  Seftor).  Can 
(Sabe)  you  play  chess?     Yes,  I  can.     Have  you  a  chess* 


298  THE  SPANISH  TEACHER. 

board?  I  have  (Si),  Then  let  us  play  (Hagamos,  pues,)  a 
game.  Which  is  the  best  compliment  that  can  be  paid 
(puede  hacerae)  to  an  author?     To  quote  from  him. 

Have  you  become  a  physician  ?  No,  Sir,  but  I  have  be- 
come a  lawyer.  What  has  become  of  my  hat  ?  I  have  not 
seeii  it.  What  has  become  of  you.?  You  are  quite  a 
stranger.  We  see  you  but  once  in  a  while.  I  am  always 
busy,  and  hardly  have  time  to  see  my  friends.  That  don't 
matter,  provided  you  get  rich.  Yes,  but  it  is  not  the  case 
(no  e$  asi)  with  me  ;  on  the  contrary,  I  am  getting  poorer 
every  day.  That  will  not  do  (Esq  no  estd  bueno,  or  no  con- 
viene)  ;  but  I  rather  think  that  you  pretend  to  be  poorer 
than  you  really  are  ;  don't  you  ?  I  cannot  but  believe  that 
you  want  to  make  game  (hacer  burla)  of  me.  By  no  means. 
Never  mind  ;  I  get  accustomed  to  every  thing.  By  the 
way  ;  are  you  going  alone  to  the  ball  ?  No  ;  I  will  have 
some  one  to  accompany  me.  When  does  your  friend  take 
his  departure  ?  He  sets  out  now  ;  the  vessel  is  setting  sail. 
He  is  a  young  man  that  makes  himself  to  be  loved  by  every 
body.  Every  one  who  knows  him  says  the  same  of  him,  so 
that  you  are  not  the  only  one  who  pays  him  that  compli- 
ment. I  do  not  doubt  it.  By  the  way,  what  time  is  it  ?  It 
is  becoming  late.  I  really  don't  know  what  time  it  is.  My 
watch  either  goes  too  slow  or  it  has  run  down  ;  I  must  wind 
it  up  ;  and  the  clock  goes  too  fast.  It  is  becoming  night. 
It  is  growing  dark.  I  beg  your  pardon,  Sir ;  it  is  becoming 
day. 


FORTY-FIFTH   CONVERSATION. 


Birth-day. 

In  spite  of  him. 

About  the  break  of  day. 

Abroad. 

He  has  his  arms  folded. 

The  most  distant  idea. 

Against  his  will. 

By  land. 

By  sea. 

At  first. 


f  Cumpleafios. 

t  A  pesar  or  despecho  suyo. 

j-Hacia  el  amanecer.     Al  romp*i 

del  dia. 
f  En  el  estranjero  or  fuera. 
Tiene  los  brazos  cruzadoa. 
La  idea  mas  remota. 
Contra  su  voluntad. 
Por  tierra. 
Por  mar. 
f  Al  principio. 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 


209 


A  while. 

A  little  while. 

To  strive  against  the  stream. 

Let  all  things  be  ready  by  the  lime 

we  come  back. 
You  have  seen  my  father,  have  you 

not? 
He  will  not  travel  much,  will  he  ? 


Un  rato. 

Un  ratito. 

f  Luchar  contra  la  corriente. 

f  Que  todo  este*  listo  para  cuando 

volvamos. 
Vd.  ha  visto  a  mi  padre,  ^no  es 
,  verdad? 
El  no  viajara  mucho,  <i  es  verdad 


If,  in  common  conversation,  the  verb  is  repeated  in  English  in  the 
affirmative,  when  the  sentence  is  in  the  negative  ;  and  vice  versa,  in  the 
negative,  when  the  sentence  is  in  the  affirmative  ;  to  render,  as  it  is  pre- 
sumed, the  interrogatory  more  expressive,  the  words  J  es  verdad  ?  (is  it 
true?)  ino  es  verdad?  (is  it  not  true?)  are  used  in  Spanish. 

I  am  going  to  France.  When  do  you  start  ?  I  start  to- 
morrow about  the  break  of  day.  That  man  appears  to  be 
at  his  ease,  as  ( pues)  he  has  his  arms  folded.  That  man 
has  not  had  good  success  in  his  enterprise.  He  undertakes 
every  thing,  although  he  knows  he  is  very  unfortunate. 
Then  he  likes  to  strive  against  the  stream.  Miss,  your 
mother  told  you  not  to  play,  and  you  play  in  spite  of  her. 
Why  does  that  man  work  so  slowly?  Because  he  works 
against  his  will.  Where  are  you  going,  master  (mi  amo)  ? 
I  am  going  to  the  market,  and  then  I  shall  come  home ;  let 
all  things  be  ready  by  the  time  I  come  back.  Yes,  Sir,  all 
shall  be  ready.  My  child,  what  beautiful  eyes  your  little 
friend  (fern.)  has!  I  have  fallen  in  love  with  her.  You 
ought  to  go  to  see  her.  Why,  father  ?  Because  it  is  better 
to  go  there  than  to  run  after  the  butterflies.  Do  you  think 
that  she  is  pretty  ?  I  think  so.  I  wish  to  go  and  see  her 
this  evening,  will  you  go  with  me  ?  Certainly.  When  do 
you  think  your  friends  will  set  out  for  Europe  ?  I  have  not 
the  most  distant  idea  ;  but  I  suppose  they  will  not  set  out 
until  the  spring  or  the  summer,  and  perhaps  they  will  not 
be  ready  until  the  winter.  How  will  they  travel  ?  Some 
( £7/208)  will  go  by  land  and  others  by  sea  ;  but  a  few  will 
go  at  first  by  land,  and  afterwards  by  sea.  And  how  long 
will  they  remain  abroad  ?  Until  they  get  rich  enough  to 
live  with  comfort  (con  comodidad)  all  their  lives. 

When  is  your  birth-day  ?  It  is  precisely  to-morrow.  In- 
deed 1  You  have  seen  my  brother,  have  you  not  ?  Yes, 
Miss,  I  have  seen  him.     I  came  to  see  if  he  were  going 


300 


THE  SPANISH  TEACHEK. 


away  (se  iba)  this  summer,  and  be  says  that  lie  will  stait  to- 
morrow at  the  break  of  day.  But  he  will  not  travel  much, 
will  he  ?  I  believe  not,  as  he  has  been  indisposed  for  some 
time  (por  algun  tiempo).  What  church  do  those  ladies  and 
gentlemen  go  to  ?  The  gentlemen  go  to  the  Catholic 
church,  and  the  ladies  to  the  Methodist.  Are  you  going 
already  ?  Why  such  a  hurry  ?  Why  don't  you  stay  a  little 
while  longer  (mas)  ?  Because  I  have  already  been  a  very 
long  while,  and  I  fear  I  am  troubling  you  with  such  a  long 
visit.  The  visit  of  a  friend  like  you  can  never  be  trouble- 
some (molesta)  to  me.     I  thank  you  ;  you  are  very  kind. 


FORTY-SIXTH  CONVERSATION. 


The  holidays  of  the  yeab. 
Christmas. 
New  Year's  day. 
Lent. 

Palm  Sunday. 
The  Holy  Week. 
Ash  Wednesday. 
Maundy  Thursday. 
Good  Friday. 
Ember  days. 
Easter  Sunday. 
Low  Sunday. 
Whitsunday. 
The  Eve. 
The  Harvest. 
High  Mass. 
Low  Mass. 
May  God  reward  you  ! 


DlAS  DE  FIESTA  DEL  AtJO. 

La  Navidad. 

Dia  de  Alio  Nuevo. 

La  Cuaresma. 

Domingo  de  Ramos. 

La  Semana  Santa. 

Mie'rcoles  de  ceniza. 

t  Jue'ves  Santo. 

f  Vie'rnes  Santo. 

f  Las  cuatro  Temporas. 

f  Domingo  de  Pascua. 

f  Dominica  in  albis. 

f  La  Pentecostes. 

La  Vijilia. 

La  cosecha  de  granos. 

f  Misa  cantada. 

f  Misa  rezada. 

f  Dios  se  lo  pague  a  Vd. 


When  is  your  birth-day  ?  On  the  second  day  of  January. 
Will  you  tell  me  which  are  the  principal  festivals  (festivi- 
dades)  of  the  year  ?  Certainly,  witli  great  pleasure.  How 
shall  I  mention  them  to  you,  alphabetically  or  chronologi- 
cally (en  orden  alfabetico  b  cronolqjico)  ?  As  you  please. 
Then  I  will  mention  them  to  you  chronologically  :  1st  fes- 
tival, Christmas  ;  2d.  New  Year's  day  ;  3d.  Lent  ;  4th.  Palm 
Sunday  ;  5th.  The  Holy  Week  ;  6th.  Ash  Wednesday  ;  7th. 
Maundy  Thursday  ;  8th.  Good  Friday  ;  9th.  Ember  days  ; 
10th.  Easter  Sunday  ;  11th.  Low  Sunday  ;  12th.  Whitsun- 


CONVERSATIONAL  EXERCISES. 


bul 


day  ;  13th.  The  Eve  ;  14th.  The  Harvest.  I  am  much  obliged 
to  you  for  your  kindness.  Not  at  all.  Will  you  have  the 
goodness  to  give  me  two  wafers  ?  I  am  sorry  I  cannot  oblige 
you,  for  I  have  none.  Have  you  been  at  church  ?  Yes, 
Sir  ;  and  I  have  heard  a  Low  Mass,  which  I  like  better 
than  a  High  Mass,  for  many  reasons.  Here  is  a  beggar 
(mendigo).  What  does  he  want  ?  He  asks  for  alms  {una 
limosna).  I  would  give  him  something  if  I  could.  If  you 
have  not  money  I  have  some  and  will  give  him  some.  You 
are  very  kind.  Oh,  it  is  nothing.  It  may  be  nothing  for 
you,  but  it  is  a  great  deal  for  me.  May  God  reward  you  ! 
Thank  you.  Good  actions  performed  on  earth  meet  with 
their  reward  in  Heaven.  There  are  no  actions  greater  or 
more  commendable  than  those  which,  stimulated  neither 
by  vanity  nor  sustained  by  the  hope  of  reward  or  the  allure- 
ment of  glory,  spring  from  the  purest  motives  of  religion, 
honor  and  benevolence. 


FORTY-SEVENTH  CONVERSATION. 


Hacer  con  los  demas  lo  que  quisie- 
ramos  que  hiciesen  cou  nosotros. 
El  arte  de  agradar. 
t  Con  que. 
Desaiiar. 

f  Poco  me  importa. 
f  Andar  en  puntillas. 
f  Estan  reflidos.  No  se  llevan  bien. 
f  Levantese  Vd.  Levantate. 
f  Tiempo  muerto. 
Estar  enfadado. 


To  do  as  you  would  be  done  by. 

The  art  of  pleasing. 

So  then. 

'To  challenge. 

I  don't  care. 

To  go  on  tip-toe. 

They  are  not  on  good  terms. 

Get  up. 

Dull  season. 

To  be  angry  or  vexed. 

To  do  as  you  would  be  done  by  is  the  plain,  sure  and 
undisputed  rule  of  morality  and  justice,  and  at  the  same 
time  one  of  the  great  secrets  of  the  difficult  art  of  pleasing. 
Why  do  you  speak  to  your  brother  ?  he  is  angry  with  you. 
Because  I  did  not  know  it  ;  I  don't  care,  I  shall  speak  to 
the  man  who  lives  on  the  other  side  of  the  road.  But  he 
also  is  vexed  with  you.  I  cannot  help  it ;  I  shall  speak  to 
myself.  Why  do  you  not  get  up  ?  Because  I  am  sleepy. 
Has  your  brother  been  to  Mr.  N/s  house  to-day  ?  No  ; 
they  are  not.  on  good  terms.     Who  is  that  man  ?     He  is  a 


302 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


friend  of  mine.  I  come  to  take  leave  of  you  for  Spain.  Do 
you  intend  to  return  ?  I  do  intend  to  return  after  the  win- 
ter is  over.  It  will  give  me  the  greatest  pleasure  to  see  you 
again. 

So,  then,  you  are  going  to  be  married  to  Miss  N.  ?  I 
beg  your  pardon,  Sir,  but  I  cannot  but  believe  that  they 
have  informed  you  wrong  (mat).  I  hope  that  you  do  not 
wish  to  challenge  me  for  what  I  have  said.  No,  Sir,  I 
have  not  the  most  distant  idea  of  doing  so.  Do  you  intend 
going  to  the  play  to-night  ?  I  do,  because  I  wish  to  see 
the  piece  (pieza)  that  has  been  so  long  in  rehearsal.  It  is 
said  that  Mr.  N.  performs  his  character  well.  So  they  say. 
Somebody  is  at  the  door.  Who  is  there?  Who  is  it? 
Come  in.  Be  pleased  to  walk  on  your  toes,  as  my  father 
has  gone  to  bed  very  sick.  Please  sit  down.  I  am  very 
happy  to  see  you.  How  have  you  been  ($•  Gbmo  lo  ha  pasado 
Vd.)?  Very  well.  lam  very  glad  to  hear  it.  And  how 
are  you?  I  am  very  well,  at  your  service.  What  is  the 
matter  with  your  father  ?  I  really  don't  know,  but  he  looks 
very  sick.  I  am  very  sorry  to  hear  it.  I  thought  he  was 
getting  better.  How  does  business  go  ( &  Go  mo  van-  los  ne,go~ 
cios)  ?  How  do  you  get  along  with  that  business  (^  Gomo 
le  va  a  Vd.  con  aquel  negocio)  ?  Now,  as  it  is  a  dull  season, 
we  cannot  do  much.  Business  of  every  description  is  dull 
(entorpecido). 


FORTY-EIGHTH  CONVERSATION. 


Business  before  pleasure. 

Be  it  as  it  may. 

He  is  behind  the  age. 

He  does  not  go  behind  him. 

He  is  not  behind  any  one. 

To  go  ahead. 

Beforehand . 

To  fall  backwards. 

Step  here. 

That  will  pass  away. 

Before  all  things. 

Sky-light. 


f  Primero  es  la  obligacion  que  la 

devocion. 
f  Sea  de  ello  lo  que  fuese. 
f  El  esta  atrasado  de  noticias.     No 

ya  con  el  siglo. 
f  El  no  le  va  en  zaga. 
t  Nadie  le  aventaja. 
t  Ir  adelante. 

t  De  antemano.    Con  anticipation, 
t  Caer  de  espaldas. 
t  Lleguese  Vd.  lldgate  aca. 
f  Eso  pasara. 
Ante  todas  cosas. 
Claraboya. 


CONvEJRSATIONAL  EXERCISES.  30B 

Had  you  told  me  that  beforehand,  I  should  have  gone 
home  to  pass  the  Christmas  holidays  in  company  with  my 
parents  (padres).  Be  it  as  it  may,  you  cannot  go  now,  for 
you  know,  business  before  pleasure.  Very  well ;  but,  be- 
fore all  things,  let  us  go  and  see  our  friend  Mr.  N.,  and 
have  a  little  conversation  with  him.  I  do  not  like  to  con- 
verse with  any  man  who  is  so  much  behind  the  age  as  he 
is.  What  is  the  matter  with  yo  u  ?  I  have  a  horrible  head- 
ache. That  will  very  soon  pass  away  (Eso  se  le  pasard  a  Vd. 
may  pronto),  do  not  mind  it.  Is  that  the  sky-light  that  be- 
longs to  your  room?  Yes,  that  is  the  one  (Esa  es).  Why 
don't  you  study  as  much  as  your  schoolmates  ?  you  will  al- 
ways be  behind  them  (ellos  siempre  le  avantqjardn  a  Vd.) 
"  Go  ahead,"  is  an  Americanism,  is  it  not?  Yes,  it  is  ;  and 
it  is  also,  if  we  may  say  so  (si  podemos  decirlo  asi),  the  motto 
of  the  age  (era  or  epoca).  What  does  it  mean  (Que  quiere 
decir,  or  signified)  in  Spanish  ?  It  means  "  Adelante."  The 
following  two  maxims,  the  first  from  Penn,  and  the  second 
from  Say,  mean,  substantially,  nearly  the  same  thing  : 
"Time  is  what  we  want  most,  but,  alas!  (dy !)  what  we  use 
worst."  "  The  economy  of  our  (del)  time  depends  on  do- 
ing now  what  we  must  necessarily  do  afterwards." 


FORTY-NINTH  CONVERSATION. 


The  last  but  one. 
To  learn  by  heart. 
By  that  time. 
Down  town. 
Up  town. 
Up  the  river. 
Down  the  river. 
A  sleigh  or  sledge . 


f  El  penultimo  or  la  peniiltia>a. 

t  Aprender  de  memoria. 

t  Para  entonces. 

f  Parte  baja  de  la  ciudad. 

t  Parte  alta  de  la  ciudad. 

f  Rio  arriba. 

t  Rio  abajo. 

Un  trineo. 


How  have  you  been  able  to  recite  your  lesson  so  well  ? 
Because  I  learnt  it  by  heart.  I  am  going  up  town  ;  will 
you  come  with  me  ?  No,  Sir,  I  have  to  go  down  town,  and 
then  (despues)  I  will  take  the  steamboat  that  travels  (ec  vd- 
por  que  nduegd)  up  the  river.  Will  you  have  the  kindness 
to  hand  my  card  to  your  brother  ?  With  much  pleasure. 
What  are  you  doing  ?    I  am  teaching  this  boy  his  lesson. 


804 


THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 


That  is  right.  Can  you  pay  me  to-day  ?  No,  Sir,  out  I  can 
give  you  a  promissory  note.  Is  it  very  cold  to-day  ?  No, 
Sir,  it  is  neither  cold  nor  warm.  It  is  a  very  line  day.  It 
is  very  line  weather.  Have  you  gone  through  the  book  ? 
not  yet.  Look,  what  a  beautiful  child !  What  a  handsome 
sleigh !  To-morrow  evening  will  be  given  the  last  opera  of 
this  season  {lemporada).  ■  I  beg  your  pardon,  Sir  ;  it  will 
not  be  the  last,  but  the  last  but  one.  I  am  very  glad.  I  am 
very  sorry.  I  wish  to  advise  my  brother  what  he  ought  to 
do,  but  he  is  not  accustomed  to  receive  advice  from  any 
body.  How  often  is  this  paper  published  ?  It  is  published 
every  other  week.  I  wish  to  make  a  quotation  from  it,  in 
order  to  pay  a  compliment  to  the  editor.  You  may  do  it 
if  you  wish.  Do  you  wish  a  copy  of  this  work  (obra)  ?  As 
you  please.  I  wish  to  copy  fairly  this  letter.  Here  is  a 
pen,  ink  and  paper.  Will  you  take  a  sleigh  ride  (dar  un 
paseo  en  trineo)  ?  I  have  no  sleigh.  Why  do  you  not  buy 
one?  This  sleigh  is  sold  very  cheap.  How  much  do  they 
wish  for  it  ?  Only  fifty  dollars.  Then  I  shall  buy  it.  Be- 
fore doing  it,  permit  me  to  advise  you  in  this  matter.  Cer- 
tainly. I  shall  be  very  much  obliged  to  you  for  your  kind- 
ness. 


FIFTIETH  CONVERSATION. 


Real  estate. 

Personal  estate. 

Dog-days. 

Mad  dog. 

Bull-dog. 

Mad-house. 

Madmen. 

Crazy. 

Insane. 

Are  you  crazy  ? 

Are  you  angry  ? 

Are  you  mad  ? 

Are  you  vexed  ? 

Td  be  well  oft". 

Is  there  ?    Are  there  ? 

Neither  pro  nor  con. 

We  are  even. 

At  oven  or  odds. 


f  Bienes  raizes, 
f  Bienes  muebles. 
f  La  canicula. 
f  Perro  rabioso. 
f  Perro  de  presa. 
f  Casa  de  locos, 
f  Loco  rabioso. 
f  Loco  delirante. 
Demente. 
I  Esta  Vd.  loco  ? 
^Esta  Vd.  colerico  ? 

I  Esta  Vd.  enfadado  ? 

f  Estar  bien. 

*Hay? 

Ni  en  pro  ni  en  contra. 

Estamos  iguales. 

A  pares  y  nones. 


CONVERSATIONAL   EXERCISES. 


305 


For  ever  and  ever. 

Ever  since. 

Now  more  than  ever. 


I  For  siempre  jamas. 
Desde  entonces. 
Ahora  mas  que  nunca , 


Why  are  there  so  many  mad  dogs  this  year  ?  Because 
the  dog-days  are  very  hot.  Have  you  been  to  see  the  mad- 
house ?  No,  because  I  don't  like  to  see  madmen.  Are 
you  mad  ?  No,  Sir,  but  I  am  vexed.  What  are  you  going 
to  do  ?  Are  you  crazy  ?  What  is  the  matter  with  that 
man  ?  He  is  insane.  Mr.  N.  is  worth  (tiene)  a  million  of 
dollars  in  real  estate.  Yes,  Sir,  and  is  worth  also  half  a 
million  of  dollars  in  personal  estate.  He  is  very  well  off. 
Does  that  great  lawyer  speak  against  my  cause  ?  He  speaks 
neither  pro  nor  con.  Then  I  and  my  enemy  are  even.  How 
long  have  you  been  here  ?  I  came  here  this  morning,  and 
have  been  here  ever  since. 


FIFTY-FIRST  CONVERSATION. 


The  house  was  full  or  crowded. 

A  good  house. 

Overflowing. 

The    steamer    P.    has    made    the 

quickest  time  on  record. 
House  of  Representatives. 
To  be  running  about. 
To  get  clear. 
To  ran  away.     To  make  his  (her, 

etc.)  escape. 
Be  it  so. 

So  it  be  no  trouble  to  you. 
From  afar. 
By  far. 

At  x  distance. 
Though  ever  so  good. 
At  public  auction. 
For  my  sake. 


f  El  teatro  estaba  lleno. 

f  Una  bueua  entrada. 

f  Rebozando. 

f  Ei  vapor  P.  ha  hecho  el  viaje  maa 

breve  de  que  hay  memoria. 
t  Cainara  de  los  Representantes. 
t  Andar  de  zeca  en  Meca. 
f  Salir  bien. 
f  Tomar  las   de  Villadiego  ;   esca 

parse,  huirse. 
f  Euhorabuena. 

}  Con  tal  que  no  le  incomode  a  Vd 
f  Desde  lejos. 
t  Con  mucho. 
t  A  lo  lejos. 
\  Por  bueno  que  sea. 
}  En  venduta  piiblica. 
f  Por  mi. 


What  news  does  the  steamer  bring?  She  brings  very 
good  news.  Are  you  ready  ?  Yes,  I  am  ready.  Let  us  go, 
then.  Wait  a  moment,  I  wish  to  put  out  the  light.  Why 
have  you  not  come  to  see  me  before  ?  Because  I  thought 
you  were  vexed  with  me.  You  were  much  mistaken.  I  am 
glad  to  know  that  I  was  mistaken.     That  being  the  case,  1 


308  THE   SPANISH  TEACHER. 

shall  come  as  often  as  ever.  You  are  going  to  the  Post- 
office,  are  you  not  ?  Yes.  Do  you  wish  me  to  accompany 
you  ?  I  should  be  very  glad,  if  it  be  no  trouble  to  you. 
Have  you  seen  Mr.  N....  ?  I  met  him  by  chance  this 
morning.  Why  does  your  sister  not  marry  my  nephew  ? 
He  is  a  very  honest  man.  She  does  not  wish  to  marry 
him,  though  he  may  be  ever  so  honest.  She  is  going  to  be 
married  to  a  gentleman  who  is  richer,  by  far,  than  your 
nephew.  Your  sister  is  coming.  How  do  you  know  it?  I 
have  seen  her  at  a  distance.  Where  is  the  vessel  ?  She  is 
far  off. 


FIFTY-SECOND  CONVERSATION. 


Country  (out  of  town). 

Country  (region). 

Country  (native  land). 

Ancient. 

TJonsolation. 

The  people  (folks). 

The  peopie  (at  large). 

The  town. 

The  exile. 

As  yet.     Hitherto. 

To  cause  to  be  done. 

A  fortnight. 

The  neighborhood. 


Campo. 

Pais. 

Patria. 

Antiguo. 

Consuelo. 

La  jente,     Las  jentes. 

El  pueblo. 

El  pueblo. 

El  destierro. 

Hasta  ahora. 

Hacer  que  se  haga. 

f  Quince  dias. 

La  vecindad. 


Do  you  wish  to  read  the  journals  of  your  country  ?  Cer- 
tainly. Then  I  will  send  to  you  a  few  that  I  have  recently 
received,  Miat  you  may  read  them.  I  shall  be  very  much 
obliged  to  you,  for  in  this  my  exile,  like  Ulysses,  to  hear  of 
my  country  is  all  my  consolation.  What  do  you  intend  to 
do  in  this  country  ?  I  intend  to  visit  the  ancient  monu- 
ments of  this  city,  and  then  I  shall  go  to  see  a  friend  of 
mine  who  lives  in  the  country,  from  whom  I  hope  to  obtain 
some  information  of  the  manners  and  customs  of  the  people 
of  the  country  at  large,  and  of  the  folks  in  his  neighbor- 
hood in  particular.  What  a  pity  that  our  President  died  so 
soon  !  It  was  his  intention  to  cause  many  things  to  be  done 
that  had  hitherto  been  neglected  ;  which  would  have  been 
of  great  importance  to  the  country.  How  long  is  it  since 
he  died?    It  is  not  yet  a  fortnight. 


A  SYNOPSIS 


OF 


THE    SPANISH    GRAMMAR, 

ETYMOLOGY. 


THE  AKTICLES. 

Iii  Spanish  there  are  three  Articles :  the  Definite ;  the 
Indefinite ;  and  the  Partitive. 

DEFINITE   ARTICLE. 

Singular. 

Mas.                     Fern.  Neat. 

Nbm el                          la,  lo. 

Poss del,                     de  la,  de  lo. 

Obj al,                       a  la,  a  lo. 

Plural. 
%om ,    ,los'  ,0  J""         (The  Neuter  has  no 

The  Neuter  Article  is  used  before  the  masculine  singular 
of  adjectives,  to  express  an  abstract  quality,  as  :  lo  buenot 
the  good  ;  lo  util,  the  useful ;  lo  hermoso,  the  beautiful. 

INDEFINITE   ARTICLE. 

Mas.  Fern. 

tfom un,  una. 

Poss de  un,  de  una. 

Obj a  un,  &  una. 


308  ETTMOLOGI. — SUBSTANTIVES — ADJECTIVES. 


PARTITIVE    ARTICLE 

Singular. 

JVo'w . . . 

Mas, 
algun, 

Fern. 

alguna. 
de  alguna. 
a  alguna. 

Poss. . 
06/.... 

...de  algun, 
...  a  algun, 

Plural. 

Nom. . . 
Poss. . . 
Obj.... 

Mas. 
. . .  algunos  or  unos, 
. . .  de  algunos  or  unos, 
.  ..a  algunos  or  unos, 

Fern. 

algunas  or  unas. 
de  algunas  or  unas. 
a  algunas  or  unaa. 

SUBSTANTIVES. 

The  names  of  rivers,  kingdoms,  towns,  winds,  and  those 
which  denote  males  or  their  professions,  &c,  are  masculine. 

The  names  of  arts  and  sciences,  figures  of  Grammar, 
Poetry  and  Rhetoric,  letters  of  the  alphabet,  and  those 
which  denote  females,  their  professions,  &c,  are  feminine. 

Nouns  ending  in  a,  d,  ie,  ez,  umbre  or  ion,  are  feminine  ; 
ending  otherwise,  are  masculine.  Exceptions  to  this  rule 
will  be  found  in  Lesson  60th. 

To  form  the  plural  add  s  to  the  singular  ;  but  if  the  sub- 
stantive ends  in  a  consonant,  or  in  ey,  add  es.  For  more 
particulars,  see  Lesson  9th. 

Augmentatives  end  in  on,  azo,  masculine  ;  ona,  aza,  femi- 
nine. Diminutives  of  endearment  end  in  ito,  ico,  mascu- 
line ;  and  ita,  ica,  feminine  ;  those  of  contempt,  in  illo,  mas- 
culine, ilia,  feminine.  They  are  added  sometimes  to  adjec- 
tives as  well  as  to  substantives  ;  and  if  the  adjective  or  sub- 
stantive end  in  a  vowel,  that  vowel  is  suppressed  before  the 
augmentative  or  diminutive.  For  particulars  see  Lesson 
9th. 


ADJECTIVES, 

If  the  masculine  ends  in  o,  change  it  into  a  for  the  femi- 
nine ;  if  the  masculine  ends  in  on  or  an,  add  a  for  the  femi- 
nine.    If  the  adjective  expresses  a  national  quality,  as  ingle*, 


ETYMOLOGY. — PRONOUNS. 


309 


English,  add  a;  if  tlie  masculine  ends  in  a,  the  feminine 
and  the  masculine  are  then  the  same.  All  others  are  the 
same  in  both  genders.  Form  the  plural  of  all,  the  same  as 
if  they  were  substantives.     See  Lesson  15th,  for  particulars. 


COMPARISON. 

Regular. 

Positive. 
Boberbio, 

Comparative. 
mas  soberbio, 

el  mas 

Superlative. 
soberbio,  or  la  mas  soberbia. 

Irregular. 

bueno, 

malo, 

grande, 

pequeno, 

alto, 

bajo, 

mejor, 

peor, 

mayor, 

menor, 

superior, 

interior, 

6ptimo. 

pe'simo. 

maximo. 

minimo. 

supremo. 

innmo. 

For  more 

part 

iculars, 

see  Lesson  30th. 

PRONOUNS. 

PERSONAL    PRONOUNS. 

Singular. 

1st  Per.—  m.  and f.  Yo,  I. 

2d Tu,  Thou. 

3d m El,  He  or  it. 

/  Ella,  She  or  it. 

n  Lo,  Ello,  It. 

. m.  and  f.  Usted,  You,  Your  Honor,  or  Your  Worship. 

Plural 

1st  Per. — m.  andf.  Nosotros-as  or  nos,     "We. 

2d Vosotros-as  or  vos,     You. 

3d  ... .  ...in Ellos,  They. 

/ Ellas,  They. 

n ( The  Neuter  has  no  plural. ) 

m.  andf.  Ustedes,  You,  or  Your  Honors,  &c. 

Sing m.  andf.  Se,  Himself,  herself,  itself ;  or  to 

himself,  to  herself,  to  itself. 

Plur m.  andf.  Se,  Themselves,  or  to  themselves. 

Usted  is  commonly  written  V.,  or  Vd.,  and  ustedes  Vs.,  or 
Vds.,  and  they  require  the  verb  in  the  third  person.      Yo 


310 


ETYMOLOGY.— PRONOUNS. 


makes  mi,  and  tu  makes  It,  in  the  oblique  cases  Oonmigo, 
with  me  ;  contigo,  with  thee  ;  consigo,  with  himself,  with 
herself,  with  itself,  with  themselves  ;  con  el,  with  him ;  con 
ella,  with  her ;  con  ellos,  con  ellas,  with  them. 

Objective  case  :  a  mi,  or  me  ;  a  nosotros  or  nos;  a  ti  or  ie  ; 
a  vosotros,  or  os;  a  el,  or  le;  a  ella,  or  le;  a  ellos,  or  les;  a 
ellas,  or  les. 

POSSESSIVE. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Mas. 

Fern, 

Mas. 

Fern. 

Mio, 

mia, 

mios, 

mias, 

my. 

tuyo, 

tuya, 

tuyos, 

tuyas, 

thy. 

suyo, 

suya, 

suyos, 

suyas, 

his,  hers,  theirs. 

nuestro, 

nuestra, 

nuestros, 

nuestras, 

our. 

vuestro, 

vuestra, 

vuestros, 

vuestras, 

your. 

KELATIVE. 

Que  (that,  who,  or  which),  is  of  all  genders,  numbers,  and 
cases. 

Cual  (which,  plural  cuales),  is  of  both  genders. 

Quien  (who,  plural  quienes),  relates  to  persons  only. 

Cuyo  (whose),  almost  always  precedes  its  substantive,  and 
follows  the  declension  of  adjectives  of  two  terminations. 
Ambos,  entrdmbos,  and  ambos  a  dos,  both,  are  declined  in  the 


same  manner. 

DEMONSTRATIVE. 

Singular. 

Mas. 
Este, 
ese, 
aquel, 

Fern.                      Neut. 
esta,                       esto,                         this, 
esa,                        eso,          )                «. 
aquella,                 aquello,  J                       ' 

Plural. 

Mas. 

estos, 

esos, 

aquellos, 

Fern. 
estas,                          these. 

esas>          I                 *u™« 
aquellas,  \                  those- 

(The  neuter  has  no  plural.) 

CONJUGATION  OF  AUXILIARY  VERBS. 


Haoer,  to  have. 

INFINITIVE. 
Haber,  to  have. 


PRESENT    PARTICIPLE, 

Habiendo,  having. 

PRESENT. 

Yo  lie,  I  have,  &c. 
Tu  has, 
El  ha, 

Nosotros  hemos, 
Vosotros  habeis, 
Ellos  hm 

IMPERFECT. 

Yo  habia,  I  had,  &c. 
Tu  habias, 
El  habia, 

Nosotros  liabiamos, 
Vosotros  babiais, 
Ellos  habian. 


PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

Habido,  had. 
INDICATIVE. 

PERFECT. 

Yo  hube,  /  had,  &c. 
Tu  hubiste, 
El  hubo, 

Nosotros  liubimos, 
Vosotros  hubisteis. 
Ellos  hubieroii. 

FUTURE. 

Yo  habre,  /  shall  or  will  have, 


Tu  habras, 
El  habra, 

Nosotros  habremos, 
Vosotros  habreis, 
Ellos  habran. 


[do 


CONDITIONAL. 
Yo  liabria,  I  should  have,  &c.      Nosotros  liabriamos, 
Tu  habrias,  Vosotros  habriais, 

El  habria,  Ellos  habrian. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Yo  liaya,  that  I  havet  &c. 


Tu  hayas, 
El  haya, 
Nosotros  hayamos, 

Vosotros  hayais, 
Ellos  hayan. 


IMPERFECT. 

Yo   hubiera — hubiese,  that  1 
[should  have,  &c. 
Tii  liubieras — hubieses, 
El  hubiera — hubiese, 
Nosotros    hubieramos  —  hu- 

biesemos, 
Vosotros  hubierais—hubieseis, 
Ellos  hubieran — hubiesen. 


312 


ETYMOLOGY. 


FUTURE. 


Yo  hubiere,  that  1  shall  have, 
Tu  lmbieres,  \&c. 

El  lmbiere, 


Nosotros  hubieremos, 
Vosotros  hubiereis, 
Ellos  hubieren. 


As  haber  is  now  only  employed  as  an  auxiliary,  the  compound  tenses 
are  omitted  Formerly  it  was  used  as  an  equivalent  to  tener,  and  was 
conjugated  throughout  the  compound,  having  habido  for  its  paitieipla 
past. 


Ser,  to  be. 
INFINITIVE. 

Ser,  to  be. 


PRESENT   PARTICIPLE. 

Siendo,  being. 


PRESENT. 

Yo  soy,  I  am,  &c. 
Tu  eres, 
El  es, 

Nosotros  somos, 
Vosotros  sois, 
Ellos  son. 


PAST   PARTICU-Uk 

Sido,  been. 


INDICATIVE. 


PERFECT. 

Yo  fui,  Twos,  &C. 
Tu  fuiste, 
El  fue\ 

Nosotros  fuimos, 
Vosotros  fuisteis, 
Ellos  fueron. 


IMPERFECT. 

Yo  era,  I  wan,  &c. 
Tu  eras, 
El  era, 

Nosotros  erarnos, 
Vosotros  erais, 
Ellos  eran. 


FUTURE. 

Yo  sere,  I  shall  be,  &c 
Tu  seras, 
El  sera, 

Nosotros  seremos, 
Vosotros  sereis, 
Ellos  seran. 


CONDITIONAL. 

Yo  seria,  I  should  be,  dec. 
Tu  serias, 
El  seria, 


Nosotros  seriamos, 
Vosotros  seriais, 
Ellos  serian. 


CONJUGATION   OP  AUXILIARY  VERBS.  313 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

I  RESENT.  IMPERFECT. 

Yo  sea,  that  I  be,  &c.  Yofuera — fuese,  that  I  should 

Tu  seas,  Tu.  fueras — fueses,       [be,  Sc. 

El  sea,  El  fuera — fuese, 

Nosotros  seamos,  Nosotros    fueramos  —  fuese  > 

mos. 

Vosotros  seais,  Vosotros  fuerais — fueseis, 

Ellos  sean.  Ellos  fueran — fuesen. 

FUTURE. 

Yo  fuere,  that  I  shall  be,  &c.        Nosotros  fuereruos, 
Tu  fueres,  Vosotros  fuereis, 

El  fuere,  Ellos  fueren. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Se  tu,  be  thou,  dec.  Sed  vosotros, 

Sea  el,  Sean  ellos. 

Seamos  nosotros, 

COMPOUND  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT.  PERFECT. 

Yo  he  sido,  etc.,  I  have  been,  Yo  hube  sido,  etc.,  I  had  been, 
[&c.  [fa 

IMPERFECT.  FUTURE. 

Yo  habia  sido,  etc.,  I  had  been,  Yo  habre  sido,  etc.,  I  shall  have 
[&c.  [been,  &o. 

COMPOUND  TENSES  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT.  IMPERFECT. 

Yo  kaya  sido,  etc.,  I  may  have  Yo    hubiera  )    . ,       I  might, 

[been,  &c.  Yo    hubiese  j  sldo'    should  or 

[would  have  been,  &c, 

FUTURE. 

Yo  hubiere  sido,  etc.,  I  should  have  been,  &o, 
COMPOUND  TENSE  OF  THE  CONDITIONAL. 
Yo  habria  sido,  etc.,  I  would  have  been%  &c. 


314 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Estar,  to  I>e« 

INFINITIVE. 

Estar,  to  be. 


PRESENT   PARTICIPLE. 

Estando,  being. 


PRESENT. 

Yo  estoy,  I  am,  &o. 
Tu  estas, 
El  esta, 

Nosotros  estamos, 
Vosotros  estais, 
Ellos  estan. 

IMPERFECT. 

Yo  estaba,  I  was,  &c. 
Tu  estabas, 
El  estaba, 

Nosotros  estabamos, 
Vosotros  estabais, 
Ellos  estaban. 


Yo  estaria,  I  should  be, 
Tu  estarias, 
El  estaria, 


PAST    PARTICIPLE. 

Estado,  been. 
INDICATIVE. 

PERFECT. 

Yo  estuve,  I  was,  do. 
Tu  estuviste, 
El  estuvo, 

Nosotros  estuvimos, 
Vosotros  estuvisteis, 
Ellos  estuvieron. 

FUTURE. 

Yo  estare,  /  shall  be,  dbc. 
Tu  estaras, 
El  estara, 

Nosotros  estaremos, 
Vosotros  estareis, 
Ellos  estaran. 

CONDITIONAL. 

&c.  Nosotros  estariamos, 


Vosotros  estariais, 
Ellos  estarian. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 


PRESENT. 

Yo  estd,  that  I  be,  &c. 

Tu  estes, 
El  este, 
Nosotros  estemos, 

Vosotros  esteis, 

EUos  esten. 


IMPERFECT. 

Yo   estuviera — estuviese,   that 
(I  should  be,  &c. 
Tu  estuvieras— estuvieses, 
El  estuviera — estuviese, 
Nosotros  estuvieramos — estu- 

viesemos, 
Vosotros  estuvierais — estuvie- 

seis, 
Ellos  estuvieran — estuviesen. 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  REGULAR  VERBS.  315 

FUTURE. 

Yo  estuviere,  that  I  shall  be,  &e.  Nosotros  estuvieremos, 
Tu  estuvieres,  Vosotros  estuviereis, 

El  estuviere,  Ellos  estuvieren. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Esta  tu,  be  thou.  Estad  vosotros, 

Este  el,  Esten  ellos. 

Estemos  nosotros, 

COMPOUND  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT.  PERFECT. 

Yo  he  estado,  etc.,  Thave  been,  Yo   hube   estado,  etc.,  I  had 
[&c.  [been,  &c. 

IMPERFECT.  FUTURE. 

Yo  habia  estado,  etc.,  I  had  Yo  habre  estado,  etc.,  I  shall 
[been,  &c.  [have  been,  &e. 

COMPOUND  TENSE  OF  THE  CONDITIONAL. 
Yo  habria  estado,  etc.,  I  would  have  been,  &c. 

COMPOUND  TENSES  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT.  IMPERFECT. 

Yo  hay  a  estado,  etc.,  I  may  Yo  hubiera  )      .    -,       . 

[have  been,  &c.  Yo  hubiese  j  estaao>  etc-> 

I  might,  should  or  would  have 
been,  &c. 

FUTURE. 

Yo  hubiere  estado,  etc.,  /  should  have  been,  &c. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

INFINITIVE. 

Anaar,  to  Iotc 


PRESENT   PARTICIPLE.  PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

Amando,  loving.  Amado,  loved. 


316 


ETYMOLOGY. 


INDICATIVE. 


PRESENT. 

Yo  amo,  I  love,  &c. 
Tu  anias, 
El  ama, 

Nosotros  amamos, 
Vosotros  amais, 
Ellos  aman. 

IMPERFECT. 

Yo  amaba,  /  love,  &c. 
Tu  amabas, 
El  amaba, 

Nosotros  amabamos, 
Vosotros  amabais, 
Ellos  amaban. 


PERFECT. 

Yo  ame,  I  loved,  &c. 
Tu  amaste, 
El  amo, 

Nosotros  amaraos, 
Vosotros  amasteis, 
Ellos  amaron. 

FUTURE. 

Yo  amare,  1  shall  love,  &c. 
Tti  amaras, 
El  amara, 

Nosotros  amaremos, 
Vosotros  amareis, 
Ellos  amaran. 


CONDITIONAL. 
Yo  amaria,  I  should  love,  &c.  Nosotros  amariamos, 
Tti  amarias,  Vosotros  amariais, 

El  amaria,  Ellos  amarian. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 


PRESENT. 

Yo  ame,  that  I  love,  &c. 

Tti  ames, 
El  ame, 
Nosotros  amemos, 

Vosotros  ameis, 
Ellos  amen. 

Yo  amare,  that  I  shall  love. 
Tii  amares, 
El  amare, 


IMPERFECT. 

Yo  amara — amase,  that  I  should 
[love,  &c. 
Tti  amaras — amases, 
El  amara — amase, 
Nosotros  amaramos — amase- 

mos, 
Vosotros  amarais — amaseis, 
Ellos  amaran,  amasen. 

FUTURE. 

Nosotros  amaremos, 
Vosotros  amareis, 
Ellos  amaren. 


IMPERATIVE. 
Ama  tti,  love  thou,  &o.  Amad  vosotros, 


Ame  el, 

Amemos  nosotros, 


Amen  ellos. 


CONJUGATION  OF  THE  BEGULAB  VERBS. 


317 


SECOND  CONJUGATION. 

INFINITIVE. 

Temer,  to  fear. 

PRESENT   PARTICIPLE, 

Temiendo,  fearing. 


PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

Temido,  feared. 


INDICATIVE. 


PRESENT. 

To  temo,  I  fear,  &c. 
Tu  temes, 
El  teme, 

Nosotros  tememos, 
Vosotros  temeis, 
Ellos  teuien. 

IMPERFECT. 

Yo  temia,  I  feared,  &c. 
Tu  tenrias, 
El  temia, 

Nosotros  temiamos, 
Vosotros  temiais, 
Ellos  temian. 


PERFECT. 


To  temi,  I  feared,  So. 
Tu  temiste, 
El  temio, 
Nosotros  temimos, 
Vosotros  temisteis, 
Ellos  temieron. 

FUTURE. 

To  temere,  /  shall  fear,  &c* 
Tu  temeras, 
El  temera, 

Nosotros  temeremos, 
Vosotros  temereis, 
Ellos  temerai?. 


CONDITIONAL. 
To  temeria,  I  should  fear,  &c.  Nosotros  temeriamos, 
Tu  temerias,  Vosotros  temeriais, 

El  temeria,  Ellos  temerian. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

PRESENT. 

To  tern  a,  that  I  fear,  &c. 


Tu  temas. 
El  tema, 
Nosotros  temamos, 

Vosotros  temais, 
Ellos  tenian. 


IMPERFECT. 

To   temiera — temiese,   that  I 
[shoidd  fear,  &c. 
Tu  temieras — temieses, 
El  temiera — temiese, 
Nosotros  temieramos — temie- 

esemos, 
Vosotros  temierais— temieseis, 
Ellos  temieraii — temiesen. 


318  ETYMOLOGY. 


FUTURE. 

YotemiereJhalT  shall  fear,d;c.  Nosotros  temiereinos, 
Tu  temieres,  Vosotros  temiereis, 

El  temiere,  Ellos  teniieren. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Teme  tu,  fear  thou,  &c.  Temed  vosotros, 

Tema  el,  Teman  ellos. 

Teinauios  nosotros, 


THIED  CONJUGATION. 

INFINITIVE. 

Partir,  to  divide. 

PRESENT    PARTICIPLE.  PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

Partlendo,  dividing.  Partido,  divided. 

INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT.  PERFECT. 

To  parto,  I  divide,  &c.  Yo  parti,  I  divided,  &o* 

Tu  partes,  Tu  partiste, 

El  parte,  El  parti6, 

Nosotros  partimos,  Nosotros  partimos, 

Vosotros  partis,  Vosotros  partisteis, 

Ellos  parten.  Ellos  partieron. 

IMPERFECT.  FUTURE. 

Yo  partia,  I  divided,  &c.  Yo  partire,  /  shall  divide,  &c, 

Tu  partias,  Tu  partiras, 

El  partia,  El  partira, 

Nosotros  partiamos,  Nosotros  partiremos, 

Vosotros  partiais,  Vosotros  partireis, 

Ellos  partian.  Ellos  partiran. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Yo  -p&rhiria,,  I  should  divide,dcc.  Nosotros  partiriamos, 
Tu  partirias,  Vosotros  partiriais, 

El  partiria,  Ellos  partirian. 


. 


REFLECTIVE  YERBS.  319 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

*      PRESENT.  IMPERFECT. 

Yo  parta,  that  I  divide,  dec.       Yo  partiera — partiese,    that  I 

[should  divide,  f.i\, 
Tu  partas,  Tu  partieras — partieses, 

El  parta,  El  partiera — partiese, 

Nosotros  partamos,  Nosotros     partieramos — par- 

tiesemos, 
Vosotros  partais,  Vosotros     partierais — partie- 

seis, 
Ellos  partan.  Ellos  partieran — partiesen. 

FUTURE. 

Yo  partiere,  that  I  shall  divide,  Nosotros  partieremos, 

[dec. 
Tu  partieres,  Vosotros  partiereis, 

El  partiere,  Ellos  partieren. 

IMPERATIVE. 
Parte  tu,  divide  thou,  dec.  Partid  vosotros, 

Parta  el,  Partan  ellos. 

Partamos  nosotros, 


REFLECTIVE  VERBS. 

INFINITIVE. 
Ocultarse,  to  hide  one's  self. 

PRESENT   PARTICIPLE.  PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

Ocultandose,  hiding  one's  self.  Ocultadose,  having  hid  one*s 

[self. 
INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT. 

Yo  me  oculto,  I  hide  myself,  dec.  Nosotros  nos  ocultamos, 
Tu  te  ocultas,  Vosotros  os  ocultais, 

El  se  oculta,  Ellos  se  ocultan. 

The  other  simple  tenses  are  conjugated  in  like  manner. 

Yo  me  he  ocultado,  I  have  hid  Nosotros  nos  hemos  ocultado 

[myself,  dec. 
Tu  te  has  ocultado,  Vosotros  os  habeis  ocultado^ 

El  se  ha  ocultado,  Ellos  se  nan  ocultado. 


320  ETYMOLOGY. 

The  other  composed  tenses  are  conjugated  in  like  manner. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Ocultate,  hide  thyself,  &c.  Ocultaos, 

Ocultese,  Ocultense. 

Ocultemonos, 


THE  PASSIVE  EORM. 

The  passive  voice  is  formed  with  the  auxiliary  ser  and  the 
participle  of  the  verbs. 

INFINITIVE. 
Ser  amado,  to  be  loved. 

PRESENT   PARTICIPLE.  PAST   PARTICIPLE. 

Siendo  amado,  being  loved.       Sido  amado,  been  loved. 
INDICATIVE. 

PRESENT.  IMPERFECT. 

Yo  soy  amado,  I  am  loved,  &e.  Yo  era  amado,  I  was  loved,  &c. 

Tu  eres  amado,  Tu  eras  amado, 

El  es  amado,  El  era  amado, 

Nosotros  somos  amados,  Nosotros  eramos  amados, 

Vosotros  sois  amados,  Vosotros  eraia  amados, 

Ellos  son  amados.  Ellos  eran  amados. 

PERFECT.  FUTURE. 

Yo  fui  amado,  I  was  loved,  &c.  Yo  sere  amado,  I  shall  be  loved, 

Tti  fuiste  amado,  Tu  seras  amado, 

El  fue  amado,  El  sera  amado, 

Nosotros  fuimos  amados,  Nosotros  seremos  amados, 

Vosotros  fuisteis  amados,  Vosotros  serels  amados, 

Ellos  fueron  amados.  Ellos  seran  amados. 

CONDITIONAL. 

Yo  seria  amado,  I  should  be  Nosotros  seriamos  amados, 

[loved,  &c. 
Tu  serias  amado,  Vosotros  seriais  amados, 

El  seria  amado,  Ellos  serian  amados. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 
SUBJUNCTIVE. 


321 


PRESENT.  IMPERFECT. 

To  sea  amado,  that  I  be  loved,  To  fuera — fuese  amado,  that  1 
[&c.  [should  be  loved,  &c, 

Tu  seas  amado,  Tu  fueras — fueses  amado, 

El  sea  amado.  El  fuera — fuese  amado,^ 

Nosotros  seamos  amados,        Nosotros  fueramos — fuesemos 

amados, 
Vosotros  seals  amados,  Yosotros  f uerais — fueseis  ama- 

dos, 
Ellos  sean  amados.  Ellos  fueran — fuesen  amados. 

FUTURE. 

To  fuere  amado,  thai  I  shall  be  Nosotros  fueremos  amados, 

[loved,  &c.  Vosotros  fuereis  amados, 
Tu  fueres  amado,  Ellos  fueren  amados. 

El  fuere  amado, 

IMPERATIVE. 

Se  amado,  be  (thou)  loved,  &g.  Sed  amados, 
Sea  amado,  Sean  amados. 

Seamos  amados, 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS 

Are  almost  always  used  in  the  third  person  singular,  as  : 

Tronar,  to  thunder. 


Granizar,  to  hail. 
Helar,  to  freeze. 
Llover,  to  rain. 
Nevar,  to  snow. 
Amanecer,  to  dawn. 

iconteeeer,}toha^en- 


Deshelar,  to  thaw. 
Lloviznar,  to  drizzle. 
Relampaguear,  to  lighten. 
Anochecer,  to  become  night. 
Suceder,  to  happen. 
Placer,  to  please. 


TABLE  OF  THK 
FIKST 


Inf.  Pres. 

Ind.  Pres. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect. 

Future. 

Acertar 
to  guess. 

acierto 

aciertas 

acierta 

acertamos 

acertais 

aciertan. 

Kegular. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Acordar 

to  agree. 

acuerdo 

acuerdas 

acuerda 

acordamos 

acordais 

acuerdan. 

Beg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

anduve 
anduvisto 

Reg. 

Andar 

to  walk. 

anduvo 
anduvlmos 
anduvisteis 
anduvieron. 

doy 

Reg. 

dl 

Reg. 

das 

diste 

da 

di6 

Dar 

to  give. 

danios 

dais 

dan. 

dimo« 
disteia 
dieroii. 

— - 

CONJUGATION. 


Conditional. 

Subj.  Pres. 

Imperf. 

Imperative. 

Participles, 

Beg. 

acierte 

aciertes 

acierte 

acertemos 

acertels 

acierten 

Beg. 

acierta 
acierte 
acertad 
acierten. 

Beg. 

Beg. 

acuerde 

acuerdes 

acuerde 

acordemos 

acorde'is 

acuerden. 

Beg. 

acuerda  . 
acuerde 
acordad 
acuerden. 

Beg. 

keg. 

Reg. 

anduviera 

—ese 
anduvieras 

— eses 
anduviera 

— ese 
anduvie'ramos 

— dsenios 
anduvidrais 

— e'seis 
anduvieran 

— esen. 

Beg. 

Beg. 

Beg. 

Beg. 

diera 
—ese 
dieras 
— eses 
diera 
—ese 
die'ramos 
— dsemos 
dierais 
— e'seis 
dieran 
— esen. 

Beg. 

Keg. 

324 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Inf.  Pres. 

Ind.  Pres. 

Imperfect. 

Perfeet. 

Future. 

Jugar 

to  play. 

juego 

juegas 

juega 

jugamos 

jugais 

juegan. 

Beg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

SECOND 


Aborrecer 
to  hate. 

aborrezco 

aborreces 

aborrece 

aborrecemos 

aborrecdis 

aborrecen. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Atender 

to  pay  attention. 

atiendo 

atiendes 

atiende 

atendemos 

atenddis 

atienden. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

quepo 

Reg. 

cupe 

cabrd 

cabes 

cupiste 

cabras 

Caber 

to  be  contained. 

cabe 
cabemos 

cupo 
cupimos 

cabra 
cabrdmos 

cabeis 

cupfsteis 

cabrdis 

caben. 

cupieron 

cabran. 

caigo 

Reg. 

cai 

Reg. 

caes 

caiste 

Caer 

to/all. 

cae 

caemos 
cadis 
caen. 

cay6 

caimos 
cafsteis 
cayeron. 

[RREGULAR  VERBS. 


325 


Conditional. 


Subj.  Pres. 


Imperf. 


Imperative, 


Partieiples. 


Reg. 


juegue 

juegues 

juegue 

juguemos 

jugue'is 

jueguen. 


Keg. 


juega 
juegue 
jugad 
jueguen. 


CONJUGATION. 


Reg. 

aborrezca 

aborrezcas 

aborrezca 

aborrezcamos 

aborrezcais 

aborrezcan. 

Reg. 

aborrece 
aborrezca 
aborreced 
aborrezcan. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

atienda 

atiendas 

atienda 

atendamos 

atendais 

atiendan 

Reg. 

atiende 
atienda 
atended 
atiendan. 

Reg. 

cabria 

quepa 

cupiera 
— ese 

cabe 

Reg. 

cabrias 

quepas 

cupieras 
— eses 

quepa 

cabria 

quepa 

cupiera 
— ese 

cabed 

cabrfamos 

quepamos 

cupie'ramos 
— dsemos 

quepan. 

cabrfais 

quepais 

cupidrais 
— e'seis 

cabrian. 

quepan. 

cupieran 
— esen 

Reg. 

caiga 

cayera 
—  ese 

cae 

Pres. —cay  en- 
do. 

caigas 

cayeras 
— eses 

caiga 

caiga 

cayera 

— ese 

caed 

caigamos 

cayeramos 
— dsemos 

caigan. 

caigais 

caye'rais 
— dscis 

caigan. 

cayeran 
— esen. 

326 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Inf.  Pres. 

liid.  Pics. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect. 

Fatiue. 

Cocer 

to  cook. 

cuezo 

cueces 

cuece 

cocemos 

coce'is 

cuecen 

Regular. 

Keg. 

Reg. 

hago 

Beg. 

nice 

hare 

haces 

hiciste 

haras 

Hacer 

to  do. 

hace 
hacemos 

hizo 
hicimos 

hara 
haremos 

hacdis 

hicfsteis 

harels 

hacen 

hicieron 

haran 

Mover 

to  move. 

muevo 

mueves 

mueve 

movemos 

movels 

mueven 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Oler 

to  smelL 

huelo 

hueles 

huele 

olemos 

olels 

huelen 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

puedo 

Reg. 

pude 

podrd 

' 

puedes 

pudiste 

podras 

Poder 

iu  he  able, 

puede 
podemos 

pudo 
pudimos 

podra 
podre'mos 

podels 

pudlsteis 

podrels 

pveden 

pudieron 

podran 

IRREGULAR  YERBS. 


327 


Conditional. 

Subj.  Pres. 

lmperf. 

Imperative. 

Participles. 

Beg. 

cueza 

cuezas 

cueza 

cozamos 

cozais 

cuezan 

Reg. 

cuece 
cueza 
coced 
cuezan 

Reg. 

harla 

haga 

hiciera 
— ese 

haz 

Past — hecho. 

harias 

hagas 

hicieras 
— eses 

haga 

haria 

haga 

hiciera 
— ese 

haced 

harfamos 

hagamos 

hicie'ramos 
— e*semos 

hagan 

harfais 

hagais 

hicie'rais 
— eseis 

harian 

hagan 

hicieran 
— esen 

Keg. 

mueva 

muevas 

mueva 

movamos 

movais 

muevan 

Reg. 

mueve 
mueva 
moved 
muevan 

Reg. 

Beg. 

huela 

huelas 

huela 

olamos 

olais 

huelan 

Reg. 

huele 
huela 
oled 
huelan 

Reg. 

podria 

pueda 

pudiera 
—ese 

warding. 

Pres. — purU^ 
[endo 

podrias 

puedas 

pudieras 
— eses 

podria 

pueda 

pudiera 
— ese 

podrfamos 

podamos 

pudieramos 
— esenios 

podrfais 

podais 

pudidrais 
— e*seis 

podrian 

puedan 

pudieran 
— esen 

328 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Inf.  Pics. 

Intl.  Pres. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect. 

Future. 

pODgO 

Beg. 

puse 

pondre' 

pones 

pusiste 

pondras 

Poner 

topvi. 

pone 
ponemos 

puso 
pusimos 

pondra 
pondremos 

poneis 

pusfsteis 

pondrels 

ponen 

pusieron 

pondran 

quiero 

Reg. 

quise 

querrd 

quieres 

quisiste 

querras 

Querer 

to  wish. 

quiere 
queremos 

quiso 
quisimos 

querri 
querre'moa 

quereis 

quisfsteis 

querrela 

quieren 

quisieron 

querran 

sd 

Eeg. 

supe 

sabrd 

sabes 

supiste 

sabras 

Saber 

to  know. 

sabe 
sabemos 

supo 
supiinos 

sabra 
sabremos 

sabgis 

supfsteis 

sabre*ia 

saben 

supieron 

sabran 

tengo 

Reg.    ' 

tuve 

tendre" 

tienes 

tuviste 

tendraa 

Tener 
to  have. 

tiene 
tenemos 

tuvo 
tuvimos 

tendra 
tendre'mos 

teneis 

tuvfsteis 

tendre'is 

tienen 

tuvieron 

tendran 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


329 


Conditional. 

Subj.  Prcs. 

Imperf. 

Imperative. 

Participles. 

pondria 

pondrias 

pondria 

pondriamos 

pondrfais 

pondrian 

ponga 

pongas 

ponga 

pongamos 

pongais 

pougan 

pusiera 

— ese 
pusieras 

— eses 
pusiera 

— ese 
pusie'ramos 

—  e'semos 
pusie'rais 

— e'seis 
pusieran 

— esen 

pon 
ponga 
poned 
pongan 

Past— puesto. 

querria 

querrias 

querria 

querrfamos 

querriais 

querrian 

quiera 

quieras 

quiera 

queramos 

querais 

quieran 

quisiera 

—  ese 
quisieras 

— eses 
quisiera 

— ese 
quisie'ramos 

— e'semos 
quisie'rais 

— e'seis 
quisieran 

— esen 

quiere 
quiera 
quered 
quieran 

Keg. 

sabria 

sabrias 

sabria 

sabriamos 

sabriais 

sabrian 

sepa 

sepas 

sepa 

sepamos 

sepais 

sepan 

supiera 

— ese 
supieras 

— eses 
supiera 

— ese 
supidramos 

—  esemos 
supie'rais 

— e'seis 
supieran 

— esen 

sabe 
sepa 
sabed 
sepan 

Reg. 

tendria 

tendrias 

tendria 

tendriamos 

teudriais 

tendrian 

tenga 

tengas 

tenga 

tengamos 

tengais 

tengan 

tuviera 

— ese 
tuvieras 

— eses 
tuviera 

— ese 
tuvie'ramos 

— e'semos 
tuvierais 

— e'seis 
tuvieran 

— esen 

ten 
tenga 
tened 
tengan 

Keg. 

d'dO 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Inf.  Pres. 

Inrt.  Pres. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect. 

Future. 

traigo 

Beg. 

traje 

Reg. 

traes 

trajiste 

Traer 

to  bring. 

trae 

traemos 
tradis 
traen 

• 

trajo 
trajimos 
trajfsteis 
trajeron 

Valer 

to  be  icorth. 

valgo 

vales 

vale 

valemos 

vale'is 

valen 

Reg. 

Reg. 

valdre* 

valdras 

valdra 

valdremos 

valdre'is 

valdran 

Ver 

veo 
ves 
ve 

veia 

veias 

veia 

Reg. 

Reg. 

to  see. 

vemos 

vels 

ven 

veiamos 

veiais 

veian 

THIRD 


Asir 

asgo 
ases 
ase 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

to  seize. 

asimos 

asfs 

asen 

conduzco 

Reg. 

conduje 

Reg. 

conduces 

condujiste 

Conducir 

to  conduct. 

conduce 
conducimos 
conducis 
conducen 

condujo 
condujimos 
condujlsteis 
condujeron 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


331 


Conditional. 

Subj.  Fres. 

Imperf. 

Imperative. 

Participles. 

tog, 

traiga 

trajera 
— ese 

trae 

Pres.  —  trv 
[yendo. 

traigas 

trajeras 
— eses 

traiga 

• 

traiga 

trajera 
— ese 

traed 

traigamos 

trajdramos 
- — e'semos 

traigan 

traigais 

traje'rais 
— eseis 

traigan 

trajeran 
— esen 

valdria 

valga 

Reg. 

vale 

Reg. 

valdrias 

valgas 

valga 

valdria 

valga 

valed 

V 

valdriamos 

valgamos 

valgan 

valdrlais 

valgais 

valdrian 

valgan 

Beg. 

vea 

veas 

vea 

veamos 

veais 

vean 

Reg. 

ve 
vea 
ved 
vean 

Past — visto. 

CONJUGATION. 


asga 
asgas 


asgamos 

;ais 
asgan 


Reg. 


asid 
asgan 


Reg. 


Bee;. 


conduzca 

conduzcas 

conduzca 

conduzcamos 

conduzcais 

conduzcan 


condujera 

— ese 
condujeras 

— eses 
condujera 

— ese 
condujeraniO! 

— e'semos 
condujerais 

— Cseis 
condujeran 


conduce 
conduzca 
conducid 
conduzcan 


Reg. 


332 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Int.  Prcs. 

Iinl.  Pres. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect. 

Future. 

digo 

Reg. 

dije 

dire- 

dices 

dijiste 

diras 

Decir 
to  say. 

dice 
decinios 

dijo 
dijimos 

dira 
dire'mos 

decis 

dijisteis 

dire'is 

dicen 

dijeron 

diran 

duermo 

Reg. 

dormi 

Reg. 

duermes 

dormiste 

Dormir 

to  sleep. 

duerme 

dormimos 

dormis 

durmi6 

dormimos 

dormfsteis 

duermen 

durmieron 

huyo 

Reg. 

hui 

Reg. 

huyes 

huiste 

Huir 

tofly. 

huye 

huimos 

huis 

huyen 

huy6 
huimos 
huisteis 
huyeron 

voy 

iba 

fui 

ird 

vas 

ibas 

fuiste 

iras 

Ir 

to  go. 

va 
vamos 

iba 
ibamos 

fud 
fuimos 

ira 
iremos 

vais 

ibais 

fuisteis 

irels 

van 

iban 

fueron 

iran 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


333 


Conditional. 

Snbj.   Pres. 

Imperf. 

Imperative. 

Participles. 

diria 

diga 

dijera 
-  ese 

di 

Pres. 

dirias 

digas 

dijeras 
— eses 

diga 

diciendo 

diria 

diga 

dijera 
— ese 

decid 

Past 

dirlamos 

digamos 

dijeramos 
— e'semos 

digan 

dicho 

dirfais 

digais 

dije'rais 
— dseis 

dirian 

digan 

dijeran 
— esen 

Keg. 

duerma 

durmiera 
— ese 

duerme 

Pres.  —  dur- 
[miendo. 

duermas 

durmieras 

duerma 

duerma 

durmiera 
— ese 

dormid 

durmamos 

durmieramos 
—  esemos 

duerman 

durmais 

durmierais 

— e'seis 

duerman 

durmieran 
— esen 

Reg. 

buy  a 

huyera 
— ese 

huye 

Pres.—  huyeu- 
Tdo. 

huyas 

huyeras 

— eses 

huya 

huya 

huyera 
— ese 

huid 

huyamos 

huye'rumos 
— e'semos 

huyan 

huyais 

huyerais 
— e'seis 

huyan 

huyerau 
--esen 

iria 

vaya 

fuera 
— ese 

vd 

Pres.— yenda 

irias 

vayas 

fueras 
— eses 

vaya 

iria 

vaya 

fuera 
— ese 

id 

iriamos 

vayainos 

fue'ramos 
—  e'semos 

vayan 

irlais 

vayais 

fudrais 
— e'seis 

irian 

vayan 

fueran 
—  esen 

334 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Inf.  Prcs. 

Inrl.  Pres. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect. 

Future. 

Lucir 

to  shine. 

luzco 

luces 

luce 

lucimos 

lucis 

lucen 

Reg. 

Keg. 

Reg. 

pido 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

pides 

Pedir 

pide 

to  ask. 

pedimos 

pedis 

piden 

pudro 

Reg. 

pudri 

Reg. 

pudres 

pudriste 

Podrir 

pudre 

pudri6 

to  rot 

podrimos 

podris 

pudren 

pudrimos 
pudrfsteis 
pudrieron 

salgo 
sales 

Reg. 

Reg. 

saldre" 
saldras 

Salir 

sale 

saldra 

to  go  oui. 

salimos 

salis 

salen 

saldre'mos 

saldre'is 

saldran 

siento 

Reg. 

Reg. 

Reg. 

sientes 

siente 

Sentir 

tofeel. 

sentimos 

sentis 

sienten 

IRREGULAR  YERBS. 


335 


Conditional. 

Subj.  Pres. 

Impel  f. 

Imperative. 

Participles. 

Keg. 

luzca 

luzcaa 

luzca 

luzcamos 

luzcais 

luzcan 

Reg. 

luce 
luzca 
lucid 
luzcan 

Reg. 

Reg. 

pida 

pidiera 

pide 

Pres.  —  pi- 
[diendo. 

pidas 

pidieras 

— eses 

pida 

pida 

pidiera 
— ese 

pedid 

pidamos 

pidie'ramos 
— e'semos 

pidan 

pidais 

pidie'rais 

— eseis 

pidan 

pidieran 
— esen 

Reg. 

pudra 

pudriera 
— ese 

pudre, 

Pies.  —  pu- 
[driendo 

pudras 

pudrieras 

pudra 

pudra 

pudriera 
— ese 

podrid 

podramos 

pudrie'ramos 
—  esemos 

pudran 

podrais 

pudrie'rais 

— dseis 

pudran 

pudrieran 
— esen 

saldria 

saiga 

Reg. 

sal 

Reg. 

saldrias 

saigas 

saiga 

saldria 

saiga 

salid 

saldriamos 

salgamos 

salgan 

saldrfais 

salgais 

saldrian 

salgan 

Reg. 

sienta 

sintiera 
— ese 

siente 

Pres.  —  sin* 
[tiendo. 

sientas 

sintieras 
— eses 

sienta 

sienta 

sintiera 
— ese 

sentid 

sintarnos 

sintieraruos 
— e'semos 

sientan 

sintais 

sintie'rais 
— dseis 

sientan 

sintieran 
— €sen 

ETYMOLOGY. 


Inf.  Prcs. 

Ind.  Pres. 

Imperfect. 

Perfect. 

Future. 

vengo 

Reg. 

vine 

vendr^ 

vienes 

viniste 

vendras 

Venir 

to  oome. 

viene 
venimos 

vino 
vinimos 

vendra 
vendremos 

venis 

vinfsteis 

vendreis 

vienen 

vinieron 

vendr&n 

The  verb  haber,  used  impersonally,  is  employed  alike  in  both  num- 
bers ;  and  like  most  impersonal  verbs,  it  is  used  only  in  the  third  per- 
son of  the  several  tenses,  as  follows  : 


Ind.  Present. 

hay, 

there  is  or  there  are. 

Imperf. 

habia, 

there  was  or  there  were. 

Perfect. 

hubo, 

«<                    <( 

Future. 

habrd, 

there  will  be. 

Conditional. 

habria, 

there  would  be. 

Subj.  Present. 

haya, 

there  may  be. 

Imperf. 

j  hubiera, 
l  hubiese, 

there  should,  might  or 
would  be. 

Future. 

hubiere, 

there  should  be. 

Imperative. 

Imya, 

let  there  be. 

OBSERVATIONS  ON  THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

The  verbs  in  car,  cer,  cir,  gar,  ger,  guir  and  quir,  are  not 
irregular,  although  those  ending  in  car  change  the  c  into 
qu  when  the  c  is  to  be  followed  by  an  e ;  those  in  cer  and 
<Ar,  some  excepted,  change  the  c  into  z  when  it  is  to  be  fol- 
lowed by  a  or  o  ;  those  in  gar  have  an  u  before  the  termina- 
tion e  ;  those  in  ger  and  gir  change  the  g  into  j  when  it  is 
followed  by  an  a  or  an  o  ;  those  in  guir  lose  the  u  before 
either  of  the  last  two  named  vowels  ;  and  those  in  quir 
change  the  qu  into  c  before  the  same  already  quoted  vowels  : 


HlKEGULAR   VERBS. 


337 


Conditional. 

Subj.   Pres. 

I  nip  erf. 

Imperative. 

Participles. 

vendria 

venga 

viniera 
-  ese 

ven 

Pres.  — vini- 
[endo 

vendrias 

vengas 

vmieras 

— eses 

venga 

vendria 

venga 

vmiera 
—ese 

venid 

vandriamos 

vengamos 

vinie'ramos 
—  e'semos 

vengan 

vendrfais 

vengais 

vinierais 
— dseis 

vendrian 

vengan 

vmieran 
— esen 

this  change  being  made  in  order  to  preserve  the  soft  or 
strong  pronunciation  of  the  root,  as :  pecar,  peque  ;  veneer, 
venzo,  venza  ;  uncir,  unzo,  unza ;  pagar,  pague ;  coger,  coja, 
cojo ;  fingir,  firijo,  fivja  ;  seguir,  sigo,  siga  ;  delmquir,  delinco, 
delinca. 

Even  the  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  whose  infinitive 
have  an  e  for  the  last  radical  letter,  are  not  irregular  ;  and 
this  e  is  doubled  in  some  tenses,  as  ;  alancear,  alancee,  to 
wound  with  a  lance  ;  aguijonear,  aguijonee,  to  prick  forward  ; 
gorjmr,  gorjee,  to  warble  ;  golpear,  golpee,  to  strike  :  because 
the  first  e  is  radical,  and  the  second  is  the  invariable  ter- 
mination of  the  regular  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  in  the 
same  tenses. 

Neither  are  the  verbs  ending  in  aer,  eer,  oir,  uir,  irregular 
(these  two  vowels  being  two  syllables),  as  :  caer,  creer,  oir, 
huir.  They  only  change  the  radical  i  into  y  in  the  gerund, 
preterite,  and  its  dependants,  as  :  cayendo,  cayo,  cayera, 
cayese,  cayere. 

All  the  verbs  ending  in  ucir  take  a  z  before  the  radical  e 
(like  the  verbs  ending  in  ecer  of  the  second  conjugation), 
in  the  first  person  singular  of  the  present  of  the  indicative, 
in  all  those  of  the  present  of  the  subjunctive  in  the  first 
plural,  and  in  the  third  of  the  singular  and  plural  of  the 
imperative,  as  :  carezco,  carezca,  from  carecer,  to  want ;  luzco, 
luzca,  from  lucir,  to  shine. 


338 


ETYMOLOGY. 


ALPHABETICAL  LIST  OF  ALL  THE  IEBEGULAB  VEEBS, 

Arranged  according  to  their  terminations,  with  references  to  the  Verba 
like  which  they  are  conjugated. 

FIKST    CONJUGATION, 


Acertar, 

to  ascertain, 

(See  Table  of  Irr.  Verbs.) 

acordar, 

agree, 

ib. 

acordar, 

remember, 

ib. 

acostar, 

lie  down, 

acordar. 

acrecentar, 

increase, 

acertar. 

adestrar, 

guide,  to  instruct, 

ib. 

agorar, 

augur, 

acordar. 

alentar, 

encourage, 

acertar. 

ahnorzar, 

breakfast, 

acordar. 

amolar, 

grind, 

ib. 

andar, 

walk,  to  go, 

(See  Table,") 

apacentar, 

graze, 

acertar. 

aporcar, 

dirt, 

acordar. 

aportar, 

arrive  at  port, 

ib. 

apostar, 

bet, 

ib. 

apretar, 

press, 

acertar. 

aprobar, 

approve, 

acordar. 

arrendar, 

rent, 

acertar. 

asentar, 

note  down, 

ib. 

asestar, 

take  aim, 

ib. 

asolar, 

destroy, 

acordar. 

asoldar, 

furnish  money, 

ib. 

asonar, 

accord  in  sound, 

ib. 

aterrar, 

terrify, 

acertar. 

atentar, 

attempt, 

ib. 

atestar, 

cram, 

ib. 

atravesar, 

cross,  to  pierce, 

ib. 

aventar, 

fan, 

ib. 

avergonzar, 

be  ashamed, 

acordar. 

bregar, 

contend, 

acertar. 

calentar, 

warm, 

ib. 

cegar, 

blind, 

ib. 

cerrar, 

to  shut,  to  close, 

ib. 

cimentai 

found, 

ib. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


339 


colar, 

to  strain  liquor, 

acordar. 

colgar, 

hang, 

ib. 

co  nenzar, 

commence, 

acertar. 

comprobar, 

corroborate, 

acordar. 

concertar, 

concert, 

acertar. 

concordar, 

agree, 

acordar. 

confesar, 

confess, 

acertar. 

consolar, 

comfort, 

acordar. 

consonar, 

agree  in  tone,  to  rhyme. 

ib. 

contar, 

count, 

ib. 

costar, 

cost, 

ib. 

dar 

give, 

(See  Table.) 

decentar, 

handsel, 

acertar. 

degollar, 

decapitate, 

acordar. 

dernonstrar, 

demonstrate, 

ib. 

denegar, 

refuse, 

acertar. 

denostrar, 

revile, 

acordar. 

derrengar, 

cripple, 

acertar. 

desacertar, 

mistake, 

ib. 

desacordar, 

be  discordant, 

acordar. 

desalentar, 

discourage, 

acertar. 

desapretar, 

loosen, 

ib. 

desaprobar, 

disapprove, 

acordar. 

desasosegar, 

disturb, 

acertar. 

desatentar, 

perplex, 

ib. 

descolgar, 

unhang, 

acordar. 

descollar, 

surpass, 

ib. 

desconcertar, 

disarrange, 

acertar. 

desconsolar, 

afflict, 

acordar. 

descontar, 

discount, 

ib. 

desencerrar, 

let  out,  or  loose, 

acertar. 

desengrosar, 

diminish  in  thickness, 

acordar. 

desenterrar, 

disinter, 

acertar. 

desflocar, 

ravel  out, 

acordar. 

desfogar, 

give  vent  to  passion, 

ib. 

deshelar, 

thaw, 

acertar 

desherrar, 

unshoe  horses, 

ib. 

desmembrar, 

dismember, 

ib. 

desolar, 

desolate, 

acordar 

340 

desollar, 
desovar, 


aespernar, 

despertar, 

desplegar, 

despoblar, 

desterrar, 

desvergonzar, 

dezmar, 

descordar, 

empedrar, 

empezar, 

emporcar, 

encensar, 

encerrar, 

encomendar, 

encontrar, 

encordar, 

encubertar, 

engrosar, 

enmendar, 

enrodar, 

ensangrentar, 

enterrar, 

errar,* 

escarmentar, 

esforzarse, 

estregar, 

forzar, 

fregar, 

gobernar, 

helar, 

berrar, 

holgar, 

bollar, 

infernar, 

invernar, 

*  This  verb 
Yerro,  yerras. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

to  flay, 

acordar. 

spawn, 

ib. 

cut  off  legs,  or  break  legs, 

acertar. 

awake, 

ib. 

unfold, 

ib. 

depopulate, 

acordar 

banish, 

acertar. 

be  impudent, 

acordar. 

tithe, 

acertar. 

disagree, 

acordar. 

pave, 

acertar. 

begin, 

ib. 

soil, 

acordar. 

cense, 

acertar. 

enclose, 

ib. 

recommend, 

ib. 

find,  to  meet, 

acordar. 

strings 

ib. 

cover  with  clothes, 

acertar. 

grow  stout, 

acordar. 

mend, 

acertar. 

break  on  the  wheel, 

acordar. 

stain  with  blood, 

acertar. 

bury, 

ib. 

err, 

ib. 

learn  by  experience, 

ib. 

endeavor, 

acordar. 

scour, 

acertar. 

force, 

acordar. 

rub,  to  scrub, 

acertar. 

govern, 

ib. 

freeze, 

ib. 

shoe  horses, 

ib. 

rest, 

acordar. 

trample, 

ib. 

provoke,  to  damn, 

acertar. 

winter, 

ib. 

has  the  following  tenses  and  persons  irregular  .  Ind.  Pre* 
yerra;  Subj.  Pres.  Yerre,  yerres,  yerre. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


341 


jugar, 

to  play, 

(See  Table.) 

manifested, 

manifest, 

acertar. 

mentar, 

mention, 

ib. 

merendar, 

take  a  collation, 

ib. 

mostrar, 

show, 

acordar. 

negar, 

deny, 

acertar. 

nevar, 

snow, 

ib. 

pensar, 

think, 

ib. 

perniquebrar, 

break  legs, 

ib. 

plegar, 

plait,  to  fold, 

ib. 

poblar, 

people, 

acordar. 

probar, 

prove, 

ib. 

quebrar, 

break, 

acertar. 

recomendar, 

recommend, 

ib. 

recordar, 

remind, 

acordar. 

recostar, 

recline, 

ib. 

reforzar, 

reinforce, 

ib. 

regar, 

water, 

acertar. 

regoldar, 

belch, 

acordar. 

remendar, 

mend, 

acertar. 

renegar, 

abjure, 

ib. 

renovar, 

renew, 

acordar. 

replegar, 

fall  back  from  a  position, 

acertar. 

reprobar, 

reprove, 

acordar. 

requebrar, 

cajole,  to  flatter, 

acertar. 

rescontrar, 

compensate, 

acordar. 

resollar, 

breathe, 

ib. 

resonar, 

resound, 

ib. 

reternblar, 

vibrate, 

acertar. 

retentar, 

threaten  with  a  relapse, 

ib. 

reventar, 

burst, 

ib. 

revolar, 

fly  again, 

acordar. 

revolcar, 

wallow, 

ib. 

rodar, 

roll, 

ib. 

rogar, 

pray, 

ib. 

segar, 

reap  corn, 

acertar 

sembrar, 

sow, 

ib. 

sentar, 

sit, 

ib. 

serrar, 

saw, 

ib. 

342 

ETYMOLOGY. 

solar, 

to  sole, 

acordar. 

soldar, 

solder, 

ib, 

soltar, 

let  go,  or  loose, 

ib. 

sonar, 

sound, 

ib. 

sonar, 

dream, 

ib. 

sosegar, 

tranquillize, 

acertar. 

soterrar, 

bury, 

ib. 

temblar, 

tremble, 

ib. 

tentar, 

tempt, 

ib. 

tostar, 

toast, 

acordar. 

trascolar, 

strain,  to  percolate, 

ib. 

trascordar, 

forget, 

ib. 

trasegar, 

decant, 

acertar. 

trasofiar, 

dream,  to  fancy, 

acordar. 

trocar, 

barter, 

ib. 

tronar, 

thunder, 

ib. 

tropezar, 

stumble, 

acertar. 

volar, 

fly, 

acordar. 

volcar, 

overset, 

ib. 

SECOND   CONJUGATION, 


Abastecer 

provide, 

aborrecer. 

aborrecer, 

hate, 

(See  Table.) 

absolver, 

absolve 

mover. 

absorver, 

absorb, 

ib. 

abstraer, 

abstract, 

traer. 

acaecer, 

happen, 

aborrecer. 

acontecer 

happen, 

ib. 

adolecer, 

be  seized  with  illness, 

ib 

adormecer, 

fall  asleep,  to  lull, 

ib. 

agradecer, 

be  thankful, 

ib. 

amanecer, 

dawn, 

ib. 

anochecer, 

grow  dark, 

ib. 

anteponer, 

prefer,  to  place  before, 

poner. 

antever, 

foresee, 

ver. 

aparecer, 

appear, 

aborrecer. 

apetecer, 

long  for, 

ib. 

ascender, 

ascend, 

atender. 

IEEEGULAB  VEKBS. 

34 

atender, 

to  attend, 

(See  Table.) 

atenerse, 

stand  to, 

tener. 

atraer, 

attract, 

traer. 

caber, 

contain,  etc., 

(See  Table.) 

caer, 

fall, 

ib. 

canecer, 

become  gray  headed, 

aborrecer. 

carecer, 

be  deficient, 

ib. 

cerner, 

sift, 

atender. 

cocer, 

boil, 

(See  Table.) 

compadecer, 

pity, 

aborrecer. 

comparecer, 

appear  before, 

ib. 

complacer, 

give  pleasure, 

ib. 

componer, 

compose, 

poner. 

condescender, 

condescend, 

ascender. 

condoler, 

condole, 

mover. 

conmover, 

excite  commotion, 

ib. 

conocer, 

know, 

aborrecer. 

contender, 

contend, 

atender. 

contener, 

contain, 

tener. 

contrahacer, 

counterfeit, 

hacer. 

contraer, 

contract, 

traer. 

convalecer, 

be  convalescent, 

aborrecer. 

crecer, 

grow, 

ib. 

decaer 

decay, 

caer. 

defender, 

defend. 

atender. 

demoler, 

demolish, 

mover. 

deponer, 

depose, 

poner. 

desaparecer, 

disappear, 

aborrecer. 

desatender, 

neglect, 

atender 

descender 

descend, 

ib. 

descomponer, 

decompose, 

poner. 

desconocer, 

disown, 

aborrecer. 

desentender, 

feign  ignorance,  mistake, 

"atender. 

desentorpecer, 

recover  from  numbness,  to 

reanimate, 

aborrecer. 

desenvolver, 

unroll, 

mover. 

desfallecer, 

pine, 

aborrecer. 

desflaquecer, 

become  emaciated, 

ib. 

desguarnecer, 

ungarnish, 

ib. 

344 

ETYMOLOGY. 

deshacer, 

to  undo, 

hacer. 

desobedecer, 

disobey, 

aborrecer. 

desplacer, 

displease, 

ib. 

destorcer, 

untwist, 

mover. 

desvanecer, 

vanish, 

aborrecer. 

detener, 

detain, 

tener. 

devolver, 

restore, 

mover. 

disolver, 

dissolve, 

ib. 

disponer, 

dispose, 

poner. 

distraer, 

distract,  to  amuse, 

traer. 

doler, 

ache, 

mover. 

dolerse, 

grieve, 

ib. 

embravecer, 

become  furious, 

aborrecer. 

embrutecer, 

become  brutal, 

ib. 

emplumecer, 

become  fledged, 

ib. 

empobrecer, 

impoverish, 

ib. 

encalvecer, 

become  bald, 

ib. 

encallecer, 

render  callous, 

ib. 

encarecer, 

enhance  the  value, 

ib. 

encender, 

light,  to  kindle, 

atender. 

encrudecer, 

become  raw, 

aborrecer. 

encruelecer, 

render  or  become  cruel, 

ib. 

endentecer, 

cut  the  teeth, 

ib. 

endurecer, 

harden, 

ib. 

enflaquecer, 

grow  lean,  or  weak, 

ib. 

enfurecer, 

become  furious, 

ib. 

engrandecer, 

aggrandize,  to  enlarge, 

ib. 

enloquecer, 

become  or  render  mad, 

ib. 

enmohecer, 

grow  mouldy, 

ib. 

enmudecer, 

become  dumb, 

ib. 

3nnegrecer, 

blacken, 

ib. 

ennoblecer, 

ennoble, 

ib. 

enrarecer, 

rarefy, 

ib. 

enriquecer, 

enrich, 

ib. 

ensoberbecer, 

become  haughty, 

ib. 

entallecer, 

sprout, 

ib. 

entender, 

understand, 

atender. 

enternecer, 

soften, 

aborrecex; 

eutorpecer, " 

benumb,  to  stupify, 

ib. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


345 


entretener, 

to  entertain, 

tener. 

entristecer, 

sadden, 

aborrecer. 

entullecer, 

cripple, 

ib. 

entumecer, 

swell, 

ib. 

envejecer, 

grow  old, 

ib. 

enverdecer, 

grow  green, 

ib. 

envolver, 

wrap, 

mover. 

equivaler, 

be  equivalent, 

valer. 

escarnecer, 

scoff, 

aborrecer. 

esclarecer, 

illuminate, 

ib. 

escocer, 

smart, 

cocer. 

establecer, 

establisk, 

aborrecer. 

estremecer, 

shudder, 

ib. 

esponer, 

expose, 

poner. 

estender, 

extend, 

ascender. 

estraer, 

extract, 

traer. 

fallecer, 

die, 

aborrecer. 

favorecer, 

favor, 

ib. 

feuecer, 

terminate, 

ib. 

fortalecer, 

fortify, 

ib. 

guarnecer, 

garnish, 

ib. 

hacer, 

make,  to  do, 

ib. 

heder, 

stink, 

atender. 

bender, 

split, 

ib. 

humedecer, 

moisten, 

aborrecer. 

imponer, 

impose, 

poner. 

indisponer, 

indispose, 

ib. 

Hover, 

rain, 

mover. 

mantener, 

maintain, 

tener. 

merecer, 

deserve, 

aborrecer. 

moler, 

grind, 

mover. 

morder, 

bite, 

ib. 

mover, 

move, 

(See  Table.) 

nacer, 

be  born, 

aborrecer. 

negrecer, 

grow  black, 

ib. 

obedecer, 

obey, 

ib. 

obscurecer, 

darken, 

ib. 

obtener, 

obtain, 

tener. 

ofrecer, 

offer, 

aborrecer. 

346 

ETYMOLOGY. 

oler, 

to  smell, 

(See  Table.) 

oponer, 

oppose, 

poner. 

pacer, 

graze, 

aborrecer. 

padecer, 

suffer, 

ib. 

parecer, 

seem, 

ib. 

pgrder, 

lose, 

atender. 

perecer, 

perish, 

aborrecer. 

pertenecer, 

belong, 

ib. 

poder, 

be  able 

(See  Table,  i 

poner, 

put,  to  place, 

ib. 

preponer, 

place  before, 

poner. 

presuponer, 

presuppose, 

ib. 

prevalecer, 

prevail, 

aborrecer. 

prever, 

foresee, 

ver. 

promover, 

promote, 

mover. 

proponer, 

propose, 

poner. 

querer, 

like,  to  be  •willing, 

(See  Table.) 

recaer, 

relapse, 

caer. 

recocer, 

re-boil, 

cocer. 

reconocer, 

acknowledge, 

aborrecer. 

reerecer, 

grow  again, 

ib. 

reflorecer, 

re-blossom, 

ib. 

rehacer, 

do  over  again, 

hacer. 

renianecer, 

remain, 

aborrecer. 

remorder, 

bite  repeatedly, 

mover* 

remover, 

remove, 

ib. 

reponer, 

replace, 

poner. 

resolver, 

resolve, 

mover. 

restablecer, 

re-establish, 

aborrecer. 

retener, 

retain, 

tener. 

retorcer 

twist,  to  sprain, 

mover. 

retraer, 

retract,  to  draw  back, 

traer. 

retrotraer, 

bring  about  what  has  hap- 

pened before, 

ib. 

rever, 

review, 

ver. 

reverdecer, 

grow  green  again, 

aborrecer. 

reverter, 

overflow, 

ascender. 

revolver, 

revolve, 

mover. 

saber, 

know, 

(Se*  Table.) 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


34? 


satisfacer, 

to  satisfy, 

liacer. 

sobreponer, 

place  over, 

poner. 

soler, 

be  wont, 

mover. 

sostener, 

sustain, 

tener. 

substraer, 

subtract, 

traer. 

supouer, 

suppose, 

poner. 

tender, 

spread  out, 

atender. 

tener, 

have,  to  bold, 

(See  Table.) 

torcer, 

twist, 

mover. 

traer, 

bring,  to  fetch, 

(See  Table.; 

trascender, 

transcend, 

atender. 

trasponer, 

transpose, 

poner. 

valer, 

be  worth, 

(See  Table.) 

ver, 

see, 

ib. 

verter, 

spill,  to  shed, 

atender. 

volver, 

return, 

mover, 

THIKD   CONJUGATION, 


A.dherir, 

adhere, 

sentir, 

adquirir, 

acquire, 

ib. 

advertir, 

advert, 

ib. 

asir, 

seize, 

(See  Table.) 

argiiir, 

argue, 

huir. 

arrepentir, 

repent, 

sentir. 

asentir, 

assent, 

ib. 

atribuir, 

attribute, 

huir. 

avenirse, 

agree, 

venir. 

bendecir, 

bless, 

decir. 

cefiir, 

gird, 

pedir. 

colegir, 

collect, 

ib. 

comedir, 

grow  moderate, 

ib. 

competir, 

compete, 

ib. 

concebir, 

conceive, 

pedir. 

concluir, 

conclude, 

huir. 

conducir, 

conduct,  to  conduce, 

(See  Table.) 

conferir, 

•confer, 

sentir. 

conseguir, 

obtain,  to  succeed, 

pedir. 

consentir, 

consent, 

sentir. 

348 

ETYMOLOGY. 

constituir, 

to  constitute, 

huir. 

constrenir, 

constrain, 

pedir. 

construir, 

construe, 

huir. 

contradecir, 

contradict, 

decir. 

contravenir, 

oppose, 

venir. 

contribuir, 

contribute, 

huir. 

controvertir, 

controvert, 

sentir. 

convenir, 

suit, 

venir. 

convertir, 

convert, 

sentir. 

correjir, 

correct, 

pedir. 

decir, 

say,  to  tell, 

(See  Table.) 

deducir, 

infer, 

conducir. 

deferir, 

defer, 

sentir. 

derretir, 

melt, 

pedir. 

desavenir, 

disagree, 

venir. 

descenir, 

ungird, 

pedir. 

descomedir, 

grow  rude,  unruly, 

ib. 

desconsentir, 

dissent, 

sentir. 

desdecir, 

retract, 

decir. 

desleir, 

dilute, 

pedir. 

deslucir, 

tarnish, 

lucir. 

desmentir, 

contradict, 

sentir. 

despedir, 

dismiss, 

pedir. 

despedirse, 

take  leave, 

ib. 

destefiir, 

discolor, 

ib. 

destruir, 

destroy, 

huir. 

diferir, 

differ,  to  defer, 

sentir. 

digerir, 

digest, 

ib. 

disnnnuir, 

diminish, 

huir. 

distribuir, 

distribute, 

ib. 

divertir, 

divert, 

sentir. 

dormir, 

sleep, 

(See  Tabic) 

elegir, 

elect, 

pedir. 

embestir, 

assail, 

ib. 

engreirsa, 

become  vain, 

ib. 

enlucir, 

whitewash,  to  scour  plate, 

lucir. 

entreoir, 

hear  distinctly, 

oir. 

envestir, 

invest, 

pedir. 

erguir, 

hold  up  the  head, 

sentir. 

IRREGULAR  VERBS. 


349 


estrefiir. 

to  produce  astringency, 

pedir. 

excluir, 

exclude, 

huir. 

expedir, 

expedite, 

pedir. 

fluir, 

flow, 

huir. 

freir, 

fry, 

pedir. 

geinir, 

moan, 

ib. 

heiiir, 

knead, 

ib. 

herir, 

wound, 

sentir. 

liervir, 

boil, 

ib. 

huir, 

flee, 

(See  Table.) 

imbuir, 

imbue, 

ib. 

impedir, 

impede, 

pedir. 

incluir, 

include, 

huir. 

inducir, 

induce, 

conducir. 

inferir, 

infer, 

sentir. 

ingerir, 

ingraft, 

ib. 

intervenir, 

intervene, 

venir. 

instituir, 

institute, 

huir. 

instruir, 

instruct, 

ib. 

introducir, 

introduce, 

conducir. 

invertir, 

invert, 

sentir. 

investir, 

invest, 

pedir. 

ir 

go, 

(See  Table. 

lucir, 

shine, 

ib. 

luir, 

wear  by  friction, 

huir. 

nialdecir, 

curse, 

decir. 

medir, 

measure, 

pedir. 

mentir, 

lie, 

sentir. 

xnorir, 

die, 

dormir. 

obstrtiir, 

obstruct, 

instruir. 

oir, 

hear, 

(See  Table.) 

pedir, 

ask,  to  beg, 

ib. 

perseguir, 

persecute, 

pedir. 

pervertir, 

pervert, 

sentir. 

podrir 

rot, 

(See  Table.) 

predecir, 

predict, 

decir. 

preferir, 

prefer, 

sentir. 

presentir, 

have  a  presentiment, 

ib. 

prevenir, 

prevent,  to  warn, 

venir. 

350 

ETYMOLOGY. 

producir, 

to  produce, 

conduoir. 

proferir, 

utter, 

sentir. 

proseguir, 

prosecute, 

pedir. 

prostituir, 

prostitute, 

huir. 

provenir, 

proceed  from, 

venir. 

tecluir, 

cloister, 

huir. 

reducir, 

reduce, 

conducir, 

referir, 

refer, 

sentir. 

regir, 

rule, 

pedir. 

reir, 

laugh, 

ib. 

rendir, 

yield, 

ib. 

reuir, 

quarrel,  to  scold, 

ib. 

repetir, 

repeat, 

ib. 

reproducir, 

reproduce, 

conducir. 

requerir, 

require, 

sentir. 

reseutir, 

resent, 

ib. 

restituir, 

restore, 

huir. 

retenir, 

dye  again, 

pedir. 

retribuir, 

compensate, 

huir. 

revestir, 

revest,  to  dress, 

pedir. 

salir, 

go  out,  to  come  out, 

(See  Table.) 

scducir, 

seduce, 

conducir. 

seguir, 

follow, 

pedir. 

sentir, 

feel, 

(See  Table.) 

servir, 

serve, 

pedir. 

sobresalir, 

surpass, 

salir. 

sobrevenir 

happen, 

venir. 

sonreirse, 

smile, 

pedir. 

Bubstituir, 

substitute, 

huir. 

sugerir, 

suggest, 

sentir. 

tefiir, 

dye, 

pedir. 

traducir, 

translate, 

conducir. 

venir, 

come, 

(See  TabhO 

vestir, 

dress, 

pedir. 

zaherir 

censure, 

eentir. 

ADVERBS.  353 


ADVEEBS. 


An  Adverb  is  an  indeclinable  part  of  speech  which  quali- 
fies the  meaning  of  a  verb,  a  participle,  and  even  of  another 
adverb  ;  for  instance,  leer  mat,  to  read  badly  ;  ciegamente 
apasionado,  blindly  passionate  ;  Men  heeho,  well  made  or  done. 
Sometimes  the  adverb  is  united  to  a  noun,  because  constant 
use  has  sanctioned  it ;  for  instance  when  we  say,  Carlos,  an- 
tes soldado  y  hoy  rey,  Charles,  formerly  a  soldier  and  now  a 
king ;  Alejandro,  siempre  heroe,  Alexander,  always  a  hero  ; 
ayer  comerciante  y  hoy  mendigo,  yesterday  a  merchant,  to-day 
a  beggar,  etc. 

Adverbs  are  divided  into  ten  classes,  viz  : 

1.  of  place.  5.  of  order.  8.  of  doubt. 

2.  of  time.  6.  of  affirmation  9.  of  interrogation. 

3.  of  quantity  7.  of  negation  10.  of  manner. 
4:   of  comparison. 

Most  of  the  English  adverbs  ending  in  ly,  are  formed  in 
Spanish,  by  adding  mente  to  adjectives  ;  as  cortes,  polite  ; 
'  cortesmente,  politely  ;  eomun,  common  ;  comunmente,  com- 
monly. Should  the  adjective  from  which  the  adverb  is 
derived,  have  two  terminations,  the  feminine  must  be  select- 
ed for  the  forming  of  the  adverb  ;  as,  alto,  alta,  altamenle, 
highly  ;  piadoso,  piadosa,  piadosamenle,  piously.  When  two 
or  more  adverbs  in  mente,  are  to  modify  the  same  verb,  all 
the  adverbs  lose  the  termination  mente,  except  the  last ;  as, 
el  habla  clara  y  elegantemente,  he  speaks  clearly  and  elegantly  ; 
cuando  calumnian  a  tu  amigo,  abierla  y  descaramente,  defiende 
su  causa,  when  thy  friend  is  calumniated,  openly  and  boldly 
defend  his  cause. 

OF   PLACE. 

Aqui,  here.  Debajo,  underneath. 

Alii,  ahi,  there.  Aba  jo,  down,  under. 

Alia,  yonder.  De  abajo,  from  below. 

Por  aqui,  this  way.  De  adelante, /rom  before. 

Hasta  aqui,  hitherto.  De  atras.  from  behind. 

Fuera,  out,  abroad.  Cerca,  a  la  mano,  nigh  at  hand 
Lejos  (de    lejos),  far   (afar   En  alguna  parte,  somewhere, 

fffi).  En  ninguna  parte,  nowhere. 


352 


ETYMOLOGY. 


Cerca,  near, 
Al  lado,  by  the  side. 
Aparte,  aside. 
Arriba,  above. 
Sobre,  over. 
Encima,  upon. 


En  cualquiera  parte,  anywhere, 
En  alguna  otra  parte,  some* 

where  else. 
En  otra  parte,  elseiohere. 
En  ninguna  otra  parte,   no* 

where  else. 


OF   TIME. 


Entonces,  then. 

Hoy,  to-day. 

Ayer,  yesterday. 

Cada  dia,  todos  los  dias,  every 
day. 

Ayer  mafiana,  yesterday  morn- 
ing. 

Ayer  tarde,  yesterday  evening. 

Anoche,  last  night. 

Mariana,  to-morrow. 

Pasado  mafiana,  the  day  after 
to-morrow. 

Mariana  en  la  noche,  to-mor- 
row night. 

El  otro  dia,  the  other  day. 

La  semana  pasada,  last  week. 

Ultimamente,  lately. 

Ya,  already. 

Aun,  dill,  yet. 

Luego,  presently. 

Prontamente,  puiclcly. 

En  breve,  brevemente,  shortly. 

Tarde,  late. 

Temprano,  early. 


Presto,  soon. 

Con  tiempo,  betimes. 

Antiguamente,  formerly. 

En  tiempos  atras,  heretofore. 

En  lo  sucesivo,  hereafter,  hence* 
forth. 

Siempre,  ever,  always, 

Nunca,  never. 

Pocas  vezes,  seldom. 

A  menudo,  often. 

Algunas  vezes  or  a  vezes, 
sometimes. 

De  cuando  en  cuando,  occa- 
sionally. 

De  tiempo  en  tiempo,  from 
time  to  time, 

De  vez  en  cuando,  now  and 
then. 

Antes,  before. 

Despues,  after. 

Desde,  si?ice. 

Mucho  tiempo  ha,  long  ago. 

Hasta,  till,  until. 

Continuamente,  continually. 


OF   QUANTITY. 


Mucho,  much. 
Demasiado,  too  much. 
Mas,  more. 
Poco,  little. 


Casi,  almost. 
Bastante,  enough. 
Harto,  sufficiently, 
Totalmente,  wholly. 


ADVEKBS.  353 


OF    COMPARISON. 


Mas  que,  more  than.  Antes  bien,  rather  more. 

Menos,  less.  Peor,  worse. 

Me]  or,  better.  Muy,  very. 

Del  misrao  modo,  likewise.  Con  mucho,  by  far. 

OF  ORDER. 

Primero,  first.  Confusamente,  confusedly. 

Sobre  todo,  above  all.  Indistintamente,    sin    distiu- 

Despues.  after.  cion,  indiscriminately. 
A  montones,  in  heaps. 

OF    AFFIRMATION. 

Si,  yes.  Seguramente,  certainly. 

Aun,  even.  De  todos  modos.  by  all  means. 

Sin  duda,  without  doubt.  Por  supuesto,  of  course. 
Ciertamente,  surely. 

OF   NEGATION. 

No,  no.  De  ningun  modo,  by  no  means. 

Ni,  nor.  De  ninguna  suerte,  in  no  wise, 


Tampoco,  neither. 


OF   DOUBT. 


Tal  vez,  quiza,  acaso,  perhaps.    Probablemente,  probably. 
Apenas,  scarcely.  Es  dudoso,  it  is  doubtful. 

OF    INTERROGATION. 

I  Adonde  ?  whither  ?  i  Cuando  ?  when  f 

^Donde?  ,;End6nde?  where?    ^Cuanto?  how  much  T 
i,  Cbmo  ?  how  ?  £  Por  que  ?  why  ? 

OF   MANNER. 

Bien,  well.  Kecio,  strongly, 

Mai,  badly.  Apriesa,  hastily, 

Asi,  thus.  Bajo,  lowly. 

Despacio,  slowly.  Presto,  quickly. 

Alto,  loudly.  Fuerteniente,  strongly. 

And  all  those  ending  in  mente. 


354 


ETYMOLOGY. 


ADVERBS  REQUIRING  de   BEFORE  THE  NOUNS. 

Acerca  de  ;  as,  acerca  de  lo  que  me  dijo,  concerning  what  hi 

told  me. 
A  cubierto  de  ;  as,  a  cubierto  de  la  lluvia,  under  shelter  from 

the  rain. 
Ademas  de  ;  as,  ademas  de  lo  que  01,  besides  what  I  heard. 
Al  lado  de  ;  as,  sientese  Vd.  al  lado  de  ella,  sit  down  by  her. 
Antes  de  ;  as,  antes  del  sermon,  before  the  sermon. 
Apesar  de  ;  as,  apesar  de  el,  in  spite  of  him. 
Cerca  de  ;  as,  cerca  de  casa,  near  home. 
Debajo  de  ;  as,  debajo  de  la  silla,  under  the  chair. 
Delante  de ;  as,  delante  del  rey,  before  the  king. 
Dentro  de ;  as,  dentro  de  la  iglesia,  within  or  inside  of  the 

church. 


PEEPOSITIONS. 

A' preposition  is  an  indeclinable  part  of  speech,  which  ex- 
presses the  relation  between  nouns  and  verbs. 

Prepositions  are  divided  into  seven  different  classes,  viz  ; 

1.  of  place.  4  of  exception.  6.  of  end. 

2.  of  time.  5.  of  opposition.         7.  of  causes. 

3.  of  union. 

Prepositions  of  place,  are  those  which  refer  to  a  place  or 
to  a  situation,  and  are  as  follows  : 


A,  to. 

Ante,  before  or  in  presence  of. 

De,  of  or  from. 

Hacia,  to  or  towards. 

Sobre,  upon  or  on. 

Desde,  from. 

Prepositions  of  time,  are  those  which  refer  to  time,  and 
arc  as  follows  : 


En,  in  or  at. 
Entre.  among,  between, 
Detras,  behind. 
Tras,  after. 
Enfrente,  opposite. 


A,  at. 

Antes,  before. 
En,  in  or  at. 
Despues,  afterwards. 


Mientras,  while. 
Desde,  since. 
Hasta,  until. 
Entre,  between. 


CONJUNCTIONS.  355 


Prepositions  of  union,  are  those  whose  meaning  is  to  unite  ; 
for  instance  ; 

Con,  with.  Al  par,  even. 

Junto,  close. 

Prepositions  of  exception,  are  : 

Escepto,  menos,  except  Salvo,  safe  or  except. 

Euera,  out  or  besides. 

Prepositions  of  opposition,  serve  to  express  opposition  in 
the  meaning  of  a  sentence  ;  as  : 

Contra,  against.  No  obstante,  notwithstanding. 

A  pesar,  in  spite  of. 

Prepositions  of  end,  are  used  to  express  a  final  object, 
and  they  are  : 

A,  at  or  to.  Para,  to  or  for,  in  order  to. 

Acerca,  about.  Para  con,  towards. 

Hacia,  towards.  En,  by  or  in. 

Prepositions  of  cause,  are  those  which  express  the  cause, 
the  origin,  the  instrument,  or  the  right  of  property  of  an 
object  or  of  a  person,  and  they  are  as  follows  : 

De,  of,  from.  Por,   by,  for,  on  account  or 

Con,  with.  through. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

A  Conjunction  is  an  indeclinable  part  of  speech,  which 
expresses  relation  between  two  phrases  or  sentences. 
Conjunctions  are  divided  into  nine  classes,  viz  : 

1.  Copulative.       4.  Conditional.       7.  Comparative. 

2.  Disjunctive.      5.  Casual.  8.  Conclusive. 

3.  Adversative.     6.  Continuative.     9.  Objective. 

1st.  Copulative  Conjunctions  are  those  which  indicates 
the  relation  of  conformity  or  equality  between  -two  sen- 
tences ;  they  are  as  follows  : 


556  ETYMOLOGY. 

Affirmative  :  y,  and.  No,  no  or  not. 

E,  and.  Tambien,  also. 

Negative  :   ni,  nor  or  neither.     Ademas,  moreover. 

2d.  Disjunctive  Conjunctions,  though  the  name  is  not 
sense,  because  if  it  is  a  conjunction  it  cannot  be  a  disjunc- 
tion, yet  we  must  submit  ourselves  to  the  general  accepta- 
tion of  the  word,  and  say  that  they  are  those  which  indi- 
cate alternative  or  division  ;  they  unite  sentences  but  dis- 
join the  meaning  or  idea  conveyed  in  the  two  members 
thereof,  viz  : 

O,  u,  or.  Tampoco,  neither. 

Ya,  ora,  sea,  bien  sea,  whether.     Mas  bien,  rather. 

3d.  Adversative  Conjunctions  are  those  which  express 
some  opposition  between  a  preceding  and  a  following  sen- 
tence, viz  : 

Mas,  pero,  but.  A  pesar,  in  spite. 

Aun  cuando,  even  if.  Aunque,  although. 

Sino,  but.  Sin  embargo,  con  todo,  how- 

Bien  que,  though.  ever. 

No  obstante,  nevertheless. 

4th.  Conditional  Conjunctions  are  those  which  express  a 
hypothesis  or  condition,  as  : 

Si,  if.  Dado  que,  granted  that. 

Como,  how.  A  menos  que,  a  no  ser  que, 

Con  tal  que,  provided.  unless. 

5th.  Casual  Conjunctions  are  those  which  precede  the  sen- 
tence, expressing  the  causes  of  what  had  been  said  in  the 
preceding  phrase,  and  are  as  follows  : 

Por,  by  or  for.  Pues,  since  or  for. 

Porque,  because.  Pues  que,  since} 

Por  tanto,  therefore. 

6th.  Continuative  Conjunctions  are  those  which  connect 
the  foregoing  sentence  with  that  which  follows  it ;  they  are 
the  following  : 

Pues,  supuesto  que,  since.  Asi  como,  so  as. 

Asi,  thus.  Con  que,  in  such  as. 


INTERJECTIONS.  357 

7th.  Comparative  Conjunctions  are  those  by  which  wo 
compare  a  preceding  sentence  with  that  which  follows  it, 
viz  : 

Asi,  as.  Como,  as  or  like. 

Asi  que,  as  soon  as.  Tal,  such. 

A  modo,  a  guisa,  in  a  manner  Cual,  as  it. 
or  as. 

8th.  Conclusive  Conjunctions  are  those  which  bring  a 
conclusion  from  the  meaning  of  a  sentence,  to  form  another 
phrase  ;  they  are  as  follows  : 

Luego,  then  or  as  soon  as.  Por  consiguiente,  consequent- 

Asi  pues,  con  que,  s^»  then.  ly. 

Por  tanto,  therefore.  De  aqui,  thence. 

Pues,  then,  therefore. 

9th.  Objective  Conjunction  is  that  which  connects  two 
sentences,  when  that  which  follows  is  governed  by  that 
which  preceds  it.     There  is  only  one,  viz  : 

Que,  that. 


INTERJECTIONS. 

The  note  of  interrogation,  as  well  as  that  of  exclamation, 
is  placed,  in  Spanish,  at  the  beginning  and  at  the  end;  that 
at  the  beginning  is  written  inverted  ;  as  : 

I  Es  asi  ?  Is  it  so  ? 

The  interjections  most  in  use  in  Spanish  are  : 

Ah  ?  alas  !  \  Chito  !  be  silent  ! 

Oh  !  oh  !  j  Hurra  !    hurrah  ! 

O  !  o  !  Pardiez  !  zounds  ! 

Ay  !  alas  !  \  Caspita !  good  gracious  ! 

Ea  !  behold  !  \  Ojala  !  would  to  God  ! 

Eh!  iol  jCaramba!  d / 

Ola!  hallo!  i  Salve  !  health  to  thee  ! 

j  Tate  \   ah!  \  Viva  !  long  life,  hurrah  ' 
;  Vaya  I  well ! 


358  •  ETYMOLOGY. 

Interjections  are  indeclinable  words,  and  are  used  to  give 
expression  to  some  affection  of  the  soul,  as  astonishment, 
sadness,  joy,  indignation,  etc. ;  as  : 

j  Ah !  que  lastima !  Alas  !  what  a  pity  ! 

j  Ay !  que  pena !  Alas  !  what  a  grief  1 

\  Oh !  que  gozo !  Oh  !  what  a  joy  I 

j  Ay  de  mi  I  Wo  to  me  ! 

j  Eh  !  i  Ola  !  serve  to  call  attention. 

/  Eh  !  is  used  in  order  to  show  that  we  have  not  under- 
stood or  heard  well  what  has  been  said  ;  as, 

j  Eh  !  i  que  decia  Vd.?    Eh  !  what  were  you  saying? 

I  Ola  I  is  used  to  express  our  admiration  or  astonishment ; 
as, 

\  Ola  j  i  cuando  volvio  Vd.?     Hallo  !  when  did  you  return  ? 

I  Ea  !  is  used  to  infuse  courage  : 

;  Ea !  hi  jo  mio,  animo !     Behold  !  my  son,  courage  ! 

I  Tate !  is  used  to  prevent  anything  being  done  or  said 
and  also  denotes  surprise  : 

j  Tate  !  aqui  viene !     Ah  I  here  he  comes  ! 

I  Vaya  !  to  exhort,  encourage,  and  approve  : 

jVaya!  que  es  tiempo  de  levantarse !    Well!  it  is  time  to  rise! 

I  Vive  Dios !  as  God  exists  !      \  Viva  la  Constitueion !    Long 
j  Vive  el  cielo  !  by  Heavens  !        live  the  Constitution  ! 
I  Valgame  Dios !  God  help  me  !  \  Salve  !  monte  de  Cuba  bien- 
jViva   el  rey!    Long  live  the     hadado!  Health  to  thee!  happy 
King !  mountain  of  Cuba!  etc. 


ARTICLES.  359 


SYNTAX. 

AKTICLES. 

L  The  Article  agrees  with  the  substantive  to  which  it 
belongs,  in  gender  and  number ;  and  the  following  require 
the  definite  article,  viz  :  the  names  of  arts,  sciences,  metals, 
virtues,  vices,  dignities,  professions,  employments,  weight 
and  measure,  countries,  mountains,  rivers,  winds  and  sea- 
sons, the  hours  of  the  day,  proper  nouns  when  used  as 
common  nouns,  and  generally  before  the  days  of  the  week. 

Exceptions  :  The  names  of  countries  lose  the  article  when 
preceded  by  a  preposition  ;  but  the  following  always  re- 
quire it  :  del  Japon  ;  en  el  Peru  ;  de  la  China  ;  por  el  Canada; 
a  la  Habana  ;  .de  la  Florida  a  la  Barbada  ;  para  el  Ferrol ;  por 
la  CorufLa;  del  Brasil ;  al  Faraguay.  Some  never  take  an 
article,  because  they  have  the  same  name  as  their  capitals, 
as  Genova,  ydpoles,  Venecia,  Corfu,  etc. 

II.  The  following  do  not  require  the  definite  article,  viz  : 
possessive  pronouns,  numeral  and  ordinal  adjectives,  when 
they  follow  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong  ;  proper  names 
of  persons,  cities,  towns,  and  months  ;  titles  of  books,  chap- 
ters, etc. ;  those  which  signify  a  part  of  the  whole,  and  nouns 
in  apposition. 

Examples  :  Mi  casa,  Libro  Segundo,  Jorje  Cuarto,  Milton, 
Londres,  Boston,  Eneru,  Gramdtica  Castellana,  Reflexiones  Fi- 
losbftcas,  Deme  Vd.  came,  Washington,  capital  de  los  Fstados 
TJnidos. 

III.  The  indefinite  article,  un  (mas.),  una  (fern.),  a  or  an, 
is  used  as  in  English,  except  in  the  following  cases,  in  which 
it  is  omitted,  viz. :  after  que  or  tal,  expressing  surprise  ; 
sometimes  after  como,  and  is  also  omitted  before  nouns 
which  express  the  dignity,  profession,  country,  etc.,  of  the 
nominative  of  the  verb  ;  and  before  cien   and  mil. 

Examples  :  /  Qui  lastima  !  lo  hizo  como  hombre  ;  es  empera- 
dor,  era  medico,  eres  irlandes,  cien  casas,  mil  soldados. 


360  SYNTAX. 


SUBSTANTIVES. 


I.  The  possessive  case  is  always  expressed  by  de  ;  and 
all  the  phrases,  such  as  John's  brother,  my  father's  house, 
the  king's  palace,  etc.,  must  be  rendered  in  Spanish  by  de, 
in  the  following  manner  ;  el  hermano  de  Juan,  la  casa  de  mi 
padre,  el  palaeio  del  rey. 

II.  Nouns  of  multitude  require  the  verb  sometimes  in 
the  singular  and  sometimes  in  the  plural.  The  most  general 
rule  that  can  be  given  is  :  if  the  noun  expresses  an  assem- 
blage of  persons  or  things  of  a  determinate  number,  such 
as  ejercito,  army,  rebaflo,  cattle,  arboleda.  a  place  full  of  trees, 
etc.,  it  requires  the  verb  to  be  in  the  singular  ;  but  if  the 
noun  expresses  an  indefinite  or  indeterminate  quantity  of 
persons  or  things,  such  as  multitud,  Iropa  infinidad,  etc.,  it 
requires  the  verb  to  be  in  the  plural  ;  the  former  prefixing 
the  definite  and  the  latter  the  indefinite  article. 

Examples  :  El  ejercito  entro  en  la  ciudad.  Entraron  en  la 
ciudad  una  multitud,  una  tropa,  una  multitud  de  soldados. 

ADJECTIVES. 

I.  Adjectives  agree  with  their  substantives  in  gender 
and  number  ;  and  the  following  generally  precede  their  sub- 
stantives, viz. ;  those  used  as  epithets  ;  those  which  express 
the  natural  quality  of  their  substantives  ;  those  accented  on 
the  antepenultimate  ;  the  cardinal  numbers  ;  and  the  irre- 
gular comparatives,  together  with  mucho,  poco,  mismo,  todo, 
oada,  demas,  cuanto. 

Examples  :  El  valeroso  jefe;  el  frio  hielo  ;  mucho  dinero , 
el  mismo  caballo  ;  veinte  puertas  ;  el  peor  hombre  ;  cada  seflora. 

II.  Adjectives  referring  to  two  or  more  substantives  sin- 
gular, should  be  in  the  plural,  and  ought  to  agree  with  the 
more  worthy  gender,  viz.:  the  masculine  in  preference  to 
the  feminine.  Bat  when  there  are  two  or  more  substantives 
plural,  the  adjective  ought  to  agree  with  the  nearest  substan 
tive. 

Examples  :  El  hijo  y  la  hija  son  bien  educados ;  sus  esperan- 
zas  y  ternores  eran  vanos  ;  sus  ternores  y  esperanzas  eran  vanas  ; 
eran  vanos  sus  ternores  y  espeianzas ;  eran  vanas  sus  esperanzas 
y  ternores. 


PRONOUNS.  361 

HI.  Adjectives  which  in  English  are  followed  by  of ,  from, 
with,  and  sometimes  in,  also  by  by  expressing  excess  are  gen- 
erally followed  in  Spanish  by  de.  Those  which  in  English 
are  followed  by  to  or  for,  are  followed  in  Spanish  by  a  or 
para,  and  sometimes  by  con. 

Examples  :  Perturbado  de  temor;  agudo  de  injenio  ;  es  mayor 
que  yo  de  un  aflo  ;  pronto  a  decir  la  verdad  ;  bueno  para  comer  ; 
ingrato  con  su  padre  ;  urbano  con  todos. 

IV.  As ....  as  ;  or  so ....  as  ;  are  expressed  tan ....  como; 
more ....  than,  mas ....  que  ;  less ....  than,  menos ....  que  ; 
so  much,  or  as  much,  so  many,  or  as  many. . .  .as,  tanto  (de- 
clinable) .  . .  .como ;  the  more  or  the  less,  are  expressed  by 
mas,  menos  but  if  they  are  both  expressed  in  one  sentence, 
or  either  of  them  expressed  twice,  and  the  one  is  a  conse- 
quence of  the  other,  it  should  be  cuanto  mas  or  menos  before 
the  former  verb,  and  mas  or  menos,  or  tanto  mas  or  tanto  me- 
nos before  the  latter. 

Examples  :  Soy  tan  junto  como  Vd.;  soy  mas  justo  que  Vd.; 
tiene  tantas  manzanas  como  Vd.;  aquello  es  to  que  m°nos  quiero  ; 
cuanto  mas  le  ceo,  menos  le  amo,  or  tanto  menos  le  amo  ;  cuanto 
menos  estudio,  menos  aprendo,  or  tanto  menos  aprendo. 

V.  Numeral  adjectives  require  de  before  nouns  and  ad- 
jectives of  dimension,,  and  in  this  case  to  be  is  translated  by 
tener. 

Examples  :  Esta  casa  tiene  cuarenta  pies  de  alto,  de  altura  or 
de  elevacion  ;  un  pozo  de  doscientos pies  de  hondo,  or  deprofun- 
didad. 

PKONOUNS. 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS. 

I.  The  nominative  case  of  pronouns  is  seldom  expressed, 
unless  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  ;  the  reason  is,  that  the 
nominative  is  sufficiently  well  known  in  most  tenses  by  the 
termination  of  the  verb.  In  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect 
Indicative,  and  in  all  the  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive,  it  may 
be  sometimes  necessary  to  express  yo  or  el,  ella,  ello,  in  order 
to  distinguish  the  persons,  as  in  those  tenses  the  first  and 


302  SYNTAX. 

third  persons  singular  are  always  the  san..e  ;  but  even  in 
those  tenses  and  persons,  the  pronoun  should  not  be  ex- 
pressed if  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of  could  be  distinctly 
known  without  the  pronoun. 

II.  "When  the  action  of  the  verb  terminates  in  the  per- 
sonal pronoun,  that  pronoun  is  in  the  accusative  or  object- 
ive case  ;  when  the  action  of  the  verb  does  not  thus  termin- 
ate, but  implies  advantage  or  disadvantage,  the  pronoun  is 
in  the  dative  case.  The  former  answers  to  the  question 
what  or  whom  ;  the  latter  to  the  question  to  what  or  to  whom. 

III.  The  dative  case  is  expressed  before  the  verb  in  the 
following  manner  : 

Singular.     To  me,  me;  to  thee,  te;  to  him,  to  her,  to  it,  le. 
Plural.     To  us,  nos ;  to  you,  os ;  to  them,  les. 
The  dative  case  is  expressed  after  the  verb  in  the  follow- 
ing manner  : 

Singular.  Plural. 

1.  To  me,  d  mi.  1.  To  us,  a  nosotros  (m.),  as  (f.) 

2.  To  thee,  &U.  2.   To  you,  d  vosotros  (m.)  as  (f.) 

3.  To  him,  or  to  it,  (m.)  a  el.  \  Q    m   ^        \dellos,  (m.) 
To  her,  or  to  it,  {I)  delta.  ]  6'  10tnem>  |  'a  ellas,  (f.) 

To  it  (n),  a  ello  or  a  lo.  (The  neuter  has  no  plural.) 

Examples  :  Se  me  did  ;'  se  did  d  mi,  etc. 

In  the  singular,  when  to  it  refers  to  no  particular  object, 
but  to  a  circumstance,  or  sentence,  or  adjective  used  in  the 
neuter,  it  is  expressed  d  ello,  d  lo ;  but  when  to  it  refers  to 
an  object,  the  pronouns  a  el,  m.,  d  ella,  f.,  must  be  used  ac- 
cording to  the  gender  of  the  substantive  to  which  it  refers ; 
the  reason  is,  that  in  Spanish,  all  substantives  are  either 
masculine  or  femenine. 

IV.  The  accusative  case  is  expressed  before  the  verb  in 
the  following  manner : 

Sing. — 1.  Me,  me.  PluraL — 1.  Us,  nos. 

2.  Thee,  te.  2.  You,  os. 

3.  Him  or  it  (m.),le(l);  q    Th        j  los.  (m.) 

her  or  it  (f.),  la.  d*  lhem'  {  las.  (f.) 

It  (n.),  lo. 

1.  Some  eminent  authors  use  lo  in  the  accusative  masculine,  for  Ai?a 
oi  it,  masculine,  instead  of  le.     It  is  also  much  used  in  speaking. 


PRONOUNS.  Sbd 

After  the  verb  the  accusative  is  expressed  as  the  dative 
after  the  verb. 

V.  The  dative  and  accusative  cases  are  some  times  twice 
expressed  for  the  sake  of  greater  energy  ;  sometimes  twice 
before  the  verb,  sometimes  once  before,  and  once  after  the 
verb. 

Examples :  Ella  me  amaba  a  mi,  she  loved  me  ;  a  mi  me 
consla  la  verdad,  to  me  the  truth  is  evident ;  se  alabaron  a  s% 
mismos,  they  praised  themselves. 

VI.  When  both  the  dative  and  accusative  are  governed 
by  the  same  verb,  there  is  sometimes  a  manner  of  express- 
ing the  dative  different  from  what  is  mentioned  in  Rale  IV. ; 
thus,  I  give  him,  is  le  doy,  and  I  give  it,  is  lo  doy ;  but,  I 
give  it  to  him,  must  be  expressed  se  lo  doy.  In  expressions 
of  this  kind,  se  means  to  him,  to  her,  or  to  them.  When 
the  dative  and  accusative  are  governed  by  the  same  verb, 
the  dative  precedes  the  accusative.-  The  following  list  com- 
prises those  combinations  of  datives  and  accusatives  which 
are  most  frequently  used  : 

,  *     !■  him  or  it,  to  me.  .  e ,  e   [  him  or  it,  to  thee. 

me  lo  )  le  lo    ) 

me  la       her  or  it,  to  me.         le  la       her  or  it,  to  thee. 

Z.  t" } them  to  me-        fe  ^ } them  to  thee- 

nos  le    )  ,  .  .,  ,  os  le    }  ,  ■  ... 

noslo    J  ^m  or  it  to  us.  ^    j  him  or  it,  to  you. 

nos  la     her  or  it,  to  us.  os  la       her  or  it,  to  you. 

nos  los )  , i         ,  os  los  )  J-,        , 

•08  te  I them  t0  ua  os  las  \  them  t0  y°u- 

,       !•  him  or  it,  to  him,  to  her,  or  to  them. 

se  la       her  or  it,  to  him,  to  her,  or  to  them. 

se  los  1 

se  las  \  ^nem'  ^°  him>  to  her,  or  to  them. 

In  using  the  above  pronouns,  the  accusative  should  al- 
ways agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  thing  spoken 
of ;  thus  in  speaking  of  a  book  (libro)  we  say,  se  lo  ha  en- 
viado  ;  but  in  speaking  of  a  table  (mesa),  se  la  ha  enviado. 
It  must  be  observed  that  se  is  used  in  the  above  manner 


364  SYNTAX. 

only  when  the  person  to  whom  it  refers  is  distinctly  known; 
but  if  there  would  be  any  doubt  as  to  the  person  or  persona 
to  whom  it  refers,  it  must  be  expressed  after  the  verb,  by  a 
el,  to  him ;  a  ella,  to  her  ;  a  ellos,  m.,  a  ellas,  f.,  to  them  ;  the 
accusative  remaining  before  the  verb. 

Examples  :  lo  enviare  a  el  y  no  a  ellos.  If  there  were  only 
one  person  or  several  persons  to  whom  it  should  be  sent, 
and  if  the  person  or  persons  were  distinctly  known,  so  that 
no  doubt  could  be  entertained,  then  se  indicates  that  per- 
son or  those  persons.  The  following  examples  will  exhibit 
the  manner  of  using  those  pronouns  : 
I  had  a  table,but  I  gave  it  to  them.     Yo  tenia  una  mesa,  mas 

la  di  a  ellos,  m.,  a  ellas,  f.;  or  se  la  di,  m.  and  f. 
I  shall  have  a  hat,  but  I  will  give  it  to  him — to  her.    Tendre 

un  sombrero,  mas  lo  dare  a  el — a  ella,  (se  lo  dare,  m.  and  t) 
I  found  the  fan,  and  sent  it  to  her.     Halle  el  abanico,  y  se  to 

envie  ;  or  lo  envie  a  ella. 
1  found  his  coat,  and  sent  it  to  him.    Halle  su  casaca,  y  se  la 

envie ;  or  la  envie  a  el. 
He  had  ten  books,  but  he  gave  them  to  them,     til  tenia  diez 

lihros,  mas  se  los  did ;  or  los  did  a  ellos,  in.,  a  ellas,  f. 
Where  are  her  gowns?     The  servant  has  sent  them  to  her. 

I  En  dbnde  estdn  sits  batas  f     La  criada  se  las  ha  enviado  ; 

or  tus  ha  enviado  u  ella. 

YII  Vuestra  mereed  or  vuesa  merced ;  Your  Honor  or 
Your  Worship  ;  Sir,  Madam,  is  generally  contracted,  and 
pronounced  usted,  and  written  V.,  or  Vd.  The  plurals  will 
consequently  be  vuestras  mercedes,  vuesas  mercedes,  ustedes, 
VV.,  or  Vds.  The  verb  agrees  with  them  in  the  third  per- 
son ;  they  are  used  in  speaking  to  both  males  and  females, 
and  the  adjective  agrees  in  gender  with  the  person  spoken 
to. 

This  is  the  most  polite  manner  of  speaking.  The  second 
person  plural  is  not  so  polite ;  and  the  second  person  sin- 
gular is  used  in  speaking  to  servants  and  children,  also  to 
brothers  and  sisters,  and  others  with  whom  we  are  on  terms 
of  very  great  intimacy  ;  but  children  generally  address  their 
parents  by  Vds. 

VIII.  The  personal  pronouns  may  be  placed  either  before 


PRONOUNS.  365 

or  after  tlie  verb,  unless  the  verb  have  its  nominative  ex- 
pressed before  it. 

Examples:  Yo  tenia;  lemato;  tenia  yo ;  mat'ole;  losbuenos 
me  aman,  and  not  aman  me. 

Between  two  verbs,  the  latter  of  which  is  governed  by  the 
former,  the  pronouns  may  be  placed  before  both,  or  after 
either  of  them. 

Examples:  Le  voy  a  buscar;  voyle  a  buscar,  or  voy  a  bus- 
carle. 

The  pronouns,  mi,  ti,  si,  with  their  prepositions,  are  placed 
either  before  or  after  the  verb. 

Examples :  Be  mi  hacen,  or  dicen  de  mi;  para  ti  viene  la, 
carta,  or  viene  para  ti  la  carta;  a  mi  ttegb  la  noticia,  or  llegd  a 
mi  la  noticia. 

IX.  In  the  following  phrases,  the  English  impersonal 
verb,  it  is,  must  be  rendered  in  Spanish  by  ser,  agreeing 
with  the  nominative  which  follows;  as,  it  is  I,  soy  yo;  it  is 
he,  es  d;  it  is  we,  somos  nosotros;  it  is  you,  sois  vosotros,  or 
#s  Vd.,  singular,  son  Vds.,  plural ;  it  is  they,  son  ellos. 

X.  The  following  expressions,  myself,  thyself,  &c,  when 
in  the  nominative,  are  always  rendered  by  mismo,  or  misma, 
singular,  mismos,  or  mismas,  plural,  according  to  the  gender 
and  number  of  the  person  or  persons.  If  a  female  spe&ks, 
she  says  yo  misma;  but  a  male  person  says  yo  mismo.  In 
speaking  to  a  female,  we  say  Vd.  misma,  or  tu  misma;  it  a 
man,  Vd.  mismo,  or  tu  mismo.     The  rest  are  :. 

Mas.  Fern. 

M  mismo,  he  himself.  Ella  misma,  she  herself. 

ellos  mismos,  they  themselves,  ellas  mismas,  they  themselves. 
nosotros  mismos,  we  ourselves,  nosolras  minmas,  we  ourselves. 
vosrtros   mismos,    you    your-  vosotras    mismas,    you    your- 
selves, selves. 
Vfc.  mismos,  you  yourselves.     Vds.  mismas,  you  yourseb  es. 

POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS. 

I.  As  the  most  polite  mode  of  speaking  is  by  usted  and. 
ustedes,  which  are  third  person,  we  must,  when  speaking 


SYNTAX. 

thus,  use  su  and  sus  ;  also,  suyo,  suyos,  suya,  suyas,  when  we 
wish  to  say  your. 

Examples  :  How  are  your  sisters  ?  g  Como  estdn  sus  her- 
manas  de  Vd.  t  My  houses  are  larger  than  yours  ;  Mis  casas 
eon  mas  grandes  que  las  suyas  de  Vd.,  or  que  las  de  Vd.  I  live 
in  his,  or  their  house  ;  Habito  en  su  casa.  Observe,  that  the 
possessives  always  agree  with  the  thing  possessed,  and  not 
with  the  possessor. 

II.  It  is  mine,  is  expressed  es  mio,  or  es  mia,  according  to 
the  gender  of  the  thing  possessed.  They  are  mine,  son 
mios,  or  son  mias.     The  others  are  : 

It  is  thine,  es  tuyo  or  tuya;  they  are  thine,  son  tuyos  or  tuyas. 
It  is  his  or  hers,  es  suyo  or  suya;  es  de  el,  or  de  ella. 
They  are  his  or  hers,  son  suyos  or  suyas;  son  de  61  or  de  ella. 
It  is  ours,  es  nuestro  or  nueslra;  they  are  ours,  son  nuestros 

or  nuestras. 
It  is  yours,  es  vuestro  or  vuestra;  es  de  Vd.  or  de  Vds. 
It  is  theirs,  es  suyo  or  suya;  es  de  ellos  or  de  ellas. 
They  are  yours,  son  vuestros  or  vuestras;  son  deVd.  or  de  Vds. 
They  are  theirs,  son  suyos  or  suyas;  son  de  ellos  or  de  ellas. 

The  above  shows  the  manner  of  using  the  possessives 
with  the  verb  to  be,  in  Spanish,  ser ;  but  when  they  are 
Used  without  the  verb  ser,  the  article  must  be  prefixed. 

Examples  :  My  father  and  thine  ;  Mi  padre  y  el  tuyo. 
Your  brothers  and  mine  ;  Sus  hermanos,  or  los  hermanos  de 
Vd.  or  Vds.  y  el  mio,  sing.,  or  los  mios,  plur.  His  children 
and  ours  ;  Sus  hijos  y  los  nuest7*os.  Her  sisters  and  yours  ; 
Sus  hermanas,  or  las  hermanas  de  ella  y  las  de  Vd.,  or  de  Vds. 
My  hens  are  fatter  than  his,  hers,  or  theirs  ;  Mis  gallinas 
estdn  mas  gordas  que  las  suyas. 

III.  In  speaking  of  the  parts  of  the  body,  the  Spaniards 
use  the  definite  article  where  the  English  use  the  possessive 
pronoun ;  but  this  occurs  only  where  there  could  be  no 
doubt  as  to  the  person  of  whose  body  we  are  speaking. 

Examples  :  He  broke  my  leg  ;  Me  rompib  la  pierna.  My 
finger  is  sore ;  Me  duele  el  dedo.  They  pierced  his  body  ; 
Le  atravesaron  el  cuerpo.  They  stole  our  flocks  ;  Nos  robaron 
los  rebaflos. 


PKONOUNS.  .    367 

In  these  examples  the  pupil  should  observe,  that  the  pro- 
noun expressing  the  person  of  whose  body  we  speak,  is  pre- 
fixed to  the  verb  in  the  dative  case.  Where  loss  or  damage 
is  sustained  it  is  similarly  expressed,  as  in  the  last  example. 

RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

I.  In  English,  the  pronouns  who,  whom,  ivhich  and  that, 
are  of  both  numbers,  and  consequently  remain  unchanged, 
whether  they  relate  to  one  individual  or  many  ;  as,  the  man 
who  walks,  the  men  who  walk,  &c. ;  but  in  Spanish  they  all 
admit  a  plural  form,  except  que,  which  never  varies.  The 
relatives  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  antecedent, 
or  noun  to  which  they  relate  ;  as,  el  hombre  al  cual  lo  di,  las 
mujeres  a  las  cuales  lo  di.  Quien,  who,  relates  to  persons 
only ;  que  and  cual,  (who,  which  or  that),  to  both  persons  and 
things  ;  cuyo,  whose,  relate?  to  an  antecedent  which  may  be 
either  a  person  or  a  thing,  and  it  agrees  in  gender  and  num- 
ber, not  with  the  antecedent,  but  with  another  noun,  before 
which  it  is  commonly  placed.  Quien  and  cuyo  never  re- 
quire the  definite  article  ;  que  requires  it  but  very  seldom  ; 
and  cual  requires  it  almost  always.  Cual  indicates  the  gen- 
der and  number  of  its  antecedent ;  quien  indicates  only  the 
number;  que  and  cuyo  indicate  neither  the  gender  nor 
number  of  the  latter  noun  with  which  it  agrees. 

Examples  :  El  hombre  a  quien  liable;  el  hombre  or  la  mujer 
con  quien  sefue  ;  los  hombres  or  las  mujeres  con  quienes  sefue  ; 
el  hombre  que  pasea ;  la  mesa  que  rompieron;  la  que  me  habla 
(she  who  speaks  to  me)  ;  los  or  las  que  me  hablan  (they  who 
speak  to  me)  ;  el  hombre  or  la  mujer,  or  los  hombres  or  las 
mujeres  que  amo  ;  el  sujeto  del  cual  yo  hablaba;  el  hermano  del 
cual,  la  hermana  de  las  cuales,  las  hermanas  de  las  cuales  habld 
mi  padre,-  un  templo  cuya  elevacion  era  grande;  los  hombres 
cuyo  injenio  es  agudo :  las  casas  cuyos  corredores  son  largos; 
las  seftoritas  cuya  hermosura  me  encantb;  la  nifta  cuyos  zapatoa 
se  perdieron. 

II.  The  following  will  exhibit  the  manner  of  rendering 
any  of  the  English  relatives  into  Spanish  : 

Sing,  que,  quien,  (m.  &  f.),  el  cual  (m.)  la  cual,  (f.) 
Who,  nom.  -^Plur.  que,  quienes,  (m.  &  f.)  los  cuales,  (m.)  las 
cuales,  (f.) 


368  .  SYNTAX. 

'Sing,  que,  a  quien,  (m.  &  f.,  al  cual,  (m.)  a  Id 

Whom,  ace.  i  -n-,  V  v'        ,       0   ,  N  ,  7  7       ,      x 

'  rlur.  que,  a  quienes,  (m.  &  t.)  a  los  cuales,  (m.) 

a  las  cuales,  (£.) 

To  whom,  dat., — same  as  ace.  except  that  que  is  not  used. 

(  Sing,  gwe,  (m.  &  f.),  el  cual,  (m.),  la  cual,  (f.) 

"Which,  or  that,  -jPlur.  ^we,  (m.  &  f.),  tos  cuales,  (m.),   /as 

(  cuales,  (f.) 

The  dative,  when  applied  to  things,  is  the  same  as  when 
applied  to  persons,  except  that  quien  is  not  used,  and  que 
becomes  a  que.  The  genitive  of  all  are  formed  by  adding  de 
to  the  nominative.  The  pupil  should  observe,  that  in  Eng- 
lish the  word  that,  is  frequently  used  for  who  or  whom,  as 
well  as  for  which.  It  will  be  necessary,  therefore,  to  ex- 
amine whether  it  would  make  good  sense  in  English,  to  sub- 
stitute who  whom,  or  which,  and  after  discovering  the  one 
with  which  the  sense  would  be  correct,  the  above  table  will 
render  the  translation  perfectly  easy.  Que  is  used  in  Span- 
ish much  in  the  same  way  that  that  is  used  in  English. 

Examples  :  The  man  that  walks,  or  the  man  who  walks  ; 
el  hombre  que  pasea.  The  girl  that  I  love,  or  whom  I  love  ; 
la  muchacha  que  amo,  or  a  quien  amo.  The  means  that  were 
taken,  or  which  were  taken  ;  los  medios  que  se  tomaron. 

Quien  is  never  used  in  the  nominative  except  as  an  inter- 
rogative Who  and  whom  are  generally  rendered  by  que,  if 
it  immediately  follow  its  antecedent ;  if  not,  who — el  cual ; 
whom — a  quien. 

III.  The  relatives  are  called  interrogatives  when  they  are 
used  in  asking  questions.  The  question  who?  is  always 
asked  by  quien,  singular,  quienes,  plural.  The  question  what  ? 
is  asked  by  qui,  singular  and  plural,  unless  the  verb  to  be 
separates  it  from  the  noun  to  which  it  belongs  ;  in  the 
latter  case  it  is  rendered  cual  singular,  cuales  pluraL  The 
question  whose?  is  asked  by  de  quien  ? 

Examples  :  i  Quien  es  este  ?  $  Quienes  lo  han  visto  ?  &  Que 
hizo  Yd.  ?  I  Que  mirito  tiene  el  ?  i  Que  cosas  han  hecho  ? 
iCuhlfuela  consecuencia  ?    $  Guales  son  las  consecuenciasf 


PRONOUNS.  369 




hbro  f 

IV.  Lo  que,  that  which,  or  what,  is  used  in  speaking  of 
something  indefinite.     It  is  always  in  the  singular. 

Examples  :  La  virtud  es  lo  que  mas  me  (junta.  Todo  lo  qne 
tengo  es  poco. 

DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 

The  demonstrative  pronoun  that,  may  be  rendered  iu 
Spanish  either  by  ese  or  aquel ;  but  not  indiscriminately. 
Ese  denotes  an  object  at  a  moderate  distance  from  the 
speaker  ;  aquel,  an  object  that  is  more  remote.  When  this 
and  that  refer  to  two  preceding  nouns,  this  is  rendered  by 
esle,  and  that  by  aquel. 

Examples  :  Esos  drboles  me  gustan  mueho,  pero  aquellos  me 
gutian  mas.  El  dinero  y  los  libros  son  ambos  utiles;  estos  para 
hacernos  sabios,  y  aquel  para  proporcionarnos  lujo. 

INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 

Some  of  the  indefinite  or  indeterminate  pronouns  were 
omitted  in  the  Etymology,  as  the  words  of  which  they  are 
composed  may  be  known  by  translating,  and  their  use  is 
much  the  same  as  in  English.  Observe,  however,  the  fol- 
lowing.— Some  have  no  plural,  and  are  the  same  in  both 
genders  ;  as,  dlguicn,  nadie,  algo,  nada,  quienquiera,  cualquiera  : 
some  have  no  singular  ;  as,  umbos,  dmbas,  varios,  varias,  en- 
trdmbos,  entrdmbas :  tal  and  cualquiera  have  the  same  termi- 
nation for  both  genders,  and  make,  in  the  plural,  tales,  cua- 
lesquiera.  All  the  rest  form  the  feminine  and  plural  accord- 
ing to  the  rules  of  adjectives.  The  following  must  be  trans- 
lated differently  in  the  singular  and  plural  :  uno,  una,  one, 
unos,  unas,  some,  mucho,  mueha,  much,  muchos  viuchas, 
many ;  poco,  poca,  little,  pocos,  pocas,  few ;  uno  d  otro,  each 
other,  unos  d  otros,  one  another  ;  ww  y  otro,  etc.,  both  ;  n% 
uno  ni  otro,  etc.,  neither  ;  cada  uno,  coda  una,  each  or  every 
Dne.     Alguno,  some  one,  ninguno,  no  one,  lose  the  last  letter 


370  SYNTAX. 

before  a  noun  masculin  and  singular  (1),  and  in  plural  are 

translated  some. 

VEEBS. 

USE   OF   THE   TENSES. 
INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

The  present  and  future  are  used  in  the  same  manner  in 
Spanish  as  in  English. 

The  imperfect  represents  either  an  unfinished  action,  or 
one  which  signifies  continuation  of  time.  It  may  always  be 
used  when  was  or  were,  with  the  present  participle,  can  be 
used  in  English. 

Examples  :  Cenaba  yo  cuando  entro  mi  hermano ;  I  was 
supping,  etc.  Los  romanos  cuUivaban  las  artes ;  cultivated 
(continued  to  cultivate)  the  arts. 

The  perfect  is  used  when  we  speak  of  an  action  entirely 
past. 

Examples  :  El  afto  pasado  edifique  una  casa.  Ayer  perdi  a 
mi  madre. 

The  perfect  compound  is  used  much  in  the  same  manner 
as  in  English  ;  and  is  composed  of  the  Present  Indicative 
of  haber,  and  the  past  participle. 

The  pluperfect  has  a  double  form  in  Spanish,  one  or  the 
other  of  which  must  be  used  whenever  the  same  tense  is 
in  English.  One  form  of  this  tense  (which  is  most  com- 
monly used),  is  composed  of  the  Perfect  Indicative  of  haber, 
and  past  participle.  The  former  should  always  be  used, 
except  preceded  by  one  of  the  following  adverbs  of  time 
viz.:  cuando,  despues  que,  asi  que,  no  bien,  etc.;  as,  luego  \ue  le 
hube  visto. 

The  future  compound  is  used  in  Spanish  as  in  English  ; 
as,  habrd  almorzado,  he  or  she  will  have  breakfasted. 

(1)  The  same  is  to  be  observed  of  the  objectives  buer,o,  malo,  primero, 
and  postrero  Tercero  and  grande  may  be  used,  the  former  without  the 
last  letter,  the  latter  without  the  last  syllable.  Santo  before  a  proper  name 
loses  the  last  syllable.  Cieuto  loses  the  last  syllable  before  a  noun  and 
before  nil. 


VEltBS.  871 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

In  this  Mood  the  learner  cannot  be  guided  so  much  by 
l,he  time  implied  by  the  verb,  as  by  the  preceding  verb  oi 
conjunction,  by  which  the  tenses  of  this  mood  are  commonly 
governed.  It  will  therefore  be  necessary  here,  and  in  treat- 
ing of  the  Infinitive,  to  introduce  the  regimen  or  govern- 
ment of  verbs,  in  order  to  show  when  verbs  are  required  to 
be  in  the  Subjunctive  or  Infinitive,  and  to  point  out  when 
and  under  what  circumstances  the  several  tenses  of  those 
moods  ought  to  be  used.  As  this  is  one  of  the  most  difficult 
parts  of  Spanish  Grammar,  it  will  claim  our  particular  at- 
tention. 

There  are  three  general  observations  which  ought  to  be 
attended  to.  1st.  The  Subjunctive  is  always  used  when 
anything  conditional,  contingent  or  doubtful  is  implied. 
2d.  All  the  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive,  except  the  imperfect, 
are  governed  by  some  preceding  verb  or  conjunction. 
8d.  The  termination  ra  being  common  to  both  the  perfect 
and  the  conditional,  when  it  is  used  for  the  latter  it  is  gov- 
erned by  no  preceding  word,  and  may,  like  the  conditional, 
begin  a  sentence  ;  but  when  used  for  the  perfect,  it  is  gov- 
erned in  the  same  manner  as  that  tense. 

The  present  is  almost  always  preceded  by  some  conjunc- 
tion expressing  contingency  or  doubt,  such  as  :  que,  aunque, 
bien  que,  a  menos  or  a  no  ser  que,  antes  que,  en  caso  que,  para 
que,  por  tal  que,  puede  ser  que,  hasta  que,  con  tal  que,  sea  que, 
sin  que,  etc.,  in  which  it  will  be  observed  that  que  is  used  in 
all  those  conjunctions  where  contingency  etc.,  are  implied. 
Of  those,  que  is  the  most  frequently  used,  and  it  is  generally 
preceded  by  a  verb  in  the  present  or  future  of  the  Indica- 
tive. When  this  tense  is  governed  by  any  other  conjunction 
than  que,  such  conjunction  may  begin  a  sentence  or  phrase 
without  being  preceded  by  a  verb.  This  tense  is  as  fre- 
quently translated  in  English  by  the  present  or  future  indi- 
cative, as  by  the  sign  may,  which  must  not  be  an  invariable 
guide  in  our  translation. 

Examples  :  Desea  que  yo  se  lo  de;  deseard  que  yo  se  lo  de. 
Aunque  los  soldados  sean  dcsarmados;  en  caso  que  Ikgue.     Es- 


372  SYNTAX. 

pero  que  este  Yd.  bueno,  I  hope  you  are  well ;   iemo  que  no 
venga  su  padre  de  Vd.,  I  fear  your  father  will  not  come. 

Observe,  that,  in  free  translations,  que  may  be  frequently 
omitted,  as  in  the  above  examples  ;  and  in  translating  all 
euch  phrases  as:  I  wish  he  may  go,  she  fears  he  will  be  pun- 
ished, we  think  he  is  safe,  the  word  que,  that,  must  be  in- 
serted in  Spanish  ;  thus,  quiero  que  vaya,  I  wish  that  he  may 
go  ;  teme  que  sea  castigado,  she  fears  that  he  may  be  punish- 
ed ;  pensamos  que  este  salvo,  we  think  that  he  may  be  safe. 

The  imperfect  or  conditional,  is  the  only  tense  in  this 
mood  which  can  begin  a  sentence  without  being  preceded 
by  a  conjunction  or  another  verb  ;  it  is  translated  by  the 
English  potential  would,  and  sometimes  should;  but  the 
latter  can  be  used  only  in  the  1st  person  singular  and  plural. 

Examples :   Yo  amaria  el  juego  si I  would  love  or  I 

should  love  play  if £l  le  malaria  si he  would  kill 

him  if ... . 

Sometimes  this  tense  is  preceded  by  que  or  «,  but  it  is 
always  in  cases  where  inclination  is  implied,  which  is  the 
distinguishing  characteristic  of  this  tense.  Si,  thus  used,  is 
equivalent  to  whether. 

Examples  :  Me  prometib  que  vendria  ;  that  he  would  come 
(inclination).  Me  preguntb  si  escribiria  ;  if  (whether)  I 
would  write  (inclination). 

The  termination  ra  may  always  be  used  for  ria,  except  in 
sentences  similar  to  the  last  two  examples.  The  former  two 
examples  might  with  equal  propriety  stand  thus  :  Yo  amara 
el  juego  ;  el  le  matara. 

The  perfect  is  always  subjunctive,  that  is,  subjoined  01 
placed  after  some  verb  or  conjunction.  With  a  conjunction, 
such  as  si,  aunque,  sino,  etc.,  or  an  interjection  expressing 
desire,  it  may  begin  a  sentence  ;  but  it  is  much  more  fre- 
quently governed  by  a  verb  followed  by  que.  The  preceding 
verb  is  generally  in  the  imperfect,  perfect,  pluperfect,  or  fu- 
ture Indicative.  The  termination  se  is  moreused  than  ra, 
after  cuando,  antes  que,  donde,  cuanto,  el  que,  etc.,  implying 
contingency  ;  but  after  si  and  aunque,  ra  is  more  used  than 


VEKBS.  373 

m.  The  English  signs  of  this  tense  are  might  a.icl  should 
(but  never  would)  ;  however,  it  is  frequently  translated  by 
the  perfect  Indicative,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  present  is 
translated  by  the  present  Indicative.  Thist  ake  place  gener- 
ally after  conjunctions,  but  especially  after  si  and  aunque. 

Examples  :  Si  yo  conociera  or  conociese  las  personas,  if  I 
knew  the  persons  ;  aunque  me  suplicara  or  suplicase,  though 
he  might  beseech  me,  or  should  beseech  me  ;  me  dijo  que 
viniera  or  viniese,  he  told  me  to  come  ;  suplieaban  aljuez  que 
oyer  a,  or  para  que  oyese  sua  descargos,  they  entreated  the  judge 
to  hear,  or  that  he  should  hear  their  defence. 

The  future  is  used  when  we  use  the  future  Indicative, 
preceded  by  when  or  if.  This  tense  may  be  rendered  by 
ivill,  shall,  or  should.  If  si  and  cuando,  when  used  with  the 
perfect,  do  not  always  apply  to  past  time,  they  never  apply 
to  a  future  time,  as  when  used  with  this  tense. 

Examples  :  Cuando  yo  bebiere  el  vino,  when  I  shall  drink 
the  wine  (not  cuando  bebere)  ;  si  me  diere,  if  he  will  give  me 
(not  si  me  dar)d;  si  el  edijicare  las  casas,  if  he  should  build 
the  houses  (not  edificard). 

The  compound  tenses  in  the  Subjunctive  are  formed  by 
prefixing  to  the  past  participle  the  tenses  of  haber,  in  the 
Subjunctive.  The  rules  for  the  use  of  these  tenses  is  the 
same  as  those  for  the  simple  ones.  They  are  never  used 
unless  the  English  verb  be  preceded  by  have  or  had  ;  as, 
quiero  que  venga,  I  wish  he  may  come  ;  aunque  hay  a  venido, 
although  he  may  have  come. 

The  following  examples  will  explain  the  use  of  those 
tenses  :  and  in  order  to  render  them  more  intelligible,  I 
shall  make  use  of  the  same  verbs  which  in  the  foregoing  ex- 
ample were  used  in  their  simple  tenses. 

Present  Compound. 
Espero  que  haya  escrito,  I  hope  he  may  have  written. 

Aunque  haya  ido,  Though  he  may  have  gone. 

Imperfect  Compound. 
Yo  habria  or  hubiera  amado  el  I  would  have  loved  play,  if . ., 

juego,  si. . . . 


374  SYNTAX. 

Me  aseguro  que  habna  or  hu-  He  assured  me  that  lie  would 
biera  venido,  si ... .  have  come,  if ... . 

Perfect  Compound. 
Me  dijo  que  habna  or  hubiera  He  told  me  that  he  might  or 
venido,  si  hubiese  or  hubiera       should  have  come,  if  he  had 
conocido  las  pei'sonas,  known  the  persons. 

Future  Compound. 
Cuando  yo  hubiere  bebido  el  When  I  shall  have  drank  the 

vino,  wine. 

Si  el  hubiere  edificado  las  casas.  If  he  will  have  built  the  houses. 

If  these  examples  be  compared  with  the  simple  tenses, 
their  use  and  regimen  will  be  found  exactly  the  same. 

From  the  foregoing  observations  it  appears  evident  that 
the  termination  ra  is  of  more  frequent  use  than  ria,  or  set 
as  it  is  used  for  both,  bat  it  is  oftener  used  for  se  than  for 
ria.  Ria  can  never  be  used  for  se,  nor  se  for  ria;  as  there  is 
a  material  difference  between — dijo  que  el  soldado  vendria, 
and — dijo  que  el  soldado  viniese  ;  the  former  that  the  soldier 
would  come,  the  latter  that  the  soldier  should  come;  the 
former  denoting  inclination  on  the  part  of  the  soldier,  the 
latter  implying  an  obligation  to  come,  whether  with  or  with- 
out his  inclination. 

The  following  rules  will  be  necessary  to  complete  our  ob- 
servations on  the  regimen  of  this  Mood.  It  is  a  general  rule, 
that  when  the  signification  of  the  governing  or  governed 
verbs  does  not  refer  to  the  person  or  thing  which  is  the 
nominative  of  the  first,  the  second  is  governed  in  the  Indi- 
cative or  Subjunctive  with  the  conjunction  que ;  as,  deseo 
que  aprendas,  la  casa  parece  que  amenaza  ruina.  If  the  first 
verb  is  in  the  future  Indicative,  it  governs  the  second  verb 
with  que  in  the  present  or  perfect  Subjunctive  ;  as,  habrd 
pretendido  que  le  dejm  or  dejasen  en  UbeHad.  The  verbs  decir 
and  pensar,  and  all  of  like  meaning,  as  declarar,  manifesfar, 
esponer,  concebir,  imajinar,  and  mandar,  ordenar,  prescribir, 
if  they  are  in  the  Indicative,  and  govern  verbs  whose  actions 
refer  to  them  and  their  nominative,  the  second  verb  will 
also  be  in  the  Indicative,  and  in  any  tense  ;  as  digo  que  voy1 


VEKBS.  375 

que  iba,  que  ir£,  etc.  But  if  the  second  verb  does  not  refer 
to  the  nominative  of  the  first,  the  second  will  be  in  the  Sub- 
junctive ;  and  observe,  if  the  first  is  in  the  present,  the  sec- 
ond will  be  in  the  future  Indicative,  or  present  Subjunctive  ; 
as,  imajino,  creo,  or  picnso  que  se  sentencie  or  sentenciard  la 
causa  en  mi  favor.  But  if  the  first  is  in  any  past  tense  of 
the  Indicative  or  future  compound  Indicative,  the  second 
will  be  in  the  Conditional ;  as,  creia,  juzgo,  habrd  pensado  que 
le  pedirian  alguna  Jianza. 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

This  Mood  is  used  in  the  same  manner  as  in  English. 
Although  the  2d.  person  singular  and  plural  are  not  the 
same  as  the  Subjunctive  present,  yet  if  there  be  a  negation, 
the  Subjunctive  present  must  be  used  in  those  persons  also. 
The  reciprocal  pronouns  which  belong  to  reflective  verbs, 
and  the  datives  and  accusatives  of  personal  pronouns  which 
precede  the  verb,  must  follow  the  Imperative  when  it  is  af- 
firmative, and  precede  it  when  it  is  negative.  The  first  and 
second  person  plural  Imperative  of  reflective  verbs,  lose  the 
final  s  and  d  before  the  reciprocal  pronouns  nos  and  08,  re- 
spectively, when  they  follow  the  verb. 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

When  two  verbs  are  used  in  a  sentence,  if  the  signification 
of  the  latter  refer  to  the  nominative  of  the  former,  the  latter 
is  commonly  pint  in  the  Infinitive,  either  with  or  without  a 
preposition.  The  Infinitive  has  no  preposition  when  it  is 
governed  by  any  of  the  following  verbs  :  deber,  declarar, 
dejar,  desear,  digimrse,  creer,  entender,  enviar,  esperar,  hacer, 
parecer,  pretender,  poder,  querer,  saber,  ver,  and  some  others. 
The  Infinitive  has  de  before  it  when  it  can  be  expressed  in 
English  by  the  present  participle,  with  of  or  from  prefixed, 
and  sometimes  by,  wilh,  and  in  ;  also  when  it  is  governed  by 
verbs  signifying  abstaining,  ceasing,  depriving,  and  finishing, 
and  when  it  is  governed  by  a  noun.  The  Infinitive  has  a. 
before  it  when  it  is  governed  by  verbs  signifying  to  dare,  to 
begin,  to  teach,  to  learn,  to  exhort,  to  desire,  to  invite,  to 
prepare,  to  assist,  to  compel,  etc.  The  Infinitive  takes,  para, 
when  for  or  in  order  could  be  prefixed  before  the  English 


376  SYNTAX. 

Infinitive.  "When  without,  in,  or  by,  are  followed  by  the 
present  participle  in  English,  the  Spanish  will  be  in  the  In- 
finitive, with  sin,  en,  or  por,  prefixed.  The  English  Infini- 
tive is  often  rendered  by  the  Indicative  or  Subjunctive  with 
que. 

The  datives  and  accusatives  which  follow  the  Imperative, 
follow  also  the  Infinitive,  whether  it  be  affirmative  or  nega- 
tive ;  as,  no  quiso  ddrselo ;  pretendib  habermelos  hecho.  Some- 
times there  are  three  verbs  together  without  any  preposi- 
tion ;  as,  quiso  hacer  correr  el  caballo,  he  wished  to  make  the 
horse  run ;  mandb  hacer  venir  el  coche,  he  ordered  the  coach 
to  come.  Haber  de,  or  tener  que,  with  the  Infinitive,  are  used 
to  express  a  future  action  which  is  to  be  done  ;  as,  he  de  es- 
cribir,  or  tengo  que  escribir  una  carta,  I  have  to  write  a  letter. 

GERUND    AND    PARTICIPLE. 

The  Gerund  is  equivalent  to  the  Present  Participle  in 
English  ;  and  when  it  is  expressed  absolutely,  thus  :  George 
fighting,  Mary  singing,  the  Gerund  stands  first :  peleando 
Jorje,  canlando  Maria.  It  is  always  indeclinable.  With  eslar 
it  is  sometimes  used  thus  :  estoy  peleando,  I  am  fighting  ; 
ella  estaba  canlando,  she  was  singing  ;  which  are  equivalent 
to,  yo  peleaba,  ella  cantaba.  The  Past-  Participle  is  indeclina- 
ble after  haber,  unless  it  be  used  with  ser  in  conjugating 
passive  verbs  ;  in  which  case  the  Participle  admits  of  plural 
and  feminine,  like  adjectives,  and  agrees  with  the  nomina- 
tive of  the  passive  verb.  Gerunds  and  Participles  govern 
the  same  cases  as  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived. 
The  Gerund  is  sometimes  elegantly  understood.  When 
tener  is  used  as  an  auxiliary,  the  Past  Participle  agrees  with 
the  accusative  case. 

Can,  Could,  Might,  Will,  Would,  and  Shoidd. 

I.  Those  words  are  sometimes  not  signs  of  the  tenses  of 
the  verbs  with  which  they  are  used,  but  distinct  verbs,  b}' 
which  the  following  verb  is  to  be  governed,  according  to  the  » 
rules  already  given.  When  can  and  may,  might,  could,  ivould 
and  should,  can  be  indiscriminately  used  for  each  other,  they 
must  be  expressed  by  some  tense  of  the  verb  with  which 


VERBS.  '611 

they  are  joined  ;  and  this  tense  may  be  known  by  the  rules 
for  the  bse  of  the  tenses.  But  when  power  or  ability  is  em- 
phatically expressed,  poder  should  be  used  ;  when  wish  or 
inclination  is  emphatically  expressed,  querer  should  be  used; 
and  deber  when  obligation  or  duty  is  emphatically  expressed. 

II.  When.' can,  could,  or  might,  could  be  changed  into  the 
verb  to  be  able,  followed  by  an  Infinitive,  it  must  be  express- 
ed in  Spanish  by  poder,  followed  by  the  Infinitive  of  the  fol- 
lowing verb  ;  can  by  the  present  Indicative  or  Subjunctive, 
could  and  might  by  the  imperfect  or  perfect  of  the  Indica- 
tive or  Subjunctive  ;  and  the  manner  to  ascertain  what 
tense  to  use,  is  to  discover  what  tense  of  to  be  able  would 
make  good  sense  in  English,  and  then  render  that  tense  in 
Spanish  by  the  rules  given  in  the  Use  of  the  Tenses. 

Examples  :  You  can  write,  Vd.  puede  escribir  ;  if  I  could 
oblige  you,  si  pudiera  complacer  a  Vd.  ;  you  could  have  done 
it,  Vd.  hubiera  podido  hacerlo  ;  I  do  not  think  you  could,  no 
creo  que  pudiese  Vd. /  I  could  have  done  that  yesterday,  po- 
dia haber  hecho  eso  ayer  ;  I  could  not,  no  podia  or  pude  ;  you 
might  have  written  a  letter  to  me,  Vd.  hubiera  podido  escri- 
birme  una  carta ;  you  might  have  been  deceived,  Vd.  podria 
haJjer  estado  engaflado. 

III.  When  ivill  and  would  could  be  changed  into  the  verb 
to  wish,  or  to  be  ivilling,  it  must  be  translated  by  querer,  and 
the  tense  must  be  discovered  in  the  same  manner  as  direct- 
ed for  poder. 

Examples  :  Because  I  wont,  or  because  I  will  not,  porque 
no  quiero.  Will  you  have  houses  or  land  ?  i  Quiere  Vd. 
tener  casas  6  terrenosf  I  will  have  houses,  but  he  would  have 
land,  yo  quiero  tener  casas,  mas  el  quisiera  tener  terrenos;  he 
would  grasp  all,  el  quisiera  abarcar  todo;  I  could  do  it  if  I 
would,  yo  to  pudiera  hacer  si  quisiese. 

IV.  When  should  could  be  expressed  by  would,  it  is  com- 
monly a  sign  of  the  imperfect  Subjunctive ;  when  it  could 
be  expressed  by  might,  it  is  commonly  a  sign  of  the  perfect 
Subjunctive  ;  and  when  it  could  be  expressed  by  shall  or  will, 
or  when  it  refers  to  a  future  action,  it  is  commonly  in  the 


o78  SYNTAX. 

future  Subjunctive ;  but,  as  before  observed,  when  duty  is 
emphatically  expressed,  it  must  be  rendered  by  deber.  Duty 
is  always  understood,  if  it  would  make  sense  in  English  with 
the  defective  verb  ought,  followed  by  the  Infinitive  of  the 
annexed  verb.  The  tense  in  which  to  put  deber,  must  be 
discovered  by  the  Use  of  the  Tenses. 

Examples :  I  should  go  if  I  had  my  hat,  yo  iria  si  tu- 
viese  mi  sombrero;  he  ordered  that  they  should  be  silent, 
ordenb  que  callasen;  provided  he  should  come,  con  tat  que 
venga ;  if  he  should  die,  si  muriere  ;  you  should  go,  Yd.  de- 
beria  irse  ;  I  should  have  gone  yesterday,  yo  debt  haberme  ido 
ayer ;  we  should  love  our  enemies,  debemos  amar  a  nuestros 
enemigos. 

VERBS    ACTIVE,    PASSIVE,    NEUTER,    REFLECTIVE,  AND    IMPERSONAL. 

I.  Two  or  more  nouns,  or  pronouns,  in  the  singular,  re- 
quire the  verb  to  be  in  the  singular  when  joined  by  the  con- 
junction b,  and  plural  when  joined  by  y ;  as,  la  madre  6  la 
hija  vendrd;  la  madre  y  la  hija  vendrdn.  When  two  or  more 
nouns,  or  pronouns  of  different  numbers,  are  connected  by 
a  disjunctive  conjunction,  such  as  b,  sino,  &c,  the  verb 
agrees  with  the  last ;  as,  que  ellos  6  Pedro  venga,  whether 
they  or  Peter  come.  The  verb  agrees  with  the  first  rather 
than  with  the  second,  and  with  the  second  rather  than  with 
the  third  person  ;  as,  yo  y  tit,  comeremos  ;  tu  y  Juan  vendreis. 

II.  Active  verbs  govern  the  noun,  or  pronoun  in  the  ac- 
cusative, with  the  preposition  a  when  the  accusative  termi- 
nates in  a  person,  and  without  it  when  it  terminates  in  a 
thing  ;  as,  amar  a  Dios,  aborrecer  el  vicio.  They  also  govern 
other  verbs  in  the  Infinitive,  either  with  or  without  a  pre- 
position ;  as,  quiero  estudiar;  exhorto  a  estudiar. 

III.  Verbs  which  signify  plenty  or  want,  care  or  negligence 
remembrance  or  forgelfulness,  praising  or  blaming,  loading, 
filling  or  unloading,  binding  or  releasing,  jeering,  mocking  or 
jesting,  reviving  or  depriving,  pitying,  repenting,  absolving, 
using,  and  in  gen  eral  all  those  which  in  English  are  followed 
by  of,  from,  which,  or  by,  are  followed  by  de  or  en. 


VERBS.  379 

IV.  Verbs  implying  acquisition  or  loss,  advantage  or  dis- 
advantage, and  requiring  in  English  to,  for,  or  from,  are  fol 
lowed  by  a.  This  rule  includes  verbs  meaning  buying,  bor- 
rowing, and  taking  away,  with  their  contrapositions,  and 
many  others. 

V.  Passive  verbs  are  formed  by  ser,  and  sometimes  by 
estar  ;  and  haber  is  used  to  form  the  compound  tenses,  as  in 
active  verbs.  In  the  3d.  person,  if  the  Nominative  be  not  a 
person,  the  passive  is  generally  formed  by  prefixing  the 
reciprocal  pronoun  s^,  itself,  themselves,  etc.  When  ser  or 
estar  are  used,  the  past  Participle  is  declinable,  and  agrees 
with  the  nominative. 

The  following  examples  will  exhibit  the  manner  of  chang- 
ing the  active  into  the  passive,  with  or  without  negation  : 

Act.  Aff. — I  love  handsome  young  ladies  ;   amo  a  las  senori- 
tas  hermosas. 
Neg. — I  do  not  love  handsome  young  ladies  ;  no  amo  a 
las  senoritas  hermosas. 

Pas.  Aff. — Handsome  young  ladies  are  loved  by  me  ;  las  se- 
ftoritas  hermosas  son  amadou  por  mi. 
Neg. — Las  sefloritas  hermosas  no  son  amadas  por  mi. 

Act. — The  boy  should  study  his  lessons  ;  el  muehacho  debe 
estudiar  sus  lecciones. 

Pas. — The  lessons  should  be  studied  by  the  boy ;  se  deben 
estudiar  las  lecciones  por  el  muehacho. 

Act. — Los  sabios  no  pierden  el  tiempo. 

Pas. — El  tiempo  no  se  pierde  por  los  sabios. 

Act. — They  have  refused  us  the  favor  ;  nos  han  rehusado  el 
favor. 

Pas. — We  have  been  refused  the  favor  ;  el  favor  se  ha  rehu- 
sado a  nosotros,  or  se  nos  ha  rehusado  el  favor. 

Pas. — Though  the  books  may  have  been  burned  ;  aunque  se 
hay  an  quemado  los  libros. 

Pas. — The  cities  would  be  burned  ;  se  quemarian  las  ciuda- 
des. 

Pas.- — The  cities  would  have  been  burned     se  habrian  quema- 
do las  ciudades. 

Pas. — Though  the  women  are  protected,  or  may  be  protect- 
ed ;  ar/nque  se  proteja  a  las  mujeres. 


380  SYNTAX. 

Pas. — Though  the  women  were  protected  ;  aunque  se  prjte 

jiese  a  las  mujerts. 
Pas. — If  the  women  had  been  protected  ;  'si  se  hubiese  prote 

jido  a  las  mujeres. 
Pas. — If  the  women  should  be  protected  ;  si  se  hubiere  pro- 

tejido  a  las  mujere-s. 
Pas. — If  they  had  been  protected  ;  si  se  les  hubiese  protejido 

VI.  Any  active  verb  may  become  reflective  by  prefixing 
the  pronoun  in  the  accusative  case  ;  this  pronoun  must  be 
of  the  same  person  as  the  nominative  of  the  verb  ;  as,  me  ■ 
amo,  el  hombre  se  ama.  But  there  are  verbs  which  are  always 
reflective  ;  such  as,  se  mofa  de  su  hermano,  he  mocks  his 
brother  ;  me  adhiero  a  la  opinion  de  Vd.,  I  adhere  to  your 
opinion  ;  nos  gusta  escribir,  we  are  fond  of  writing.  Reci- 
procal verbs  govern  others  in  the  Infinitive,  some  with  a, 
and  some  with  de ;  as,  me  arrepiento  de  haberle  hablado  ;  se 
quejaba  de  trabajar  tanto  ;  os  acostumbrais  a  trabajar  ;  se  atremo 
dpelear.  Those  which  take  a  before  the  Infinitive  will  have 
it  before  a  noun  ;  the  same  with  regard  to  de;  as,  se  arre- 
piente  de  su  conducta  ;  se  acojio  a  sagrado. 

VII.  The  pupil  was  informed  in  the  personal  Pronouns, 
rule  VI,  that  when  a  dative  and  accusative  are  governed  by 
the  same  verb,  the  dative  precedes  the  accusative.  This  is 
a  general  rule,  except  when  the  verb  is  reflective,  and  then 
the  reciprocal  pronoun  (which  is  always  in  the  accusative,) 
precedes  the  dative,  as  may  be  seen  in  the  following  exam- 
ples : 

I  discovered  myself  to  him,  Me  le  descnbri,  or  me  descubri 
or  I  have  discovered,  etc.         a  el ;  me  le  he  descubierto,  or 

me  he  descubierto  a  el. 

He  discovered  himself  to  me.  Se  me  deseubrio,  or  se  descubrio 

a  mi. 

I  wish  to  discover  myself  to  Deseo  descubrirmele,  or  descu- 
him,  or  to  her.  brirme  a  el,  or  a  ella. 

They  discovered  themselves  Se  nos  descubrie7°on,  or  se  descur 
to  us.  brieron  a  nosotros. 

He  opposed  him.  Se  le  opu  so. 

They  opposed  them.  Se  les  opusicron. 


*$&& 


ADVEEBS.  381 

"Vitf.  Many  active  verbs  are  used  reflectively,  and  then 
the;y  are  generally  followed  by  de  ;  as,  I  pity  him,  le  compa- 
dezco  or  compadezcole  (active)  ;  me  compadezco,  or  compadez- 
come  de  el  ('reflective)  ;  lie  forgets  his  friend,  olvida  d  iu  ami- 
go  (active)  ;  olvidase,  or  se  olvida  de  su  amigo  (reflective.) 

IX. — Neuter  verbs  cannot  govern  others  but  by  the  help 
of  prepositions  ;  as,  el  hombre  nace  para  vivir:  and  as  this 
and  similar  phrases  govern  the  Indicative  or  Subjunctive  we 
must  add  que  after  para  or  por  ;  as,  el  hombre  nace  para  qu6 
muera,  y  muere  porque  la  muerte  le  es  natural. 

X. — Many  impersonate,  and  verbs  used  as  such,  govern 
the  Subjunctive  with  que;  as,  conmene  que  venr/a,  it  is  fit 
that  he  or  she  come,  or  may  come  ;  es  menester  que  yo  vaya, 
I  must  go  ;  fue  preciso  que  lo  hiciese,  it  was  necessary  for  him 
to  do  it. 

XI. — Verbs  implying  motion  from  a  place,  require  de  ;  to 
a  place,  a;  through  or  by  a  place,  por ;  towards  a  place, 
hdcia  ;  and  for  a  place,  para. 

ADVEEBS. 

"With  regard  to  the  situation  of  the  adverb  in  a  sentence, 
no  rule  can  be  given  but  what  would  be  subject  to  many 
exceptions.  It  is  a  matter  that  depends  much  on  taste  ; 
however,  when  no  particular  emphasis  is  intended  to  be 
laid  on  the  adverb,  it  generally  follows  the  verb,  and  pre- 
cedes other  parts  of  speech  ;  and  for  energy,  or  elegance,  it 
frequently  changes  its  situation.  Nevertheless,  the  strength 
of  the  adverb  depends  very  much  on  its  position  in  a  sen- 
tence ;  and  the  perspicuity  of  the  construction  also  demands 
care  in  the  proper  placing  of  the  adverb  ;  thus  we  must  be 
guided  according  to  the  stress  we  wish  to  lay  on  the  adverb 
to  give  it  a  more  or  less  conspicuous  position,  taking  care, 
however,  to  place  it  where  it  shall  not  create  ambiguity  in 
the  sentence. 

OBSERVATIONS    ON    CERTAIN    ADVERBS, 

Aqui  and  acd.  The  first  means  here,  and  the  second 
hUJier ;  as,  Aqx  i  estd — Here  it  is.      Ven  acd — Come  hither. 


382  SYNTAX. 

Hasta  aqui  means  hitherto,  and  de  aqui,  hence ;  as,  i  hsta 
aqui  hemos  vivido  en  paz — Hitherto  we  have  lived  peaceably. 
De  aqui  esos  male* — Hence  those  evils. 

He  aqui,  signifies  behold,  or  here  is  ;  as,  He  aq:ii  mi  boha — 
Behold,  or  here  is  my  purse. 

Ahi,  alii,  alia.  Ahi  generally  denotes  a  place  not  very  dis- 
tant from  the  speaker  :  it  also  alludes  to  the  place  where 
the  person  addressed  is  ;  as,  Ahi  estd  mi  cosa — There  is  my 
house.  Ahi  donde  estd  Vd, — There  where  you  are.  Alii  and 
alia  generally  refer  to  a  more  distant  place  than  ahi  ;  as, 
Le  deje  alii — I  left  him  there.  Alia  en  aquellos  paises — - 
There,  in  those  countries.  Alia  is  also  equivalent  to 
thither;  as,  Voy  alia — I  am  going  thither. 

Mas  acd  and  mas  alia  are  always  accompanied  by  the  pre- 
position de,  when  followed  by  another  word.  Mas  acd  sig- 
nifies on  this  side ;  and  mas  alia,  on  that  side,  or  beyond, ;  as, 
Mas  acd  de  Madrid — On  this  side  of  Madrid.  Mas  add  de  los 
Alpes — On  that  side,  or  beyond  the  Alps. 

Ademas  and  demas.  The  first  means  besides  and  moreover  ; 
as,  Ademas  de  eso — Besides  that.  Ademas,  ya  es  larde — More- 
over, it  is  now  too  late,  The  second,  as  an  adverb,  means 
either  over  and  above,  or  useless  ;  as,  £  Cuantos  hay  demas  t 
How  many  are  there  over  and  above  ?  Es  por  demas — Jt  is 
useless.  As  an  adjective  and  a  substantive  demas  means 
the  rest ;  as,  Lo  demas  vendrd  maflana. — The  rest  (of  it)  will 
come  to-morrow.  Los  demas  de  los  escritos — The  rest  of  the 
writings.     Las  demas  cartas — The  rest  of  the  letters. 

Donde  and  adonde.  The  first  signifies  where,  and  the 
second  whither,  or  where  to ;  as,  $  Donde  estd  ?  Donde  Vd.  le 
dejb — "Where  is  he  ?  Where  you  left  him.  %  Adonde  ha  ido  ? 
Adonde  Vd.  le  mando — Whither  is  he  gone?  Where  you 
sent  him. 

Jamas  and  nunca  may  be  used  indiscriminately  ;  as, 
Jamas  or  nunca  vi  tal  cosa — I  never  saw  such  a  thing. 
Nunca  joined  to  jamas  adds  greater  energy  to  the  negation  ; 
as,  Nunca  jamas  vi  tal  cosa — Never  did  I  see  such  a  tiling. 

Jamas  is  often  used  after  the  words  por  siempre,  and  para 
siempre,  for  ever  ;  then,  instead  of  its  negative  signification, 
it  means  eternally  ;  as  Me  acordare  de  el  para  siempre  jamas 
I  will  remember  him  all  the  days  of  my  life,  or  for  ever.     It 


PREPOSITIONS.  383 

is  sometimes  used  alone  interrogatively,  in  the  sense  of  ever, 
as,  i  Ha  visto  Vd.  jamas  tal  proceder  ? — Did  you  ever  see  such 
behaviour  ? 

No,.  This  adverb  does  not  always  convey  a  negative 
meaning  ;  on  the  contrary,  it  strengthens  the  affirmation 
when  used  with  comparatives,  and  renders  the  contrast 
more  striking  ;  as,  Mejor  es  el  trabajo  que  no  la  oeiosidad — . 
Labour  is  better  than  idleness.  Mas  vale  ayunar  que  no  en- 
fermar — It  is  better  to  fast  than  to  fall  ill. 

The  no,  however,  in  such  sentences  is  not  absolutely 
required,  since  their  grammatical  construction  would  be 
perfect  without  it. 

Ya.  This  adverb  has  a  variety  of  significations,  as  will 
be  observed  in  the  following  examples  : — 

I  Ha  venido  Vd.  ya  ?  Are  you  come  already  ? 

Ya  lo  se.  I  already  know  it. 

Ya  vendre  a  verle.  I'll  soon  come  and  see  you. 

Vaya  Vd.  que  ya  yo  ire.  Go  yourself,  I  will  go  presently. 

^Me  entiende  Vd.  yaf  Do  you  understand  me  now  f 

Si,  ya  le  entiendo.  Yes,  now  I  understand  you. 

£Ha  acabado  ya  de  escribir?    Has  he  finished  writing  yet? 

Ya  no  me  quejo  de  mi  suerte.  I   no  longer   complain  of   my 

fate. 

Ya  lo  sabra  Vd.  You  will  know  it  by  and  by. 

Ya  quiere  esto,  ya  aquello.  Sometimes  he  wants  this  some- 
times that. 

Ire,  ya  que  Vd.  lo  manda.        I  will  go,  since  you  desire  it. 

Ya  sea  por  esto,  ya  por  Whether  it  be  for  this,  or  for 
aquello.  that. 

Ya  no  le  vere  mas.  I  shall  never  see  him  again. 

Ya  se  ve.  It  is  evident.     Of  course. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

The  prepositions,  in  Spanish,  are  always  placed  before 
the  words  which  they  govern. 

I. — The  preposition  de,  which  answers  to  of  or  from,  in 
English,  must  be  translated  by  or  with,  when  it  expresses 
the  agent  or  cause  of  an  action  : 


384  SYNTAX. 

Aborrecido  de  todos,  Detested  by  all. 

Rodeado  de  enemigos,  Surrounded  by  enemies. 

Saber  de  memoria,  To  know  by  heart. 

Apasionarse  de  una  dama,  To  be  enamored  with  a  lady 

Bordar  (algo)  de  plata,  To  embroider  with  silver. 

Llenar  de  agua,  To  fill  with  water. 

Speaking  of  the  body,  it  is  used  thus  : 

Alto  or  bajo  de  cuerpo,  Of  a  high  or  low  stature. 

Blanco  de  cara,  Having  a  white  face. 

With  most  reflective  verbs  and  phrases  like  the  following 
it  cannot  well  be  expressed  in  English  : 

Abusar  de  la  amistad,  To  abuse  friendship. 

Ademas  de  eso,  Besides  that. 

Antes  de  ahora,  Before  now. 

Cerca,    or    enfrente   de  la    Near,  or  opposite  the  house. 

casa, 

Gozar  de  alguna  cosa,  To  enjoy  any  thing. 

Tr  tras  de  mi.  To  go  behind  me. 

The  following  are  not  easily  reducible  to  any  rule  : 

Ordenarse  de  sacerdote,         To  be  ordained  into  the  priest- 
hood. 
Pasar  de  Se  villa,  To  go  farther  than  Seville. 

Triunfar  de  los  enemigos,      To  triumph  over  enemies. 

II. — In  phrases  like  the  following,  it  is  translated  on  or 
upon. 

Caer  a  tal  parte,  To  look  on  such  a  aide. 

Ladear  a  tal  parte,  To  lay  on  such  a  side. 

Resolverse  a  alguna  cosa,      Te  resolve  upon  any  thing. 

In  the  following,  and  similar  phrases,  it  should  be  tran- 
BlatedyVom. 

Pedir  algo  a  alguno,  To  ask  something  from  any- 

one, 

Callar  la  verdad  a  otro,         To   conceal   the   truth  from 

tuiother. 


PREPOSITIONS.  385 

In   the  following,   and    similar    phrases,  it    is    translated 
for : 

Disponerse  a  alguna  cosa,     To  prepare  for  any  thing. 
Ingrato  a  los  favores,  Ungrateful  for  favors. 

Optar  a  los  empleos,  To  be  a  candidate  for  situa- 

tions. 

The  following  are  not  easily  reducible  to  a  rule  : 

Arrimarse  a  la  pared,  To  lean  againd  the  wall. 

Oler  algo  a  otra  cosa,  To  have  the  smell  of  another 

thing. 

III. — En,  in,  is  sometimes  translated  with,  on,  upon  or  to: 

Encenderse  en  ira,  To  kindle  with  auger. 

Bambolear  en  la  maroma,      To  dance  on  the  rope. 
Caer  en  tierra,  To  fall  upon  the  ground. 

Examples  of  the  manner  of  using  con,  para,  &c.  : 

Acertar,  or  dar  con  la  casa,    To  find  the  house. 

Trocar  una  cosa  con  otra,      To    change    one    thing  fir 

another. 
Chocar  una  cosa  con  otra,     To   drive   one   thing  against 

another. 
Visible  para  todos,  Visible  to  all. 

Estar  para  partir,  To  be  ready  to  depart. 

V. — Some     prepositions     are     indiscriminately    used    for 
others  : 

Aconsejarse     de,     or    con    To  be  advised  by  wise  men. 
sabios, 

RULES  FOR  THE  USE  OF  THE  PREPOSITIONS  por  AND  para. 

Por  denotes  the  instument,  the  agent,  the  medium,  the 
cause  or  motive,  and  therefore  is  rendered  by  for,  on  account 
of,  by  or  through.     Examples  : 

This   machine   is  moved  by  Esta  mdquina  estd  movida  por 

steam,  vapor. 

This  work  is  written  bj  N.,      Esta  obra  estd  escrita  por  N. 


336 


SYNTAX. 


The  teacher  punished  my  son  El  maestro  castigo  a  mi  hijo  por 

for  (on  account  of)  his  in-       {per  causa  de)  su  indolencia. 

dolence, 
I  will  do  it  for  (on  account  of)  Lo  hare  por  Yd. 

you, 
How  much  do  you  ask  for  this  $  Cudnto  pide  Yd.  por  este  soni* 

hat  ?  brero  f 

I  passed  through  Paris,  Pase  por  Paris. 

Para  indicates  the  purpose,  the  direction,  or  the  end ; 
and  is  rendered  by  to,  in  order  to,  or  for.     Examples  : 
To  (in  order  to)  learn,  one  Para  aprender  es  menester  estu* 

must  study,  diar. 

That  vessel  sails  for  Havana,  Aquelbuque sale parala  Habana, 
This  letter  is  for  you,  Esta  carta  es  para  Yd. 

VERBS  WHICH  REQUIRE  THE  PREPOSITION  CL  BEFORE  BOTH  AN  INFINI- 
TIVE AND  A  NOUN. 


Abandonarse  a  morir,  a  los 

vicios. 
Acertar  a  pasar,  al  sitio. 
Acostumbrarse  a  pedir,  a  la 

limosna. 
Adelantarse    a  llegar,  a  los 

otros. 
Aficionarse  a  cazar,  a  la  lectu- 

ra. 
Apostar  a  correr,  al  juego. 
Apresurarse  a,  venir,  a  mi  en- 

cuentro. 
Aproximarse  a  morir,  al  pue- 
blo. 
Arrojarse  a  nadar,  al  agua. 
Asomarse  a  ver,  al  balcon. 
Atreverse  a  decir,  a  muclios. 
Comenzar  a  cantar. 
Concurrir  a  votar,  a  empresas. 
Condenar  a  morir,  a  destierro. 
Conformarse   a   sufrir,    a  la 

regla. 


Consagrarse  a  servir,  a  Dios. 

Contribuir  a  edificar,  a  em- 
presas. 

Convidar  a  bailar,  al  baile. 

Convocar  a  deliberar,  a  juuta. 

Dar  a  entender,  a  todos. 

Decidirse  a  viajar,  a  todo. 

Dedicarse  a  aprender,  a  las 
ciencias. 

Determinarse  a  comprar,  a  la 
compra. 

Echarse  a  dormir,  al  suelo. 

Enviar  a  decir,  a  Pedro. 

Exhortar  a  enmendarse,  a  la 
enmienda, 

Habituarse  a  beber,  al  vino. 

Hurnillarse  a  rogar,  al  ruego. 

Incitar  a  correr,  a  alguno. 

Inclinarse  a  leer,  a  la  virtud. 

Inducir  a  pecar,  a  pecado. 

Ir  a  viajar,  a  paseo. 

Meterse  a  gobernar,  a  sastre, 


PREPOSITIONS. 


387 


Negarse  a  dar,  a  todos. 
OMigar  a  cumplir,  a  lo  justo. 
Obligarse  a  pagar,  al  pago. 
Ofrecerse  a  servir,  al  servicio. 
Pararse    a    descansar,    a  la 

puerta. 
Pasar  a  descubrir,  a  la  sala. 
Persuadir  a  ceder,  a  alguno. 
Ponerse  a  estudiar,  al  trabajo. 


Reducirse  a  vivir,  a  lo  nece- 
sario.  [empresa. 

Resolverse   a   raarchar,  a  la 
Salir  a  torear,  a  la  calle. 
Sentarse  a  comer,  a  la  mesa. 
Someterse  a  sufrir,  al  superior. 
Subir  a  ver,  al  terrado. 
Tornar  a  decir,  a  un  lado. 
Volver  a  caer,  a  casa. 


VERBS  WHICH  REQUIRE  THE  PREPOSITION  a    BEFORE  A  NOUN,  ANU 
DO  NOT  ADMIT  IT  BEFORE  OR  WITH  ANOTHER  VERB. 


Abordar 

&  la  lancha. 

Acojerse 

al  asilo. 

Adherirse 

&  facciones. 

Agregarse 

a  los  suyos. 

Arribar 

a  buen  puerto. 

Ascender 

&  capitan. 

Atender 

d  la  leccion. 

Atribuir 

d  la  suerte. 

Brindar 

a  la  salud. 

Caer 

d  tierra. 

Calentarse 

d  la  chim  enea. 

Callar 

al  publico. 

Ceder 

d  la  fuerza. 

Comprar 

al  tendero. 

Conducir 

d  la  ciudad. 

Confiar 

d  su  amigo. 

Consagrar 

d  Dios. 

Consultar 

d  los  doctos. 

Contestar 

d  esquelas. 

Contravenir 

d  lo  mandado. 

Convertirse 

d  la  virtud. 

Corresponder 

d  los  favores. 

Deber 

al  panadero. 

Declarar 

d  la  nacion. 

Desmentir 

cl  calumniador. 

Despertar 

al  dorniilori. 

Diferir 

d  otra  dpoca. 

Echar 

d  tierra. 

Elevar 

d  las  nubes. 

Esceder 

d  otro. 

Faltar 

d  la  orden. 

Favorecei 

d  pobres. 

Fiarse 

d  uu  amigo. 

Igualars?3 

d  inferiores. 

Irnpeler 

d  la  carrera. 

Imponer 

d  siibditos. 

Impugnar 

at  contrario. 

Imputar 

al  inoceute. 

Incliuar 

al  obstinado. 

Incorporar 

d  la  masa. 

Infuiidir 

d  alguno. 

Insinuar 

d  su  amigo. 

Jugar 

d  los  naipes. 

Juutar 

d  otro. 

Leer 

d  la  junta. 

Llover 

d  cantaros. 

Mantlar 

d  inferiores. 

Manifestar 

al  auditorio. 

Mantener 

d  un  pobre, 

Montar 

d  caballo. 

Mudarse 

d  otra  parte. 

Navegar 

al  Sur. 

Notificar 

d  la  parte. 

Oler 

d  vainilla. 

Optar 

d  empleos. 

Parecerse 

d  su  madre. 

Participar 

a  los  jefes. 

Pegar,    fijar, 
colgar 

y  a  la  pared. 

Permitir 

d  los  subalternos. 

Persuadir 

d  los  rebeldes. 

Prevenir 

d  incautos. 

Prometer 

d  los  amigos. 

Promover 

d  la  rnajistratura 

Eecetar 

al  enfermo. 

Eecibir 

d  cuenta. 

Becomendar 

d  un  axnigo. 

Beferirse 

d  una  cosa. 

388 


SYNTAX. 


Rerdirse 

Repartir 

Representarse 

Responder 

Re^tituir 

Retirarse 

Retroceder 

Robar 

Rogar 

Saber 

Saltar 

Sustituir 


d  la  razon. 
d  la  tropa. 
d  la  imajinacion. 
d  la  pregunta. 
al  despojado. 
al  convento. 
d  un  punto. 
al  caminante. 
al  padre. 
a  quina. 

d  la  imajinaeiou. 
al  profesor. 


Sustraerse 

Sujerir 

Tirar 

Tocar 

Traer 

Transferir 

Transplantar 

Uniforniar 

Unir 

Vestir 

Vivir 

Volar 


al  deber. 
d  alguno. 
d  la  izquierda. 
d  cada  uno. 
al  mercado. 
al  sitio. 
al  huerto. 
d  otra  cosa. 
d  otro. 
d  la  turca. 
d  gusto. 
al  cielo. 


VERBS  VTHICH  REQUIRE  THK    PREPOSITION  de  BEFORE  AN  INFINITIYI 


Abochornarse 

Abstenerse 

Aburrirse 

Acabar 

Acordarse 

Acusar 

Agraviarse 

Ahorrar 

Alegrarse 

Arrepentirse 

Asegurarse 

Avergonzarse 

Bajar 

Blasonar 

Cansarse 

Confesarse 

Congratularse 

Cuidarse 

Culpar 

Dar 

Dejenerar 

Desdenarse 

Desesperar 

Despedirse 

Desquitarse 

Dejar 

IMgnarse 

Disgustarse 

Distraerse 

Enmendarsr 

Espantarse 

Escluir 

Escusarse 

Eximir 


de  pedir. 

de  pecar. 

depadecer. 

de  trabajar. 

de  ir. 

de  haber  hecho. 

de  oir. 

de  gastar. 

de  saber. 

de  jugar. 

de  ser  cierto. 

de  hablar. 

de  dormir. 

de  haber  sido. 

de  trabajar. 

de  haber  hecho. 

de  ser. 

de  trabajar. 
de  omitir. 
de  beber. 
de  ser. 
de  asistir. 
de  conseguir. 
de  un  amigo. 
de  perder. 
de  molestar. 
de  conceder. 
de  pretender. 
de  padecer. 
de  pecar. 
de  ver. 
de  votar. 
de  ir. 
de  trabajar. 


Fastidiarse 

Fatigarse 

Gloriarse 

Guardarse 

Gustar 

Hartarse 

Holgarse 

Jactarse 

Justiticarse 

Lamentarse 

Librar 

Llevarse 

Mantenerse 

Maravillarse 

Molerse 

Motejar 

Olvidarse 

Preciarse 

Presumir 

Quejarse 

Querellarse 

Reirse 

Renegar 

Retraerse 

Sacar 

Sentirse 

Servirse 

Sobresaltarse 

Subir 

Subsistir 

Sustraerse 

Tachar 

Tratar 

Valerse 


de  oir. 

de  andar. 

de  ser. 

de  caminar. 

de  bailar. 

de  comer. 

de  recibir. 

de  poseer. 

de  haber  hecho. 

de  padecer. 

de  servir. 

de  oir  decir. 

de  bordar. 

de  saber. 

de  correr. 

de  ignorar. 

de  ir. 

de  cantar. 

de  saber. 

de  ser. 

de  haber  sido. 

de  oir  decir. 

de  haber  nacido. 

de  concurrir. 

de  padecer. 

de  oir. 

de  dar. 

de  ver. 

de  cenar. 

de  trabajar. 

de  obedecer. 

de  n^entir. 

de  comprar. 

de  ser. 


PBEPOSITIONS. 


Vanagloriarse 
Venir 


de  servir, 
de  cazar. 


Vivir 
Zafarse 


de  mendigat. 
de  trabajar. 


VERBS  FROM  WHOSE    MEANING    SPRINGS    THE    PREPOSITION  €)l  WHICH 
MUST  BE  USED  BEFORE  AN  INFINITIVE. 


Actuarse 

Adestrarss 

Afanarse 

Aferrarse 

Balancear 

Ceder 

Complacerse 

Comprometerse 

Concurrir 

Confiar 

Confundirse 

Consentir 

Consumirse 

Convenir 

Dar 

Deleitarse 

Detenerse 

Distinguirse 

Distraerse 

Empenarse 

Engaiiarse 

Ensayarse 

Eutrernetersr 

Equivocarse 

Esforzarse 

Esmerarse 

Estrecharse 

Estribar 

Fatigarse 

Fundarse 

Gozar 


en  escribir. 
en  bailar. 
en  convencer. 
en  sostener. 
en  opinar. 
en  tirar. 
en  dar. 
en  firmar. 
en  pensar. 
en  ascender. 
en  contemplar. 
en  pagar. 
en  cavilar. 
en  comprar. 
en  mentir. 
en  cantar. 
en  referir. 
en  vestir. 
en  bordar 
en  conseguir, 
en  creer. 
en  dibujar. 
en  gobernar. 
en  pronunciar. 
en  inerecer. 
en  pulir. 
en  gastar. 
en  acertar. 
en  rodear. 
en  haber  oido. 
en  oir  cantar. 


Ignalarye 

Incidir 

Influir 

Insistir 

Instruir 

Instruirse 

Introducirse 

Invertir 

Matarse 

Meters  e 

Mezclarse 

Moderarse 

Obstinarse 

Ocuparse 

Pecar 

Peligrar 

Pensar 

Perseverar 

Propasarse 

Quedar 

Recalcarse 

Sacrificarse 

Semejarse 

Sobresalir 

Templarse 

Titubear 

Trabajar 

Trabucarse 

Uniformarse 

Vacilar 

Violentarse 


en  correr. 
en  cometer. 
en  sentenciar. 
en  sospechar. 
en  raanejar. 
en  manejarse. 
en  analizar. 
en  edificar. 
en  trabajar. 
en  florear. 
en  gobernar. 
en  hablar. 
en  negar. 
en  escribir. 
en  pensar. 
en  salir. 
en  acomodarse. 
en  pedir. 
en  hablar. 
en  asistir. 
en  ponderar. 
en  pagar. 
en  hablar. 
en  m  on  tar. 
en  hablar. 
en  salir. 
en  vencerse. 
en  hablar. 
en  pensar. 
en  vender. 
en  ceder. 


NOUNS  WHICH  REQUIRE  THE  PREPOSITION  de  BEFORE  AN  INFINITIVE.* 


Alegria 
Atrevimiento 

arrojo  u 

dia 
Bondad 
Cobardia 


de  ver. 


osa-  >•  de  decir. 


de  dar. 
de  negar. 


Consuelo 

Desconsuelo 

Desdicha 

Deseo 

Desgracia 

Dicha 


de  saber. 
de  ver. 
de  perder. 
de  aprender. 
de  perder. 
de  ganar. 


*  Recomended  to  the  scholar  for  its  importance,   and  for  being  the 
first  time  it  has  appeared  in  any  Spanish  Grammar. 


390 


SYNTAX. 


Dignacion 

Disgusto 

Escusa 

Esperanza 

Facilidad 

Facultad 

Favor 

Felieidad  6  in- 

felicidad 
Fortuna 
Frauqueza 
Gana 
Gloria 
Gozo 
Gusto 
Honor 
Honra 

Imprudencia 
Insolencia 
Intericion 
Jenorosidad 
Libertad 
Molestia 
Miedo 
Placer 
Pretension 


de  aceptar. 
de  ver. 
de  6  para  ir 
de  recibir. 
de  vender. 
de  hacer. 
de  decir. 

de  casarse. 

de  estar. 
de  hablar. 
de  comer. 
de  ver. 
de  oir. 
de  ser. 
de  ser. 
de  estar. 
de  hablar. 
de  decir. 
de  hacer. 
de  dar. 
de  pedir. 
de  venir. 
de  hablar. 
de  saber. 
de  conocer. 


Promesa 

Pretesto 

Proposito 

Resolution 

Satisfaccion 

Necesidad 

Objeto 

Obligacion   6 

deber 
Ocasion 
Oportunidad 
Poder 
Pena,  pesar,   6 

pesadurnbro 
Posibilidad 
Prudencia 
Razon 
Seguridad 
Suerte 
Temor 
Tiempo 
Tristeza 
Valor 
Vanidad 
Vergiienza 
Voluntad 


de  estudiar. 
de  6  para  ir. 
de  estar. 
de  quedarse. 
de  informar. 
de  decir. 
de  ir. 

de  hacer. 

de  hablar. 

de  ir. 

de  perdonar. 

de  ver. 

de  hacer. 

de  callar. 

de  6  para  quejarse* 

de  recibir. 

de  ganar. 

de  encontrar. 

deo  para  estudiar. 

de  ver. 

de  6  para  ir. 

de  decir, 

de  confesar. 

de  hacer. 


PECULIAR    MEANINGS     OP     CERTAIN     ENGLISH     PREPOSITIONS,     WITH 
THEIR    CORRESPONDING    TRANSLATIONS    IN    SPANISH. 

"When  English  prepositions  have  other  meanings  besides 
those  which  constitute  their  most  general  signification, 
they  must  be  translated  by  words  corresponding  with  those 
which  they  stand  in  the  place  of  :  Ex. : 


About. 


To  run  about  the  streets, 
He  spoke  about  that  affair. 
What  are  you  about  ? 
I  was  about  to  tell  it  to  you, 


Correr  por  las  calles. 
Hablo  de,  or sobre  ese  negocio. 
I  Que  esta  Vd.  haciendo  ? 
Estaba  para  decirselo  a  Vd. 


Above. 

His  liberality   is   above    his  Su   liberalidad  escede  i  sua 

means,  medios. 

It  is  above  my  comprehen-  No  alcanzo  a  comprenderlo. 

sion, 


PREPOSITIONS.  391 


After. 


He  does  things  after  his  own    Hace  las  cosas  a  su  antojo. 

fancy, 
I  was  looking  after  a  friend,     Iba  en  busca  de  un  amigo. 

Against. 

I  set  my  face  against  it,  Me  opuse  a  ello. 

I  shall  be  back  against  the    Estare  de  vuelta  para  fines 
end  of  the  month,  del  mes. 

Along. 

Along  the  shore,  A  lo  largo  de  la  ribera. 

Come  along  with  me,  Venga  Vd.  conmigo. 

At. 

Are  they  at  home  ?  <?  Estan  en  casa  ? 

I  am  at  a  loss  how  to  act,  No  se  como  determinar. 

Not  at  all,  Del  todo. 

He  came  in  at  the  window,  Entro  por  la  ventana. 

I  was  at  Salamanca,  Estuve  en  Salamanca. 

He  is  at  dinner,  Esta  comiendo. 

Before. 

Before  my  window,  Delante  de  mi  ventana. 

Before  the  judge,  Ante  el  juez. 

Behind. 

He  leaves  him  behind,  Le  deja  en  zaga. 

You  are  behind  your  time,        Viene  Vd.  tarde. 

Beneath. 

Such  actions  are  beneath  a  Tales  acciones  son  indignas 
gentleman,  de  un  caballero. 

Beneath  the  mask  of  hypo-  Bajo  capa,  or  so  capa  de 
crisy,  santo. 

Beside. 

He  appeared  beside  himself,     Parecia  fuera  de  si. 
Beside  me,  Al  lado  mio. 


m 


SYNTAX. 


It  is  beyond  all  praise, 
Beyond  my  reach, 
Beyond  doubt, 


By  day, 

By  accident, 

Impelled  by  necessity, 

One  by  one, 

How  did  you  come  by  it? 

By  and  by, 

By  sea, 

Close  by, 


Down  the  hill, 
Throw  it  down, 


Beyond. 

Escede  a  toda  alabanza. 
Fuera  de  mi  alcance. 
Sin  duda  alguna. 

By. 

De  dia. 

Por  accidente. 

Impelido  de  la  necesidad. 

Uno  a  uno. 

I  Por  donde  le  vino  a  Vd  ? 

Luego. 

Por  mar. 

A  la  mano. 


Down. 


Cuesta  abajo. 
Echelo  en  tierra. 


For. 


For  my  sake, 

For  fear, 

I  act  for  him, 

I  start  to-morrow  for  Segovia, 

It  will  last  for  many  years, 

I  bought  it  for  a  dollar, 

It  is  impossible  for  me, 

As  for  me, 


Por  amor  de  mi. 
Por  miedo. 
Acttio  por  el. 

Parto  inafiana  para  Segovia 
Durara  por  muchos  anos. 
Lo  compre  por  un  peso. 
Me  es  imposible  a  mi. 
En  cuanto  a  mi. 


From. 


He  did  it  from  fear, 

Tell  him  from  me, 

I  speak  from  what  I  hear, 

In, 

In  the  morning,  in  the  after- 
noon. 
Deficient  in  intellect, 


Lo  hizo  de  miedo. 
Digale  Vd.  de  mi  parte. 
Hablo  por  lo  que  oigo. 

Into. 
Por  la  manana,  por  la  tarde 

Falto  de  intelecto. 


PREPOSITIONS. 


393 


Tn  consequence  of  that, 

In  accordance  with, 

I  was  in  hope  that  it  would 

do, 
To  descend  into  the  garden, 
They  entered  into  an  alliance, 


A  consecuencia  de  eso. 

De  acuerdo  con. 

Tenia    esperanzas  que    3er- 

viria. 
Bajar  al  jardin. 
Entraron  en  alianza. 


Near 


Near  to  the  Exchange, 
Near  me, 


Cerca  de  la  Bolsa. 
Junto  a  mi. 


Or. 


All  of  us, 

I  beg  of  you, 

To  be  well  spoken  of, 

Of  course, 

To  be  ignorant  of  the  fact, 


How  far  off  is  it  ? 

Off  the  port, 

Off  hand, 

Lift  it  off  the  ground, 

Take  off  youi  hat, 

He  carried  her  off, 

I  let  him  off, 

I  shall  soon  leave  off, 


Todos  nosotros. 
Le  pido  a  Vd. 
Toner  buena  fama. 
Por  supuesto. 
Ignorar  el  hecho. 


Off. 


I  Cuanto  dista  ? 
Sobre  el  puerto. 
De  improviso. 
Levantelo  del  suelo. 
Quitese  el  sombrero. 
Se  la  llevo. 
Le  perdone  ;  le  deje 
Pronto  acabare. 


lr. 


On,  Upon. 


Keep  on  your  cloak, 

He  came  on  Monday  last, 

I  met  them  on  the  road, 

On  that  account, 

On  this  side  and  On  that, 

On  certain  occasions, 

On  the  contrary, 

On  foot ;  on  horseback, 

Go  on, 

Rely  on  me, 


Quedese  con  la  capa  puesta. 

Vino  el  Lunes  pasado. 

Los  encontre  en  el  camino 

Por  ese  inotivo. 

De  este  lado  y  de  aquel 

En  ciertas  ocasiones. 

Al  contrario. 

A  pie  ;  a  cab  alio. 

Adelante. 

Dependa  Vd.  de  inL 


694: 


SYNTAX. 


On,  or  upon  my  word, 
They  are  not  on  terms, 
He  imposed  that  duty  on,  or 

upon  them, 
He  was  looked  upon  as  a  spy, 
They    heaped    many   favors 

upon  them, 
To  feed  on,  or  upon  hopes, 
Seated  on  the  sofa, 
Come  on  the  twelfth  of  May, 


Bajo  mi  palabra.' 

No  se  tratan. 

Les  impuso  esa  obligacion. 

Le  miraron  como  espia. 
Los  colmaron  de  favores. 

Alimentarse  de  esperanzas. 
Sentado  en  el  canajDe. 
Venga  Vd.  el  doce  de  Mayo. 


The  coach  ran  over  him, 
All  over  the  world, 
Over  the  way, 
It  is  all  over, 
Read  it  over, 

There  was  nothing  over, 
Give  over, 


Out  of  fear, 

Out  of  danger, 

Out  of  doors, 

He  is  out  of  money, 

Out  of  order, 

Out  of  vengeance, 

She  is  out  of  her  mind, 

Out  of  curiosity, 

To  be  out  of  humor, 


All  the  year  round, 
To  sail  round  the  world, 
I  will  come  round  to  you, 
To  go  round  and  round, 


OvEB. 

El  coche  le  paso  encima. 

Por  todo  el  mundo. 

Al  or  del  otro  lado. 

Se  acabo. 

Vuelva    Vd.    a  leerlo ;    Re- 

paselo  Vd. 
No  sobr6  nada. 
Acabe  Vd. 

Out. 

De  miedo. 
Fuera  de  peligro. 
Fuera  de  casa. 
Esta  sin  dinero. 
Descompuesto. 
Por,  or  de  venganza. 
Perdio  el  juicio. 
Por  curiosidad. 
Estar  de  mal  humor. 

Round. 

Todo  el  afio. 

Circumnavegar  el  mundo, 
Pasare  a  su  casa  de  Vd. 
Ir  dando  vueltas. 


PEEPOSITIONS. 


395 


Through. 


We  passed  through  France, 

He  ran  him  through, 

I  passed  through  the  mob, 

Through  (i.  e.  on  account  of) 
him, 

Through  (i.  e.  by  means  of) 
him, 

Through  envy, 

Throughout  the  whole  coun- 
try, 


Pasamos  por  Francia. 
Le  atraveso  de  parte  a  parte. 
Pase  por  entre  la  caterva. 
Por  razon  de  el. 

Por  medio  de  el. 

Por  or  de  envidia. 
Por  todo  el  pais. 


From  day  to  day, 
From  door  to  door, 
According  to  appearances, 
That  is  yet  to  come, 
That  is  new  to  me, 
Secretary  to  the  embassy, 
A  victim  to  his  passions, 
Ten  to  one, 
To  this  day, 


The  ship  is  under  sail, 
He  is  under  age, 
Under  oath, 
It  is  under  its  value, 


To. 

De  dia  en  dia. 
De  puerta  en  puerta. 
Segun  las  apariencias. 
Eso  esta  aun  por  venir. 
Esto  es  nuevo  para  mi. 
Secretario  de  la  embajada, 
Victima  de  sus  pasiones. 
Diez  contra  uno. 
Hasta  el  dia  de  hoy. 

Under. 

El  navio  esta  a  la  vela. 
Es  menor  de  edad. 
Bajo  de  juramento. 
Es  me'nos  de  su  valor. 


Up. 


Up  that  way, 

Are  they  up  ? 

Up  two  pairs  of  stairs, 

Let  them  serve  up  the  dinner, 

He  was  taken  up, 

To  be  puffed  up  with  pride, 

I  cannot  put  up  with  her, 


Hacia  alia. 
^Estan  levantados? 
Al  segundo  piso. 
Que  suban  la  comida. 
Le  pusieron  en  custodia, 
Hincharse  de  soberbia. 
No  la  puedo  aguantar. 


396 


SYNTAX 


With. 
They   quarrelled    with    one    RiSeron  entre  si. 

another, 
The    room     is    filled    with    El  cuarto  esta  lleno  de  jente, 

people, 
He   was    charged    with   the    Le  acusaron  del  delito. 

crime, 
Arm  yourself  with  patience, 
Fraught  with  danger, 
I  was  struck  with  her  beauty, 


Endowed  with  virtues, 
I  am  not  acquainted  with  her, 
I  was  pleased  with  his  dis- 
course, 


Armese  Vd.  paciencia. 

Lleno  de  peligro. 

Me  quede  sorprendido  de  su 

hermosura. 
Dotado  de  virtudes. 
No  la  conozco. 


Within  pistol- shot, 

Within  my  reach, 

Within  a  little  way  from  here, 

It  is  within  a  mile, 

There  is  nobody  within, 


I  came  without  her, 
Without  exception, 
Without  doors, 
Without  his  reach, 


Me  agrado  su  discurso. 
Within. 

A  tiro  de  pistola. 

A  mi  alcance. 

A  poca  distancia  de  aqui. 

No  llega  a  una  milla. 

No  hay  nadie  en  casa. 

Without. 

Vine  sin  ella. 
Sin  escepcion. 
Fuera  de  casa. 
Fuera  de  su  alcance. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

PECULIAR     MEANINGS     OF    CERTAIN     ENGLISH     CONJUNCTIONS,    WITH 
THEIR   CORRESPONDING  TRANSLATIONS    IN    SPANISH. 

There  are  several  conjunctions  in  English  that  are  fre- 
quently used  as  substitute  for  other  words  ;  these  conjunc- 
tions are  generally  rendered  in  Spanish  by  the  words  which 
they  stand  in  the  place  of,  as  follows  : 

As,  meaning  when,  is  translated  cuando;  as,  We  saw  them 
as  we  were  going  in — Los  vimos  cuando  entrdbamos. 

But,,  meauing  if  it  were  not,  is  translated  si  no;  as,  Bui 


CONJUNCTIONS.  397 

for  me,  they  would  have  killed  him — Si  no  hubiera  sido  por 
mi,  le  habrian  matado.  I  would  go,  but  that  I  think  it  useless 
—  Yo  iria,  si  no  creyera  quefuese  inutil. 

But,  meaning  only,  is  translated  solo,  or  no  mas  que;  as,  I 
have  but  two  to  finish —  Solo  me  quedan  dos  para  acabar.  I 
went  but  once — No/W  mas  que  una  vez. 

But,  meaning  except,  is  translated  sinb,  or  mas  que  after  a 
negative  and  after  an  interrogative  pronoun ;  and  menm, 
when  not  preceded  by  a  negative  ;  as,  He  speaks  nothing  but 
nonsense — No  habla  sino,  or  mas  que  tonterias.  Who  would 
think  so  but  you  ? — i  Quien  creyera  tal  sino  Vd.?  Everybody 
knows  it  but  he — Todos  lo  saben  menos  el. 

Whether,  meaning  if,  is  translated  si ;  as,  Say  whether  you 
will  come  or  not — Diga  Vd.  si  quiere  venir  6  no. 

Whether,  meaning  be  that,  is  translated  que ;  as,  Whether 
he  come  or  not — Que  venga  6  que  no  venga. 

Whether,  meaning  that,  is  also  translated  que;  as,  I  doubt 
whether  she  knows  it — Dudo  que  lo  sepa. 

However  employed  before  an  adjective,  is  translated  in  the 
following  manner  ;  as,  However  attentive  they  are,  and  how- 
ever kind  they  may  be — Por  atentos  y  bondadosos  que  sean;  or, 
no  obstante  lo  atentos  que  son,  y  por  bondadosos  que  sean. 

Why  and  because  are  translated  porque;  as,  I  do  not  know 

why — No  se  porque.     Because  I  could  not — Porque  no  pude. 

For,  meaning  because,  is  translated  porque ;  as,  You  must 

take  care  of  yourself,  for  if  you  do  not,  you  will  be  ill — Es 

menester  que  se  cuide  Vd.,  porque  si  no,  se  enfermard. 

WJiereas,  meaning  it  being  so  that,  is  translated  siendo  asi 
que;  as,  Whereas  certain  individuals  appeared  before  me, 
etc. — Siendo  asi  que  parecieron  ante  mi  ciertos  individuos. 

Whereas,  meaning  on  the  contrary,  is  translated  de  lo  con- 
trario  ;  as,  You  must  obey  the  orders  ;  whereas,  if  you  trans- 
gress them,  you  will  suffer  the  consequences — Es  menester 
que  obedezca  Vd.  las  or  denes;  de  lo  contrario,  si  las  tro.spa- 
sare,  sufrira  las  consequencias. 

Either  and  or  are  both  translated  6 ;  Either  I  am  right,  or 
he  is— O  yo  tengo  razon,  6  el  la  tiene. 

Neither  and  nor  are  both  translated  ni;  as,  Neither  pro- 
mise nor  act  without  thinking — Ni  prometas,  ni  obres  sin 
pensar. 


DIALOGUES. 


K)    ACCOST,     TAKE    LEAVE,     AND 
PAT  THE  USUAL  COMPLIMENTS. 


Good  morning  to  you,  Mr. 
James. 

(Your  servant).  How  do 
you  do,  Mr.  Francis? 

As  usual,  I  thank  you ;  and 
how  do  you  do  ? 


Quite  well- 
you. 


-so,  so — I  thank 


Well,  I  am  glad  to  see  you 
bo  well. 

Your  most  obedient,  Mr. 
Belmonte. 

Your  most  obedient,  Mr. 
Rodriguez. 

Oh,  Mr.  Henry,  is  that  you? 
How  are  you  ? 

(At  your  service).  Very 
well.  I  thank  you. 

How  is  this,  my  good  friend, 
are  you  here  ? 

How  glad  I  am  to  meet  you ! 

Well,  I  am  very  happy  to 
see  you,  and  looking  so  well 
too. 

*  The  literal  translation  of  "sin  novedad"  is  without  novelty;  but 
the  meaning,  conveyed  by  the  expression  is,  that  the  state  of  health  con- 
tinues without  change  or  alteration. 


PARA  SALUDiR,  DESPEDIRSE,  1 
HACER  LOS  CUMPLIMIENTOS 
ORDINARIOS. 

Tenga  Vd.  muy  buenoa 
dias,  Sefior  Don  Diego. 

Servidor  de  Vd.  Don  Fran- 
cisco, como  lo  pasa  Vd.  ? 

Sin  novedad,*  a  la  disposi- 
cion  de  Vd. ;  y  a  Vd.  £  como 
le  va  ? — or,  y  Vd.  ,;  que  tal  ? 

Perfectamente  bien  —  tal 
cual — asi,  asi — le  doy  las  gra- 
cias. 

Vaya,  me  alegro  de  verle 
tan  bueno. 

Beso  a  Vd.  la  mano,  Sefior 
Belmonte. 

A  la  orden  de  Vd.  Seiior 
Rodriguez. 

Ola,  Don  Enrique !  <;Vd.  por 
aca?     <:  Y  que  tal? 

Para  servir  a  Vd. 

I  Que  es  esto,  amigo  mio  ; 
tanto  de  bueno  por  aca  ? 

j  Que  f eliz  encuentro  ! 

Vaya,  me  alegro  mucho  de 
ver  a  Vd,  y  tan  guapo. 


DIALOGUES. 


399 


I  am  also  delighted  to  see 
you  so  well. 
Good  afternoon,  Mr.  Charles. 

(Your  servant).  I  hope  I 
see  you  perfectly  well. 

Perfectly  well,  I  thank  you; 
and  how  have  you  been  since 
I  saw  you  last  ? 

Not  very  well,  I  thank  you. 
Rather  unwell. 
I  have  a  cold. 

I  have  a  fever. 
My  head  aches. 
I  am  very  sorry. 
I  am  sorry,  indeed. 
I  hope  it  is  nothing  of  con- 
Bequence. 

I  am  somewhat  recovered. 

I  am  much  better. 

A  little  better. 

I  am  rejoiced  to  hear  it. 

I  am  very  glad. 

I  hope  you  will  soon  recov- 
er. 

Mr.  R — ,  it  is  an  age  since  I 
had  the  pleasure  of  seeing 
you. 

It  appears  just  as  long  to 
me  since  I  had  the  pleasure 
of  seeing  you. 

Have  you  been  away — or, 
absent  ? 

Only  a  few  days. 

How  does  your  brother  find 
himself  ? 


Igualmente  celebro  el  ver 
a  Vd.  tan  famoso. 

Tenga  Vd.  muy  buenas  tar- 
des,  Don  Carlos. 

ServidordeVd. ;  espero  que 
le  veo  en  perfecta  salud. 

Perfectamente  bueno,  para 
servir  a  Vd.  £  como  le  ha  ido 
desde  que  le  vi  la  ultima 
vez? 

Gracias  ;  no  muy  bueno. 

Algo  indispuesto. 

Estoy  resfriado,  6  consti- 
pado, 

Tengo  calentura. 

Me  duele  la  cabeza. 

Lo  siento  mucho. 

Lo  siento,  de  veras. 

Espero  que  no  sera  cosa  de 
cuidado. 

Me  hallo  algo  mas  restable- 
cido. 

Estoy  mucho  mejor. 

Un  poco  mejor. 

Lo  celebro  infinito. 

Me  alegro  mucho. 

Le  deseo  a  Vd.  una  pronta 
mejoria. 

JSefior  Don  Ramon,  ha^ee 
un  siglo  que  no  he  tenido  la 
satisfaccion  de  verle. 

Otro  tanto  me  parece  a  mi 
desde  que  tuve  el  gusto  de 
ver  a  Vd. 

I  Ha  estado  Vd.  ausente  ? 

Solamente  algunos  dias. 
I  Como  se  halla  su  hermano 
de  Vd.  ? 


400 


DIALOGUES. 


He  is  not  very  well,  I  thank 
you. 

What  ails  him? 

He  suffers  much  from  rheu- 
matism. 

That  is  very  prevalent  just 
now. 

He  feels  very  weak,  or  lan- 
guid, from  his  illness. 

He  is  obliged  to  keep  his 
room. 

The  doctor  does  not  con- 
sider him  in  a  fit  state  to  go 
out  yet. 

Give  my  kind  remem- 
brance to  him,  and  I  hope  he 
will  soon  be  better. 

Thank  you — I  shall  not 
fail. 

I  will  make  it  my  duty  to 
call  and  see  him. 

He  will  esteem  it  a  great 
kindness. 

Do  not  fail  to  call  and  see 
us. 

I  shall  be  very  happy  to 
do  so. 

You  know  we  are  always 
glad  to  see  you. 


Gracias,  no  esta  muy  bueno 
de  salud. 

£  Que  tiene  ? 

Padece  mucho  de  reuma- 
tismo. 

Corre  mucho  de  eso  en  el 
dia. 

Se  halla  muy  debil  por  su 
enfermedad. 

Se  ve  precisado  a  no  salii 
de  su  cuarto. 

El  medico  no  le  cree  aun 
en  estado  de  poder  salir. 

Dele  Vd.  mil  espresionea 
de  mi  parte,  y  que  deseo  se 
halle  pronto  restablecido. 

Doy  a  Y.  mil  gracias, — no 
lo  olvidare. 

Tendre  por  una  de  mis 
obligaciones  el  hacerle  una 
visita. 

Lo  apreciara  mucho. 

No  deje  Vd.  de  pasar  por 
casa. 

Tendre  mucho  gusto  en 
ello. 

Vd.  sabe  que  mi  casa  es 
muy  suya.* 


*  A  Spaniard  in  offering  his  house  to  a  friend,  or  to  a  new  acquaint- 
ance, mostly  makes  use  of  a  similar  expression  to  one  of  the  following — 
Esta  casa  es  de  Vd.  (This  house  is  yours).  Mi  casa  es  muy  suya  (My 
house  is  much  at  your  service).  Disponga  Vd.  de  esta  su  casa  (Consider 
this  house  your  own). 

In  the  like  manner  when  a  person  admires  any  thing  in  the  possession 
of  another,  the  possessor  will  immediately  say:  Esta  muy  a  la  disposition 
de  Vd.  (It  is  very  much  at  your  service).  Which,  however,  being  under- 
stood only  as  a  compliment,  the  person  to  whom  it  is  offered  replies: 
Mil  gracias,  esta  en  muy  buenas  manos  /  or  Esta  muy  bien  entpleado, 
(Thank  you,  it  is  in  very  good  hand*). 


DIALOGUES. 


40) 


Thank  you  ;  I  appreciate 
your  kindness.  I  have  no 
occasion  to  repeat  that  I 
shall  always  be  happy  to  see 
you. 

So  ;  good-by,  till  we  meet 
again. 

Command  me  in  any  thing 
I  can  be  of  use  to  you. 

I  also  beg  to  tender  my 
service  to  you. 

Good-by  to  you. 

Farewell. 

God  bless  you. 

Welcome,  Mr.  B.  I  am 
very  glad  to  see  you.  When 
did  you  arrive  ? 

Well  met,  Mr.  S.  I  arrived 
last  night,  for  what  you  may 
wish  to  command. 

And  how  have  you  been  ? 

Perfectly  well. 

Where  have  you  been  so 
long? 

I  have  made  a  trip  to  Ma- 
drid and  other  places. 

Indeed!  and  how  did  you 
pass  your  time  ? 

Very  well  —  exceedingly 
well. 

Well,  I  am  very  glad. 

After  to-morrow  I  start 
for  Seville,  and  if  you  have 
any  commands,  you  have  only 
to  name  them. 


Mil  gracias,  aprecio  mucho 
su  fineza  ;  no  es  preciso  de- 
cirle  que  la  mia  es  igual- 
mente  muy  de  Yd. 

Pues  ;  a  la  disposicion  do 
Vd. — hasta  la  vista—  or,  hasta 
mas  ver. 

Mandeme  Vd.  en  lo  que 
pueda  serle  util. 

Ignalmente  me  ofrezco  a 
las  ordenes  de  Vd. 

Que  Vd.  lo  pase  bien. 

Que  le  vaya  a  Vd.  sin  no~ 
vedad. 

Vaya  Vd.  enhorabuena.* 

Bien  venido,  Don  Beltran, 
me  alegro  mucho  de  verle. 
<j  Cuando  llego  Vd.  ? 

Mil  gracias,  Don  Salvador  ; 
llegue  ayer  noche,  para  lo 
que  Vd.  guste  mandar. 

^Y  como  lo  ha  pasado  Vd.? 

Perfectisimamente. 

£  Donde  ha  estado  Vd. 
tanto  tiempo  ? 

He  hecho  un  viajecito  a 
Madrid  y  a  otras  partes. 

Ola  !  y  que  tal  le  ha  ido  a 
Vd.? 

Muy  bien — de  lo  mejor. 

Vaya,  me  alegro. 

Pasado  mafiana  salgo  para 
Sevilla,  y  si  se  le  ofrece  al- 
guna  cosa  no  tiene  Vd.  mas 
que  mandar. 


*  Enhorabuena  is  a  compound  word  from  en  hora  buena  (literally,   in  a 
good  hour),  expressive  of  good  will,  of  all  that  is  propitious. 


402 


DIALOGUES. 


Thank  you  ;  1  have  noth- 
ing at  present  to  trouble  you 
with  ;  and  when  will  you  be 
back  ? 

Within  a  few  weeks. 

Well,  I  wish  you  your 
health,  there  and  back. 

I  wish  you  every  happi- 
ness. 

Good-by,  till  we  meet 
again. 

Apropos !  I  have  some- 
thing to  trouble  you  with. 

What  is  it? 

Have  the  goodness  to  re- 
member me  most  kindly  to 
our  good  friend  N. — Do  not 
forget. 

Do  not  fear  ;  it  shall  not 
escape  my  memory. 

So  ;  good-by. 

Farewell.  j 

A  pleasant  journey ! 


Mil  gracias,  no  se  me 
ocurre  nada  por  ahora  con 
que  molestarle  ;  y  <?  cuandp 
estara  Vd.  de  regreso  ? 

Dentro  de  pocas  semanas. 
Ea  pues,  que  vaya  Yd.  y 
vuelva  con  salud. 

Que  lo  pase  YtJ.  con  feli- 
cidad. 

A  Dios,  hasta  mas  ver. 

Ah !  se  me  ocurre  un  en- 
carguito. 

I  Que  es  ? 

Que  tenga  Vd.  la  bondad 
de  dar  mil  afectos  de  mi 
parte  a  nuestro  buen  amigo 
N. — No  se  le  olvide  a  Vd. 

Descuide  Vd.  que  no  se  me 
pasara  de  la  memoria — no  lo 
echare  en  olvido. 

Con  que  ;  pasarlo  bien. 

Quedese  Vd.  con  Dios.* 

Vaya  Vd.  con  Dios.* 

I  Feliz  viaje ! 


BETWEEN  A  GENTLEMAN  AND  A  ENTRE  UN  CABALLERO  Y  UNA 


LADY. 


SENORA. 


(Your  most  obedient). 
How  do  you  do,  madam? 

Quite  well,  I  thank  you  : 
and  how  do  you  do  f 


A  los  pies  de  Vd.  Sefiora  ; 
I  como  lo  pasa  Vd.  ? 

Sin  novedad  ;  y  <j  Vd.  caba- 
llero  ? 


*  The  literal  translation  of  "Quede  Vd.  con  Dios"  is,  Kemain  yon  with 
God ;  and  of  "  Vaya  Vd.  con  Dios,"  Go  you  with  God  ;  and  they  are 
equivalent  in  meaning  to:  God  be  with  you.  Both  these  expressions  are 
used  only  in  a  familiar  manner  ;  the  former  by  the  person  that  takes 
leave,  and  the  latter  by  the  one  that  remains. 


DIALOGUES. 


403 


(At  your  service,  madam). 
Very  well,  I  thank  you. 

I  am  glad  to  see  you  so 
well. 

Thank  you  ;  you  are  very 
kind. 

You  are  looking  very  well, 
indeed. 

I  am  much  better,  thank 
you  kindly. 

It  was  long  since  I  had  the 
pleasure  of  seeing  you. 

Perhaps  you  have  been  in 
the  country  ? 

Not  at  all — I  have  been 
engaged  in  a  variety  of  du- 
ties, and  trifling  things. 

And  I  suppose  also  in  ban- 
quet, parties,  &c.  ? 

Why — it  is  the  season  for 
amusements. 

It  is  true ;  and  you  do 
right  to  participate  in  them. 

And  tell  me,  pray,  how  are 
your  mother  and  sisters  ? 

They  are  all  exceedingly 
well ;  I  am  obliged  to  you. 

And  your  father  and  bro- 
thers ? 

They  are  at  present  at 
Segovia  ;  but  we  have  heard 
from  them  this  week,  and 
they  were  quite  well. 

Well,  I  am  very  happy,  and 
I  beg  you  to  offer  my  re- 
spects to  your  mother  and 
Bisters  :  and  when  you  write 


A  la  disposicion  de  Vd. 
Senora. 

Me  alegro  de  ver  a  Vd.  tan 
bueno,  or,  sin  novedad. 

Mil  gracias ;  agradezco  la 
bondad  de  Vd. 

Tiene  Vd.  muy  buen  sem- 
blante,  Senora. 

Estoy  mucho  mejor,  gra- 
cias por  su  atencion. 

Hacia  mucho  tiempo  que 
no  tenia  el  gusto  de  ver  a 
Vd. 

<?  Estaria  Vd.  quiza  en  el 
campo  ? 

Nada,  Senora,  ocupado  en 
mil  quehaceres  y  frioleras. 

Y  supongo  tambien  en  con~ 
vites,  tertulias,  &c.  ? 

j  Que  quiere  Vd. !  es  la 
estacion  de  las  distracciones. 

Verdad  es  ;  y  hace  Vd.  bien 
en  aprovecharse  de  ellas. 

Y  digame  Vd.  Senora ; 
I  como  lo  pasan  su  mama  y 
hermanas  ? 

Todas  estan  a  cual  mejor  ; 
agradezco  la  atencion  de  Vd. 
i  Y  su  papa  y  hermanos  ? 

Estan  actualmente  en  Se- 
govia ;  pero  hemos  tenido 
noticias  de  ellos  esta  semana, 
y  quedaban  sin  novedad. 

Vaya,  me  alegro  infinito  ; 
y  suplico  tenga  Vd.  la  bondad 
de  ponerme  a  los  pies  de  su 
mama  y  hermanas  ;  y  cuando 


404 


DIALOGUES. 


to  your  father  and  brothers, 
to  forward  my  kind  remem- 
brance to  them. 

I  shall  not  fail  to  do  all 
you  desire  me. 

I  shall  esteem  it  greatly, 
and  pray  excuse  the  trouble. 

No  trouble  at  all,  sir. 

With  your  permission,  I 
must  take  leave  of  you,  and 
I  hope  to  have  the  pleasure 
of  seeing  you  soon  again. 

The  pleasure  will  be  mine. 

So  (madam,  your  most 
obedient),  till  we  meet  again. 
Good-by. 

Good-by  to  you,  sir:  fare- 
well. 


escriba  Vd.  k  su  papa  y  her- 
manos  de  darles  muchos 
recados  de  mi  parte. 

Quedara  Yd.  servido  en 
todo. 

Se  lo  estimare  infinito, 
Senora,  y  perdone  Vd.  la 
molestia. 

No  hay  de  que,  caballero. 

Con  su  permiso,  me  des- 
pido  de  Vd.  ;  y  espero  volver 
pronto  a  tener  el  gusto  de 
verla. 

El  gusto  sera  mio. 

Con  que,  Senora,  servidor 
de  Vd.  hasta  la  vista,  que  lo 
pase  Vd.  sin  novedad. 

Hasta  mas  ver,  caballero, 
que  Vd.  lo  pase  bien. 


OF    THE   WEATHER. 

What  weather  is  it  ? 
It  is  fine  weather. 
It  is  bad  weather. 
It  is  cold  to-day. 
It  was  warmer  yesterday. 
I  am  very  cold. 
My   fingers    are    numbed 
with  cold. 
I  feel  the  heat  very  much. 
I  do  not  feel  warm. 
It  is  dry  weather. 
It  is  very  damp  weather. 

The  wind  runs  high. 
The  wind  is  getting  very 
strong. 


DEL    TIEMPO. 

Que  tiempo  hace  ? 

Hace  buen  tiempo. 

Hace  mal  tiempo. 

Hace  frio  hoy. 

Ayer  hizo  mas  calor. 

Tengo  mucho  frio. 

Tengo  los  dedos  entumidos 
de  frio. 

Siento  mucho  el  calor. 

Yo  no  siento  calor. 

Hace  un  tiempo  seco. 

Hace     un     tiempo      muy 
humedo. 
Hace,  6,  ccrre  mucho  viento. 

El  viento  arrecia. 


DIALOGUES. 


405 


It  is  a  tremendous  weather. 

The  weather  is  very  change- 
able, 

The  weather  is  very  un- 
settled 

The  weather  is  getting  j 
milder.  ( 

The  wind  is  changed. 

What  wind  is  it  ? 

North.     South. 

East.     West. 

Southwest. 

Southeast. 

Northwest.     Northeast. 

Does  it  rain  ?  It  does  not 
rain. 

Drops  of  rain  are  falling. 

It  freezes,  it  thaws,  it  hails. 

The  river  has  begun  to 
freeze,  and  it  will  not  be  long 
before  there  is  skating. 

Are  you  fond  of  skating  ? 

It  is  an  exercise  that  I  am 
very  fond  of. 

There  is  a  sleet  falling. 

It  thunders,  it  lightens. 

The  sky  is  overcast. 

What  a  thick  mist ! 

It  is  very  cloudy. 

It  is  going  to  rain. 

It  threatens  to  rain. 

It  begins  to  rain.  It  driz- 
zles. 

It  pours.  It  rains  in  tor- 
rents. 

It  is  only  a  r  bower. 


Hace  un  tiempo  espantoso. 

Hace  un  tiempo  muy 
variable. 

El  tiempo  esta  muy  decom- 
puesto. 

Se  compone  el  tiempo. 

Abonanza  6  escampa. 

Ha  cambiado  el  viento. 

I  Que  viento  hace  ? 

Norte,  6  tramontane 
Sud,  6  sur. 

Levante,  6  este.  Ponien« 
te,  6  este. 

Sudoeste. 

Sudeste. 

Norueste.     Nordeste. 

I  Llueve  ?    No  llueve, 

Caen  gotas  de  agua. 
Hiela,  deshiela,  graniza. 
El  rio  ya  empezo  a  helarse, 
y  pronto  se  correran  patines. 

<:Es  Vd.  aficionado  a  pati- 
nar  ? 

Es  ejercicio  que  me  agrada 
mucho. 

Cae  aguanieve. 

Truena,  relampaguea. 

El  cielo  esta  cargade. 

i  Que  neblina  tan  espesa  I 

Esta  muy  nublado. 

Va  a  Hover. 

Amenaza  lluvia. 

Empieza  a  Hover.  Lloviz- 
na. 

Llueve  a  cantaros,  or  a  tor 
rentes. 

Es  solo  un  aguacero. 


406 


DIALOGUES. 


It  is  a  passing  cloud. 

"We  see  the  rainbow. 

The  clouds  are  dispersing. 

The  weather  clears  up. 

The  sky  is  serene,  or, 
cloudless. 

The  rain  is  over. 

It  is  a  starlight  night. 

The  moon  shines  beauti- 
fully. 

It  has  frozen  very  hard. 

Large  flakes  of  snow  are 
falling. 
•    The  pavement  is  slippery. 

It  is  very  muddy. 

The  air  is  getting  milder. 

The  season  is  very  back- 
ward. 

The  sun  begins  to  be 
powerful. 

The  weather  is  delightful. 

It  is  neither  too  hot  nor 
too  cold. 

The  days  are  growing  long. 

It  is  intensely  hot. 

It  is  suffocatingly  warm  ; 
sultry. 

It  is  Very  dusty. 

We  are  now  in  the  hottest 
part  of  the  summer  :  the  sun 
strikes  very  hot. 

Let  us  shelter  ourselves. 

The  mornings  and  evenings 
are  very  delightful. 

The  days  are  growing 
short,  or,  are  drawing  in. 


Es  una  niue  pasajera. 

Se  ve  el  arco  iris. 

Las  nubes  se  disipan. 

El  tiempo  se  aclara. 

El  cielo  esta  sereno,  6, 
despejado. 

Ya  paro  de  Hover. 

Hace  una  noche  estrellada. 

Hace  un  hermoso  claro  de 
luna. 

Ha  caido  una  terrible  hela- 
da. 

Caen  grandes  copos  de 
nieve. 

El  piso  esta  resbaladizo. 

Hay  mucho  lodo,  6  fango. 

Se  pone  mas  templado  el 
aire. 

La  estacion  esta  muy  atra- 
sada. 

El  sol  empieza  a  tomar 
fuerza. 

El  tiempo  esta  delicioso. 

No  hace  ni  mucho  frio,  ni 
calor. 

Los  dias  van  creciendo. 

Hace  un  calor  intenso. 

Hace  un  calor  sofocante, 

Hace  mucho  polvo. 

Estamos  ya  en  lo  mas 
recio  del  verano  :  el  sol 
abrasa  ;  da  de  piano. 

Pongamonos  el  abrigo. 

Las  m ananas  y  las  noches 
estan  deliciosisima»s 

Van  acortando  los  dias. 


DIALOGUES. 


407 


Day  breaks  very  late,  and 
nights  sets  in,  or,  it  grows 
dark,  very  early. 

We  are  approaching  the 
worst  season  of  the  year. 

I  believe  we  are  going  to 
have  a  storm. 

Do  you  hear  the  thunder  ? 

How  vivid  the  lightning  is ! 

A  thunderbolt  has  fallen. 

The  weather  is  very  stormy. 

It  is  very  cloudy. 
The  sea  is  very  rough. 

Two  ships  have  stranded. 
Another  is  making  signals 
of  distress. 

The  weather  is  calming. 


EATING   AND    DRINKING. 

Are  you  hungry  ? 

I  am  neither  hungry  nor 
thirsty. 

I  am  very  hungry  and 
thirsty. 

I  am  dying  with  thirst. 

Give  me  something  to 
drink. 

I  am  starving. 

Give  me  something  to  eat. 

I  have  a  voracious  appetite. 

I  feel  as  if  I  could  eat  some- 
thing. 

Eat  something. 

What  will  you  have  to  eat? 

Whatever  there  be  ready. 

Will  you  have  some  meat, 
fish? 


Amanece  muy  tarde,  y 
anochece,  6  oscurece  muy 
temprano. 

Vamos  a  entrar  en  la  peor 
estacion  del  ano. 

Creo  que  vamos  a  tener 
tempestad. 

£  Oye  Vd.  los  truenos  ? 

j  Que  relampagos  tan  vivos  ! 

Ha  caido  un  rayo. 

Esta  el  tiempo  muy  bo- 
rrascoso. 

Esta  muy  nublado. 

El  mar  esta  uuiy  embrave- 
cido. 

Dos  buques  han  encallado. 

Otro  estapidikjndo  socorro. 

Ya  va  calmapdo  el  tiempo. 


DEL    COMER    If    BEBER. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  b^mbre  ? 

No  tengo  ni  ha.»vbre  ni  sed. 

Tengo   mucha    twabre   y 
sed. 

Me  muero  de  sed- 
Deme  Vd.  de  bebe*. 

Estoy  muerto  de  hawbr* 
Deme  Vd.  algo  que  comer 
Tengo  un  apetito  voraz. 
Tengo  ganas  de  comer. 

Coma  Vd.  algo. 
,?  Que  quiere  Vd.  comer  ? 
Lo  que  hubiere  pronto. 
^Quiere  Vd.  carne,  pescado? 


4:08 


DIALOGUES. 


Yes  ;  and  some  wine  and 
water. 

Do  you  wish  anything  else 
to  eat? 

I  have  eaten  sufficiently. 

I  could  relish  a  glass  of 
bier. 

Give  me  a  bit  of  cheese. 

Bring  me  some  fruit. 

I  am  quite  satisfied. 

Do  not  give  me  any  more. 


Si  ;  y  un  poco  de  vino  cor 
agua. 

£  Quiere  Vd.  comer  otra 
cosa  ? 

He  comido  bastante. 

De  buena  gana  beberia  an 
vaso  de  cerveza, 

Deme  Vd,  un  pedazito  da 
queso, 

Traigame  Vd,  alguna  fruta« 

Estoy  satisfecho. 

No  me  de  Vd,  mas. 


THE    TIME    THE    CLOCK,    ETC. 

What  hour  is  it  ? 

Do  you  know  what  o'clock 
it  is? 

I  believe  it  is  one  o'clock. 

It  is  just  upon  the  point  of 
one, 

A  quarter  past  one. 

I  believe  it  is  two  (o'clock). 

Half  past  two, 

A  quarter  to  three. 

Ten  minutes  to  four. 

Five  minutes  past  four. 
Ten  minutes  past  five. 
Twenty  minutes  past  six. 
It  is  going  to  strike  seven. 
It  has  just  struck  eight. 
I  shall  come  at  about  eight. 
Nine  o'clock  is  striking. 
It  is  near  ten. 
It  is  past  eleven. 
It  is  exactly  twelve. 
It  is  noon — midnight. 


LA    HOEA,    EL   RELOJ,    ETC. 

I  Que  hora  es  ? 

I  Sabe  Vd.  que  hora  es  ? 

Me  parece  que  es  la  una. 
La  una  esta  al  caer. 


La  una  y  cuarto. 

Creo  que  son  las  dos. 

Las  dos  y  media. 

Las  tres  menos  cuarto. 

Las  cuatro  menos  diez  (mi 
nutos). 

Las  cuatro  y  cinco. 

Las  cinco  y  diez. 

Las  seis  y  veinte. 

Van  a  dar  las  siete. 

Acaban  de  dar  las  ocho. 

Vendre  a  eso  de  las  ocho. 

Estan  dando  las  nueve. 

Son  cerca  de  las  diez. 

Son  las  once  pasadas. 

Sou  las  doce  en  punto. 

Es  medio  dia — media  no- 
che. 


DIALOGUES. 


409 


I  did  not  think  it  was  so 
late. 

I  thought  it  was  earlier. 

How  the  hours  fly  ! 

What  is  the  time  by  your 
watch  ? 

It  does  not  go.  It  is  stop- 
ped. 

I  have  not  wound  it  up. 

It  goes  too  fast.  It  goes 
too  slow. 

Does  your  watch  go  right? 

It  stops  sometimes. 

It  is  out  of  order. 

I  must  give  it  to  the  watch- 
maker to  regulate,  or,  repair 
it  for  me. 

Have  the  goodness  to  take 
this  watch  to  pieces,  for  in 
winding  it  up  it  stopped,  and 
I  fear  the  balance  wheel  has 
got  out  of  order. 

It  is  the  main-spring  that  is 
broken. 

Indeed?  Then  you  must 
put  a  new  one  to  it. 

I  would  also  like  you  to 
change  the  hands  for  gold 
ones  ;  and  regulate  the  watch 
well,  and  tell  me  when  I  may 
return  for  it. 

At  the  end  of  the  week,  if 
you  please,  because  it  wants 
cleaning  also. 

Is  that  watch  a  repeater, 
there,  in  the  window? 

Yes,  Sir ;  and  I  can  war- 
rant it  to  be  a  superior  watch 
in  every  respect. 


No  crei  que  f  uese  tan  tarde. 

Creia  que  era  mas  tempra- 
no 

j  Como  pasan  las  horas ! 

,;  Que  hora  tiene  Vd.  en  su 
reloj  ? 

No  anda.     Esta  parado. 

No  le  he  dado  cuerda. 
Adelanta.     Atrasa. 

^Va,  or,  andabien  su  reloj? 

Se  para  algunas  vezes. 

Esta  descompuesto. 

Es  menester  que  lo  de  al 
reloj  ero  para  que  me  lo  cora- 
ponga. 

Tenga  Vd.  la  bondad  de 
desarmar  este  reloj,  pues  al 
darle  cuerda  se  par©,  y  temo 
se  hay  a  daiiado  la  pendola. 

Es  el  niuelle  real  que  se 
ha  roto. 

<?Si?  Pues  sera  menester 
que  le  ponga  uno  nuevo. 

Quisiera  tambien  que  cam- 
biara  las  manecillas,  por  unas 
de  oro  ;  y  arregleme  Vd.  bien 
el  reloj,  y  digame  cuando 
puedo  volver  por  el. 

Al  fin  de  esta  semana,  si 
Vd.  gusta,  poque  sera  menes- 
ter tambien  limpiarle. 

^Es  de  repeticion  ese  reloj 
que  esta  alii  en  la  ventana? 

Si,  iSeiior ;  y  puedo  salir 
fiador  por  el  que  es  primoroso 
en  todo  y  por  todo. 


410 


DIALOGUES. 


Tell  me  the  exact  time. 

You  may  see  it  in  that 
chronometer,  or  in  that  time- 
piece. 

Could  you  not  lend  me  a 
w  atch,  although  it  Were  a  com- 
mon one,  until  you  repaired 
mine  ? 

Yes,  Sir  ;  you  may  take  this 
one,  which  keeps  very  exact 
time. 

Thank  you. 


Digame  Vd.  la  hora  exacta. 

Puede  Vd.  verla  en  ese  cro- 
no  metro,  6  en  aquel  reloj  de 
sobremesa. 

<:No  podria  Vd.  prestarme 
un  reloj,  aunque  fuese  ordi- 
nario,  hasta  que  me  compon- 
ga  el  mio  ? 

Si,  Sefior;  puede  Vd.  lle- 
varse  este,  que  anda  muy 
exacto. 

Muchas  gracias. 


BISING   AND   DRESSING. 

For  a  Gentleman. 

Is  it  time  to  rise? 
I  believe  it  is. 
Are  you  an  early  riser  ? 
I  am  not   fond   of  rising 
very  early. 

I  am  not  generally  lazy. 

Have  you  slept  well  ? 

So  so.  The  mosquitos 
would  not  allow  me  to  rest. 

I  have  had  a  very  restless 
night. 

T  '  •  >carceiy  closed  my 
eyes  Ute  whole  night. 

I  retired  to  bed  very  late 
last  night. 

I  am  loth  to  leave  my  bed. 

I  am  going  to  ring  the  bell 
for  the  valet  to  come  up  and 
assist  me  to  dress. 

John ;  has  the  laundress 
brought  my  linen  ? 


LEVANTARSE   Y    VESTIRSE. 

Para  un  Cdballero. 

I  Es  hora  de  levantarse  ? 
Creo  que  si. 
<?  Es  Vd.  madrugador  ? 
No  soy  amigo  de  madrngar. 

No  soy  por  lo  comun  pere- 
zoso. 

<J  Ha  dormido  Vd.  bien  ? 

Tal  cual.  Los  mosquitos 
no  me  han  dejado  sosegar. 

He  pasado  muy  mala  no- 
che. 

Apenas  he  pegado  los  ojos 
en  toda  la  noche. 

Me  acoste  muy  tarde  ano- 
che. 

Tengo  pereza  de  levantar- 
me. 

Voy  a  tocar  la  campanula, 
para  que  suba  el  camarero  y 
me  ayude  a  vestir. 

Juan  :  ^  ha  traido  mi  ro- 
pa  la  lavandera? 


DIALOGUES. 


411 


Yes,  Sir     here  it  is. 

Then  give  me  a  clean  shirt, 
a  pair  of  cotton  stockings,  and 
a  pair  of  silk  ones. 

Here  are  your  morning- 
gown  and  slippers. 

Bring  me  the  drawers  and 
trousers  I  wore  yesterday. 

"Where  are  the  braces  and 
the  garters  ? 

Clean  my  shoes,  for  I  shall 
not  put  on  boots  to-day, 

I  also  want  another  cravat, 
for  this  is  dirty. 

Let  them  bring  me  the 
wash-hand  basin,  water,  soap, 
and  a  towel. 

There  is  your  comb,  some 
pomatum,  scented  oil,  tooth- 
brush, and  powder. 

Call  the  barber  to  come 
and  shave  me,  and  tell  him 
to  bring  good  razors,  because 
mine  are  not  very  sharp. 

Here  is  the  barber,  Sir. 

I  want  you  to  shave  me, 
and  to  cut  my  hair. 

Don't  take  off  much  from 
the  sides. 

See  in  the  glass  if  it  is  to 
your  liking. 

Do  you  wish  any  warm 
water,  Sir? 

Yes  ;  bring  it  quickly. 

Brush  my  clothes  and  bea- 
ver hat. 

In  the  wardrobe  you  will 
find  a  blue  cloth  coat,  a  vel- 


Si,  Sefior  ;  aqui  esta. 

Pues  deme  una  camisa  lim- 
pia,  un  par  de  mediae  de  algo- 
don,  y  otro  de  seda. 

Aqui  tiene  Vd,  su  bata  y 
las  chinelas. 

Traigame  los  calzoncillos  y 
pantalones  que  use  ayer. 

I  Donde  estan  los  tirantea 
y  las  ligas  ? 

Limpieme  los  zapatos  pues 
hoy  no  me  pondre  botas. 

Quiero  tanibien  otra  corba- 
ta,  que  esta  esta,  sucia. 

Que  me  traigan  el  lavama- 
nos,  agua,  jabon,  y  toalla. 

Alii  tiene  Yd.  el  escarme- 
nador,  pomada  y  aceite  de 
olor,  cepillo  y  polvos  para  los 
dientes. 

Llame  al  barbero  que  me 
venga  a  afeitar,  y  que  traiga 
buenas  navajas,  porque  las 
mias  no  estan  muy  afiladas, 

Aqui  esta  el  barbero,  Sefior. 

Quiero  que  me  afeite  Yd,, 
y  me  corte  el  pelo. 

No  corte  Yd,  mucho  de  los 
lados. 

Mire  Yd.  en  el  espejo  si  esta 
a  su  gusto, 

,?  Quiere  Yd.  agua  caliente, 
Sefior  ? 

Si ;  traigala  pronto. 

Acepille  mis  vestidos  y  el 
sombrero  de  castor. 

En  el  guardaropa  hallara 
una  casaca  de  pano  azul,  u» 


412 


DIALOGUES. 


vet  waist-coat,  and  a  pair  of 
cassimere  trousers. 

Give  me  a  clean  handker- 
chief, my  gloves  and  cane. 

You  will  do  better  to  take 
your  umbrella  and  overcoat, 
for  it  looks  likely  to  rain. 

For  a  Lady. 
Did  you  ring,  Ma'am  ? 

Did  you  call,  Ma'am  ? 

Yes  ;  come  and  help  me  to 
dress. 

I  have  brought  warm  water 
in  the  wash-hand  basin. 

Give  me  clean  towels  and 
scented  soap. 

Let  them  light  a  fire,  quick. 

Stir  the  fire. 

Give  me  my  silk  stockings 
and  garters,  and  my  dressing- 
gown. 

On  the  toilet-table  you  will 
find  the  comb,  oil,  and  poma- 
tum. 

I  want  first  the  tooth-brush 
and  powder,  and  fresh  water 
to  rinse  my  mouth. 

Come  and  comb  me. — Soft- 
ly, you  hurt  me. 

Shall  I  curl  your  hair? 

No  ;  I'll  do  it  myself, — 
Give  me  the  looking-glass. 

Lace  my  stays  now. — Don't 
lace  so  tight  :  loosen  it  a  little. 
— There,  that  will  do. 


chaleco  de  terciopelo  y  un  pai 
de  calzones  de  casimir. 

Deme  uu  panuelo  limpio, 
los  guantes  y  el  baston. 

Hara  Vd.  mejor  en  tomar  el 
paraguas  y  sobretodo,  porque 
parece  que  va  a  Hover. 

Para  una  Sefiora, 

,;Ha  tocado  Vd.,  la  campa- 
nula, Sefiora  ? 

<;Ha  Uamado  Vd.,  Sefiora? 

Si ;  venga  Vd.  a  ayudarme 
a  vestir. 

He  traido  agua  caliente  en 
el  lavamanos. 

Deme  toallas  limpias  y  ja- 
bon  de  olor. 

Que  enciendan  lumbre,lue- 
go. 

Atizela  lumbre,  or,  el  fuego. 

Vengan  las  medias  de  seda, 
las  ligas,  y  la  bata. 

Sobre  el  tocador  hallara 
Vd.  el  escarmenador,  aceite  y 
pomada. 

Qttiero  antes  el  cepillo  de 
los  dientes  y  polvos,  y  agua 
fresca  para  enjuagar  la  boca. 

Venga  Vd.  a  peinarme. — 
Poco  a  poco,  que  me  lastima. 

(jQuiere  Vd.  que  le  haga 
rizos  ? 

No  ;  yo  me  los  hare. — 
Deme  el  espejo. 

Ateme  ahora  el  corse. — No 
apriete  tan  to  el  cordon: 
sueltele  un  poco. — Basta  ;  asi 
esta  bien. 


DIALOGUES. 


413 


Give  me  a  clean  shirt  and 
petticoat. 

I  wiM  wear  my  black  silk 
dress  to-day. 

Pin  my  waistband ;  there 
is  the  pincushion. 

I  want  my  Spanish  leather 
shoes. 

Where  are  my  rings  and 
ear-rings  ? 

Give  me  a  clean  cambric 
handkerchief. 

At  what  time  will  you  go 
out  to-day  ? 

At  about  noon,  and  have 
my  shawl,  black  velvet  bon- 
net and  muff  ready. 


Ddme  una  camisa  limpia  y 
zagalejo. 

Hoy  me  pondre  el  vestido 
de  tafetan  negro. 

Prendame  con  un  alfiler  el 
cinturon  ;  ahiesta  el  acerico, 

Quiero  los  zapatos  de  cor- 
doban. 

I  Donde  estan  mis  sortijaa 
y  pendientes  ? 

Deme  un  panuelo  limpio 
de  batista. 

<:A  que  hora  saldra  Vd. 
hoy? 

A  eso  de  medio  dia,  y  tenga 
listos  mi  chal,  el  sombrero  de 
terciopelo  negro,  y  el  inan- 
guito. 


BREAKFAST. 

What  are  you  in  the  habit 
of  taking  for  breakfast  ? 

I  beg  you  will  not  prepare 
any  thing  extra  for  me,  for  I 
generally  take  nothing  but 
tea,  and  bread  and  butter. 

I  treat  you  without  com- 
pliments, as  a  friend. 

I  would  be  sorry  if  you  did 
otherwise. 

Take  some  hot  rolls. 

Boy,  bring  the  tea-pot, 
cups,  sugar,  milk,  cream,  tea- 
spoons, salt. 

Is  the  toast  ready  ? 


EL  ALMUERZO. 

£  Que  acostumbra  Vd.  al- 
morzar,  or  desayunar? 

Por  mi  no  haga  Vd.  ningun 
extraordinario  le  suplico,  por- 
que  por  lo  comun  no  tomo 
mas  que  te  con  pan  y  mante- 
quilla. 

Le  trato  a  Vd.  sin  cumpli- 
mientos,  como  amigo. 

Sentiria  lo  contrario. 

Tome  Vd.  molletes  calien- 
tes. 

Muchacho,  trae  la  tetera, 
las  tazas,  el  azucar,  la  leche, 
la  nata,  las  cucharitas,  la  sal. 

i  Estan  ya  las  tostadas  ? 


414 


DIALOGUES. 


Which  do  you  j  refer,  a  cup 
of  coffee,  or  a  cup  of  choco- 
late ? 

For  the  present  I  shall  con- 
tent myself  with  a  cup  of  tea. 

Is  the  tea  to  your  liking  ? 

Quite  so. 

I  will  take  a  little  more 
sugar,  if  you  please. 

How  do  you  like  the  flavor 
of  this  tea  ? 

It  is  excellent  ;  and  it  is 
evident  you  are  a  connoisseur. 

Here  are  some  poached 
eggs. 

Do  me  the  favor  to  help 
yourself  to  what  you  like  best. 

Thank  you,  I  am  going  to 
try  some  of  that  sausage. 

Take  a  small  slice  of  ham, 
or  some  bacon. 

You  eat  nothing;  do  not 
make  ceremonies,  I  beseech 
you. 

I  am  obliged  to  you,  I  do 
not  make  compliments ;  I 
have  made  a  hearty  break- 
fast. 


<;Cual  prefiere  Vd  ;  una  taza 
de  cafe,  6  un  pocillo  de  choco- 
late? 

Por  ahora  me  contentare 
con  una  taza  de  te. 

I  Esta  el  te  a  su  gusto  ? 

Esta  muy  bueno. 

Tornare  un  poqaito  mas  de 
azucar,  si  Vd.  me  lo  permite. 

I  Como  halla  Vd.  el  sabor 
de  este  te  ? 

Es  escelente  ;  y  se  conoce 
que  es  Vd.  intelijente. 

Aqui  hay  huevos  pasadoa 
por  agua. 

Hagame  Vd.  favor  de  ser- 
virse  de  lo  que  mas  le  guste. 

Gracias,   voy  a  probar  de 

aquella  longaniza. 

Tome  Vd.  una  tajadita  de 
jamon,  6  un  poco  de  tocino. 

Vd.  no  come  nada ;  no 
haga  ceremonias,  le  suplico. 

Mil  gracias,  no  gasto  cum- 
plimientos  ;  he  almorzado 
perfectamente. 


TO    WRITE  A  LETTER. 

Has  the  mail  arrived  ? 

Is  this  mail  day  ? 

Give  me  a  few  sheets  of 
letter  paper,  some  pens  and 
ink,  the  sand-box,  blotting- 
paper,  envelopes,  steel-pens, 
the  letter-folder. 


PARA  ESCRIBIR  DNA  CARTA. 

I  Ha  llegado  el  correo  ? 

£  Es  hoy  dia  de  correo  ? 

Deme  Vd.  algunos  pliegos 
de  papel  de  cartas,  plunias, 
tinta,  la  salvadera,  tele t a, 
sobres,  plumas  de  acero,  la 
plegadera. 


DIALOGUES. 


415 


Lend  me  your  penknife  ; 
mine  is  not  sharp. 

Here  it  is,  and  you  will 
find  sealing  wax,  wafers,  and 
the  seal  upon  the  desk. 

I  have  to  write  a  letter. 

I  have  a  large  packet  of 
letters  to  write  to-day. 

Whom  do  you  write  to  ? 

I  am  going  to  answer,  or, 
to  reply  to  Mr.  B.'s  of  the 
15th  ultimo,  and  the  3d  in- 
stant. 

I  expected  a  letter  to-day 
from — . 

This  letter  has  been  de- 
layed. 

Have  you  looked  at  the 
date? 

What  day  of  the  month  is 
this? 

The  fifteenth — the  twenti- 
eth. 

These  pens  are  good  for  no- 
thing. 

This  ink  is  rather  thick. 

You  will  find  better  in  the 
inkstand. 

Send  to  inquire  if  there  are 
any  letters  forme  at  the  post- 
office. 

Shall  I  make  one  envelope 
of  all  these  ? 

Have  you  put  your  signa- 
ture to  them  ? 

What  address  shall  I  put 
to  this? 


Presteme  Vd.  su  cortaplu- 
mas  ;  el  mio  no  corta. 

Aqui  le  tiene  Vd.,  y  sobre 
el  escritorio  encontrara  lacre, 
obleas  y  el  sello. 

Tengo  que  escribir  una 
carta. 

Tengo  hoy  un  correo  muy 
largo. 

I  A  quien  escribe  Vd.  ? 

Voy  a  responder,  or,  a  con- 
testar  a  las  del  Sr.  B.  del 
quince  del  mes  pasado,  y  del 
tres  del  corriente. 

Esneraba   una   carta   hoy 

Esta  carta  viene  atrasada. 

<?  Ha  mirado  Vd.  la  fecha  ? 

<j A  cuantos  estamoshoy  del 
mes  ? 

A  quince — a  veinte. 

Estas  plumas  no  valen 
nada. 

Esta  tinta  esta  algo  espesa. 

En  el  tintero  hallara  Vd. 
mejor. 

Envie  Vd.  a  preguntar  si 
hay  cartas  para  mi  en  el 
correo. 

I  Quiere  Vd.  que  cierre 
todas  estas  bajo  una  misma 
cubierta  ? 

£  Las  ha  firmado  Vd.  ? 

£  Que  sobre  pondre  a  esta  ? 


416 


DIALOGUES. 


There  is  no  time  to  spare, 
if  you  wish  to  frank  jour  let- 
ters. 


No  hay  que  perder  tiempo, 
si  quiere  franquear  las  car* 
tas. 


DINNER. 

Let  us  walk  into  the  din- 
ing-room :    dinner  is  ready. 

Mr.  N.,  have  the  goodness 
to  hand  this  lady  to  the  table. 

With  much  pleasure. 

Be  so  good  as  to  be  seated. 

Which  do  you  prefer,  ver- 
micelli, or  chicken  broth  ? 

I'll  take  some  vermicelli. 

I  believe  you  have  no 
spoon. 

Yes,  here  is  one,  but  I  will 
wait  till  the  soup  cools  a  little. 

The  napkin  is  yours. 

A  glass  of  wine  is  recom- 
mended after  the  soup  ;  there- 
fore have  the  goodness  to  tell 
me  what  kind  I  shall  help 
you  to. 

This  is  Malaga,  that  is 
Sherry,  and  the  other  is  Bor- 
deaux. 

Your  good  health. 

Thank  you — your's. 

What  do  you  think  of  this 
wine  ? 

It  is  excellent. 

Do  you  prefer  roast  or 
boiled  ? 


LA  COMIDA. 

Pasemos  al  comedor,  pues 
la  comida  esta  ya  lista. 

Caballero  N.,  tenga  Vd.  la 
bondad  de  acompanar  esta 
sefiora  a  la  mesa. 

Con  muchisimo  gusto. 

Sirvanse  Vds.  tomar  asien- 
tos. 

<*  De  cual  prefiere  Vd. :  sopa 
de  fideos,  6  caldo  de  gallina? 

Tomare  un  poco  de  fideos. 

Creo  que  no  tiene  Vd. 
cuchara. 

Si,  aqui  tengo;  pero  aguar- 
dare  que  se  enfrie  un  poco 
la  sopa. 

Esta  servilleta  es  de  Vd. 

Despues  de  la  sopa,  una 
copita  de  vino  sienta  bien ; 
asi,  tenga  Vd.  la  bondad  de 
decirme  de  que  vino  le 
servire. 

Este  es  de  Malaga,  ese  de 
Jerez,  y  aquel  otro  es  de 
Burdeos. 

Vaya,  a  la  salud  de  Vd. 
Buen    provecho — a   la   de 
Vd. 

iQue  le  parece  a  Vd.  este 
vino  ? 

Es  escelente. 

I  Prefiere  Vd.  cocido  6 
asado  ? 


DIALOGUES. 


417 


I'll  help  myself  to  some  of 
fchis  ragout,  if  you  will  allow 
me. 

Help  yourself  to  your 
taste. 

A  clean  plate,  and  knife 
ami  fork  for  tins  lady. 

Try  some  pickles  to  sharp- 
en the  appetite. 

I  hope,  ladies  and  gentle- 
men, you  will  do  as  if  you 
were  at  home. 

Whilst  you  carve  that  tur- 
key, I'll  take  upon  myself  to 
mix  the  salad. 

Dress  it  to  your  own  taste. 

Here  are  the  cruets. 

Allow  me  to  help  you  to 
some  of  this  roast  duck. 

What  part  shall  I  help  you 
to? 

Any  part  ;  but  I  am  sorry 
to  give  you  the  trouble. 

It  is  giving  me  much  pleas- 
ure. 

I'll  take  a  wing,  if  you 
please,  or  part  of  a  leg,  with 
a  little  sauce. 

Allow  me  to  trouble  you  to 
pass  the  mustard. 

With  much  pleasure. 

Take  a  glass  of  bier. 

Madam,  you  neither  eat 
nor  drink. 

Excuse  me,  for  I  have  eaten 
heartily. 

You  see  what  kind  of  table 


Si  Vd.  me  permits,  me 
servird  de  este  guisado. 

Sirvase  Vd.  a  su  gusto. 

Un  plato  limpio,  cuchillo 
y  tenedor  para  esta  sefiora. 

Coma  Vd.  algunos  encur- 
tidos  para  estimular  el  ape~ 
tito. 

Senores,  espero  que  haran. 
Vds.  como  en  su  casa. 

Mientras  Vd.  trincha  ese 
pavo,  tomare  por  mi  cuenta 
la  ensalada, 

Alifiela  Vd.  a  su  gusto. 

Aqui  estan  las  vinagreras. 

Permitame  Vd.  que  le  sirva 
un  poco  de  este  pato  asado. 

<?De  que  parte  le  servire  ? 

Cualquiera  ;  pero  siento 
incomodar  a  Vd. 

Es  gusto  que  me  propor- 
ciona. 

Tomare  un  alon,  si  Vd. 
gusta,  6  parte  de  la  pierna 
con  un  poco  de  salsa. 

Sirvase  Vd.  tener  la  bondad 
de  pasar  la  mostaza. 

Con  muchisimo  gusto. 

Tome  Vd.  un  vaso  de  eer- 
veza. 

Sefiora,  Vd.  ni  come  ni 
bebe. 

Perdoneme  Vd.,   pues   he 
comido  bastante  bien. 
Ya  ve  Vd.  la  mesa  que  tene- 


418 


DIALOGUES. 


we  keep  ;  we  do  not  use  deli- 
cacies. 

I  rather  prefer  a  plain  din- 
ner— too  great  a  variety  of 
dishes  spoils  the  appetite  ; 
but  nevertheless  you  have 
given  us  a  princely  dinner. 

Do  not  suffer  me  to  eat 
alone. 

I  recommend  you  these 
veal  cutlets. 

Well  I  am  going  to  try  one, 
only  to  keep  you  company. 

Madam,  that  shoulder  of 
lamb  appears  very  inviting, 
allow  me  to  help  you  to  some 
of  it. 

Do  you  prefer  lean  or  fat  ? 

i 

A  little  of  both,  and  excuse 
the  trouble. 

Waiter,  bring  the  cork- 
screw, and  uncork  that  bot- 
tle of  Malmsey,  and  the  other 
of  Port. 

I  am  going  to  make  you 
try  this  wine,  which  has  been 
highly  recommended  to  me. 

It  is  exquisite,  it  has  a  good 
color,  and  appears  old. 

Gentlemen,  be  so  good  as 
to  take  care  of  the  ladies. 

Madam,  if  you  allow  me,  I 
am  going  to  help  you  to  a 
bit  of  this  trout,  or  this 
Whiting  with  caper  sauce. 


mos  ;  no  gastamos  golosi- 
nas. 

Yo  prefiero  mas  bien  una 
comida  sencilla  ;  la  much  a 
variacion  de  platos  vicia  al 
apetito  ;  y  sin  embargo  nos 
ha  dado  Yd.  una  comida  de 
principes. 

No  me  dejen  Vds.  comer 
solo. 

Kecomiendo  a  Vd.  estas 
chuletas  de  ternera. 

Voy  pues  a  probar  una, 
solo  por  hacer  compania  a 
Vd. 

Sefiora,  ese  brazuelo  de 
cordero  parece  que  convida, 
permiteme  Vd.  que  le  sirva 
deel. 

Le  agrada  a  Vd.  del  magro 
6  del  gordo  ? 

Un  poquito  de  ambos,  y 
dispense  Vd.  la  molestia. 

Mozo,  trae  el  tir<tbuzon,  y 
destapa  esa  botella  de  Mal- 
vasia,  y  la  otra  de  Oporto. 

Voy  a  que  pruebe  Vd.  de 
este  vino,  que  me  lo  han 
ponderado  mucho. 

Parece  esquisito,  tiene 
buen  color,  y  es  anejo. 

Caballeros,  tengan  Vds.  la 
bondad  de  cuidar  de  las 
senoras. 

Senora,  si  Vd.  me  permite, 
voy  a  servirle  de  esta  trucha, 
6  de  esta  pescadilla  compues- 
ta  con  salsa  de  alcaparras. 


DIALOGUES. 


410 


Madam,  I  have  the  honor 
to  drink  to  your  health. 

Sir,  yours. 

Gentlemen,  let  the  decan- 
ters go  round. 

Let  them  clear  away  the 
table  cloths,  and  bring  the 
dessert. 

You  have  selected  the 
choicest  fruits  of  the  season. 

Will  you  try  some  of  this 
tart? 

I  would  prefer  some  of  the 
apple  pie. 

Madam,  with  your  permis- 
sion, I  am  going  to  send  you 
some  of  these  preserves. 

These  jellies  are  excellent. 

Sir,  will  you  have  the  kind- 
ness to  cut  a  slice  of  musk- 
melon,  and  another  of  water- 
melon, for  this  lady. 

With  the  greatest  pleasure. 

Are  those  peaches  sweet? 

They  are  not  very  ripe,  but 
I  recommend  these  apricots. 

The  raspberries  are  also 
very  delicious. 

Here  are  various  kinds  of 
liquors,  choose  which  you  like 
best. 


Senora,  tengo  el  honor  de 
brindar  a  su  salud. 

Senor,  por  la  de  Vd. 

Senores,  vayan  dando  vuel- 
ta  las  botellas. 

Que  quiten  los  manteles  y 
traigan  los  postres. 

Ha  recojido  Yd.  las  frutas 
mas  esquisitas  de  la  estacion, 
Pruebe  Vd.  de  esta  torta. 

Antes  bien  preferiria  del 
pastel  de  manzanas. 

Senora,  con  el  permiso  de 
Vd.  voy  a  servirle  un  poco 
de  estas  conserva3. 

Estas  jaleas  son  escelentes. 

Caballero,  <?quiere  Vd.  te- 
ner  la  bondad  de  cortar  una 
tajada  de  melon,  y  otra  de 
sandia  para  esta  senora. 

Con  muchisimo  gusto. 

I  Son  dulces  aquellos  melo- 
cotones? 

No  estan  muy  maduros, 
pero  recomiendo  estos  albari- 
coques. 

Tambien  las  frambuesas 
son  deliciosisimas. 

Aqui  hay  rosolis  de  varias 
clases,  elijan  Vds.  a  su  gusto. 


THE   THEATRE. 


EL    TEATRO. 


Have  you  been  to  the  thea-  i  Ha  estado  Vd.  en  el  tea- 

tre?  tro? 

I  went    the   night   before  Estuve  antes  de  anoche. 
last. 


420 


DIALOGUES. 


What  was  played,  or,  per- 
formed ? 

Comedy,  tragedy,  an  opera, 
an  interlude ;  next  followed 
the  ballet,  and  an  entertain- 
ing farce. 

Was  there  a  full  house  ? 

It  was  crowded  to  excess. 

How  do  you  like  the  thea- 
tre ? 

The  decorations  are  splen- 
did. 

And  the  company  has  some 
good  actors. 

The  old  man  performs  his 
part  exceedingly  well. 

I  like  his  manner  of  acting 
very  much. 

The  clown  is  inimitable. 

Who  acted  the  part  of  the 
duke  in  the  tragedy  ? 

The  principal!  actor  ;  and 
the  principal  actress,  the 
countess. 

There  are  always  good 
players  (or  actors)  in  this 
house. 

Those  that  appeared  last 
night  were  first-rate  perform- 
ers. 

They  played  two  new 
pieces. 

What  does  the  play-bill 
announce  to-day  ? 

A  new  opera  by  the  cele- 
brated— 

Is  it  the  first  performance  ? 

No ;  it  was  performed  last 


I  Que  se  represuitaba  ? 

Comedia,  trajedia,  opera, 
intermedio  ;  en  seguida  hubo 
baile,  y  un  divertido  sainete. 

I  Habia  mucha  entrada  ? 
No  cabia  la  gente. 
£  Que*  tal  es  el  teatro  ? 

Sus  decoraciones  son  pri- 
morosas. 

Y  la  compania  tiene  algu- 
nos  buenos  papeles. 

El  barba  hace  su  papel  de 
lo  mejor. 

Me  gusta  mucho  su  modo 
de  representar. 

El  gracioso  es  inimitable. 

£  Quien  hizo  el  papel  del 
duque  en  la  trajedia  ? 

El  primer  galan  ;  y  la  con- 
desa,  la  primera  dama. 

En  este  teatro  hay  siempre 
buenos  comicos  (or  come- 
diantes). 

Los  que  salieron  anoche 
eran  representantes  de  pri- 
mer orden. 

Dieron  dos  piezas  nuevas. 

<r  Que  anuncia  hoy  el  cartel? 

Es  una  opera  nueva  del  fa- 
moso — 

I  Es  la  primera  representa- 
cion? 

No ;  se  dio  la  seraana  pa- 


DIALOGUES. 


421 


week,    and    it   was  received 
with  general  applause. 

Of  course,  you  have  already- 
heard  the  prima  donna  f 

0  yes;  what  a  full  and 
melodious  voice  she  has ! 

How  do  you  like  the  first 
tenor  ? 

He  is  one  of  the  best. 

Will  you  do  me  the  favor 
to  accompany  me  this  evening 
to  the  opera  ? 

With  much  pleasure  ;  but 
we  must  go  early  ;  otherwise 
we  shall  find  no  seats. 

Will  you  go  in  the  boxes  ? 

1  would  prefer  the  pit,  be- 
cause one  sees  and  hears  bet- 
ter there. 

Very  well,  I  am  going  to 
procure  two  tickets. 

This  evening  we  shall  hear 
a  singer  that  makes  her  first 
appearance  on  the  boards. 

Let  us  go  in  and  take  our 
places. 

The  house  is  very  splendid. 

The  boxes,  galleries,  and 
pit  are  already  filled. 

What  a  magnificent  specta- 
cle the  tout  er^emble presents! 

The  orchestra  has  begun. 

Bravo !  the  overture  pleas- 
es me  much  ;  it  is  a  fine  com- 
position. 

The  curtain  is  rising. 

Observe  how  splendid  the 
scenery  and  dresses  are. 


sada,  y  fue  recibida  con  uni- 
versal aplauso. 

£  Vd.,  por  supuesto,  habra 
oido  a  la  prim  era  cantarina  ? 

O  si ;  j  que  voz  tan  llena  y 
melodiosa  tiene ! 

£  Que  tal  le  parece  el  pri- 
mer tenor? 

Es  de  lo  mas  famosos. 

<;Quiere  Vd.  tener  la  com- 
placencia  de  acompanarme 
esta  noche  a  la  opera? 

Con  mucho  gusto  ;  pero  es 
menester  que  vayamos  tem- 
prano,  sin 6  no  hallaremos 
asientos. 

,;Quiere  Vd.  ir  a  palco? 

Yo  preferiria  el  patio,  por- 
que  se  ve  y  se  oye  mejor  alii. 

Bien,  voy  a  tomar  dos  en- 
tradas,  or  billetes. 

Esta  noche  oiremos  una 
cantarina  que  sale  a  las  tablas 
por  la  primera  vez. 

Entremos  y  cojamos  nues- 
tros  asientos. 

El  teatro  esta  brillantisimo. 

Los  palcos,  corredores  y 
patios  estan  llenos  ya. 

j  Que  espectaculo  tan  mag- 
nifico  presenta  el  todo! 

Ya  empieza  la  orquesta. 

j  Bien !  me  gusta  la  obertu- 
ra  ;  es  bella  composicion. 

Alzan  el  telon. 

Observe  Vd.  las  decoranio- 
nes  y  los  trajes  que  riquisi- 
mos. 


422 


DIALOGUES. 


Bravo!  bravo!  they  deserve 
applause. 

The  music  is  excellent. 

Who  is  the  conductor  of 
the  orchestra? 

He  is  an  Italian. 

What  do  you  think  of  the 
new  singer. 

She  appears  to  possess  a 
.very  fine  voice,  and  her  action 
is  very  graceful ;  let  us  ap- 
plaud her. 

The  prompter  speaks  too 
loud. 

The  recitatives  are  very 
good,  and  the  choruses  are 
superb. 

The  second  act  begins. 

The  author  has  failed  in 
this  part ;  it  has  no  connec- 
tion, although  the  music  is 
good,  without  which,  the  piece 
itself  would  not  have  much 
merit. 

Do  you  hear  how  they  hiss 
that  man  ? 

We'll  see  how  the  third  act 
will  go  off. 

Come,  the  winding  up  of 
the  piece  is  not  so  bad. 

The  curtain  drops. 

Shall  we  go  and  take  some 
refreshment  ? 

Just  as  you  please. 

Let  us  return  to  our  seats, 
for  perhaps  the  ballet  has 
coTumenced. 

That  is  the  principal  dan- 
cer ;  observe  how  gracefully 
bhe  dances. 


jBien!  jbien!  merecen  a- 
plausos. 

La  musica  es  escelenta. 

(iQuien  es  el  director  de  la 
orquesta? 

Es  un  italiano. 

I  Que  dice  Yd.  de  la  nueva 
cantarina  ?. 

Parece  que  tiene  bellisima 
voz,  y  mucha  gracia  en  su  ac- 
cion  ;  vamos  a  palmotearla. 

El  apuntador  se  deja  oir 
demasiado. 

Los  recitativos  son  muy 
buenos,  y  los  coros  suberbios. 

Ya  empieza  el  segundo  acto. 

En  esta  parte  ha  faltado  el 
autor,  pues  no  tiene  enlace  ; 
apesar  de  que  la  musica  es 
buena,  pues  sin  ella  la  pieza 
de  por  si  no  tendria  mucho 
merito. 

iOye  Vd.  como  silban  a 
aquel  ? 

Yeremos  que  tal  sera  el  ter- 
cer  acto. 

Vamos,  el  desenlace  ha  es- 
ta'do  mejor. 

Bajan  el  telon. 

<?Quiere  Yd.  que  vayamos 
a  refrescar  ? 

Como  Yd.  quiera. 

Yolvamos  a  ocupar  nuer.tros 
asientos,  porque  ya  habra 
principiado  el  baile. 

Esa  es  la  bailarina  princi- 
pal ;  mire  Yd.  con  que  gracia 
baila. 


DIALOGUES 


She    scarcely   appears    to 
touch  the  boards. 
Encore!  encore! 
The  ballet  is  concluded. 


A    JOURNEY    BY    RAILROAD. 

Let  us  go  to  the  railroad 
office  to  inquire  when  the 
train  leaves  for . 

At  what  time  does  the  first 
train  leave  ? 

At  nine  o'clock  precisely. 

Then  it  will  be  better  to 
take  our  tickets  and  occupy 
our  places. 

Shall  we  go  in  the  first  or 
second  class  coach  ? 

For  a  short  journey,  in 
fine  weather,  I  prefer  the 
second  class  ;  but  for  a  long 
journey,  the  first  class. 

They  are  going  to  put  on 
the  steam-engine,  and  to 
start. 

We  have  reached  the  first 
station. 

We  have  now  to  pass 
through  a  very  long  tunnel, 
and  over  several  bridges. 

Here  comes  a  train  in  the 
opposite  direction  :  with 
what  rapidity  we  pass  each 
other ! 

We  have  arrived  at  the 
terminus. 

This  is  quick  travelling. 


423 

Parece  que  no  toca  el  suelo. 


j  Otra !  j  otra ! 
Se  acabo  el  baile. 


UN    VIAJE  POR    FERROCARRTL. 

Vamos  al  despacho  del 
ferrocarril,  a  ver  cuando  salen 
los  coches  para . 

I A  que  hora  parte  el 
primer  tren  ? 

A  las  nueve  en  punto. 

Pues  mejor  sera  tomar  las 
cedulas  y  ocupar  nuestros 
asientos. 

(Jlremos  en  coche  de  pri- 
mera,  6  de  segunda  clase  ? 

Para  iin  viaje  corto,  y 
cuando  hace  buen  tiempo, 
prefierolos  de  segunda  clase  ; 
pero  para  un  viaje  largo,  los 
de  primera  clase. 

Yan  a  poner  la  maquina 
de  vapor  y  a  partir. 

Hemos  llegado  a  la  primera 
parada. 

Tenemos  que  pasar  ahora 
por  un  camino  subterraneo, 
muy  largo,  y  por  encima  da 
varios  puentes. 

Aqui  viene  un  tren  en 
direccion  opuesta  :  j  con  que 
rapidez  nos  pasamos  uno  al 
otro  ! 

Ya  hemos  llegado  al  para- 
dero. 

Esto  se  llama  viajar  de 
prisa. 


424 


DIALOGUES. 


Not  too  quick  when  pressed 
for  time  ;  but  too  rapid  to 
enjoy  the  view  of  the  country. 


No  demasiado  de  prist 
cuando  las  boras  son  precio- 
sas  ;  pero  si  para  gozar  la 
vista  del  pais. 


A  SEA- VOYAGE. 

Do  you  know  of  any  vessel 
going  to ? 

There  is  a  schooner  to  sail 
with  the  first  fair  wind. 

Where  can  I  meet  the  cap- 
tain? 

Here  he  is. 

Your  most  obedient. 

Can  you  take  me  as  a 
passenger  to ? 

Very  willingly  ;  and  you'll 
be  well  accommodated. 

Wbat  will  you  charge  me 
for  the  passage,  including 
board  ? 

One  hundred  dollars. 

Have  you  any  passengers  ? 

Yes,  sir,  several. 

Very  well,  I  am  going  for 
my  passport  and  bill  of 
health. 

You  will  have  the  good- 
ness to  send  your  baggage  on 
board  this  afternoon,  because 
if  the  wind  changes  during 
the  night,  we  shall  sail  out  at 
daybreak. 

Then  you  are  quite  ready 
to  sail. 

Yes,  sir,  I  have  the  whole 
of  the  cargo  on  board. 

Is  yours  a  fast-sailing  ves- 
el? 


POR   MAR. 

I  Sabe  Vd.  de  algun  buque 
que  vaya  para ? 

Hay  una  goleta  que  saldra 
con  el  primer  viento. 

£  Donde  hallare  a  su  capi- 
tan? 

Aqui  le  tiene  Vd. 

Servidor  de  Vd. 

i  Podra  Vd.  llevarme  de  pa- 
sajero  j)ara ? 

Con  mucho  gusto,  e  ira  Vd. 
con  toda  comodidad. 

i  Cuanto  me  lie  vara  Vd.  poi 
pasaje  y  comida? 

Cien  pesos. 

I  Tiene  Vd.  pasajeros  ? 

Si,  Sefior,  varios. 

Pues  bien,  voy  a  sacar  el 
pasaporte,  y  la  boleta  de  sa- 
nidad. 

El  equipaje,  tendra  Vd.  la 
bondad  de  embarcarlo  esta 
tarde,  porque  si  se  muda  el 
viento  durante  la  noche,  sal-' 
dremos  al  amanecer. 

Pues  entonces  esta  Vd.  en» 
teramente  listo  para  salir. 

Si,  sefior,  tengo  ya  todo  el 
cargamento  abordo. 

£Es  muy  velero  su  buque  ? 


DIALOGUES. 


425 


Perhaps  there  is  not  a  ves- 
sel in  port  that  can  sail  with 
her. 

Very  well,  when  you  are 
ready  to  sail,  have  the  good- 
ness to  let  me  know  it. 

Let  me  know  where  you 
reside,  and  you  may  be  as- 
sured that  I'll  not  forget. 

I  am  lodging  in  New  street, 
No.  3,  on  the  second  floor. 
My  name  is  N.  N. 

Sir,  the  captain  sent  me  to 
inform  you  that  he  will  get 
under  weigh  in  an  hour's 
time. 

Very  well ;  where's  his 
boat  ? 

It  is  alongside  the  wharf, 
waiting  for  the  pasengers. 

Well,  then,  I  am  going  to 
settle  with  the  landlady,  and 
set  off  immediately. 

Boat,  ahoy! 

Push  off,  then. 

Mind  how  you  get  along- 
side. 

Don't  fear,  sir. 

Get  on  board,  sir ;  lay  hold 
of  that  rope. 

They  are  heaving  up  an- 
chor. 

Fair  wind  ;  we  are  going 
on  nicely. 

Boy,  where  have  they  put 
my  trunks  ? 

They  are  in  your  berth,  sir. 

Is  my  bed  made  ?  for  I  dare 
say  I  shall  be  sea- sick,  and 
want  to  lie  down. 


Quiza  no  habra  uno  en  el 
puerto  que  le  iguale. 

Bien,  cuando  estuviere  Vd. 
para  salir,  tendra  la  bondad 
de  avisarmelo. 

Deme  Vd.  las  senas  de  su 
casa,  y  descuide  Vd.  que  no 
me  olvidare. 

Estoy  hospedado  en  la  Ca- 
lle  Nueva,  niimero  3,  segundo 
piso.     Me  llamo  N.  N. 

SefLor,  me  manda  el  capitan 
avisarle  que  den^io  de  una 
hora  se  hara  a  la  vela. 

Pues  bien ;  £  donde  esta  su 

Esta  atracado  al  muelle, 
aguardando  a  los  pasajeros. 

Bueno,  pues  voy  a  arre- 
glar  cuentas  con  el  am  a  de 
casa,  y  partire  sin  detencion. 

i  Ah  del  bote ! 

Alargue,  pues. 

.Cuidado  como  atracan  al 
buque. 

No  tenga  Vd.  cuidado. 

Suba  Vd. ;  agarrese  de  esa 
cuerda. 

Ya  alzan  el  ancla. 

Buen  viento  ;  vamos  bien. 

Muchacho,  £  donde  han 
puesto  mis  baules  ? 

En  su  camarote  de  Vd. 

£  Esta  hecha  mi  cama  ? 
porque  es  regular  que  me  ma- 
ree  y  quiera  acostarme. 


426 


DIALOGUES. 


It  appears  you  are  not  a 
good  sailor. 

Is  this  your  first  voyage  ? 

No  ;  I  have  made  several, 
though  not  very  long  ones. 
Our  port  is  in  sight. 

We  shall  cast  anchor  in  a 
couple  of  hours. 

We  are  already  in  the  har- 
bor. 

There  comes  the  pilot-boat. 

Where  do  you  ccme  from  ? 

From  B. 

Is  there  any  quarantine  ? 

No,  sir. — Give  me  your 
papers. 

The  passengers  may  land 
when  they  like. 


Parece  que  no  es  Yd.  buen 
marinero. 

I  Es  su  primer  viaje  de 
mar? 

No  ;  he  hecho  algunos  ya, 
aunque  no  muy  largos. 

Ya  avistamos  nuestro  puer- 
to. 

En  un  pa/  de  horas  dare- 
mos  fondo. 

Ya  estamos  en  puerto. 

Alii  viene  la  lancha  del 
practico. 

,J  De  donde  vienen  Vds.? 

DeB. 

<:Hay  cnarentena  alguna? 

No,  senor. — Deme  Vd.  loa 
papeles  del  barco. 

Los  pasajeros  pueden  des- 
embarcar  cuando  quieran. 


AT   AN   EATING-HOUSE. 

We  want  something  for 
dinner. 

Do  you  wish  to  dine  in  a 
private  room  ? 

It's  quite  immaterial  to  us. 

Bring  me  the  bill  of  fare. 

What  will  you  have,  gentle- 
men? 

Bring  us  some  soup,  and 
then  a  duck  and  green  peas. 

Now  give  us  a  nice  omelet. 

What  wine  do  you  wish, 
sirs  ? 


EN   UNA   HOSTERfA. 

Queremos  alguna  cosa  pa- 
ra comer. 

£  Quieren  Vds.  comer  en  un 
cuarto  separado  ? 

Nos  es  indiferente. 

Venga  la  lista. 

I  Que  quieren  Vds.,  sefio- 
res? 

Traiganos  sopa,  y  despues 
un  pato  con  guisantes. 

Venga  ahora  una  tortilla 
sabrosa. 

I  De  que  vino  quieren  Vds.? 


DIALOGUES. 


427 


A  bottle  of  the  country- 
wine,  and  another  of  Madeira. 

Let  us  have  good  bread. 

Will  you  have  coffee  and 
milk? 

Bring  two  cups. 

What  kind  of  roast  do  you 
prefer  ? 

A  leg  of  mutton  with  po- 
tatoes, and  a  capon  with 
some  salad. 

Waiter,  a  bottle  of  bier. 

For  me,  a  little  Cognac 
brandy. 

Give  me  the  mushroom 
sauce  and  the  pickles. 

Make  me  a  salad  of  toma- 
toes and  sweet  peppers, 
with  oil,  vinegar,  onions,  and 
garlic. 

Would  you  like  to  have  any 
fish? 

Yes  ;  a  pair  of  fried  soles. 

What  will  you  have  for 
dessert  ? 

A  raspberry  tart,  and  some 
of  the  best  fruit  you  have. 

Make  out  your  bill. 


Una  botella  de  vino  del 
pais,  y  otro  de  Madera. 

Denos  Yd.  pan  bueno. 

4  Quieren  Yds.  cafe  con  le- 
che? 

Traiga  dos  tazas. 

I  Que  asado  quieren  Yds.  ? 

Una  pierna  de  carnero  con 
patatas  y  un  capon  con  ensa- 
lada. 

Mozo  ;  una  botella  de  cer- 
veza. 

Para  mi,  un  poco  de  aguar- 
diente de  Francia. 

Deme  Yd.  la  salsa  de  hon- 
gos  y  los  encurtidos. 

A  mi  una  ensalada  de  to- 
mates,  y  pimientos  dulces, 
con  aceite,  vinagre,  cebollas, 
y  ajo.  ; 

I  Quieren  Yds.  algun  pesca- 
do? 

Si ;  un  par  de  lenguados 
fritos. 

I  Que  quieren  Vds.  para 
postres  ? 

Una  torta  de  frambuesas  y 
alguna  de  la  mejor  fruta  que 
tuviere. 

Yenga  la  cuenta  del  gasto. 


HIRING   AN   APARTMENT. 


PARA  ALQUILAR  UNA  HABITACION 

I  see  you   have   rooms  to  Yeo  que  tiene  Yd.  cuartos 

let,  and  I  want  a  sitting  room,  para  alquilar  ;    necesito  una 

a   bed-room,    and    dressing-  sala,  un  dormitorio  y  un  ga- 

room.  binete. 


423 


DIALOGUES. 


Do  you  wish  them  furnish- 
ed, or  unfurnished  ? 

Furnished, 

I  have  three  rooms  on  the 
second  floor,  with  a  kitchen. 

I  don't  require  a  kitchen, 
nor  would  I  wish  the  rooms 
to  be  on  the  second  floor. 

I  have  on  the  first  floor  a 
sitting-room,  and  two  rooms 
adjoining,  which  I  think  will 
suit  you. 

Can  they  be  seen  ? 

Yes,  Sir  ;  be  so  good  as  to 
follow  me,  and  I'll  show  you 
them. 

These  are  the  rooms :  they 
have  windows  that  look  into 
the  street,  and  they  are  very 
airy. 

What  do  you  ask  for  these 
rooms  ? 

Twenty  dollars  a  month. 

It  is  rather  an  exorbitant 
price. 

You  will  not  think  it  high, 
when  you  consider  how  well 
fitted  up  the  rooms  are,  with 
good  tables,  chairs,  sofa,  mir- 
rors, and  every  thing  requi- 
site for  a  gentleman's  apart- 
ments. 

You  must  also  observe  that 
the  location  is  one  of  the 
best  in  the  city. 

Can  I  board  at  home  like- 
wise ? 

Yevs,  Sir ;  some  of  our  lodg- 
ers (who  are  all  highly  re- 


^  Los  quiere  Vd.  con  mue- 
bles,  6  sin  muebles? 

Con  muebles, 

Tengo  tres  piezas  en  el  se- 
gundo  piso,  con  su  cocina. 

No  necesito  cocina,  ni  qui- 
siera  que  fuesen  los  cuartos 
en  el  segundo  piso. 

Tengo  en  el  primer  piso, 
una  sala  con  dos  cuartos  in- 
mediatos,  que  creo  le  acomo- 
daran  a  Vd. 

I  Se  pueden  ver  ? 

Si,  sefior ;  tenga  Vd.  la 
bond  ad  de  seguirme,  y  se  los 
ensenare. 

Son  estos  :  tienen  ventanas 
que  dan  a  la  calle,  y  son  bas- 
tante  ventilados. 

iQue  pide  Vd.  por  estos 
cuartos  ? 

Veinte  pesos  al  mes. 

Es  un  precio  demasiado  su- 
bido. 

No  es  mucho  el  precio  con- 
siderado  lo  bien  adornados 
que  estan,  con  sus  buenas 
mesas,  sillas,  sofa,  espejos,  y 
lo  demas  necesario  para  la 
habitacion  de  un  caballero. 

Tambien  debe  Vd.  observar 
que  el  local  es  uno  de  los  me- 
jores  de  la  ciudad. 

<jPodre  tambien  comer  en 
casa? 

Si,  sefior;  algunos  de  los 
inquilinos  que  son  todos  jente 


DIALOGUES. 


429 


spectable)  board  with  us  ; 
and  we  keep  a  very  good 
table, 

What  do  you  charge  by  the 
day? 

At  the  rate  of  twenty  dol- 
lars a  month,  for  the  dinner 
alone,  and  thirty,  breakfast 
included. 

Very  well :  I'll  return  to- 
morrow, and  give  you  an  an- 
swer. 


de  bien,comen  con  nosotros, 
que  tenemos  una  mesa  muy 
bien  abastecida. 

^Cuanto  lleva  Vd.  por  dia? 

A  razon  de  veinte  pesos  al 
mes,  por  la  comida  sola,  y 
treinta  con  el  almuerzo. 

]?ues  bien  :  manana  volvere 
para  darle  a  Vd.  contestacion. 


WITH    A    SHOEMAKER. 

I  want  a  pair  of  boots  and 
a  pair  of  shoes. 

How  do  you  wish  the  boots, 
long  or  short  ? 

Show  me  both. 

These  are  of  the  best  leath- 
er :  will  you  try  them  on, 
Sir?  Here  are  the  boot- 
hooks. 

They  are  too  narrow. 

They  pinch  my  feet. 

If  you  can  put  your  instep 
in,  they  will  stretch,  or,  give 
way. 

Give  me  the  boot-jack. 

Show  me  another  pair. 

These  are  too  wide. 

It  will  be  better  that  you 
take  my  measure  for  a  pair  ; 
but  I  want  them  of  softer 
leather. 

I'll  make  them  as  you  de- 
sire. 


CON   UN   ZAPATERO. 

Necesito  un  par  de  botas  y 
un  par  de  zapatos. 

iComo  quiere  Vd.  las  bo- 
tas, largas  6  cortas? 

Enseneme  Vd.  unas  y  otras. 

Estas  son  del  mejor  cuero: 
I  quiere  Vd.  probarselas  ? 
Aqui  tiene  Vd.  los  ganchos. 

Me  estan  muy  estrechas. 

Me  lastiman  el  pie. 

Entrando  el  empeine,  ellas 
se  ensancharan,  or,  daran  de 
si. 

Deme  Vd.  el  sacabotas. 

A  ver  otro  par. 

Estas  son  muy  anchas. 

Mejor  sera  que  me  tome 
Vd.  medida  y  me  haga  un 
par  ;  pero  las  quiero  de  be- 
cerro  mas  suave. 

Se  las  hare  a  su  gusto. 


430 


DIALOGUES. 


Show  me  the  shoes  now. 

Do  you  wish  them  with 
double,  or  single  soles  ? 

With  single  soles,  without 
heels  ? 

Give  me  the  shoe-horn — I 
am  going  to  try  on  these. 

Those  fit  you  exceedingly 
well. 

They  are  too  tight. 

Stamp  pour  foot,  that  it 
may  enter  the  shoe  well. 

I  want  them  wider  across 
the  toes. 

Try  on  this  pair,  Sir. 

These  fit  me  well — put  the 
shoe-strings  on  them. 

When  will  you  send  me  the 
boots  ? 

At  the  end  of  the  week 
without  fail. 

Very  well ;  mind  you  use 
good  materials. 


Mue^treme  ahora  los  zapa- 
tos. 

<iLos  quiere  Vd.  de  suela 
doble  6  sencilla  ? 

De  suela  sencilla,  y  sin  ta- 
cones. 

Deme  Vd.  el  calzador — voy 
a  probarme  estos. 

Esos  le  sientan  a  Vd  muy 
bien. 

Me  estan  muy  ajustados. 

De  Vd.  con  el  pie  para  que 
entre  bien  en  el  zapato. 

Los  quiero  mas  anchos  de 
punta. 

Pruebese  Vd.  este  par. 

Estos  me  estan  bien — pon* 
gales  Vd.  las  cintas. 

^Cuando  me  enviara  Vd. 
las  botas  ? 

Al  fin  de  la  semana  sin 
falfca. 

Bien  ;  cuidado  que  ponga 
Vd.  buen  material. 


WITH   A   TAILOR. 

I  want  you  to  take  my 
measure  for  a  dress  coat,  a 
frock  coat,  a  waistcoat,  and  a 
pair  of  trowsers,  of  super- 
fine black  cloth. 

Here  are  samples  of  two  or 
three  kinds  of  cloth. 

I  like  this  best,  but  it  has 
too  much  gloss. 


CON   UN   SASTEE. 

Quiero  que  me  tome  Vd. 
medida  para  una  casaca,  una 
levita,  un  chaleco,  y  un  par 
de  calzones  de  pafio  negro 
superior. 

Aqui  tiene  Vd.  muestras 
de  dos  6  tres  clases  de  pano. 

Me  gusta  este  mejor,  pero 
tiene  mucho  lustre. 


DIALOGUES. 


431 


It  must  be  sponge^  ttie 
gloss  will  then  disappear,  &nd 
the  cloth  remain  soft  ,wid 
beautiful. 

Very  well,  make  thew  if 
this. 

I  will,  Sir. — When  do  you 
wish  to  have  them  ? 

At  the  end  of  the  week, 
but  don't  disappoint  me  ;  and 
make  me  a  dress  to  fit  well. 

Do  not  fear,  Sir ;  you  shall 
be  satisfied. 

Here  are  your  clothes,  Sir. 

Let  me  try  them  on,  to  see 
if  they  fit  well. 

The  coat  is  rather  tight 
across  the  waist,  and  does 
not  set  well. 

That's  nothing,  it  will  give 
way  when  you  have  worn  it 
two  or  three  times. 

It  appears  too  long  in  the 
skirt. 

It  is  the  fashion,  Sir. 

The  sleeves  of  the  frock 
coat  are  very  narrow  under 
the  arms,  and  the  back  is  full 
of  plaits. 

That  is  quickly  remedied, 
as  there  is  sufficient  to  let 
out. 

I  don't  like  this  lining,  it  is 
too  thick. 

Do  the  other  things  re- 
quire any  alteration  ? 


Es  menester  esponjarle 
con  lo  cual  se  le  quita  el  lus- 
tre, y  quedara  suave  y  her- 
moso. 

Bien,  hagamelos  Yd.  de 
este. 

Sera  Vd.  servido. — <?Para 
cuando  los  necesita  Vd.? 

Al  fin  de  la  semana  ;  pero 
no  me  falte  Vd.;  y  hagame 
un  vestido  que  me  venga  bien. 

Pierda  Vd.  cuidado,  que 
quedara  contento. 

Aqui  le  traigo  a  Vd.  sus 
vestidos. 

Vamos  a  probarlos,  a  ver  si 
me  vienen  bien. 

La  casaca  esta  algo  estre- 
cha  de  cintura,  y  no  me  sien- 
ta  bien. 

Eso  no  es  nada — dara  de  si 
con  dos  6  tres  vezes  que  la 
use  Vd. 

Parece  demasiado  larga  de 
falda. 

Es  la  moda,  caballero. 

Las  mangas  de  la  levita 
estan  muy  estrechas  en  los 
sobacos,  y  hace  muchas  arru- 
gas  la  espalda. 

Eso  tiene  pronto  remedio, 
pues  he  dejado  alforza. 


No  me  gusta  este  forro  ; 
muy  grueso. 


es 


uy  grueso. 

<,  Debo    alterar    las 

ezas? 


piezas 


otra* 


432  DIALOGUES. 

Don't  you  think  the  trow- 
sers  too  wide  ? 

They  are  worn  so  now. 

Put  another  button  and 
button-hole  to  the  waistcoat. 

I  want  you  also  to  repair 
this  overcoat,  and  to  put  a 
breast-pocket  to  it. 

It  shall  be  done,  Sir. 


I  No  le  parece  a  Vd.  loa 
calzones  muy  anchos  de  pier- 
na? 

Se  estilan  ahora  de  esa  ma- 
nera. 

Ponga  Vd.  otro  boton  y  ojal 
en  el  chaleco. 

Quiero  que  tambien  me  re- 
miende  este  sobretodo,  y  le 
ponga  tin  bolsillo  de  pecho. 

Sera  Vd.  servido,  caballero. 


WITH   A   LAUNDRESS. 

Here  is  the  laundress,  who 
has  come  for  your  linen. 

Here  is  the  list  of  the 
pieces  :  one  dozen  shirts,  six 
pairs  of  stockings,  six  cravats, 
two  night  shirts,  two  ditto 
caps,  two  pairs  of  drawers, 
half  a  dozen  handkerchiefs, 
and  three  waistcoats,  three 
muslin  dresses,  three  petti- 
coats, six  table-cloths,  twelve 
napkins,  four  pairs  of  sheets, 
six  pillow-cases,  and  twelve 
towels.  See  if  they  are  all 
right. 

They  are  all  right. — When 
do  you  require  them? 

As  soon  as  possible,  and 
let  them  all  be  well  washed 
and  ironed,  and  the  shirts 
well  plaited  and  starched, 
particularly  the  collars  and 
cuffs. 


CON    LA    LAVA.NDERA, 

Aqui  esta  la  lavandera  que 
ha  venido  por  la  rtopa. 

Aqui  esta  la  lista  de  las 
piezas  :  una  docena  de  cami- 
sas,  seis  pares  de  medias,  seis 
corbatas,  dos  camisas  de  dor- 
mir,  dos  gorros  idem,  dos  pa- 
res de  calzoncillos,  media  do- 
cena de  panuelos,  y  tres  cha- 
lecos,  tres  vestidos  de  muse- 
lina,  tres  enagnas,  seis  man- 
teles,  doce  servilletas,  cuatro 
pares  de  sabanas,  seis  fundas, 
y  doce  toallas.  Vea  Vd.  si 
estan  cabal es. 

Cabales  estan.  —  <;  Para 
cuando  las  quiere  Vd.? 

Lo  mas  pronto  que  sea  po- 
sible  y  que  venga  todo  bien 
lavado,  y  aplanchado  y  las 
camisas  bien  plegadas  y  almi- 
donadas,  particularmente  los 
cuellos  y  pufios. 


DIALOGUES. 


433 


I'll  take  care  that  you  shall 
be  satisfied,  and  I  will  also 
darn  the  stockings,  and  see 
if  any  thing  requires  mending. 


Quedara  Vd.  contento  en 
todo,  y  tambien  me  encarga- 
re  de  zurcir  las  niedias,  y 
de  hacer  las  composiciones 
necesarias. 


WITH   A   PHYSICIAN. 

Here  is  the  physician. 

Tell  him  to  have  the  good- 
ness to  walk  in. 

Good  morning,  Sir.  What 
is  the  mutter  ?  "What  do  you 
complain  of? 

I  have  a  fever,  and  feel  my 
whole  frame  very  weak. 

Show  me  your  tongue. 

It  is  very  foul. 

Your  pulse  is  likewise  very 
unequal. 

What  did  you  have  for  sup- 
per last  night  ? 

What  I  am  always  accus- 
tomed to  take,  except  a  little 
fruit. 

I  feel  a  heavy  weight  on 
my  stomach. 

You  must  take  some  purge 
immediately. 

I  am  going  to  prescribe  you 
a  draught  and  some  pills, 
which  you  will  send  for  to  the 
apothecary's. 

When  must  I  take  the 
draught  ? 

Instantly  ;  and  half  an  hour 
afterwards,     drink     two     or 


COX   UN    MEDICO. 

Aqui  esta  el  medico, 

Digale  Vd,  que  tenga  la 
bondad  de  pasar  adelante, 

Tenga  Yd.  muy  buenos 
dias. — <;  Que  siente  Yd.?  i  De 
que  se  queja? 

Me  siento  con  calentura,  y 
una  debilidad  en  todo  el  cuer- 

A  ver  la  lengua. 
Esta  muy  sucia. 
El  pulso  tambien  esta  bas- 
tante  alterado. 

I  Que  ceno  Yd.  anoche  ? 

Lo  de  costumbre,  con  es- 
cepcion  de  alguna  fruta. 

Me  siento  con  el  estomago 
muy  pesado, 

Necesita  Yd.  purgarse  in- 
mediatamente. 

Yoy  a  recetarle  una  bebida, 
y  unas  pildoras,  y  enviara  Yd. 
por  ellas  a  la  botica. 

(iCiiando  he  de  tomar  la 
bebida  ? 

Al  instante  ;  y  media  hora 
despues  beba  Yd.  dos  6  tres 


434 


DIALOGUES. 


three  cups  of  tea,  until  it  has 
operated  well;  and  at  bed- 
time, take  the  pills;  cover 
yourself  well,  lest  you  take 
cold,  and  I'll  return  and  see 
you  in  the  morning. 

Good  morning,  Sir ;  well, 
and  how  did  you  rest  during 
the  night  ? 

Very  badly,  doctor,  and  I 
am  afraid  I  am  getting  worse, 
although  I  have  scrupulously 
followed  your  orders, 

The  fever  will  not  leave  me, 
although  the  purge  has  had 
its  effect. 

Come  ;  this  is  owing  to 
your  debility. — Let  me  feel 
your  pulse. 

You  have  too  much  blood; 
send  for  a  doctor  and  let  him 
bleed  you,  or  put  on  a  few 
leeches  ;  and  if  you  do  not 
feel  better  with  that,  it  will 
be  necessary  to  order  a  blister 
to  be  put  on  you :  and  I'll 
call  in  and  see  you  again  to- 
morrow. 


tazas  de  td,  hasta  que  haya 
obrado  bien  ;  y  al  tiempo  de 
acosiarse,  tome  las  pildoras  ; 
arropese  bien,  no  se  resfrie,  y 
por  la  manana  volvere  a  ver 
aVd. 

Buenos  dias,  caballero ; 
vamos,  y  jcomo  ha  descansa- 
do  Vd.  durante  la  noche  ? 

Malameute,  sefior  doctor, 
y  creo  que  voy  empeorando, 
apesar  de  que  he  seguido  pun- 
tualmente  lo  dispuesto  por 
Vd. 

No  se  me  quiere  quitar  la 
calentura,  aunque  la  purga 
ha  hecho  su  efecto. 

Vamos;  eso  es  resultado  de 
la  debilidad. — A  ver  el  pulse. 

Tiene  Vd.  mucha  sangre  : 
haga  Vd,  Uamar  a  un  cirujano 
para  que  le  sangre,  6  bien 
que  le  ponga  unas  sanguijue- 
las  ;  y  si  con  eso  no  se  siente 
Vd.  mejor,  sera  preciso  orde- 
narle  un  vejigatorio  ;  y  mana- 
na pasare  otra  vez,  a  ver  a 
Vd. 


PROVERBS. 


REFRA^ES.  PROVERBS. 

A  boda  ni  a  bautizado,  no  vayas    Never  intrude  where  you  are  not 

sin  ser  convidado.  asked. 

A  buena  gana  no  hay  pan  duro.          Appetite  is  the  best  sauce. 
A  caballo  prestado  no  ha  que  mi-    You  must  never  look  a  gift  horse 

rarle  el  diente.  in  the  mouth. 

A  lo  hecho,  pecho.  Wnat  is  done  cannot  be  helped. 

A  mocedad  ociosa,  vejez  trabajosa.     Idleness  in  youth  brings  sorrow  in 

old  age. 
A  moro  muerto,  gran  lanzada.  Men  are  often  brave  when  the  dan- 

ger is  passed. 
A  muertes  y   a  idos,  ya  no  hay    The  absent  are  soon  forgotten. 

amigos. 
A  palabras  necias,  oidos  sordos.          A  foolish  question  requires  no  an- 
swer. 
A  padre  allegador,    hijo   espende-    After  a  gatherer  comes  a  scatterer. 

dor. 
A  perro  viejo,  no  hay  tuz,  tuz.  He  that  would  deceive  the  fox  must 

rise  betimes. 
A  quien  se  hace  de  miel,  moscas  le    Smear  yourself  with  honey  and  j7ou 

comen.  will  be  devoured  by  flies. 

A  quien  madruga,  Dios  le  ayuda.        Help  yourself  and  God  will  help 

you. 
A  su  tiempo  maduran  las  uvas.  The  pear  falls  when  it  is  ripe. 

Al  buen  entendedor,  con  una  pa-    A  word  to  the  wise. 

labra  le  basta. 
Al  freir  de  los  huevos,  se  vera.  The  proof  of  the  pudding  is  in  the 

eating  of  it. 
Al  hombre  bueno,  no  le  busquen     Seek  not  for  a  good  man's  pedigree. 

abolengo. 
Al  hierro  caliente,  batir  de  repente.     Strike  the  iron  while  it  is  hot. 
Al  loco  y  al  aire,  darles  calle.  It  is  as  useless  to  oppose  a  fool  as 

the  wind. 
Al  mas  ruin  puerco,  le  suelen  dar    A  good  bone  seldom  falls  to  a  good 

la  mejor  bellota.  .     dog. 

A.1  mentiroso,  conviene  ser  memo-    A  liar  should  have  a  good  memory. 

rioso. 
Al  villano,  dale  el  pid,  y  tomara  la    Give  a  villain  an  inch,  and  he  wilj 

mano.  take  an  ell. 

Aguas  pasadas  no  muelen  molino.      Passed  waters  grind  no  mill. 
Ahora  que  te  veo,  me  acuerdo.  Out  of  sight,  out  of  mind. 


433 


PRO VERBS. 


Aldgrate  pavo,  que  mafiana  te  plu- 

man. 
Aiuigo  viejo,  vino  auejo. 

Aruigo  del  buen  tiempo,   se  muda 

con  el  viento. 
Almistad  de  yerno,  como  sol  de  in- 

vierno. 
Amor  con  amor  se  paga. 
Ande  yo  caliente,  y  que  se  ria  la 

jente. 
Antes  que  te   cases,   mira  lo  que 

haces. 
Antes  eabeza  de  raton,  que  cola  de 

leon. 
Ausencias  causan  olvido. 
Aunque  la  mona  se  vista  de  seda, 

mona  se  queda. 

Bien  mal  adquerido,  a  nadie  ha  en- 

riquecido. 
Bien  vengan  mal,  si  vienes  solo. 
Bobo  callado,  por  sesudo  es  repu- 

tado. 
Buey  bravo,  en  tierra  ajena  se  hace 

manso. 

Cada  buhonero  alaba  sus  agujas. 

Cada  loco  con  su  tenia. 

Cada  oveja  con  su  pareja — 6,  Dios 

.  los  crie,  y  ellos  se  juntan. 

Cada  uno  juzga  por  su  corazon  del 

otro. 
Cada   uno  para   si,    y  Dios    para 

todos. 
Cada  uno  puede  hacer  de  su  capa 

un  sayo. 
Cada  uno  sabe  donde  le  aprieta  el 

zapato. 
Cobra  buena  fama,  y  Achate  a  dor- 

mir. 
Comer  y  rascar,  todo  es  empezar. 
Como  canta  el  abad,  responde  el  sa- 
cristan— 6,  cual  senor,  tal  criado. 
Con  el  tiempo  muduran  las  uvus. 
Contra  gusto  no  hay  disputa. 
Cortesfa  de    boca,    inucho   vale   y 

doco  cuesta. 


After  Christmas  comes  Lent.  — 
Every  day  is  not  a  holiday. 

Old  friends  and  old  wine  are  the 
best. 

A  friend  is  never  known  till  needed. 

A  son-in-law's  friendship  is  like  a 

winter's  sun. 
One  good  turn  deserves  another. 
Let  me  be   warm  and  fools  may 

laugh. 
Look  before  you  leap. 

Better  be  the  head  of  a  dog  than 

the  tail  of  a  lion. 
Out  of  sight,  out  of  mind. 
We  cannot  make  a  silken  purse  out 

of  a  sow's  e^r. 

B.1  gotten  goods  never  thrive. 

Misfortune  never  comes  alone. 

A  silent  fool  may  pass  for  a  wise 

man. 
Cocks    crow  well    on    their    own 

dunghills. 

Every  man  praises  his  own  goods. 
Every  fool  has  his  hobby. 
Birds  of  a  feather  flock  together. 

Every  man  measures  other  people's 

corn  by  his  own  bushel. 
Every  one  for  himself  and  God  for 

us  all. 
Every  one  may  do  as  he  likes  with 

his  own. 
Every  one  knows  where  the  shoe 

pinches  him. 
Get  a  good  name  and  you  may  lie 

abed  all  day. 
Appetite  comes  in  eating. 
Like  master,  like  man. 

Time  brings  every  thing  about 

Every  one  to  his  taste. 

Fair  words  go  far  and  cost  little 


PROVERBS. 


437 


Cria  cuervos  y  te  sacaran  los  ojos. 

Cuando  Dios  no  quiere,  los  santos 

no  pueden. 
Cuando  el  diablo  reza,   engafiarte 

quiere. 
Cuando  vieres  la  barba  de  tu  com- 

pafiero  pelar,  pon  la  tuya  a  re- 

mojar. 
Cuando  te  dieren  el  anillo,  pon  el 

dedillo. 
Cuando  una  puerta  se  cierra,  cien- 

to  se  abren. 
Cunnto  mayor  es  la  fortuna,  tanto 

mdnos  es  segura. 
Cuenta  y  razon  sustentan  amistad. 
Culpa  no  tiene,  quien  hace  lo  que 

debe. 

De  los  escarmentados,  se  hacen  los 

avisados. 
De  noche  todos  los  gatos  son  par- 

dos. 
Del  agua  mansa  me  libre  Dios,  que 

de  la  brava  me  librare'  yo. 
Del  arbol  caido,  todos  hacen  leiia. 

Del  dicho  al  hecho,  bay  gran  trecbo. 

Del  fraile  toma  el  consejo,  y  no  el 

ejemplo. 
Debajo  de  una  mala   capa  se  en- 

cuentra  un  buen  bebedor. 
Dime  con  quien  andas  y  te  dire* 

quien  eres. 
Dios  te  de  fortuna,    hijo,   que  el 

saber  poco  te  importa. 
Do  entra  beber,  sale  saber. 

Donde  fuego  se  hace,  humo  sale. 
Donde  fueres,  haz  como  vieres. 
Donde  hay  gana  hay  mafia. 

E3  buen  pano,  en  el  area  se  "vende. 

El  ejercicio  hace  maestro. 

En  boca  del  discreto,  lo  publico  es 

secreto. 
El  habito  no  hace  al  monje. 


Save  a  thief  from  the  gallows,  and 

he  will  cut  your  throat. 
It    is    useless  to    go  against  the 

stream. 
When  the  fox  preaches,  beware  oi 

the  geese. 
When  your  neighbor's  house  is  on 

fire,  look  to  your  own. 

Never  allow  a  favorable  opportuni- 
ty to  escape. 

All  keys  hang  not  at  the  same  gir« 
die. 

The  most  exalted  fortune  is  the 
least  secure. 

Short  reckonings,  long  friends. 

He  that  does  his  best  should  not 
be  censured. 

Bought  wit  is  the  best. 

At  night  all  cats  are  gray. 

Still  waters  run  the  deepest — or, 
Save  me  from  a  snake  in  the  grass. 

Where  the  tree  is  low  every  one 
pulls  a  branch. 

There  is  a  wide  difference  between 
saying  and  doing. 

Do  as  I  bid  you,  and  not  as  I  do. 

We  should  not  judge  from  external 

appearances. 
Tell  me  your  company,  and  I  will 

tell  you  what  you  are. 
Fortune  favors  fools. 

When  the  wine  is  in,  the  wit  is 

out. 
No  smoke  without  fire. 
When  at  Rome,  do  as  Rome  does. 
Where  there  is  a  will,  there  is  way, 

A  good  house  wants  no  sign. 
Practice  makes  perfect. 
A  wise  man  never  babbles. 

We  cannot  judge  by  outward  ap- 
pearance. 


438 


PKOYERBS. 


Ei  lobo  y  la  vulpeja,  ambos  son  de 

una  conseja. 
El  lobo  pierde  los  dientes,  mas  no 

las  mientes. 
El  malo,  para  mal  hacer,  acliaques 

no  ha  menester. 
El  mejor  de  los  dados,  es  no  jugar- 

los. 
El  ojo  del  amo  engorda  al  caballo. 
El   perezoso  siempre   esta  menes- 

teroso. 
El  que  caila.  otorga. 
El  que  no  esta  becho  a  bragas,  las 

costuras  le  bacen  llagas. 
El  que  primero  llega,  ese  la  calza. 
En  boca  cerrada  no  entra  mosca. 
En  casa   del  berrero,    cucbillo   de 

palo. 
En  nombrando  al  rain  de  Koma, 

luego  asoma. 
En  tierra  de  ciegos,  el  tuerto  es  rey. 

Entre  sastres  no  se  pagan  becburas: 
or,  Los  lobos  no  se  comen  unos  a 

otros. 
Entre  amigos  bonrados  los  cumpli- 

mientos  son  escusados. 


The  wicked  agree  in  acts  of  villany. 

A  wolf  may  lose  bis  teetb,  but  not 

bis  habits. 
The  evil-doer  is  never  witbout  an 

excuse. 
Tbe  best  cast  at  dice,   is  not  to 

tbrow  them. 
The  master's  eye  fattens  the  horse , 
Sloth  breeds  poverty. 

Silence  gives  consent. 

He  who  is  not  accustomed  to  shoes, 
will  have  corns  if  he  wears  them. 

First  come,  first  served. 

A  close  mouth  catches  no  flies. 

No  one  goes  worse  shod  than  tbe 
shoemaker's  wife. 

Speak  of  the  devil  and  his  imps  ap- 
pear. 

In  the  land  of  the  blind,  the  one- 
eyed  is  king. 

Wolves  do  not  devour  one  another. 


Between    honest    friends   compli- 
ments are  useless. 


Gato  enguantado  nunca  fiie*  buen 

cazador. 
Gato  escaldado  del  agua  fria  huye. 
Gobierna  tu  boca  segun  tu  bolsa. 

Gota  a  gota  el  mar  se  apoca. 

Goza  tu  el  poco,  rnie'ntras  busca 

mas  el  loco. 
Guardate  de  bombre  que  no  habla, 

y  de  can  que  no  ladra. 
Guardate  del  agua  mansa,  que  la 

recia  presto  pasa. 

Hacerlo  mal,  y  escusarlo  peor. 

Haces  mal,  espera  otro  mal. 

Haya  cebo  en  el  palomar.  que  pa- 

lomas  no  f altar  an. 
Hombre  aperoibido  vale  por  dos. 


A  muffled  cat  is  no  good  mouser. 

The  scalded  cat  dreads  cold  water. 
Cut  your  coat  according  to  your 

cloth. 
Perseverance      overcomes      every 

difficulty. 
Enjoy    thy  little,    whilst    the  fool 

seeks  for  more. 
Beware  of  the  silent  man,  and  of 

the  dog  that  does  not  bark. 
Take   heed  of  a  drizzling  rain ;  % 

violent  shower  is  soon  over. 

A  fault  once  denied,  is  twice  com- 
mitted. 

He  that  does  evil  must  expect  th.8 
same  in  return. 

In  time  of  prosperity  friends  will 
be  plenty. 

Forewarned,  forearmed. 


PROVERBS. 


439 


Honra  y  provecho  no  caben  en  un 

saco. 
Hue'speda   hermosa,  mal  para   la 

bolsa. 
Huino  y  mujer  parlera,  echan  al 

hombre  de  su  casa  fuera. 

La  cabra  siempre  tira  al  monte. 

La  costurubre  es  otra  naturaleza. 
La  caridad  bien  ordenada,  enapieza 

por  si. 
La  codicia  rompe  el  saco. 
La  cuerda  se  rompe  por  la  parte 

mas  flaca. 
La    Have  de   oro   abre  todas    las 

puertas. 
La  mala  llaga  sana,  la  mala  fama 

mata. 
La  miel  es  mas  dulce  cuando  se 

prob6  la  hiel. 
La  mucha  confianza  es  causa   de 

menosprecio. 
La  mujer  ni  la  tela,  no  la  cates  a 

la  candela. 
La  necesidad  carece  de  ley. 
La  noche  es  capa  de  pecadores. 
La  ocasion  la  pintan  calva. 
Las  paredes  tienen  oidos. 
Libro  cerrado  no  saca  letrado. 

Lo  barato  es  caro. 

Lo  que  de  noche  p e  hace,  a  la  ma- 

fiana  aparece. 
Lo  que  no  es  de  comer,  dejarlo 

cocer. 
Lo  que  no  se  puede  remediar,  se 

ha  de  aguantar. 
Los  dineros  del  sacristan,  cantando 

se  van. 
Los  pezes  mayores  se  tragan  a  los 

menores. 

Mas  cura  la  dieta,  que  la  lanzeta. 
Mas  es  el  ruido  que  las  nuezes. 
Mas  vale  algo  que  nada. 
Mas  vale  bien  callar  que  mal  ha- 

blar. 
Mas   vale  bnena  fama  que  cama 

dorada. 


Honor  and  riches  are  not  alwayi 

found  together. 
A  handsome  hostess  is  bad  for  the 

purse. 
A  smoky  house  and  a  scolding  wife 

will  turn  a  man  out  of  doors. 

What  is  bred  in  the  bone  will  never 

come  out  of  the  flesh. 
Use  is  second  nature. 
Charity  begins  at  home. 

Covetous  brings  nothing  home. 
The  thread  will  break  where  it  is 

the  weakest. 
A  bribe  enters  without  knocking. 

Give  a  dog  an  ill  name  and  he  will 
soon  be  hanged. 

He  deserves  not  the  sweet,  who  will 
not  taste  the  sour. 

Too  much  familiarity  breeds  con- 
tempt. 

Neither  a  wife  nor  cloth,  should 
be  chosen  by  candle-light. 

Necessity  has  no  law. 

Night  screens  evil  doers. 

Take  time  by  the  forelock. 

Walls  have  ears. 

A  closed  book  never  made  a 
learned  man. 

The  cheapest  is  always  the  dearest 

Time  brings  truth  to  light. 

Do  not  meddle  in  other  people's 
concerns. 

What  cannot  be  cured  must  be  en- 
dured. 

Light  come,  light  go — or,  easily 
gained,  easily  spent. 

Great  fish   swallow  up   the  little 


Diet  cures  better  than  the  lancet. 
More  froth  than  substance. 
Half  a  loaf  is  better  than  no  bread. 
Better  to  be  silent  than  to  speak 

ill. 
A  good  reputation  is  better  than 

outward  show. 


440 


PROVERBS. 


Mas  vale  mala  avenencia  que  buena 

sentencia—  or,    mas     vale     mal 

ajuste  que  buen  pleito. 
Mas  vale  doblarse  que  quebrarse. 
Mas  vale  mafia  que  fuerza. 
Mas  vale  onza  de  prudencia  que 

libra  de  ciencia. 
Mas  vale  solo  que  mal  acompanado. 
Mas  vale  tarde  que  nunca. 
Mas  vale  un  pajaro  en  la  mano  que 

ciento  volando. 
Mas  vale  saber  que  haber. 
Mas  vale  un  toma  que  no  dos  te 

dare\ 
Mas  sabe  un  necio  preguntar  que 

pueden  cien  sabios  contestar. 
Muchos  van  por  lana  y   vuelven 

trasquilados. 
Mucbas      candelillas      bacen    un 

cirio  pascual. 

Nadie  puede  decir  :  de  esca  agua  no 

bebere. 
Nadie  se  alabe,  basta  que  acabe. 

Necios  y  porfiados  bacen  ricos  a 

los  letrados. 
Ni  firmes   carta   que  no  leas,   ni 

bebas  agua  que  no  veas. 

No  es  tan  bravo  el  leon  como  le 

pin  tan. 
No  es  la  miel  para  la  boca  del  asno. 
No  es  todo  oro  lo  que  reluce. 
No  bay  atajo  sin  trabajo. 
No  bay  caballo,  por  bueno  que  sea, 

que  no  tropiece. 
No  bay  mal  que  porbien  no  venga, 
No  bay  mayor  mal  que  el  descon- 

tento  de  cada  cual. 
No  bay  mejor  espejo  que  el  amigo 

viejo. 
No  bay  miel  sin  hiel. 
No  bay  peor  sordo  que  el  que  no 

quiere  oir. 
No  bay  que  mentar  la  soga  en  casa 

del  aborcado. 
No  la  bagas,  no  la  temas. 
No  so  acuerda  el  cura  de  cuando 

i'ue  sacristan. 


A  bad  agreement  i-s  better  thbn  & 
lawsuit. 

Better  to  bend  than  to  break. 

Skill  is  better  than  strength. 

An  ounce  of  discretion  is  worth  % 

pound  of  wit. 
Better  alone  than  in  bad  company. 
Better  late  than  never. 
A  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth  two  in 

the  bush. 
Knowledge  is  preferable  to  riches. 
One  gift  is  worth  two  promises. 

One  fool  asks  more  questions  than 
a  hundred  wise  men  can  answer. 

He  that  seeks  more  than  he  should, 
often  finds  more  than  he  would. 

Many  brooks  make  a  river. 

No  one  can  tell  what  is  to  happen 

to  him. 
Let  no  one  boast  of  a  thing  till  he 

has  finished  it. 
The  foolish  and  headstrong  maka 

lawyers  rich. 
Read  a  paper  before  you  sign  it, 

and  look  at  the  water  before  you 

drink  it. 
The  devil  is  not  so  ugly  as  they 

paint  him. 
Never  cast  pearls  before  swine. 
All  is  not  gold  that  glitters. 
No  pleasure  without  pain. 
A  man  is  not  wise  at  all  times. 

Out  of  misfortune  comes  good. 
A  contented  mind  is  a  continual 

feast. 
The  best  mirror  is  an  old  friend. 

No  sweet  without  sour. 

No  one  is  so  deaf  as  he  that  will 
not  hear. 

Never  speak  of  hemp  in  a  hang- 
man's house. 

Do  no  evil,  and  fear  no  harm. 

The  priest  forgets  that  he  was  evef 
a  clerk. 


PEOVEEBS.  441 

No  seas  perezoso,  y  no  seras  deseo-    An  idle  brain  is  the  devil's  work* 

so.  shop. 

No  se  gano  Zamora  en  una  hora.         Rome  was  not  built  in  a  day. 

Obra  empezada,  medio  acabada.         The  beginning  is  always  the  most 

difficult. 
Oir  campanas  y  no  saber  donde.         To  have  heard  of  a  fact  and  not  to 

understand  it. 
Ojos  que  no  ven,  corazon  que  no    What  the  eye   does  not  see,    the 
duele.  heart  does  not  feeL 

Pajaro  viejo  no  entra  en  jaula.  Old  birds  are  not  caught  with  such 

chaff. 
Paga  lo  que  debes  y  sabras  lo  que    A  pound  of  care  will  not  pay  one 

tienes.  ounce  of  debt. 

Palabras  y  plumas,    el  viento  las    Words  and  feathers  are  borne  away 

lleva.  by  the  wind. 

Pan  ajeno  caro  cuesta.  He  that  goes  borrowing  goes  sor- 

rowing. 
Perro  ladrador  nunca  buen  mor-    A  barking  dog  never  bites. 

dedor. 
Piensa  el  la  dronque  todos  son  de    He  measures  every  man's  corn  by 

su  condicion.  his  own  bushel. 

Pobreza  no  es  vileza.  Poverty  is  no  crime. 

Poco  a  poco,  hila  la  vieja  el  copo.       Little  by  little  the  bird  builds  its 

nest. 
Por  donde  no  se  piensa,  salta  la    Things  come  from  where  we  least 

liebre.  expect  them. 

Por  dinero  baila  el  perro.  Money  makes  the  mare  go. 

Quien    a    hierro    mata,    a    hierro  Who  kills  with  the  sword  dies  by 

muere.  the  sword. 

Quien  bien  esta,  no  se  mude.  Let  well  alone. 

Quien  bien  quiere  a  Beltran,  bien  Love  me,  love  my  dog. 

quiere  a  su  can. 

Quien  bien  te  quiere,  te  hara  llorar.  Spare  the  rod,  and  you  will  spoil 

the  child. 

Quien  busca,  halla.  Seek,  and  you  will  find. 

Quien  calla,  otorga.  Silence  gives  consent. 

Quien  come  la  came,  que  roa  el  Who  eats  the  sweet  must  taste  the 

hueso.  bitter. 

Quien  con  lobos  anda,  a  ahullar  se  We  imbibe  the  qualities  of  those 

enseiia.  with  whom  we  associate. 

Quien  escucha,  su  mal  oye.  Listeners  never  hear  good  of  them- 
selves. 

Quien  feo  ama,  hermoso  le  parece.  Whatever  one  loves  appears  hand« 

some. 

Quien  lava  la  cara  del  asno,  pierde  It  is  time  lost  to  attempt  to  wash  a 

tiempo  y  jabon.  blackmoor  white. 

Quien  lengua  ha,  a  Roma  va.  Ask  and  you  will  know. 


442 


PROVERBS. 


Quien  mal  anda,  mal  acaba. 

Quien  malas  manas  tiene,  tarde  6 

nunca  las  pierde. 
Quien    mala    cama  hace,    en  ella 

yace. 
Quien  mucho  habla,  mucho  yerra. 
Quien  mas  tiene,  mas  quiere. 

Quien  no  parece,  perece. 

Quien  no  se  aventura,  no  pasa  el 

mar. 
Quien  no  siembra   en  primavera, 

no  recoje  en  otofio. 
Quien  poco  tiene,  poco  teme. 

Quien  presta  al  amigo,  cobra  un 

enemigo. 
Quien  promete,  en  deuda  se  mete. 

Quien  puede  y  no  quiere,  cuando 

quiere  no  puede. 
Quien  quiere  tomar,  le  conviene  dar. 
Quien  te  hace  fiestas  que  no  te  solia 

hacer,  6  engafiarte  quiere,  6   te 

ha  menester. 

Quien  tiene  ventanas  de  vidrio,  no 
tire  piedras  a  las  del  vecino. 

Quien  todo  aventura,  pierde  ca- 
ballo  y  mula. 

Quien  todo  lo  quiere,  todo  lo 
pierde. 

Rio  revuelto,  ganancia  del  pesca- 
dor. 

Secreto  de  dos,  secreto  de  Dios ; 
secreto  de  tres,  de  to  dos  es. 

Si  quieres  ver  cuanto  vale  un  du- 

cado,  buscalo  prestado. 
Sobre  gusto  no  hay  disputa. 
Sol  que  mucho  arde  poco  dura. 

Tantas  vezes  va  el  cantaro   a  la 

fuente,  que  al  fin  se  quiebra. 
Tanto  vales,  c  uanto  tienes. 


He  that  strikes  with  the  sword,  wiD 

die  by  the  scabbard. 
Vicious  habits  are  seldom  throwa 

off. 
As  you  have  made  your  bed,  so 

you  must  lie  on  it. 
Who  speaks  much,  often  blunders. 
The  more  we  have,  the  more  we 

want. 
The    absent    are  the  first  to  be 

blamed. 
Nothing  venture,  nothing  have. 

He  will  starve  in  winter,  who  will 
not  work  in  harvest. 

"Who  has  little  to  lose,  has  little  to 
fear. 

Lend  to  your  friend,  and  you  will 
make  him  your  enemy. 

A  man's  word  should  be  as  good  as 
his  bond. 

He  that  has  time  and  waits  for 
more,  loses  both. 

He  that  will  talk  must  give. 

He  that  flatters  you  more  than  he 
was  wont  to  do,  either  intends  to 
deceive  you,  or  needs  your  assist- 
ance. 

He  that  has  glass  windows  should 
not  throw  stones. 

Grasp  all,  lose  all. 

He  that  wishes  all,  loses  all. 


Good  fishing  in  troubled  waters. 


Between  two  persons  a  secret  may 
be  sacred  ;  between  thre*»,  it  is 
everybody's. 

Borrow  a  crown,  and  you  will 
know  its  value. 

There  is  no  disputing  about  taste. 

The  morning  sun  seldom  lasts. 

The  pitcher  that  goes  often  to  the 
well,  comes  home  broken  at  last. 

Tell  me  what  you  are  worth,  and  1 
will  tell  you  what  you  are. 


IDIOMS. 


4i3 


Timnpo  y  sazon,  a  nadie  dan  razon. 
Todiis  las  aves  con  sus  pares. 
Todos  somos  locos,  los  unos  de  los 

otros. 
Tras  de  los  anos  viene  el  juicio. 
Tu  enemlgo  es  el  de  tu  oficio. 

Un  asno  rasca  a  otro. 
Una  golondrina  no  hace  verano. 
Uno  come  la  fruta  aceda,  y  otro 
tiene  la  dentera. 

Vemos  la  pajaen  el  ojo  ajeno,  y  no 
la  viga  de  lagar  en  el  nuestro. 

Viene  la  ventura,  a  quien  la  pro- 
cura. 


Time  and  tide  wait  for  no  man. 
Birds  of  a  feather  flock  together. 
Each  man  is  a  fool  in  the  opinion 

of  another. 
Reason  comes  with  years. 
Two  of  a  trade  never  agree. 

One  fool  praises  another. 
One  swallow  does  not  make  spring. 
"VY  hat  is  one  man's  meat,  is  anothel 
man's  poison. 

We  see  the  mote  in  our  neighbor's 
eye,  and  not  the  beam  in  our 
own. 

Seek  Fortune,  and  you  will  find 
her. 


MODISMOS. 

A  la  buena  de  Dios. 

A  mas  correr. 

A  mas  tardar. 

A  mas  tirar. 

A  medida  de  sus  deseos. 

A  mejor  andar  ;  a  peor  andar. 

A  paso  de  buey. 

A  pie'  enjuto. 

A  sus  anchuras. 

A  tiro  de  ballesta. 

A  tuertas  y  a  derechas. 

A  lo  que  saiga. 

Al  descuido  y  con  descuido. 

Abrir  la  mano. 

"     el  ojo. 

"     las  zampas. 
Adobar  los  guantes. 
Aflojar  la  cuerda. 
Apretar  la  cuerda. 
Alia  se  las  haya. 
Ahf  mo  las  den  todas. 
Andar  a  baqueta. 

"      a  ciegas. 

"      a  las  bonicas. 

M      a  gatas. 

"      a  porfia. 

M      a  sombra  de  tejado, 

"      a  todo  correr. 

"      a  vreltas. 


IDIOMS. 

Without  guile  or  deception . 

With  the  utmost  speed. 

At  latest. 

At  the  utmost. 

According  to  one's  wishes. 

At  best  ;  at  worst. 

At  a  snail's  gallop. 

Without  trouble,  or,  anxiety. 

At  one's  ease. 

At  a  great  distance 

Eight  or  wrong. 

Whatever  may  be  the  result. 

Studiously  careless. 

To  bribe. 

To  be  alert. 

To  give  a  beginning  to  any  thing. 

To  remunerate  any  person. 

To  treat  leniently. 

To  treat  with  severity. 

That's  his  own  affair. 

It  is  indifferent  to  me. 

To  command  imperiously. 

To  grope. 

To  take  things  easily. 

To  creep  upon  all-fours. 

To  be  stubborn. 

To  lurk— to  abscond. 

To  run  with  all  speed. 

To  shuffle — to  use  subterfuge 


Ui 


IDIOMS. 


And&r  con  mosca. 

"      con  pie's  de  plomo.  j 

"      con  zapatos  de  fieltro.         j 

**      or,  ir  de  capa  caida. 

"      de  gorra. 

""      de  Zeca  en  Meca. 

**      de  puntillas,  6  chiticallando. 

"      en  dares  y  toniares,  6  en 
dimes  y  diretes. 

"       or  ir  en  cuerpo. 

**      en  los  cuernos  del  toro. 

"      enjarras. 

"      en  palm  as. 
Apretar  la  soleta. 

"        los  cordeles  a  una, 

"        los  talones. 
Apretarle  a  uno  las  clavijas. 
Asir  la  ocasion  por  los  cabellos. 
Asirse  a  las  ramas. 
Atar  bien  su  dedo. 
Atarse  las  manos. 
Ayunar  despues  de  harto. 
Azotar  el  aire. 
Azotar  las  calles. 

Bailar  al  son  que  se  toca. 

Bajar  los  brios  a  uno. 

Beber  los  aires,  or,  los  vientos. 

"     de  codos. 

'*     las  palabras  a  otro. 

"     los  pensamientos  a  alguno 
Boca  con  boca. 
Bocado  sin  hueso. 

Burla  burlando. 
Buscar  tres  pie's  al  gato. 

"       a  uno  de  Zeca  en  Meca. 

Caber  de  pie's. 
"     en  suerte. 

No  caber  de  gozo. 
"      "      en  el  mundo. 
"      "      en  sf. 
No  cabe  en  e'L 
Caer  bien  a  caballo. 
"     en  alguna  cosa. 

"     en  gracia. 


To  be  put  out  at  trifles. 

To  proceed  with  caution. 

To  be  crest-fallen. 

To  be  at  another's  cost. 

To  be  roving  about. 

To  go  on  tiptoe. 

To  quarrel  about  trifles. 

To  go  out  without  an  overcoat 

To  rush  into  the  lion's  mouth. 

To  set  one's  arm  akimbo. 

To  be  universally  esteemed. 

To  scamper  off. 

To  oblige  one  by  violence  to  saj 

or  do  any  thing. 
To  take  to  one's  heels. 
To  pin  one  down. 
To  take  time  by  the  forelock. 
To  seek  frivolous  pretexts. 
To  take  care  of  one's  self. 
To  bind  one's  self  to  a  promise. 
To  fast  after  feasting. 
To  act  to  no  purpose. 
To  lounge  about  the  streets. 

To  go  with  the  stream. 

To  humble  one. 

To  desire  anxiously. 

To  drink  at  one's  ease. 

To  listen  attentively. 

To  anticipate  another's  thoughts. 

Face  to  tace. 

An.  employment  without  labor,  a 

sinecure. 
Between  joke  and  earnest. 
To  pick  a  quarrel. 
To  search  everywhere  for  any  one. 

To  have  room  to  stand. 

To  fall  to  one's  lot. 

To  be  overjoyed. 

To  be  puffed  up  with  vanity. 

To  be  full  of  one's    own  mei'its. 

He  is  not  capable  of  such  a  thing. 

To  sit  well  on  horseback. 

To   recollect  a    thing — to    under 

stand. 
To  please— to  take  one's  fancy. 


IDIOMS. 


Uo 


Caer  en  desgracia. 

"     en  Is  tr.r^pa. 
CbetBC.de  aninio. 

M      la  alas  del  corazon. 

Oaersele  4  uno    la    cairn  de 

guenza. 

«•  a  uno  la  baba, 

CaHar  el  pico. 
Calzarse  a  alguno. 
Campear  de  sol  a  sombra. 

Oetredo  como  pie'  de  mule  to. 
QbnuM  spazta 
Cojer  4  alguno  de 


To  be  put  oat  of  favor. 
To  fall  into  the  snare. 
To  be  dejected. 
To  lose  one's  courage. 
To  blush  with  i " 


"      su  hatiHo. 
Comer  de  mo?onon. 

"       4  dos  carrillos. 

"       pan  con  corteza. 
Converse  de  risa. 
Comprar  gato  en  saco. 
Con  mil  amores. 
Con  su  pan  se  lo  coma. 
Contar  con  alguno. 
Con  que. 
Con  que,  agur. 
Con  que,  si,  eh  ? 
Con  que,  hasta  la  vista. 


To  be  delighted. 
To  hold  ones  tongue. 
To  manage  a  person. 
To  be  at  work  from 

night 
As  stubborn  as  a  mule. 
Jests  aside. 
To  meet  a  person  favorably  dia* 

posed. 
To  pack  one's  self  off 
To  live  at  another's  expense. 
To  enjoy  two  benefices. 
To  be  indifierent  about  things. 
To  strain  one 's  self  not  to  laugh. 
To  buy  a  pig  in  a  poke. 
Most  willingly. 
That's  his  own  business. 
To  depend  upon  any  one. 
So  then. 
So,  good  by. 
Indeed  !    Is  it  so  ? 
So,  till  we  meet  again. 


Dar  4  alguno  con  las  paertas  en    To  shut  the  door  in  one's  lace. 
la  cara. 
"  41uz. 

'-  4  uno  una  dedada  de  mieL 
"  como  por  amor  de  Dies. 
"  con  la  carga  en  tierra. 
*  oon  uno. 


"  contra  alguna  cosa. 
"  desl 
"  en  ears. 
,c  en  el  bianco. 
M  en  el  hito. 
11  en  la  vena. 
Dar  porsupuesto,  or,  por 
"  calabasa. 

««  chasco. 

"  el  si. 

•*  el  pesame. 


To  be  deUvered  of  a  child. 

To  deceive  one. 

To  give  with  an  ill  grace. 

To  be  overpowered. 

To  meet  a  person  one  is  looking 

for. 
To  hit  against  any  thing. 
To  stretch. 
To  reproach. 
To  hit  the  mark. 
To  come  to  the  difficult  point 
To  hit  upon  the  means. 
To  take  for  granted. 
To  reprove — to  reject  a  proposal  oi 

marriage. 
To  disappoint 
To  consent 
To  condole. 


446 


IDIOMS. 


"  la  enhorabuena. 
"  golpe  una  cosa. 

"  marjen. 

"  que  decir. 

"  que  bacer. 

"  parte. 

La  ventana  da  al  jardin, 
Darse  a  la  vela. 

"a  merced. 

M  ai  diantre. 

"  de  calabazadas. 

"  por  sentido. 

n  cuidado  de  algo. 

No  se  le  da  nada. 
De  buenas  a  primeras. 
De  bueua  fd. 
De  mala  fe\ 
De  intento. 

De  oidas—  or,  por  oidas. 
De  tejas  abajo. 
De  un  tiron. 
De  uu  salto,  or,  brinco. 
Decir  unas  veces   cesta,    y    otras 

ballesta. 
Decir  a  uno  dos  frescas. 

"    por  decir. 

"    algo  a  uno  en  sus  barbas. 

Defender  bi en  su  capa. 
Dejar  a  uuo  colgado. 

1 '    a  uno  en  la  calle. 

"    atras  los  vientos. 
Dejar  el  campo  libre. 

"     en  bianco. 

"     fresco  a  alguno 
Dejarse  alguna  cosa  en  el  tintero. 

**      entre  renglones. 

Dejadas  las  burlas. 
Desenterrar  los  muertos. 
Desbacerse  en  lagrimas. 
Despabilar  los  ojos. 
De  boy  en  ocbo  dias. 
De  boy  en  quince  dias. 
De  ocbo  en  ocbo  dias. 
De  quince  en  quince  dias. 


To  congratulate. 

Any  tiling  to  strike  one  with  ad- 
miration, or,  astonishment. 

To  give  cause  for. 

To  give  cause  to  complain. 

To  give  trouble. 

To  participate. 

The  window  looks  into  the  gardeiv 

To  set  sail. 

To  surrender  at  discretion. 

To  despair. 

To  labor  in  vain. 

To  show  resentment. 

To  care  about  any  thing. 

He  cares  nothing  about  it. 

Without  ceremony — abruptly. 

With  sincerity. 

Deceitfully, 

On  purpose. 

By  hearsay. 

Any  thing  referring  to  this  world. 

At  once — offhand. 

At  a  jump. 

To  say  sometimes  one  thing,  and 
sometimes  another. 

To  give  another  a  piece  of  one's 
mind. 

To  talk  for  the  sake  of  talking. 

To  tell  a  person  any  thing  to  his 
face. 

To  defend  one's  rights. 

To  frustrate  one's  hope. 

To  strip  one  of  his  all. 

To  go  quicker  than  the  wind. 

To  yield  to  one's  competitors. 

To  pass  over  a  thing  unnoticed. 

To  frustrate  one— to  abuse  one. 

To  forget,  or  omit    something  in 
writing. 

To  pass  over  in  silence — to   omi 
any  thing. 

Setting  jokes  aside. 

To  slander  the  dead. 

To  weep  bitterly. 

To  keep  a  sharp  look-out. 

This  day  week. 

This  day  fortnight. 

Every  week. 

Every  fortnight. 


IDIOMS. 


447 


Diasha. 

Un  dia  si,  otro  no 

El  dia  de  hoy. 
Hoy  en  dia. 
Dicho  y  hecho. 

Dormir  a  pierna  snelta,  or,  tendida. 
Dorinir  la  siesta. 

Echar  a  borbotones,  or,  a  trompa  y 
a  talega. 
'•    a  la«  espaldas. 
"    a  perder  algo. 
•'    a  pique  un  navlo. 
•'    al,  or,  en  olvido.  . 
"    de  manga. 
"    en  tierra. 
'«    agua  en  el  mar. 
'*    cantos,  ray os,   centellas,   6, 

chispas. 
M    or.  arrojar  el  guante. 
11    el  guante  a  ctro. 
la  capa  al  toro. 
la  culpa  a  alguno. 
margaritas  a  puercos. 
la  soga  tras  el  caldero. 
las  cargas  a  otro. 
mano  al  ladroii. 
menos  alguna  cosa. 
suertes. 

un  remiendo  a  la  vida. 
una  vista. 
Echarla  de  santo. 
En  un  cerrar  y  abrir  de  ojos.  ( 
Encenderse  en  c61era,  or,  en  ircu 
En  baz  y  en  paz. 
En  un  pensamiento. 
Entreabrir  una  puerta. 
Eucomendar  las  ovejas  al  lobo. 
Entre  dos  aguas. 

*•     bur  las  y  ve'ras. 
Errar  el  tiro. 
Erre  que  erre. 
Es  capa  de  picaros. 
Escarmentar  en  cabeza  ajena.- 

Es  hombre  ajustado. 

"  de  brios. 

Es  el  mejor  timbre  de  su  escudo. 
Escribir  en  la  arena. 

"      en  bronce. 
Escurrir  la  bola. 


Days  ago. 

Every  other  day. 

The  present  day. 

Now-a-days. 

No  sooner  said  than  done. 

To  sleep  at  one's  ease. 

To  take  an  afternoon's  nap. 

To  talk  at  random. 

To  forget  designedly. 

To  spoil  anything. 

To  sink  a  ship. 

To  cast  into  oblivion. 

To  make  a  cat's  paw  of  one. 

To  disembark. 

To  send  coals  to  Newcastle. 

To  be  furiously  enraged. 

To  challenge. 

To  seize— to  imprison. 

To  expose  one's  self  to  danger. 

To  blame  any  one. 

To  cast  pearls  before  swine. 

To  abandon  one's  self  to  despair. 

To  lay  the  fault  on  another. 

To  seize  the  thief. 

To  miss  any  thing. 

To  cast  lots. 

To  take  some  nourishment. 

To  look  after. 

To  pretend  sanctity. 

In  the  twinkling  of  an  eye. 

To  fiy  into  a  passion. 

With  common  consent. 

In  a  trice. 

To  put  a  door  ajar. 

To  set  a  fox  to  keep  sheep. 

Between  wind  and  water. 

Between  joke  and  earnest. 

To  miss  one's  aim. 

Obstinately. 

He  is  a  protector  of  rogues. 

To  take  warning  at  another's  e» 

pense. 
He  is  a  man  of  strict  morals. 
He  is  a  man  of  mettle. 
That  is  the  best  gem  in  his  crown. 
To  bury  in  oblivion. 
Never  to  forget  a  thing . 
To  sneak  oft". 


448 


IDIOMS. 


Esmerarse  en  alga 

Estat  a  la  capa.  •< 

"  a  pique  de  perderse. 

44  con  las  orejas  caidas. 

14  de  amnion,  or,  en  acecho  de 

alguien. 

44  de  buen  talante. 

44  de  casa. 

44  de  fiesta. 

»4  de  planta. 

Estar  en: — Este  traje  me  esta  en 
cuarenta  pesos, 
"en  ascuas. 
«4    en  lo  que  se  dice. 
44    en  mantillas. 
44    en  que. 
• '    en  sus  anchuras. 
44    con  la  boca  abierta. 
44     por  alguno. 
4<    sobre  aviso,  or,  sobre  si. 
44    mano  sobre  mano. 
"    pagado  de  si  mismo. 

I  Estas  en  tus  cinco  (sentidos)  ? 
Ganar  la  voluntad  a  alguno. 
44    las  albricias. 

Hablar  a  bulto,  or,  a  destajo. 

44      a  tontas  y  a  locas. 

44      al  aire. 

44  al  gusto,  al  paladar. 

44      al  oido. 

44      al  alma. 

44  con  segundas. 

44      de  bur  las,  or,  de  cbanza. 

"      en  romance. 

44      entre  dientes. 

41      por  boca  de  ganso. 
Hacer  de  alguno  cera  y  pabilo. 

"  a  uno  tascar  el  freno. 

*'  a  uno  perder  los  estribos. 

"  de  las  suyas. 

«4  de  un  camino  dos  mandados. 

44  alarde  de. 

•«  buenas,  or,  malas  migas. 

14  callos. 

"  cuenta  sin  la  lruespeda. 

«  costilla. 


To  take  pains  in  any  thing. 

To  lie  to  (nautical.) 

To  wait  a  favorable  oppori unity. 

To  be  within  an  ace  of  being  lost* 

To  be  down  in  the  mouth. 

To  stand  watch  over  any  body. 

To  be  ready  to  do  anything. 

To  be  in  deahabUle. 

To  be  merry 

To  be  fixed  in  any  place  for  a  long 

time. 
To  cost:— This  dress  stands  mo  in 

forty  dollars 
To  be  upon  thorns. 
To  comprehend  what  is  said. 
To  be  in  a  state  of  infancy. 
To  be  inclined  to  think  that. 
To  be  at  one's  ease. 
To  be  astonished. 
To  answer  for  any  one. 
To  be  on  one's  guard. 
To  be  idle. 
To  entertain  a  high  opinion  of  one's 

self. 
Are  you  in  your  senses  ? 
To  curry  favor. 
To  be  the  first  bearer  of  good  tid* 

mgs. 
To  speak  at  random. 
To  speak  without  discretion. 
To  talk  idly. 
To  say  pleasing  things. 
To  whisper  into  one's  ears. 
To  speak  one's  mind. 
To  deal  in  innuendos. 
To  jest — to  jeer. 
To  speak  gibberish. 
To  mutter. 

To  echo  what  another  has  said. 
To  mould  one  like  wax. 
To  make  one  do  a  thing  by  force. 
To  make  one  lose  his  temper. 
To  show  off  one's  tricks. 
To  kill  two  birds  with  one  stone. 
To  boast  of. 

To  agree,  or,  disagree  with  any  on* 
To  be  hardened. 
To  reckon  without  the  host. 
To  bear  the  brunt. 


IDIOMS. 


449 


EaceT  casode. 

«'      caudal  de  alguna  cosa. 

4 «      or,  fundar  torres  en  el  viento, 
or,  castillos  en  el  aire. 

**      ouenlas  alegres. 

»*      fiestas. 

"      gala. 

"      humo. 

-'*      nialeta. 

"      morisquetas. 

"      la  vista  gorda. 

M      las  vezes  de  otro. 

u      oidos  de  mercader. 

"     papel. 

H      penitencia  con  alguno. 

"      pucheros. 

' '      rostro. 

"      saber. 
Hacerse  a  la  vela.  . 
Hacerse  el  bobo. 
llaberla,  6,  haberlas  con  alguno. 
Hallar  la  horma  de  su  zapato. 

"       que  decir. 
Hender  un  cabello  en  el  aire. 
Hincharsele  a  uno  las  narizes. 
Hombre  de  forma. 
Huir  a  una  de  caballo. 

Ir  &  bilo  del  mundo. 

"  a  los  alcances. 

"  a  medias  con  alguno. 

'•  con  alguno. 

"  or,  andar  de  capa  caida. 

"  de  manga. 

"  de  mejor  en  mejor. 

"  de  peor  en  peor. 

"  de  rocin  a  ruin. 

M  en  la  delantera. 

"  en  demanda  de. 

•'  or,  quedar  en  zaga. 

"  bien  puesto. 

1    tirando,  6,  pasando  lo  mejor  que 

se  pueda. 
Irse  A  pique. 

"    de  la  memoria. 
Irsele  a  alguno  la  cabeza. 
El  alma  se  le  va  por  ello,  or,  tras 

ello. 
Van  cien  duros  a  que  es  cierto. 


To  pay  attention,  or,  respect  to. 
To  hold  a  thing  in  high  estimation 
To  build  castles  in  the  air. 

To  feed  upon  vain  hopes. 

To  fondle— flatter — cajole. 

To  make  a  show. 

To  continue  long  in  a  place. 

To  prepare  for  a  journey. 

To  deceive — to  play  pranks. 

To  wink — to  connive. 

To  act  for  another. 

To  feign  not  to  hear. 

To  act  a  part — to  make  a  shovr. 

To  take  pot  luck. 

To  make  wry  faces. 

To  bear  up  with  adversity. 

To  acquaint— to  make  known. 

To  set  sail. 

To  pretend  ignorance. 

To  dispute,  or,  contend  with  any  one. 

To  meet  with  one's  match. 

To  grumble  at— to  complain  ofl 

To  split  a  hair. 

To  become  angry. 

A  nxm  of  talent,  or,  merit. 

To  fly  with  all  speed. 

To  follow  the  opinion  of  the  world. 

To  go  in  pursuit  of  any  one. 

To  go  halves  with  any  one. 

To  agree  with,  or.  side  with  any  one. 

To  decline  in  fortune. 

To  join  in  the  execution  of  noma 

malicious  design. 
To  become  better  and  better. 
To  become  worse  and  tvorse. 
To  go  from  bad  to  worse. 
To  take  the  lead. 
To  be  on  the  look  out  for. 
To  remain  behindhand. 
To  be  well  attired. 
To  rub  on  as  well  as  «ne  can. 

To  founder  at  sea. 

To  escape  one's  memory. 

To  lose  one's  reason. 

He  is  very  anxious  about  it. 

I  wager  a  hundred  dollars  that  it  i» 
true. 


450 


IDIOMS. 


Jente  baja — jente  soez. 

"  coniun,  or,  vulgar. 

"  de  bien. 

•'  de  escalera  abaja 

"  .de  capa  parda, 

"  de  la  garra. 

"  de  trato. 

*«  de  pluma. 

••  de  capa  y  espada. 


Babble— tool). 

Common  people. 

Honest  people. 

Low-bred  people. 

Villagers — rustics. 

Thieves — pickpockets. 

Traders — dealers. 

Notaries — attorneys. 

Gentlemen  who  follow  150  profes- 


Ladrar  el  estdmago. 

Levantar  a  uno  sobre  loa  cuernos 

de  la  luna. 
Ley  del  embudo. 
Ley  del  encaje. 
Librarse  de  algun  aprieto. 

Limpio  de  polvo  y  paja. 
Llamar  a  grito  herido. 
Llevar  a  mal. 

M      de  vencida. 

"      el  corazon  en  la  mano. 
Le  Uevaron  cincuenta  hbras  por  su 

reloj. 
Llevarse  chasco. 

"        de  calles  alguna  cosa. 

M        el  dia,  or,  la  palma. 
Mamarlo  en  la  leche. 

Mal  de  su  grado. 
"    que  le  pese. 
Mandar,  or,  pasar  aviso. 
Manos  a  la  obra. 
Mas  blando  que  una  breva. 
Meter  a  uno  en  tercio  y  quinto. 

«     bulla. 

"     el  hocico  en  todo. 
"     los  je'neros  por  alto. 
11      su  zizana. 
Meterle  a  uno  por  el  aro,  6,  el  arillo. 
Meters*  a  caballero. 
'*       a  sabio. 
'«        con  alguno. 
a       en  camisa  de  once  varas. 

M       en  si  mismo. 
Mirar  de  socarron. 
"     las  telarafias. 


To  be  hungry. 

To  exalt  one  to  the  skies. 

A  selfish,  unfair  decision. 

An  arbitrary  law. 

To  free  one's  self  from  any  diffi- 
culty. 

Clear  from  all  encumbrance. 

To  call  with  all  one's  might. 

To  take  any  thing  amiss. 

To  prove  victorious. 

To  be  sincere  and  candid. 

They  charged  him  fifty  pounds  for 
his  watch. 

To  be  disappointed. 

To  carry  every  thing  before  the 
wind. 

To  carry  the  day. 

To  imbibe  any  thing  in  one's  in- 
fancy. 

Unwillingly. 

In  spite  of  his  teeth. 

To  send  word. 

To  set  about  to  work. 

More  pliant  than  a  glove. 

To  procure  one  any  great  advan- 
tage. 

To  make  a  noise — bustle. 

To  meddle  in  every  thing. 

To  smuggle  goods. 

To  sow  discord. 

To  decoy  one. 

To  assume  the  gentleman. 

To  affect  learning  and  knowledge. 

To  pick  a  quarrel. 

To  interfere  in  other  people's  busi- 
ness. 

To  resolve  in  one's  mind. 

To  look  slyly,  roguishly. 

To  blunder  from  inattention. 


IDIOMS. 


451 


«*     Bobre  el  hombro. 

"     de  hi  to  en  Mto. 
Moler  a  anc 

Mostrar  las  suelas  de  los  zapatos. 
Moverse  a  todos  vientos. 

Nacer  de  cabeza. 

**     de  pies. 
Nada  se  me  da  de  ello. 

**  u   va  en  ello.  f 

Negarse  a  si  misino. 
No  comer  pan  de  balde. 
"  deja  meter  baza. 

"  cabe  mas. 

"  importa  nn  clavo. 

"  estar  para  fiestas. 

u  esta  en  sns  alfileres. 

M  me  deja  ni  a  sol  ni  a  sombra. 

"  se  me  da  nn  bledo. 

"  poder  tragar,  or,  ver  a  alguno. 

"*  sabe  cnantos  son  cinco. 

M  sufre  cosqnilias. 

M  tener  arte  ni  parte  en  algnna 


To  cast  a  contemptuous  look. 

To  look  steadfastly. 

To  annoy,  or,  pester  one. 

To  take  to  one's  heels. 

To  be  fickle — wavering. 

To  be  born  to  wretchedness. 
To  be  born  to  g*od  luck. 

I  care  nothing  about  it. 

To  govern  one's  passions. 

Not  to  eat  the  bread  of  idleness. 

He  does  not  allow  one  to  slip  in  a 

word- 
Nothing  more  can  be  desired, 
It  is  of  no  consequence. 
To  be  out  of  temper. 
He  is  in  a  bad  humor. 
He  is  always  at  my  heels. 
I  care  not  a  straw. 
To  abhor,  or,  detest  any  one. 
He  does  not  know  A  from  B. — He 

is  very  innocent  {ironical). 
He  suffers  no  jokes. 
To  have  no  hand  in  any  thing. 


"  tener  mas  que  la  capa  al  horn-    To  be  without  resources. 

bro. 
"  vale  un  bledo,  or,  una  chita. 
M  vol  ver  la  cara  atras. 


"  dejar  piedra  para  mover. 

Obrar  con  gran  pulso. 

Pagar  los  azotes  al  verdugo. 
Pasar  por  las  annas. 
Pata  de  gallo. 
Pelado  como  una  rata. 
Pelarse  las  barbas. 
Perder  cuidado. 

Perderse  de  vista. 
Poner  pleito  a  alguno. 
Poner  el  lobo  en  el  corraL 

"     pies  en  pared. 

"     pies  en  polvorosa. 
**      toda  la  carne  en  el  asador. 
Por  fas  6  por  ne*fas. 


It  is  not  worth  a  straw. 

To  pursue  any  thing  with  spirit 

and  perseverance. 
Not  to  leave  a  stone  unturned. 

To  act  with  circumspection. 

To  return  good  for  evil 

To  be  shot  as  a  criminal. 

An  artful  device. 

As  poor  as  a  church  mouse. 

To  fly  into  a  passion. 

Not  to  fear — to  make  one's  self 
easy. 

To  excel  in  an  eminent  degree* 

To  go  to  law  with  any  one. 

To  lock  up  the  wolf  in  the  sheep- 
fold. 

To  maintain  one's  opinion  with  ob- 
stinacy. 

To  fly — to  escape. 

To  hazard,  or,  stake  one's  all. 

Sight  or  wrong. 


452 


IDIOMS. 


Quebrar  el  ojo  al  diablo. 
Quedar  por  alguno. 
Quedarse  en  asperges. 

"       en  la  calle. 
"        en  bianco. 

"        de  una  pieza,  or,  hechc 
una  pieza,  or,  quedarse 
helado. 
Quemarse  las  eejas. 
Querer  decir. 

"      subir  al  cielo  sin  alas. 
Razon  de  pid  de  banco. 
Reir  a  carcajada  tendida. 
Roer  el  anzuelo. 
Saber  de  que  pid  cojea. 
"     algo  de  buena  tinta. 

Sacar  de  tino. 

"     bien  su  caballo,  or,  su  capa. 

**     el  pid  del  lodo. 

"     fuerza  de  flaqueza. 

u     un  clavo  con  otro  clavo. 

"     un  fuego  con  otro  fuego. 
Sacudir  el  yugo. 
Salir  a  luz. 

"    con  algo, 
Salir  de  mantillas. 

"  de  fit 

"  de  tino. 

"  los  colored  al  rostro. 
Saiga  lo  que  saliere. 
Salirse  con  la  suya. 


Saltar  de  alegrla,  or  de  gozo. 

"      de  su  camisa. 
Salto  de  mata. 

11    mortal. 
Santo  y  bueno. 
Sembrar  en  arena. 
Ser  de  monte  y  ribera. 

"    un  terron  de  sal. 
Servir  a  Dios  y  al  diablo. 
Sin  dano  ni  barras. 

"  mas  aca,  ni  mas  alia. 

"  que  ni  para  que. 

**  que  ni  por  qud. 

'*  sentirlo  la  tierra. 


To  act  justly. 

To  become  surety  for  any  one. 

To  be  frustrated  in  one's  expecta* 

tions. 
To  be  without  resources. 
To  be  left  in  the  lurch. 
To  be   thunderstruck — to  remain 

astonished. 

To  study  intensely. 

To  mean. 

To  wish  to  fly  without  wings. 

An  absurd  reason. 

To  laugh  heartily. 

To  free  one's  self  from  peril. 

To  know  any  one's  weak  side. 

To  know  any  thing  from  good  aa 

thority. 
To  make  one  lose  his  senses. 
To  extricate  one's  self  decently  out 

of  a  difficulty. 
To  get  out  of  the  scrape. 
To  make  a  virtue  of  necessity. 
To  cure  one  excess  by  another. 
To  give  a  Roland  for  an  Oliver. 
To  shake  off  the  yoke. 
To  be  produced — to  be  published. 
To  obtain  one's  end. 
To    come    out    of    one's    leading 

strings. 
To  be  enraptured. 
To  lose  one's  senses. 
To  blush. 
Happen  what  may. 
To  have  one's  own  way — to  accom. 

plish  an  object. 


[■     To  jump  with  joy. 


Escape  from  punishment. 

A  somerset. 

Well  and  good. 

To  labor  in  vain. 

To  be  fit  for  any  thing. 

To  be  very  witty. 

To  carry  two  faces  under  one  hood. 

Without  danger  or  injury. 

Without  ifs  and  auds. 

Without  rhyme  or  reason. 

Without  any  one  knowing  it. 


IDIOMS. 


453 


Siu  embargo  de  embargos. 

Sobro  la  marcha. 

Sopiarse  las  ruanos. 

Subir  a  uno  sobre  los  cuernos  de 

la  hma. 
Sabirse  a  las  bovedillas. 

"      eu  zaucas. 

"       en  talones. 

Temblar  la  barba. 

"       las  carnes. 
Templar  la  guita. 
Tender  el  pauo  del  piilpito. 
Tener  a  me'nos  hablar  a  uno. 

"      a  uno  a  raya. 

"      al  go  en  la  punta  de  la  le  ngua. 

Tener  bien  asentada  la  baza. 

"      buenas,  or,  malas  ausencias. 

M     buen,  or,  mal  cerca. 

"  buen  diente. 

"  buen  est6mago. 

"  buenos  tragaderos. 

"  bula  para  toda.      % 

*'  cabida  con  alguna  persona. 

*'  cascos  de  calabaza. 

"  el  maudo  y  el  palo. 

"  el  pi  6  en  clos  zapatos. 

"  el  seso  eu  los  calcafiales. 

•'  estrella. 

"  los  cascos  a  la  jineta. 

«'     los  cinco  dedos  en  la  mano. 

"     malas  cosquillas. 

**     mucha  chispa. 

**     mucho  gallo. 

"     ojeriza  &  alguno. 

11     pocas  barbas. 

"     su  alma  en  su  cuerpo. 

**     y  tengamos. 
1  entar  al  oido. 
Tirar  A  dos  cliitas. 

"     a  degiiello. 

"    d  uno  de  la  capa. 

14    cozes  contra  el  aguijon. 
Tocar  a  lo  vivo. 


In  spite  of  obstacles. 
Off  hand — instantly. 
To  be  disappointed. 
To  exalt  one  to  the  skies. 

To  be  nettled — vexed. 

To  be  elated  by  good  fortune. 

To  grow  proud  and  haughty. 

To  act  with  caution  or  fear. 

To  have  a  horror  of  any  thing. 

To  pacify— to  please. 

To  speak  diffusely. 

Not  to  deign  to  speak  to  one. 

To  keep  one  at  bay.  f 

To  have  anything   on  the  tip   of 

one's  tongue. 
To    have     one's    reputation    well 

established. 
To  be  well,  or  ill  spoken  of  in  one's 

absence. 
Capable  of  bearing,  or  not,  a  close 

examination, 
To  have  a  good  appetite. 
To  brook  insults, 
To  be  very  credulous. 
To  have  permission  to    do    what 

one  likes. 
To  have  influence  with  another. 
To  be  ignorant,  or,  stupid. 
To  have  absolute  power. 
To  have  two  strings  to  one's  bow. 
To  have  one's  brains  in  their  heels. 
To  be  fortunate. 

To  be  hairbrained— to  have  little 
'    judgment. 

To  be  a  match  for  any  one. 
To  be  easily  put  out. 
To  be  very  sharp . 
To  be  arrogant  and  proud. 
To  bear  one  an  ill  will. 
To  be  inexperienced. 
To  do  what  one  thinks  proper. 
To  give  and  take. 
To  sound  one. 

To  have  two  strings  to  one's  bcvr. 
To  seek  one's  ruin. 
To  warn  one  of  any  danger. 
To  kick  against  the  spur. 
To  touch  one  to  the  quick. 


454 


IDIOMS. 


««     de  cerca  algun  asunto. 

"     la  solfa  a  alguno. 
Tomar  a  uno  entre  dientes. 

"       el  cielo  con  las  manos. 

"      la  ocasion  por  los  cabellos. 

u      las  (calzas)  de  Villadiego. 
Tornarse,  or,  torn  aria  con  alguno. 
Traer  a  uno  en  boca,  or,  en  lenguas. 

"     la  barba  sobre  el  hombro. 
Tragar  el  anzuelo. 
Trucha,  6  no  comerla. 

Valga  lo  que  valiere. 
Vamos  claros. 
Vender  palabras. 

' '      salud. 
Venders  barato. 
Venir  a  menos. 

"    al  caso. 

"    con  las  manos  lavadas. 

"    de  perilla. 
u    una  cosa  pintada. 
Verdad  de  Perogrullo. 

Verse  con  alguno. 

"     negro. 
Vestirse  con  todos  sus  alfileres,  or, 

con  veinte  y  cinco  alfileres. 
Visto  y  no  visto. 
Vivir  a  las  costillas  de  otro. 

"    a  sus  anchuras. 

"    de  gorra. 
Volver  a  cojer  el  cabo. 

"      a  la  cara  las  palabras  in- 
juriosas. 

M      al  prop6sito. 

"      la  cara  atras. 

"     la  tortilla. 

"     las  nuezes  al  cantaro. 

"      a  decir. 

M      a  hacer. 

"      a  venir. 
Untar  las  manos. 
Zafarse  de  alguna  cosa. 


To  hare  a  complete  knowledge  of 

any  thing. 
To  giye  one  a  good  drubbing. 
To  have  an  antipathy  against  any 

one. 
To  be  transported  with  rapture 

to  be  enraged. 
To  profit  by  the  occasion. 
To  take  to  one's  heels. 
To  pick  a  quarrel  with  any  one. 
To  traduce  any  one. 
To  be  alert. 

To  allow  one's  self  to  be  deceived. 
Neck  or  aothing — all  or  none. 

Let  it  be  worth  what  it  may. 

Let  us  understaud  one  another. 

To  decive  by  fair  words. 

To  appear  very  robust. 

To  make  one's  self  cheap. 

To  decline  in  any  way. 

To  come  to  the  point. 

To  wish  to  enjoy  the  fruit  of  a^< 
other's  labors. 

To  come  at  the  nick  of  time. 

A  thing  to  fit  or  suit  exactly. 

A  notorious  truth. 

To  have  an  interview  with  cne. 

To  have  a  crow  to  pluck  with  one. 

To  be  afflicted — embarrassed. 

To  be  dressed  in  style— to  be 
decked  out. 

No  sooner  said  than  done. 

To  live  at  another's  expense. 

To  live  at  one's  expense. 

To  live  by  one's  wits. 

To  resume  the  thread  of  a  dis- 
course. 

To  retort  abusive  language. 

To  return  to  the  point 

To  give  in. 

To  turn  the  scale. 

To  renew  a  contest. 

To  repeat. 

To  do  over  again. 

To  come  again. 

To  bribe. 

To  get  clear,  or,  rid  of  anything. 


MERCANTILE  VOCABULARY. 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  GOODS. 


GROCERIES. 
Sugar :  fine  white — brown — clayed 
— muscovado — refined — lump — 
crushed.  — Candy. 

Molasses. 

Coffee  :  green — fine — good — ordi- 
nary. 

Cocoa. — Rice. 

Spices:  Pepper— Cinnamon— Cassia 
Lignea— Cloves— Nutmegs— Gin- 
ger. 

Vanilla— Aniseeds—  Sago— Tapioca. 

Almonds  :  bitter — sweet. 

Filberts. 

Rai  sins— Figs— Prunes — Currants . 

Oranges — Lemons. 

Olives — Capers— Brandy  Fruits. 

Pickles — Preserves— Sweetmeats. 

Chocolate — Clarified  Sirups. 
Vermicelli — Starch — Soap . 
Tobacco:  leaf— stemmed — in  car- 
rots—Snuff— Segars. 

Candles:  wax— spermaceti —  stea- 
rine. 

Glue — Isinglass. 

Mustard. 

R)lled  Brimstone — Flour  of  sul- 
phur. 

PROVISIONS 
Flour — Bacon — Pork. 
Beef  salted. 
Cheese — Hams. 


ESPECERfAS. 
Azucar  :    bianco   corriente  —  que* 

brado  —  terciado  —  mascabado  — 

refinado  —  de  pilon  —  molido.  — 

Candi. 
Miel  de  cafia,  or  de  purga. 
Cafe  :  verde— de  primera— de  2da — 

3a. 
Cacao.— Arroz. 
Especias  :   Pimienta — Canela — Ca- 

nelon— Clavos  de  especia,  or  de 

comer — Nuez  moscada — Jenji- 

bre. 
Vainilla— Anis — Sagu— Tapioca. 
Almendras :  amargas—  dulces. 
Avellanas. 
Pasas — Higos  secos— Ciruelas  pa- 

sas — Pasas  de  Corinto. 
Naranjas — Limones . 
Aceitunas — Alcaparras— Frutas  en 

aguardiente. 
Encurtidos(envinagre) — Conservaa 

— Dulces. 
Chocolate—  Jarabes  finos. 
Fideos — Almidon— Jabon, 
Tabaco :  en  rama — palitos  do   ta- 

baco — en    andullos— Rape* — Ci- 

garros. 
Velas  :  de   cera — de   esperni* — de 

estearina. 
Cola— Cola  de  pescadc 
Mostaza. 
Azufre  labrado,  or  en  pasta  -Flor 

de  azufre. 

PROVISIONES. 
Harina — Tocinc— Puerco. 
Vaca  salada. 
Queso — Jam  ones. 


156 


MERCANTILE   VOCABULARY. 


Cod:  dry  — Stockfish — Soused  sal-    Bacalao :  salado — Pezpalo  -  Salm 
mon — Herrings  :    smoked  — Sar-         escabecliado  —  Arenques  :    ahu 
dines — Anchovies.  mados — Sardinas— Anchovas   or 

Anchoas. 


m- 


LIQUORS    AND    SPIRITS. 
flf  i  ties  :    Madeira  —  Port  —  Malaga 
(sweet,    dry) —Muscat — Claret — 
Champagne— Burgundy—Rhenish 

—  Sherry — Malmsey. 

Old  Wines  In  wood— bottled. 

Beer  —Porter— Cider. 
Brandy— Cognac— Gin— Rum — Al- 
cohol, or  Spirit  of  wine. 

Liquors,  or,  cordials—  Vinegar. 

OILS. 
Oils  :    olive  —  fish — whale—  palm 

—  turpentine  —  spermacetti— Un- 
seed—lamp  —vitriol. 

Oil  cakes:  rape  and  linseed. 

Castor  oil. 

Essential  oils  :   aniseed— juniper — 
lavender-  -thyme — bergamot. 


LICORES  Y  ESPIRITUS. 

Vinos  :  de  Madera — de  Oporto  -de 
Malaga  (abocado,  or  dulce,  seco) 
—  Muscatel  —  de  Burdeos  —  de 
Champafia  —  de  Borgona  —  del 
Rin — de  Jerez— de  Malvasia. 

Vinos  anejos  en  barricas— en  bote- 
Uas. 

Cerveza — Porter — Sidra. 

Aguardiente  —  Conac  —  Jinebra  — 
Rom — Alcohol,  or  Espiritu  de  vi- 
no. 

Licores — Vinagre. 


Aceite  :  de  oliva— de  pescado— de 
ballena— de  palma—  de  trementi- 
na — de  esperma  — de  linaza— para 
lamparas— de  vitriolo. 

Orujos  (borujos) :  de  corza  y  de  li- 
naza. 

Aceite  de  Palma-Christi. 

Aceites  esenciales:  de  anis  -de  ene- 
bro  —  de  espliego — de  tomillo — da 
bergamota. 


CORN,  GRAIN,  SEEDS,  GRANoS,    SIMIENTES. 

Wheat  —Rye— Barley— Oats— Maize    Trigo  — Centeno  —  Cebada  —  Avena 


or  Indian  corn  —Malt. 

DYE-STUEFS. 

Annatto  or  Roco. 

Cochineal:  silver— gray— black. 

Galls— Indigo. 

Madder  —  Orchilla  weed  —  Querci- 
tron—Safflower— Saffron. 
Sumac  or  Shumac  -TurnsoL 
Dye-Woods — Braziletto. 

CHEMICALS    AND  PREPARATIONS. 
Potash  and  Pearl  ash— Alum— Tar- 
tar— Cream  of  tartar. 
Copperas:  green— blue. 
Vitriol:  blue— green— white. 


— Maiz— Cebada  retonada. 

TINTES. 

Achiote. 

Graua  (cochinilla) :  plateada — gria 

— negra. 
Agallas—  Anil. 
Rubia  en   raiz  —  Orchilla — Querci* 

tron— Cartamos  — Azafran. 
Zumaque  — Tornasol. 
Palos  de  tinte — Brasilete. 

SALES  Y  PRODUCTOS  QUIMICOS. 
Potasa  y  Perlasa— Alumbre— Tarta 

ro  crudo  -  Crernor  tartaro. 
Caparrosa:  verde— azul. 
Vitriolo :  azul-  -verde  —bianco. 


CLASSIFICATION   OF   GOODS. 


45r 


Sal  ammoniac — epsom— glauber. 

Aqua  fortis — Barilla. 
Saltpetre:  crude— refined. 
Nitrate  of  soda. 

DRUGS. 
Aloes— Ambergris. 
Peruvian  bark— Calysaya. 
Benzoin. 

Borax:  crude— refined. 
Camphor:  crude — refined. 
Cantharides  —Cardamoms. 
Cassia  Sticks. 
Coriander. 

Cummin  seeds— Dragon's  Blood. 
Ellel  "">re — Gentian  Root. 
Gum  :    arabic— assafcetida — guaya- 

cum — shellac— myrrh — incense — 

tragaganth. 
Ipecacuanha — Jalap . 
Juniper  berries— Lime  juice. 
Liquorice—  Magnesia. 
Manna:  in  flakes— in  sorts. 
Mastic-  -  Musk— Musk  seed. 
Mustard  seed  — Nux-vomica. 
Opium — Peppermint . 
Rhubarb—  Sarsaparilla. 
Sassafras  Root— Senna. 
Snake  Root  -  Squills. 
Storax — Tamarinds. 

ANIMAL    SUBSTANCES. 

Bristles. 

Ivory. 

Feathers  :  ostrich— heron— bed — 
Down. 

Furs:  chinchilla-ermine— otter- 
bear- leopard. 

Hides— Horns. 

Bone — Tortoise  shell. 

Mother  of  pearl— Horse  hair. 

Skins  :  buck— calf,  undressed,  fi- 
nished—varnished— deer  in  hair 
—goat— kid  -elk  —  beaver  —  mo- 
rocco—seal. 


Tallow   -Wax— Whalebone. 


Sal    amoniaco — de    Inglaterra— de 

glauberto. 
Agua  fuerte— Barilla. 
Salitre:  crudo — refinado. 
Nitrato  de  soda. 

DROGAS. 

Acibar — Ambar  gris. 

Quina  — Calisaya. 

Benjuf. 

Borraj :  crudo  —refinado . 

Alcanfor:  crudo —refinado. 

Cantaridas — Cardaniomos. 

Caiiafistolas. 

Coriandro,  or  Cilantro. 

Cominos — Sangre  de  drago. 

Ele'boro—  Raiz  de  jenciana. 

Goma  :  arabiga — asafe'tida -guaya- 
co — laca  enhojas  —  mirra— incien- 
so — adragante,  or  alquitira. 

Ipecacuana — Purga  de  jalapa. 

Bayas  de  enebro  —  Zumo  de  limon. 

Regaliz — Magnesia. 

Mana:  en  lagrimas — en  suerte. 

Mastic — Almizcle — Ambrete. 

Mostaza  en  grano  —  Nuez  vomica. 

Opio — Menta,  or  yerba  buena. 

Ruibarbo — Zarzaparilla. 

Raiz  de  zarzafras — Hojas  de  sen. 

Serpentaria — Cebolla  albarrana. 

Estoraque — Tamarindos. 

SUBSTANCIAS    ANIMALES. 

Cerdas  (sedas  para  zapateros). 

Marfil. 

Plumas  :  de  avestruz— de  garza— 
para  colchones— Plumon. 

Pieles:  de  chinchilla— de  armifio  - 
de  marta  cebellina— oso — leopar- 
do. 

Cueros  al  pelo — Cnernos,  or  astas. 

Hueso  -  C.a-ey. 

Nacar — Crin,  or  clin . 

Pieles  :  de  gamo— becerro,  adoba- 
do,  curtido  — becerrillos  charola- 
dos—  gainuza  al  pelo— de  cabra 
— de  cabritillo — de  danta— de  cas- 
tor— tafilete.  or  marroqul— de  lo- 
bo  marino. 

Sebo-  Cera— Barba  de  ballena. 


458 


MERCANTILE   VOCABULARY. 


MATERIALS    FOR   WEAVING, 

Cotton— Flax-  -Hemp. 

Wool  :    cashmere  —  Angora  —  goats 

and  camels  hair. 
Silk — raw. 
Yarn  :  mohair  —  hemp  —  cotton  — 

worsted. 


Spun  silk. 

METALS,  MINERALS,  STONES,  ETC.      METALES, 


MATERIAS    PARa    TEJIDOS. 

Algodon  en  rania — Lino—  Cafiamo. 

Lanaenrama:  de  cactusinir—  Ango- 
ra— pelo  de  cabra  y  de  camello. 

Seda  en  rama — crnda. 

Lana  hilada  :  pelo  de  cabra  hilado 
— cafiamo— algodon  hilado— hilo 
de  estambre. 

Filoseda,  or  borra. 


PIEDRAS, 


Gold:  in  bars  (ingots) — coin — dust. 

Silver:  in  bars — standard. 
Bullion — Spanish  dollars. 
Copper:  in  pigs — sheathing — old. 

Platina— Brass. 
Tin:  bars— blocks. 
Bismuth —Quicksilver. 
Antimony:  crude. 
Lead:  pig — ore. 

Em  ery — Steel — Zinc. 
Iron:  bar  —cast. 
Brimstone:  crude. 
Cobalt  —Arsenic. 
Coal — Flint-glass. 
Plaster  of  Paris. 

Stones  :  burr,  or  mill— pumice— 
grind — wet — flint. 

Precious  stones  :  diamond— eme- 
rald —ruby — amethyst  —  saphyre 
■ — opal— turquoise— topaz  —agate 
— onyx — garnet. 

Marble— Alabaster— Jet. 

PAINTS. 

Carmine —Cinnabar — Chalk. 

Ochre. 

Camboge — Chromic  yellow. 

Prussian  blue— Verdigrise. 

Vermillion— White  lead. 

Bed  lead— Lamp  black. 

Paints  in  oil— Varnish. 


MINERALES, 
ETC. 

Oro:  en  pasta,  or  tejos— acunado— 
en  polvo. 

Plata:  en  pasta — de  ley. 

Plata  y  oro  en  pasta — pesos  fuertes. 

Cobre  :  en  rosetas — en  planchas— 
viejo. 

Platina— Laton. 

Estafio:  en  varas — en  galapagos. 

Estafio  glas  — Azogue. 

Antimonio:  crudo. 

Plomo  :  en  galapagos — mineral  de 
plomo. 

Esmeril  —  Acero — Zinc. 

Hierro:  en  barras — colado. 

Azufre:  en  bruto. 

Cobalto  —  Arsenico. 

Carbon  de  piedra — Cristal  de  roca. 

Yeso  de  Paris. 

Piedras  :  de  molino  (sin  labrar) — 
pomez — de  amolar — de  afilar — 
de  chispa. 

Piedras  finas,  or  preciosas  :  dia- 
mante— esmeralda — rubi  — ama- 
tista — zaiiro — opalo — turquesa — 
topacio — agata — onique  —  grana- 
te. 

Marmol — Alabastro — Azabache. 

COLORES    PARA    PINTAR. 
Carmin — Cinabrio  — Greda. 
Ocre.  or  tierra  amarilla. 
Gufcagamba — Amarillo  de  cromo. 
Azul  de  Prusia — Cardenillo. 
Bermellon  —  Albayalde. 
Minio,  or  ozarcon  —  Humo  de  pez. 
Pinturas  molidas  en  aceite—  Barnia 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  GOODS. 


459 


TIMBER,    WOOD,    ETC. 

Pilch  pine— Birch— Maple. 

Ash- Oak. 

Planks     Spars. 

Sta  ves :  pipe — hogshead — barrel. 

Hoops — Bamboos — Rattans. 

Woods  :  mahogany — rose-wood- 
cedar  —  ebony  —  lignum  vitas- 
box. 

SUNDRIES. 

Coral— Hops. 

India  rubber,  or  caoutchouc. 

Oak  bark. 

Sponges  —  Asphaltum — Pitch. 
Rosin — Tar. 

LINEN    GOODS. 
Linen  cloth— Irish  linen. 
Diaper :  bird  eye. 
Towels. 

Ticks,  or  bed  ticking. 
Linen  drills:  white — brown. 
Sail  cloth— Ravens  duck. 
Canvas — Twine. 
Lace — Edgings  and  Insertings. 

WOOLLEN    GOODS. 
Woollen  cloth — Woollen  stuff. 
Worsted  serge — Coatings. 
Cashmere  cloth — Merino  cloth. 
Woollen  damask. 
Printed  mousseline  de  laine. 
Black  bombazine. 
Flannels  of  all  descriptions. 
Cam  lets  —  Baize —Bunting , 
Wollen  blankets. 
Worsted  stockings  — Carpets. 

COTTON    GOODS. 

Calico  —Cambric  muslin. 
Muslins :  embroidered— checked- 

striped — figured — printed. 
Organdi — Bobinet  tul. 


MADERAS  DE    CONSTRUT  CION    Y 
PARA   MUEBLES,    ETC. 

Pino  —Alamo  —  Arce. 
Fresno— Roble,  enema. 
Tablas,  Tablazones  —  Perchas . 
Duelas:  para  botas,  or  pipas— para 

bocoyes — para  barriles. 
Arcos—  Bambus— Junquillos. 
Maderas  :     caoba — palisandra — ce- 

dro—  dbano  -  palosanto,    or  gua- 

yacan— boj. 

ARTTCULOS     DE     VARIAS     CLASES. 
Coral — Flor  de  oblon. 
Goma  elastica,  or  caucho. 
Casca,  or  cascara  de  roble  para  cur- 

tir. 
Esponjas — Asfalto — Brea. 
Resina — Alquitran. 

JENEROS   DE    HILO. 
Lienzo,  lencerfa— irlandas. 
Manteleria:  ojo  de  perdiz. 
Toallas,  (pafios  de  mano). 
Cotf,  terliz. 

Dril  de  hilo:  bianco — crudo. 
Lonsis — Lonetas. 
Canamazo— Hilo  bramante. 
Encaje — Puntillas  y  Antolares. 

TEJIDOS    DE   LANA. 
Pafio— Je'nero  de  lana. 
Sarga  de  lana — Baye tones. 
Tejido  de  cachemir — Merino. 
Damasco  de  lana. 
Muselina  de  lana  estampada. 
Alepin  negro. 
Franelas  de  todas  clases. 
Camelotes  —  Bayeta— Estaniena, 
Manias  de  lana. 
Medias  de  lana—  Alfombras. 

TEJIDOS    DE   ALGODON. 

Tela  de  algodon— Cocos,  percaki. 
Muselina:  bordadas—  de  cuadros — 

de  listas— labradas  —  impresaa. 
Organdi— Tul  bobine'. 


460 


MERCANTILE  VOCABULARY. 


French  and  English  prints,  or  cali- 
coes. 

Ginghams  :  with  checks— stripes  — 
plain. 

Nankins— Madras  handkerchiefs. 

Velveteens  —Cotton  blankets. 

Quilting  —Fustian. 

Cotton  drills. 

SILK  GOODS. 

Satin— Irish  poplins. 

Crape  —Gauze. 

Satin  ribbons  —Velvet. 

Black  satin  and  cashmere  vesting. 

Figured  silk  scarfs— Silk  plush. 
Silk  lace. 

Black  and  white  blonde  lace. 
Large  and  small  patterns. 
Plain  ground — plain  colored. 
Printed,  colored,  figured. 

Thick,  stout  satin. 
The  warp— the  Woof. 

MILLINERY,    PERFUMERY,    ETC. 

Veils:  lace  -tuL 

Artificial  flowers. 

Fans  :    ivory— mother   of   pearl — 

bone— wood. 
Fancy  tr  minings* 

Gloves:  ladies  short  and  long  kid. 

Sik  gloves  -Chenille. 

Favor  ribbons. 

India  rubber  suspenders. 

Tortoise  shell  combs. 

Pocket-books. 

Brushes:  shaving  and  tooth. 

Perfumed  soap— Pomatum. 

JEWELRY. 

Sets  of  jewels. 

G-oid  rings  set  with  precious  stones. 


Zarazas  francesas  6  inglesas. 

Guingas  :  de  cuadros— de  listas— • 

lisas. 
Mahones — Madras  de  la  India. 
Panas  — Frazadas  de  algodon. 
Acolchado  — Fustan. 
Dril  de  algodon. 

SEDEUfAS. 

Raso  — Poplinas  de  Irlanda. 
Crespon— Gasa. 
Cintas  de  raso— Terciopelo. 
Chalecos  de  raso  negro  y  de  cache- 

mir. 
Chales  de  sedas,  labrados  -Felpa. 
Encaje  de  seda. 
Blonda  negra  y  blanca. 
Dibujos  grandes  y  menudos. 
Fondo  liso  — de  color  entero. 
Estampado  de  colores,  iluminado, 

labrado. 
Raso  doble,  de  mucho  cuerpo. 
El  pie'    la  Trama. 

MODAS,  PERFUMERIAS,  ETC. 

Velos:  de  encaje — de  tuL 
Flores  de  mano  (artificiales). 
Abanicos:  varillaje  de  marfil — na- 

car  — hueso-  -madera. 
Adornos,    or    guarniciones  de  ca- 

pricho  para  trajes. 
Guantes  de  cabretilla  :   para  mujer 

— cortos  y  largos. 
Guantes  de  seda— Felpa. 
Chamberguillas. 
Tirantes  de  goma  elastica. 
Peines  de  concha. 
Carteras. 
Escobillas  :    de  barbas  y  para  lot 

dientes. 
Jabones  de  olor — Pomada. 

PRENDERfA. 

Aderezos. 

Sortijas  de  oro  con  piedras  precio- 


CLASSIFICATION  OF  GOODS. 


461 


Pearls  necklaces- 
Cameo  broches  and  bracelets. 
Gold  watches. 
Gold  chains  and  seals. 
Gold  studs. 
Gilt  ear-rings. 

Imitation  of  precious  stones. 
Spectacles:  silver  and  gold. 

ARMS    AND   WEAPONS. 

Cannons — Carronades— Bullets. 

Guns — Pistols. 

Copper  caps. 

Shot  of  all  sizes-  Gunpowder 

Sabres — Swords— Cutlasses. 

SUNDRIES. 

Engravings — Prints — Maps. 
Stationery — Pasteboards — Vellum . 
Paper  :    writing  —  hanging — wrap- 
ping -letter — printing. 
Blank  books. 
Lead  pencils— Quills. 
Steel  pens. 
Types. 


Collares  de  perlas. 

Broches  yBraceletes  con  camafoos. 

Kelojes  de  oro. 

Cadenas  y  Sellos  de  oro. 

Botones  de  camisa  de  oro. 

Aretes  dorados. 

Piedras  falsas. 

Espejuelos:  de  oro  y  plata. 


Cafiones — Carronadas  --  Balas. 
Escopetas  —  Pistolas. 
Capuzones  para  armas  de  piston. 
Perdigones  de  todos  gruesos— P61- 

vora. 
Sables— Espadas— Machetes. 

ARTICTJLOS    DE   VARIAS    CLASES. 

Laminas — Estampas— Mapas. 
Papeleria — Cartou— Vitela. 
Papel :  de  escribir  —pintado—  de  em 

traza— de  cartas — de  imprenta. 
Libros  en  bianco. 
Lapizes— Plumas  de  ave. 
Plumas  de  acero. 
Caracteres,  tipos. 


COMMERCIAL   CORRESPONDENCE. 


PARA   EMPEZAR  UNA   CARTA. 

Br.  Dn.  Samuel  Davis, 

Charleston. 
Sres.  Bernard  6  hijo  (e'  hijos), 

Lima. 
Muy  Sr.  mio  (nuestro). 
Muy  Sr.    mio    (Muy    Sr.    mio    y 

amigo). 
Muy  Sres.  mios  (nuestros). 
Muy  Sr.  mio,  de  todo  mi  aprecio, 

(Muy  Sr.  mio  y  amigo  6  estimado 

amigo). 

A  ruego  de  nuestro  comun  amigo, 
Dn.***,  nos  tomamos  la  libertad 
de... 

Conforme  nos  encarga  Dn.  ***, 
tenemos  el  gusto  (el  honor)  de  pre- 
venir  a  Vd.  que 

Consecuente  con  lo  que  insinua- 
mos  en  algunas  de  nuestras  ante- 
riores  .... 

Tiene  la  presente  por  principal 
notivo  el 

Sirve  la  presente  a 

Tengo  el  honor  de  noticiar  a  Vd. 
que  .... 

Participants  a  Vds.  como 

Nos  apresuramos  a  prevenirles 
que 

Siento  tener  que  participates 
que 

La  adjunta  es  copia  de  nuestra 
Ultima  del  .... 

Acompana  copia  de  nuestra  ulti- 
ma 25  del  ppdo. 

Confinnando  nuestra  ultima 
del  ... . 


BEGINNING    A    LETTER. 

Samuel  Davis,  Esq., 

Charleston. 
Messrs.  Bernard  &  Son  'and  Sons), 

Lima. 
Sir. 
Dear  Sir. 

Gentlemen. 
My  dear  Sir. 


At  the  request  (by  request;  of 
our  mutual  friend,  Mr.  ***,  we  take 
the  liberty  of  ... . 

By  desire  of  Mr.  ***,  we  have  the 
pleasure  to  acquaint  you  that  .... 

Agreeably  to  what  wc  intimated 
to  you  in  several  of  our  former  let- 
ters, .... 

The  immediate  object  of  this 
is 

The  present  will  serve  to  .... 

I  have  the  honor  to  inform  you 
that 

We  beg  to  inform  you  that  .... 

"VVe  hasten  to  inform  you  that . . . 

I  regret  that  I  have  to  advise 
that  .... 

Enclosed  is  a  copy  of  our  last  re- 
spects of  the 

We  hand  you  enclosed  a  copy  of 
our  last  of  the  25th  ult. 

Confirming  our  last  respects  of 
the  ... . 


BEGINNING  A  LETTER. 


463 


Carecemos  de  sus  estimadas  a  que 
dar  contestacion 

No  recibieudo  contestation  a 
mi 

Somos  favorecidos  con  su . . . . 

En  este  momento,  recibimos 
su 

Recibimos  la  estimada  de  Vd.  15 
del  que  rije,  y  le  damos  las  gracias 
por  los  avisos  que  encierra  sobre  el 
estado  de  ese  mercado. 

Ayer  recibi  su  aprecida  del   .... 

Hace  algunos  dias  recibimos 
juntas  sus  favorecidas  25  de  agosto 
y  16  de  setienibre. 

De  cuyo  contenido  quedamos  en- 
terados. 

Y  anotamos  su  contenido. 

En  su  dia,  recibimos  la  aprecia- 
ble  de  Vd.  del  . . . . ,  previnie'n- 
donos  que. . . . 

Acabamos  de  recibir  su 

Autes  de  recibir  sus  gratas  de. . . . 

Acuso  el  recibo  de  su  favorecida 
del.... 

Obra  en  mi  poder  su  muy  grata 
22  del  presente,  que  no  exije  res- 
puesta. 

Tengo  a  la  vista  su  apreciable  1° 
del  actual. 

Acaba  de  llegarnos  su  apreciable 
del.... 

Tengo  en  mi  poder  su. 

Obran     en    nuestro    poder    sus 
apreciadas  por y junta- 
men  te  con  las  facturas  de  . . . . 
En  contestacion  a  su  apble  del. 

Correspondiendo  a  su  estimada 
de  esta  misma  fha,  dire'  que. . . . 

Paso  ahora  a  dar  contestation  a 
su  apreciable  de 

Estranarian  el  que  no  haya  con- 
testado  oportunamente  a  su  esti- 
mada del  .  . .  ;  lleg6  a  mis  manos 
el  31  de  mayo. 


We  have  none  of  your  esteemed 
favors  unanswered  .... 

On  receiving  no  answer  to 
my 

We  are  in  (due)  receipt  of 
your  .... 

We  have  this  moment  received 
your ....  ^V 

We  have  received  your  esteemed 
favor  of  the  15th  inst.,  and  are 
much  obliged  by  the  information  it 
conveys. 

I  yesterday  received  your  favor 
of  the  .... 

Your  favors  of  the  25th  August 
and  16th  September  we  received  a 
few  days  ago. 

The  contents  of  which  are  noted. 

And  take  due  note  of  its  contents. 
We  duly  received  your  favor  of 
the ,  apprising  us  that. . . . 

We  have  just  received  your 

Previous  to  receiving  your  letters 
of  ... . 

I  have  to  acknowledge  the  receipt 
of  your  valued  favor  of  the  .... 

Your  friendly  lines  of  the  22d 
inst.  are  with  me,  and  require  no 
particular  answer. 

Your  favor  of  the  1st  inst.  is  at 
hand. 

Your  favor  of  the is  just  at 

hand. 

I  am  in  possesion  of  your  .... 

Your  several  communications  per 

ships and are    with    us 

together  with  invoices  of 

In  answer  to  your  esteemed  favor 
of  the 

In  reply  to  your  favor  of  this  day's 
date,  I  have  to  state  that 

I  now  answer  your  esteemed  favor 
of  the 

You  must  have  thought  it  very 
strange  that  I  have  not  answered 

your  letter  of  the ;  it  reached 

me  the*31st  of  May. 


464: 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


Espero  disiinularan  el  que  no  les 
haya  escrito  antes. 

ESQUELAS. 

J.  Burton  saluda  a  los  Sres 
Chapman  y  Mill,  y  les  participa 
que  .... 

Chapman  y  Mill  saludan  al  Sr. 
Dn.  J.  Burton  y  en  respuesta  a  lo 
que  les  tiene  manifestado  con  esta 
misma  fecha,  le  previenen  que  .... 

P.  L.  y  <>  tienen  el  gusto  de 
saludar  al  Sr.  P. ,  y  le  dan  atentas 
gracias  por  el  contenido  de  su  apre- 
ciable  de  esta  mafiana.  Respecto 
al  . . . . 

W.  A.  Blount  queda  agradecido 
a  los  Sres  P.  y  Ca.  por  haber  enca- 

minado    el ,    y    les    estimara 

tengan  la  bondad  de  .... 

PARA   CONCLUIR   UNA   CARTA. 

Quedo  de  Vds. ,  atento  y  seguro 
servidor.  Q.  B.  S.  M. 

(Que  besa  sus  manos.) 

Somos  de  Vd.  atentos  y  seguros 
servidores.  Q.  S.  M.  B. 

Soy  de  Vds.  su  muv  atento  S.  S. 
Q.  S.  M.  B 

Quedamos  de  Vd.  afectisimos 
Seg.  Serv.  Q.  B.  S.  M. 

De  Vd.  afmo.  Seg.  Serv. 

Q,  S.  M.  B. 

Queda  de  Vds.,  atento  y  seguro 
servidor  .... 

Dispongan  Vds.  de  su  .... 

SaludanaVds.,siis  afmos 

Y  sin  otra  cosa,  nos  ofrecemos 
a  su  disposition  atentos  y  S.  S 

Agradecido  a  los  muchos  favores 
que  hasta  aqui  me  ha  dispensado, 
me  repito 

Deseo  lo  pase  bien  y  mande  a  su 
afmo.  S.  S 

Con  este  motivo,  tenemos  el  gusto 
de  ofrecernos  4  sus  6rdenes  atentos 

as. 


I  have  to  apologise  for  my  neglect 
in  not  having  written  to  you  before. 

NOTES. 

Mr.  J.  Burton  presents  his  com- 
pliments to  Messrs.  Chapman  and 
Mill,  and  begs  to  state  that  .... 

Messrs.  Chapman  and  Mill  return 
their  compliments  to  Mr.  J.  Burton, 
and,  in  reply  to  his  note  of  this 
day's  date  beg  to  say  that  .... 

Messrs.  P.  L.  and  Co.,  present 
their  compliments  to  Mr.  P.  ;  they 
are  obliged  by  the  contents  of  hia 
note  of  this  morning.  With  respect 
to  the  .... 

Mr.  W.  A.  Blount  begs  to  return 
his  best  thanks  to  Messrs.  P.  &  Co., 
for  the  trouble  they  have  taken  in 
forwarding  the  ....  and  will  feel 
obliged  by  their  .... 

CLOSING  A   LETTER. 
I  am,  Gentlemen, 

Your  obedient  servant. 

,  "We  are  respectfully,  Sir, 

Your  obedient  servants. 
I  am,  with  respect,  Gentlemen, 

Your  obedient,  humble  servant. 
We  remain  truly,  dear  Sir, 

Your  very  obedient  servants. 
Believe  me,  dear  Sir, 

Yours  most  truly. 
I  have  the  honor  to  be,  with  true 
esteem  and  regard,  Gentlemen. . . . 
Believe  me, very  respectfully. . . . 
We  are  most  truly  .... 
And  conclude  with  the  assurance 
of  our  sincere  esteem. 

With  many  thanks  for  your  past 
favors,  I  remain,  .... 

Ever  at  your  service,  I  remain, 
Dear  Sir  .... 

We  avail  ourselves  of  the  oppor- 
tunity offered  us  to  tender  our  ser- 
vices to  you,  and  remain,  respect* 
fully,  yours  .... 


CLOSING  A  LETTER. 


46-5 


Se  repiten  de  Vd .  atentos  y  S.  S. 

Son  (Quedan)  de  Vd.  como  siem- 
pre. 

Quedan  de  Vd.  atentos  y  segnros 
servidores  Q.  S.  P.  B.  (Que  sus 
pies  besan. ) 

Muy  de  prisa  saludan  a  Vds.  sus 
afmos  .... 

Cou  deseos  de  recibir  pronto  una 
carta  de  Vd. 

Esperando  me  favorezea  con  una 
pronta  respuesta  a  la  presente.. . . 

Sirvanse  favorecerme  con  una 
respuesta. 

Sin  que  por  hoy  se  ofrezca  otra 
cosa 

Disimulen  Vds.  tantas  molestias 
y  ordenen  cuanto  gusten  a  su  .... 

Disimulen  Vds.  nuestras  con- 
tinuas  impertinencias,  y  en  retri- 
bucion,  manden  cuanto  gusten  a 
sus  afmos.  S.  S. 

Siento  haberle  incomodado  tanto 
Bin  utilidad. 

Precisados  por  el  correo  que  va 
a  salir,  no  nos  queda  tiempo  para 
mas  que  repetirnos  sus     .  .  . 

Maiiana,  escribire  a  Vd.  mas  es- 
tensamente  sobre  otros  asuntos. 

Le  escribiremos  con  mas  esten- 
sion  por  el  correo  inmediato. 

Por  el  correo  siguiente  escribi- 
remos  &  Vd.  mas  largamente. 

Cerrada  ya  nuestra  carta,  la  abri- 
mos  para  notificarlo  que  .... 

Escrito  hasta  aqui,  recibimos  su 
apreciable  del  22  corriente. 

Mil  afectupsas  y  finas  espresiones 
a  toda  su  familia,  y  Vd.  disponga 
de  sus .... 

Sirvase  Vd  dar  mis  afectos  a  su 
familia. 

P6ngame  Vd.  a  los  pie's  de  la 
Sra,***,  y  ordene  lo  que  guste  a 
*\i 


We  are  always,  Kith  sentiments 
of  real  regard  .  . . 
We  are  ever  truly  . . . 

We  are,  with  respect,  Madam, 
Your  obt.  humble  servants. 

We  remain,  in  haste,  your* 
truly. 

Desirous  to  hear  soon  from  you . . 

Hoping  yon  will  favor  me  with 
an  early  reply  to  the  present  .... 

You  will  oblige  me  by  favoring 
me  with  a  reply. 

And  not  having  further  to-day 
wherewith  to  detain  you,  we  re- 
main .... 

Excuse  all  this  trouble,  and  be- 
lieve me  .... 

We  are  truly  sorry  to  trouble  you 
so  often,  and  trusting  you  will,  in 
return,  freely  command  our  servi- 
ces, we  remain  .... 

I  am  extremely  sorry  to  have 
given  you  so  much  trouble  to  no 
purpose. 

The  post  being  on  the  point  of 
departure,  we  are  compelled  to  con- 
clude, being  always  truly 

To-morrow  I  will  write  to  you 
more  fully  on  other  topics. 

We  shall  write  you  more  fully  by 
next  mail. 

We  will  write  you  more  in  detaiJ 
next  post. 

We  open  this  letter,  after  hav- 
ing been  sealed,  in  order  to  ad- 
vise you  that  .... 

Whilst  writing  the  above,  wa 
have  received  your  letter,  of  the 
22d  instant. 

With  kind  regards  to  all  your 
family,  we  are  .... 

Make  my  kind  respects  to  your 
family. 

Give  my  inspects  to  Mrs.***,  and 
believe  mo  . 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


El  amanuense  ofrece  sus  respetos 
a  la  Bra.*** 

Memorias   (esprt  siones)    al    Sr. 
Dn.***,  de  mi  parte. 
Especiales  recuerdosalamigo***. 

Suplico  a  Yd.  la  pronta  entrega 
de  la  adjunta  a  su  titulo. 

Haganos  Vd.  el  favor  de  enca- 
minar  la  adjunta,  a  Mejico. 

Suplico  a  Vd.  la  direccion  de  la 
adjunta  por  el  primer  buque  que 
saiga  para  la  Habana. 

Siendo  de  sumo  interes  el  conte- 
nido  de  la  adjunta,  he  de  estimar  a 
Vd.  se  sirva  darla  direccion  por  el 
primer  correo. 

Sirvase  Vd.  dar  direccion  a  las 
adjuntas  (a  la  adjunta). 

He  encaminado  con  puntualidad 
las  cartas  que  para  este  efecto  me 
ha  dirigido. 

P.  D.  (Posdata.) 

Se  me  pasaba  (olvidaba)  decirles 
que 

Sirvase  Vd.  decir  al  amigo***que 
he  recibido  su  carta  del  5,  y  que  le 
contestartj  por  el  pr6ximo  correo  6 
el  siguiente. 

Sirvase  Vd.  dirigirme  sus  cartas 
bajo  cubierta  de  los  Sres.***,  de 
Ldndres  ;  de  esta  manera  llegaran 
pronto  a  mis  manos. 

Sirvase  Vd.  dirigirme  sus  cartas 
a  Nueva  York,  Post  Office. 

Sus  cartas  me  las  dirigira  en  casa 
de  los  Sres.***Caracas. 

Vuelta  (A  la  vuelta). 

SOBRESCEITOS. 

Sres.  MACIAS  y  O. 

New  York. 
Sres.  BROWN,  hermanos  y  Cia. 

New  York. 
Sr.  Dn.  BENITO  GIL, 
del  Comercio, 

Lima,  Peru. 
Sor.  Dn.  A.  BELMONT, 

20  Wall  street, 

New  York. 


The  writer  sends  his  respects  t4 
Mrs.***. 

Please  make  my  repects  to 
Mr.   *** 

Please  remember  me  to  our 
friend***. 

Phase  deliver  the  enclosed  with- 
out delay. 

We  request  you  will  forward  the 
enclosed  letter  for  Mexico. 

Have  the  goodness  to  torward  the 
enclosed  letter  for  Havana  by  the 
first  good  conveyance. 

The  enclosed  letter  being  of  con- 
siderable importance,  you  will  con- 
fer a  favor  by  giving  it  despatch  by 
first  mail  after  receipt. 

Please  give  the  direction  to  the 

enclosed. 
I  duly  forwarded   the  letters  you 
enclosed  me. 

P.  S.  (Post-Script). 

I  omitted  to  say  that  .... 

Please  tell  our  friend  ***  that  I 
have  received  his  letter  of  the  5th, 
and  that  I  will  answer  it  in  a  mail 
or  two. 

Your  letters,  care  of  Messrs.  ***, 
London,  will  reach  me  promptly. 


Pray  address  me  :  New  York  Post 
Office. 

Direct  to  me,  care  of  Messrs.  ***, 
Caraccas. 

P.  T.  0.  (Please  turn  over). 

ADDRESSES. 

Messrs.  MACIAS  &  Co., 

New  York. 
Messrs.  BROWN  Brothers  &Co,, 

New  York. 
BENITO  GIL,  Esq., 

Merchant, 

Lima,  Peru, 
A.  BELMONT,  Esq., 

20  Wall  street, 
New  York. 


MAILS  AND  COEEESPONDENCE. 


467 


Suplicada  al  S<»,  Dn.  E.  ****. 
Sr.  r&,  L.  BARANDIARAN, 

Habana. 
Sr.  T>n.  P  W.  HARLEl, 
*n  ca*a  de  k*  Sres.  CARRANZA,  6 
hijos, 

Buenos  Ayres. 
Sr.  Dn.  y.  H.  SMITH, 
para   entreprar  al    Sr.    Dn.    J.    D. 
MILLER,  Veracruz. 

S.  Dn.  (.  LATHAM, 

En  esta. 

CORREO I  Y  CORRESPONDENCIES. 

Se  han  recibido  cartas  aqui,  por 
la  via  de  Brazil. 

Si  hutf  ssen  recibido  cartas  para 
mi,  esps  .'o  rne  las  hayan  dirijido 
sin  perd<  r  momento,  bajo  cubierta, 
alSr.*** 

Antes  de  ayer,  tuve  el  gusto  de 
escribir  al  Sr.*** 

Por  el  correo  pr6ximo  6  el  si- 
guiente,  espero  poder  avisarles  el 
resultado 

Como  habra  transcurrido  mucho 
tiempo  cuando  esta  llegue  a  sus 
manos 

Y  no  creemos  sea  por  demas  usar 
de  esta  precaution,  porque  siguen 
muy  irregulares  los  correos  en  Ita- 
lia. 

Debe  haberse  estrayiado  esa  car- 
ta. 

Habiendo  sufrido  los  correos  en- 
torpecimientos  entre  esta  y  Mejico. 

La  falta  de  noticias  de  aquel  ami- 
go,  que  tiene  a  Vd.  con  cuidado,  no 
procedera  de  otra  causa  que  de  la 
irregularidad  de  los  correos. 

Solo  de  muy  pocos  dias  aca,  em- 
pezaron  a  llegar  a  esta  las  cartas, 
despues  de  haber  quedado  hasta 
nueve  correos  en  atraso. 

Y  aun  faltan  algunas. 

De  consiguiente,  estara  aquf 
cuando  llegue  la  respuesta  de  Vd. 

***  me  trasmitira  la  respuesta 
deVd. 


Favored  by  R.  ****,  Esq., 
Mr.  L.  BARANDIARAN, 

Havana. 
P.  W.  HARLEY, 
Care    of   Messrs.   CARRANZA   & 
SONS, 

Buenos  Ayres. 
J.  C.  MILLER,  Esq., 
Care  of  E.  H.  SMITH,  Esq., 

Veracruz. 
C.  LATHAM,  Esq. 

Present. 

MAILS  AND  CORRESPONDENCE. 
There  are  letters  here  via  Brazil. 

Should  any  letters  for  me  have 
arrived  prior  to  this  reaching  you, 
I  hope  you  have  lost  no  time  in  for- 
warding them  to  the  care  of  Mr.*** 

I  had  the  pleasure  to  write  to 
Mr.  ***  two  mails  since. 

In  a  mail  or  two,  I  hope  to  wait 
on  you  with  the  result. 

As  a  considerable  period  will 
elapse  before  the  receipt  of  this. . . . 

Nor  do  we  think  this  precaution 
superfluous,  as  the  mails  in  Italy 
are  very  irregular. 

This  letter  must  have  been  mis- 
carried. 

The  post  between  here  and  Mexi- 
co having  suffered  some  delay. 

Your  uneasiness,  grounded  on  his 
silence,  is  to  be  ascribed  solely  to 
the  irregularity  which  has  lately 
prevailed  in  the  mails. 

It  is  only  a  few  days  since  the 
letters  began  to  come  in,  after  no 
less  than  nine  mails  were  in  ar» 
rears. 

And  there  are  still  several  mis- 
sing. 

Your  answer  will  therefore  find 
him  here. 

***  will  transmit  me  your  answer, 


468 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


Pero  aim  no  tengo  contestacion. 

Estoy  pendiente  de  una  contesta- 
cion de . . . 

Correspondera  directamente  con 
Vd. 

Su  estensa  correspondencia  (de 
Vd.). 

La  raande'  al  Sr.***,  corresponsal 
ordinario  de  Dn.***,  en  Euan. 

Sobre  asuntos  que  me  conciernan 
tendran  a  bien  corresponder  con 
los  Sres.***,  de  Liverpool,  a  quie- 
nes  escribire'  tambien  en  el  momen- 
to  que  este' ..... 

Nos  apresuramos  a  escribirles 
por  varios  conductos,  suplicandoles 
no  difieranel. . . . 

Solo  lleg6  ayer  a  mis  manos,  por 
haber  sido  echada  tarde  en  ese  cor- 


But  as  yet  have  not  any  answer. 
I  am  awaiting  an  answer  from .... 

He  will  correspond  directly  with 
you. 

Your  wide  or  extensive  corres- 
pondence. 

I  forwarded  it  to  Mr.  ***,  the  reg- 
ular correspondent  of  Mr.***,  at 
Rouen. 

You  will  please  to  correspond  on 
matters  that  concern  me  with 
Messrs.***,  of  Liverpool,  to  whom  I 
shall  also  write  the  moment  I  am 

We  hasten  to  write  yoii  by  every 
channel,  to  request  that  no  delay 
takes  place  in ... . 

It  reached  only  yesterday,  being 
put  too  late  in  th«  Post-office. 


Hagame  Vd.  el  favor  de  escribir-        Let  me  hear  from  you. 


Tengo  en  mi  poder  su  grata 
del ....  con  una  inclusa  para  mi 
hermano,  y  como  este  habra  tenido 
a  estas  horas  el  gusto  de  saludar  a 
Vd.  no  le  mando  la  carta. 

No  escribo  a  dho  Sor,  por  no  ha- 
cerle  pagar  un  porte  de  carta  sin 
necesidad. 

Se  la  mando  abierta,  para  que  se 
imponga  de  su  contenido. 

Les  molestamos  hoy  principal- 
mente  con  el  objeto  de  acompauar- 
les  la  adjunta  carta,  que  dejamos 
abierta  para  que  se  enteren  (se  im- 
pongan)  de  su  contenido. 

Nos  ha  sido  comunicada  la  carta 
que  Vd.  escribio  el  30  ppdo  al  Sr.  ***, 
concerniente  al . . . .     - 

Aguardamos  primeramente  su 
respuesta  a  nuestra  carta  del .... 

He  correspondido  mas  particu- 
larmente  con  el  sobre  ese  asunto. 

El  Sr.***  habia  salido  ya  de  esta 
cuando  lleg6  la  carta  de  Vd.-,  se  la 
he  maudado  a  New  Orleans. 


I  have  your  friendly  letter  of 
the  .  .  accompanying  one  for  my 
brother.  As  he  will  have  had,  before 
this,  the  pleasure  to  have  seen  you, 
I  retain  the  letter. 

I  do  not  write  to  that  gentk  man, 
being  unwilling  to  put  him  ,o  un- 
necessary expense  in  postage . 

I  left  it  open  for  your  peruyal. 

We  trouble  you  to-day  principally 
for  the  purpose  of  handing  you  the 
enclosed  letter,  which  we  leiw  .3  open 
for  your  perusal. 

We  have  been  informed  of  your 
letter  of  the  30th  ult.  to  Mr.***, 
respecting  the .... 

We  first  wait  your  reply  to  our 
letter  of  the .... 

I  have  more  particularly  corres- 
ponded with  him  on  this  subject. 

Mr.***  had  already  left  this  ^'b/^n 
your  letter  arrived;  I  have  Bra)  '•t 
to  him  at  New  Orleans. 


THE   STATE   OF  THE   MARKET. 


469 


Si  no  se  hubiese  enoargado  su 
S/.  ***  de  corresponder  con  rds.  so- 
bre  los  asuntos  a  que  se  refieren  sus 
varias  cartas. . . . 

Deseo  escribirles  sobre  un  asunto 
de  alguna  importancia;  pero  no  lo 
\  are  hasta  tanto  no  reciba 

Manana  es  dia  de  correo. 

Devolvemos  a  Vd.  la  carta  del 
Sr.*** 

La  presente  va  por  la  via  de  Fila- 
delfia. 

El escribf  a  ***  bajo  sobre  a 

Vds. 

I  Pudieran  Vds.  decirme  si  se  ha 
puesto  en  planta  el  nuevo  arreglo 
postal  entre  los  Estados  Unidosy 
Espafia,  y  si  pueden  ir  ya  las  cartas 
sin  franquearse  ? 

Es  adjuhta  una  carta  para. . . , 
en  Lima,  que  me  haran  el  favor  de 
mandar  echar  en  el  correo. 

Tenga  Vd.  la  bondad  de  mandar 
franquear  una  carta  que,  con  nues- 
tra  direccion  esta  detenida  en  la 
administracion  de  correos.  Nos 
cargara  el  porte  y  se  servira  procu- 
rar  el  pronto  envio  de  la  carta. 

Un  despacho  telegrafico,  que  re- 
cibimos  en  este  momento  nos  im- 
pone  de  que 

Franco  de  porte. 

Carta  certificada. 


Had  not  your  Mr.  •■*•  taken  upon 
himself  to  correspond  with  you  on 
the  subject  of  your  different  letters 
to  us ... . 

I  wish  to  write  to  you  on  a  sub- 
ject of  moment,  but  shall  not  do  so 
until  I  receive 

To-morrow  is  post-day. 

We  return  you  Mr.***'s  letter. 

This  goes  via  Philadelphia. 

The I  wrote  to***  to  youl 

care. 

Will  you  be  so  kind  as  to  let  me 
know  if  the  new  postal  arrangement 
betwen  the  United  States  and  Spain 
has  come  into  force,  and  whether 
letters  may  now  go  without  the 
postage  being  prepaid  ? 

Enclosed,  a  letter  addressed  to.... 
at  Lima,  which  please  have  mailed 
at  Valparaiso. 

You  will  much -oblige  us  by  caus- 
ing tbe  postage  to  be  paid  on  a  let- 
ter lying  for  us  at  the  New  York 
Post-office.  Please  charge  us  with 
the  expense  and  forward  the  letter 
as  soon  as  possible. 

A  dispatch  by  telegraph  informs 
us  this  morning  that. . . . 

Free  of  postage. 
Registered  letter. 


THE  STATE  OF  THE  MARKET. 


Agradeceremos  a  Vd.  sus  avisos 
sobre  el  estado  actual  de  ese  mer- 
cado. 

Son  pocos  6  ningunos  los  nego- 
cios  hechos  desde  mis  ultimos 
avisos. 

Con  motivo  de  los  dias  feriados. 

Nuestro  mercado  sigue  en  el 
rnismo  estado  que  avisamos  en 
uuestra  anterior.  El  Cafe'  y  los 
Azucares  sostienen  sus  precios. 


A  few  lines  respecting  the  present 
state   of  your  markets  would   ca 
very  acceptable. 
No  business  since  my  last  advices, 


Owing  to  the  holidays. 

Our  market  continues  as  last  ad- 
vised :  Sugar  and  Coffee  maintain 
the  same  prices. 


470 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE . 


Creemos  no  les  sera  indiferente 
saber. . . . 

Habiendo  ocurrido  una  leve 
variacion  en  este  mercado,  voy 
a.... 

Les  doy  todos  estos  pormenores 
sobre  el  estado  de  nuestra  plaza, 
porque  .... 

Apreciard  a  Vd.  me  avise  lo  que 
ocurra  en  esa  plaza,  senalandome 
particularmente  aquellos  artlculos 
que  liayan  bajado  mas  de  su  precio 
ordinarfo. 

Por  algun  tiempo,  han  sido  muy 
animados  los  negocios  en  esta 
plaza. 

Como  Vd.  recibira  la  presente 
sin  pagar  porte  niuguno,  aprovecho 
esta  ocasion  para  avisarle  el  estado 
actual  de  esta  plazo  respecto  de 
algunos  arliculos  principales. 

Agradecemos  a  Vds.  sus  avisos 
de  ese  mercado,  y  rogamos  nos  los 
repitan  oportunamente. 


Y  de  un  mes  aca  no  han  variado 
los  precios. 

Desde  mi  ultima,  los  negocios 
de  Algodones,  en  esta  plaza,  han 
mudado  completamente  deaspecto. 

Los  precios  de  los  frutos  se  sos- 
tienen  em  este  mercado  ;  pero  hay 
poco  movimiento  en  los  negocios. 

Desde  nuestra  ultima,  nada  ha 
ocurrido  que  merezca  la  atencion 
de  Vd. 

No  notamos  variacion  ninguna  en 
los  demas  artioulos. 

Sigue  fluctuando  mucho  el  precio 
del  Cafe. 

En  los  demas  articulos,  no  hay 
variacion  alguna  desde  nuestros 
ultimos  avisos. 

Los  negocios  estan  en  la  mayor 
calma,  como  suele  suceder  en  esta 
estacion. 

Los  negocios  se  hallaban  en  el 
mayTr  abatimiento  y  paralizar'on. 


"We  think  it  will  not  bo  unin- 
teresting for  you  to  know  (to 
learn) .... 

A  slight  change  having  taken 
place  in  our  market,  I  will. . . 

I  have  been  thus  particular  in 
giving  you  the  details  of  this 
market,  because .... 
I  will  thank  you  to  keep  me  ad- 
vised with  your  prices  and  particu- 
larly with  those  articles  which  may 
be  depreciated. 

Our  market  has  been  for  some 
time  very  animated. 

As  this  will  reach  you  free  of 
postage,  I  submit  for  your  infor- 
mation the  state  of  our  market  for 
a  few  leading  articles. 

We  are  much  obliged  to  you  for 
your  information  on  the  state  of 
your  market,  and  shall  be  happy  to 
hear  from  you  as  often  as  any  thing 
interesting  occurs. 

Nor  have  the  prices  varied  for  a 
month  past. 

Since  my  last  respects,  the  state 
and  prospects  of  the  Cotton  market 
have  undergone  a  total  change. 

Our  market  is  tolerably  steady, 
but  without  much  animation. 

Nothing  worthy  of  notice  has 
occurred  since  our  last. 

In  other  articles  we  do  not 
notice  any  alteration. 

Our  Coffee  market  continues  in 
a  very  unsettled  state. 

Every  thing  remains  as  per  our 
last. 

Business  is  quite  dull,  as  it  is 
customary  at  this  season. 

The  state  of  the  market  was  re- 
presented as  very  bad. 


THE   STATE   OF  THE  MARKET. 


471 


Nuestros  precios  se  sjstienen 
altos,  pero  hay  poco  movimiento 
en  el  mercado. 

Aprovechamos  con  gusto  esta 
ocasion  para  mandarles,  en  justa 
reciprocidad  de  los  avisos  que  tuvi- 
vieron  a  bien  trasmitirnos,  el  ad- 
junto  precio  corriente,  en  el  que 
Be  indica  la  situacion  general  de 
nuestro  mercado. 

El  Ahjodon  empieza  a  gozar  de 
mas  favor  que  de  algun  tiempo  a 
esta  parte. 

El  Algodon  no  esta  tan  solici- 
tado  como  pudiera  haberse  espe- 
rado,  en  atencion  a  las  cortas 
existencias  que  tenemos. 

El  Aziicar  mascabado  sostiene 
proporcionalmente  su  precio  mejor 
que  el  terciado  y  esta  mas  buscado, 
con  motivo  de  no  haberse  impor- 
tado  tanto. 

Un  pequefio  lote  de ,  de  buena 

cali  dad,  ha  obtenido 

Se  han  despachado  algunas 
pequenas  partidas  del  Brasil  a  los 
precios  acotados. 

Continuan  sostenie'ndose  los 
precios  del  Tabaco. 

Han  sido  de  bastante  considera- 
cion  los  negocios  hechos  en  esta 
semana. 

Las  ventas  han  sido  muy  regu- 
lares  en  estos  tiltimos  dias. 

El  Arroz  esta  firme  a  30  f. 
quintal. 

El  Tabaco  escasea. 

El  de  Virginia,  de  calidad  supe- 
rior, se  ha  pagado  hasta  160  ft.  ; 
ninguna  venta  ha  bajado  de  115  fr. 

Los  negocios  de  Algodones  han 
mejorado  mucho  ;  este  renglon 
puede  cotarse  a  46  s. 

Nuestra  existencia  de  dicho 
renglon  esta  casi  enteramente  ago- 
tada. 

Los  Aziicares  andan  muy  busca- 
dos  a  precios  subidos. 

Se  sostiene  ekAlgodon,  y  quedan 


Our  market  continues  high  and 
stationary. 

"We  avail  ourselves  with  pleasure 
of  the  present  opportunity  to  re- 
ciprocate your  kind  advices  of  your 
market,  and  we  beg  reference  to 
the  prices  current  enclosed  for  4 
general  view  of  ours. 

Cotton  has  assumed  a  more 
favorable  appearance  than  it  has 
had  for  some  time  preceding. 

Our  Cotton  market  is  not  so 
brisk  as  it  ought  to  be,  considering 
the  very  small  stock  on  hand. 

Raw  Sugars  bear  a  better  price 
in  proportion  than  clayed,  and  are 
more  in  request,  less  having  been 
imported. 

One  small  lot  of good  quality 

obtained.  . . . 

A  few  Brazils  have  been  sold  at 
our  quotations. 

The  prices  of  Tobacco  continue 
to  be  supported. 

The  business  transacted  dtiring 
the  week  has  been  pretty  consider- 
able. 

Our  sales  within  these  few  days 
have  been  very  regular. 
Rice  is  steady  at  30  fr.  per  cwt. 

Tobacco  is  scarce. 

Some  very  fine  samples  of  Vir- 
ginia have  sold  as  high  as  160  fr., 
none  under  115  fr. 

Cotton  has  very  much  improved 
here,  and  may  be  quoted  at  4.6  s. 

The  market  is  exceedingly  bare 
of  this  article. 

Sugars  are  much  sought  fur,  at 
advanced  prices. 

Cottons  maintain  their  price  and 


472 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


estos  mercados  enteramente  des- 
provistos  de  este  renglon  ;  los  Azii- 
cares  tambien  estan  solicitados. 

Por  lo  demas,  el  mercado  se 
aostieiie  bien. 

El  Azucar  se  ha  resentido  de 
este  suceso.  y  goza  de  un  favor 
regular. 

Habiendo  subido  las  clases  pro- 
pias  para  las  refinerfas. 

El  Algodon  se  espende  facil- 
mente  en  pequenas  partidas  para  el 
consumo  diario. 

Van  mejorando  aquf  muy  poco 
«i  poco  los  negocios  y  la  demanda  ; 
con  todo  van  mejorando. 

Se  nan  reanimado  los  pedidos.  y 
el  precio  ha  subido  a . . . . 

Los  frutos  coloniales  van  toman- 
do  estimacion  ;  sin  embargo,  los 
precios  no  han  subido  sensible- 
mente  hasta  .el  dia. 

Los  compradores  se  muestran 
solicitos. 

Ahora  tiene  pedidos,  y  nuestra 
existencia  esta  sumamente  redu- 
cida. 

La  Sederfa  de  todas  clases  anda 
generalmente  solicidada. 

Los  Cueros  al  pelo  se  han  ven- 
dido  tambien  con  facilidad,  de  19 
a  21  s.  libra 

A  pesar  de  esto,  no  se  observa 
alteracion  ninguna  en  los  precios, 
que  continiian  los  mismos  que 
antes. 

Escasea  mucho  el  Cafe' ;  de  la. 
hace  tiempo  que  no  hay  en  la  plaza 
y  se  venderia  a  precios  subsidos. 

El  algodon  de  Georgia,  de  cali- 
dad  corriente,  obtiene  facilmente 

Esto  impide  que  suba  al  precio 
que,  de  otra  manera,  habria  alcan- 
zado. 

Con  todo,  lejos  de  bajar,  mas 
bien  va  subiendo. 

En  estos  cinco  ultimos  dias,  se 
Lan  vendido  sobre  3000  pacas. 


our  markets  our  quite  bare  ol  the 
article  ;  Sugars  are  likewise  in  de- 
mand. 

In  other  respects,  things  are  gen- 
rally  steady. 

This  event  has  caused  a  serious 
stir  in  Sugars. 

And  prices  are  advanced  for  the 
refiners'  use. 

Cottons  go  off  readily  in  small 
parcels  for  immediate  consump- 
tion. 

Our  market  and  demand  in- 
creases but  slowly,  but  it  does  in- 
crease. 

Now,  the  demand  is  rather  brisk 
again,  and  the  price  is  up  to. . . . 

Colonials  are  looking  upward, 
though  prices  have  not  thus  far  ex- 
perienced a  material  advance. 

Buyers  are  eager. 

It  is  now  in  demand,  and  the 
stock  on  hand  very  small. 

Silk  goods  of  all  descriptions  are 
generally  in  demand. 

Hides  have  been  equally  steady 
in  demand  and  price,  say  19  to  21s. 
per  lb. 

Yet  it  has  not  diminished  either 
the  price  or  demand,  both  the  one 
and  the  other  being  constant  and 
daily. 

Coffee  is  very  scarce ;  no  Fine  has 
been  offered  far  a  long  time  and  it 
would  command  a  good  price. 

Fair  qualities  of  Upland  Cotton 
readily  command 

This  keeps  it  from  going  up  to 
where  it  otherwise  would. 

Yet,  far  from  declining,  it  is 
rather  looking  up. 

Within  these  five  days,  about 
3000  bales  have  been  disposed  of. 


THE   STATE   OF   THE  MAEKET. 


47f 


Goza  la  Perlasa  del  mismo  favor 
que  la  Potasa,  y  se  despacha  con 
igual  facilidad. 

El  Luisiana,  de  calidad  corriente, 
obtendria  con  facilidad  de  48  a  50s. 

I)e  resultas  de  hallaise  muy  re- 
ducida  nuestra  existencia  y  de  no 
haber  arribos  recientes,  los  tenedo- 
res  piden  precios  mas  altos. 

El  cargamento  se  ha  vendido  a 
la  llegada  del  buque,  antes  de  abrir- 
se  las  escotillas,  a  50  s.  el  medio 
kil. 

El  Cafe"  puede  apuntarse  a  34  s. 
el  medio  kil.  libre  de  derechos;  va 
subiendo  por  todas  partes.  Han 
arrebatado  con  cuanto  existia  en  la 
plaza. 

Esta  mafiana  se  ha  pagado  por  el 
de  Santo  Domingo  una  friolera  mas 
que  la  semana  pasada. 

El  arroz  de  la  India  tiene  mas 
pedido  que  antes. 

Los  Aziicares  han  sido  muy  soli- 
citados  durante  algun  tiempo,  y 
continuan  despachandose  corrien- 
tem  ente  a  16s  precios  ajDuntados. 

Los  Aziicares  firnies,  los  fletes  al- 
tos. 

El  Algodon,  en  estas  cuatro  6  cin- 
co  ultimas  semanas,  ha  sido  pedido 
con  bastante  euipeno  y  el  precio  del 
de  la-  clase  ha  subido  a . . . .  para 
arriba. 

El  todo  ha  sido  comprado  a  40 
chel.  quintal. 

Han  tenido  pronto  despacho  a  2 
ch.  en  libra  sobre  los  precios  ante- 
riores. 

Los  tenedores  manifiestan  poca 
disposicion  a . . . . 

A  cuyo  precio  nada  mas  se  pue- 
de comprar. 

Ya  no  hay  vendedor  al  mismo 
precio. 

El  Cafe"  ha  subido  estraordinaria- 
mente. 

Consisten  las  ventas  en  451  pacas 
Georgia,  973  Luisiana. 

A  precios  sostenidos  (firmes). 


Pearlash  is  on  the  same  looting 
with  Potash,  and  finds  an  equal  de- 
mand and  sale. 

New  Orleans  of  fair  quality  would 
be  readily  run  off  at  48  to  50s. 

In  consequence  of  the  small 
quantity  on  hand  and  no  arrivals 
of  late,  holders  are  asking  for  bet- 
ter prices. 

The  cargo  was  sold  on  arrival  be- 
fore the  hatches  were  opened  at  50 
s.  per  i  kil. 

Coffee  may  be  quoted  at  34  s.  per 
|  kil.  duty  paid  ;  it  is  everywhere 
on  the  rise.     All  is  bought  up. 


Some  St.  Domingo  realized  this 
morning  prices  a  shade  better  than 
last  week. 

The  demand  for  East  India  rice 
has  improved. 

Sugars  have  been  in  steady  de- 
mand with  us  for  some  time,  and 
still  more  freely  at  our  quotations. 

Sugars  are  steady  and  freights  on 
the  rise. 

The  eager  demand  which  has 
manifested  itself  during  the  last 
four   or  five  weeks  has  driven  up 

the  price  of  choice  cotton  to 

and  upwards. 

The  whole  was  taken  in  at  40  sh. 
per  cwt. 

They  have  gone  off  briskly  at  an 
advance  of  2  shil. 

Holders  show  little  disposition 
to 

At  which  price  no  more  is  on 
sale. 

There  are  no  more  offers  at  the 
same  price. 

Coffee  has  taken  a  considerable 
start. 

The  sales  consist  of  451  bales  Up- 
land,  937  New  Orleans. 

At  steady  prices. 


m 


COMMERCIAL   COTITIESPONDENOE. 


Si  llegasen  eantitadesdeconside- 
racion,  bajaria  luego  a  45  s. 
Es  articulo  de  dificil  salida. 

Los  pedidos  de  azucares  han  ce- 
sado  casi  enteramente. 

De  los  liltimos  poco  6  n  ida  se  ha 
vendido. 

Se  reducen  las  operaciones  al 
diario. 

No  se  paga  ya  mas  arriba  de  15  s. 

En  la  actualidad,  no  hay  sino 
muy  poca  demanda. 

Los  frutos  coloniales  van  decli- 
nando  diariamente. 

Abundan  principalmente  en  la 
plaza  los  de  la  Luisiana  de  calidad 
inferior  y  corriente. 

La  demanda  no  es  crecida. 

Habiendo  ahora  bajado  esto  ren- 
gloa  a  un  precio  que  inspira  mas 
confianza  a  los  especuladores  y  ca- 
sas  que  suelen  comprar  para  el  con- 
sumo  del  pais. 

Han  decaido  mueho  los  precios 
de  todos  los  frutos  coloniales  y  lo 
mismo  sucede  en  los  demas  merca- 
dos  de  Europa. 

Cuantiosas  existencias. 

Los  productos  de  ese  pais,  en  ge- 
neral abundan  en  nuestra  plaza,  y 
van  de  baja. 

El  Aziicar  es  el  linico  articulo  que 
sostiene  su  precio,  en  atencion  a 
que 

Los  negocios  siguen  con  poco 
movimiento. 

Habiendo  bajado  considerable- 
men  te  su  precio. 

El  comercio,  que  en  estos  ultimos 
tiempos  habia  adquirido  aqui  cierto 
grado  de  actividad,  esta  ah»ra  su- 
mamente  abatido. 

No  pudiendo  los  consignatarios 
conseguir  una  oferta  admisible  por 
el  todo. 

Ei  Palo  de  tinte  ha  decaido  mu- 
eho, y,  en  general,  todos  los  nego- 
cios estan  ei-calmados. 


Large  arrivals  would  lower  it  at 
once  to  45  s. 

The  article  is  exceedingly  dull  of 
sale. 

The  demand  for  Sugar  has  almost 
subsided. 

Little  or  nothing  has  been  done 
in  the  latter. 

Nothing  is  doing  except  for  im- 
mediate consumption. 

15  s.  is  now  the  utmost  that  can 
be  obtained  for  it. 

The  demand  is  slack  at  the  pres- 
ent moment. 

Colonials  are  declining  daily  in 
price. 

The  inferior  to  fair  qualities  of 
New  Orleans  are  particularly  press- 
ed upon  the  market. 

They  are  little  inquired  after. 

Prices  having  now  receded  so 
considerably  as  to  encourage  the 
speculators  as  well  as  dealers  to  look 
at  the  article  with  more  confidence. 

All  colonial  produce  is  very  low, 
and  generally  so  in  every  market 
of  Europe* 

Large  quantities  on  hand. 
Your  commodities,  in  general,  are 
flat  and  the  prices  declining. 

Sugar  is  the  only  article  which 
keeps  up,  and  that  because .... 

All  goes  on  quietly. 

The  price  having  fallen  consider- 
ably. 

Our  trade,  which,  of  late,  had 
acquired  some  activity,  is  at  present 
in  a  state  of  great  depression. 

The  consignees  not  being  able  to 
get  an  acceptable  offer  for  the  whole. 

"Woods  are  very  much  reduced  in 
price,  and  every  thing  is  stagnant. 


THE   STATE   OP  THE   MARKET. 


475 


A  escepcion  del  Algodon,  no  hay 
articulo  alguno  que  prometa  buen 
resultado  en  este  mercado. 

Tenemos  en  la  plaza  cantidades 
crecidas  de  Arroz,  lo  que  dificulta 
mucho  su  venta. 

Los  frutos  coloniales  y  el  Palo  de 
tinte  estan  muy  paralizados  y  solo 
se  pueden  vender  con  quebranto. 

Estos  dias  pasados  hubo  algun 
movimiento  en  los  negocios,  pero 
ayer  y  hoy  no  ha  habido  operacion 
alguna. 

El  Palo  de  tinte  y  la  Caoba  no 
pueden  venderse  a  ningun  precio. 

Las  primeras  ventas  se  efectuaron 
facilmente  a  44  s. ;  pero  habiendose 
agolpaclo  en  poco  tiempo  cantida- 
des crecidas,  aflojo  algo  el  precio  ; 
en  el  dia  se  apunta  a  43  s. 

Durante  una  temporada,  se  hi- 
cieron  en  Cafe'  operaciones  estensas 
yprovechosas;  pero  este  renglon  se 
halla  ahora  en  calma  y  ha  declina- 
do  1  s. 

Los  avisos  poco  favorables  llega- 
dos  de  los  mercados  europeos  han 
hecho  bajar  mucho  los  precios  de 
los  Algodones  en  nuestra  plaza. 

En  el  dia,  no  tienen  ninguna  sali- 
da  las  clases  iuferiores. 

Y  solo  pueden  venderse  a  precios 
mas  bajos. 

Los  Azucares  se  han  vendido  esta 
semana  con  suma  dificultad,  y  han 
esperimentado  una  nueva  baja. 

A  fines  de  la  semana,  los  tenedo- 
res  manifestaron  mucha  disposi- 
cion  a  efectuar  ventas,  de  cuyas  re- 
rultas  retrocedieron  los  precios  §  a 
i  d.  en  libra. 

Se  reducen  tambien  a  muy  poca 
cosa  las  ventas  de  harina  de  los  Es- 
taclos  Unidos. 

Una  partida  de  la  nueva  de  New 
York  se  ha  obtenido  al  infimo  pre- 
cio de . . . .  libre  de  derechos. 

Las  ventas  de  Cafe"  no  merecen 
la  pena  de  citarse. 


Our  market  offers  little  encour- 
agement for  any  thing  else  than 
Cotton. 

A  very  large  quantity  of  Rice  is 
now  on  hand,  which  makes  sales 
very  heavy. 

Colonial  produce  and  dye-woods 
are  very  dull,  and  saleable  only  at 
losing  prices. 

Goods  seemed  to  move  some  days 
ago,  but  yesterday  and  to-day  no- 
thing was  done. 

Dye-woods  and  Mahogany  are 
quite  unsaleable. 

The  first  sales  were  easily  effected 
at  44  s.;  but  the  quantity  coming 
in  quick,  prices  felt  a  small  depres- 
sion, and  now  43  s ,  may  be  quoted 
the  ruling  price. 

Coffee,  in  which,  during  this  sea- 
son, extensive  and  profitable  busi- 
ness has  been  done,  has  become  of 
late  flat  and  declined  fully  1  s. 

Our  cotton  market  has  been  very 
much  depressed  lately,  by  the  un- 
favorable state  of  the  European 
markets. 

Por  the  lower  descriptions,  there 
is  at  present  no  demand  whatever. 

And  sales  can  only  be  effected  at 
reduced  prices. 

Sugars  have  gone  off  very  heavily 
this  week  at  a  further  decline  in 
prices. 

During  the  latter  part  of  the  week, 
the  holders  rather  pressed  their 
stocks  upon  the  market  and  prices 
have  in  consequence  receded  %  d.  to 
§  d.  per  lb. 

The  transactions  in  American 
flour  are  also  very  limited. 

A  parcel  of  fresh  New  York,  out 
of  bond  has  been  sold  as  low  as ... . 

The  business  done  in  Coffee  is  very 
trifling. 


476 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


El  Az  dear  sigue  paralizado  al  es- 
trerao. 

Pero  los  mas  de  los  tenedores  pi- 
den  precios  que  los  compradores 
no  estan  por  akora  dispuestos  a  pa- 
gar. 

Los  precios  positivos,  que  apun- 
tamos  a  eontinuacion. 

A  cuyo  precio  se  efectuan  veutas 
diariamente. 

La  adjuuta  cuenta  simulada  im- 
pondra  a  Vd.  de  las  coudiciones  de 
venta  en  esta  plaza. 

Los  precios  en  aquella  plaza  es- 
tan mucho  mas  bajos  que  aqui, 
como  lo  demues  tran  los  bole  tines 
de  ventas  de  ambos  mercados. 

Nuestos  precios  actuales  son  los 
siguientes: 

El  Cafe'  vale  a  34  s.  el  medio  kilo- 
gramo,  libre  de  derechos. 

Inclusos  los  derechos. 

Ninguua  venta  ha  bajado  de  dicho 
precio. 

A  la  vuelta  hallaran  una  nota  de 
precios. 

Adjunto  una  nota  de  precios  de 
algunos  articulos  para  su  gobierno. 

Acompaiia  la  nota  de  las  ventas 
de  la  semana  para  su  inspeccion. 

A  cotinuacion  hallaran  una  nota 
de  los  precios  de 

A  este  precio  se  ganaba  algo. 

Habiendo  los  precios  retrocedido 
gradualmente  |  a  5  d.,  hemos  hecho 
las  reducciones  correspondieutes 
en  los  que  apuntamos. 

Les  acompauamos  de  nuevo  un 
precio  corriente,  sintiendo  que 
ofrezca  muy  poco  interes. 

Precios  escasamente  sostenidos. 
— Bien  — regularmente  sostenidos. 

El  Vino,  por  lo  general,  es  articu- 
lo  de  dificil  y  lento  espendio. 

Los  Bziicrtres,  en  razon  de  su  es- 
casez,  tomaran  estimacion  y  se  es- 
penderau  con  facilidad. 

No  creo  se  pueda  contar  con  bue- 
nos  precios. 


Sugar  continue  as  dull  as  possible. 

But  holders  in  general  are  asking 
more  than  purchasers  are  at  present 
inclined  to  give,  or  to  pay. 

The  actual  prices,  which  we  in 
dicate  below. 

At  which  price  daily  sales  are 
made. 

Our  mode  of  selling  will  be  de- 
tailed to  you  in  the  form  herewith. 

Their  prices  are  much  lower  than 
ours,  as  the  printed  sales  of  each 
place  will  show. 

Our  present  prices  rule  as  fol- 
lows: 

Coffee  may  be  quoted  at  34  s.  per 
I  kil.  duty  paid. 

Duties  included. 

Nothing  was  sold  under  this  price. 

On  the  following  page  you  will 
find  a  note  of  our  present  prices. 

We  annex  some  quotations  for 
your  government. 

We  enclose  the  list  of  the  weekly 
sales  for  your  information. 

We  quote  you  below. . . . 

That  was  a  remunerating  price. 

Prices  having  gradually  declined 
from  i  to  i  d.  we  reduce  our  quota- 
tions accordingly. 

We  wait  on  you  again  with  our 
price  current,  regretting  at  the  same 
time,  that  it  should  be  so  uninter- 
esting. 

Prices  barely — steadily  —  fairly 
supported. 

Wine  is  a  heavy  article,  and  gen- 
erally lies  long  on  hand. 

Sugars,  from  their  rarity,  will 
command  good  prices  and  go  ofl 
readily. 

I  do  not  think  good  prices  may 
be  reckoned  on. 


THE   STATE   OF  THE.   MARKET. 


477 


S^trr*  aparieneias,  los  precios  se 
Bostendran  altos  durante  todo  el 
invierno. 

Soy  de  opinion  que  si  no  suben 
de  precio,  nunca  bajaran  de  los  que 
tienen  en  la  actualidad. 

Esto  impedira  probablemente  el 
que  siga  bajando  dicbo  articulo. 

Aqui  estan  especulando  en  el 
concepto  que  van  a  aumentarse  los 
dereohos. 

Y  nos  parece  probable  continiien 
subiendo  los  precios. 

Sin  embargo,  es  regular  baje  el 
precio,  si  se  reune  una  gran  exis- 
tencia. 

Vd.  tendra  datos  mas  seguros 
que  yo  respecto  de  la  produccion 
en  los  Estados  Unidos.  A  pesar  de 
esto,  creo  poder  afirmar  que  si  no 
ocurriese  una  mudanza  muy  gran- 
de 

Y  si  nuestra  existencia  no  reci- 
biese  un  aumento  repentino  y  de- 
inasiado  considerable,  es  probable 
Buban  los  precios  aiin  mas. 

No  cr«o  se  sostenga  ese  precio. 

Estos  precios  no  pueden  bajar 
mie'ntras  no  entre  la  nueva  cosecba 
con  abundancia. 

El  otoiio  proximo,  las  compras 
Be  baran  indudablemente  a  precios 
mas  comodos. 

Los  tenedores  se  someterian  pro- 
bablemente a  una  fuerte  reduccion 
de  precio. 

Los  especuladores  esperan  valga 
a  40  s.  la  primavera  proxima. 

Hay  en  el  dia  pdco  movimiento 
en  los  negocios,  pero  es  regular 
vuelvan  a  animarse  dentro  de  poco. 

Por  el  adjunto  impreso,  veran 
Vds.  el  tristisimo  estado  de  nuestra 
plaza,  que  por  desgracia  ofrece  po- 
ca«  esperanzas  de  mejora. 

Si  no  se  sostiene  este  renglon,  a 
lo  me'nos  creemos  no  bajara  mucbo, 
pues  sabemos  que  ba  despertado  la 
ateiicion  de  ricos  especuladores. 


In  aL  probability,  prices  will  be 
very  bigb  during  tbe  winter. 

My  opinion  is  that  prices  will  go 
higher,  and  that  in  no  case  a  de- 
cline can  take  place. 

This,  it  is  to  be  hoped,  will  put 
a  stop  to  any  further  decline. 

People  are  speculating  from  an 
impression  of  higher  duties. 

And  a  further  rise  is  likely  to  take 
place. 

The  price  of  this  article  will,  how- 
ever, be  lower,  as  it  gets  more  plenty. 

You  will  be  better  informed  than 
I  can  be,  as  to  the  growth  of  the 
United  States.  Yet  I  think  a  fair 
inference  may  be  drawn,  that  with- 
out a  very  great  change 

And  should  the  stock  not  be  too 
largely  and  suddenly  increased,  it 
is  probable  prices  will  go  still 
higher. 

I  do  not  think  this  price  will  hold. 

There  can  be  no  decline  in  these 
prices,  until  the  new  crop  shall 
throw  a  supply  in  the  marke t. 

Next  fall,  purchases  will  certainly 
be  cheaper  than  can  now  be  made. 

The  holders  would  probably  sub- 
mit to  a  great  reduction. 

Speculators  look  for  40  s.  in  the 
spring. 

Business  generally  is  rather  dull 
at  present,  but  expected  to  revive 
before  long. 

From  the  inclosed,  you  'will  see 
the  gloomy  state  of  our  market,  and 
at  present  we  see  very  little  pros- 
pect of  improvement. 

We  do  not  expect  that  the  article 
will  be  much,  if  any  lower,  as  it  has 
attracted  the  notice  of  some  power- 
ful speculators. 


478 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


Estamos  persuadidos  de  que  este 
renglon  sostendra  su  precio. 

Dos  ven^as  publicas  de  palo  de 
Nicaragua  se  nan  ensayado  en  el 
muelle. 

Mas  como  los  precios  ofrecidos 
han  pareeidos  a  los  tenedores  de- 
masiado  bajos,  se  ha  retirado  el 
todo. 

El  anuncio  inesperado  de  las  ven- 
tas  publicas  que  deben  celebrarse 
elvidrnes  ocasiono  ayeralguna  sus- 
pension en  los  pedidos; 

Y  ha  producido  bastante  frialdad 
en  el  mercado. 

Sin  embargo,  no  hemos  sabido 
que  se  hayan  hecho  ventas  a  precios 
mas  bajos  que  antes. 

No  creemos  pase  de  20,000  pacas 
la  totalidad  de  las  existencias  en 
todo  el  pais. 

Cuantiosas  importaciones  han 
aumentado  estraordinariaraente 
nuestra  existencia,  la  que,  en  el  dia, 
no  baja  de  15,000  pacas  de  todas 
clases. 

La  cantidad  enorme  de  grano 
importada  en  todos  los  puertos  de 
Cuba  hubiera  sobrado  para  ali- 
mentar  la  isla,  adn  cuando  se  hu- 
biese  esperimentado  una  verdadera 
carestia. 

Nuestro  mercado  esta  enteramen- 
te  desprovisto  de  frutos  coloniales. 

No  existe  ahora  ninguno  en  pri- 
mera  mano. 

Estamos  desprovistos  de  todas 
clases  de  granos. 

Nuestra  plaza  esta  sobrecargada 
de  productos  y  artefactos  estrange- 
ros,  y  nada  tenemos  con  que  hacer 
retornos, '  a  me'nos  de  no  comprar 
algodon  a  35  cts.  libra. 
e  Estamos  en  visperas  de  hallarnos 
sin  una  sola  paca  de  algodon  en  el 
mercado. 

Y  hay  muy  poco  en  la  plaza. 
Nuestra  existencia  se  halla  redu- 

oida  4  muy  poca  coss. 


We  reckon  on  the  article  being 
well  supported. 

Two  public  sale?  of  Nicaragua 
wood  were  attempted  on  the  quay. 

But  the  prices  offered  being  much 
under  the  expectations  of  the  im- 
porters, they  were  withdrawn. 

The  public  sales  unexpectedly 
announced  for  Friday  next,  caused 
some  suspension  in  the  demand 
yesterday; 

And  produced  rather  an  unfavor- 
able feeling  in  the  market; 

Though  we  are  not  aware  that 
any  business  was  done,  in  conse- 
quence, at  lower  prices. 

We  do  not  think  there  are  over 
20,000  bales  in  the  country  for  sale. 

The  stock  has  been  increased  by 
numerous  arrivals,  beyond  what  we 
are  accustomed  to  have,  there  being 
15,000  bales  of  all  kiuds  now  here. 

The  overwhelming  quantity  of 
grain  which  has  arrived  in  every 
port  of  Cuba,  would  have  been  more 
than  sufficient,  had  there  been  an 
absolute  famine. 

Our  market  is  quite  clear  of  all 
kinds  of  colonials. 

There  is  none  left  in  first  hands. 

We  are  sadly  off  for  every  kind 
of  grain. 

The  market  is  completely  over- 
stocked with  foreign  produce  and 
manufactures,  and  nothing  to  take 
in  return,  unless  one  submits  to 
pay  35  cts.  per  lb.  for  cotton . 

We  are  on  the  eve  of  being  left 
without  a  bale  of  cotton. 

An  the  stock  is  very  light. 

The  stock  on  hand  is  very  small 


THE  STATE   OF  THE  MARKET. 


479 


Crecidas  cantidades  en  el  alraa- 
een. 

No  bay  sdno  muy  poco  en  la  pla- 
za. 

Vista  la  corta  existencia  que  te- 
nemos  en  el  mercado. 

Nuestra  existencia  esta  casi  ente- 
ramente  agotada. 

Nuestras  cosechas  de  algodon  y 
aziiear,  prometen  mucho. 

Mientras  tanto,  la  esportacion  es 
mas  considerable  que  nunca,  en  lo 
que  va  del  corriente  aiio. 

La  esportacion  de  frutos  conti- 
mia  muy  activa  y  con  precios  br- 
ines. 

Con  motivo  de  la  continuacion 
del  buen  tiempo,  estan  los  grauos 
de  toda  especie  en  la  mayor  calma. 

En  Charleston,  se  estan  baciendo 
embarques  de  mucba  consideracion. 

Si  nuestra  existencia  no  recibiese 
aumento,  subiran  los  precios. 

Por  el  contrario,  si  se  agolpasen 
las  importaciones,  bajaran  induda- 
blemente. 

Euvios  procedentes  de  los  Esta- 
dos  Unidos. 

Han  recibido  ordenes  para  com- 
pras  cuantiosas,  la  mayor  parte  de 
las  cuales  debe  de  rec*lar  a  ese  puer- 
to. 

A  pesar  de  los  avisos  poco  luon- 
jeros  que  se  reciben  de  todos  pun- 
tos  acerca  del  Algodon.  el  precio  de 
esta  rama  se  sostiene  firme  a  25  cts. , 
y  hay  poca  apariencia  de  que  decli- 
ne, interin  no  se  aumente  notable- 
mente  nuestra  existencia. 

Lo  poco  de  Algodon  que  aun  exis- 
te  en  el  pais  se  vende  a ;  de  pri- 
nt era  clase  no  bay. 

La  suma  escasez  de  efectivo  que 
esperimen tamos  y  la  alarm  a  produ- 
cida  por  las  numerosas  quiebras, 
ban  sido  causa  de  anularse  general- 
mente  las  ordenes  de  compras  de 
algodones,  y  en  el  Sur  estan  decii- 


Large  quantities  on  band. 
Tbe  market  is  exceedingly  bare. 
Owing  to  tbe  small  stock  on  band. 
Tbe  stock  is  nearly  exhausted. 

Our  crops  of  Cotton  and  Sugar 
promise  to  be  very  large. 

In  the  mean  time,  shipments  are 
unusually  considerable,  since  the 
begmuing  of  the  year. 

The  export  of  produce  continues 
extensive  and  prices  are  steady. 

Owing  to  tbe  continuance  of  fine 
weather,  the  demand  for  grain  of 
every  description  remains  quite 
suspended. 

Large  shipments  are  making 
from  Charteston. 

Should  the  arrivals  be  such  as  not 
to  augment  the  quantity,  prices  will 
rise. 

Should,  on  the  contrary,  a  very 
heavy  stock  come,  they  will  neces- 
sarily decline. 

Shipments  from  the  United  States 
to  this  place. 

They  have  taken  considerable 
orders,  most  of  which  will  come  to 
your  market. 

In  spite  of  the  discouraging  ac- 
counts from  all  quarters,  respecting 
Cotton,  this  staple  continues  firm 
at  25  cts.  per  lb. ;  nor  does  it  ap- 
pear likely  to  decline  till  our  stock 
is  materially  increased. 

What  little  Cotton  is  left  in  the 

country  sells  at ;  none  of  it  oi 

prime  quality. 

The  extreme  pressure  for  money 
here,  and  the  alarm  excited  by  the 
number  of  failures,  have  caused  or- 
ders for  Cotton  generally  to  be  coun- 
terrr,  anded,  and  at  the  South  it  is 
declining  rapidly:  this  is  also  hasfr 


480 


COMMERCIAL   CORRESPONDENCE. 


nando  con  rapidez  los  precios  de 
este  lanaje;  a  lo  que  contribuycn 
tarnbien  los  avisos  poco  favorables 
que  se  reciben  de  Liverpool. 

Los  primeros  embarques  hechos 
en  los  Estados  Uuidos  dejaran 
grand es  quebrantos. 

Se  cree  generalmente  que  no  ha- 
bta  aumento  en  los  dereckos  sobre 
el  Algodon. 

No  paga  derecho  alguno  en  ese 
pais. 

Pues  adeuda  el  mismo  derecho 
que 

El  algodon  adeuda  los  derechos 
Biguieutes : 

No  resultara  diferencia  alguna  en 
el  consume  6  pedidos. 

Habiendo  empezado  a  rejir  aqui 
el  nuevo  arancel  de  aduanas. 

Sin  embargo,  la  diferencia  de  de- 
rechos equivale  casi  a  una  prohibi- 
cion. 

Con  motivo  del  nuevo  derecho 
adicional,  estos  fabric-antes  han  sus- 
)>endido  sus  compras. 

I  No  tiene  ese  gobierno  el  mono- 
polio  de  dicho  arlfculo  ? 

Ofrecen  un  bonito  marjen  de  33 
p.  0/0. 

Dichos  articulos  prometen  utili- 
dad. 

A  los  precios  de  aquella  plaza, 
deben  psrder;  mas  su  objeto  es  ha- 
cer  dinero. 

En  el  dia,  pudiera  venderlos  con 
buena  utilidad. 

Examinaran  si  algunos  de  estos 
renglones  pueden  convenir  para 
hacer  retornos. 

Libre  de  gxstos. — Libre  de  dere- 
chos. 

Gastos  deducidos. — Gastos  cu- 
biertos. 

Hallaran  a  continuacion  un  cal- 
'  culo  que  tiene  por  base  el  peso  de 
una  factnra. 

Este  renglon  dejaria  buena  utili- 
dad, 


ened    by    unfavorable    quotations 
from  Liverpool. 


The  first  shippers  from  the  United 
States  will  be  serious  losers. 

It  is  generally  believed  that  no 
new,  or  additional  duty  will  be 
placed  on  Cotton. 

It  is  not  liable  to  duty  with  you. 

Being  subject  to  the  same  duty 
as. . . 

The  duty  on  Cotton  stand  thus: 

This  will  make  no  difference  in 
the  consumption  or  demand. 

The  new  tariff  having  now  effect 
here. 

Yet  the  difference  of  duties 
amounts  almost  to  a  prohibition. 

The  late  additional  duty  has  sus- 
pended the  purchases  of  our  manu- 
facturers. 

Is  there  not  a  monopoly  of  that 
article  with  you  ? 

They  offer  a  fair  margin  of  33  per 
ct. 

These  articles  afford  a  good  profit. 

At  their  quotations  they  must 
make  a  loss,  but  it  is  to  make  money. 

I  could  sell  them,  at  this  moment 
at  a  good  profit. 

Will  you  examine  if  any  of  these 
things  would  make  returns  ? 

Clear  of  charges  -of  duties. 

Free  of  expenses.  — Expenses  cov- 
ered. 

At  foot  you  will  find  a  calcula- 
tion made  upon  real  weight. 

This  article  would  pay  very  hand« 
somely. 


THE   STATE   OF  THE   MARKET. 


481 


Saldrian  a  12  fr.  vara,  poco  mas 
6  me'uos. 

Esta  cantidad  podria  repetirse 
c&da  diez  dias,  hasta  aviso  contra- 
ry. 

Estos  precios  no  convidan  a  es- 
pecular,  por  demasiado  altos. 

Ofreciendo  un  beneficio  neto  de 
4  a  5  p.  0/0. 

El  bajo  precio  de  Algodon  de  la 
India  sigue  atrayendo  la  atencion 
de  los  especuladores. 

Este  precio  es  ciertamente  dema- 
siado elevado  en  comparacion  de 
los  de  Europa. 

Cuesta,  precio  medio,  a  18i  cts., 
poco  mas  6  me'nos. 

Habiendonos  ini'ormado  sobre  los 
articulos  que  nos  indican,  hemos 
sabido .... 

Los  articulos  indicados. 

Me  he  esmerado  en  tomar  infor- 
mes. 

Estan  muy  solicitados  aquf. 

Este  Algodon  produciria  .... 
neto. 

Los  inform  es  que  recibo  de  alii 
coucuerdan  en ... . 

Adjunto  hallara  una  nota  de  los 
articulos  de  ese  pais  que  son  de  mas 
pronto  despacho  en  esta  plaza. 

Se  vende  de . . . .  a 

Las  ventas  en  esta  plaza  son  re- 
gulares  y  diarias,  y  nuuca  esperi- 
mentan  nuestros  precios  aquellas 
grandes  fluctuaciones  que  ocurren 
con  tanta  frecuencia  en  los  merca- 
dos  ingleses. 

Gontinuando  las  circunstancias 
casi  las  mismas,  tanto  aqui  como 
en  los  Estados  Unidos. 

La  esportacion  y  el  consumo  del 
l<ais  6  del  reino. 

Los  consumidores. 


They  would  come  to  about  12  pr 
per  ell. 

This  quantity  might  be  repeated 
every  ten  days,  till  advised  to  the 
contrary. 

These  prices  are  too  high  to  ad- 
mit of  speculation. 

Offering  a  net  gain  of  4  to  5  per 
ct. 

The  low  price  of  India  cotton 
continues  to  attract  the  attention  of 
speculators. 

This  price  is  certainly  too  high 
relatively  to  that  in  Europe. 

The  average  cost  is  about  18 £  cts. 

Upon  enquiries  respecting  the 
articles  on  which  you  desired  to  re- 
ceive information,  we  find .... 

The  articles  pointed  out. 

I  have  made  diligent  enquiries 

Tbese  are  much  in  request  here. 
This  cotton  would  net .... 

The  best  information  I  can  get 
agrees  in ... . 

We  give  you  annexed  a  small 
memorandum  of  goods  from  your 
country  which  meet  with  a  more 
ready  sale  than  others. 

Their  price  run  from. ...  to   ... 

Our  sales  are  regular  and  daily 
and  not  so  liable  to  great  fluctuation 
as  in  the  English  market. 


As  circumstances  continue  pretty 
much  the  same  here  and  in  the 
United  States. 

Export  and  home  trade. 

Consumers. 


482 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE . 


ORDERS,  PURCHASES,  SALES. 


Les  incluyo  ahora  una  nota  de 
pedidos,  que  se  serviran  poner  en 
ejecucion  con  su  acostumbrado 
zelo. 

Sirvanse  Yds.  mandar  comprar 
y  remitirme  con  la  prontitud  posi- 
ble  lo  siguiente  .... 

Si  pueden  ponerlos  a  bordo  al 
precio  de  . . . .  6  mas  barato,  in- 
clusos  los  gastos  de  embarque,  co- 
misiones  y  flete. 

Cuando  venga  bien,   me  liaran 

el  favor   de  remitirme ;  todo 

para  uso  de  esta  su  casa. 

El  completo  de  la  orden. 

La  marca  ha  de  ser  AD  n°>  1  ai 
que  alcance. 

Repetimos  a  Vd.  nuestro  encargo 
ie  suscribirnos  al  diario  Times 
de  Nueva  York,  y  esperamos  reco- 
miende  a  su  corresponsal  de  Nueva 
York  no  retarde  el  envio  de  ese 
papel. 

Por  la  ocasion  que  consideren 
mas  segura. 

Espero  que  Yds.  desenrpeaaran 
este  encargo  con  el  tino  y  actividad 
que  acostumbran. 

En  los  terminos  que  calculen 
mas  en  mi  beneiicio. 

En  el  modo  que  les  parezca 
mejor. 

Confiando  en  la  mucha  esperien- 
cia  de  Vd.  en  esta  clase  de  nego- 
cios,  y  en  el  acierto  y  buen  zelo  con 
que  log  desempena. 

Recomiendo  a  Vd.  la  posible 
prontitud  en  espedir  los  articulos 
&  su  destino. 

No  podian  caer  en  mejores  manos. 

Espero  que  no  dejaran  de  instar 
ui  fabrieante,  para  que  efectiie  la 
entrega  con  la  mayor  brevedad  posi- 
ble. 

Desisto  desde  luego  de  dicha 
compra. 


I  now  beg  to  hand  you  the  en- 
closed order,  which  I  recommend 
to  your  usual  good  care. 

Please  to  purchase  on  my  ac- 
count and  send  to  me  with  all  pos- 
sible despatch  .... 

If  you  can  ship  them  at,  or  near 
the  price  of  ... .  all  charges  of 
shipping,  commissions  and  freight 
included. 

Please  send  me,  at  your  earliest 
convenience  . . . .  ;  the  whole  for 
the  use  of  my  house. 

The  total  of  the  order. 

The  mark  will  be  AD  No.  1,  and 
so  on  .... 

We  reiterate  our  request  that  you 
will  subscribe  in  our  name  to  the 
Netf  York  Times,  and  be  pleased 
to  direct  your  New  York  corres- 
pondent to  send  it  to  us  with  the 
least  possible  delay. 

By  a  safe  opportunity. 

I  rely  on  your  accustomed  good 
attention  being  given  to  this  order. 

As  you  may  deem  most  to  my  ad- 
vantage. 

In  the  manner  you  judge  best. 

Relying  on  your  experience  in 
this  branch  of  business  and  your 
unremitting  zeal  to  serve  the  inte- 
rests of  your  friends  to  the  best  of 
your  ability. 

I  recommend  that  you  use  all 
possible  despatch  in  sending  the 
goods  to  their  destination. 

They  could  not  be  in  better 
hands. 

I  hope  you  will  urge  the  manu- 
facturer to  deliver  the  goods  with 
the  least  possible  delay. 

I  have  now  to  countermand  that 
order. 


ORDERS,   PURCHASES,   SALES. 


483 


De  consiguiente  tendr  An  por  nula 
mi  6rden,  si  aun  no  la  hubiesen 
llanado . 

Queda  entendido  que  reembol- 
nare  a  Vds.  los  gastos  pagados  6  los 
perjuicios  que  se  les  hubieren  se- 
guido,  como  asimismo  el  que  sur- 
tira  mi  orden  su  efecto,  caso  que 
no  se  avengan  a  cancelarla. 

Todas  las  ordenes  se  han  llenado, 
6  quedan  anuladas. 

Nos  estamos  ocupando  con  la 
aetividad  posible  de  llenar  sus  en- 
eargos. 

Vamos  a  ocuparnos  con  aetividad 
de  la  ejecucion  de  su  6rden,  y  les 
remitire'mos  los  efectos  con  la  breve- 
dad  posible. 

Este'  Vd.  seguro  de  que  hard 
cuanto  dependa  de  mi  para  cor- 
responder  a  su  confianza. 

No  nos  separare'mos  de  las  6r- 
denes  que  Vds.  nos  tienen  coinuni- 
cadas. 

Reconiiendo  a  Vds.  la  mayor  ae- 
tividad, y  que  me  remitan  pronto 
la  cuenta  de  venta  de  este  carga- 
mento. 

Lo  que  calculen  mas  en  nuestro 
beneficio  en  este  negocio. 

Esperamos  cuando  me'nos  que  el 
neto  producido  cubrira  la  factura  ; 
mas  descuidamos  sobre  su  zelo, 
contando  que  hara  lo  mejor. 

Si  no  pudiese  conseguirlo,  se  ser- 
vira  conservarlos  en  su  poder  y  es- 
perar  nuestras  instrucciones,  avi- 
sandonos,  en  todo  caso,  los  precios 
de  dichos  articulos,  y  dicie'ndonos 
si  hay  apariencia  de  que  suban  6 
declinen. 

Para  concluir  este  asunto. 

En  esta  virtud,  contamos  obten- 
dran  Vds.  muy  buenos  precios. 
Queda  entendido  que  .... 
Con  la  brevedad  posible. 
En  lo  que  fuere  dable. 


You  will  therefore,  if  not  already 
executed,  consider  the  order  null 
and  void. 

I  shall  consider  myself  liable  for 
any  expense  you  may  incur,  or  loss 
you  may  sustain  in  consequence, 
or  indeed  for  the  ultimate  comple- 
tion of  the  transaction,  should  you 
not  consent  to  cancel  my  order. 

All  the  orders  are  either  filled  or 
withdrawn. 

We  are  preparing  the  goods  with 
all  possible  despatch. 

Your  order  shall  be  executed  and 
the  goods  sent  you  with  as  little  de- 
lay as  possible. 

You  may  depend  upon  it  I  shall 
do  every  thing  in  my  power  to  war- 
rant your  confidence. 

We  will  punctually  follow  your 
directions. 

Please  make  all  possible  despatch, 
and  send  me  early  sales  of  this 
cargo. 

What  you  may  deem  best  for  our 
interest  in  this  affair. 

We  hope  at  the  worst  to  clear  the 
invoice  price,  but  leave  our  inter- 
ests entirely  in  your  hands. 

Should  this  not  be  in  your  power, 
we  wish  you  to  hold  them  until 
further  orders,  and,  in  any  event, 
to  favor  us  with  a  particular  report 
on  the  situation  and  prospects  of 
your  market  for  these  articles. 

In  order  that  we  may  bring  it  to 
a  close. 

We  are  therefore  warranted  in 
expecting  very  advantageous  sales. 

I  beg  it  to  be  understood  that.. 

As  soon  as  practicable. 

As  far  as  practicable. 


4:84 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


Aliora  pueda  Vd.  obrar  como 
mejor  le  parezca,  si  fuese  necesario 
Bometernos  a  mayor  quebranto. 

Encarezco  a  Vd.  la  mayor  aten- 
cion  en ... . 

Al  precio  que  he  limitado,  con- 
Bidero  que  dificilmente  se  podra 
verificar  la  compra. 

Lo  que  me  ha  sido  particular- 
mente  satisfactorio,  al  recibir  sus 
ordenes,  es  que  .... 

Obrare'  con  arreglo  a  sus  ultimas 
instrucciones  respecto  al  embarque 
de  diehas  mercancias. 

Seguire'mos  puntualmente  las 
instrucciones  del  Sr.***. 

Harem  os  lo  rnejor. 

Sin  embargo,  cuidardmos  este 
negocio  con  el  mayor  esmero. 

Espero  aprobaran  mi  determina- 
cion. 
Seria  sumamente  ventajoso .... 
Creo  que  resultara  poca  ventaja. 

Nada  arriesgamos. 

Hasta  la  fecha,  nuestras  compras 
son  las  siguientes  .... 

Discontinuare'mos  nuestras  com- 
pras hasta  la  semana  prdxima. 

Nos  inclinamos  mucho  a  la  com- 
pra. 

Consecuente  a  lo  que  dijimos  a 

Vd.   en  carta  del ,  esperamos 

comprar  la  partida  que  hay  aqui, 
cuya  clase  es  mucho  mejor  que .... 

Esta  es  sin  disputa  la  mejor  com- 
pra que  se  ha  hecho  en  nuestra 
plaza. 

De  resultas  de  los  cnantiosos  ar- 
ribos,  estan  los  negocios  tan  aba- 
tidos,  que  son  absolutamente  nulas 
las  ventas ;  pues  si  no  fuese  asi, 
visto  el  contenido  de  su  carta,  no 
rehusaria  una  oferta  algo  razona- 
ble. 

Y  debe  atribuirse  esto  a  la  im- 
posibilidad  en  que  me  encuentro 
de  dar  salida  a  la  sederia  que  aun 
2ueda  por  vender. 


We  now  leave  it  to  your  good 
judgment,  if  it  shall  be  necessary, 
to  sell  at  a  greater  loss. 

I  have  to  ask  your  strictest  atten- 
tion to  .... 

At  the  limits  I  have  given,  I  con- 
sider the  purchase  hardly  practica- 
ble. 

What  made  me  receive  your  or- 
ders with  peculiar  satisfaction  was 
that  .... 

I  shall  attend  to  your  last  in- 
structions relative  to  the  shipping  of 
the  goods. 

Mr.  ***'s  directions  shall  be  care- 
fully followed. 

The  best  shall  be  done. 

We  shall,  however,  do  all  in  our 
power  for  the  interest  of  the  con- 
cern. 

I  hope  this  will  meet  your  apprc 
bation. 

It  would  be  of  material  benefit.. 

I  fear  it  would  afford  little  ad- 
vantage. 

We  have  nothing  at  risk. 

Our  purchases,  thus  far,  are  as 
follows 

We  suspend  our  purchases  until 
next  week. 

We  feel  much  inclined  to  make 
the  purchases. 

As  stated  in  our  respects  of  the 
. . . . ,  we  are  in  hopes  of  purchas- 
ing the  parcel  here,  which  is  far 
better  than  .... 

This  is  unquestionably  the  best 
purchase  that  has  been  made  here. 

The  stock  arrived  has  so  beat 
down  the  market,  that  there  are 
now  absolutely  no  sales ;  for,  from 
the  tenor  of  your  lines,  I  should  not 
refuse  any  fair  offer. 


And  this  is  caused  from  the  total 
impossibility  of  selling  the  silka 
which  are  yet  on  hand. 


ORDERS,   PURCHASES,   SALES. 


485 


Si  el  articulo  fuese  vendible. 

Hiria  aliora  un  sacrificio  para 
deshacerme  de  el  al  contado. 

Couio  su  libranza  (deVd.)  venco 
el  5  del  entrante,  es  preciso  que  yo 
venda  al  corriente  de  la  plaza. 

Habia  dado  orden  de  vender  di- 
chos  je'neros,  y  ansiaba  por  darles 
salida. 

Me  veo  en  la  precision  de  es- 
pender  esta  partida  en  pequeiias 
cantidades,  y  no  entrare*  probable- 
mente  en  mis  fondos  antes  de  seis 
meses. 

Y  aprovechardmos  todas  las  oca- 
siones  que  se  presenten  de  darle 
salida,  hasta  venderlo  al  menudeo, 
si  fuese  necesario. 

Hemos  practicado  las  mas  efica- 
zes  diligencias  para  lograr  su  ena- 
jenacion;  pero  no  hansurtido  efec- 
to,  pues  no  hemos  recibido  una  sola 
ot'erta. 

Si  los  ponemos  en  venta  publica, 
y  no  se  presentan  compradores,  no 
habra  despues  quien  se  digne  mi- 
rarlos. 

Es  de  sentir  no  se  haya  puesto 
en  deposito. 

Fue'  engauado. 

Este  fue  un  engaBo  abominable. 

Es  indispensable  examinar  dicho 
renglon  conlamasprolijaatencion. 

Son  detestables  los  engafios  que  se 
practican  en  este  ramo  de  negocios. 

Tratan  siempre  de  pasar  en  una 
buena  partida  el  mayor  numero  po- 
sible  de  balas  inferiores. 

De  todas  partes  me  han  hecho 
reclamaciones  sobre  el  particular. 

Proteste  en  el  acto  contra  la  eje- 
cucion  de  la  contrata  de  venta. 

El  cargamento  se  mand6a  bordo 
perfectamente  acondicionado,  pero 
como  el  capitan  hizo  apretar  las  pa- 
cas  con  mucha  fuerza  para  que  cu- 
piese  mayor  niimero  en  el  barco,  es 
regular  saiga  desgarrado  el  embalaje. 


If  the  article  is  saleable. 

I  would  part  with  it  now  for  cash 
at  a  sacrifice. 

As  your  draft  is  payable  the  Gth 
prox.  I  must  take  the  market  price. 

These  goods  I  had  ordered  to  be 
resold,  and  have  been  extremely 
anxious  to  dispose  of  them. 

I  must  retail  out  this  parcel  and 
certainly  do  not  expect  my  money 
under  six  months. 


And  whenever  an  opportunity 
offers  that  we  can  even  retail  any 
of  them  we  will  improve  it. 

We  have  tried  every  means  of 
selling  them,  but  hitherto  without 
success,  for  we  have  had  no  offer 
whatever  for  them. 

K  we  put  them  up  at  auction  and 
they  are  not  sold,  no  person  will 
look  at  them  afterwards. 

It  was  a  mistake  not  to  bond  it. 

He  has  been  taken  in. 

It  is  the  most  abominable  impo- 
sition. 

It  is  absolutely  necessary  to  make 
a  very  close  inspection  of  this  ar- 
ticle. 

The  frauds  which  are  committed 
in  this  business  are  outrageous. 

They  always  pass  as-  many  bad 
bales  as  they  can  into  a  parcel  of 
good. 

Complaints  on  all  sides  have  been 
made  to  me  on  this  account, 

I  immediately  protested  against 
carrying  out  the  bargain. 

The  cargo  was  put  on  board  in 
good  order;  but  as  the  captain  had 
it  screwed  very  much  it  will  be  torn 
in  the  bagging. 


486 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


La  composicion  y  demas  gastos 
deben  de  cargarse  al  buque  si  no  se 
entrega  la  inercancia  bien  acondi- 
cionada. 

Esta  operacion  no  tuvo,  ni  con 
mucho,  el  resultado  que  yo  me  pro- 
metia. 

No  tiene  fundamento  alguno  la 
observaciou  de  ese  corredor  de  que 
pertenecia  a  la  otra  partida  embar- 
cada  en  el  mismo  buque. 

Las  marcas  de  los  sacos  corres- 
pondian  con  la  factura 


The  repairs,  etc. ,  must  be  on  ac- 
count of  the  ship,  if  not  delivered 
in  good  condition 

This  adventure  has  by  no  means 
been  as  fortunate  as  I  had  expected. 

Your  broker's  excuse  of  its  be- 
longing to  the  other  parcel  on  board 
is  unfounded. 

The  marks  of  the  bags  agreed 
with  the  invoice. 


INSURANCES. 


Sfrvase  Vd.  abrir  una  p61iza  sobre 
los  embarques  que  estamos  efec- 
tuando  aqui  para  la  Habana  en  el 

bergantin  espanol ,  capitan  ***, 

apalabrando  por  el  pronto  30,000 
fr.,  cuya  cantidad  sera. probable  se 
aumente. 

Pnede  Vd.  descansar  en  que  el 
seguro  se  efectuara  con  la  mayor 
squidad. 

Tomamos  nota  de  las  varias  can- 
tidades,  que  ban  de  asegurarse  so- 
bre el  citado  buque. 

Pero  sentimos  decirles  que,  a  pe- 
sar  de  nuestras  diligencias,  nos  es 
imposible  hacer  nada,  a  mdnos  de 
no  pagar  un  premio  enorme. 

Por  lo  demas,  estos  aseguradores, 
segun  llevamos  dicho,  no  cubren, 
sino  con  mucha  repugnancia,  ries- 
gos  de  la  naturaleza  indicada. 

Hoy  continuamos  nuestras  dili- 
jencias,  y  si  logramos  hacer  algo  se 
lo  participaremos  antes  de  cerrar  la 
presente. 

Maflana  volverdmos  a  ocuparnos 
del  negocio. 

De  consiguiente,  esperardmos  sus 
6rdeues  sobre  el  particular. 

No  dudo  aprueben  cuanto  he 
piacticado  respecto  a  los  seguros. 


"We  beg  you  will  please  to  open  a 
policy  on  the  goods  we  are  now 
shipping  for  Havana  on  board  the 

Spanish   brig ,  captain  ***,   to 

the  amount  of  30, 000  Ir. ,  which  sum 
will  probably  be  increased. 

I  can  assure  you  the  insurance 
shall  be  effected  on  the  most  reason- 
able terms. 

We  take  due  note  of  the  several 
sums  to  be  insured  on  the  above 
vessel. 

But  we  lament  to  say  that,  with 
every  exertion,  we  find  it  impossible 
to  insure  any  thing  except  at  an 
enormous  premium. 

The  underwriters,  moreover,  as 
we  before  mentioned,  have  great 
aversion  to  risks  of  the  nature  in 
question. 

We  are  again  at  work  at  it  to-day; 
the  result  of  our  labors  you  will  be 
acquainted  with  below. 

We  shall  try  it  again  to-morrow. 

"We  shall  accordingly  be  expect- 
ing your  orders  to  this  effect. 

I  am  sure  you  will  approve  of  all 
I  have  done  as  to  insurances. 


BANKING  TRANSACTIONS. 


487 


Un  aumento  de  premio  sobre  el 
viajo  de  vuelta,  en  razon  del  invier- 
uo,  que  se  esta  acercando. 

Estos  aseguradores,  despues  de 
leer  la  carta  de  Vd. ,  me  han  abona- 
do  un  retomo  de  premio,  de  con- 
formidad  con  la  cuenta  que  me 
acorn  paiia,  y  por  el  cual  le  he  abo- 
nado  L.  4.  10  8.  segun  nota  al  pie. 

El  buque  podra  hacer  todas  las 
escalas  que  el  capitau  tenga  por 
oportunas. 

Averia  gruosa  (general). 

Averia  particular  (simple). 

Franco  de  averia. 

Franquieias. 

Los  uitimos  temporales  ban  oca- 
sionado  mucbos  siniestros  (fracti- 
sos). 

El  buque  esta  asegurado  para  el 
viaje  redondo. 

Seguro  al  auo. 

Seguro  sobre  buque  indefinido. 

Reaseguro. 

Riesgo  de  guerra. 

Series  de  numeros,  de  bultos  por 
fcrden  de  estiva,  etc. 

Abandono. 

Salvamento. 

Perdida  total.     Perdida  parcial. 


An  advance  of  premium  on  the 
homeward  voyage,  on  account  of 
the  winter  season,  which  is  fast  ap- 
proaching. 

The  underwriters,  on  reading 
your  letter,  allowed  me  a  return  in 
conformity  with  your  statement,  for 
which  I  have  credited  you  L.  4.  10s. 
as  per  memorandum  below. 

The  vessel  is  allowed  to  touch  at 
as  many  ports  as  may  be  deemed 
necessary. 

General  average. 

Particular  average. 

Free  of  average. 

Exemptions  from  average. 

The  late  gales  have  caused  nu- 
merous accidents  (losses). 

The  vessel  is  insured  out  and 
homo. 

Insurance  by  the  year. 

Iusurance  on  ship  or  ships. 

Reassurance. 

War  risk. 

Series  of  numbers,  packages,  etc 

Abandonment. 

Salvage. 

Total  loss.     Partial  loss. 


BANKING  TRANSACTIONS. 


Con  fecha  30  del  ppdo.  dl  a  car- 
go de  Vds.  una  letra  de  fr.  2,500,  a 
12  dias  fecha,  orden  de  S.  M.,  cuyo 
puntual  pago  les  suplico  a  mi  de- 
bito. 

En  virtud  de  un  cre'dito  de  sesen- 
ta  mil  francos  que  nos  han  abierto 
con  Vds.  los  Sres.  A.  M.  yB.,  de...., 
acabamos  de  librar  a  su  cargo  una 
letra  a  3  meses  fecha,  orden  E.  E. 
y  Ca  ,  de  fr.  12,000,  que  se  serviran 
acojer. 


On  the  30th  ult.,  I  draw  on  you 
for  fr.  2,500,  at  12  days'  sight,  favor 
of  S.  M. ,  which  I  beg  to  recommend 
to  your  protection. 

In  pursuance  of  a  credit  for  sixty 
thousand  francs,  which  Messrs.  A. 
M.  and  B.,  of .  . . .  have  opened  in 
our  favor  on  you,  we  beg  to  inform 
you  that  we  have,  this  day,  issued 
our  draft  forfr.  12,000,  at  3  month's 
sight,  to  the  order  of  E.  G.  and  C°. 
which  please  to  honor  with  youi 
acceptance. 


488 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


Por  cuenta  de  los  mismos  amigos, 
hemos  dado  nuevatnente  a  su  cargo, 
el  10  del  corri elite,  una  letra  a  60 
dias  fecha,  6rden  de  J.  D.  de  F.,  de 
fr.  18,000,  que  recomendamos  a 
su  proteceion. 

Por  servir  a  ua  amigo,  a  quien 
no  nos  hemos  podido  escusar,  nos 
hemos  tornado  la  confianza  de  dar 
a  cargo  de  Yd.  una  letrita  de  L.  74. 
10,  a  8  dias  vista,  6rden  de  ***, 
cuyo  puntual  pago  les  suphcamos  a 
nuestro  debito. 

La  que  recomiendo  al  favor  de 
Vd. 

Esperando  de  su  favor  la  puntual 
acojida  de  estos  jiros. 

Suplicamos  a  Vds.  dispensen  a 
nuestra  firma  la  acojida  que  acos- 
tumbran. 

Mediante  este  aviso,  pienso  nego- 
ciar  maiiana  mi  trata,  que  espero 
merecera  su  buena  acojida. 

Me  he  abstenido  de  librar  todo  el 
tiempo  que  me  ha  sido  posible,  es- 
perando  que  podria  efectuar  ventas. 

He  jirado  a  cargo  de  Vd.  una  letra 
de  fr.  18,000  (diez  y  ocho  mil),  a  60 
dias  vista,  orden  de  ***,  que  le  su- 
plico  honre  con  su  aceptacion,  car- 
gandomela  en  cuenta  sobre  este 
embarque. 

Aplica  estas  libranzas  al  embar- 
que hecho  por  el  Augusta. 

Orden  propia. 

A  la  que  suplicamos  dispensen 
su  puntual  acojida,  y  no  dudando 
de  ella,  so  los  dejamos  abonados  en 
cuenta. 

En  el  concepto  que  nuestras  dis- 
posiciones  mereceran  su  acostum- 
brada  acojida. 

Dentro  de  poco,  dispondrd  de  mi 
alcance. 

Tengan  Vds.  la  bondad  de  librar 
al  mas  largo  plazo  posible. 

Al  plazo  de  estilo. 

Queda  tomada  nota  de  sus  ulti- 
mas disposiciones  a  nuestro  cargo, 


On  account  of  the  same  friends, 
we  have  again  drawn  on  you,  on 
the  10th  inst.,  for  fr.  18,000,  at  6C 
days'  date,  favor  of  J.  D.  de  F., 
which  we  recommend  to  yo  ar  pro- 
tection. 

To  accommodate  a  friend,  whose 
wish  we  could  not  help  complying 
with,  we  have  taken  the  liberty  oi 
drawing  on  you  for  L.  74.  10,  at  8 
days'  sight  to  the  order  of  ***,  which 
please  to  protect  and  charge  to  our 
account. 

Which  please  to  honor  with  your 
acceptance. 

Not  doubting  that  due  honor  will 
be  paid  to  our  signature. 

We  beg  to  recommend  our  signa- 
ture to  your  usual  attention. 

On  the  strength  of  this  advice,  I 
shall  probably  negotiate  the  draft 
to-morrow',  and  hope  that  it  will  be 
found  entirely  to  your  protection. 

I  have  held  off  drawing  as  long 
as  possible,  in  hopes  of  making 
some  sales. 

I  have  drawn  on  you  at  60  days' 
sight,  in  favor  of  Messrs.  ***,  for  f. 
18,000,  say  eighteen  thousand 
francs,  which  please  protect  and 
charge  against  this  shipment. 

He  applies  these  drafts  against 
the  shipment  per  Augusta. 

Favor  of  self. ...  of  ourselves. 

Which  we  place  to  your  credit, 
not  doubting  you  will  show  due 
honor  to  our  signature. 

Not  doubting  that  our  draft  will 
meet  your  acustomed  protection. 

I  shall  draw  shortly  for  the  bat 
ance  due  me. 

Pray  draw  at  as  long  a  date  as 
you  can. 

At  the  usual  term. 

We  take  due  note  ot  your  last 
draft  on  us  on  recount  of  our  nru- 


BANKING  TRANSACTIONS. 


489 


por  omenta  de  los  miituos  amigos, 
los  Sres.  A —  hermanos,  de  Cadiz. 

A  medida  que  se  nos  presenten, 
seran  debidaniente  acqjidas. 

Puede  Vd.  descuidar  que  al  reci- 
bo  del  conocimiento  dispensare'  pun- 
tual  acojida  a  sus  librauzas. 

La  hemos  pagado  a  presentacion. 

Aceptamos  losjiros  de  los  refe- 
ridos  Seiiores  en  el  seguro  de  que 
Vds.  nos  harian  remesa  de  fondos, 
y  a  fin  de  no  desairar  su  firm  a. 

Descansando  sobre  su  puntuali- 
dad. 

Que,  a  pesar  de  esto,  he  aceptado, 
para  evitarles  las  consequencias 
desagradables   de  una  protesta. 

Aun  no  ha  parecido  la  letra  que 
nos  ha  avisado  haber  dado  a  nues- 
tro  cargo  por  cuenta  de  Vd. 

Tratare'mos  de  conseguir  que  los 
portadores  la  conserven  en  su  poder 
hasta  que  recibamos  la  respuesta 
de  Vd. 

He  creido  deber  retardar  mi  acep- 
tacion  hasta  que  venga  la  contesta- 
cion  de  Vds. 

Nos  vere'mos  precisados  a  desai- 
rar dicha  letra. 

Una  casa  de  mucha  responsabili- 
dad.— Una  casa  de  primer  rango. 

Segun  hemos  podido  indagar 

Creo  deber  recomendar  a  Vd. 
este'  prevenido. 

Desconfie  Vd.  de  ***. 

Cuya  desgraciada  especulacion  no 
mejoro  sus  circunstancias,  segun 
hemos  sabido. 

Damos  a  Vds.  las  debidas  gracias 
por  sus  informes  sobre  la  casa  de 
que  les  hichuos  pregunta. 


tual  friends  Messrs.  A  -brotheifc  of 
Cadix. 

They  shall  be  punctually  honored 
as  they  make  their  appearance. 

You  may  rely  on  your  drafts  bo- 
ing  punctually  honored  on  presen- 
tation of  bill  of  lading. 

It  was  paid  on  presentation. 

We  honored  their  drafts,  feeling 
confident  that  remittances  would 
come  forward  from  you,  and  being 
unwilling  to  refuse  them  accept- 
ance. 

Fully  relying  on  your  punctuality. 

Which  I  have,  nevertheless,  ac- 
cept* d  to  prevent  the  unpleasant 
con?  equence  which  might  arise  from 
its  being  protested. 

The  bill  they  advise  having  drawn 
upon  us  for  your  account  has  not 
yet  made  its  appearance. 

We  shall  endeavor  to  prevail  on 
the  holders  to  keep  it  over  until  wt 
receive  your  reply. 

I  have  thought  it  prudent  to 
withhold  my  acceptance  until  I 
receive  your  reply. 

We  shall  be  under  the  necessity 
of  declining  to  accept  it. 

A  very  solid  house. — A  house  ol 
the  first  standing. 

From  what  we  have  been  able  to 
ascertain .... 

I  deem  it  best  to  put  you  on  your 
guard. 

We  caution  you  against  ***. 

Which  unfortunate  speculation, 
we  know,  did  not  better  their  cir- 
cumstances. 

We  return  you  many  thanks  for 
the  information  you  give  us  on  tha 
house  in  question. 


490 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


DRAFTS,  ENDOESEMENTS,  ETC. 


New  York,  26  Diciembre, 
1871. 
Son  f.  10,000. 
A  sesenta  dias  vista,  mandaran 
Vds.   pagar  por   esta   primera   de 
carubio  (no  habie'ndolo  hecho  por 
la  segunda  6  tercera),  a  la  orden 
de  los  Sres.  ***,  la  candidad  de  diez 
mil  francos,  en  oro  6  plata,  valor 
recibido,  que  sentaran  Vds .  en  cuen- 
ta,  segun  aviso  de  ***. 

A  ocho  dias  vista,  se  serviran 
Vds.  mandar  pagar  por  esta  prime- 
ra de  cambio  (no  habie'ndolo  hecho 
por  la  segunda,  tercera  6  cuarta),  a 
la  orden  de  Dn.  ***,  la  cantidad  de 
mil  quinientos  francos,  en  oro  6 
plata,  con  ecslusion  de  todo  papel 
moneda  creado  6  que  se  crease,  va- 
lor recibido,  que  sentaran  Vds.  se- 
gun aviso  de  S.  S.  S.  ***. 
Pagadera  en  Paris. 
Que  sentaran  segun  aviso  6  sin 
dl  (segun  6  sin  aviso). 

A  la  vista,  mandara  Vd.  pagar 
por  esta  primera .... 

A  presentacion  mandara  Vd.  pa- 
gar a  la  orden  de  Dn 

Que  sentaran  segun  aviso  de  S. 
S.  S.  *** 

Paguese  a  la  6rden  de  los  Sres. 
***,  valor  recibido. 

A  un  ano  de  la  fecha,  pagard,  a 
la  drden  de  los  Sres.  ***,  la  canti- 
dad de 


New  York,  December  26th,  1871. 

Exchange  for  f.  10,000. 

Sixty  days  after  sight  of  this  first 
of  exchange  (second  and  third  un- 
paid), pay  to  Messrs.  ***,  or  order, 
in  Paris,  ten  thousand  francs,  value 
received  and  charge  the  same  to  ac- 
count of  ***. 


At  eight  days'  sight  of  this  first 
of  exchange  (second,  third  and 
fourth  unpaid),  pay  to  ***,  Esq., 
or  order,  fifteen  hundred  francs, 
value  received,  which  place  to  ac- 
count as  advised  ***. 


Payable  in  Paris.. 

Which  place  to  account  with  or 

without  further  advice  of 

At  sight,  pay  this  first. . . . 

On  presentation  (on  demand)  pay 
to  Mr ....  or  order 

Which  place  to  account  as  ad- 
vised by  your  obdt.  servants  ***. 

Pay  to  the  order  of  Messrs.  ***, 
value  received. 

One  year  from  date,  I  promise 
to  pay  to  Messrs.  ***,  or  order,  the 
sum  of. . . . 


ACCOUNTS  RENDERED,  RECEIVED,  ETC. 


Espero  recibir  en  breve  el  cono- 
cimiento  y  factura,  con  el  aviso  de 
haber  Vd  librado  a  mi  cargo  el  im- 
porte  de  ese  embarque  (de  esa  re- 
n*esa). 

En  cuanto  se  haya  estendido 
(forniado)  la  cueuta, 


I  shall  be  expecting  shortly  to  re- 
ceive (I  shall  shortly  look  for)  the 
bill  of  lading  and  invoice,  -with  ad- 
vice of  your  draft  on  me  for  tha 
amount  of  this  shipment. 

When  this  account  is  made  up. 


ACCOUNTS  RENDERED,   RECEIVED,  ETC. 


491 


De  cuya  operacion  pasare  a  Vd. 
ana  cuenta  detallada,  tan  pronto 
como  se  haya  arreglado. 

Acompaiio  a  Vd.el  conocimiento 
y  factura  de  este  embarque. 

Hallaran  adjunto  conocimiento 
y  factura  de. . .  ,  quehemos  embar- 
cado  a  su  consignacion,  a  bordo 
del  buque  americano  (de  la  fragata 
americana)  Ann,  capitan  ***. 

El  conocimiento  llenado  a  la  6r- 
den  de  dichos  Sres. 

Tengo  ahora  el  gusto  de  incluir  a 
Yds.  factura  y  conocimiento  de . . . . , 
que  he  embarcado  por  su  cuenta  y 
riesgo  a  bordo  del  buque  Ella,  su 
capitan  ***.  La  factura  importa  $..., 
que  ruego  a  Yds.  me  aboneu  en 
cuenta,  en  la  que  les  dejo  cargada 
dicba  cantidad. 

Los  gastos  suplidos  ascienden  a 
. . . .,  que  hem os  cargado  a  Vd.  en 
cuenta. 

Una  cuenta  de  venta  poco  satis- 
factoria. 

Adjunto  l^laran  Vds.  su  cuenta 
corriente  h»»fa  el  31  diciembre  ul- 
timo, arroj«mdo  un  saldo  a  nuestro 
favor,  en  uq-iella  fecha,  de  . . . , , 
que  les  c^gamos  por  principle;  de 
cuenta  rtieva. 

Les  r*umtimos  igualmente  un  es- 
tado  df  la  cuenta  corriente  que  les 
hemos  seguido  hasta  la  fecha,  ofre- 
ciendo  an  saldo  a  nuestro  favor  de 

$ ,  que,  sin  perjuicio  de  su  exa- 

men,  les  cargamos  por  primera  par- 
tida  de  cuenta  nueva. 

Aun  no  nos  ha  sido  posible  re- 
pasar  dichas  c  lentas  con  la  debida 
atencion  ;  ma  i  por  lo  que  hemos 
podido  ver,  n<  s  han  parecido  con- 
formes;  nuef/ja  proxima,  de  todos 
modos,  le  aT*sara  el  resultado  de 
su  examen. 

Observo  q%e  en  el  estado  de  cuen- 
ta que  me  remiten,  cargan  una  co- 
mision  de  i  p.  0/0  por  haber  efec- 
tuado  dicha  remesa;  esto  debe  ser 
una  equivocacion. 


Of  which,  when  finally  settled, 
you  will  be  furnished  with  a  detail- 
ed account. 

Enclosed,  you  will  please  receive 
(find)  bill  of  lading  and  invoice. 

Herewith  enclosed,  you  will  find 
bill  of  lading  and  invoice  of.  ..., 
which  we  have  shipped  to  you  r  con- 
signment on  board  the  American 
ship  Ann,  captain  ***. 

The  bill  of  lading  made  out  to 
their  order. 

I  have  now  the  pleasure  of  hand- 
ing you  the  invoice  and  bill  of  lad- 
ing of....,  shipped,  on  your  ac- 
count and  to  your  address,  on  board 
the  Ella,  captain  ***  ;  invoice 
amount  $ . . . .  to  the  debit  of  your 
account. 

The  expenses  incurred  thereon, 

amounting   to ,  are  placed  to 

your  debit. 

An  unsatisfactory  account  sales. 

We  hand  you,  herewith,  your  ac- 
count current,  closed  to  the  end  of 
last  year,  showing  a  balance  in  our 

favor,   on  that    date,   of   to 

your  debit  on  new  account. 

You  will  also  find,  herewith,  a 
statement  of  your  account  to  this 
day,  which  we  will  thank  you  to  ex- 
amine, and  pass  the  balance,  $...., 
to  our  credit  on  new  account 


"We  have  not  had  leisure  to  ex- 
amine them  with  the  requisite  at- 
tention; but,  from  their  general  ap- 
pearance, we  have  little  doubt  of 
their  accuracy;  our  next,  however, 
will  be  more  explicit. 

By  the  statement  of  account  for- 
warded, I  observe  you  charge  me 
with  a  commission  of  %  p.  0/0  for 
effecting  this  remittance,  which  I 
think  must  be  a  mistake. 


492 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


No  veo  la  necesidad  de  comprar 
on  Nueva  York  papel  sobre  Ingla- 
terra,  ouando  pueden  con  igual  faci- 
lidad  proporcionarselo  en  San  Fran- 
cisco. 

A  la  verdad,  estas  son  cosas  de 
poca  monta:  pero  siendo  mas  que 
probable  que  en  lo  sucesivo  hare 
con  esa  casa  negocios  de  considera- 
cion,  creo  que  conviene  nos  ponga- 
raos  bien  de  acuerdo  desde  un  prin- 
cipi ),  a  fin  de  precaver  desavenen- 
oias  mas  tarde. 

Sentimos  el  mal  entendido  que 
ha  ocurrido  respecto  a  la  cuenta  de 
Vd.  ;  mas  se  hara  cargo  que  si  de- 
oie'semos;. . . . 

Creo,  Sres.,  sin  tener  la  mas  re- 
mota  intencion  de  ofender  a  Vds., 
que  debe  serine  permitido  hacerles 
observaciones  sobre  esta  cuenta. 

Hemos  examinado  las  facturas  de 
las  mercancias  que  nos  remiten  de 
nuestra  cuenta  por  el  Clara,  y  en- 
contramos  en  ellas  las  equivoca- 
ciones  siguientes,  que  se  serviran 
rectificar. 

Advertiran  Vds.  que. . . . 

Debo  advirtirles  que .... 

Ya  se  por  experieucia  que  es 
ocioso  reclamar  nada  a  esos  fabri- 
cantes,  pero  es  bueno  que  el  de  los 
....  sepa  que 

Harai  lo  que  tengan  por  con- 
veniente,  pero  este'n  Vds.  seguros 
de  que  este  reclamo  es  sumamente 
justo. 

Vean  Vds.  si  no  hay  alguna 
equivocacion  en  el. . . . 

Valor  comun. 

Segun  nota  a  la  vuelta  (al  res- 
paldo)— al  pie*  (a  continuacion). 

Agradecerd  a  Vd.  me  diga  en  que 
situacion  se  hallan  nuestras  cuen- 
tas. 

Ahora,  el  saldo  en  nuestra  con- 
tra asciendo  a 


I  cannot  see  the  necessity  of  send- 
ing to  New  York  to  purchase  a  bill 
on  England,  which  could  just  as 
well  have  been  procured  at  Sau 
Francisco. 

Neither  of  these  items  are  of  suf- 
ficient amount  to  make  them  of  any 
importance;  but  as  it  is  more  than 
probable  that  we  shall  do  consider- 
able business  together  in  future,  it 
is  best  we  should  understand  each 
other  at  the  beginning,  to  prevent 
difficulties  in  future. 

We  are  sorry  that  misapprehen- 
should  have  existed  with  respect  to 
your  account ;  but  you  will  see,  on 
reflection,  that  if  we  were  to ... . 

I  trust,  gentlemen,  without  wish- 
ing in  the  most  remote  manner  to 
give  you  offence,  that  I  may  be 
allowed  to  make  my  remarks  upon 
this  account. 

The  invoices  of  your  shipment 
on  our  accocnt  per  Aiidu  hive  been 
examined,  and  we  find  in  them  the 
following  errors,  which  we  will 
thank  you  to  correct. 

You  will  please  observe  that .... 

I  should  observe  that  . . . 

I  am  aware  by  experience,  how 
fruitless  it  is  to  claim  any  thing 
from  your  manufacturers  ;  but  it  is 
not  idle  that  the  one  who  sold  the 
should  know  that     , . 

You  will  do  as  you  think  proper, 
but  you  may  be  assured  of  this, 
that  the  claim  is  perfectly  just 

Is  there  not  some  mistake  in 
the....  ? 

Average  date. . .. 

As  per  note  on  the  other  side— 
at  foot. 

It  would  be  a  matter  of  satisfac- 
tion to  know  how  our  accounts 
siand. 

The  balance  now  standing  against 


CIRCULARS,  LETTERS,   ETC. 


493 


Lo  que  me  constituye  en  un  des- 
cubierto  de  mucha  consideracion. 

Quedau  aun  pendientes  algunas 
pequeiias  cautidades  y  unos  pocos 
reeiamos  por  arreglar. 

En  este  supuesto,  habria  al 
cre'dito  de  mi  cuenta  L.  318.  11.3 
con  el  interes  correspondiente. 

Espero  que  el  arreglo  de  esta 
cuenta  no  me  pondra  en  la  necesi- 
dad  de   . . . 

Lo  que  nivela  este  negocio  (esta 
operacion. ) 

Con  lo  que  queda  cancelada  esta 
operacion. 

Hacer  un  ajuste,  un  convenio. 

Espero  que  esto  merecera  la 
ftprobacion  de  Vd. 


Which  places  me  under  heavy 
advances. 

There  are  yet  somesmall  amounts 
outstanding  and  a  few  claims  un- 
settled. 

There  would  then  stand  to  my 
credit,  with  interest,  1,318.  11.3. 

I  hope  the  adjustment  of  this 
account  will  not  render  it  necessary 
for  me  to 

Which  balances  the  transaction. 

Thus  closing  this  transaction. 

To  come  to  an  arrangement. 
I  hope  this  will  meet  your  appro- 
bation. 


CIRCULARS,   LETTERS  OF  INTRODUCTION  AND  CREDIT. 


Muy  Senor  mio, 

Participo  a  Vd.  que  he  esta- 
blecido  en  esta  plaza,  bajo  mi  solo 
nombre,  una  casa  de  comercio  que 
Be  ocupara  de  negocios  de  Banco  y 
de  la  venta  y  compra  a  comision 
de  toda  clase  de  efectos. 

Celebrare  me  favorezca  con  sus 
6rdenes  que  seran  desempenadas 
con  todo  el  esmero  y  atencion  de 
que  soy  capaz. 

Sirvase  Vd.  tomar  nota  de  mi 
firma  y  de  la  del  Sr.  Dn.***,  a 
quien  doy  mi  poder. 

Quedo  a  su  disposicion  atento  v 
seguro  servidor. 


Q.  B.  S.  M. 


Dn.***  fir  mar  a 


Sir, 

I  have  the  honor  to  inform  you 
that  I  have  established  in  this  city 
a  commercial  house  in  my  private 
name,  for  the  purpose  of  transact- 
ing a  general  business,  principally 
on  commission. 

I  shall  be  happy  to  be  favored 
with  your  orders,  to  the  execution 
of  which  my  best  attention  and 
*are  shall  be  devoted. 

Please  to  note  my  signature,  as 
also  that  of  Mr.  ***,  whom  I  have 
authorized  to  sign  for  me. 

I  am  respectfully,  Sir, 

Your  .... 


Mr.  ***,  will  sign 


Muy  Sefiores  nuestros  :  Gentlemen  : 

Tenemos  el  honor  de  participar  We  beg  leave  to  inform  you  that 

&  Vds.  que  hemos  formado  en  esta  we  have  this  day  formed  a   com- 

plaza,  bajo  la  razon  de   ***,   una  mercial  establishment  in  this  place. 


491 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


sociedad,  cuya  ocupacion  principal 
sera  la  compra  y  venta  a  comision 
de  toda  clase  de  frutos  y  efectos. 

Un  capital  suficiente  y  el  apoyo 
de  algunas  casas  respetables,  nos 
poiien  en  situacion  de  facilitar 
cualesquiera  operaciones  que  nues- 
tros amigos  gusten  encargarnos,  y 
de  manejarlas  con  toda  la  actividad 
que  puedan  desear. 

A  continuacion — hallaran  Vds. 
nuestras  firmis,  de  las  que  se  ser- 
viran  tomar  nota,  disponiendo  de 
sus  atentos  yS.  S 

S.  S.  S.  ***  firmara  : 


under  the  firm  of  ***,  for  the  pur* 
pose  ot  carrying  on  a  commission 
business. 

Possessed  of  a  competent  capital 
and  ample  support  to  facilitate  tbe 
wishes  of  our  friends,  we  pledge 
ourselves  that  any  orders  com- 
mitted to  us  shall  receive  prompt 
attention  and  despatch, 


Below  you  will  find  our  respec- 
tive signature,  to  which  we  beg 
your  reference,  and  with  a  tender 
of  our  best  services,  we  remain 

Signatures  of. 


*** 

*** 


Muy  Senores  nuestros  : 

Tenemos  el  honor  de  informar  a 
Vds.  que  hem os  formado  en  este 
dia  una  sociedad  mercantil,  que 
jirara  bajo  la  denominacion  de***, 
y  se  ocupara  en  el  ramo  general  de 
comisiones. 


Gentlemen, 

We  beg  leave  to  inform  you  that 
we  have  formed  a  partnership  and 
established  a  house  of  general 
agency  in  this  city  under  the  firm 
of  ***. 


El  capital  con  que  con  tamos  y 
los  recursos  que  nos  proporcionan 
nuestras  relaciones,  nos  facilitan 
medios  de  hacer  los  adelantos 
de  costumbre  sobre  las  consigna- 
ciones  que  nos  dirij  m  nuestros 
amigos,  y  de  descmpenar  sus 
6rdenes  con  desahogo  y  celeridad. 

Con  tal  motivo,  nos  tomamos  la 
libertad  dc  ofrecer  a  Vd.  nuestros 
servicios  en  esta  plaza,  esperando 
que  nuestra  esperiencia  practica 
en  toda  clase  de  negocios,  y  el 
conocimiento  particular  que  hemos 
adquirido  de  los  de  este  mercado, 
durante  una  residenua  de  diez 
afios,  n  >s  n  sreceran  su  favor  y  con- 
nan  za. 


The  arrangements  we  have  en- 
tered into,  together  with  our  own 
means,  will  enable  us  to  make  all 
reasonable  and  customary  advances 
on  consignments,  as  also  to  afford 
every  requisite  despatch  to  tho 
business  intrusted  to  our  caro. 


With  these  assurances,  we  take 
the  liberty  to  offer  you  our  services 
in  this  place,  trusting  that  our 
general  commercial  knowledge,  and 
the  experience  derived  from  a  resi- 
dence here  of  ten  years,  will  en- 
sure to  us  the  confidence  of  our 
friends.  Soliciting  your  attention 
to  our  signatures  and  the  annexed 
references,  we  remain  respectfully, 


CIRCULARS,   LETTERS,    ETC. 


495 


Suplicamos    a    Vds.    se    sirvan  gentleman,                      Your., 

tomar  nota  de  nuestras  Annas,  y  The  signature  of  your 

quedamos  a   sus   6rdenes,    atentos  M.  O.  S.***. 

8.  S.                             Q.  S.  M.  B.  The  signature  of  your 

Firma  social  de  S.  S.  S.***.  M.  6.  S.***. 


Tenemos  la  satisfaecion  de  anun- 
cias  a  Vd.  que  acabamos  de  esta- 
blecer  una  easa  en  Nue'va  York  y 
otra  en  Nueva  Orleans. 

Dn.***  y  Dn.***  dirijiran  el  esta- 
blecimiento  de  Nueva  York,  que 
jirara  con  el  nombre  de***,  y 
nuestros  Dn.***  y***  tendran  a  su 
cargo  el  de  Nueva  Orleans,  bajo  la 
razon  social  de  ***. 

Contamos  con  un  capital  sufi- 
ciente  para  hacer  adelantos  sobre 
las  consign  aciones  que  se  nos 
hagan,  tan  luego  corao  se  hallen 
en  nuestro  poder,  6  al  recibir  las 
facturas  y  conoeimientos,  acom- 
panados  de  las  6rdenes  para  efec- 
tuar  los  seguros. 

Nos  ofrecemos  a  su  disposicion, 
asegurandoles  que  pondremos  todo 
nuestro  esmero  en  ibmentar  los  in- 
tereses  de  los  amigos  que  nos  hon- 
ren  con  su  confianza. 

Buenos  Ayres,  1°  julio  1871. 

Tenemos  el  honor  de  qomunicar 
&  Vd.  que  hemos  convenido  unir 
los  dos  establecimientos  mercantiles 
que  han  existido  hasta  el  dia  en  esta 
plaza  bajo  las  denominaciones  de 
....  y  .... 

La  nueva  sociedad,  a  cuyo  cargo 
queda  la  liquidacion  de  las  dos  casas 
disueltas,  girara  bajo  la  razon  de. . . 

La  nueva  sociedad  se  dedicara 
principalmente  al  ramo  de  comi- 
siones,  y  formaran  una  parte  nota- 
ble ie  su  giro. 


We  have  the  honor  to  inform  you 
that  we  have  opened  a  house  in 
New  York  in  connection  with  one 
in  New  Orleans. 

The  business  of  our  house  in 
New  York  will  be  conducted  by 
Mr.,***  and  Mr.***,  under  the  firm 
of  ***  ;  that  of  New  Orleans  by  our 
***,  and  our  ***,  under  the  firm 
of***. 

Our  means  being  ample,  we  shall 
be  always  ready  to  make  the  custo- 
mary advances  on  consignments, 
when  in  our  possession,  or  on  re- 
ceipt of  invoice  and  bill  of  lading, 
with  orders  to  effect  insurance. 


"We  beg  leave  to  tender  you  our 
services  and  assure  you  that  every 
exertion  shall  be  made  to  benefit 
those  who  may  place  their  interests 
in  our  hands. 

Buenos  Ayres,  1st  July,  1871. 
We  have  the  honor  to  inform  yon 
that  we  have  agreed  to  unite  the  two 
mercantile  establishments  which 
have  hitherto  existed  in  this  city 
under  the  firms  of and  .... 

The  new  firm,  which  is  intrusted 
with  the  liquidation  of  the  affairs 
of  both  houses  will  be  styled  ***. 

The  new  firm  will  devote  its  at- 
tention principally  to  commission 
business,  in  which  ....  will  form 
an  important  feature. 


496 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


MucLo  celebrardmos  ser  favore- 
cidos  con  las  drdenes  de  Vd.  y  en  su 
desempeiio  nada  omitire'mos  de 
cuanto  pueda  prom  over  sus  inte- 
leses  y  mereeer  su  aprobacion. 

Nuestro  capital  y  recursos  nos 
proporcionaran  siempre  los  medios 
de  hacerle  los  adelantos  que  pudie- 
ren  acomodarle. 

Habiendo  admitido  por  socio  en 
mi  casa  de  comercio  a  mi  bijo 
mayor,  tengo  el  honor  de  informar 
&  Vd.  que,  desde  esta  fecha,  mi 
citada  casa  jirara  bajo  la  razon  de 
S .  . . .  e  hijo. 

Sirvase  Vd.  tomar  nota  de  su 
firma  a  continuacion,  diponiendo 
desus  atentos  S.  S. 

Q.  S.  M.  B. 

Firma  deS.  S.  S 

Queda  disuelta  la  sociedad  que 
ha  existido  hasta  el  diabajo  la  razon 

de y  su  liquidacion   a  cargo 

de  nuestro  Dn.***. 


We  shall  be  happy  to  be  favored 
with  your  orders,  in  the  execution 
of  which  we  will  neglect  nothing 
that  can  contribute  towards  giving 
you  entire  satisfaction. 

Our  resources  are  such  as  to  place 
it  always  in  our  power  to  afford  you 
every  advantage. 


Having  determined  to  take  my 
eldest  son  into  partnership,  I  beg 
to  acquaint  you  that,  from  this  day, 
the  business  of  my  house  will  be 

conducted  under  the  firm  of  S 

&  Son. 

We  beg  you  to  take  note  of  his 
signature  below,  and  to  believe  us, 
with  great  respect,  gentlemen, 
Your  .... 

Signature  of  Mr. . . . 

The  copartnershp  hitherto  exist- 
ing under  the  firm  of  is  now 

dissolved.  Our  late  partner,  Mr.***, 
is  authorised  to  adjust  and  settle 
the  outstanding  accounts  of  the 
concern. 


Participo  a  Vd.que  habiendo  es- 
pirado  el  31  del  ppdo,  el  te'rmino 
de  mi  sociedad  con  el  Sr.  Dn.  ***, 
seguu  se  impondra  por  la  circular 
de  la  vuelta,  acabo  de  formar  otra 
con  Dn.  ***,  la  cual  jirara  bajo  la 

razon  de y  se  dedicara  linica- 

mente  a  los  negocios  de  comision. 


Muy  Sr.  mio ; 

El  dador  de  esta  sera  el  Sr.  Dn. 
***,  socio  de  Dn***,  quien  anterior- 
mente  lo  ha  sido  de  la  casa  de  los 
Sres***,  de  la  Habana.  Siendo  pro- 
bable que  este  caballero  pase  a  ese 
puerto  a  asuntos  de  comercio,  me 
tomo  la  libertad  de  darle  esta  intro- 
duccion  para  Vds.,  y  de  reeomen- 


The  partnership  between  the 
subscriber  and  ***,  having  expired 
on  the  31st  ultimo,  as  you  will  be 
informed  by  the  annexed  circular, 
beg  leave  to  announce  to  you  that 
I  have,  in  company  with  ***,  estab- 
lished a  new  house  in  this  city,  for 
the  sole  purpose  of  transacting  a 
commission  business  under  the 
firm  of . 

Dear  Sir,  | 

The  bearer  of  this  present,  Mr. 
***,  is  a  partner  of  Mr.  ***,  lately 
a  member  of  the  firm  of  ***,  of 
Havana.  This  gentlemen  being 
likely  to  visit  your  port  on  com- 
mercial business,  I  beg  to  intro- 
duce him  to  your  acquaintance  and 
friendship.    You  will  very  much 


CIUCULAHS,   LETTERS,   ETC. 


497 


darie  h  su  buena  amistad.  Agra- 
decere  a  Vds.  se  sirvan  prestarle  su 
auxilio  para  el  logro  de  su  objeto, 
y  le  faciliten  los  conocimientos  que 
puedan  coutribuir  al  buen  e'xito  de 
su  viaje. 

Muy  Senor  nuestro  : 

La  presente'  sera  a  Vd.  entregada 
por  el  Sr.  Dn***,  amigo  de  todo 
nuestro  apreeio  y  socio  de  la  respe- 
table  casa  de  los  Sres.  ***,  de  Lima. 
Lo  recomendamos  muy  particular- 
meute  a  sus  atentos  obsequios,  su- 
plicandole  le  atienda  en  todo  lo  que 
se  le  ofrezca. 

Veremos  con  gusto  que  esta  in- 
troduction sea  motivo  para  que  en- 
table  Vd.  con  la  casa  de  nuestro 
recomendado  relaciones  de  recip- 
roca  utilidad,  persuadidos  de  que 
los  Sres.  ***  corresponderan  com- 
pletamente  a  la  confianza  de  Vd. 

Muy  Sres.  mios:  Tengo  el  gusto 
do  introducir  a  su  conocimiento 
de  recomendar  a  sus  finas  atencio- 
nes  y  amistosa  acojida  al  Sr.  Dn. 
***,  de  Valparaiso,  agente  de  la  res- 
petable  casa  de  los  Sres.  ***,  de  la 
misma  plaza.  He  hecho  con  dichos 
Sres.  negocios  de  mucha  conside- 
racion,  y  su  zelo  y  actividad  me 
son  conocidos  ;  en  cuyo  concepto, 
no  dudo  recomendarlos  a  Vds., 
bien  persuadido  que  merecen,  por 
su  modo  honrado  de  trabajar,  la 
confianza  de  todos  cuantos  dirijen 
sus  especulaciones  a  aquel  punto. 

Qaedare'  deudor  al  mayor  recono- 
cimiento  por  los  servicios  y  auxilios 
que  Vds.  tengan  a  bien  prestar,  asi 
a  la  casa  de  los  Sres.  ***,  como  a 
su  apreciable  agente,  y  me  anticipo 
a  darles  las  gracias  por  todo,  repi- 
ti^ndome  a  sus  ordenes  atento  S. 
S  ... 


oblige  me  by  affording  him  your 
assistance  in  the  above  mentioned 
purpose  and  by  giving  him  every 
information  which  may  contribute 
to  the  success  of  his  voyage. 


Sir, 

We  have  much  pleasure  in  intro- 
ducing to  your  acquaintance  our 
most  particular  friend,  Mr.  ***, 
of  the  very  respectable  firm  of 
Messrs.  ***,  of  Lima.  We  shall  be 
happy  indeed  should  this  introduc- 
tion lead  to  some  business  between 
you,  because  we  are  well  convinced 
that  you  would  find  Messrs.***,  de- 
serving of  every  confidence.  Any 
attention  you  may  please  to  show 
to  Mr.  ***,  we  shall  consider  as 
shown  to  ourselves,  and  shall  at  all 
times  be  happy  to  reciprocate. 

We  are 

Gentlemen, 

Permit  me  to  introduce  to  your 
acquaintance  and  to  recommend 
to  your  obliging  attention  and  good 
offices,  Mr.  ***,  of  Valparaiso,  agent 
for  the  respectable  house  of  Messrs. 
***,  of  that  place.  I  have  had  con- 
siderable transactions  with  those 
gentlemen,  and  their  activity,  intel- 
ligence and  integrity,  justify  my 
recommending  them  as  worthy  of 
the  esteem  and  confidence  of  those 
who  have  dealings  with  that  coun- 
try. 

Any  service  which  you  can  render 
their  house,  or  their  worthy  agent, 
Mr.  ***,  will  confer  a  particular 
favor  on  me,  which  I  shall  be  happy 
to  have  opportunities  of  reciprocat- 
ing to  any  of  your  friends. 

I  am  very  sincerely, 

Your  obedient  servant 


498 


COMMERCIAL  CORRESPONDENCE. 


Muy  Sr.  mio: 

Tengo  mucho  placer  en  presentar 
a  Vd.  el  Sr.  ***.  de  este  comercio, 
amigo  de  todo  mi  aprecio.  No  se 
propone  permanecer  mas  de  un  dia 
en  San  Francisco,  pero  si  necesitase 
el  auxilio  de  su  amistad  y  conoci- 
mientos,  he  de  deber  a  Vd.se  sirva 
prestarselo  con  su  acostumbrada 
bondad. 

Disponga  Vd.  con  la  misma  fran- 
queza  de  su  atento  amigo  y  S.  S.... 

Tenemos  mucha  satisfaccion  en 
recomendar  a  Vds.  el  dador  de  la 
presente,  el  Sr.  Dn.  ***.  quien  pasa 
a  New  York  con  el  objeto  de  ver  a 
su  hermano,  Dn.  ***,  que  conocen 
Vds.  personalmente.  Hemos  de 
merecerles  se  sir  van  atender  a  est© 
j6ven  caballero  en  lo  que  se  le 
ofrezca,  durante  su  estada  en  esa 
capital,  seguros  de  nuestro  agrade- 
cimiento  por  los  favores  que  le  dis- 
pensen  y  de  nuestro  deseo  de  cor- 
responderles  del  mismo  modo  6  en 
cualquiera  otra  ocasion,  en  que  gus- 
ten  disponer  de  sus  atentos . . . 

Kecomendamos  muy  singular- 
mente  a  la  buena  acojida  de  Vds. 
ai  portador  de  la  presente,  el  Sr. 
***,  hijo  mayor  del  Sr.  ***,  de  la 
muy  respectable  casa  de  los  Sres. 
S.  y  M.,  de  este  comercio. 

Agradeceremos  a  Vds  infinite  le 
faciliten  los  conocimientos  y  auxi- 
lios  que  pueda  necesitar,  y  espera- 
mos  contribuyan  cuanto  este'  de  su 
parte  a  hacerle  agradable  su  perma- 
nencia  en  esa  capital. 

Y  estamos  convencidos  que  re- 
conoceran  por  su  trato,  que  es  dig- 
no  en  un  todo  del  aprecio  y  amistad 
do  Vds. 


Dear  Sir, 

Permit  me  to  introduce  to  yon 
my  friend,  Mr.  ***,  established  in 
this  city.  He  proposes  remaining 
but  a  day  in  San  Francisco,  but 
should  he  stand  in  need  of  any  as- 
sistance or  information  you  will 
oblige  me  by  affording  it  to  him 
with  your  usual  friendly  attention. 

I  am  ever  truly, 
My  dear  Sir, 

Yours  sincerely. 

We  beg  leave,  by  this,  to  introduce 
to  your  acquaintance  the  bearer, 
Mr.  ***,  who  is  about  to  proceed  to 
New  York  on  a  visit  to  his  brother 
Mr.  ***,  already  personally  known 
to  you.  Permit  us  to  recommend 
this  young  gentleman  to  your 
friendly  civilities  and  attention 
during  his  stay  in  your  capital,  as- 
suring you  that  any  favors  conferred 
on  him  we  shall  be  much  obliged 
for,  and  be  happy  in  having  oppor- 
tunities of  reciprocating. 

We  are .... 


We  recommend  to  your  particu- 
lar favor  and  attention  the  bearer, 
Mr.  ***,  eldest  son  of  Mr.  ***,  of 
the  highly  respectable  house  of  S. 
and  M. ,  of  this  city. 

We  request  you  most  urgently  to 
afford  him  your  advice  and  assist- 
ance, and  to  render  his  stay  in  your 
city  as  agreeable  as  possible. 

And  we  are  convinced  that,  on  a 
near  acquaintance,  he  will  prove 
himself  deserving  of  your  esteem 
and  good  wilL 


CONDENSED    INDEX. 


(The  figures  refer  to  the  pages.) 


Adjectives 25,  66,  81,  308 

(Syntax  of)   360 

Comparative  of,  85,  138 

139,  140,  309 

Superlative,  138, 139,  140 

141 

Adverbs 136,  351,  381 

(Observations  on) ....  381 

Alguno    \ 55}  1A 

Alia.    (See  Prepositions) 96,  97 

Alii.  ibid.  ....96,97 

Any 55,  56 

Afpii 96,  97 

Article.... 43,  59,  80,  865,  126,  132 
133,  307 

(Syntax  of) 359 

Augmentatives 50 

He,  to,  translated  by  tener. .  .27,  32 

Bueno 25,  52 

But 40,  69,  70 

Ciento 52 

Conjunctions 29,  355,  396 

Cual 22,  34 

Diaeresis 18,  21 

Diminutives 50,  51,  52 

El 36 


En — preposition 217 

Estar 93,  94 

Este,  esta,  esto 40,  49,  122 

Genders 46,  61,  62,  63,  66,  122 

Haber 31,  156,  336 

Hacer,  idioms  with 198 

His,  Hers 30 

Interjection 357 

Ir,  Irse 112 

It 25 

Lo 122,  160 

Money 73 

Months 74,  76,  193 

Moods— Indicative 230,  231 

(Syntax  of) 370 

Infinitive 87,  143 

(Syntax  of). .  375 

Subjunctive  .  229,  232,  238 

240,  241,  244 

(Syntax  of)..  371 

Conditional... 205,  209,  212 

Imperative,    250,  251,  252 

375 

No 25,  27,  56 

Noun 308 

(Syntax  of) 360 


500 


CONDENSED  INDEX. 


Numbers 75 

Cardinal 66,  75 

Ordinal 66,  74,  79 

Collective 79 

Distributive 79 

Plural 43,  44 

Proportional 79,80 

Participles,  145,  148,  149,  150,  217 

(Syntax) 376 

Passive  Voice 378 

Prepositions 354 

(Syntax),  383,  385,  386 

387,  388,  389,  390 

Pronouns.... 34,  102,  140,  160,  309 

(Syntax  of) 361 

Quien,  Que 104 

Ser 93,  94 

Syllables 72 

Sino 40 

Tener 31 

Tenses — Compound 164 

Imperfect. .  .170,  238,  239 


Perfect 170,176 

Future 187,  197,  244 

Uses  of  the 370 

To,  preposition 106 

Usted 22 

Verbs— Active 378 

Auxiliary 311 

Neuter 164,  378 

Impersonal 378 

Reflective 378 

Irregular  (Table  of). :  322 
(Observations  on)  336 

(List  of) 338 

Conjugations 87 

first 315 

second 317 

third 318 

Vd.  (See  Usted.) 
Vm.  (See  Usted.) 
Vowels 143 

Y,  conjunction .   29 

Yours 80 


LIST   OF   ABBREVIATIONS. 


do 


AA.  (1) 

A. a  or  a.8 

A.  s 

A.  C. 

A.  V.  E.  or 

A.  V>  E.cia 

A.  L.  E.  *P. 
V.  M. 

Admr 

Afm.° 

Agt? 

Alcde 

Alg.°,  alg.a 

Am.o 

Ant.<> 

Ant.  or  antic. 

Appco  Appoa 

Art.  or  artic. 

Arzobpo. 

At.o 

B. 

Barr. 

B,  B.r  or  Ber. 

B.  L.  (or  S.)M. 

B.  L.  {or  S.)  P. 

Brno  p.e 
Bta 

C.  A  E. 
Cam.  a 

Cap.  or  Cap.o 


Altezas  or  autores. 

Arroba  or  arrobas. 

Alios. 

Afio  Cristiano.- 

I  A  Vuestra  Escelencia.  (2) 

A  Los  Eeales  Pie's  de  Vues- 
tra Majestad. 

Administrador. 

Afectisimo. 

Agosto. 

Alcalde. 

Alguno,  alguna. 

Amigo. 

Antonio. 

Anticnado. 

Apostolico,  Apost61ica. 

Articulo. 

Arzobispo. 

Atento. 

Beato. 

Barril. 

Bachiller. 

Beso  or  besa  las  (or  sus; 
manos. 

Beso  or  besa  los  (or  sus) 
pie's. 

Beatisimo  Padre. 

Bautista. 

Catolico-ca,  Apost61ico-ca, 
Eomano-a. 

Cainara. 

Capitulo. 


Highnesses  or  autliors. 
Twenty-live  pounds  weight. 
Years. 
Christian  year. 

ToY.  E.  (Your  Excellency.) 

At  Your    Majesty's  Eoyal 

Feet. 
Administrator. 
Most  afiectionate. 
August. 
A  justice. 
Any  or  somebody. 
Friend. 
Anthony. 
Antiquated. 
Apostolical 
Article. 
Archbishop. 
Attentive. 
Blessed. 
Barrel. 

Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Sciences 
I  kiss  or  he  kisses  the  (or 

your  hands. 
I  kiss  or  he  kisses  the  (or 

your)  feet. 
Most  blessed  Father. 
Baptist. 
Catholic,  Apostolic  and  Bo- 

man. 
Chamber. 
Chapter. 


1.  The  duplication  of  the  initial  letter  of  titles  indicates  the  plural 
number. 

2.  In  speaking,  we  contract  Vuestra  Escelencia  in  Vuecencia,  which  is 
generally  used  by  educated  persons.  It  is  also  contracted  in  Vuecelenc'ut, 
Which  is  very  inelegant. 


502 


LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 


Cap.n 

Capitan. 

Captain. 

Capp. 

Capellan. 

Cbaplain. 

C.  C. 

Cuenta  corriente. 

Account  current. 

Cdo 

Cuando. 

Wben. 

0."  M.  B. 

Cuyas  manos  beso  or  besa 

.  Wbose  bands  I  kiss  or  he 
kisses. 

Comis.o 

Comisario. 

Commissary. 

Comp.a 

Coiupauia. 

Company. 

Conocimto  (1; 

Couocim'iento. 

Bill  of  lading. 

Cons. 

Cousejo. 

Counsel. 

Corte 

Corriente . 

Current,  instant. 

C.  P.  B. 

Cuyos  pHs  beso  or  beea. 

Wbose   feet  I  kiss  or    he 

C.ta 

Cuenta. 

Account.                    [kisse*, 

C.to  C.ta 

Cuanto,  cuanta. 

How  much. 

CoilV.te 

Conveniente. 

Convenient. 

D.  orD.n 

Don. 

Mr. 

D.a 

Dona. 

Mrs. 

DD. 

Doctores. 

Doctors. 

D.r  or  Dor 

Doctor 

Doctor. 

Dha. 

Dicba. 

Said. 

Dho. 

Dicbo. 

Said. 

Die™  or  10™ 

Diciembre. 

December. 

D.s' 

Dios. 

God. 

B-ro. 

Derecbo. 

Right,  or  duty. 

Dom.o 

Domingo. 

Sunday. 

Doz. 

Docena. 

Dozen. 

Ecc.o  Ecc.a 

Eclesiastico-ca. 

Ecclesiastic. 

Enm^0,  vale. 

Enrnendado,  vale. 

Amended,  valid. 

En."  ' 

Enero . 

January. 

Esc^o  Esc^a 

Escelentisimo-ma . 

Most  Excellent. 

Escn°  pc° 

Escribano  piibhco. 

Notary  Public. 

Estdo 

Estimado. 

Esteemed. 

E.U. 

Estados  Unidos. 

United  States. 

F. 

Fulano. 

Such  a  one. 

Feb.o 

Febrero. 

February. 

Ferndo 

Fernando. 

Ferdinand. 

Fha. 

Feeba. 

Date. 

Fho.  fha. 

Fecbo,  fecba. 

Dated. 

Fob 

Folio. 

Folio. 

Fr. 

Fray. 

j  Friar   (brother  of    certain 

1      religious  orders. ) 

Fr. 

Frey. 

j  A  title  of  the  Knights  oi 
{      certain  orders. 

Franco 

Francisco. 

Francis. 

1.  All  nouns  ending  in  miento  or  mento,  as  mandamiento,  armamerdo, 
etc.,  are  often  abbreviated  like  conocimienlo.  Adverbs  terminating  in 
menle,  as  enteramente,  actualmente,  etc.,  are  abbreviated  thus  :  enteram.1*, 
aciualm.1* 


LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 


503 


Fernandez. 

May  save  or  preserve. 

Grace. 

General. 

Governor. 

Government. 

The  same. 

Ditto. 

Church. 

Illustrious. 

Most  Illustrious. 

Inquisitor. 

Intendant. 

Jesus  Christ. 

Jesus. 

Jesus,  Mary  and  Joseph , 

John. 

Licentiate,  book,  or  law. 

Laws. 

Book. 

Founds. 

Line,  lines. 

Licentiate. 

Place  of  the  seal. 

Most  powerful  Lord. 

Mother. 

Elder,  major. 

Mr. 

Many  years. 

Majesty. 

Emanuel. 

Steward. 

Half. 

Michael. 

Minister. 

Favor,  worship. 

Martin. 

Pattern,  sample,  specimen. 

Martinez. 

Master  (instructor). 

An  imaginary  coin. 

Many. 

Manuscript. 

1.  JUS. — Although  this  abbreviation  is  out  of  general  use,  it  still  ro 
mains  among  the  Jesuits,  who  always  place  it  at  the  beginning  and  end 
of  their  correspondence,  and  of  all  their  writings  generally. 

2.  J.  M.  J.  is  often  found  at  the  beginning  of  letters  and  other  writ- 
ings of  religious  persons. 


Frnz. 

Fernandez. 

Gue  or  gde. 

Guarde. 

Gra. 

Gracia. 

Gen.i  (adj.)  gral 

.  General. 

Gob.r 

Gobernador. 

Gob.o 

Gobierno. 

lb. 

Ibid. 

Id.  Yd. 

Idem. 

Igla. 

Iglesia. 

Il.e 

Lustre. 

I]mo  Uma 

Ilustrisimo-ma. 

Inqor 

Inquisidor. 

Intend.  t« 

Intendente. 

J.  C. 

Jesucristo. 

Jhs.(l) 

Jesus. 

J.  M.J. (2) 

Jesus,  Maria  y  Jose*. 

J. » 

Juan. 

L. 

Licenciado,  libro,  or  ley. 

LL. 

Leyes. 

Lib. 

Libro. 

Lib  .a  lb. 

Libras. 

Lin.  lins. 

Linea,  lineas. 

Licdo 

Licenciado. 

L.  S. 

Lugar  del  sello. 

M.  P.S. 

Muy  poderoso  Sefior 

M.e 

Madre. 

M.01 

Mayor. 

Mr.  or  M.' 

Monsieur,  or  Mister. 

M.s&a 

Muchos  anos. 

Maj.d  > 

Majestad. 

Man.i 

Manuel. 

Maym° 

Mayordomo. 

M.o 

Medio. 

Mig.i 

Miguel. 

Mtro. 

Ministro. 

Mrd. 

Merced. 

Mrn. 

Martin. 

Mras. 

Muestras. 

Mrnz. 

Martinez. 

Mro. 

Maestro. 

Mrs. 

Maravedis. 

M.8 

Muchos. 

MS. 

Manuscrito. 

504 


LIST  OP  ABBREVIATIONS. 


MSS. 

Manuscritos. 

Manuscripts. 

M.  I.  A. 

Muy  Ilustre  Ayuntamien- 

to. 
Fulano. 

■  Most  Illustrious  Council. 

N. 

Such-a-one. 

N.B. 

Nota  bene. 

Take  notice. 

N.  C.  M. 

Nuestro  Catolico  Monarca 

.  Our  Catholic  Monarcn. 

N.  S. 

Nuestro  Sefior. 

Our  Lord. 

N.  S.» 

Nuestra  Sefiora. 

Our  Lady. 

N.  S.  J.  C. 

Nuestro  Sefior  Jesucristo. 

Our  Lord  Jesus  Christ 

N.  S.  M.  L 

Nuestra   Santa  Madre  la 

Our    Holy    Mother    the 

Iglesia. 

Church. 

N.  S.  P. 

Nuestro  Serafico  Padre. 

Our  Seraphic  Father. 

N.°  or  num.0 

Numero. 

Number. 

Nro.,    nra.,    or 
ntro.,  ntra. 

>•  Nuestro,  nuestra. 

Our. 

Obpo. 

Obispo. 

Bishop. 

Ob.ta 

Obediente. 

Obedient. 

On.  or  onz. 

Onza,  onzas. 

Ounce,  doubloons. 

Orn.,   orns.,  or 
Ord.,  ords. 

>  Or  den,  6rdene«. 
Ordinario-a. 

Order,  orders, 

Ord.o   ord.a 

Ordinary. 

Orig.l  or  orij.i 

Orijinal. 

Original. 

P.  pag.  or  paj 

Pajina. 

Page. 

P.  D. 

Posdata. 

Postscript. 

P.  a 

Para. 

For,  in  order  to. 

Par. 

Parrato. 

Paragraph. 

P." 

Padi-e. 

Father. 

P.o 

Pero,  or  Pedro. 

But,  or  Peter. 

P.r 

Por. 

For,  per,  or  by. 

P.s      . 

Pie's,  pesos,  or  pues. 

Feet,  dollars,  or  for,  then,  as 

p.t* 

Plata. 

Silver. 

P.te 

Parte. 

Part. 

P. to 

Puerto. 

Port. 

Pag.  to 

Pagamento. 

Payment. 

Pza. 

Pieza. 

Piece. 

PI. 

Plana,  or  plural. 

Trowel,  page,  or  plural 

Pbro.  or  Prbo 

Presbitero. 

Presbyter,  priest. 

Pral. 

Principal. 

Principal. 

Pror. 

Procurador. 

Attorney. 

Prov. 

Pro  visor. 

Provisor. 

Pubco  or  pubic 

Publico. 

Public. 

Pmo  pdo. 

Proximo  pasado. 

Last  past. 

Ppe. 

Principe. 

Prince. 

QQs. 

Quin  tales. 

Quintals  (a  hundred  pounds 
weight). 

Q.  or  q.e 

Que. 

That. 

(Q.  D.  G.) 

(Que  Dios  guarde.) 

Whom  may  God  preserve. 

'Q.  E.  G.  E.) 

(Que  en  gloria  este'. ) 

May  his  or  her  soul  be  in 
glory. 

LIST   OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 


505 


(Q.  E.  P.  D.) 

(Que  en  paz  descanse.) 

May  his  or  her  soul  rest  in 

peace. 
"Who  kisses  your  hand. 

Q,  S.  M.  B. 

Que  sus  manos  besa. 

R.t  Aud.». 

Real  Audiencia. 

Royal  Supreme  Court. 

RR.  PP. 

Reverendos  Padres, 

Reverend  Fathers. 

R.s  R.8 

Rentas  Reales. 

Royal  incomes  or  rents. 

Rmo  Eevmo 

Re  ver  en  disim  o. 

Most  Reverend. 

II.  Rd°  Rda 

Reverendo,  reverenda. 

Reverend. 

R  P.  M. 

Reverendo  Padre  Maestro 

,  Reverend  Father. 

Rbi 

Recibf. 

I  received. 

Reco 

Recibo. 

Receipt. 

R.I,  Rleayon 

Real,  reales  vellon. 

Real,  reals  (silver  coin).(l) 

Resp. 

Respuesta. 

Answer. 

S.  S.to  S.ta 

San,  or  Santo,  Santa. 

Saint,  holy. 

S.  A. 

Su  Alteza. 

His  or  Her  Highness. 

S.  A.  R. 

Su  Alteza  Real. 

His  or  Her  Royal  Highness. 

S.  M. 

Su  Majestad. 

His  or  Her  Majesty. 

S.  M.  B. 

Su  Majestad  Britanica. 

H.  B.  M.  (His  or  Her  Bri- 
tannic Majesty). 

S.  M.  0. 

Su  Majestad  Cat61ica. 

H.  C*.  M.  (His  or  Her  Ca- 
tholic Majesty. 

S.  M.  C.  S. 

Su  Majestad  Cristianfsima.  H.  M .  C'  M.    (His  or  Her 

Most  Christian  Majesty). 

S.  M.  F. 

Su  Majestad  Fidelfsima. 

IL  M.  F.  M.  (His  or  Her 
Most  Faithful  Majesty). 

S.  M.  S. 

Su  Majestad  Sarda. 

IT.  S.  M.  (His  or  Her  Sar- 

dinian  Majesty). 
H.  I.  M.  (His  or  Her  Impe- 

S. M.  L 

Su  Majestad  Imperial. 

rial  Majesty). 

&.*  or  S.°r 

Selor. 

Sir. 

S.ft  or  S.™ 

Sefcora. 

Madam,  lady. 

Senta 

Sefiorita. 

Miss,  young  lady. 

S.  S.a 

Su  Senoria. 

His  Lordship. 

S.S.d 

Su  Santidad. 

His  Holiness. 

SS.  or  S^ 

St  fibres. 

Gentlemen,  Messrs. 

S.  S.  S.,  or  8U 
seg.°  serv.or 
Seb.n 

J-  Su  seguro  servidor. 
Sebastian. 

Your  faithful  servant 

Sebastian. 

Spre. 

Siempre. 

Always. 

Sr.ia  Secret* 

Secretaria. 

Secretary's  office. 

S>?°,   Sec.o  or 
Secret.© 

1  Secretario. 

Secretary. 

Ser1?0  or  Ser*?a 

Serenisimo-ma. 

Most  Serene. 

6orv° 

Servicio.  . 

Service. 

1.  It  is  i  national  custom  in  Old  Spain  to  keep  accounts  in  reales  d* 
vellon,  as  the  French  do  in  francs,  and  the  English  in  pounds  sterling. 
A  real  de  vellon  is  a  different  coin  from  a  real  fuerte.  One  dollar  has 
twenty  of  the  former,  and  it  mly  has  eight  of  the  latter. 


506 


LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 


Serv.* 
Sig.f 
SSmo 
SSni0 

SSmo  Re 
Su  mrd. 
SS.  PP. 
Subten.t9 
Siip.ca 
Sup> 
Super.  *• 
S.  Y.  li  0. 

T.  or  torn. 

Ten.  to 

Tesor.o 

Tgo. 

Tpo. 

Ton.  a 

TraL 

Ult 

V. 

V.,  V.«  or  Ven. 

V.,  Vd.  orVm. 

W.,   Vds.   or 

Vms. 
V.  A. 
V.  B.d 
V.I. 
V.   E.    or  V. 

ESC.  a 

V.  E.  E. 

V.  g.,  orV.  gr. 

Vers.° 

V.  M. 

V.  P. 

V.  Ra 

V.  R.  M. 

V.  s.* 

V.  SS. 


Servidor.  Servant 

Siguiente.  Following. 

Santisimo.  Most  Holy. 

Santfsimo  (el  Sacramento).  The  Host,  the  Holy  Sacra- 
ment. 


Santfsimo  Padre. 
Su  merced.  (1) 
Santos  Padres. 
Subteniente. 
Suplica. 
Suplicante. 
Superintendents . 
Salvo  yerro  u  omision. 


Most  Holy  Father. 
His  or  her  Honor. 
Holy  father. 
Sublieutenant. 
Request,  entreaty. 
Petitioner. 
Superintendent. 
Errors    or    omissions 

cepted. 
Volume. 
Lieutenant. 
Treasurer. 
Witness. 
Time. 
Ton. 

Court,  tribunal. 
Last 
See. 
Venerable. 


Tomo. 

Teniente. 

Tesorero. 

Testigo. 

Tiempo. 

Tonelada. 

Tribunal 

tJltimo. 

Vdase. 

Venerable. 

Usted  (100  years  back,  vues-You,  Your  Honor. 
ira  merced). 
)  Ustedes,     (ditto,     vuestrasYou,  Your  Honoitu 
j"     mercedes). 

Vuestra  Alteza.  Your  Highness. 

Vuestra  Beatitud.  Your  Beatitude. 

Vuestra  Eustrisima.  Your  Grace. 

>■  Vuestra  Escelencia.  (2) 

Vuestras  Escelencias. 
Verbi  gracia. 
Versiculo. 


Vuestra  Majestad. 
Vuestra  Paternidad. 
Vuestra  Reverencia. 
Vuestra  Real  Majestad. 
Vuestra  Senorfa.  (3) 
Vuestras  Sefiorlas. 


Your  Excellency. 

Your  Excellencies. 
For  example. 
Versicle. 
Your  Majesty. 
Your  Paternity. 
Your  Reverence. 
Your  Royal  Majesty. 
Your  Lordship. 
Your  Lordships. 


1.  Su  merced  is  the  title  used  when  speaking  in  the  3d  person  of  any 
Alcalde  or  other  justice  who  has  not  the  title  of  Sehoria.  It  is  also  asea 
by  servants  in  speaking  to  their  masters. 

2.  See  note  2,  page  501. 

3.  Vuestra  Sehoria  is  contracted  in  Vuesenoria  or  Usia:  the  latter  is 
always  preferable  to  the  former. 


LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS. 


507 


r.  S.I. 


Vuestra  Senorfa  Ilustrisima.Your  Most  Illustrious  Kov 
rence. 
Your  Holiness. 
Real  of  vellori  (coin). 
Volume. 
Your. 
Examined  and  approved. 


2.d 
3.d 

4.th 

10(Jt> 


V.  S.<* 

Vuestra  Santidad 

y.on 

Vellon. 

Vol. 

Volumen. 

Vro.  vra. 

Vuestro,  vuestra, 

V\">  B.o 

Visto  bueno. 

ho  l.a 

Primero-a. 

2.o  2. » 

Segundo-a. 

3<>3.a 

Tercero-a. 

4.o  4.» 

Cuarto-a. 

25.  o  25. » 

Vije'simo-a  quinto-a. 

106.  <>  106 .» 

Oente'simo-a  sesto-a. 

And  so  on,  placing  an  o  or  an  a  over  the  cardinal  number,  according  to 
the  gender  of  the  noun  it  refers  to;  that  is,  if  it  is  a  masculine  noun  the 
letter  o  should  be  added  to  the  figure,  and  if  a  feminine,  tho  letter  a } 
said  letters  being  the  termination  masculine  or  feminine  of  the  ordinal 
K.nmbers. 


TABLE  OP  CONTENTS. 


PAGX. 

Preface iii 

Exercise  on  Pronunciation 5 

Pronunciation  and  Accentuation 7 

Words  Similar  in  Sound,  but  Different  in  Spelling 37 

Division  of  Words  into  Syllables 17 

Marks  used  in  Punctuation 18 

Practical  Exercises 21 

Conversational  Exercises 265 

Etymology 307 

Syntax 359 

Dialogues 398 

Proverbs • 435 

Idioms • 443 

Mercantile  Vocabulary , 455 

Commercial  Correspondence 462 

Abbreviations 501 


LIBEOS  DE  TEXTO 


(CON  SUS  PRECIOS  EN  PAPEL  M0NEBA> 


LAS   ESCUELAS  Y  ENSENASZA  DE  IDIOMAS 


PUBLICADOS 


GEORGE  R.  LOCKWOOD 


BDITOR-LIBRERO     E    IMPORTADOR    DE     TODA    CLASH     VU 
LIBROS    EN    ESPANOL,  FRANCES  E  ITALIANO. 


812    BEOADWAY. 


NUEVA   YORK 
L1BRERIA   AMERICANA   Y   EXTRANGERA 


LIBROS    PARA   LOS    ESPAfrOLES 

{Se  hard  un  iesmento  d  los  Sres.  Libreros  y  Profesor  et.) 


V\  iGUT  j  OLLENDORFF.  EI  Maestro  de  Ingle* 
Complcto.  Metodo  practico  para  aprender  la  lengua  inglesa 
segun  el  sistema  de  Ollendorff,  conteniendo,  ademas  del 
Metodo  propiamente  dicho,  un  tratado  de  la  propiedad  de  laa 
voces,  en  dos  partes,  inglesa  y  espafiola ;  .di&logos  escogidos  en 
ingles  y  espanol;  un  compendio  de  Gramatica  inglesfi;  Prover- 
bios ;  Conversaciones  familiares ;  lista  alf  abetica  de  abreviaturas ; 
explicacion  de  mucbas  f rases  latinas,  etc.,  que  suelen  usarse  en 
ingles,  un  Traductor  y  Lector  y  un  vocabulario  de  terminos  comer- 
ciales,   con    modelos    de    correspond eneia    mercantil    en    ambos 

idiomas.     Por  Francisco  Javier  Vingut.     12mo $1.75 

Edicion  enteramente  refundida,  corregida  y  notablemente  au« 
mentada  con  un  novisimo  sistema  de  pronunciacion  figurada. 

•  ••Clave  de  Io§  Ejereicio§.    12mo $0.90 

-  -  EI  Preceptor  Ingle§  Elemental,  6  sea  Novisimo  Me- 
todo para  aprender  ingles  los  nifios  espafioles,  compuesto  por  un 
profesor  segun  los  sistemas  de  Vingut  y  Ollendorff.  12mo...$l.40 
Porque  no  bay  libro  de  texto  elemental  para  uso  de  los  espa- 
fioles que  desean  aprender  la  lengua  inglesa,  me  parecio  quo 
seria  prestar  un  importante  servicio  al  publico  latino-americano 
poner  a  su  disposicion  un  metodo  mas  facil  que  "El  Maestro  de 
Ingles  Completo,"  y  que  pudiera  servir  a  un  tiempo  para  nifios 
y  para  adultos.  He  resuelto,  pues,  dar  a  luz  El  Preceptor 
Ingles  Elemental.  Este  libro,  compuesto  con  el  mayor  es- 
mero  por  un  profesor  de  mucha  experiencia  en  el  manejc  y  la 
ensefianza  de  aquel  idioma,  contiene  una  Reseiia  de  Gramatica 
inglesa,  un  metodo  de  unas  200  paginas,  con  la  pronunctacion 
figurada  de  cada  palabra ;  modelos  de  estilo  epistolar  y  una  colec- 
<rioc  de  trozos  escogidos  de  los  mejores  escritores  in»ieses  y  ameri- 
canos,  y  arreglados  de  modo  que  sirvan  do  ejercicio  de  lectura  J 
pjronunciaciou  inglesa  oon  cada  iecoion. 


PUBLIC  ADO*  rOR  ©EORGE  R.  LOCKWOOD.  8 

—  Clave   dc   los   Ejercicios.    12mo 70o. 

f  IIVGUT  y  DEL.  MAR.  Guia  para  la  Conversation 
en  Espafiol  6  Angles,  que  contiene  varias  listas  de  las 
voces  mas  usuales,  debidamente  clasificadas ;  colecciones  de 
dialogos  de.  etiqueta  y  frases  de  conversacion  sobre  los  asuiitoi 
mas  generates  de  la  vida ;  refranes  y  modos  de  decir,  y  tabla« 
comparativas  de  monedas,  pesos  y  medidas.  Por  Emanuel 
del  Mar.  Habiendose  anadido  un  tratado  completo  de  la  pro- 
nunciation y  ortografia  inglesa,  por  Francisco  Javier  Vingut. 
12mo $0. 90 

VIIVGUT.  Eector  y  Tradnctor  Ingles,  6  sea  Nuevo  Me- 
todo,  para  aprender  a  traducir  del  ingles  al  espailol,  y  vice- 
versa.  Comprendiendo  un  trabado  completo  de  la  pronuncia- 
tion inglesa ;  una  serie  de  anccdotas  escogidas ;  la  Constitution 
de  los  Estados  Unidos,  y  algunas  cartas  sociales  y  mercantiles, 
etc.     Por  Francisco  Javier  Vingut.     12mo $1.40 

-  —  Compaftero    del    Nuevo  Metodo    de    OHendorfl 

reuniendo  lo  mas  interesante  de  Robertson,  Urcullu  y  Worcestei 
con  otros  trataijos  originales.  Contiene  un  tratado  de  la  pro- 
nunciation inglesa ;  otro  de  la  formation  de  las  palabras ;  una 
lista  alfabctica  de  las  principales  particulas  inglesas  y  de  su 
uso  ;  otra  de  los  verbos  ingleses  ;  un  vocabulario  de  los  adverbios, 
adjetivos,  verbos  y  palabras  mas  usadas,  y  dialogos  famiiiares 
para  empezar  a  hablar  el  ingles.     12mo $1.60 

J5LA1VCO.  Eectaras  Inglesas  escogidas  6  sea  Trozos  de  los 
in ej  ores  escritores  ingleses  y  americanos,  en  prosa  y  verso, 
arreglados  en  lecciones,  con  notas  gramaticales  y  fraseologicas, 
traduction  interlinear  y  un  vocabulario  con  la  pronunciation 
y  definiciones. 

Primera  Parte.     12mo $0.P0 

Segunda  Parte.     12mo 0.90 

En  un  solo  vohimen.     12mo 1 .50 

Componense  las  Lecturas  inglesas  escogidas  de  trozes  de  log 
mejores  hablistas  modernos,  tanto  britanicos  como  americanos, 
escritos  en  lenguaje  facil,  pero  correcto,  tal  como  ee  usa  en  la 
buena  sociedad,  y  por  las  personas  que  se  esmeran  en  hablai 
iu    idioma    con  pureza*      C*da  trozo  com  pone  una  lection,  y 


4  LIBROS  DE  TEXTC. 

presenta  un  asunto  diforente,  de  modo  que  hay  taruVs  ejemplot 
de  estilo  diversos  como  Ieocioncs  ouenta  la  coleccion.  Van 
prccedidas  las  lecciones  de  un  tratado  sucinto  de  la  pronunciacion 
inglesa;  las  cuatro  primeras  lecciones  tienon  la  pronunciacion 
figurada  de  cada  pnlabra  y  una  traduccion  literal  intorlinear ; 
y  como  complemento  perfecto  de  las  notas  explicativas  un 
vocabulario  de  todas  las  voces  con  sus  correspondencias  oasto- 
lianas  y  pronunciacion. 

VINGUT  y  OLLENDORFF.  El  MitoKl.ro  de  Fran- 
ces, metodo  practico  para  aprondor  la  lengua  francesa,  Begun 
el  sistema  de  Ollendorff.  Contiene  ejeroicios  pr&cticos . 
tratado  do  la  propiedad  <!o  las  voces;  compendio  do  tfraituUiea 
francesa ;  di&logos  ;  proverbios  ;  conversaciones  f amiliares  ;  vo- 
cabulario mercantil ;  modolos  de  correspondenoia  mercantil  <<n 
ambos  idiomas  ;  trozos  selectos  con  su  corrospondiente  traduo- 
oion,  etc.  Por  Francisco  J.  Vingut.  Novisima  edicion  cor* 
regida  y  notablemente  aumentada  por  Luis  F.  Mantilla. 
12mo $1.75 

Clave  de  los   mcreiclos.    13m0 t°-J)0 

91  IIVTIIjB^A.  Noelones  de  Iditfim  FranecNa  para  las 
escuelas,  por  L.  F.  Mantilla,  profosor  de  la  Lengua  y  Liter*- 
fcura  espafiola  en  la  Univcrsidad  do  Nueva  York.     lOmo. .  ,.5G  cts 

Esto  librito  tiene  por  olijeto  ensofiar  el  franc6s  a  los  nines  y 
a  las  personas  que  quieran  aprendcr,  por  medio  de  un  sisten.» 
gradual  y  practico,  las  reglas  y  poculiaridadcB  de  la  gramatiea  <1<i 
esa  lengua. 

La  Primera  Parte  so  ocupa  simplemente  de  la  pronunciacioA. 
La  Segunda  y  Tercera  se  componen  de  ejereicios  de  construccuoa 
gramatical,  para  los  cuales  se  principia  con  frases  cortas,  y  se  \a 
■ucesivamente  aumentando  el  caudal  de  palabras  y  oraoioncs. 

La  Parte  Cuarta  contiene  ejemplos  do  los  conjugacionos,  las 
cuales  ya  el  alumuo  conoce  pructicamente  por  el  uso  de  los  verboi 
ec  la*  lecoiones  antoriores. 

La  Quinta  es  una  colocoion  do  historiotas,  ouyas  frases  cst&n 
traducidus  al  pio,  para  que  con  poco  trabajo  las  ■cstudio  el 
discipulo,  y  laH  ponga  en  castellano  cuando  el' maestro  so  las  lea. 
Bueno  es  reoomendar  encarecidamente  que  se  exija  siempro  una 
traduccion  castiza,  pues  de  ese  modo  se  salva  la  puroza  do  la 
Kingua  nutiva,  y  bo  progresa  en  el  couocimienlo  de  enta. 


PUBLICADOS  POR  GEORGE   R.  LOCKWOOD.  fl 

Los  trozos  en  verso  deben  ser  aprendidos  de  momoria  come 
ejercieios  de  pronunciacion.  Son  sencillos,  y  contienen  todos  su 
moraleja. 

La  Sesta  Parte  se  compone  de  dialogos  faciles,  y  al  fin  del 
libro  se  encuentra  el  Vocabulario  para  traducir  los  trozos  en  prosa 
y  en  verso. 

— —  Libro  Primario  para  traducir  cl  francos  con 
un  Vocabulario.     16mo 50o. 

La  obrita  de  Mrs.  Barbauld  "Lessons  for  Children"  ha  sido 
traducida  en  todos  los  idiomas  enropeos,  y  la  version  francesa 
sirve  de  texto  para  la  ensefianza  de  esta  lengua  en  las  escnelas 
primarias  de  los  Estados  Unidos  porque  a  la  vez  de  ser  una 
coleccion  de  dialogos  faciles  contiene  suma  de  conocimientos 
li tiles  y  copia  de  buena  doctrina  moral  y  religiosa. 

Me  cabe  la  satisfaccion  de  presentarla  a  los  niiios  hispano- 
americanos  con  un  Vocabulario  para  la  version  a  nuestra  lengua. 

—  Elcmentos  de  Fi§iologia  c  Hijjicnc  para  las  escuelaa, 
con  grabados.     Por  L.  F.  Mantilla.     16mo 56  c. 

Todos  los  pedagogos  modernos  convienen  en  que  es  indispen- 
sable para  los  fines  de  la  educacion  que  adn  en  las  escuelaa 
primarias  se  enseiie  a  los  niiios  los  elementos  de  aquellas  cienciaa 
que  tienen  utilidad  pr&ctica  en  la  vida,  y  la  experiencia  ha 
probado  que  la  tarea  es  facil  cuando  hay  maestro  habil  y  libro  de 
texto  que  ayude  a  este  en  dicha  empresa.. 

No  habiendo  llegado  a  mis  manos  ningun  libro  elemental  ©a 
espanol  que  pudiera  servir  para  ensenar  a  nifios  los  rudimentoa 
de  tan  importante  ciencia,  emprendi  y  he  llevado  a  cabo  la 
traduction  de  una  obrita  que  por  muchos  afios  ha  serrido  de 
texto  en  las  escuelaa  publicas  de  la  ciudad  de  Nueva-York. 
Con  el  objeto  de  que  sea  aun  mas  util  que  el  original  he  agregado 
los  capitulos  sobre  asistencia  de  enfermos,  remedios  par* 
males  leves,  socorros  en  casos  de  accidentes,  antidotos  y  con- 
travenenos. 
«-— Cartera  de  la  Conversacion  en  Ingles,  con  la 
pronunciacion  figurada.     18mo 75o 

Dos  cosas  constituyen  la  especialidad  de  este  Manual :  1\  ej 
Vocabulario  que  acompana  a  cada  dialogo,  y  nue  se  refiere  al 
asunto  de  este.  2\  el  Vocabulario  con  la  Pronunciacion  fig urada 
que  se  encuentra  al  fin  del  libro. 


O  LIBROS  DE   TEXTO. 

Cart  ilia  de  Fisica  para  ninos,  con  grabados  finos,  por  I± 

F.   Mantilla  16mo 56c. 

La  lectura  de  este  librito  convence  de  que  es  may  facil  ensenai 
en  las  escuelas  primarias  los  elementos  de  las  ciencias  de  utilidad 
practica.  Ademas  es  un  Manual  precioso  para  las  personas  que  no 
hayan  recibido  educacion  cientifica,  y  sirve  de  preparacion  para  el 
estudia  del  ramo  en  los  Colegios  y  Universidades. 

Gramatiea  de  la  Lengua  eastellana,  por  la  Real  Aca- 
demia  espanola.     12mo .90c. 

Joyas  de  la  Poe§ia  espaHola.      Heredia,  Pl&oido,  Feb'pa 
Lopez  de  Brinas,  Rafael  Maria  de  Mendive,  Zorrilla.     12mo.  .75o. 

Cartilla  6  Silabario  para  los  ninos.    18mo 12«i. 


LIBKOS    PARA    LOS    INGLESES 

VINGUT  y  OLLENDORFF.     Tlie  Spanish  Teacher, 

a  practical  method  of  learning  the  Spanish  Language  on  Ollen- 
dorff's system,  containing  practical  exercises — conversational 
exercises  —  a  synopsis  of  the  Spanish  Grammar  —  dialogues  - 
proverbs — idioms — mercantile  vocabulary— correspondence,  et-j. 
Por  Francisco  J.  Vingut.     New  edition,  corrected  and  enlargod 

by  Lurs  F.  Mantilla.     12mo $1  .fflj 

The  advantages  t)ver  previous  editions  consist  in  part  in  it 
more  methodical  arrangement,  corrections  of  typographical  errors, 
enlargement  of  the  theoretical  part,  a  mercantile  vocabulary  and 
correspondence,  and  a  collection  of  dialogues,  which  altogether 
make  the  book  valuable  not  only  to  those  studying  the  language 
grammatically,  but  to  those  who  wish  to  acquire  a  practical  know- 
ledge of  it  for  mercantile  purposes. 

- —  Key  lo  the  Exercises.    12mo $0.C0 

VlftGLT.  A  Spanish  Reader  and  Translator,  being 
a  new  method  of  learning  to  translate  from  Spanish  into  English, 
and  from  English  into  Spanish  :  containing  a  complete  treatise  on 
Spanish  pronunciation  ;  a  series  of  select  anecdotes,  the  Constitu 
tion  of  the  United  States,  and  some  social  and  mercanLde  kcters, 
©to.     By  Fkanul&co  Javjek  Vingut.     12mo $1  Hi 


PUBLICADOS  POR  GEORGE   B    LOCKWOOD.  1 

VINGUT  and  I>EL  JWAR.  A  Guide  to  Spanish  and 
English  Conversation,  containing  various  lists  of  words 
in  most  general  use,  properly  classed ;  collections  of  compli- 
mentary dialogues  and  conversational  phrases  on  the  most  general 
subjects  of  life ;  proverbs  and  idioms ;  also  comparative  tables  of 
coins,  weights  and  measures.  By  Emanuel  del  Mar.  To 
which  has  been  added  a  treatise  on  Spanish  pronunciation  and 
orthography  and  the  whole  work  carefully  revised.  By  Fran- 
cisco Javier  Vingut.    12mo $0.90 

ROBERTSON.  Complete  Spanish  Course,  in  accord- 
ance with  the  Robertsonian  System  of  teaching  Modern  Lan- 
guages.    12mo. $1.00 

Josse's  Spanish  Grammar,  with  Practical  Exercises.  Re- 
vised and  enlarged  by  F.  Sales.    12mo $1.75 

MANTILLA.  Hand-Book  of  Spanish  Conversation, 

18mo TO-* 

The  practical  part  of  the  book  contains:  1st.  A  collection  oi 
short  phrases  used  in  the  daily  intercourse  of  life,  which  gives  tha 
pupil  a  copious  vocabulary  for  conversation.  2d.  A  series  oi 
useful  and  interesting  dialogues  on  every  subject  of  life.  The 
special  feature  of  this  part  is  a  series  of  vocabularies,  the  mean 
ing  of  which  is  closely  connected  with  the  subject  of  the  dialogues. 
3d.  A  collection  of  commercial  terms,  mercantile  corresponds  nee, 
banking  transactions,  etc.  Specimens  of  advertisements,  publi# 
notices,  etc.,  are  another  specialty  of  this  little  book. 

LIBROS    PARA    LOS    FRANCESES. 

VINGUT  y  OLLENDORFF.     Le  Maitre  d'Esj  ugnol. 

Nouvelle  Methode  pour  apprendre  a  lire,  ecrire  et  a  parier  la 
langue  espagnole,  d'apres  le  systeme  d'Ollendorff.  Avec  un 
supplement,  contenant  les  regies  grammatical es,  les  )  *radigmes 
des  verbes  reguliers,  irreguliers,  auxiliaires,  reflechis  e'e  imper- 
sonnels.    Par  Francisco  Javier  Vingut.     12mo $1  75 

•-—Corrige  des   Excrcices tM° 


OBRAS     MASONICAS 

DE 

ANDRES    CASSARD. 

CON      SITS      PRECIOS      EN      ORO. 

Manual  de  la  Masoneria,  6  sea  el  tejador  de  los  ritos  antigua 
eaeocea,  francea  y  de  adopciort  Contiene  las  decoracionea, 
trajes,  marchas,  bat*.',  aperturas,  ovaciones:  los  verdaderoa 
catecismos  del  rito  escoces :  clausuras,  discursos  y  laminas  para 
cada  gr'.'r  plantillas  para  certificados,  dimisiones,  diplomas, 
breves,  patentes,  &. :  peticiones  para  formaciones  de  logias, 
grandes  logias,  &. :  instalaciones  de  las  mismas:  exequias  fune- 
bres,  con  su  discurso :  banquetes,  con  un  discurso  analogo  al 
objeto,  y  otro,  que  explica  la  significacion  de  la  forma  que  lleva 
la  mesa  en  las  fiestas  del  orden,  acompafiado  de  una  lamina : 
diacursos  eacogidos  sobre  el  origen  y  progreao  de  la  Masoneria : 
inmortalidad  del  alma,  beneficencia,  igualdad,  tolerancia,  frater- 
nidad,  fuerza  y  union :  tablas  misticas :  un  diccionario  razonado 
de  terminos  y  expresiones  masonicas  :  ritual  del  bautismo  maso- 
nico,  con  un  discurso :  modo  de  enjuiciar  en  masoneria :  estatu* 
tos  generates  de  la  orden:  datos  cronologicos  sobre  los  sucesos  maa 
importantes  de  la  masoneria  desde  antes  de  Jesu-Cristo:  estatu- 
toa  y  regulacionea  del  mismo  :  grandes  constituciones  de  1762  y 
1786:  explicacion  de  los  cabaliaticos :  generacion  universal  de 
todoa  loa  seres,  &.:  miaterioa  antiguoa:  cadena  mistica,  &.,  &.,  &. 
t  yoIs.  8vo $7.00 


EHncupnta  anos  de  la  vida  de  Andres  Cassard.  Esta  interesante 
c->ra  contiene  todos  los  documentos  que  comprueban  loa 
Bervicios  masonicos  prestados  por  Andres  Cassard,  desde  su 
iniciacion  en  la  orden  en  1853.  Consta  de  unas  300  paginas 
esta  magnificamente  inipresa  y  encuadernada  con  filetesi  dora- 
dos, y  lleva  en  la  portada  el  retrato  de  Cassard,  tornado  ultima- 

,        inente  y  grabado  en  acero.     8vo $3.00 

Espejo  Masonic o.  Los  cuatio  tomos  de  esta  interesante 
publicacion,  la  £nica  en  su  especie  en  el  idioma  castellano, 
empastados  en  muselina $12  00 

Manual  de  la  Estrella  del  Oriente.  Esta  interesante  obrita  esta 
arreglada,  expresamente,  para  el  uso  de  los  Diputados  y  para 
instruir  a  los  que  reciban  el  grado.  Empastada  lujosamente,  y 
con  un  Diploma  para  seflora  6  caballero,  segun  se  desee ..  $2  50 
Sin  Diploma $1  50 

t>mstituciones,  Estatutos  y  Reglamentos  de  1762  y  1786. 
Encuadernados  en  muselina  rosada $2  50 

Estatutos  Generales  de  la  Masonsria  de  Napol«s,  1820.  Encua- 
dernado 65 

Citecismos  de  los  Tres  Grados  Simbolicos.     Los  tres  cuaderuoa 

sueltos 25 

Por  docena  sueltos $2  50 

Diplomas  de  Maestro,  magnificamente  grabad«w».  6.  impresos 

en  buen  pergamino,  en  tres  idiomas  y  con  «u  crbierta. ..  2  50 

44     "     en  on  idioma 1  SO 


